TEXT: Frog God 
  Games
  
  1
  Quests of Doom=
  Quests of Doom
  CEO
  Bill Webb
  Creative Director: Swords & Wizardry
  Matthew J. Finch
  Creative Director: Pathfinder
  Greg A. Vaughan
  Art Director
  Charles A. Wright
  Mr. Wolf
  Skeeter Green
  Shadow Frog
  James Redmon
  Frog God 
  Games
  FROG GOD GAMES IS
  © 2015 Frog God Games LLC, all rights reserved. 
  Product Identity: The following items are hereby identified as Frog God 
  Games LLC’s Product Identity, as defined in the Open Game License version 
  1.0a, Section 1(e), and are not Open Game Content: product and product 
  line names, logos and identifying marks including trade dress; artifacts; 
  creatures; characters; stories, storylines, plots, thematic elements, dialogue, 
  incidents, language, artwork, symbols, designs, depictions, likenesses, formats, 
  poses, concepts, themes and graphic, photographic and other visual or audio 
  representations; names and descriptions of characters, spells, enchantments, 
  personalities, teams, personas, likenesses and special abilities; places, locations, 
  environments, creatures, equipment, magical or supernatural abilities or effects, 
  logos, symbols, or graphic designs; and any other trademark or registered 
  trademark clearly identified as Product Identity. Previously released Open Game 
  Content is excluded from the above list.
  Authors: Casey W. Christofferson, J. Collura, Michael Curtis,  
  Matt Finch, Scott Greene, Ed Greenwood, Clark Peterson,  
  James M. Ward, Bill Webb, Skip Williams, Steven Winter
  Developer: Matt Finch, Bill Webb
  Editors: Jeff Harkness, James Redmon
  Layout ,Typesetting, Cover Design: Charles A. Wright
  Cover Art: Rowena Aitken 
  Cartography: Robert Altbauer, Ed Bourelle, Conan Venus
  Interior Art: Chris McFann, Andrew DeFlice, Brian LeBlanc
  
  2
  Quests of Doom=
  Table of Contents
  Credits .................................................................................................................p. 1
  Bugs & Blobs
  Noble Rot by J. Collura .......................................................................................... p. 4
  Of Ants & Men by Bill Webb .................................................................................. p. 15
  Hidden Oasis by Matt Finch & Bill Webb ...................................................................p. 24
  Demons & Devils
  Sorcerer’s Citadel by Bill Webb & Clark Peterson ......................................................... p. 39
  Ra’s Evil Grin by Bill Webb & Clark Peterson  ............................................................p. 48
  Pit of Despair by Bill Webb & Clark Peterson ............................................................. p. 56
  Giants & Dragons
  The Dead From Above by Michael Curtis ....................................................................p. 64
  Dread Dragon Temple by James M. Ward ...................................................................p. 80
  Emeralds of Highfang by Ed Greenwood ..................................................................... p. 91
  Lycanthropes & Elementals
  Bad Moon Rising by Steven Winter .........................................................................p. 108
  Death in Dyrgalas by Skip Williams ......................................................................... p. 121
  The Darkening of Namjan Forest by Michael Curtis ......................................................p. 133
  Men & Monstrosities
  Deep in the Vale by James M. Ward ......................................................................... p. 151
  Irtep’s Dish by Casey W. Christofferson ...................................................................p. 162
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass by Matt Finch .....................................................................p. 184
  Vampires & Liches
  Sewers of the Underguild by Casey W. Christofferson & Bill Webb  .............................. p. 209
  Pyramid of Amra by Casey W. Christofferson & Bill Webb  ........................................ p. 220
  The Isle of Eliphaz by Casey W. Christofferson & Bill Webb  .......................................p. 234
  Appendix ........................................................................................................... p. 244
  Legal Appendix .................................................................................................... p. 253
  
  3
  Bugs
  &
  Blobs
  
  4
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  Introduction
  The Noble Rot is a location-based adventure for 4–6 characters of levels 
  5–8. This adventure may be played in one or two sessions of reasonable 
  length. It is a straightforward haunted house style adventure that is ready 
  for exploration and adventure. 
  The adventure revolves around Le Chateau Gluant, a vineyard and 
  winery of repute. Vintages of its famous white (chardonnay) and red blend 
  (cabernet sauvignon) are sought throughout the land and beyond. Some 
  vintages can cost up to 200gp per bottle. A case (12 bottles) of the wine in 
  pristine condition can fetch up to 1500gp. Unfortunately, the winery fell 
  upon dark days and the wine has not flowed from its prized cellars for a 
  few years. 
  Approximately five years ago, the head winemaker Malcolm Roth 
  hired Tobias Suey to be an apprentice. Unfortunately for Roth, Suey was 
  a member of the Cultus Limus (Cult of the Ooze). The Cultus Limus 
  makes sacrifices to their demonic mistress Lumastzu in her faceless 
  form. Lumastzu, or “she who erases,” is an ancient demoness who once 
  served Jubilex the Faceless Lord before his disappearance and rumored 
  imprisonment millennia ago. Lumastzu rose from Jubilex’s shadow 
  as a nascent demon lord in her own right, a demoness who preys upon 
  travelers by drinking their blood, the cause of nightmares, pestilence, 
  infestation of pure water, and a bringer of disease, sickness and death. Her 
  worshipped form in Cultus Limus is a gigantic, vaguely anthropomorphic 
  ooze. The Cult of Jubilex (such as it is) despises worshippers of Lumastzu 
  and considers them traitors and their patroness a faithless betrayer, but the 
  Masters of the Ooze are so few and far between that they are not capable 
  of mounting any organized resistance against the ooze cult usurping much 
  of their lord’s station.
  Suey turned the field hands that tended the vines against the winemaker. 
  Then the new cult turned their attention to the Gluant family. Later, the 
  Cultus Limus members turned upon each other. With each sacrifice to the 
  ooze, Suey’s power grew. That is until no one but Suey was left. 
  The whim of demons is fickle. As a result, Suey was blighted and 
  corrupted for his work. He now lurks deep in the cellars under the chateau 
  as an ooze demon. However, his handiwork remains. The chateau is now 
  the abode of the undead former residents and workers. Also slimes, molds, 
  fungi and other foulness rot in the fields, buildings and cellars. The riches 
  of the Gluant family remain undisturbed as many would-be thieves and 
  robbers found a quick end at the hands of the current residents. Also, cases 
  of wine remain undisturbed and awaiting plunder.
  The Noble Rot refers to a few factors in this adventure. The first is the 
  rot that befell the Gluant family in the form of the Cultus Limus. Another 
  is an actual noble rot disease that may aid the party in overcoming the 
  challenges posed. However, the phrase noble rot also refers to the real 
  world helpful/harmful gray fungus Boytris cinerea. This helpful fungus 
  in the right conditions creates world-class dessert wines such as French 
  sauternes. In the wrong conditions, however, it destroys the grapes and is 
  known as gray rot. 
  Notes for the Referee
  This adventure is a straightforward, location-based adventure. Each 
  location operates fairly independently of the others. The reason is that the 
  slime in one area is not going to trigger the zombies in another to attack. 
  In essence, this is a good adventure for a new Referee as the encounters 
  lack interdependence.
  However, that is not to say that the adventure is not FUN! The Referee 
  is strongly recommended to make this adventure his or her own. For 
  example, a number of rooms in the upper Chateau are available for the 
  Referee to script. Also a bit of knowledge of vinification is recommended 
  but also highly encouraged! For those of legal age, sampling some of the 
  types of wines discussed may bring a better sense to the adventure. Also, 
  you may never look at certain wines the same way after the Crushing 
  Room encounter. 
  The largest recommendation is to make this adventure your own. Since 
  the 1970s, Referees have been told to read the entire adventure and make 
  it your own. However, for almost 40 years, Referees have failed to do 
  that very thing. So before you start rolling d20s, put the dice down, grab 
  a goblet of wine (or grape juice as appropriate) and read this adventure. 
  Thereafter, make notes, change names and take ownership. It may be 
  that instead of a winery, the chateau specialized in producing herbalist 
  concoctions or poisons for an assassin’s guild. Whichever way you play 
  it, there are no wrong choices. 
  Adventure Background
  This adventure begins when the party enters the vicinity of Le 
  Chateau Gluant. The Chateau can be placed in any remote area. 
  Obviously, a small estate full of ooze and undead is unlikely to be 
  right down the river from a legally minded society. Thus a remote 
  area is necessary. The climate and geography can be any temperate 
  clime in the Referee’s home campaign. It would not be logical to 
  place a vineyard in an icy fjord or on a tropical island. A remote 
  hillside location may be ideal. In the Lost Lands campaign setting, 
  Le Chateau Gluant lies at the western edge of the County of Coutaine, 
  just outside the Elderwood and near the southern slopes of the Broken 
  Mountains.
  In some campaigns, the characters may desperately be seeking money 
  (all characters are always seeking money, please note the use of the 
  word “desperately”). The liquid treasure in the cellars may be the type 
  of treasure the Referee would like. What the author means by this is that 
  sometimes it is good to have goods that are not fungible so the Referee has 
  more control over the cash flow of a party.
  The adventure has three areas. The first area is a low wall and the 
  former vineyard itself. This includes a few outer buildings where the 
  former workers used to live and work. The second area is the chateau 
  itself. This is a fairly large estate with three levels. The first level is the 
  main level. The front entrance enters into the main level. An upstairs level 
  is where the Gluant family used to live. The rear entrance is where the 
  grapes would be brought into the building. This leads to the cellars, which 
  are a cave system that expands into the bedrock below the chateau. Deep 
  in the caves is the lair of Suey, the ooze demon.
  Corruption and evil permeate the entire area. As a result any detection 
  spells or devices always show evil. Thus, such mechanisms are worthless 
  within the walls of the chateau.
  The weather is up to the Referee. However, it would be very appropriate 
  for the chateau to be experiencing a mild storm with random lightning 
  strikes. Visiting the chateau in the evening or at night would also work to 
  increase the ambiance of this haunted house.
  The Noble Rot
  By J. Collura
  
  5
  Noble Rot
  Local knowledge of the chateau is fairly sparse. It is well known that 
  for some time the chateau has not been producing its famous vintages. 
  It is also rumored that something vile befell the chateau. The sidebar 
  Rumor Table functions as an ability check with the more difficult pieces 
  of information to find higher in the table. This may be used in a number of 
  ways. One way is that the party knows about the chateau before traveling 
  to it. They may ask local barmaids or even do research in a local guild. 
  For example, if a merchant’s guild hired the party, a savvy character may 
  want to see the accounting records for the chateau to determine when it 
  fell. Doing so may cause a conversation with the clerk who may have 
  further information.
  Encounter Listing
  Each encounter is listed with a Referee description. This is not to 
  be read aloud to the players. It lists the bare essentials for running the 
  adventure with a few items of flavor. It is highly recommended that the 
  Referee make the adventure his own with his own style and choices.
  Certain encounters note additional items that may be found by searching 
  and exploration. The term “search” is used for items that require some 
  party action. Finding some items might require opening a box, whiles 
  others might be hidden behind a bookcase (just be sure to put the candle 
  back). “Fine” are very hard-to-find items or descriptions noticed only by 
  the most observant characters. These do not require Sherlock Holmes, 
  but they do require more than a basic search. It is suggested that they be 
  used with intelligent playing or inquisitive characters instead of a dice 
  roll. However, that is the Referee’s choice. Not every encounter has these 
  further descriptions, only those that require them. It is up to the Referee to 
  determine how difficult it is to find these items.
  Following the description is the section on monsters. This section 
  includes the statistics for the encounter.
  Adventure Hooks
  The most obvious way to begin the adventure is also the easiest: The 
  party happens to find the chateau. Perhaps it is a respite during a storm. 
  Maybe the characters are familiar with the wines of Chateau Gluant and 
  want to explore the ruins for a bottle. However, this may not work for 
  every campaign. Thus, a few hooks are provided to get the characters into 
  the area where the Referee has placed the chateau. 
  The first is that someone hires the party to recover a case of Chateau 
  Gluant. This could be a merchant guild looking to make a small pile of 
  gold. It could also be a benefactor whom the party has worked with in the 
  past and owe a favor. 
  Another hook is that the party hears a tragic story of someone who 
  visited the chateau and was never seen again. This could be a farmer’s wife 
  who makes it to a walled town and is pleading passers-by for assistance 
  from whatever befell her husband. Another option is that a princeling and 
  his retainers are missing. Maybe a distant relative of one of the characters 
  goes missing and they must undertake a quest to assist their friend.
  A third hook is that the party is on the run from the law, a local band 
  of thugs, the assassin’s guild or some other underworld element and 
  decide to lie low in a remote area. This hook is particularly promising for 
  unsavory parties. The chateau with its reputation for being haunted is a 
  good diversion.
  A final hook is a divine inspiration. Perhaps the party’s cleric or similar 
  holy person has a vision of abject horror with an inkling of where to look. 
  Another option is that a cleric at a local temple has the vision but lacks the 
  courage, stamina or ability to do something about it. 
  Rumors
  1. The chateau has been abandoned for at least 3 years.
  2. The chateau produced wines for more than 200 years.
  3. The red and white wines the chateau produced are equally 
  prized.
  4. The chateau sourced its oak barrels from a cooper who lived 
  on property.
  5. The chateau is the hangout of a gang of highwaymen (False).
  6. Beware the vines around the chateau. Some of them move 
  like a snake.
  7. The family that owned the chateau was very wealthy.
  8. The Gluant family that owned the chateau was demon 
  worshippers (False).
  9. The undead walk the night around the chateau.
  10. Under no circumstance do you open the old crushing tank.
  11. Bring fire and oil with you. The dead and muck are alive 
  but fear fire.
  12. Sulfur (brimstone) is a good way to kill rot.
  13. Some winemakers used sulfur to kill rot and preserve wine.
  14. If you go to the chateau take a cleric who can turn away the 
  unliving.
  15. Deep beneath the chateau are the cellars where the most 
  prized wines are stored.
  16. A cult of demon worshippers caused the downfall of the 
  chateau.
  17. The Glaunt family collected silverwork and kept it hidden 
  in their quarters.
  18. A cult of demon worshippers worshipped in the caves below 
  the chateau.
  19. The Glaunt family kept a djinn in a wine bottle (False).
  20. A secret entrance to the caverns is accessible from the upper 
  level. It is a ladder built into the walls.
  21. If you find sulfur, be sure to not mix it with water. That 
  makes a witch’s brew that can melt anything.
  22. A cult called the Cultus Limus once existed. The fall of the 
  chateau appears to be their handiwork.
  The Noble Rot Disease
  Throughout the adventure, the characters come into contact 
  with various forms of winemaking. This includes the vines, the 
  barn, the crushing facility, the wine itself, etc. All of these areas 
  and indeed the entire chateau are overrun with the gray fungus that 
  causes the disease noble rot. The Referee is encouraged to use the 
  noble rot disease as a plot device and perhaps a “white knight” 
  to assist the characters if necessary. There are no descriptions 
  provided in the adventure of where or when the characters should 
  check for succumbing to the disease. However, a good rule 
  of thumb would be each hour or two a character remain within 
  the walls around the chateau. The check is a simple save. If the 
  Referee feels that the characters need a boost, then add –1 penalty 
  each time until the character succumbs. 
  Once a character succumbs to the disease, he loses 1d3 points 
  of constitution for 12+2d6 hours. However the character gains 1d6 
  points of a prime attribute of their class (other than constitution) 
  for the same period of time. 
  The signs of the disease are a gray pallor to the skin, profuse 
  sweating and terrible body odor. Also, everything the character 
  tastes, including water, is exceedingly sweet for the duration of 
  the disease. Fortunately for the party, few, if any, of the encounters 
  include monsters that can “smell them coming.” The disease is not 
  contagious from person to person. It can be acquired only by being 
  in contact with the gray fungus.
  There is no mundane cure other than to let the disease run its 
  course. Magical cures work as normal. Once the disease is ended 
  by magical means or by the passage of time, the character cannot 
  reacquire the disease. Hence, intuitive and enterprising characters 
  cannot expect to make a noble rot farm or to bottle the disease.
  
  6
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  
  7
  Noble Rot
  Whatever the hook, be mindful of what motivates your players. Some 
  players enjoy the promise of roleplay, some the promise of combat and 
  frankly some the loot. Use those desires to your advantage and sell the 
  promise of an adventure. Follow up with the surprises of The Noble Rot.
  The Vineyard
  Area A: Outer Wall and Entrance
  The outer wall is a simple cobblestone wall that surrounds the entire estate 
  and vineyard. It is a mere four feet high and easily climbable at any location. 
  The wall has fallen into disrepair, and loose stones can be found throughout the 
  wall. In a few locations, the wall has collapsed completely. A main entrance has 
  a rusted signpost that proclaims “Chateau du Gluant — Vin Superior.” Many 
  of the letters in the sign have fallen to the ground or are missing. A former side 
  entrance has a wooden gate. The gate is long gone and all that remains are two 
  rusty hinges. If anyone attempts to climb the wall, there is a chance (1–2 on a 
  1d6) that the wall falls on the climber for 1d4 points of damage.   
  Search: Upon a reasonable search, a small rune marking can be found. 
  Someone familiar with dwarven runes or who has an adequate knowledge 
  notes that it signifies safe passage. This is at a 20ft section of the wall that 
  will not fall over.
  Area B: The Living Vines 
  The area within the low wall originally held orderly rows of vines. To 
  the west were vines with different varieties of red (or black berries in 
  the parlance of winemakers). This included cabernet sauvignon, merlot, 
  cabernet franc and petite verdot. To the east were vines with different 
  varieties of white. These vines were exclusively chardonnay.
  Today, the vineyard is one amorphous mass of twisted vines. What 
  once was hand-pruned vines and cleared gravelly rows is now a mass of 
  twisted vines. The vines themselves no longer produce the noble varietals. 
  Instead, the berries are putrid green. Some are shriveled while others are 
  overlarge. Instead of the sweet juice of what Galileo called captured or 
  trapped sunshine, the berries now have whitish pus. 
  The chateau and its few surrounding buildings cannot be accessed 
  except through the mass of vines. The low wall contains the vines within 
  the property. However, the vines rise up to 15ft in the air. 
  To bypass the vines requires either magic or traditional hacking. A sickly 
  slimy residue coats most of the vines, so clearing them with traditional fire 
  does not work. Instead, hacking through the vines is proportional to the 
  Strength of the character. The ratio is 1ft per one point of strength per 
  five minutes. Thus, a Strength 10 character may hack through 10ft in five 
  minutes. The width of such an endeavor is the width of the character. 
  Magical means such as a fireball or another similar spell also clear the 
  vines. How this affects the vineyard is up to the Referee. It should be 
  remembered though that with the residue it should be virtually impossible 
  to burn down the vineyard. Plus, it would likely burn down the chateau 
  and spell a quick end to the adventure
  Fine: Exceptional eyes may find the remains of former adventurers 
  who attempted to traverse the vineyard. Rusty weapons or the odd dented 
  helm may be found within the vineyard, but a sack of gems worth 115gp 
  and a ring of protection +1 can also be discovered.
  Monster: At varying points throughout the vineyard are 3 assassin 
  vines. The vines attempt to constrict the first character to make contact 
  with it. Thereafter, it drags the character toward its maw to consume him. 
  If the party is so inclined, beneath the maw is a large digestive sac of the 
  assassin vines. Within this sac are the skeletal remains of a number of 
  humanoids. Also within are 50gp and a +1 long sword.
  Assassin Vine (3): HD 7; HP 35; AC 5[14]; Atk vine (1d6+1); 
  Move 1; Save 9; AL N; CL/XP 8/800; Special: animate plants 
  30ft range to immobilize prey (save avoids). (Monstrosities 23)
  Area C: The Barn
  The barn is a rickety two-story wooden structure with no windows. The 
  roof of the barn is thick with a sickly green moss. The moss is actually 
  a mass of green slime. The green slime cannot harm the party from the 
  ground — unless the barn itself collapses.
  Green Slime: Any metal or organic substance it touches begins to turn 
  to green slime (save avoids). It can be killed with fire or extreme cold, 
  and the transformation process can be arrested by the use of cure disease.
  A single set of sliding barn doors is chained together with a fairly 
  simple lock (Open Lock +10%). Written in Common in blood (which may 
  be difficult to see at night) are the words “DO NOT OPEN.” 
  The inside of the barn housed the tools and carts used in the vineyard. 
  During the chateau’s fall, some of the fortunate field hands who escaped 
  used the tools to fend off attack and carted away what they could. Thus, 
  the barn was left empty except for two draft horses. The Cultus Limus 
  found that undead wandering about were a nuisance, so they rounded up 8 
  slimy zombies and caged them within the barn. 
  Zombie, Slimy (8): HD 2; HP 10x2, 8, 11, 14x2, 15; AC 8[11]; Atk 
  strike (1d8 plus 1d6 acid); Move 6; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; 
  Special: acid, immune to sleep and charm.
  The slimy zombies are mostly human, but include the 2 slimy riding 
  horse zombies. The zombies have not fed in years and are fairly lethargic 
  at first. However, the prospect of fresh meat quickly rouses them.
  Zombie, Slimy Riding Horse (2): HD 2; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d2 
  plus 1d6 acid); Move 12; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: 
  acid, immune to sleep and charm.
  If the inevitable fight takes place in a cleared area outside the barn, it 
  is unlikely that a miss damages the barn. However, inside the barn is a 
  different story. Each miss with a weapon has a chance of collapsing the 
  barn. The Referee should count any roll of 5 or below on a to-hit roll as 
  striking the barn. A roll of 1 is counted as a critical strike on the barn. 
  The barn collapses once it takes 20 points of damage, doing 3d6 points 
  of damage to those inside. This also allows the green slime to fall onto 
  the combatants (1-in-6 chance). The Referee should alternate between the 
  zombies and the characters on who is hit. Once it hits a combatant, the 
  slime is located at that position as the combatant is covered in the quick-
  dissolving slime. Thereafter, the green slime engages whoever is closest.
  Search: A search of the barn finds a small crate in the corner of a former stall. 
  In the crate are three vintages of the Chateau Gluant red blend. The bottles have 
  the famous red wax seal with the Gluant crest (the head of an eagle) emblazoned 
  in wax. Unfortunately, two are spoiled. One is obviously spoiled with a large 
  crack down the side of the neck. One is not noticeably spoiled as the crack 
  is near the red seal. To the right buyer in a nearby city such as Cantelburgh 
  or Tourse, the unspoiled wine is worth up to 125gp. Each bottle found in this 
  adventure is an opportunity for the Referee to make a side adventure. Perhaps 
  the party sells the spoiled wine to an unsavory wine merchant. When the wine 
  merchant discovers his error, he sends some ruffians to take back his money 
  (or worse). The author suggests having the ruffians appear at the worst possible 
  time, such as when the party feels safe in an inn, when meeting with an important 
  contact or in the early part of a dungeon campaign. It is also recommended that 
  in certain circumstances the wine merchant (perhaps a wererat wine merchant) 
  accompany his (wererat) retainers. The zombies and green slime do not have 
  any treasure. One of the humanoid zombies has the key to the lock for the 
  Cooper house and workshop (Area D).
  Area D: The Cooper House and Workshop
  This modest three-room house and workshop is near the stable. It was 
  the former home of the Glaunt family cooper. This was an important 
  position in the running of the winery. The Gluants used fine oak from the 
  nearby Elderwood to make nearly perfect oak barrels to age their wines. 
  While most wines in the area or country would not be aged, the Gluants 
  learned techniques to control oxidation that would normally ruin the wine. 
  A key component of these techniques involved the master cooper and his 
  protégés. In fact, some scholars would argue that the key to the wine was 
  not just the terroir of the Gluant winery, but the fine oak that aged the wine 
  for one (white wine) to three (red wine) years.
  But all that is in the past as the master cooper was one of the first 
  
  8
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  sacrificed to the demon after an apprentice named Rall betrayed him. This 
  deceit led to the deaths of the master cooper and his family. Rall was 
  richly rewarded for his treachery; Suey slit his throat and practiced his 
  powers by raising Rall as a ghoul. 
  Like the zombies in Area C, Rall was locked in the cooper’s house and 
  workshop. However, unlike the zombies located there, no grim warning is 
  found outside the house.
  The house has a double-door entrance with a normal lock. The key for 
  this lock is on one of the workers who was slain and rose as a zombie 
  in Area C. The door is below an overhang that functions as a porch. 
  Shuttered windows are adjacent to the door. The shutters are effectively 
  glued shut and stuck. It takes an Open Doors check to open. 
  The door opens into the cooper’s workshop. The workshop was 
  ransacked before Rall was locked up, but a few metal tools, an anvil and 
  a brazier remain. Hanging from the ceiling are many loops of metal that 
  the master cooper used to form his barrels. In one end is a debris pile of 
  dust and old wood. Making their home in the debris pile is a nest of 3 
  giant rats carrying the Red Plague. Upon a successful strike the target 
  must make a save or suffer from Red Plague. The incubation period is 1d4 
  days. Thereafter the victim suffers chills, occasional vomiting and their 
  eyes begin to bleed. Each day the disease is not successfully treated, the 
  target loses 1 point of constitution until dead. If treated, it takes three days 
  of bed rest to regain the points of constitution.
  Rall, Ghoul: HD 2; HP 12; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws (1d3 plus 
  paralysis), bite (1d4 plus paralysis); Move 9; Save 16; AL C; 
  CL/XP 3/60; Special: immune to sleep and charm, paralysis 
  for 3d6 turns (save avoids).
  Rat, Giant Red Plague (3): HD 1d4hp; HP 2x2, 3; AC 7[12]; Atk 
  bite (1d3 plus disease); Move 12; Save 18; AL N; CL/XP B/10; 
  Special: Red Plague (in 1d4 days, lose 1 point of constitution 
  per day until dead, save avoids).
  Adjacent to the cooper’s workshop is the family room where the cooper 
  lived. All of the furniture is smashed to bits and pieces. Rall in his undead 
  rage broke it apart when he realized he was trapped. A single set of drawers 
  propped against one of the walls has survived. 
  A half open door at the back of the building leads into the family room. 
  In this room is a moldy down mattress and a single chair. A misshapen 
  lump on the bed lies below a torn blanket. This is the rotting corpse of 
  one of the cooper’s adult sons. Rall is actually beneath the bed. Unless the 
  party is impressively stealthy, he hears their approach and hides beneath 
  the bed. Whenever the characters are within a few feet of the bed, Rall 
  springs from beneath the bed and unceremoniously dumps the mattress 
  and corpse on the unsuspecting characters. This gives Rall a 1-4 on d6 
  chance of surprise.
  Search: Beneath the refuse pile in the workshop is a small sack of 
  copper coins (20cp). However, a wise character may deduce that these 
  are actually very rare coins that may be sold to the right buyer for 100gp 
  each! In the set of drawers in the family room are a silver mirror and a 
  leaky flask of oil.
  Fine: The cooper was stingy man in life and hoarded his earnings. 
  He ritually stuffed his earnings in a secret alcove in the wall between 
  his bedroom and the workshop. A very large sack containing 196gp is 
  between the boards.
  Area E: The Well
  Outside the chateau is a circular stone well. It has no bucket or pulley 
  system. Like every adventure that mentions a well, this well is not what 
  it seems. A faint residue of magic around the well is easily detected. The 
  well is approximately 40ft deep and ends in a pool of crystalline water. 
  If magical or other light is used, something can be seen twinkling at the 
  bottom of the well. The well itself is very slippery, as a clear slimy residue 
  coats the walls. This makes any climb very difficult. Of course a fall into 
  shallow water is perilous (1d6 points of damage per 10ft). 
  
  9
  Noble Rot
  If the party makes it to the bottom, they find that a natural spring feeds 
  the well. At the bottom is a tin cup with no discernable value that was 
  dropped some time ago. A former group of adventurers cleansed the well 
  with magic so it provides fresh water. 
  This encounter is a type of overeager character trap. These are fun to 
  place so that party is not encouraged to seek and destroy their entire way 
  through your adventure!
   
  Area F: The Huts
  Farther from the chateau are a series of huts where the field workers 
  and chateau staff lived. Originally, these were little plots with an area for 
  domesticated animals and gardens. The vines have taken over the entire 
  area, leaving just a few huts still standing.
  Within the huts are meager possessions that are unlikely to interest any 
  character. However, it is within the Referee’s discretion to flesh out these 
  areas and include additional monsters and traps.
  Level One — Chateau Main Floor
  Area 1-A: Entry
  The chateau itself looks like a replica of a castle. It is two stories tall 
  and has small arrow slit-like windows on all sides. Metal bars in each 
  window make entry nearly impossible for all but the smallest character. 
  Small minarets and faux stone towers stand at each end. These towers do 
  not serve any purpose other than decoration. 
  A gargoyle oversees the chateau’s entrance. It is particularly hard to 
  spot as a number of crude gothic gargoyles stand along the roofline. The 
  gargoyle occasionally flies off during the night to stalk prey in the nearby 
  forest. However, it spends most of its time waiting for tasty halflings. If 
  the party includes a halfling, the gargoyle directs nearly all of its attacks 
  against the halfling, even attempting to fly off with such a tasty morsel. 
  The gargoyle has no treasure; thus, a jaunt up to the roof is an exercise in 
  futility.
   The main entrance into the chateau is up a set of wide stone stairs. A 
  broken statue of a griffon stands on each side of the stairs. Filth and muck 
  adorn the defaced statues. The double oaken doors are open but one is 
  stuck, requiring an Open Door check to pry open. The other door swings 
  out easily. The Referee is encouraged to play this where the character first 
  tries to open the stuck door. 
  Beyond the door is a two-story foyer with a curved staircase leading 
  to the upper level. The staircase is rotten. Any character weighing more 
  than 200 pounds has a 1-in-4 chance of crashing through the staircase to 
  the ground below for 1d4 points of damage. If three or more characters 
  (or the same one three times) fall through the staircase, the entire thing 
  collapses, causing 2d6 points of damage to the character and anyone else 
  on the stairs. 
  Broken arrows, an axe handle and scorch marks can be found, evidence 
  of combat that occurred here. Master Glaunt made his last stand here 
  before being dragged off to the sacrificial pit. On either side of the entrance 
  are double doors. One leads to the parlor (Area 1-B) and the other to the 
  Ballroom (Area 1-D). 
  Gargoyle: HD 4; HP 24; AC 5[14]; Atk 2 claws (1d3), bite 
  (1d4), horn (1d6); Move 9 (fly 15); Save 13; AL C: CL/XP 
  6/400; Special: +1 or better weapons to hit, fly.
  Search: Beneath the stairs (or at least until the stairs collapse), is a 
  small alcove where the porter made his home. The porter pilfered two 
  bottles of the white Chateau Glaunt wine. Both are in good condition 
  (65gp each to the right buyer). 
  Area 1-B: Parlor
  Adjacent to the foyer, the parlor is in fairly good shape. The room 
  contains long couches, a large marble bar area and numerous stuffed 
  animals including a buffalo head, a moose head, a full brown bear, rabbits, 
  a woodchuck and a beaver. This was a tasting room of sorts for the Glaunts. 
  They would entertain merchants and passing aristocracy here. The object 
  of Glaunt’s hunts would be the usual and boring conversation pieces.
  A fireplace is along one wall. The fireplace is sooty from where one of 
  the less intelligent cult members attempted to burn a stuffed lynx for heat, 
  which resulted in a quick pile of lynx ash. 
  Within this ash is a gray ooze. The ooze quivers slightly when the party 
  enters the room. This causes the ash pile to obviously move. Of course, 
  woe to any character who thinks sticking his weapon in the ash is a good 
  idea.
  Grey Ooze: HD 3; HP 15; AC 8[11]; Atk strike (2d6); Move 1; 
  Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: acid (metal exposed 
  must save or be destroyed), immune to spells, heat, cold, 
  and blunt weapons.
  Fine: Within the stuffed bear’s head cavity are a couple of large rubies 
  (75gp each) that Master Glaunt kept in case of emergency. 
  Area 1-C: Kitchen
  Unlike most of the chateau, the kitchen saw service for many 
  months after the fall of the Gaunt family. The Cultus Limus used the 
  kitchen as a commissary and meeting place. A number of outdoor 
  wooden tables and benches are wedged into the room. The oven 
  itself is fairly clean. The room was cleared of any cleavers, knives or 
  means of making fire.
  On one end of the kitchen is a crude dumbwaiter. It is rather large with 
  a 5ft-by-2ft opening. In front of the opening is a loose door on a hinge. 
  Next to the door is another opening with the rudimentary pulley system. 
  The pulley is currently mucked over, and the rope is slick with slime. The 
  shaft goes up a floor to the master’s quarters (Area 2-A). The platform 
  is currently between floors. It takes either some strength (Open Doors 
  check) or cunning (Delicate Tasks/Traps check) to make the dumbwaiter 
  operational.
  If the characters dislodge the platform, it quickly comes crashing down 
  and unloads a gelatinous cube that was trapped in the shaft by the cult. 
  The cube presses through the opening like a gelatin mold forced through 
  a small rectangular frame before bouncing back to its larger shape. To the 
  untrained eye, it appears as a floating kobold skeleton and a small brass 
  crown (10gp).
  Gelatinous Cube: HD 4; HP 20; AC 8[11]; Atk slam (2d4); 
  Move 6; Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: immune to 
  lightning and cold, paralysis for 6 turns (save avoids).
  Area 1-D: Ballroom
  The ballroom was once an astounding architectural marvel. The 
  entirely wooden structure from the floorboards to the tall ceiling was 
  made without the use of a single nail, touch of cement or use of stone. It 
  was appropriately made of fine oak and stained in a rich dark brown hue. 
  A cutting of the Glaunts still stands proudly over a large marble fireplace. 
  The entire ballroom cost the Glaunts a small fortune. 
  The ballroom has of course seen better days. The arrow slit windows 
  to the outside are boarded up with piles of refuse to keep the boards from 
  falling over. The remains of the furniture are thrown about the room. Like 
  most of the chateau, a fine patina of dust is everywhere. In the center of the 
  room, some cultist thought it would be a good idea to burn the furniture 
  as a bonfire. 
  Search: Disturbing the large bonfire also disturbs a nest of 6 giant Red 
  Plague rats that make the pile their home. 
  Rat, Giant Red Plague (6): HD 1d4hp; HP 2x2, 3x3, 4; AC 7[12]; 
  Atk bite (1d3 plus disease); Move 12; Save 18; AL N; CL/
  XP B/10; Special: Red Plague (in 1d4 days, lose 1 point of 
  constitution per day until dead, save avoids).
  Fine: A silver locket (20gp) is under an overturned table. The locket 
  has a silhouette of the winemaker and his wife.
  
  10
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  
  11
  Noble Rot
   Area 1-E: Winemaker’s Quarters
  Near the stairs to the cellar level are the winemaker’s quarters. The door 
  is locked and the key dissolved in Suey the Ooze Demon long ago. The 
  room is relatively untouched except for cobwebs and dust. A double-sized 
  feather down bed, a desk and a rickety wooden chair are in the room. The 
  chair breaks if anyone sits on it (1-5 on 1d6). 
  Suey used the room of his former master to amass his followers, take 
  the chateau and then later cause chaos in the surrounding countryside. On 
  the table is crude map of the surrounding area. 
  Search: The desk is also locked and is trapped with a poison needle trap. 
  The poison is asp venom (save avoids). Inside the desk is a diary written in 
  the Abyssal language. The journal details how Suey tricked the winemaker; 
  how he gained Gluant’s confidence; turned most of the field hands to his 
  cause; and how his cult flourished. The journal ends with Suey turning on 
  each of the cult members until he was the only one remaining. 
  Fine: A large jug of Chateau Gluant wine is under a floorboard. It is in 
  pristine condition and worth 200gp to the right buyer. 
  Level Two — The Upper Floor
  Area 2-A: Master’s Quarters
  The master’s quarters were looted after his demise. Most of the furniture 
  was shredded or torn apart. A large bed sits in the middle of the floor at an 
  off angle where it was pulled to the center of the room and forgotten. The 
  sheets are missing, as are three of the four bannisters. A small desk and a 
  stool are in the far corner. 
  Sitting on the stool is a skeletal form with long slimy gray hair. The 
  woman’s back is to the entry. The form is the former Lady Gluant. The 
  corpse looks rotted and frozen, and holds a large silver brush as if she was 
  brushing her hair. Lady Gluant is very much dead. The cultists brought 
  her here after her demise. Suey placed her doing what he thought was her 
  favorite pastime. If the party attacks, the body likely falls over. A closer 
  inspection reveals bits of twine propping the body in position.
  The dumbwaiter from Area 1-C terminates here behind two shutters 
  that swing wide on one wall. If the characters open the shutters, the 
  gelatinous cube as described in Area 1-C does nothing, as it is a few feet 
  below the party. Anyone foolish enough to jump into the dark shaft gets 
  what is coming to them. The dumbwaiter cannot be raised from this room.
  Search: The silver brush Lady Gluant holds has some value (70gp). 
  On the back of the desk is a hidden compartment that contains a large 
  sapphire (50gp) and a key to the dumbwaiter. 
  Level Three — The Cellar
  Area 3-A: The Gathering Room
  The rear entrance to the chateau is down an earthen ramp. The entry 
  is two large barn doors that easily slide open. The fieldworkers would 
  bring carts of grapes for sorting to the cobblestone room. Ironically, the 
  fieldworkers and their wives would spend hours removing any grapes with 
  the faintest taint or rot. Once sorted into large wooden baskets, the grapes 
  would be taken through an archway to the crushing room (Area 3-B).
  Currently, a number of overturned carts and smashed baskets are in this 
  room. The smell of mold and must is more prevalent here than in the upper 
  parts of the chateau or outside. Four skeletal remains are in the corner of 
  the room. This is a party of failed adventurers. A few torches, some moldy 
  clothes and a few rusty weapons sit by their bodies. 
  Search: One of the dead adventurers is a halfling with a large satchel. 
  Within the satchel are three bottles of white Chateau Gluant that are in 
  fairly good shape (75gp each).
  Area 3-B: The Crushing Room
  This long and narrow room slopes downward almost 15ft. Near the 
  archway entrance are two large wine presses. The presses are wooden 
  buckets that are 5ft wide and 4ft tall. Above one bucket is a large metal 
  plate. The other metal plate is currently on top of the other bucket. 
  Between the buckets is a large capstan large enough for four men to turn. 
  A system of ropes and pulleys high above hold each of the plates. When 
  in operation, one of the presses would be in use and connected to the 
  windlass. The plate would be lowered and pressure exerted with ropes 
  along the floor that attach to the capstan. The pomace would be pressed 
  and a barrel would be filled at the top of the slope through a large brass 
  spigot that sits at the bottom of the barrel. Since there is a slight slope, the 
  barrel is raised high enough off the slope to be level and to provide room 
  to fill. Thereafter, the barrel would be rolled down the slope to the barrel 
  room (Area 3-C). 
  The metal plate hanging in the air does not move unless a 
  rudimentary rope brake is loosened. The capstan then spins and the plate 
  unceremoniously falls, doing 5d6 points of damage to anyone standing in 
  the bucket. 
  The unengaged metal plate sits atop the other bucket. If the spigot is 
  turned, the barrel is damaged or the plate is re-engaged, then the wine 
  jelly lurking in the barrel bursts out of the bucket and attacks the nearest 
  character. This white Zinfandel wine jelly is pinkish in hue and attacks 
  with a pseudopod.
  Jelly, Wine (ochre variant): HD 6; HP 34; AC 8[11]; Atk 
  pseudopod (3d4); Move 3; Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: acidic surface destroys flesh, divides when by hit by 
  lightning, immune to fire, lightning.
  Area 3-C: The Barrel Room
  At the end of the long ramp in the crushing room (Area 3-B) is another 
  stone archway that leads into the barrel room. At one time, dozens of 
  barrels sat for years gently adding oak to the wine. 
  Unfortunately, with the cult drinking most of the wine and the damp 
  conditions introduced by their activities, the barrels in the room have 
  almost all spoiled into terribly acidic-tasting vinegar. While the vinegar is 
  not acidic enough to be classified as a weapon, it is still very unpleasant.
  Search: If the party searches the barrels for the “right stuff,” they have 
  a 1-in-20 chance of finding a barrel of acceptable wine. Only 2 barrels 
  out of 50 are still acceptable. These barrels contain 300 bottles of wine 
  worth more than 30,000gp to the right buyer! The Referee is encouraged 
  to adjust this to her campaign. It is possible that in the process of opening 
  and tasting the barrels that the characters allow too much oxygen in, 
  which fully oxidizes the wine by the time they find a buyer.
  Area 3-D: The Bottling Room
  Adjacent to the barrel room (Area 3-C) is this bottling room. Barrels 
  would be placed on a wooden platform here and wine would be bottled by 
  hand. While the bottles were sealed with wax in this room, the winemaker 
  would later seal the bottles with the Gluant insignia. 
  A few cases of smashed bottles sit next to a couple of empty barrels 
  on the platform. Bags of cheap red candles also are nearby. However, the 
  most important part of the room is the pile of yellow powdery sulfur or 
  brimstone in the corner.
  The Gluants’ winemaking secret was the slight addition of sulfur to 
  the wines. The addition of sulfur preserved the wines and acted as an 
  antioxidant to prevent the ruining effects of oxygen. To those astute 
  enough to deduce it on a difficult intelligence check (4d6 vs. score), the 
  sulfur is an exceptional tool against the oozes and slimes infecting the 
  chateau. 
  Sulfur is toxic and does 1d4 points of damage per 10 minutes if handled 
  carelessly. Properly handled, the sulfur does 2d6 points of damage per 
  round per handful to all slimes and oozes found in this chapter. A wheel 
  barrel full of sulfur is dumped in the corner of the raised platform. It is 
  up to the Referee how many handfuls the party may appropriately take 
  with them. 
  Area 3-E: Natural Cavern Entrance
  Beyond the barrel room is a rusty metal gate. The gate is ooze-encrusted 
  and rusted in place. It takes considerable strength (4d6 vs. score) to open it. 
  
  12
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  
  13
  Noble Rot
  
  14
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  Beyond the gate is a natural cavern that goes deeper into the bedrock 
  below the chateau. The cavern is only 10ft tall and has a worn path down 
  the middle of the cave. A foul, rancid stench emanates from the cavern. If 
  the characters open the gate, 10 slimy zombies that are hidden drop down 
  on the party and attack. This maneuver gives the slimy zombies a 1-4 on 
  1d6 chance of surprise.
  Area 3-F: Temple of Lumastzu
  The temple is rough hewn from a natural domed cavern that stretches 
  40ft above the floor. Stalactites remain dripping with ooze. The sludge 
  from the stalactites forms slippery pools around the floor. While some of 
  the dripping does evaporate, much remains. Movement at normal speed 
  is unimpeded. However, quick movement or combat requires a simple 
  dexterity check (2d6 vs. score) to avoid slipping and falling prone.
  A secret door on one cavern wall leads to the hidden alcove (Area 3-G). 
  The door is weighted to spring closed behind whoever enters. It takes 
  someone to divine or reason a solution to the crude sandbag and ropes on 
  the other side to pry the door open once through. In other words, if the 
  entire party goes through the door, there is not a way back to Area 3-F.
  The floor is roughly cut into a round theatre. Three concentric circles 
  surround a center stage. Each circle is five feet lower than the cavern 
  floor and mark where parishioners of this foul place would congregate 
  to observe the obscene rites. A stone stage stands 5ft higher than the 
  lowest circle.
  The stone stage is square with 25ft to a side. The stage is covered with 
  arcane symbols and Abyssal script written in blood. Much of the script 
  has been worn off over the past few years, while the dripping sludge from 
  above has also erased some of the foul text. Rising from the stage is a 
  large stone bowl. The bowl is just over 30ft in diameter and nearly 5ft tall. 
  The bowl has no markings and appears to be hewn from the same stone 
  as the blockish stage. The bowl fills most of the stage with only a few feet 
  to a side.
  Above the bowl are yards of rusty chains. The chains are connected to 
  a pulley high above the bowl. On the highest circle is a rusted winch. The 
  winch is rusted, crusted and inoperable. It is easy to deduce that the cult 
  lowered their sacrifices into the bowl.
  Within the bowl are the remains of the winemaker, the Gluants, the 
  workers, a few adventurers and the Cultus Limus. Lurking within the 
  bowl is a yellow pudding that grew larger with each sacrifice. Now it is 
  almost impossibly large. 
  The yellow pudding is semi-intelligent. The pudding thrusts out a 
  pseudopod and attacks whenever any character is within 20ft of the bowl. 
  As discussed in Area 3-D, brimstone or sulfur is a good way to dispatch 
  the ooze. The bowl provides protection to the ooze and functions as a 
  bonus to Armor Class (–4[+4] as noted in the stat block). If the party 
  attempts to simply move to range and attack the pudding, the pudding 
  “spills” out of the bowl and lumbers toward the party. While this means 
  that it must leave its protective “shell,” it also won’t simply wait for the 
  party to dispatch it.
  Search: A search of the area finds tracks leading to the secret door to 
  the hidden alcove (Area 3-G).
  Pudding, Yellow (black variant): HD 10; HP 60; AC 6[13] or 
  2[17] in bowl; Atk pseudopod (3d8); Move 6; Save 5; AL N; 
  CL/XP 12/2000; Special: acidic surface destroys metal and 
  flesh, divides when by hit by slashing weapons, immune to 
  fire, lightning, slashing & piercing weapons. 
  Area 3-G: Hidden Alcove
  Beyond the secret door as described in Area 3-F is a very narrow 
  natural hallway. Stalactites and stalagmites are throughout the area. A 
  narrow, 3ft to 4ft wide passage leaving the room curves slightly to keep 
  Area 3-H out of view. This entire room is coated with thick yellow mucus 
  that decreases speed by half unless a character makes a simple dexterity 
  check (2d6 vs. score). If the character fails, he falls prone and is covered 
  in the relatively harmless ooze.
  Fine: Hidden under a foot of hardened mucus next to a wall is a bag of 
  jewels. Inside the bag are various gemstones worth 1500gp.
  Area 3-H: The Slime Demon
  The narrow corridor from Area 3-G ends in this cavern and marks the 
  end of this adventure as well. This chamber is a circular room 50ft across. 
  The ground is level and the natural features of the cavern are hewn away. 
  At the entrance is a step down into a pool of calm yellow slime. A small 
  stone platform is in the middle of the floor. An idol made of gold, rubies 
  and ivory is on top of the platform and is sculpted like a woman with a 
  lioness head, donkey ears, nail-like fingers and bird talons. It is worth 
  5000gp to the right buyer. Beyond the area of the chateau, the idol radiates 
  evil. Also, anyone possessing the idol is plagued by horrible nightmares. 
  Additionally, any diseases or poisons that afflict a character while it is in 
  their possession last twice as long.
  At the feet of the idol are a number of offerings. From the dust present, 
  these offering were made long ago. The offerings include a skull with a 
  large ruby (150gp) inside it, sacks of coins (750gp), a +1 dagger, two 
  tomes (“Fine Wines and Winemaking” by Robin Peeker worth 115gp and 
  “Fungi and I” by Jay Suchling), a large golden wine goblet encrusted 
  with lesser precious stones (500gp), and a spellbook. The contents of the 
  spellbook are up to the Referee.
  Anything touching the ooze causes it to retract. For 30 seconds it 
  retracts and forms an anthropomorphic shape next to the treasure. Damage 
  may be done to the ooze during this time at AC 9[10]. However, the ooze’s 
  regenerative properties are 10hp per round during this dramatic entrance. 
  After 30 seconds, the vestigial, batlike wings of the ooze demon unfurl 
  and it attacks. 
  Demon, Ooze: HD 10, HP 65; AC 0[19]; Atk 2 claws (1d6 
  plus 1d6 acid), bite (1d8 plus 1d6 acid); Move 6; Save 5; 
  CL/XP 13/2300; Special: acid dissolves organic and metal, 
  vomit (40ft line, 4d6 acid, save half). (The Tome of Horrors 
  Complete 150)
  
  15
  of ants and men
  Sometimes bugs are just bugs, and sometimes they are organized 
  into a hive mind that is just as smart as humans. Ants are just that. In 
  battle, the ant creates a horde of raging combatants that form a blur on 
  all sides. While typically peaceful unless threatened, should the hive be 
  threatened, ants create a scale of violence almost impossible to imagine, 
  as they sweep ahead with a suicidal single-mindedness. Utterly devoted to 
  duty, ants never retreat from a confrontation—even in the face of certain 
  death. The engagements are brief and brutal. Working in teams, ants grab 
  enemies, holding them in place until one of the warriors advances and rips 
  into the captive’s body, leaving it smashed and bleeding.
  The adventure begins as a quest to recover (e.g. steal) giant ant eggs for 
  a magic-user from a giant anthill located near the town of Endhome. The 
  real treasure is a sword made of a rare and strange metal, called the two-
  edged sword, a sword made of a rare and strange metal that has amazingly 
  powerful anti-magical properties. 
  This adventure is designed for up to 6 players of levels 4-8. Smaller 
  groups can also play the adventure effectively. In response to many 
  requests from our fans, I designed the main encounter mechanic to work 
  well with groups of 2-3 characters of levels 6-8—even a solo adventure 
  would work well in cases where they individual character has very good 
  climbing, trap-finding and stealth skills. Druids, rangers and thieves will 
  fare best in cases where the groups are limited in size.
  This adventure is best played as a thinking adventure; hacking one’s 
  way through it is likely to result in death.
   
  Starting the Adventure
  If the Referee is using the Lost Lands setting by Frog God Games, 
  the adventure is located in just south of the Penprie Forest, near the city 
  of Endhome and along the banks of the Oldrock River. The Referee can 
  use another setting placing this adventure anywhere with virtually no 
  modification. This could require minor re-tweaking of the “finding the 
  body” portion of the adventure, but otherwise is playable anywhere.
  The Referee can use a number of hooks to get the players involved 
  with this adventure. Rumors of a giant anthill “filled with treasure” could 
  be presented in the local watering hole, or perhaps a more direct method 
  could be employed. Bug-hunts such as this often lack treasure (as does 
  this one), so if incentive is lacking, several methods can be employed. 
  Potential Adventure Hooks include:
  • Characters are hired to get giant ant eggs. A kindly old magic-user, 
  perhaps a friend characters, needs these eggs for magical research. He 
  pays them 500gp if they retrieve eggs for him. 
  • Characters are geased by a not-so-kindly magic-user to gather eggs 
  from the anthill. While not a very nice way to treat characters, this is about 
  as truly old-school as you get. In fact, in the original white box version of 
  the game, virtually all magic-user and clerics encountered used geas and 
  quest on characters regularly. Alas, this is a different day and age.
  • Legends speak of a powerful lord lost in battle with gnolls on the 
  fields of south of the Penprie Forest, very near where the giant anthill is 
  located. When reinforcements arrived to recover the dead, they found the 
  bodies being taken by giant ants. His family offers a reward of 1000gp 
  for recovery of his body (impossible, he was eaten) or 500gp for recovery 
  of his plate mail. The armor is inscribed with his family crest—a pair of 
  unicorn heads entwined by vines and facing one another.
  • Herdsmen have complained about sheep going missing in the area. 
  They beg the characters to investigate the cause and stop the loss of 
  livestock.
  Whatever the method used, the Referee can find some way to encourage 
  the party to head towards the location of the anthill. Once there, they find 
  a dead body of a man wearing leather armor lying a few hundred yards 
  from the anthill. The man is on a small island of rock in the center of 
  the Oldrock River. His body is bloated and red, and his armor shows 
  significant signs of being “melted”, as if by some form of acid. A partially 
  melted short sword lies in his hand, and he wears a belt pouch. Within the 
  belt pouch is a journal. 
  Speak with dead or perusing of the journal details that a magic-user 
  hired the man and his friends to retrieve giant ant eggs—in fact they were 
  offered 500gp, with an 500gp bonus should they get a royal queen egg. 
  They fought their way into the nest, soon realizing they could never win 
  a battle with all the ants. Eventually, their druid used his magic to make 
  them invisible to the ants, and while working their way down into the 
  egg chambers, they discovered a series of cut caverns and worked stone 
  tunnels and chambers. In it, they found a strange vault of carved stone, 
  covered with ancient, mystic writings. For some reason, the druid’s magic 
  failed, as did all attempts of their magic-user and their cleric, and the ants 
  returned with a vengeance and attacked.
  They tried to run out, dropping all of their equipment in an attempt to 
  run faster. The man was stung several times by the warriors, but made it 
  out and sought refuge in the river where the ants would not follow. His last 
  entry states that he is in great pain, and hopes that a short rest will allow 
  him to recover. He died of the poison.
  The journal also notes that the workers seemed docile enough at first, 
  and that the warriors, while quite aggressive, were fairly slow moving. It 
  also contains a rough map, indicating that the entrance leading to Area 2 
  is the one used by him and his comrades.
  The anthill itself rises up 40ft above the plain. Multiple entrances can 
  be seen, some with ants moving in and out of them. Careful inspection 
  reveals that the ants are not active outside at night. The area around 
  the anthill is heavily de-vegetated for approximately a mile around. If 
  approached during daylight hours, 3d6 giant worker ants, 1d6 giant 
  warrior ants and 1 giant bomber ant investigate intruders.
  Giant Ants and the Hive Mentality
  Before I go into the adventure itself, the Referee should understand 
  certain general information that governs the whole of the ant lair. Members 
  operate without a power hierarchy or permanent leader. Colonies are 
  decentralized, with workers that individually know little making combat 
  decisions that nonetheless prove effective at the group level without 
  oversight — a process called swarm intelligence. Different varieties 
  of ants are described, and different conditions that exist depending on 
  character (or random event) actions that occur, as well as the type of 
  terrain (e.g. the portion of the hive) that encounters with ants could occur 
  in all play a factor in their behavior. 
  During the course of the adventure, the party will encounter 5 different 
  kinds of ants. These are:
  • Workers: These are sterile females, approximately 2ft to 3ft long, 
  which do the bulk of the heavy lifting, hive construction and expansion 
  and food gathering for the colony. The workers present in this colony 
  are not particularly aggressive, and absent pheromones being released 
  indicating that “the hive is in trouble”, generally won’t attack a creature 
  Of Ants and Men
  By Bill Webb
  
  16
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  that enters the hive, unless it is another ant. Lacking a poison sting, 
  these ants typically approach any intruders and “smell them” using their 
  antennae. While it may seem at first that a character is being attacked, 
  these ants do not aggressively bite anything moving about unless attacked 
  first. In combat, these ants typically grab a leg or an arm and hold on while 
  the warriors attack the held opponent. There are 900 workers in this hive. 
  Each week, 10d6 more join the hive to replace slain comrades.
  Ant, Giant Worker: HD 2; AC 3[16]; Atk bite (1d6); Move 18; 
  Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none. 
  • Warriors: These ants are 5ft to 6ft long and much more aggressive 
  than their workers sisters. In addition to a nasty bite, these ants have a 
  poison sting that can be used 3 times per day. Also sterile females, these 
  ants are the organizers of colony-wide resistance and attack. Attack groups 
  typically are organized into groups of 1 warrior with 8 workers that attack 
  single opponents as a group. The probability of attack depends on several 
  factors if a warrior ant is approached within 50ft. Fortunately, they are 
  fairly slow moving. There are 120 warriors in this hive. Each week, 4d6 
  more join the hive to replace slain comrades.
  Ant, Giant Warrior: HD 3; AC 3 [16]; Atk bite (1d6 plus poison); 
  Save 14; Move 18; AL N; CL/XP 4/120; Special: poison 2d6 
  (save for 1d4 only).
  • Drones: These winged male ants are fairly rare outside of the 
  queen’s chamber, and quite short-lived (she eats them). They exist only to 
  procreate, only mobilizing to fight if the hive is attacked. They are quite 
  large, but lack the poison sting of the warriors. There are 16 drones in this 
  hive. Each week, 1d6 more join the hive to replace slain comrades.
  Ant, Giant Drone: HD 3; AC 3 [16]; Atk bite (1d6); Save 14; 
  Move 18; AL N; CL/XP 4/120; Special: fly.
  • Bombers: These ants look like workers with large hind ends. Really 
  large hind ends. These Sir Mix-A-Lot inspired critters have a terrible 
  special attack. They are basically suicide bombers that unleash a caustic 
  poison in a 10ft radius, covering everything near them in the same poison 
  as if one were stung by a warrior. These creatures are also fairly rare in 
  the hive, and are non-aggressive unless directed by a warrior to attack or 
  if they sense the hive is threatened through release of pheromones. There 
  are 60 bombers in this hive. Each week, 2d6 more join the hive to replace 
  slain comrades.
  Ant, Giant Bomber: HD 2; AC 3[16]; Atk bite (1d6); Move 18; 
  Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: explode n 10ft radius 
  poison cloud (2d6 damage, save for 1d4 damage). 
  • The Queen: Her Majesty resides in her throne chamber, and basically 
  sits there, mating with drones and making eggs. The queens are the center 
  of colony life because they reproduce. They do not lead troops or organize 
  labor. Several queen eggs are always hidden in other chambers at any 
  given time in case she is slain or dies. While she lives, queen-bearing eggs 
  are brought to her and devoured. 3d10 giant worker ants and 2d6 giant 
  warrior ants always accompany the queen. Only one queen exists. If she 
  is slain, another is born within 1d2 days, growing to full size in 6 weeks.
  Ant, Giant Queen: HD 10; AC 3[16]; Atk bite (1d6); Save 5; 
  Move 3; AL N; CL/XP 8/800; Special: none.
  
  17
  of ants and men
  Hive Conditions
  Certain conditions can determine how the hive reacts to intrusion by 
  outsiders, such as the party. These include:
  The Hive is at Peace
  This is the standard condition of the hive. Normal attack chances occur 
  if any intruders are present. The worker ants touch and sniff anything 
  within reach, but do not physically attack unless attacked or directed by 
  a warrior. Drones and bombers just ignore intruders unless a warrior is 
  present and hostile. The warriors base chance of immediate attack on 
  anything within 50ft is 20%, modified as follows:
  1 character within 20ft
  +05%
  2-3 characters within 20ft
  +20%
  4-5 characters within 20ft
  +40%
  6+ characters within 20ft
  +60%
  Hive in trouble! (One or more ants is killed within 
  500ft of the hive)
  +90%
  Another giant ant (e.g. polymorphed character)
  +100%
  Within 200ft of queen’s chamber
  +75%
  Within the queen’s chamber
  +100%
  Silence spell on character
  -40%
  Invisibility spell on character-- -40%
  Character in stealth mode
  -30%
  Character tosses sweet food (e.g. honey, sugar or 
  aphid jelly)
  -30%
  Character is coated in giant beetle guts*
  -50% 
  Character slays an ankheg or bulette**
  -75% 
  * There is a 50% chance if not attacked that the warrior 
  sprays the character with pheromones, making it “one of 
  the gang” unless they attack an ant or enter the queen’s 
  chamber.
  **There is a 50% chance if not attacked the warrior sprays 
  the character with pheromones, making it “one of the 
  gang” unless they attack an ant or enter the queen’s 
  chamber.
  The Hive is in Trouble!
  This occurs if one or more ants is slain within 500ft of the hive. This 
  causes the killed ant to release pheromones that indicate the hive is under 
  attack. Note that instant kills, such as by cloudkill, fireball, etc. do not allow 
  the ant to release this warning. Should this occur, all outsiders are treated 
  as hostile, and the ants organize and attack. While some of the workers that 
  first reach the attacking force try to delay or subdue the intruders, another 
  group does not join the fight immediately, but instead returns home, and 
  leaving an odor trail behind. When they arrive home, they warn their nest 
  mates by moving their bodies back and forth, and touching the antennae 
  of the other ants with their own antennae. This gathers 6d6 workers, 3d6 
  warriors and 1d6 bombers (see above for stats) reinforcements to join the 
  fight. If they are slain or losing, another batch of the same numbers arrives 
  every 10 minutes thereafter. Another cause of war is one colony (basically 
  anything that is or resembles a giant ant) entering the territory of another.
  Famine!
  This situation occurs if the aphid nest is destroyed after a 1-week delay. 
  In this case, workers attack, as do warriors. All the remaining ants remain 
  unchanged.
  Four Areas — One Hive
  Nearly all of the hive area is un-numbered areas. These tunnels and 
  chambers are full of random ants, and little else. Numbered locations are 
  described specifically at the end of this section. Movement through the hive 
  absent the map in Area 2 is rather random, as it is a huge, trackless maze. Each 
  minute, roll 1d20 on the following chart to determine what the characters find. 
  Encounters are dictated in each level description. Following the map (or using 
  a find the path spell or equivalent) uses 60 of these features (as selected by the 
  Referee), but always encounters Areas 3, 5 and 6, and terminates in Area 8.
  1
  Pathway up to the surface, requires crawling (1-9) 
  or can be walked (10) out of (into keyed areas 1 or 
  2). Applies only in the Upper Hive, otherwise reroll.
  2-4
  Tunnel continues 100ft at a flat slope
  5-6
  Tunnel continues, but is reduced in size (anything 
  larger than a halfling must crawl)
  7-8
  Opens into a chamber of 10d10ft in diameter. 
  There are 1d3 exits from the chamber
  9-10
  Opens into a chamber of 5d10ft in diameter, 
  there are 1d3-1 exits from the chamber
  11-12
  Dead-ends
  13-14
  Opens into a numbered area (determine 
  randomly) from the keyed area
  15-16
  Tunnel slopes up or down at a steep slope 100ft
  17
  Obstacle blocks path (deep deadfall (01-25), sheer 
  cliff of 10-60ft (26-50), partial blockage requiring 
  crawling (51-75) or collapsed tunnel (76-00). This 
  requires the Referee to improvise to some degree, 
  and allows characters to use climb or other skills
  18-19
  Tunnel leads down to the next level
  20
  Tunnel leads deep into the earth (Referee’s 
  choice of where this leads)
  Entrance and Upper Hive
  The entrance and upper levels of the hive consist of dirt tunnels and 
  A Note on Using Area of Effect 
  or “Kill the Hive” Spells
  Use of spells such as fireball and lightning bolt in dirt tunnels 
  can be very dangerous. Any use of large destructive spells within 
  a tunnel or chamber has a % chance of causing a collapse within 
  its area of effect equal to the points of damage done by the spell 
  (assuming no save). This area has a 25% chance to expand 50% in 
  all directions. Hence, if an 8-die fireball is cast in a 40ft chamber 
  doing 32 points of damage before saves are calculated, the 20ft area 
  centered on the burst area collapses 32% of the time, with the area 
  expanding to a 30ft diameter area on a second roll of 25% or less. 
  “Kill the hive” spells such as cloudkill certainly wipe out a large 
  section of the colony. Keep in mind the area of effect and duration 
  of the spell, as the vast size of this place would only allow a small 
  portion of the hive to be killed. One nice effect of spells like this 
  that cause instant death is that they prevent ants from releasing 
  “The Hive is in Trouble” pheromones.
  
  18
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  chambers dug out by the tireless labor of the workers. These tunnels 
  typically are 6ft to 10ft in diameter and are composed of hard packed 
  earth. There are eleven surface entrances leading down into the hive, and 
  these lead into chambers full of workers and the occasional other ant. 
  Only the entrances leading to Areas 1 and 2 are passable by anything 
  larger than a halfling unless one crawls inside. If using the map, this area 
  requires 20 minutes to traverse.
  In this area, wandering monsters check must be made once per minute 
  by rolling on the following table.
  1-9
  1d3 giant worker ants
  10-11
  1 giant warrior ant and 1d6 giant worker ants
  12
  1 giant drone ant
  13
  1 giant drone ant, 1d2 giant warrior ants, 1 giant 
  bomber ant and 1d6 giant worker ants
  14-19
  No encounter
  20 
  Intruder!
  Worker Ants: These ignore all beyond 20ft (roll 6d6 for distance), 
  otherwise they behave as described above. They typically carry leaves 
  and sticks or other food items.
  Warrior Ants: These behave as described above.
  Drones: These ignore intruders unless commanded to attack by a 
  warrior.
  Intruder: This is either 1d6 ankhegs (50% chance), 1d6 giant boring 
  beetles (35% chance) or a bulette (15% chance) here to eat ants (and 
  anything else). They attack any they encounter. Note that covering oneself 
  beetle guts, or defending the ants against the larger predators can have 
  positive consequences. Any intruder encountered automatically draws an 
  encounter as if 13 was rolled after 5 rounds of combat.
  Keyed Areas in the Upper Hive
  Area 1: Are those big Grasshoppers?
  The tunnel entrance at this location seems devoid of ants. The walls and 
  ceiling of this 20ft diameter hole are made of the same compacted earth 
  as the rest of the entrances, however the floor seems freshly dug and soft. 
  Carefully inspecting the floor reveals that various bits and pieces of 
  ants (legs, a thorax or two) are mixed in with the soft dirt piles. The 
  odd leg or antennae sticks out of the piles.
  The tunnel leads to a chamber 60ft across, with large piles of rock 
  and earth blocking al other exits. Four rounds after the chamber is 
  entered, 11 ankhegs break through the floor and attack anything 
  within the chamber (unless it was entered by someone under 
  magical silence). This in turn draws 1 battle group of ants every 
  minute, starting on the 5th round of combat. A battle group 
  consists of 3d6 giant worker ants, 1d6 giant 
  warrior ants and 1 giant bomber ant (see 
  above for stats). 
  The ants have largely abandoned this 
  entrance, blocking access from below 
  after deciding that losses were too high 
  to defeat the ankheg nest. That being said, 
  should sounds of battle emanate from here, 
  the ants join in the fray. Characters who are 
  carefully observant note that the ants attack 
  the ankhegs—none attack the characters. 
  If any character attacks an ant, they are 
  sprayed with a pheromone indicating they 
  are hostile—and all ants automatically 
  attack them for 1 hour.
  Ankheg Tactics: Ankhegs gain automatic surprise on the first round of 
  combat except against someone with mining skills or a dwarf. They burst 
  through the ground and attack using their bite immediately. Each round 
  thereafter, an ankheg has a 25% chance of spitting acid and a 75% chance 
  of attacking physically. If wounded over 50%, an individual ankheg 
  retreats underground and burrows away.
  Ant Tactics: The ants attack individual ankhegs in groups of 6 workers 
  and 1 warriors, with extra warriors or workers aiding their “allies” the 
  characters) until a total of 7 creatures is on a single ankheg. The bomber 
  ant heads towards the farthest away ankheg and explodes on it.
  Afterword: Should the characters help the ants defeat the ankhegs, 
  any surviving warriors (roll for each) has a 50% chance of approaching 
  one individual character (it seems aggressive, but is not) rear end first and 
  spraying a pheromone on them. This spray lasts 1 hour, and prevents the 
  individual character from being attacked by any ants unless the queen’s 
  chamber is entered or the character is within 10ft of an ant killed (releases a 
  counter pheromone that labels the individual an enemy) by the p or an ally. 
  Ankheg (11): HD 3; HP 15x3, 18x3, 20x2, 16x2; AC 2[17] 
  underside 4[15]; Atk bite (3d6); Move 12 (burrow 6); Save 14; 
  AL N; CL/XP 4/120; Special: spits acid 5d6 (1/day, save for 
  half). (Monstrosities 14)
  Area 2: Dead Dudes
  This large tunnel entrance (8ft in diameter) leads 40ft down at a 10% 
  slope and opens into a 40ft diameter chamber. During daylight hours it 
  contains 3d6 worker ants (see above for stats). It is abandoned during the 
  night. The far wall is spattered with blood and bits and parts of non-edible 
  adventuring equipment. Present in the chamber are the following:
  • A spear head, 2 daggers (1 is bent and corroded), a mace head, a 
  completely destroyed suit of plate armor, a shredded (and very bloody) 
  suit of chain armor, a metal shield (missing its leather straps)
  • An iron box containing two potion bottles (potion of flying and potion 
  of levitation)
  • An ivory scroll tube containing a map of the best path through the 
  middle levels leading to the worked stone area and the sword vault (see 
  player handout 1). Travel using the map takes 1 hour to reach the stone 
  tunnel area. Ants and other creatures encountered include wandering 
  monsters as well as Areas 3, 5 and 6.
  
  19
  of ants and men
  No organic or body parts are here, as everything edible was picked 
  clean by worker ants.
   
  The Middle Hive
  Dozens of tunnels and chambers fill this area, most full of workers. 
  This creates a maze that makes it almost impossible to follow without a 
  map or spell indicating the correct way to go. This area contains the “cow 
  farms” of giant aphids. Random wandering through this area likely leads 
  to certain doom, as eventually the characters are attacked by a warrior, 
  forced to defend themselves, and are either killed or kill an ant (creating 
  a “Hive is in Trouble” situation). If using the map, this area requires 30 
  minutes to traverse.
  In this area, wandering monsters check must be made once per minute 
  by rolling on the following table.
  1-9
  1d3 giant worker ants
  10
  1 giant bomber ant
  11
  1 giant drone ant, 1d2 giant warrior ants, 1 giant 
  bomber ant and 1d6 giant worker ants
  12-19
  No encounter
  20 
  Intruder!
  Worker Ants: These ignore all beyond 20ft (roll 8d6ft for distance for 
  all encounters), otherwise they behave as described above. They typically 
  carry aphid jelly.
  Warrior Ants: These behave as described above.
  Drones: These ignore intruders unless commanded to attack by a 
  warrior.
  Intruder: This is either 1d4 ankhegs (50% chance), 2d6 giant boring 
  beetles (35% chance) or a bulette (15% chance, see Area 10 below) here 
  to eat ants (and anything else). They attack any they encounter. Note that 
  covering oneself in beetle guts, or defending the ants against the larger 
  predators can have positive consequences. Any intruder encountered 
  automatically draws an encounter as if 11 was rolled after 5 rounds of 
  combat.
  Keyed Areas in the Middle Hive
  Area 3: The Aphid Nest
  This chamber is 200ft in diameter and is filled in the center with torn up 
  bits of plants and branches covered in leaves. At any given time there are 
  3d6 worker ants (see above for stats) present here, running aphid puke 
  out of the chamber to warriors and the queen at regular intervals. This is 
  the primary delivery area for outside vegetation brought in by the workers 
  each day. In addition to all the greenery, approximately 200 giant aphids 
  (AC 9[10], HD 3; no attack) rove about the chamber munching way on 
  the leaves and branches. The aphids ignore intruders unless touched (or 
  attacked), in which case they regurgitate a sticky, sweet substance on the 
  
  20
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  ground (gallons) and squeak and retreat from the one contacting them. 
  The aphids are harmless.
  These giant aphids are used as cows by the ants. The aphids secrete a 
  sweet substance called honeydew that ants prize as food. This substance 
  consists of partially digested, highly concentrated plant sap and other 
  wastes, and is excreted by the aphids. These aphids have a symbiotic 
  relationship with the ants that resembles the relationship of domestic 
  cattle to humans; hence the name “ant cows” for aphids. The ants tend 
  the aphids, transporting them to their food plants at the appropriate stages 
  of the aphids’ life cycle and sheltering the aphids. The aphids, in turn, 
  provide honeydew for the ants.
  Should all the aphids be slain, the ants go into “famine” mode as 
  described above. Note that the aphids do not release ant pheromones, nor 
  do the worker ants present react to aphids being killed.
  Treasure: Careful digging around in the dirt piles reveals a few pieces 
  of plate armor. One of these (a breastplate) is inscribed with the family 
  crest of the dead noble slain in battle (see adventure hooks). One could 
  also obtain a bunch of honeydew and use it to pacify giant warrior ants 
  (1 gallon pacifies an ant if offered before it attacks) if containers are 
  available.
  Area 4: Bombs Away!
  This area is the nesting area for the hives bomber ants. At all times, 
  6d6 giant bomber ants (see above for stats) are present here. They are 
  generally non-aggressive and slow moving. The ants segregate them to 
  avoid “accidents” should they accidentally pop. The ants only bother 
  intruders if attacked or if the hive is on alert due to famine or war 
  pheromones. If any character bears hostility pheromones, this area is very 
  dangerous. Otherwise the bomber ants just sit still, resting, and do not 
  even sniff or investigate any intruders (its tiring carrying around that big 
  butt!).
  Area 5: Eeek! It’s a Mushroom
  This chamber is also made of packed dirt, and spans an area of roughly 
  100ft in diameter. It is completely covered with hundreds of mushroom 
  growths used as food by the ants, some as small as a few inches high and 
  some as large as a man. There are always 3d6 giant worker ants (see 
  above for stats) present here. Several species of very large fungus are in 
  the center of the cave.. Two of these are of note.
  1. Large grayish, 4ft tall brown mushrooms are present in a 10ft 
  area. Careful inspection from afar reveals that the dead and rotted 
  bodies of several worker ants are present in a decaying state near 
  their base. These 4 mushrooms are violet fungi. They move and 
  attack anything that comes within 10ft. The ants are oblivious to the 
  danger they pose.
  2. Two large silver-and-red mushrooms stand in a small wet area near 
  the center of the cavern. These are 2 shriekers. If approached within 10ft, 
  they sound off, causing a wandering monster check with +12 on the roll 
  (ants are used to the noise, but other creatures see this as a dinner bell!). 
  Should the fungus all be destroyed, the famine condition described 
  above applies to the colony.
  Fungus, Violet (4): HD 3; HP 16, 18, 14, 19; AC 7[12]; Atk 4 
  tendrils (rot); Move 1; Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 4/120; Special: 
  rot (necrosis of flesh unless cure disease, save avoids). 
  (Monstrosities 183)
  Shrieker (2): HD 2+2; HP 12, 10; AC 7[12]; Atk none; Move 
  1; Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; Special: shriek (causes 1 
  damage, 30ft range, save avoids).
  Area 6: Raid!
  This is more of a fixed encounter than it is a room. At some point in the 
  exploration, the characters encounter a mass melee between giant boring 
  beetles and ants. When the characters enter the area, 12 giant worker 
  ants, 2 giant bomber ants and 7 warrior ants are fighting 14 giant 
  boring beetles. These beetles have developed a taste for giant ant, and 
  have burrowed here to get a meal. Similar to the ankheg encounter, this 
  encounter provides an opportunity for the characters to become “one of 
  the gang” with the ants for a short period of time and facilitate passage 
  through the hive. Once again, the ants do not attack the characters unless 
  attacked, treating them as allies in this fight.
  Beetle Tactics: Being far larger than the ants, the beetles try to quickly 
  kill anything non-beetle that they can and move onto the next victim. If 
  the beetles win the combat, they take anything killed to devour.
  Ant Tactics: The ants attack individual beetles in groups of 6 workers 
  and 1 warriors, with extra warriors or workers aiding their “allies” the 
  characters) until a total of 7 creatures is on a single beetle. The bomber ant 
  heads towards the farthest away ankheg and explodes on it.
  Afterword: Should the characters help the ants defeat the beetles, any 
  surviving warriors (roll for each) has a 50% chance of approaching one 
  individual character (it seems aggressive, but is not) rear end first and 
  spraying a pheromone on them. This spray lasts for 1 hour, and prevents 
  that individual character from being attacked by any ants unless the 
  queen’s chamber is entered or if the character is within 10ft of an ant when 
  it is killed (the counter pheromones released with the ant’s death labels 
  the individual an enemy) by the characters or an ally. Anyone smeared 
  with beetle guts is treated as if he had the friendly pheromone for 1 hour 
  as well.
  Beetle, Giant Boring (14): HD 5; HP 25x4, 27x2, 23x5, 30, 28x2; 
  AC 2[17]; Atk bite (2d8); Move 9 (burrow 12); Save 12; AL 
  N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: hive mind. (The Tomb of Horrors 
  Complete 51)
  
  21
  of ants and men
  The Lower Hive 
  and Queen’s Chambers
  This area features more aggressive warrior ants as well as several areas 
  central to the adventure. The warrior and drone ants here are always aggressive 
  (+30%), and usually automatically attack anyone not coated in beetle guts 
  or friendly pheromones. One ant always runs immediately to the queen’s 
  chambers to warn the ants of intruders there, even if the intruders have the 
  correct smell. If using the map, this area requires 10 minutes to traverse.
  In this area, wandering monsters check must be made once per minute 
  by rolling on the following table.
  1–7
  1d6 giant worker ants
  8–10
  1d6 giant warrior ants
  11–15
  1 giant drone ant, 1d2 giant warrior ants, and 1d6 
  giant worker ants
  16–19
  No encounter
  20 
  Intruder!
  Worker Ants: These ignore all beyond 20ft (roll 8d6 for distance for 
  all encounters (in ft)), otherwise they behave as described above. They 
  typically carry aphid jelly.
  Warrior Ants: These behave as described above.
  Drones: These ignore intruders unless commanded to attack by a 
  warrior.
  Intruder: This encounter is with 1d4 ankhegs (50% chance), 2d6 
  giant boring beetles (35% chance) or a bulette (15% chance, see Area 
  10 below) here to eat ants (and anything else). They attack anything they 
  encounter. Note that covering oneself in beetle guts, or defending the ants 
  against the larger predators can have positive consequences. Any intruder 
  encountered automatically draws an encounter as if 11–15 was rolled after 
  5 rounds of combat.
  Keyed Areas in the Lower Hive
  Area 7: The Queen’s Chamber
  This 200ft by 200ft square chamber is constructed of cut stone, and 
  has been commandeered by the ant queen as her throne chamber. Nine 
  exits lead out of the room at various places, none of which is big enough 
  for anything larger than a halfling to crawl, except the stone passageway 
  that leads to Area 8. The ceiling is 20ft high and also made of cut and 
  mortared stone.  The room is filled with thousands of eggs, as well as 
  pools of honeydew and choice tidbits of animal flesh, plant matter and 
  fungus. There are always 4d6 giant warrior ants, 1d6 giant drone ants 
  and 2d6 worker ants here, as well as the queen (see above for all stats). 
  Note all warriors here are elite and have maximum hit points.
  As the center of intelligence for the any colony, the queen directs the 
  warriors to position themselves in front and on her sides. She does not 
  order them to immediately attack, preferring to wait until she sees how 
  they react. The workers scurry off to gather reinforcements. A total of 1d3 
  battle groups (3d6 giant worker ants and 2d6 giant warrior ants) arrive 
  each minute after the first. No bombers come to this chamber.
  This room can either be a boon or a death trap. Note that pheromone 
  spray of any kind does not fool the queen. She recognizes intruders for 
  what they are. The one tactic that can be employed here is to either 1) 
  present an offering of sweet food to the queen, then back off slowly and 
  leave or 2) cast speak with animals and converse with the queen. Any 
  other tactic or action results in the entire hive coming down and attacking 
  
  22
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  intruders. The queen is suspicious, but should the characters have beetle 
  guts or pheromones indicating they have helped the hive, she likely lets 
  them pass along, assuming they are suitably deferent.
  As long as the characters persuade her that a) they mean no harm and 
  b) are not stealing eggs, they are either left to wander (if they have fought 
  the ankhegs, beetles of bulette) or attacked and eaten. It is possible that 
  the queen would send them (under threat of death) to deal with the bulette 
  in Area 10, as she has lost too many warriors attempting to rid her hive of 
  it. If asked for eggs, she indicates that if the bulette were killed, she would 
  grant a boon of 10 royal eggs (she eats them anyway, as a new queen is a 
  potential rival and is not tolerated).  If this is the case, she sends a warrior 
  ant to guide the characters to Area 9 and allows them to take 10 eggs.
  Roleplaying with the queen and the characters can be a fun experience, 
  and is largely left to the individual Referee. She is haughty and highly 
  intelligent. She knows nothing of the sword vault and directs her minions 
  to avoid the area as many were killed while examining it. The queen has 
  no treasure.
  Area 8: Tunnels of Stone
  Eventually, either by luck or by using the map from Area 2, then 
  characters find this area. The dirt-and-mud tunnels suddenly change to a 
  mud-brick, mortared stone complex. This area is obviously constructed by 
  men, not ants. The entrance to these tunnels is where the ants dug to, and 
  the room here is 30ft square, with exits straight ahead (to Area 7) and the 
  left (to the Dungeon of the Sword). The left tunnel runs 60ft straight and 
  ends in a staircase going down.
  Area 9: Royal Eggs
  This chamber is made of dirt like the rest of the ant hive. The chamber 
  itself is 40ft in diameter, and has no other exists. There are always 6 giant 
  warrior ants here (see stats above, max hp). Only the warrior ants are 
  allowed to transport royal eggs, and these stand guard in case the queen is 
  killed, in which case a drone is summoned to fertilize three of them. The 
  eggs are allowed to hatch, and the infant queens then fight a three-way 
  duel to the death, with the survivor becoming the new queen. Thirty royal 
  eggs are here.
  Area 10: Bite the Bulette
  The solid stone tunnel leading to this area is nearly devoid of ants, with 
  only a half dozen workers at 30ft intervals along its 180ft length. The 
  workers stand motionless, not even bothering to sniff any intruders unless 
  the bulette makes an appearance. The end of the tunnel opens into a stone-
  and-dirt walled chamber 100ft in diameter. Unlike the other chambers in 
  this place, this one has a stone ceiling, covered with stalactites, although 
  its floor is dirt. Bits of the fallen limestone cover the floor in small piles, 
  and water drips down, making the floor somewhat muddy and slippery.
  There is a 20% chance that the bulette is asleep here, a 40% chance he 
  is out hunting, and a 40% chance it is awake and lies in wait in the ground. 
  The bulette has reached an uneasy truce with the ants, neither wanting 
  to give up its lair nor wishing to continuously fight these nasty-tasting, 
  acid-filled insects. Unlike the ankhegs and beetles, the bulette does not 
  particularly enjoy ant as a meal. Likewise, the ants, after initially trying to 
  drive the beast off, quickly realized that his thick armor and devastating 
  attacks were more than a match for them, and decided to leave guards 
  posted and well enough alone.
  Tactics: The bulette seeks meals elsewhere, but due to his ability to 
  track prey by vibrations, quickly realizes something tastier than ants is 
  coming down the tunnel. His favorite tactic is to keep his nose just above 
  the ground (it looks like a rock) and attack by crawling up and out of the 
  ground, surprising opponents. The bulette attacks any within the chamber, 
  ignoring dwarves and pursuing halflings throughout the corridors leading 
  to this chamber. 
  Bulette: HD 12; HP 65; AC –2[21]; Atk 2 claws (3d6), bite 
  (4d12); Move 15 (burrow 3); Save 9; AL N; CL/XP 12/2000; 
  Special: burrow, leaping (no bite, attack with four claws), 
  surprise.
  At the first sign the bulette is active, the worker ants retreat to get help. 
  Unlike combat with the ankhegs and beetles, the ants stand back from this 
  fight, scattering away from the bulette unless he approaches the queen’s 
  chamber. A battle group of 3d6 workers and 2d6 warrior ants arrives 
  each minute to fight the creature.
  Afterword: Should the characters defeat the bulette, any surviving 
  character is approached by an ant warrior (it seems aggressive, but is not) 
  rear end first and sprayed with pheromones. This spray lasts for 1 hour, 
  and prevents the individual character from being attacked by any ants 
  unless the queen’s chamber is entered or any character within 10ft of an 
  ant when it is killed (the counter pheromones released with the ant’s death 
  labels the individual an enemy). 
  The Dungeon of the Sword
  The ant colony found a very easy way to expand its hive recently. 
  While tunneling, they came across a long-buried, worked stone dungeon. 
  Defeating everything residing there, they used the worked stone corridors 
  and rooms as new space without having to dig. This uncovered a strange 
  vault area that killed many of them. They now give that place a wide 
  berth. This area begins where the stairs connect down from Area 8. 
  The downstairs area is off-limits to the ants, and none come here. No 
  wandering monsters are encountered on this level.
  Keyed Areas within 
  the Dungeon of the Sword
  Area 11: Ants Don’t Build Traps!
  At the base of the stairs, the corridor continues 60ft and turns to the left. 
  The floor is filled with desiccated and crushed remains of ants, perhaps 
  a dozen or so. Bits and pieces of these are smashed flat in places, while 
  other parts seem basically intact. Careful inspection reveals the floor to be 
  composed of 1ft by 6in rectangular bricks surrounding 2ft wide hexagonal 
  bricks spaced 3ft apart. The hexagonal bricks are all pressure plates—each 
  triggers a release mechanism that unleashes a heavy spring that thrusts the 
  2ft wide hexagonal columns into the ceiling. 
  Anyone contacting a hexagonal section of the floor is thrust up into the 
  ceiling and smashed flat. Moving around the hexagonal bricks requires a 
  simple dexterity check (2d6 vs. score) if one is specifically trying to avoid 
  the hexagonal plates. Triggering these causes 6d6 points of damage unless 
  a save for half damage is made each time one is touched. There are 20 
  such sections in the 60ft hallway. Once the corridor turns, the hexagonal 
  plates are not present.
  Area 12: Something Wicked This Way 
  Comes
  The corridor continues another 30ft and opens into a 30ft by 40ft room. 
  A large, stone double door is present on the far side, opposite the corridor. 
  In the center of the room is a 5ft per side, diamond-shaped stone of pure 
  blue marble, sharply contrasting against the other reddish-brown mud 
  brick of the place.
  The Door
  In the center of the door is a large keyhole, with a cup-shaped depression 
  3 inches deep encircling the actual keyhole. The cup is surrounded by a 
  series of small quarter-inch holes. The door is carved with mysterious 
  runes and hieroglyphs. . No magic of any kind functions within 10ft of 
  the door. The Referee should read the description of the new magic item 
  below before proceeding, as magic items fail within 10ft of the door, 
  and may in fact be permanently destroyed (or not, see New Magic Item 
  Appendix). 
  Read magic (if cast 10ft or more away from the door) deciphers the 
  runes as a curse spell—it is inactive, powerless and drained of its former 
  
  23
  of ants and men
  magic. Comprehend languages (if cast more than 10ft from the door) 
  can be used to read the hieroglyphs. They pronounce a general curse 
  in an ancient tongue against all magic-users and clerics—calling them 
  “deceivers and villains”, and stating, “all of them will die in lakes of fire 
  and blood”.
  The door is locked with an extremely intricate lock and requires three 
  consecutive Open Locks checks with any single failed check requiring a 
  restart of the three checks. Further, failure triggers breakage of a hidden 
  vial and release of a poison acid-gas trap that fills the entire room in 3 
  rounds. Anyone within 5ft is automatically affected. The glass vial can be 
  detected (standard secret door check) but cannot be removed, as it is 3in 
  inside the doorframe. If the characters ask exactly how far in they seen 
  the glass object, be very clear on the distance, as this may come into play 
  when they use the key-scepter found in the coffin as described below. The 
  gas dissipates in 1 day. Anyone affected by the gas must make a save each 
  round or take 8d6 damage (save half). The gas only triggers only once. 
  The Blue Diamond
  The blue diamond in the center of the floor is a stone slab. It is not 
  set with mortar as are the remainder of the bricks that make up this 
  room. Prying it up requires a crowbar or other lever, and can easily be 
  accomplished by someone with such an implement.
  Beneath the stone is a 5ft deep, 3ft wide and 5ft long vault, containing 
  what appears to be a mummy case-like coffin. Contrary to popular opinion, 
  there is no undead within the coffin. What is does contain, however, is a 
  terrible menace known as a scarab swarm. The swarm bursts out of the 
  coffin 1d3 rounds after the diamond plate is removed or immediately if 
  the coffin is opened. It attacks the nearest opponent then moves randomly 
  towards the next closest target.
  Swarm, Scarab Beetle: HD 3; HP 20; AC 1[18]; Atk swarm (1d6 
  plus disease and painful bite); Move 6 (climb 6); Save 14; AL 
  N; CL/XP 4/120; Special: immune to slashing and piercing 
  damage, painful bite (–1 on to hit, damage, and save until 
  cured), surprise on roll of 1–3 on 1d6. (The Tome of Horrors 
  Complete, Scarlet Spider Swarm 534)
  Treasure: Inside the coffin are a golden rod worth 2500gp and the 
  bones of a man. The scepter is 3ft long, and has a large knob on one 
  end, and a large knob with a 4in key like protrusion of the other end. It 
  is carved with entwined snakes with large fangs, their heads facing the 
  end with the extended key. If used to open the door, the end with just the 
  knob works like a key and simply opens the door. The end with the key 
  protrusion does likewise, but also triggers the gas trap as described above 
  as it shatters the vial containing the acid-gas. If anyone asks, be clear that 
  the key would hit the glass object (if detected) inside the keyhole. 
  Area 13: The Sword Vault
  Once the door is opened, a corridor leads back 50ft and ends in a blank 
  wall. No magic of any kind functions in this corridor. Careful searching 
  locates a single brick that is not mortared along the base of the floor in the 
  center of the back wall. If this brick is pried loose, a keyhole is found. Not 
  surprisingly, the key like protrusion on the golden scepter fits it perfectly. 
  It is possible to open the lock without the rod, but highly difficult (Open 
  Locks -50% penalty). 
  In any case, once the lock is opened, a rumbling is heard, and the bricks 
  and mortar start to crack and fall apart. The floor and vault below start 
  to rapidly rise up towards the ceiling. In two rounds, the floor rises up 
  completely until it is flush with the roof and squashes to jelly anything 
  trapped within (5d100 points of damage per round, no save). The key to 
  escaping this trap is running rapidly back into Area 12. Anyone foolish 
  enough to stay in this corridor is dead.
  The vault itself is composed of the same blue marble, as was the 
  diamond in Area 12. In its center lies a sword wrapped in dusty red cloth. 
  The cloth falls apart if touched. This is the two-edged sword. (New Magic 
  Item Appendix)
  Escape!
  The obvious problem with getting back outside with the sword is that 
  no magic or magical abilities can be used. Hence, even if the party is 
  able to become invisible or use some other means such as druidic shape 
  change to find and enter this place, none of that works on the way out. If 
  the party has befriended, or at least have not offended, the ant hive, this 
  should not be terribly difficult. In any case, it requires the full 60-minute 
  run of the gauntlet (assuming the map was used), to escape this place. That 
  means that going out is just as difficult as coming in. Half the difficulty of 
  this adventure is getting out intact. Remember: Possession of that sword 
  is “two-edged.”
  
  24
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  Introduction
  The Hidden Oasis-Temple of Thoth brings the characters to a hidden temple 
  of Thoth, god of knowledge, magic, and travel, where they are confronted 
  with a force of invading dimensional locust-creatures and the chance to 
  get their hands on an ancient artifact. What band of heroes could resist the 
  challenge? The adventure is designed for 4-6 characters of levels 7-9.
  Background
  Deep in the desert sands lie the ruined remnants of the hidden Oasis-
  Temple of Thoth, once a thriving center of trade and magic, now abandoned 
  and forgotten. If you are playing this adventure in the Frog God Games 
  Lost Lands world setting, the temple is found in the Maighib Desert, 300 
  miles west of the Gorge of Osiris. This sand-swept region is far from the 
  more familiar environs of Bard’s Gate and the Stoneheart Valley, but the 
  characters are brought here (and might even return from here) by magical 
  means. Since the entrance to the adventure is a magical portal, the module 
  can be used in any campaign without difficulty.
  The Wax Plague
  In centuries gone by, the Oasis-Temple of Thoth was a gateway 
  between worlds, used by the priests of Thoth to travel between various 
  strongholds and libraries of the god, even on different planes of existence 
  and in strange, foreign worlds. Calamity struck, though, in the form of 
  a deadly curse brought down on the temple by a desert-cult known as 
  the Sickness Dancers. Their curse infected the entire oasis with the “Wax 
  Plague,” a body-melting disease so called because the features and bodies 
  of the afflicted began to run like melted wax as time passed. The priests of 
  Thoth, dissolving into formlessness, cast mighty wards upon the temple 
  to ensure that the plague would not spread through the planar portals and 
  dimensional gates contained in the complex. A great dome formed over 
  the oasis, coalescing from the very air as the dying priests chanted the 
  mystic words of their final, greatest spell.
  The Changing of the Priests
  The creation of the quarter-mile dome over the entire temple complex 
  prevented the Wax Plague from spreading across the sand and through 
  the portals of many dimensions, but it could not save the priests of Thoth 
  from the curse. Utterly changed in mind and body, they fought to maintain 
  the temple, preventing it from being used by dark forces as a way to move 
  from one plane of existence to another, from one world to another, from 
  one dimension to another. Only the high priest of Thoth retained his mind, 
  for he was not human; the others of the priesthood could only follow his 
  orders as best their broken minds could manage.
  The Final Battle Looming
  Now, after centuries, the last resources of the High Priest Thoth-Antef are 
  failing. Thus far he has kept the ceaseless crawling of evil from traveling 
  through the sacred gates he protects. The magic items are spent or worn out, 
  however, and those who travel in the far dimensions, intending malice and 
  harm have killed many of his priests in the frequent incursions. Now, an 
  ancient peril, the sinister beings known as Planehoppers, has broached the 
  arcane wards of the Oasis-Temple from one of their own planes of existence. 
  The Planehoppers are an insectlike species with a bizarre caste system that 
  are exploring outward to find new colonies and slaves for the hive.
  The Cry for Help
  The high priest used his last of three commands to a genie and ordered it to 
  deliver a letter to suitable adventurers. Several adventuring parties have already 
  rejected the genie’s letter, and it is getting desperate. On a whim, it selected the 
  characters as the next attempt to recruit help for the priests of the Oasis-Temple. 
  As its own petty bit of vengeance for its long servitude, the genie does not offer 
  a piece of information the high priest forgot to order it to say. As a result, the 
  characters most likely won’t know that Thoth-Antef, the high priest of Thoth in 
  the Oasis-Temple, is a massive, transparent slug the size of a horse with a brain 
  suspended in the middle of its body. Or that the living priests of Thoth are now 
  nothing more than barely intelligent gelatinous cubes.
  The Adventure Begins
  A tall man dressed in desert robes approaches you and hands 
  you a letter. He holds up three long, thin fingers, and says, “Ask 
  three questions, and then you must give one answer.”
  The letter is a papyrus scroll, which (if tested) has a definite magical 
  aura, but not an evil one. It has eight strange runes scribed across the top, 
  almost like a decoration. 
  1. A sun
  2. A moon
  3. A circle
  4. A diamond
  5. A book
  6. A sphinx
  7. A pyramid
  8. An ankh
  Hidden Oasis - 
  Temple of Thoth
  By Matt Finch and Bill Webb
  
  25
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  The rest of the letter, after the runes, reads as follows:
  “I, Thoth-Antef, once the High Priest of the Great Oasis-
  Temple of Thoth, beseech your help.
  “The Oasis-Temple of Thoth was once a thriving gateway to 
  many worlds and dimensions, a place of study and rest, where 
  travelers could exchange knowledge and trade.
  “Then came the Sickness Dancers. They brought the tallow 
  plague, melting flesh and changing those it did not kill. The 
  plague would most certainly spread into more planes of existence, 
  peeling diseased new realities into the multiverse. So we sealed 
  the temple, calling on great forces to create a massive dome of 
  spells and stone, woven into a net that the tallow plague could 
  not sneak through. And so the plague died alongside us, leaving 
  only the changed ones.
  “We have worked to protect the sealed sanctuary of Thoth, as the 
  wards and protections have worn down through the years. The portals 
  are constantly being tested by those who would venture through them 
  looking for prey, or for new lands to conquer. Since the days of the 
  temple’s greatness, the worlds outside the gates have changed. Some 
  are new and unmapped, some have gone bad. It would not be good for 
  the portals to reopen all at once, as they once were.
  “The Planehoppers of the Kharn Drauk are at the portals. My 
  resources are spent. Aid me in keeping them back, and I will give 
  you a great gift in the name of Thoth — the Scorpion of Sekhmet. 
  Go to the arch and speak the words, ‘Orthanu, Thoth, Orhaptu.’
  — “Thoth-Antef”
  The djinni’s name is Periaptes, and he is anxious to fulfill this last 
  mission and be free. Nevertheless, he fairly and scrupulously answers 
  the first three questions he is asked. After this, he simply asks the 
  characters if they accept or decline. If they decline, he holds out his 
  hand to take the letter back, since he cannot be free until he finds 
  rescuers for Thoth-Antef. Unless he is specifically asked a question 
  about the shape, form, condition or appearance of the priests, he does 
  not mention that the high priest is a giant slug, and the ordinary priests 
  are reduced to semi-intelligent skeletons whose flesh has swelled into 
  gelatinous cubes.
  The characters may have some knowledge of Sekhmet, Thoth, and even 
  the Scorpion of Sekhmet, but if they do not, they might ask the genie.
  Sekhmet
  Sekhmet is the healer of the gods, a woman with the head of a lioness. Her 
  symbol is a sun disc with a serpent twined around it, and she is worshipped 
  by healers. However, the goddess has a darker side as well. She came into 
  being as part of a great vengeance of the gods upon humanity, and it was 
  she who slaughtered the humans and drank their blood. In addition to her 
  healing side, she is a goddess of retribution, pestilence, and searing heat. 
  Her breath is the hot desert wind, and she slays her enemies with arrows 
  of fire. In fact, it was Sekhmet who sent the Sickness Dancers to Thoth’s 
  temple in retribution for taking two Scorpions. 
  Thoth
  Thoth is, as stated in the letter, a god of magic, travel, and knowledge. 
  He has a human body with the long neck and head of an ibis (a bird similar 
  to a crane or stork). In addition to being the messenger and record-keeper 
  of the gods, Thoth is the creator of magic and of speech. His temples 
  usually contain libraries, and are rumored to contain portals from one 
  plane of existence to another.
  
  26
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  The Scorpion of Sekhmet
  The Scorpion of Sekhmet was thought to be legend, but the letter of 
  Thoth-Antef certainly indicates that it might be a real artifact. It is said to 
  be a hollow iron shell in the shape of a scorpion, large enough for several 
  people to enter within. From inside, the scorpion follows the orders it is 
  given, walking and even attacking things as directed by the controller. As 
  the characters discover, two of the Scorpions are in the Oasis-Temple.
  If the characters speak the words, “Orthanu, Thoth, Orhaptu,” they are 
  immediately drawn into the Plane of Shadows (see below).
  Realm of Shadows
  You feel a sudden, powerful twist, and find that you are 
  standing 6ft away from a ghostly image of yourself. It glows 
  with what looks like reflected light, but this place is dark, with 
  no visible source of light to reflect. It is the darkness of shadows, 
  not the dark of night, but the sun seems to have disappeared. The 
  only sign of it is the light that somehow reflects on these bright 
  shadows of yourselves.
  These “bright shadows” are the characters’ actual bodies, as seen from 
  the shadow plane they have entered. They can see the reflected sun on the 
  bodies because sunlight is indeed shining on them — but in the Material 
  Plane, not here. If they want to return to the Material Plane, all they 
  need to do is step into the images, and they return. If they step into the 
  wrong image, they switch bodies. The physical characteristics of the new 
  body remain, but the mental characteristics are those of the body’s new 
  inhabitant.
  The genie does not follow them into the Plane of Shadows. Once the 
  characters say the magic words, the genie is freed from servitude and 
  disappears.
  Once they survey what is around them:
  Everything appears in shades of gray rather than colors, and 
  you can see vast, forbidding pyramids in the distance, black 
  silhouettes against a dark gray horizon. Clouds roll like octopus 
  ink in the strangely low sky of this place. Directly in front of you 
  stands an archway.
  The characters might be discussing various possibilities at this point. 
  Exploring the Plane of Shadow is a bad idea, although not impossible. 
  This particular area is infested with shadows and other creatures of the 
  dark, and explorers begin encountering them with some frequency if 
  they set out from the archway in a random direction. The Sword of Air 
  adventure by Frog God Games has a significant level of detail on the 
  Plane of Shadow. Most likely, even a determined expedition turns back at 
  this point. If not, then you’re running an adventure in the Shadow Plane 
  and we at Frog God Games salute you as the type of Referee that isn’t 
  afraid to wing it!
  Eventually the characters get to the point where they are ready to 
  inspect the archway.
  This is a strange, 10ft-tall metal archway. It is smooth to the 
  touch and feels slightly warmer than the ambient air. There is 
  enough room in it for two men to stand abreast. The metal itself 
  has an odd-looking bluish tint and is covered in dozens of crisp, 
  un-weathered hieroglyphs and runes of a strange and ancient 
  make. No rust or other damage appears to have affected the 
  metal, although you somehow feel that it has been here for a 
  long time. 
  Any attempt to damage the archway fails, short of cutting away at it 
  with a +4 or better magical weapon. Doing so creates a large, magical 
  explosion, teleporting all within 20ft to a random plane. The whole 
  radiates strong magic and the structure also seems immune to any magic 
  cast at it. 
  This archway is in fact a gate to the Oasis-Temple of Thoth. Careful 
  inspection of the runes reveals that eight of the symbols match those present 
  on the letter the player characters received from the djinn messenger. A 
  creature desiring to use the gate must first touch each symbol inscribed on 
  the archway as noted in the letter. Once touched with bare flesh, the runes 
  glow a deep red color. If touched out of order, the runes (all of them thus 
  far touched) cease to glow. Once all eight runes are touched (in order), the 
  teleportal effects of the gate are activated. Speaking the activation words 
  in the letter causes the interior of the archway to glimmer with an opaque, 
  silvery sheen. The sheen remains active for 3 minutes. Anyone stepping 
  through the archway while the sheen is present is teleported to the Oasis 
  gate.
  The Oasis
  After stepping through the archway, the party finds themselves in an 
  entirely different place, having been teleported into a large oasis in the 
  desert. Behind them is a gate identical to the one that brought them here. 
  The method of use for this gate is to touch the letters inscribed on the letter 
  in the exact reverse order that brought them here. The glow effects of the 
  runes and the activation words remain the same.
   A large expanse of hot, green space now surrounds them. The area is 
  covered with a myriad of palm, date and olive trees, as well as a sundry 
  of large grasses around its edge. Beyond the greenery, a vast, expansive 
  
  27
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  
  28
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  brown and tan, sandy desert can be seen in all directions. In the center of 
  the oasis is a quarter-mile-long, 300ft wide pool of living water. The lake 
  here is clean and clear, and quite safe, although it does contain a wide 
  diversity of small invertebrates, insects and fish. The lake is spring-fed, 
  and the water is fairly cold (60 degrees Fahrenheit).
  The temperature ranges from the high 80s at night to more than 120 
  degrees Fahrenheit during the day, making it uncomfortable for anyone 
  wearing heavy armor. Dotting the area are the remains of what appears 
  to once have been a village of perhaps 100 souls, although the fallen and 
  ruined nature of the structures is evident. The buildings are constructed of 
  mud-brick and mortar, most are missing roofs (palm fronds were used for 
  most) and have portions of the original structures collapsed. It appears no 
  one has lived here for centuries.
  Tiny jerboa (desert mice) hop around the fallen bricks and through the 
  grass, and the occasional dung beetle can be seen, rolling its load toward 
  the north. A brick path leads in a circle around the lake, and anyone 
  traveling through the brush off the path has a 10% chance per minute of 
  encountering a horned viper or deathstalker scorpion (equal chances 
  for either). Both of these nasty vermin live here in some numbers, and 
  are potentially lethal. If they achieve surprise, they attack a random 
  character (surprise indicates that a player character stepped on one of 
  these creatures, causing it to attack).
  Snake, Horned Viper: HD 1d6hp; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (1 plus 
  poison); Move 18; Save 18; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; Special: lethal 
  poison (+2 save). (Monstrosities 438)
  Scorpion, Deathstalker: HD 1hp; AC 6[13]; Atk sting (poison); 
  Move 9; Save 18; AL N; CL/XP 1/15; Special: surprise on 1-5 
  on d6, sickness venom (save at +2 or -4 on all roll for two 
  days, second save or die), ignores armor. 
  Those following the path can easily avoid (or crush) any vermin they 
  encounter. A number of interesting areas are detailed below.
  Area 1: Random Houses
  Several old, ruined buildings appear to have once been houses. Most 
  have 1–2 rooms and are made of mud-brick, with no roofs. Within the 
  perimeter of the oasis are 22 such buildings. None of these is of particular 
  interest, although each contains 1d3 of the following:
  1d12
  Result
  1
  A horned viper
  2
  Pottery shards
  3
  A grave
  4
  Intact glassware or pottery
  5
  Old, rotted and brittle tools with copper fittings
  6
  Bone fragments and skeletal remains
  7
  A strange idol of a slug-like being/god (once only)
  8
  A cameo of gold (once only)
  9
  A large necklace of beads
  10
  A copper knife (once only)
  11
  A stone or fired-clay amulet
  12
  A gemstone amulet or small statue (twice only)
  Horned Viper: These creatures attack if they gain surprise, else they 
  retreat away from anything that notices them or spots them first, slinking 
  off into the brush. Stats as above.
  Pottery Shards: These are worthless, but could at the Referee’s 
  convenience be used to convey clues or other relevant details about the 
  slug (see below) or invaders.
  Graves: These usually (90% chance) contain the mummified remains 
  of: a human (01–80%), a cat (81–90%) or some other animal (91–00%) 
  of the Referee’s choice buried under 4ft to 6ft of sand, and marked by 
  a stone marker. If a human corpse is indicated, it wears mummy beads 
  and jewelry worth 1d6x100gp. Cats are typically covered in beaten gold 
  (worth 4d6gp). If a cat grave is defiled, the desecrator has a 10% chance 
  of being subjected to a curse from Bast, the cat goddess (save or take a –2 
  penalty to all saving throws for 2 weeks).
  Intact Glassware or Pottery: These containers occasionally (10%) are 
  sealed and contain either grain (01–50%), wine (51–80%), oil (81–90%), 
  internal organs (yuck!, 91–99%) or gold dust (00%, worth 1d6x100gp). 
  The vessel itself is worth 1d6x1d100gp, and double that to a sage or 
  collector.
  Old Tools: Nothing of interest here
  Bone Fragments: See old tools
  Strange Idol of a Slug-like Being: This idol is 3 inches long and made 
  of polished quartz, with a strange reddish-white inclusion in its head. If 
  divination spells are cast upon it, it radiates good and magic as well. The 
  idol acts as a luckstone (grants +1 to all saving throws and rolls to hit) as 
  long as it is carried. The item attunes to its bearer.
  Cameo of Gold: This cameo can be of any relevant Khemitian god or 
  goddess, or it could be a scarab beetle or cat at the Referee’s choice. It is 
  worth 300gp.
  Large Beaded Necklace: This necklace is composed of copper, gold, 
  shells and semi-precious stones. It is worth 1d6x10gp.
  Copper Knife: This knife, while made of copper, seems sharp and 
  durable. The knife detects as magical if a spell is cast upon it. The knife 
  counts as a +0 dagger, +4 vs. extraplanar creatures. Its bone handle is 
  engraved with an image of Ptah, the creator god, as well as stars, moons 
  and other symbols.
  Stone or Clay Amulet: Cute but worthless.
  Gemstone Amulet: Two of these can be found, with an equal chance 
  of finding either. The first is in the shape of a scarab beetle and is carved 
  out of pure rose quartz (worth 50gp). The second is a perfect sphere of 
  a strange red substance and feels slightly warm to the touch, although 
  it does not radiate magic. These are charge crystals and can be used to 
  power a Scorpion of Sekhmet. They are fully charged. The Scorpions are 
  found in the temple.
  Area 2: The Granary
  This large building is almost completely intact except for its door, which 
  has long-since rotted away. This building and the temple alone have roofs 
  of stone slabs. The building stands 20ft high, and measures 80ft by 200ft. 
  It is composed of the same mud-brick as the others, but is considerably 
  more solid. The doorway stands on one of the 80ft sections, directly in 
  the center of the wall. Unlike most of the other buildings here, this one 
  is inhabited. Upon approaching within 30ft of the structure’s entrance, 
  the player characters must make a surprise check. Success indicates that 
  they notice movement within. Failure indicates that what is within notices 
  them, and comes out to attack.
  The building contains a nest of scorpions of unusual size, along with 
  hundreds of smaller ones. These creatures lurk here to keep out of the 
  hot sun, going out at night to hunt in the open desert. A total of 10 large 
  scorpions and 3 scorpion swarms are here. They attack anything they 
  perceive as food. They have no tactics, per se, and just attack the closest 
  opponent.
  
  29
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  Scorpion, Large (10): HD 2; HP 10x4, 12x2, 14, 8, 15; Atk 2 
  pincers (1d4), sting (1 plus poison); Move 9; Save 16; AL N; 
  CL/XP 4/120; Special: lethal poison (+2 on save).
  Swarm, Scorpion (3): HD 4; HP 20, 24, 18; AC 8[11]; Atk swarm 
  (1d6 plus poison); Move 9; Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 4/120; 
  Special: poison (2d12 damage, save avoids). (The Tome of 
  Horrors Complete 532, “Swarm, Poisonous Frog).
  Area 3: Lugal House
  The lugal (chieftain) of the village once lived here. From the nature of 
  the building, it is apparent that it was something of an important structure, 
  as it is far larger and contains six rooms. The building itself, while still 
  made of mud-brick and roofless, has 10ft tall walls. The structure contains 
  a grand entry hall (60ft by 40ft), as well as five attached smaller rooms 
  (four sleeping chambers and a kitchen with a fireplace/oven), two each on 
  the sides and one on the back. These rooms are all 20ft square.
  The entry chamber itself has a carved stone chair sitting at the far end 
  opposite the entrance. The chair is plain, without any carvings or paint. 
  It is solid granite and weighs about 500 pounds. If the chair could be 
  transported, its fine workmanship makes it worth 700gp. 
  The walls of the entry chamber are painted and carved with numerous 
  hieroglyphs and pictograms. Careful inspection or translation (magical or 
  mundane) of the writings reveals that most of the writings are prayers 
  to various deities (Ptah, Ra, Horus), complete with curses and pleas for 
  protection against the evil god Set. One prayer praises the god Thoth for 
  sending a guardian being to defend the village against the evils of the 
  night god and his servants, and references the “guardian of the temple.” 
  The pictograms associated with this prayer show a large, whitish-gray 
  circle within an oval — but strangely, only the inner circle resembles a 
  brain. This is, of course, a reference to the slug-being in the temple. Other 
  pictograms show the god Thoth teaching the people about a sundry of 
  things — clearly their ascent from being cavemen came from this deity, 
  and he was the teacher, or bringer of knowledge.
  If the chair is moved, it can be noted that the bricks on the floor are of 
  a slightly different color than those covering the rest of the chamber. They 
  also lack the mortar present in the rest of the room. If the bricks are pried 
  loose, a sarcophagus is found buried in a 8ft by 5ft hole beneath.
  The coffin itself measures 7ft by 4ft, and is carved in bas-relief of a 
  kingly-looking individual. The coffin lid is sealed with a strange waxy, 
  fragrant material (myrrh). If the sarcophagus is removed from the pit, it 
  can be opened. In ancient writing (requiring a read languages spell or 
  thieving skill) on the lid of the coffin are the words:
  “Disturb not the rest of the Lugal, lest you join the dust of the desert 
  forever”
  The Sarcophagus
  If the myrrh is removed and the seal broken, any within 20ft must 
  make a save or be affected by mummy rot. Inside the sarcophagus are 
  the mummified remains of the lugal. He wears a bone-and-lapis necklace 
  under a baked clay death mask. The lugal has been dead for more than 
  600 years, likely preventing speak with dead attempts. The death mask 
  is painted with his image (worth 20gp), and the necklace is woven with 
  gold thread and is quite valuable (300gp). Wrapped inside the mummy is 
  a long rod of meteoric iron topped with a large piece of amber embedded 
  with a strange insect-like creature. The rod serves as a +1 mace of rot 
  grubs (Appendix). Its command word can be gained only by magic as it 
  is lost in time.
  Area 4: The Alabaster Wall
  Unlike the other structures present in the oasis, this 30ft long, 4ft high 
  wall is made of alabaster blocks. The wall is intricately painted and carved, 
  with hundreds of inscriptions and pictograms. Trying to decipher all of 
  them would take weeks, unless one knew what they were looking for. 
  Should the player characters inquire about the runes present on the letter, 
  or if they look for any references from the lugal’s house associated with a 
  “temple guardian” or “Thoth,” they locate several inscriptions of a large 
  sluglike creature providing food, teaching them how to craft and grow 
  grain, and fighting a battle against insectlike minions of the evil god, Set.
  Area 5: The Sphinx
  This statue stands 10ft high and is inscribed on both sides with ancient 
  writing (requiring a read languages spell or thieving skill). At its base are 
  the words: “Those who seek the gods must show the wisdom to see them 
  first.” Translating the writing on the sides of the sphinx reveals two riddles 
  that allow the player characters to select the correct icons to activate the 
  gate present on the island and gain egress into the collapsed temple. 
  On one side, the writing reads:
  “I am what all men seek, yet many will never gain
  “I serve the wise, and punish the foolish
  “I make men strong, yet strengthen only their minds
  “Without me all things that wither to dust are forgotten”
  The answer is knowledge — associated with Thoth, the god of 
  knowledge.
  The riddle on the second side reads:
  “I protect the wise, and slay the evil
  “I am not a god, yet protect them and their house
  “I serve the teacher and teach the servants”
  The answer is the guardian — the sluglike creature depicted in the 
  lugal’s house and on the alabaster wall.
  Armed with these bits of knowledge, the characters should be able to 
  enter the Temple of Thoth from there.
  Area 6: The Boathouse
  This rickety wooden structure sits on stone piles near the edge of the 
  lake. The wood is old and brittle, and cannot support the weight of any 
  creature. Anything stepping on the remaining portions of the wooden, 
  overwater deck in excess of 30 pounds crashes through the structure and 
  lands in 1d6+2ft of water after a 6ft fall (no damage). It also creates a great 
  deal of noise, alerting the beasts in the lake that dinner has arrived.
  Adjacent to the structure, an ancient boat still floats, wedged between 
  two of the support columns that hold up the structure. The boat holds up 
  to 8 man-sized creatures and, while old and dry, it was treated with lacquer 
  and oils, and retains its ability as a (albeit fragile) boat. The boat is 20ft 
  long and 4ft wide.
  Area 7: The Lake
  The lake is more than 300ft across and a quarter-mile long. Its edges 
  are overgrown with bulrushes and other aquatic plants. Frogs, crawfish 
  and insects are present everywhere, creating a great deal of noise at 
  night. Several species of small fish are present in the lake. These fish are 
  extremely colorful and create darting patterns as small schools react to 
  stimulus (such as splashing or swimming). 
  The lake itself is spring fed and is cooler by far than the surrounding air. 
  It is more than 100ft deep in the center, with its edges dropping off rapidly 
  in a clifflike manner. The water is clear to about 20ft, and rocks can be 
  seen dotting the shallows.   
  Living deep in the lake is a family of 6 dragon turtles. These creatures 
  have adapted to life in the desert, having everything they need here (food, 
  heat and water). Being amphibious, they survived over the years by self-
  
  30
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  reproducing (adults can fertilize their own eggs). When the lake becomes 
  too big for them, the largest either kills or drives off the rest, sending 
  them off into the desert (usually to die), and thus maintaining the fragile 
  ecological balance of this small ecosystem.
  Due to the small habitat, the dragon turtles are also somewhat stunted 
  compared with their usual size. Currently living here are a female and her 
  brood of 5 juveniles. They breathe air but remain submerged most of the 
  time, hunting gazelle and camels in the desert at night. They attack only if 
  the water is disturbed (e.g. by splashing and other noisy activity). Skilled, 
  unarmored swimmers have a 50% chance of attracting 1d3 random turtles. 
  Boating across gives them only a 10% chance of being attracted. The 
  Referee should use his judgment about how much noise the party makes 
  and have the turtles react accordingly.
  Dragon Turtle, Adult Female: HD 11; HP 55; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d8), bite (3d10); Move 3 (swim 9); Save 4; AL N; CL/
  XP 13/2300; Special: break ships, breath weapon (3/day, 
  90ft long, 30ft wide steam, 55 damage, save half). 
  Dragon Turtle Hatchlings (5): HD 2; HP 10x2, 12x2, 14; AC 
  4[15]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), bite (1d10), Move 1 (swim 6); Save 
  16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none.
  If they notice the party, the turtles attack anything attempting to cross 
  the lake. They are immediately aware of the presence of “food” if the 
  boathouse platform is damaged and something or someone falls into the 
  lake. 
  Area 8: The Island
  This 60ft diameter island sits near the center of the lake, and rises up 
  out of it about 4ft above the water. The island is heavily vegetated, as is 
  the rest of this place, and a large grove of olive trees stands near its center, 
  completely obscuring vision beyond a few feet in. Access to the center 
  of the island requires moving through this heavy vegetation although the 
  scorpions and snakes present in the rest of the oasis are absent here (there 
  were no frogs to carry them across on their backs). In the center of the tree 
  stand is an archway quite similar to the one that brought the characters to 
  the oasis in the first place. The area is so overgrown that the dragon turtles 
  ignore anyone on the island unless they make a major ruckus.
  The archway is a gate to inside of the temple of Thoth. Activating it 
  requires speaking the same words as the prior two archways; however, 
  the runes present on the initial two archways are not present here. Only 
  by touching the symbol of Thoth and the symbol of the guardian (two 
  symbols among hundreds inscribed on this archway) and then only by 
  speaking the activation words from the letter, can this gate be activated. 
  Once activated, its surface shimmers, as do the previous gates, and anyone 
  stepping through is teleported into the Old Temple.
  Area 9: The Old Temple
  This building is a vast dome, at least a quarter of a mile across, 
  made of monolithic blocks of stone. The dome appears to be 
  metal of some kind, an impossible feat of architecture without the 
  use of tremendous magical forces. As you draw closer, you can 
  see that the entire building shimmers with some kind of energy. 
  It almost seems to ripple like slow-moving water. Enormous 
  double doors 20ft tall stand open, and you can see two desiccated 
  corpses just inside the dome, people who apparently died while 
  trying to push the doors closed.
  The entire domed temple is protected by the field of magical force the 
  priests invoked more than a century in the past. Although the characters 
  can see into the temple through the open gates, they cannot get in. 
  Touching the force field is unpleasant, and it is an impenetrable wall. The 
  characters cannot touch the doors, the bodies inside, or even the wall, 
  since the field is placed about 1ft to the outside of the temple’s structure. 
  Walking around the temple tells the characters that there are no entrances 
  other than this one. There are no breaks in the walls, although some of the 
  stones look a bit crumbled.
  The characters will likely try peering into the temple to see as far as they 
  can, and the force field does not prevent this. They can see 300ft into the unlit 
  shadows, but beyond that all is darkness. What they see is a broad hall leading 
  in, 100ft wide, the walls on the sides painted with pictures from top to bottom. 
  After 150ft or so, the walls of the hallway widen out, and the characters are 
  looking into what looks like an open area. A double row of columns, rising 
  high to the dome above, begins not far beyond the point where the hallway 
  opens to the wide chamber. The double line of pillars goes farther than they 
  can see into the building, disappearing into the shadows.
  Oasis-Temple of Thoth 
  Map Key
  Area T-1: 
  Portal to the Outside World
  When the first of the adventurers comes through the portal into the 
  Oasis-Temple, this is where the character arrives. The character is looking 
  southward, and the first, immediate items of interest are those statues of 
  the ibis-headed priests:
  You reappear in a dimly lit place with a vast, open space in 
  front of you and some sort of large figures looming behind you. 
  Suddenly one of them moves. Roll initiative.
  Just kidding. It’s actually just a statue, and part of it just clicks back into 
  its normal position after the portal functioned.
  The figures looming over the character are 3 statues of ibis-headed 
  priests of Thoth. This is the first Lotus-Portal of Thoth the characters 
  encounter. The movement was one of the ibis heads moving from the 
  “on” position into the “off” position. Until the heads are reset to the right 
  positions, the gate does not function.
  The characters encounter this portal-statue arrangement — three ibis-
  priests standing behind a lotus platform — in several places throughout 
  the Oasis-Temple. See the Sidebox for general information about their 
  function and construction.
  Once the characters look at the surroundings, after dealing with the 
  shock of the statue, the following is a description of what is seen looking 
  south from the Lotus-Portal:
  Somewhere overhead is a ceiling, although it is barely visible 
  and is probably a 100ft high. A 100ft or so ahead of you are two 
  massive statues that have their backs turned to you. Beyond them, 
  you can make out two parallel lines of incredibly tall columns 
  that seem to reach all the way to the high ceiling of this bizarre, 
  epically proportioned place. To your left and right are curving 
  walls 150ft or so away, massive structures that apparently rise all 
  the way to the top of the chamber.
  At this point, the character make first contact with the mind of the 
  High Priest Thoth-Antef, but it is a very weak nudging at the characters’ 
  consciousness. He begs them to hurry to Area T-2.
  
  31
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  
  32
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  Area T-2: 
  Statues of Thoth and Sekhmet
  These two south-facing statues are 50ft tall with a diameter of 
  10ft or so. One is of a man with the head of an ibis holding a scroll 
  in one hand and a quill pen in the other hand. The other statue 
  is of a lioness-headed woman wearing a red dress and holding 
  4 scorpions in her clasped hands. Between the two statues is a 
  massive, 20ft long translucent slug. It is reared upward so that 
  its front half is upright, and you can see a brain pulsing in the 
  almost-transparent flesh of its chest.
  The translucent slug is Thoth-Antef, high priest of Thoth. He is one 
  of the giant slugs of P’Nakh, although he has no knowledge of the 
  place whose name he bears. He was hatched in a forgotten basement 
  under a temple of Set in a long-destroyed city, and has no knowledge 
  of his forebears. If the characters kill him, they face the assault of the 
  Planehoppers without assistance from the changed priests, and they may 
  have trouble getting back to their point of origin. Nevertheless, it is a 
  definite possibility.
  Thoth-Antef communicates telepathically with the characters, 
  informing them that he is the high priest of Thoth. He thanks them 
  for answering his plea, and begs them to stay and help him fight off 
  an invasion of the evil Planehoppers. He explains that he will reward 
  them with a great artifact held in the temple should they assist, and 
  above all that he means no harm. Now then, any player worth his 
  salt likely won’t trust a giant slug with a pulsing red brain, so the 
  creature allows himself to be enspelled with divination spells if the 
  party wishes to do so. If they attack him, he tries to use his insanity 
  and adoration blasts to quiet some of them so he can persuade the 
  others that he means no harm. Thoth-Antef detects as Lawful and 
  good if the appropriate spells are cast, and he truly does wish the 
  party’s assistance.
  He explains that his power is weakened, and that he is near death from 
  holding back the invasion. He further explains that the player characters 
  can use two artifacts — Scorpions of Sekhmet — to assist in the battle. 
  Finally, he tells them that not only can he instruct them on the use of the 
  scorpions, but that should they succeed in fending off the Planehoppers, as 
  a reward they may take one of the machines with them, along with a fully 
  charged power crystal (the “gasoline” for the scorpions). 
  Should they persist in attacking him, he fights to the best of his ability. 
  If slain, it takes the characters one month to figure out how to effectively 
  use the scorpions — and thus they must fight the Planehoppers without the 
  aid of the gelatinous cubes and the slug to gain the treasure.
  Should all else fail, he offers the party the temple treasure as well, a 
  total of five small chests of iron.
  The first chest holds a green linen sack with a carved ivory comb (32 
  sp) and an elegant silver-and-pink necklace. The necklace has lengths of 
  delicate silver chain connecting clusters of pink gems — pink pearls set 
  between pairs of rose quartz beads. Nine such groups of gems are on this 
  necklace (1335gp).
  The second chest holds a polished oak box (8sp). Inside the box lie two 
  pieces of jewelry. A shimmering necklace with a triple strand of silver 
  holds a sparkling rose quartz oval set in a silver frame. From this hangs a 
  lustrous gray pearl (necklace, 189gp). Beside this, a faceted stone of deep 
  burgundy (garnet) is held in a plain silvery frame (platinum). The stone, 
  an oval the size of a lady’s thumbnail, hangs on a double chain of platinum 
  (necklace, 1530gp).
  The third chest has a small black wooden box. Inside, on linen padding, 
  rests a silver pendant strung on a set of five thin silk cords. The pendant 
  is roughly diamond shaped but its frame is made of swooping lines rather 
  than straight. In the center of the frame dangles another diamond-shaped 
  piece of silver, in which is set a gleaming black opal the size of a man’s 
  thumbnail (necklace, 1790gp). 
  In the next chest lies a polished flat box with a reddish hue (2gp). 
  Inside the box, a small piece of pink silk (1gp) is wrapped around a 
  multi-strand necklace of hundreds of tiny freshwater pearls with accents 
  of color provided by small, faceted garnets and rose quartz (necklace, 
  2522gp).
  The final chest holds a blue silk pouch (2gp) with a double-strand 
  necklace made of small matching garnet beads (necklace, 2246gp). 
  Instead of a pendant, the necklace is accented with a cylindrical silver 
  filigree slide.
  Thoth-Antef, Giant Slug of P’Nahk: HD 8; HP 40; AC 7[12]; Atk 
  bite (2d8); Move 9; Save 8; AL L; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: 
  surprise on 1-3, blast of insanity, immune to blunt weapons. 
  (Monstrosities 202)
  The Planehopper Assault
  The main event of this adventure is a battle to keep the Planehopper 
  horde (their scouts, anyway) from taking control of the Oasis-Temple of 
  Thoth so they can repair and use the temple’s portals. If the Planehoppers 
  conquer the temple (the characters refuse to stay, flee the battle, or are 
  slain) they fortify it and use it as a staging area for the imperialistic 
  expansion of their hive. 
  Time
  From the point when the characters arrive, the Planehoppers arrive 
  in 72 hours (3 days). If Thoth-Antef survives meeting the characters, he 
  
  33
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  predicts that the time frame is 30–80 hours. Thus, the first phase of the 
  adventure inside the temple is in preparation for the assault. It may be 
  that the characters want to root around in the wreckage, build traps, and 
  make complicated plans. If not, and they just want to let the battle roll, 
  let it roll. Don’t force the pace to slow down if the players want to jump 
  straight into the fight.
  If they want to prepare, emphasize that they don’t know exactly 
  how long they have, give them the player map, and let them plan. An 
  experienced Referee knows that whenever players are given a map 
  and a lot of stuff to work with, no final plan ever emerges until you, as 
  the Referee, announce that they have (for example) 2 minutes before 
  everything begins, ready or not. An hour of real time is probably 
  enough time to give them, or even 30 minutes if the group has time 
  constraints.
  Where the Planehoppers Emerge
  Once 72 in-game hours pass, roll 1d10 to see which portal the 
  Planehoppers break open: 1=A, 2=B, 3=C, 4=D, 5=E, 6=F, 7=G, 8=H, 9=I, 
  10=J. The portal initially used by the characters to enter the Oasis-Temple 
  has no letter because it does not lead to a dimension the Planehoppers can 
  tunnel through.
  Timetable and Psychic Shockwave
  As Thoth-Antef may have warned the characters, the first effect when 
  a Planehopper tunnel breaks through into reality is a blast of magical and 
  psychic energy. This is the outward explosion of the planar residue being 
  pushed in front of the psychic tunneling, like rubble in front of a drill bit. 
  The drill bit itself packs quite a wallop when it suddenly breaks through 
  into the Material Plane. Any physical material within a 50ft radius of the 
  portal disintegrates (the hex containing the portal, and all adjacent hexes).
  Round 1: Randomly determined portal (Breach #1) explodes with the 
  force of psychic tunneling.
  Round 2: 4 warriors emerge from Breach #1. 
  Round 3: 1 overseer and 2 channelers emerge from Breach #1.
  Round 4: 2 laborers emerge from Breach #1
  Round 5: Randomly determined portal (Breach #2) explodes with the 
  force of psychic tunneling. 
  Round 6: 4 warriors emerges from Breach #2
  Round 7: 1 overseer and 2 channelers emerge from Breach #2.
  Round 8: 2 laborers emerge from Breach #2
  Rounds 9-11: Nothing emerges.
  Round 12: Randomly determined portal (Breach #3) explodes with the 
  force of psychic tunneling.
  Round 13: 4 warriors emerge from Breach #3.
  Round 14: 1 overseer and 2 channelers emerge from Breach #3.
  Round 15: 2 laborers emerge from Breach #3.
  Round 16: 1 governor with 2 channelers emerges from one of the three 
  breaches (roll 1d3) carried by 4 laborers.
  Battle Roster of the Planehoppers
  These Planehoppers are a reconnaissance-in-force, led by a governor 
  in charge of 3 overseers, 12 warriors, 4 channelers, and 10 laborers. 
  Since they are exploring, no investigation follows their disappearance, or 
  at least, not for some time. See the Appendix for additional details on the 
  Planehoppers.
  Planehopper Attackers at Breach No. 1:
  1 overseer
  2 channelers 
  4 warriors 
  2 laborers 
  Planehopper Attackers at Breach No. 2:
  1 overseer 
  2 channelers 
  4 warriors
  2 laborers
  Planehopper Attackers at Breach No. 3:
  1 overseer
  2 channelers
  4 warriors
  2 laborers 
  Planehopper Command Group:
  1 governor
  2 channelers 
  4 laborers 
  Planehopper, Channeler (8): HD 4; AC 4[15]; Atk short sword 
  (1d6); Move 12; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: project 
  psychic force, telepathic links.
  Planehopper, Governor: HD 7; AC 4[15]; Atk none; Move 0; 
  Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: levitation, telepathic 
  hive-bond.
  Planehopper, Laborer (10): HD 3; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 claws (1d3); 
  Move 18; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 3/60; Special: telepathic with 
  others of the same species. 
  Planehopper, Overseer (3): HD 6; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 longswords 
  (1d8); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: 
  telepathic hive-bond.
  Planehopper, Warrior (12): HD 5; AC 0[19]; Atk 2 longswords 
  (1d8); Move 24; Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: leap to 
  attack, telepathic hive-bond.
  Thoth-Antef’s Briefing
  Provided that the characters don’t slay him as a monster, Thoth-Antef 
  briefs the characters on the following points:
  • Thoth-Antef is the last high priest of Thoth in this Temple. He quickly 
  explains that a plague struck the temple and that the priests closed it off 
  magically to keep the plague from spreading through the temple’s magic 
  portals into other dimensions. The plague killed many and turned the rest 
  into gelatinous cubes, never dying of old age. He himself has not reached 
  the natural end of his lifetime and was not affected by the plague. If the 
  characters inquire further, he can tell them about the Sickness Dancers 
  and that this was centuries ago, and other details from the background, but 
  these details are of little interest to most players.
  • The attackers are a species known as “Planehoppers” because they 
  resemble locusts and behave like locusts too, ravaging the worlds they 
  invade and enslaving entire populations. Their word for themselves 
  is unpronounceable. They have been psychically drilling through the 
  substance of the planes of existence, and they are at the verge of breaking 
  through one of the portals of the Oasis-Temple. He doesn’t know which 
  one of the portals. Unless the characters use some divinatory powers of 
  their own, they won’t know that the Planehoppers are working through 3 
  portals at once — until the drilling breaks through.
  • Thoth-Antef himself is already so stricken by his efforts to hold back 
  the Planehoppers that he can no longer do much more than broadcast the 
  characters’ instructions to the changed priests. He can still bite but cannot 
  manage a psychic blast anymore (he would need a week’s rest, at least). 
  He can’t move very fast, either.
  • There are 4 “Changed Priests” in the temple, the lucky (or perhaps 
  
  34
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  unlucky) servants of Thoth who were changed into gelatinous cubes by 
  the Wax Plague instead of being killed by it. As long as the characters 
  have Thoth-Antef to speak mentally to the cubes, they can communicate 
  instructions. The original skeletons of the changed priests are visible in the 
  gelatin of the cubes, and they are wearing holy symbols of Thoth. Without 
  the holy symbols, they cannot “hear” Thoth-Antef’s mental commands.
  Gelatinous Cube (4): HD 4; HP 21, 24, 20, 22; Atk slam (2d4 plus 
  paralysis); Move 6; Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: immune 
  to lightning and cold, paralysis for 6 turns (save avoids).
  The characters can decide where Thoth-Antef and the changed priests 
  start the battle (e.g. the players decide where all the allied pieces start).
  If the characters attack the priest, it tries to retreat rather than attack, 
  heading toward Area T-2.
  Area T-3: Broken Portals
  A white marble lotus-flower rests on the floor like a petaled 
  bowl 5ft across. Three statues of ibis-headed men stand behind 
  the lotus, holding hands. 
  These portals are deactivated or in some cases physically broken by the 
  priests of Thoth to prevent the Wax Plague from spreading through them 
  into other realities or planes of existence.
  Area T-4: The Gate of Hermopolis
  A white marble lotus-flower rests on the floor like a petaled 
  bowl 5ft across. Three statues of ibis-headed men stand behind 
  the lotus, holding hands. The one in the center looks into the sky, 
  and the other two look down at the lotus. 
  This gate leads to the city of Hermopolis, a major city in the Material 
  Plane. More importantly, as far as Thoth-Antef is concerned, Hermopolis 
  is the seat of the temple of Thoth. If the Planehoppers get through this 
  portal in force, the entire presence of Thoth’s priestly hierarchy on this 
  world is threatened. Defending this gate has been Thoth-Antef’s main 
  priority during his centuries of defending the ruined temple from those 
  who manage to get through the gates from the outside.
  Area T-5: Columns
  A double colonnade, six pillars long, proceeds from south to 
  north. The pillars are massive, 10ft in diameter, spaced 40ft apart, 
  and rise more than a 100ft to the domed ceiling. They are painted 
  with scenes of fabulous beasts and people with animal heads. 
  The paint is quite faded, and you cannot make out details without 
  stepping closer.
  Changed Priests of Thoth
  When the Wax Plague infected all the priests of the Oasis-
  Temple of Thoth, the first infected were the priests most vulnerable 
  to the plague. These died before the true horror of the Wax Plague 
  showed itself in them. The priests who were not killed by the 
  disease were the unlucky ones, for they were irrevocably and 
  horribly changed.
  The changed priests are now immortal gelatinous cubes, the 
  final stage of the curse brought to Thoth’s temple by the Sickness 
  Dancers. The priests’ skeletons still hang motionless inside 
  the translucent flesh of the cube: flesh that was once their own. 
  Around the neck of each skeleton shines the necklace of Thoth’s 
  priesthood, the symbol of an ibis.
  For all intents and purposes, the changed priests are treated as 
  gelatinous cubes, with a single exception: the priests can “hear” the 
  voice of Thoth-Antef through the necklace and follow his orders 
  to the best of their limited abilities. They can be told to go places 
  in the temple, and they understand and obey. They can be told to 
  attack, and they can be told to wait in a particular place. Their 
  reduced mental abilities cannot handle anything more complex.
  City of Hermopolis
  The city of Hermopolis is a major city of Lower Khemit. With 
  a population of 115,000, the seat of the High Temple of Thoth, 
  a major library called the Thocaenum, and a major university at 
  the temple, Hermopolis is a center of learning and sophistication 
  known throughout the Kingdom of Khemit. Its university produces 
  scholars highly sought after by the Royal Court of Khemit and 
  by administrators throughout the kingdom, and its library rivals 
  the one at Pharos, though its content is more religiously oriented. 
  The city is located at a confluence of the River Stygian and the 
  seasonal Bakhari tributary. During flood season, the river is a 
  muddy expanse more than 2 miles wide in which tens of thousands 
  of storks and flamingoes cavort and feed, creating a cacophony 
  heard more than a mile from the banks.
  Lotus-Portals of Thoth
  Several of these portals are found throughout the Oasis-Temple 
  of Thoth. They all look the same, and they are all portals to 
  different dimensions, realities, and planes of existence. 
  An unbroken Lotus-Portal is a single marble statue of a large, 
  flat lotus blossom on the ground, with a 5ft diameter. Three priests 
  with ibis heads stand behind the lotus, looking up or down. The 
  heads are mounted on a metal armature, allowing them to be 
  pivoted on the neck to look up or down. The center head moves 
  directly up-down, and the ones at the sides are either looking in 
  and down at the lotus, or up and sideways at the sky.
  The correct placement of the statue heads, in order to make the 
  gate function, is to have the central priest looking down at the 
  lotus, and the two priests at his sides looking up/sideways. When 
  the heads are pointed in the correct directions, a blue haze forms 
  in the bowl of the lotus flower. Anyone stepping into the flower 
  and remaining there for a full minute emerges from some sort of 
  portal on the far side — not all of the destination portals resemble 
  the Lotus-Portals.
  Once the gate has been used, the armature inside the statues 
  moves the heads back into one of the “off” positions.
  At the present time, all but two of the Lotus-Portals are broken, either 
  by invaders or by the priests of Thoth themselves, before the Oasis-
  Temple fell to the Wax Plague of the Sickness Dancers. The gates could 
  conceivably be repaired, but the details of such repair would lie with the 
  Referee. It would certainly require assistance from powerful priests of 
  Thoth, possibly all the way from the city of Hermopolis.
  
  35
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  Most of the scenes feature the ibis-headed god Thoth, to whom  
  this temple belongs. He is shown sitting in front of souls in the 
  underworld, apparently asking questions and writing down the 
  answers on a scroll in his lap. He is also shown stepping through 
  portals that apparently have one world on one side, and another 
  world on the other. 
  If the characters spend 10 minutes checking the pillars for details, or 
  almost immediately if they are specifically looking for pictures of lotus 
  flowers, they find an interesting picture. It shows Thoth on a white 
  lotus flower, with three other ibis-headed people — possibly priests or 
  priestesses — standing behind him. The central priest is looking down at 
  the lotus as the others look upward and to the sides.
  Area T-6: The Gate
  Two dried-out human bodies lie next to a huge pair of doors 
  that the dead men were apparently trying to close when they died. 
  Thousands of pictograms and runes cover the doors, but many of 
  the images are hacked and damaged.
  The two bodies are priests of Thoth who died in the early days of 
  the plague. Investigation finds that their flesh was starting to melt and 
  change when they died. What they were melting into cannot be guessed 
  from the corpses. Anyone versed in medicine or anatomy can tell that 
  the melting was fatal, and that the edges of the melted areas seem to 
  be a bit translucent. It is also possible for character with some sort of 
  medical background to discern that the melting of the flesh resulted from 
  a disease.
  The runes and symbols on the door are all focused upon the god Thoth, 
  who is shown in many of his different functions as a god of Khemit. In 
  particular, though, he is shown in his capacity as a traveler and as one who 
  teaches. Studying the door allows the characters to find a series of pictures 
  that show the same scene, one on top of the other, all the way down one 
  part of the door. The scene is simple: Thoth stands in front of a person 
  wearing an ibis medallion, holding his hand over the person’s head. The 
  last of these pictures is strange, because instead of a person wearing the 
  ibis medallion, it is some sort of formless shape with a circle in the center. 
  It does have the ibis medallion draped around it, though.
  The figure being blessed by Thoth is of course the High Priest Thoth-
  Antef, whose species is far from human.
  Area T-7: Chapel of the Other Gods
  This is an enclosed area the size of a cathedral. A statue at the 
  very back of the long chamber holds aloft a disc of bright white 
  light, which illuminates the entire area. The statue is almost 
  too bright to make out the details, but from the shape of it, it 
  looks like a statue of the god Ra, since it is a hawk-headed man. 
  The 60ft wide aisle leading to the statue of Ra also has 4 side-
  chambers, 20ft or so deep. These also contain statues, although 
  the shadows from Ra’s blinding sun disc make them hard to see 
  from the entrance of the room.
  This temple contains statues of several gods other than Thoth. The 
  statues here allowed visiting priests and dignitaries to give offerings and 
  blessings to their own patron deities. The large statue at the back of the 
  temple is, of course, Ra. Four other statues in alcoves along the side walls 
  of this temple are Isis, Osiris, Sekhmet, and Set.
  Statue of Isis: This statue shows a woman holding an ankh, her hair 
  arranged on her head in a shape that looks like a chair, or perhaps a throne.
  Statue of Osiris: This statue shows a man holding a shepherd’s crook 
  and a flail, wearing a tall crown with two ostrich feathers. His skin is 
  painted green.
  Statue of Sekhmet: This statue depicts a woman with the head of a 
  lioness. The entire statue is painted red, as if with blood.
  Statue of Set: This statue is an enormous, coiled, black snake.
  Area T-8: Storehouse
  A few large support walls remain from what must once have 
  been a warren of smaller rooms and chambers. There are 
  remnants of a fallen staircase, and some toppled statues.
  In this area, in addition to the broken portal of Thoth, there is a great deal 
  of potentially usable material. If the characters are willing to scavenge, 
  they can find the following:
  • Huge quantities of clay bricks and wall fragments.
  • Smaller quantities, but still several tons, of cut stone (1ftx1ftx2ft).
  • 30 wooden beams (sound and not rotten)
  • 200 wooden beams in various stages of rot
  • 30 covered, sealed clay drums of water (40-gallon containers with 20 
  gallons of water remaining)
  • 30 covered, sealed clay drums of flammable oil (40-gallon containers 
  with 5 gallons remaining un-evaporated). NOTE: The oil will catch fire, 
  but not as fast as alchemist’s fire.
  • 30 covered, sealed clay drums of olive oil (40-gallon containers with 
  30 gallons un-evaporated).
  • 1 ton of cloth, fairly rotted (too weak to make a torsion-powered 
  ballista)
  • 16 dried-out human bodies (priests of Thoth or temple guests)
  No rope has survived in usable condition.
  Area T-9: Teleportal
  A pattern of colorful, bird-shaped tiles is set into the floor to 
  create a huge circle, 50ft in diameter.
  This circle of tiles is a teleportal. Anything stepping on it (including 
  one of the Scorpions of Sekhmet) is instantly teleported to Area T-10. 
  Area T-10: Teleportal
  This is a circle of fish-shaped tiles, 50ft across.
  This circle of tiles is a teleportal. As with the teleportal at Area T-7, 
  anything stepping on it (including one of the Scorpions of Sekhmet) is 
  instantly teleported to Area T-9. 
  Area T-11: Garage
  Inside this long chamber, you see two giant scorpions made of 
  metal. Each is 15ft long, and they have bodies that are taller and 
  wider than the proportions of a real scorpion.
  The Scorpions of Sekhmet are the artifacts guarded by the temple.
  
  36
  Quests of Doom: Bugs and Blobs
  Scorpions of Sekhmet
  Scorpions of Sekhmet resemble iron scorpions, 15ft long, with an 
  unusually fat body and a proportionally short tail, weighing 11,000 pounds. 
  They are vehicles created by the goddess Sekhmet, granted to six of her 
  most devoted warrior-servants in the distant past. Two of these artifacts 
  have, over the centuries, fallen into the hands of the priests of Thoth, who 
  stored them away in Thoth’s great Temple-Oasis. A hatch on the right side 
  allows people to enter, and each scorpion can hold as many as four people 
  (provided that no one is much larger than a human). The hatch can be locked 
  from the inside (treat as a wizard lock spell if anything tries to force it open 
  when locked). Creatures as small as a housecat do not take up a whole 
  space, so they can be crammed in with four people. It takes a full round 
  for a single person to enter or leave the hatch. Each of the four seats has a 
  periscope that can be raised to see what is happening outside.
  The scorpions have a normal movement rate of 24. They cannot be 
  destroyed by any mortal means, but they can run out of power and become 
  inert as described below. They are not waterproof or gas-proof, although 
  they have the following attributes:
  Armor: Anyone in the scorpion is Armor Class 0 [19]. Attacks can 
  be made on characters inside through the holes in the scorpion shell. If a 
  character’s armor class is better than 0 [19], attacks must be made against 
  the character’s normal armor class with a –2 penalty on the attack.
  Claws and Driving/Steering: Two people can sit in the control seats 
  for the claws or the driver/steering seats (back-facing for claws, front-fac-
  ing for steering). 
  Stinger: Only one character can sit in the control seat for the tail stinger. 
  The stinger always points straight ahead. 
  Switching seats: It takes 1 round to get into an empty seat, and it is 
  not possible to switch seats without one person leaving the inside of the 
  scorpion when it is full (one round to get out, one round to get in again). 
  Immunities: Anyone inside the Scorpion is immune to fire, including 
  magical fire, cold and lightning. Sonic attacks (such as the song and the 
  chirp abilities of Planehopper channelers) affect those inside the scorpion 
  normally although the carapace grants a +2 bonus to all saves.
  Most of the scorpion’s functions can be improved by a “check” as 
  follows: The player rolls 1d6, with a 4, 5 or 6 meaning success. This is 
  modified as follows:
  • High wisdom for moving levers and pushing buttons gives a bonus 
  of +1 to the roll if the character’s score is 13 or higher (for driving and 
  turning). 
  • High intelligence for moving levers and pushing buttons gives a 
  bonus of +1 to the roll if the character’s score is 13 or higher (for using 
  the claws)
  • High dexterity for moving levers and pushing buttons gives a bonus 
  of +1 to the roll if the character’s score is 13 or higher (for using the tail)
  • A natural roll of 6 (not a 5 with a +1) means critical success. A natural 
  roll of 1 means critical failure (regardless of any +1)
  • A second driver character adds +1 to all moving and turning rolls (one 
  man steers and the other pushes the gas pedal)
  • A second claw operator allows both claws to be used as if only one 
  was being used for purposes of checks
  One seat controls movement, one controls claws and turning, and a 
  third seat controls the tail. The fourth seat is located between the claw 
  and driver area and allows assistance with either function (but not the tail 
  stinger).
  Charge Crystals
  Charge crystals power these artifacts, acting as a fuel source for the 
  Scorpions, and appear as perfectly cut rose-quartz crystals that glow slightly 
  in the dark and are pleasantly warm to the touch. Currently, one Scorpion 
  has 26 charges left and the other has 55 charges left. The crystals found in 
  the oasis (the gemstone amulets) are charge crystals and are fully charged 
  
  37
  hidden oasis  - Temple of thoth
  (1000 charges each). When a charge crystal reaches 0 charges, the Scorpion 
  fails to function. They cannot be recharged by any known (mortal) means.
  Operations
  The Scorpions have physical limits on what they can do, and the more 
  the characters push the limits, the harder it is to make the device do exactly 
  what they want. To keep track, the character in charge of movement must 
  move the Scorpion one hex at a time, and the other characters (turning, 
  clawing, firing) can interrupt at any time to turn the Scorpion one hex 
  facing, make an attack with the claws, or fire a sun-bolt from the tail.
  Movement and Turning (Seats 1–2)
  Each 100 miles of movement uses 1 charge from the crystal. Movement 
  requires checks as follows:
  Movement 4 hexes or fewer: No check required, automatic success 
  Move only one additional hex (over 4): Make a check. Success: Move 
  succeeds and the driver can keep trying to push the movement, if desired. 
  Failure: The move fails and the scorpion can move no additional hexes 
  this round. Critical success: May move 2 additional hexes instead of 1. 
  Critical failure: Treat as normal failure.
  Move more than the 1 additional hex: Make a check at –1 per addi-
  tional hex moved over 1 (up to 8 max) with each additional hex and de-
  termine results hex by hex. Success: You move the hex and can continue 
  rolling, if desired. Critical success: The option to move an additional hex 
  with no check required. Failure: Roll on the Movement Problem Table. 
  Critical failure: Roll on the Critical Movement Failure Table.
  Attacking (Seats 2–3)
  Claws do 2d10 points of damage, and a hit holds the target for the 
  other claw to hit automatically (assuming there’s no fail on the roll to use 
  the claw). Claw attacks do not use up charge crystals. Use of the claws 
  requires checks as follows:
  Use one claw while stationary: Automatic success
  Second claw while stationary: Make check (critical success is +4 on 
  both attacks); failure means that the attack (or additional attack if station-
  ary) fails. Critical failure means no claw attacks are possible for 2 rounds 
  as the claws get out of position or stuck.
  One claw while moving: Make check (critical success is +4 on both attacks); 
  failure means the attack (or additional attack if stationary) fails. Critical failure 
  means a roll must be made on the Critical Claw Attack Problem table.
  Vengeance of Sekhmet (Seat 4)
  The tail launches a bolt of true sunlight to a range of 250ft that strikes 
  anything in the hexes along that line (when using normal combat outside 
  the Oasis-Temple, this is just considered a 5ft-wide line). The tail can 
  fire in a 270-degree arc forward. It cannot fire to the rear or flanks. The 
  sunlight damages anything that is not of Lawful alignment for 5d6 points 
  of damage (save for half). It can be fired every other round, and uses 1 
  charge of a crystal per shot. Use of the tail requires checks as follows:
  Point Tail and Fire While Stationary: Attacks made as if target was 
  unarmored and dexterity bonus can be added to the roll to hit.
  Point Tail and Fire While Moving: Check to see if the tail fires, no 
  dexterity bonus applies (although dexterity 13+ gives +1 to the check roll).
  Movement Problem Table
  Roll 
  1d10
  Result
  1–4
  No problem, keep going
  7–8
  Scorpion stalls and moves no farther this round
  9
  Scorpion flips over. Getting it righted requires a 
  successful check.
  10
  Scorpion skids out of control, and moves 1d8 
  hexes in a random (1d6) direction. Make a 
  success roll at –1 to control the skid, choosing the 
  direction
  Critical Movement Problem Table
  Roll 
  1d10
  Result
  1–2
  No problem
  3–4
  Scorpion stalls and moves no farther in this round
  5–6
  Scorpion flips over. Getting it righted requires a 
  successful check.
  7–8
  Scorpion skids out of control, and moves 1d8 hexes 
  in a random (1d6) direction. Make a success roll at 
  –1 to control the skid, choosing the direction
  9
  Fire. Someone has to get out and spend 1d3 
  rounds outside the scorpion to put out the fire. 
  Otherwise, the heat inside begins rising, with 
  everyone taking 1d2 hit points of damage per 
  round (it takes 2 rounds of fire to heat up to this 
  point, though). The scorpion can continue all 
  activities as normal; it’s just on fire while doing so.
  10
  Scorpion flips over and rolls. Each character 
  inside must make a saving throw or be knocked 
  unconscious for 1d6 rounds. The scorpion has only 
  a 50% chance to end the roll upright; otherwise, 
  it requires a Critical Success check by the driver 
  (hopefully conscious) to get it flipped back onto its 
  legs.
  Critical Claw Attack Problem Table
  Roll 
  1d10
  Result
  1–2
  No problem
  3–4
  Lose 2 rounds of attacks as the claws are jammed/
  tangled.
  5–6
  One claw disabled (determine randomly); fixing it 
  requires a successful Critical Success check.
  7–8
  One claw is disabled; fixing it requires 3 
  consecutive Critical Success checks.
  9
  One claw is broken and permanently destroyed, 
  chopped in half by the other claw.
  10
  Both claws are permanently destroyed (they cut 
  each other in half, basically). 
  Area T-12: Planehopper Gate
  A white marble lotus-flower rests on the floor like a petaled 
  bowl, 5ft across. Three statues of ibis-headed men stand behind 
  the lotus, holding hands. The one in the center looks into the sky, 
  and the other two look down at the lotus. 
  
  38
  Present in these pages are three relatively short but very difficult 
  dungeons: The Sorcerer’s Citadel, “Ra’s  Evil Grin” and The Pit of 
  Despair. Each dungeon presents a perfect place to hide an item for which 
  your party may be questing — whether a powerful magic weapon or some 
  famous artifact. Each dungeon contains such an item as its final treasure: a 
  sphere of annihilation, the globe of Arden and the sword of Karith (a holy 
  avenger longsword), respectively.
  The three adventures can be run independently or can be linked together 
  as part of a larger quest, possibly to retrieve some multipart item. Or, 
  to reward a party with one item of even greater power, the Referee can 
  replace each item found at the conclusion of the three adventures with a 
  piece of a triune key. When fully assembled, the key could permit access 
  to a final location where the party can find this greater item. Ultimately, 
  the final use of these insidious dungeons is up to the Referee.
  As the name of this module implies, each of these three dungeons 
  culminates in an encounter with either a demon or devil. In The Sorcerer’s 
  Citadel, the party must fight both an intoxicating lilin and, in the final 
  encounter, a group of devils. In “Ra’s Evil Grin,” the party comes face-
  to-face with possibly the greatest physical threat presented in any of these 
  three dungeons — a vicious dark daughter, named Dendorandra. In The 
  Pit of Despair, the party (unknowingly at first) encounters a demon of a 
  different type — a wicked nalfeshnee of super-genius-level intellect who 
  is the agent behind a grand evil deception.
  Designed for characters of 9th and higher levels, the dungeons in this 
  module progress in difficulty to challenge characters up to 13th level. 
  The Sorcerer’s Citadel is the easiest (yet by no means easy), and The 
  Pit of Despair the most challenging. In addition to requiring high-level 
  characters, each scenario is designed to challenge PCs of all classes. 
  Rogues and clerics will not sit idly by while their party’s wizards and 
  paladins quest for their proverbial grails. Each quest must be a team 
  effort to be successful; a less-diverse party will have a difficult — if not 
  impossible — time achieving the final goal.
  All of the adventures presented in this module should be the culmination 
  of important quests. Such quests require lengthy travel and triumph over 
  great peril. Resist the urge to allow PCs to conveniently teleport to a 
  dungeon’s location. Instead, set these dungeons in remote and inaccessible 
  areas of the game world. 
  This approach is appealing for several reasons. First, it lets your players 
  run high-level adventures without spending the years required to build 
  characters up to that level through multiple campaigns. Second, using pre-
  generated characters allows players to experience the fun and danger of 
  these perilous dungeons without risking the lives of characters that they 
  have been playing for years and to whom they’ve developed attachments. 
  Having no ties to pre-generated characters, players may also exercise less 
  restraint when roleplaying such characters, which can lead to interesting 
  choices. For example, in The Pit of Despair, demonic influences tempt a 
  paladin, who retrieves a magic sword, to become an antipaladin and slay 
  his good-aligned compatriots. The chances that a player, who has been 
  roleplaying her heroic paladin for years, would be tempted by such an 
  offer are slim indeed. But playing a pre-generated paladin in a one-shot 
  adventure… that’s another story.
  In any case, we at Frog God Games hope that your players find these 
  adventures as challenging and exciting as all the players and playtesters 
  who have attempted them over the years. Their experience, summed up as 
  follows, may be helpful to your PCs: “You can run if you want, but you’ll 
  just die tired.”
  Demons
  &
  Devils
  
  39
  The Sorcerer's Citadel
  Introduction
  Designed for a party of at least 10th level, this adventure challenges 
  players seeking a powerful magic item of the Referee’s choosing. A sphere 
  of annihilation has been provided, but any appropriately powerful item 
  can be substituted as the final objective, as suits the Referee’s campaign. 
  Though the adventure is designed to test every type of character class, 
  a thief is essential, as is a magic-user able to cast 5th-level spells. This 
  adventure culminates in an encounter with devils and a secured sphere of 
  annihilation.
  The sphere of annihilation is hidden deep within the tower-and-dungeon 
  complex of Crane the Sorcerer. Originally set atop a high mountain in 
  a secluded and wild part of the world, the tower and dungeon can be 
  relocated to meet the Referee’s requirements. Crane, an introvert, stayed 
  as far away from civilization as possible, as is detailed below. The Referee 
  will notice that the tower and dungeon (excluding the central chamber) 
  do not present many difficulties for a high-level party — thus lulling 
  characters into a false sense of security before the final encounter. The 
  central chamber, however, is very, very nasty and will test even the most 
  stalwart group’s mettle.
  The Legend of 
  Crane the Sorcerer
  Crane, a magic-user of great power, was obsessed with all things good 
  and evil. He paid homage to the gods of Law and Chaos in equal parts. He 
  was also a great scientist and created numerous constructs such as golems 
  and homunculi. But his interests also ran to the diabolic. Crane studied 
  the use of extraplanar creatures as servants and messengers. He also 
  developed a firm knowledge of trap building and alchemy. He acquired 
  and learned to control a sphere of annihilation with which he carved a 
  dungeon beneath his mountaintop tower.
  About 100 years ago, Crane set off to do battle with a group of Chaotic 
  magic-users known as the Violet Brotherhood whose black arts were 
  linked to the foul demon frog-god, Tsathogga. Though mightier than any 
  individual evil magic-user, Crane could not prevail against all of them 
  working in concert. Overcome by his foes, he cursed his own arrogance 
  with his final breath. Yet he had taken a great precaution: Fearing his 
  foes might seize control of his sphere in combat and turn it against him, 
  Crane decided not to use his magical globe of blackness against the Violet 
  Brotherhood. Instead, he sealed his sphere within his tower and protected 
  it with powerful magic. It awaits discovery there today, its former master 
  now long dead.
  Sages consulted by the characters offer the following cryptic warning:
  Far up in distant mountains lies the Tower of Crane — master 
  of darkness, lord of nothingness. Long is the path, and dangerous. 
  Beware, adventurer, for peril lies both inside and out, both in 
  between and beyond.
  Reaching the Tower
  Crane’s tower rises above the mist-shrouded summit of a distant 
  mountain embedded within a faraway mountain range. The surrounding 
  area is wild, and finding the tower is an arduous undertaking; just reaching 
  this desolate part of the world should require a night or more of roleplaying. 
  In the Lost Lands campaign setting by Frog God Games, Crane’s Tower 
  is located among the mysterious Lost Mountains, far across the Haunted 
  Steppe and standing above thrice-cursed Lake Hali. 
  The Tower of 
  Crane the Sorcerer
  The Tower of Crane the Sorcerer is shrouded in a chilling, damp mist. 
  The cylindrical tower, made of a smooth, dark stone, tapers gradually 
  from the base to its peak, where it is crowned with three sharp spires of 
  uneven height. No openings of any kind are in the dark walls of the tower.
  Some 100 or more feet from the tower is a depression of worked stone set 
  into the surrounding earth and accessed by a downward-sloping ramp. Inside 
  the depression is what appears to be an archway that leads to the tower’s interior.
  The black stone of which the exterior of the tower is constructed is not 
  native to this plane, but was imported by Crane’s infernal servants. The tower 
  itself measures more than 160ft tall at the tip of its tallest spire. The walls are 
  unnaturally smooth and extraordinarily difficult to scale, as there are no available 
  handholds. The walls of the tower and the floors between each level are some 
  5ft thick and are immune spells of any type, except those spells specifically cast 
  by Crane himself. The stone is also impervious to any physical weapon or tool 
  with an enhancement bonus of less than +5 (the result of a wish). Nonmagical 
  weapons or tools striking the stone shatter immediately, and their wielder suffers 
  damage equal to that which would have been inflicted against the tower. Magical 
  weapons and tools of less than +5 enhancement suffer the same fate, though the 
  wielder can make a save to avoid them shattering (although the wielder still 
  takes damage as noted above).
  A magical ward (again, the result of a wish) prevents magical ingress or 
  egress of any kind; that option is reserved for Crane and those to whom he 
  gave permission (which, because of his death, can no longer be obtained). 
  Anyone attempting magical entry into the tower is stricken as per a maze 
  spell (courtesy of a spell cast long ago by Crane). When freed from the 
  maze, the character reappears on this plane in the middle of the Poisoned 
  Corridor (see below).
  Five levels make up the tower’s interior — four above ground, the fifth 
  below. The upper levels contain various living spaces appointed with the 
  requisite creature comforts. Everything within the tower’s interior lies 
  shrouded beneath a thick layer of dust. All doors and trapdoors within the 
  tower are locked and of average make and, unless otherwise noted, have 
  the same surprisingly pedestrian characteristics detailed below.
  Wandering Monsters
  The tower contains no wandering monsters, because creatures that have 
  tried to enter died in the poisoned corridor. Local monsters have learned 
  Sorcerer’s Citadel
  By Bill Webb and Clark Peterson
  
  40
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  of the poisoned corridor by hard experience and do not venture near the 
  tower. Thus, the party can camp within 100 yards of the tower in relative 
  safety. But don’t tell the characters that. Stress the darkness and lack of 
  vision caused by the cold mists of the mountaintop and the eerie shadow 
  cast by the spires of the tower.
  The only threats to a party camped outside the tower are 2 flesh golems 
  created long ago by Crane to guard the archway leading to the poisonous 
  corridor. With Crane’s death, the golems went berserk. They now wander 
  the surrounding wilderness, though they never stray more than 5 miles 
  from the tower. They attack any creatures they see.
  Golem, Flesh (2): HD 8; HP 40x2; AC 9[10]; Atk 2 fists (2d8); 
  Move 8; Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, healed by lightning, immune to most spells, 
  slowed by fire and cold.
  Equipment: Each golem wears a strange amulet 
  bearing the rune of Crane the Sorcerer. 
  Characters can use these amulets to prevent the invisible door’s cloudkill 
  trap from triggering (see below). The amulet is otherwise not magical. 
  Woven into the flesh of the golems, the amulets must be “surgically” 
  removed after the golems are killed.
  The Entrance Passage
  The stone-lined ramp descends some 12ft to a flat-bottomed 
  depression. Set into the far wall of this depression is a simple, 
  unadorned archway approximately 5ft wide and 8ft high. 
  The cold, swirling mists seem to collect at the bottom of 
  this depression. From the top of the slope, shapes can be 
  seen lying on the floor of the corridor beyond, just inside 
  the archway. Several animal and humanoid skeletons 
  of all sizes can be seen. Debris surrounds them, some 
  of which appears to be equipment that has long since 
  rotted or rusted. The passageway beyond seems to be 
  constructed entirely of seamless white stone. The sides 
  of the walls appear perfectly smooth and show no chips 
  or tool marks. The corridor stretches on, beyond the 
  range of normal vision, sloping slightly downward.
  Crane created this corridor using his sphere of 
  annihilation. The corridor extends 180ft, but the skeletal 
  remains of birds, animals, monsters and humans litter 
  the first 60ft — creatures slain by the poison of the 
  corridor, as described below. All mundane equipment has long since 
  rotted or rusted beyond usefulness.
  The Poisoned Corridor
  The citadel’s entrance is the most deadly element of the fortress’s 
  defense system, which Crane set up to protect his treasures. The floor, 
  walls and ceiling of the corridor are a magically poisonous trap. Anyone 
  touching these surfaces is exposed to a powerful poison.
  Any material contacting an individual’s skin, including boots and 
  gloves, magically transmits the poison. Double-layering clothing or 
  walking across stones, blankets or other items strewn along the floor 
  does not prevent contact with the magical poison; such objects magically 
  “conduct” the poison to any living being in the corridor (save or die). To 
  successfully negotiate the corridor, characters must avoid contacting any 
  part of it. When Crane occupied the tower, the flesh golems — which are 
  immune to poison — carried guests who were forbidden magical entrance 
  down the corridor. Magical flight or levitation provides the most obvious 
  way down the poisoned corridor though a character doing so most likely 
  crashes into the invisible wall of iron (see Area 3, below).
  A careful search of the debris turns up a few interesting items of 
  treasure. Touching the items requires a save against the magical poison, 
  as described above. These items lose their toxicity when removed from 
  the corridor.
  Treasure: The skeletal debris has 
  three items worth noting: a scroll of 
  dimension door and charm monster, 
  a potion of heroism and a luckstone.
  Random Encounters
  Roll for wandering monsters every three hours while the 
  characters camp outside the tower on 1d20 with the following 
  results:
  Roll 
  1d20
  Encounter
  1–2
  1d2 flesh golems. Since only two of these 
  creatures exist, no more than two can be 
  encountered. Once both are killed, treat 
  this result as “No encounter.”
  3–7
  Strange grunts, shouts and shrieks off in the 
  distance. The berserk flesh golems utter 
  these fearsome noises, and the sounds 
  should unnerve the characters. Once both 
  golems are killed, treat this result as “No 
  encounter.”
  8–20
  No encounter
  
  41
  The Sorcerer's Citadel
  The Invisible Wall and Door
  As the characters hasten down the corridor, they notice in the distance 
  the end of the passage: a mundane-looking wooden door with iron 
  bindings set into the far wall. What they do not see is the invisible wall of 
  iron with its invisible wizard-locked iron door that completely blocks their 
  access to the door they see at the end of the corridor.
  The wall of iron is located 150ft down the passage (30ft before its end). 
  Anyone flying down the corridor likely collides with the barrier and suffers 
  1d4 points of damage plus 1 additional point of damage per 3 points of 
  movement over 12 rounded down (thus, a character flying at movement 
  24 hits the wall and takes 1d4+4 points of damage). In addition, anyone 
  striking the door must succeed on a saving throw or be stunned for 1d4 
  rounds. A stunned character drops to the ground and contacts the poisoned 
  surface. The only clue to the invisible barrier’s presence is the small pile 
  of debris at its base — dust blown down the corridor from outside and 
  detritus from birds and other flyers who previously “encountered” the 
  wall.
  If that weren’t trouble enough, the door is trapped and releases poison 
  gas as per a cloudkill spell if it is opened by anyone other than Crane 
  or someone wearing his amulet (which can be obtained from the berserk 
  flesh golems; see above). In addition, brute force or any kind of magic 
  used against the door triggers the trap. Failing an Open Locks or Delicate 
  Tasks roll to pick the lock or disable the trap by more than 25% also 
  triggers the trap.
  Note: The amulets do not open the door; they simply prevent the trap 
  from springing if the door is successfully unlocked. Crane endowed 
  the golems with the amulets so that they could successfully convey his 
  guests into the tower without setting off the cloudkill trap. At first, the 
  cloudkill gas fills 30ft of the corridor directly in front of the door. Then it 
  billows forward at a rate of 10ft per round, ultimately filling 90ft of the 
  corridor. The cloudkill lasts for 18 minutes before dissipating. The trap 
  is permanent, resets instantly and can be triggered an unlimited number 
  of times until it is disabled. Once the trap is disabled, the door may be 
  opened safely. However, after the door is opened and closed, the trap 
  automatically resets itself and must be disabled again; otherwise, opening 
  the door again triggers the trap. Characters cannot permanently disable the 
  trap short of a wish.
  Like the tower’s exterior walls, the door and wall are immune to magic 
  weapons and tools of less than +5 enchantment, are immune to spells, 
  cannot be bypassed by teleport, etc. The door’s trap releases poison gas, 
  as per a cloudkill spell cast by an 18th-level caster.
  Once they bypass the door, the party can safely travel the remaining 
  30ft of the corridor to the normal, locked door — the entrance to Level 1 
  of the tower. This last stretch of corridor is not trapped with poison.
  
  42
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Tower Level 1
  The tower’s basement is a large circular room about 40ft in diameter. 
  Set in the center of the room is a spiral, wooden staircase that leads 
  to a trapdoor in the ceiling. Barrels and boxes fill the room. A thick 
  accumulation of dust has settled on the room’s contents. This level contains 
  various barrels, boxes and preserved foodstuffs stacked neatly along the 
  walls of the room. A wooden staircase leads up to a locked trapdoor and 
  Level 2 of the tower. Nothing of value is present here.
  Tower Level 2
  This level appears to be a sitting room. Several pieces of beautifully 
  crafted furniture tastefully appoint the room, which is further accented by 
  rich tapestries. Again, a layer of dust covers everything. The masterwork-
  quality furniture can be removed by ambitious adventurers and sold in a 
  city for 3d6x100gp per piece. The magical fireplace, constructed of the 
  same stone as the exterior walls, does not emit smoke when kindling is 
  burned. Another wooden staircase leads up to a locked trapdoor and Level 
  3 of the tower. Nothing else of real value is present here.
  Tower Level 3
  This level of the tower is Crane’s alchemical workshop. Littering four 
  tables are opened and stoppered vials, jugs and bottles; pots, bowls, mortars, 
  pestles and crucibles; many rusted tools, like pliers, scoops and tongs; braziers, 
  censers, candles, oil lamps and bits of coal; a scale with weights; parchment, 
  quills and inkpots; and glass piping, brass fittings and support apparatus. Six 
  locked cabinets stand against the walls, lined with shelves. Materials present 
  in this laboratory would require several wagon trips to transport. A number 
  of rare, valuable items are here, and the total setup would fetch well over 
  25,000gp if sold to a magic-user or alchemist. Another wooden staircase leads 
  up to a locked trapdoor and Level 4 of the tower.
  A secret, trapped compartment behind one of the cabinets hides a 
  locked, trapped safe. This safe contains some of Crane’s monetary wealth 
  as well as a few potions. Failure to disarm the trap causes acid to spill out 
  of the compartment in a 10ft-by-10ft area in front of the compartment that 
  does 5d6 points of damage plus 1d6 points of continuing acid damage for 
  1d4 additional round (save for half).
  The locked safe is inside the secret compartment. It is protected by a 
  second trap that spews a vaporous cloudkill into the room (as per the spell).
  Treasure: The safe contains 12,200gp; six matched 100gp gems 
  (aquamarines); 4 potions: an elixir of invisibility, a potion of fire resistance, 
  a potion of treasure finding and potion of slipperiness; and a strange black 
  talisman hanging from a pure adamantine chain. This talisman, a ruby-
  eyed, silver-tongued dragon twined around a ball, weighs 4 ounces and is 
  exquisitely crafted of stone similar to that of the tower’s exterior. It could 
  be sold for as much as 1000gp. It detects faintly as magical, but does not 
  reveal its true nature until the party reaches Area N of the dungeon.
  This talisman — a talisman of the sphere — grants its wearer a 30% 
  bonus when trying to control a sphere of annihilation. In addition, this 
  talisman is the key to freeing the sphere of annihilation.
  Tower Level 4
  This room appears to be Crane’s bedroom, and it is lavishly furnished 
  with tapestries, silk curtains and incense burners. The curtains around the 
  canopied bed have been drawn back, revealing a beautiful woman of about 
  25 years, clothed in a fine red, silken robe, nestled amid the bedclothes. 
  Pots of strange plants rest on tables around the room, filling the space 
  with strange and exotic fragrances. Well-tended pots of blue lotus flowers 
  clutter every table surface. Pollen from these flowers permeates the room, 
  and any sudden or violent movement or disturbance stirs up a pollen cloud.
  The beautiful woman is in reality a polymorphed lilin devil named 
  “Melissa” (her real name is Vaa’rankariziaalia). Melissa, once his consort, 
  was summoned to this plane and bound to this room by Crane. She cannot 
  leave the room. Melissa wears a robe of blending. Her beauty is flawless, 
  and she is friendly if approached.
  Hearing the approach of the characters, Melissa disturbed the blue lotus 
  flowers, filling the entire room with the narcotic pollen; all characters 
  entering the room must make a saving throw or be subject to its effects. 
  Upon her discovery, Melissa engages the party in a dialogue, biding time 
  until the pollen can take effect. She rises from the bed and pretends to tend 
  the potted plants as she speaks to the party, releasing more clouds of blue 
  lotus pollen every round.
  This room contains no stairs. A secret trapdoor in the ceiling 8ft above 
  the floor leads to Level 5 of the tower.
  Alchemical Roulette
  Randomly sampling alchemical materials can be very dangerous. 
  If a character does so, roll d% with the following results:
  Roll d%
  Result
  01–12
  Deadly poison (save or die).
  13–25
  Imbiber loses all body hair, though 
  fingernails and toenails grow rapidly for 2 
  weeks.
  26–35
  Imbiber becomes delusional (believing 
  that he is invisible, can fly, etc.) for 2d4 
  hours.
  36–50
  Mild poison (nausea, –1 to attacks, 
  damage and saves for 2d6 hours). 
  51–80
  No effect.
  81–95
  Tastes great! Imbiber is immune to fear 
  effects for 2 hours.
  96–99
  Imbiber gains 1d3 points of temporary 
  strength for 1 day.
  00
  Imbiber permanently gains an increase of 1 
  point in a random ability score. Roll 1d6  
  (1 = strength, 2 = intelligence, 3 = wisdom,  
  4 = dexterity, 5 = constitution, 6 = charisma).
  Blue Lotus Poison
  Blue lotus pollen has a narcotic effect on whoever inhales 
  or ingests it, causing them to become drowsy and experience 
  euphoric hallucinations.
  The pollen-induced hallucinations seem very real, appearing 
  and disappearing at the Referee’s discretion. Whenever anyone 
  under the influence has an adrenaline surge (becomes angry, 
  enters combat, etc.), his hallucinations intensify, becoming more 
  pronounced and horrific. Such a subject suffers a –2 penalty to 
  all attack rolls. In addition, the subject imagines that several 
  hallucinatory beasts attack him. Thus, afflicted characters attack 
  the hallucinatory dangers instead of actual dangers, unless the 
  actual dangers attack them directly. Treat these additional images 
  as though created by a mirror image spell. The hallucinatory effect 
  of the pollen lasts for 1d4 hours.
  
  43
  The Sorcerer's Citadel
  Melissa (Vaa’rankariziaalia) the Lilin: HD 7; HP 40; AC 6[13]; 
  Atk 2 claws (1d3) or +1 longsword (1d8+1); Move 12 (fly 18); 
  Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: +1 or better weapons to 
  hit, immune to fire, magical abilities, magic resistance (15%). 
  (The Tome of Horrors Complete 174)
  Magical Abilities: at will—charm monster, charm 
  person, ESP, teleport; 3/day—animate dead.
  Equipment robe of blending, +1 longsword.
  Tactics: As mentioned, Melissa disturbs the blue lotus flowers before 
  the characters enter the room. All characters entering the level must 
  save versus the effects of the pollen. Since veteran players should be 
  immediately suspicious of the “trapped maiden” gag, Referees need 
  to use a different tactic with Melissa. Players are much less likely to 
  kill something that is played well by a Referee. Don’t succumb to 
  the “helpless, seductive woman lying on bed” routine. Though she is 
  beautiful, she is clothed and not obviously vamping the party. Instead, 
  try playing her as pissed off when the party enters. Think “Princess 
  Leia,” not “Mata Hari.” She might voice her doubts about the party’s 
  power or competence: “Oh great. A group of adventurers finally gets 
  past the poison corridor, but it must have been dumb luck. By the looks 
  of you people, I will never be freed from this accursed tower.” She may 
  even aggressively grab one of the characters, saying “I need you to free 
  me from this place!”
  Once discovered, Melissa uses her charm person 
  abilities against the dumbest-looking, non-paladin 
  fighter type in the party as she speaks, though 
  she does not give him any commands yet. She 
  tells the party that she is Crane’s consort and 
  that he extended her life with magic. She 
  explains that she was a rival sorceress 
  who lost a magical duel to Crane, and 
  his prize was her servitude. Now that 
  Crane is dead, she demands that the 
  party free her from her captivity, 
  her debt having been honorably 
  satisfied. Of course, Melissa is 
  just biding her time until the 
  hallucinations begin. After one 
  minute of real time, the fun starts. 
  Melissa, familiar with the onset of 
  the pollen-caused hallucinations — 
  having seen Crane’s reaction many 
  times — knows which characters are 
  affected.
  Once 
  the 
  hallucinations 
  begin, 
  affected characters begin seeing demonic 
  images. Melissa then teleports to another 
  area of the room. She then uses her charm 
  person to telepathically instruct her victims to kill 
  those who are not charmed. She then sits back and 
  enjoys the ensuing slaughter.
  Note: Melissa is immune to the pollen’s effects. If attacked directly, 
  Melissa simply teleports around the room at will. 
  Treasure: Melissa wears a collar of finest gold and rubies that radiates 
  evil. The collar is worth 11,000gp, but whoever possesses it is visited by 
  a blood reaver devil in one month’s time, at night, when he is asleep and 
  helpless. Otherwise, the bedroom furnishings are worth more than 3000gp 
  if transported and sold.
  Tower Level 5 
  The walls of the tower’s top level slope inward to meet at a pinnacle, 
  creating a pyramid-shaped room. In the north wall, a trapped secret door 
  opens into a 5ft-by-5ft room with a glowing crystal archway on the opposite, 
  facing wall. This is a two-way portal that teleports anyone entering it to 
  the dungeon of Crane. Those passing through this portal emerge through 
  a similar portal in Area A of the dungeon (see below). A vacuum trap 
  protects this secret door. If the trap is not disabled before the door is opened, 
  the magic portal sucks all the air from the room in 2 rounds, suffocating the 
  characters, and the trapdoor through which the characters accessed this level 
  closes itself airtight and locks with a wizard lock.
  The Dungeon of 
  Crane the Sorcerer
  To protect his sphere, Crane hid it in a magically sealed chamber 
  (Area N), to which he bound three devils as guards. Opening the 
  seal to this chamber requires a fully assembled medallion, the 
  four pieces of which Crane hid among the trapped and construct-
  populated corridors of his dungeon. No other way of opening the 
  sealed chamber succeeds.
  No wandering monsters are in Crane’s dungeon.
  Entering the Central Chamber
  Crane dispersed the medallion’s four parts throughout 
  the dungeon, thus securing the central chamber’s 
  integrity against intrusion — however unlikely 
  the possibility. Fitting together tightly, the 
  four pieces form a 10in-high flaming-sun-
  shaped medallion. Each magically sealed 
  door to the central chamber bears an 
  indentation into which a character 
  inserts the assembled medallion. 
  Magic runes, read before the 
  medallion’s placement (using a 
  read magic spell), activate the 
  medallion, causing it to glow with 
  a blue light. This glow lasts only 
  90 seconds, during which time the 
  medallion must be placed in the 
  door.
  If a character fails to set a 
  glowing medallion in the door (i.e., 
  the 90 seconds elapse or the runes 
  are not read), that character takes 4d6 
  points of damage. No save is allowed, 
  and spell resistance does not apply. Three 
  doors leading to the central chamber (Area 
  N) are false doors; placing the medallion into 
  these doors causes damage as described above, even 
  if the characters observed the proper procedure. Only the 
  door in Area L opens into the central chamber. If the medallion is 
  used correctly on that door, the glowing blue light engulfs the entire door, 
  and it opens. The runes may be read a maximum of twice per day, after 
  which they fade from existence for 12 hours.
  The central chamber’s walls and associated doors, like those of the 
  tower’s exterior, are immune to spells and to weapons and tools of less 
  than +5 enhancement and may not be damaged. Literally, the only way to 
  enter the central chamber is by placing the properly assembled medallion 
  into the one, true door.
  Area A: The Door Below
  A magically sealed stone door, runes scratched across its surface, looms 
  before the characters. The door is wizard locked and can be forced open 
  only with a knock or dispel magic spell. Alternatively, tracing the runes on 
  the door with a finger causes the runes to glow brightly, unlocking the door.
  
  44
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Area B: Guardians at the Gate 
  Beyond the locked door is a corridor leading into a trapezoidal room, 
  its walls and floor constructed of red-veined white marble. Dominating 
  the room are two awe-inspiring statues of large cats, sculpted from 
  black stone. The southern and southwestern walls feature doors. If either 
  unlocked door is opened, the statues animate as 2 hellcats that attack until 
  slain, at which time they become statues again. The statues pursue the 
  characters if they run, though the hellcats cannot open doors.
  Hellcat (2): HD 7; HP 43, 39; AC 5[14]; Atk 2 claws (1d4+1), 
  bite (2d6); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: 
  +1 or better weapon to hit, magic resistance (20%). 
  (Monstrosities 244)
  Area C: The Sword Room
  A brightly glowing sword floats in midair in this room, which is 
  carved entirely from black stone. This sword is an animated object 
  that immediately attacks anyone entering the room. A successful 
  dispel magic allows the sword to be taken as treasure. “Killing” the 
  sword destroys it. This +2 longsword cannot leave the room while 
  animated. A 10ft-by-10ft pressure plate at the room’s center activates 
  a poison gas trap (save or die). A secret door on the east wall leads 
  to Area D.
  Animated Object, +2 Longsword: HD 3; HP 15; AC 3[16]; Atk 
  +2 longsword (1d8+2); Move fly 18; Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 
  3/60; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit. (Monstrosities 13)
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  45
  The Sorcerer's Citadel
  Area D: The Statue Room
  Two minotaur statues, 10ft apart, occupy this room. A 5ft-diameter 
  circle of red stones surrounds each statue. The south door features glowing 
  runes. The west wall also contains a door. Both doors have intricate locks 
  (Open Locks –40%). The minotaurs are just what they appear to be: 
  statues. The glowing runes read “Hall of Pools” if read magic is used on 
  them. Both doors are locked.
  Area E: Gone Forever
  In the center of the corridor, a trap plunges characters into a pit linked 
  to the Astral Plane. Magic has no effect after the 100ft mark (allowing 
  about 2 rounds for action). Anyone falling beyond that point runs the risk 
  of being lost forever on the Astral Plane. Rescuing people thus trapped 
  requires plane-travel abilities. A secret door leads past the pit to Area F. 
  The door at the corridor’s west end is one of the central chamber’s false 
  doors. See “Entering the Central Chamber,” above.
  Area F: The Big, Mean Golem
  Large iron statues, fully 10ft tall and shaped as warriors, line this 
  room on all sides, surrounding a raised dais in the center. Upon the 
  dais rests a rune-encrusted golden triangle, intricately carved, its center 
  accented with a jewel. The golden triangle is the first piece of Crane’s 
  medallion.
  A single flesh golem standing near the east entrance guards against the 
  piece’s theft. The amulet piece is trapped with a lightning bolt trap (5d6 
  points of damage, save for half). Touching either the amulet or the dais 
  triggers the trap.
  Golem, Flesh: HD 8; HP 40; AC 9[10]; Atk 2 fists (2d8); Move 8; 
  Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +1 or better weapon 
  to hit, healed by lightning, immune to most spells, slowed by 
  fire and cold.
  Tactics: If damaged, the golem touches the dais and triggers the 
  lightning bolt trap to heal itself. Should the characters emerge through 
  Area E’s secret door, they can outrun the golem, which does not pursue 
  the party through the secret passage to the north. Otherwise, if the amulet 
  is disturbed, the golem positions itself to block the east exit and defends 
  the room. When any person enters the room, the golem animates.
  Area G: 
  Corridor of the Red Madness
  When the characters penetrate the paltry defenses of the simple wooden 
  door to this corridor, they enter a zigzagging hallway with walls and 
  ceiling composed of a red, spongy material. Small holes in the red matter 
  emit curling wisps of reddish gas.
  The corridor’s red-colored, spongy walls and ceiling puff out a small 
  cloud of reddish gas with each touch or vibrational disturbance. The 
  walls are so sensitive that even loud speech causes the material to pump 
  out vision-obscuring quantities of this dreadful gas. Inhaling the gas, 
  however, has a single, terrible consequence: insanity! Characters must 
  make a saving throw or they fall to their knees and begin to scream. A 
  victim’s skin takes on a reddish sheen. 
  Area H: Hall of Pools
  This long hall is dotted every few yards with pools of bubbling, blue-
  green liquid. A huge set of double doors at the hall’s far end seemingly 
  bleeds this liquid; it drains into the various pools through a series of 
  channels carved in the floor. Strange writing and a bas-relief carving of 
  a scepter, covered in gold leaf with small ruby chips simulating dripping 
  blood, ornament the door. A hollow sconce next to the bas-relief scepter 
  appears large enough to receive an object of a size similar to the bas-
  relief scepter.
  While the liquid’s surface ripples only an inch or so below the level of 
  the floor, the pools themselves measure more than 8ft deep. This strange 
  liquid actually constitutes some odd form of Earthpower, welling up 
  from the depths. Any mortal touching so much as a drop of this potent 
  fluid becomes dizzy, finding it almost impossible to walk. Failing a 
  saving throw (with a –4 penalty) renders the subject unconscious for 
  1d6 days.
  In the final pool is secreted a golden scepter, 8ft below the surface. If 
  the scepter is fished out, placing it into the sconce beside the bas-relief 
  carving opens the door. The scepter then vanishes, returning to its resting 
  place at the bottom of the pool.
  The double doors at the hall’s far end enjoy the same defensive 
  immunities as the exterior walls of Crane’s tower. Short of a wish, only by 
  inserting the scepter into the sconce can the doors be opened, as previously 
  described. The strange writing (in Celestial) decorating the door details 
  this curse, explaining:
  “None shall pass till the curse of the earth god is lifted.”
  Area I: The Pit
  In the center of the room, a 15ft-square covered pit rises about 1ft above 
  floor level. The cover — magically preserved leather — is pulled taut 
  and is lashed down securely. At the bottom of the shallow 5ft-deep pit, 
  the characters find a locked secret hatch. Opening it reveals a 2ft-long 
  mahogany box with extremely detailed carvings along its entire surface. 
  Within the small casket is hidden the second piece of Crane’s medallion. 
  The north wall’s unlocked door leads to one of the central chamber’s 
  false doors; it does not open, even with the fully assembled amulet. See 
  “Entering the Central Chamber,” above.
  Area J. “Seven Years Bad Luck”
  When the characters open the door adjoining Area B, they hear the 
  tinkling and jangling of glass, as though the room beyond were full of 
  wind chimes. Multiple shiny objects reflect light back to the characters, 
  like a room full of twinkling stars. Dangling from the ceiling by long 
  strands of thread, are thousands of shards of glass — as though a huge 
  mirror had been broken and its remnants hung in this manner. From the 
  ceiling 15ft above, the shards dangle to every level of the room, to just 
  about 2ft above the floor. Moving through the room requires a saving 
  throw to avoid the shards. If a save fails, the character strikes a shard hard 
  enough to shatter it.
  If a shard is broken or crudely mishandled on purpose, it explodes, 
  giving off a thin wisp of smoke. This epicenter explosion initiates a chain 
  reaction among the other shards, causing them all to shatter. The acrid 
  smoke that results causes blindness and limits the ability to speak above a 
  whisper for 2d4 days unless a character succeeds on another saving throw 
  (with a –2 penalty because of the choking vapors).
  A secret door is in the ceiling, shielded from view by the hanging 
  shards (it’s easier to locate if the hanging shards are destroyed or if their 
  support threads are carefully parted and secured). The door leads to a small 
  chamber wherein a silver pedestal supports a red crystal staff. Characters 
  can use the staff to form a crystal bridge in Area M. An image of a bridge 
  spanning a river is inscribed on the staff.
  A corridor behind the pedestal heads south. This corridor leads to one 
  of the central chamber’s false doors; it does not open, even with the fully 
  assembled amulet. See “Entering the Central Chamber,” above.
  
  46
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Area K: The Final Guardians
  Daggers, swords and shards of metal lie piled in the room’s center. The 
  characters feel a slight breeze. As the characters enter, the breeze stiffens 
  and a whirlwind suddenly forms, lifting the metal shards and weapons 
  from the pile and setting them spinning through the air (more a distraction 
  than any threat, although there is a 15% chance each round that a character 
  is struck by a metal shard for 1d4 points of damage). Advancing through 
  the room are three humanoid creatures carrying cruel, barbed whips.
  Crane called forth these, his final guardians — 3 erinyes — to protect 
  the entrance to the strange Earthpower cavern (Area M) he discovered late 
  in his life. These demons do not leave the room. The locked southwestern 
  door, made of iron, is trapped with a poison needle (save or die). A secret 
  door leads to the north.
  Erinye (3): HD 6; HP 40, 37, 36; AC 2[17]; Atk bronze sword 
  (1d6 plus paralysis) or whip (1d4 plus entangle); Move 12 
  (fly 24); Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: entangle 
  (via whip, save avoids), immune to fire and cold, magical 
  abilities, magic resistance (25%).
  Magical Abilities: constant—fear; at will—detect 
  invisibility, locate object.
  Area L: The Central 
  Chamber’s Entrance Hallway 
  Mirrors line the walls, floor to ceiling, along the corridor, but the view 
  they offer is strangely distorted. A large rune-etched door marks the 
  hallway’s far end. At the corridor’s 30ft mark, a mirror of life trapping 
  (New Magical Items Appendix) is affixed to the ceiling. Shattering 
  the mirror from the outside releases everything trapped inside. Crane 
  imprisoned a black pudding, 2 wraiths and a rival wizard named 
  Meldeth in it before placing it here. No one knows how Crane ensnared 
  the wraiths, as undead cannot normally be trapped by such an item.
  A final inhabitant of the mirror, a poisoned and severely wounded 
  wizard named Toth A’karon, dies from the poison in his veins as soon 
  as he is released (no statistics provided). All creatures immediately attack 
  the characters. Toth A’karon has the third piece of Crane’s medallion. 
  Barely alive, he uses his dying breath to relinquish the medallion piece to 
  the characters.
  The command word for the mirror is Seriwog.
  Wraith (2): HD 4; AC 3[16]; Atk touch (1d6 plus level drain); 
  Move 9 (fly 24); Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: drain 1 
  level with hit, silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Black Pudding: HD 10; HP 71; AC 6[13]; Atk attack (3d8); 
  Move 6; Save 5; AL N; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: acidic 
  surface, divides when hit with lightning, immune to cold.
  Meldeth, the Evil and Insane Wizard of the Violet 
  Brotherhood (MU9): HP 30; AC 8[11] or 2[17] (missile) and 
  4[15] (melee) from shield spell; Atk dagger (1d4); Move 
  12; Save 6 (cloak of protection +1); AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: spells (4/3/3/2/1).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile (x2), shield; 
  2nd—invisibility, mirror image, web; 3rd—dispel 
  magic, lightning bolt, slow; 4th—confusion, fear; 5th—
  feeblemind.
  Equipment: cloak of protection +1, dagger, wand 
  of fireball (2 charges), ring of fire resistance, jade 
  unholy symbol of the frog-god Tsathogga, map to 
  the Stoneheart Mountain dungeon with a cryptic 
  reference to the Temple of the Frog (detailed in The 
  Lost Lands: Stoneheart Valley).
  Once the characters assemble all the parts of Crane’s medallion, they 
  can open the door to Area N. See “Entering the Central Chamber,” 
  above.
  Area M: The Earthpower Cavern
  The secret door leads to a small cavern through which flows a stream 
  of weird, shimmering blue-green liquid. Across the river towers a huge 
  statue of a 20-armed man, a sword in each hand; inscribed in his chest 
  is a rune symbolizing a long-forgotten Lawful earth god of battle called 
  Mocham. In front of the statue is a 20ft-diameter pool of red liquid.
  Crane discovered this natural cavern while carving out his dungeon. 
  This cavern, linked to a now-unknown earth god, was once sacred to 
  clerics of that sect. The river that winds through this cavern is 2ft deep 
  and can be crossed easily (though at great cost). It radiates a strange anti-
  magic effect; no magic functions within 20ft of either bank. Spellcasters 
  innately notice this anti-magic aura. The red crystal staff, found in the 
  secret chamber above (Area J), forms a crystal bridge fording the river 
  if waved over the liquid. The staff is the only magic item immune to the 
  liquid’s anti-magic power. The liquid loses this anti-magic ability when 
  removed from the stream. Any characters crossing the river by any means 
  other than the red crystal bridge are stricken as though a dispel magic had 
  been cast on them and their possessions (magical items have a 5% chance 
  of becoming normal).
  The giant statue — natural rock carved into the form of a 20-armed 
  man — bears the weight of the ages upon his brow. Its expression inspires 
  knee-bending humility, sadness and awe. At the monolith’s feet is a 2ft-
  deep pool of opaque, dark-red-brown liquid that is very poisonous. Any 
  characters moving to within 10ft of any part of the monolith notices that the 
  statue’s eyes quickly pulse with blue light. If the warning is not heeded, the 
  statue fires 2 lightning bolts at the transgressor’s feet. Should the character 
  persist, the statue fires directly at him (2d8 points of electrical damage) 
  once every 3 rounds. Any Lawful cleric may approach the statue without 
  recrimination and is immune to the effects of the poison. The fourth piece 
  of Crane’s medallion lies hidden in the pool of the poisonous red liquid. 
  Any character (except Lawful Clerics as mentioned above) trying to fish 
  out the medallion piece is automatically struck by the statue’s lightning 
  bolts.
  Area N: The Central Chamber
  When the medallion is properly inserted, the door ignites with searing 
  blue light and its shape alters, forming a misty archway. The archway 
  reeks with the stench of sulfur and brimstone. The room beyond is carved 
  from living rock. Smoke and haze in the room obscure vision. At the far 
  end is a strange glowing cube. Three figures are present in the room. One 
  is a horned devil. The others are 2 blood reaver devils. When they see 
  the characters, the horned devil approaches cautiously. As he gets closer, 
  he announces, “You are not my master!” He then attacks. The blood 
  reavers join in the combat as well.
  Crane bound these three devils to this room to guard his sphere of 
  annihilation. Ordered to destroy all who enter the room but Crane, they 
  neither negotiate nor bargain. 
  Due to the magically burning brimstone, vision in this rather featureless 
  room is limited to 50ft. Furthermore, living creatures can become quickly 
  fatigued from breathing in the toxic, sulfurous fumes. Any character 
  engaging in strenuous activity (such as combat) must save at the start 
  of his turn each round or be sickened for that round (–1 to attacks, saves 
  and damage). Barefoot characters take 1 point of fire damage per round 
  from the hot floor. The distant glowing cube contains Crane’s sphere of 
  annihilation.
  Ignus, Horned Devil: HD 15; HP 95; AC –1[20]; Atk 2 claws 
  (2d4) or +1 spiked chain (2d6+1), bite (2d8), tail (2d6 
  plus infernal wound); Move 12 (fly 15); Save 3; AL C; CL/
  XP 21/4700; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, immune 
  
  47
  The Sorcerer's Citadel
  to fire and poison, infernal wound (1hp/round bleed until 
  bound or cured), magical abilities, magic resistance (55%), 
  regenerate (3hp/round), stun (1d4 rounds, save avoids). 
  (New Monster Appendix)
  Magical Abilities: at will—dispel good, protection from 
  good 10ft radius, teleport; 3/day—fireball, lightning 
  bolt), summon devils (1/day, 3 flayer devils, 35%). 
  Equipment: +1 spiked chain.
  Alnus and Femus (Devil, Blood Reaver): HD 9; HP 46, 48;  
  AC 1[18]; Atk 2 claws (2d6+3) or dual-headed 
  barbed flail (1d10+3 plus stun); Move 12; Save 
  6; AL C; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, darkvision 60ft, immune to fire and 
  poison, magical abilities, magic resistance (45%), 
  regenerates 3hp/round, resistant to acid and cold 
  (50%), siphoning aura (20ft radius, 1d6 damage/
  round, save avoids), stun (unable to move or attack 
  for 1 round, save avoids), telepathy 100ft.
  Magical Abilities: at will—invisibility (self 
  only), teleport, wall of fire; 1/day—lightning 
  bolt (9d6, save half). (The Tome of Horrors 
  Complete 170)
  Treasure: Hovering in the center of the room inside a wall 
  of glowing magic is Crane’s sphere of annihilation (New 
  Magic Item Appendix) — a 2ft-wide ball of absolute 
  nothingness. To get the sphere, the magical wall must 
  be brought down. Because of the power of the wall, 
  dispel magic has only a 5% chance of destroying 
  it, while disintegrate completely destroys the wall. 
  Alternately, a character could attempt to control the 
  sphere to destroy the wall from within (for which 
  the dragon talisman, secreted in Tower Level 3’s 
  hidden safe, might be useful). Of course, this 
  may happen accidentally if a character fails 
  her attempt to control the sphere and it slides 
  toward her, destroying the wall on contact. But 
  then an uncontrolled sphere of annihilation 
  would be loose …
  The room contains no other treasure.
  
  48
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Introduction
  Designed for a party of at least 12th level, this adventure challenges 
  adventurers seeking a powerful magical item — the Globe of Arden. Any 
  appropriate powerful item can be substituted as the final objective, as 
  suits the Referee’s campaign. This dungeon culminates in a battle with a 
  marilith known as Dendorandra.
  As a lead-in to this adventure, the Referee may use a map from 
  another treasure hoard showing the location of the globe (detailed more 
  fully in “The Legend of the Globe of Arden,” below) or a priestly tome 
  describing Arden, the long-dead avatar of Ra, and the wondrous powers 
  of an unknown artifact called the Globe of Arden. Such a tome might 
  mention that the globe emits rays as intense as those of the sun, destroying 
  all they touch. In any event, Referees should require consultation with 
  sages or use of a legend lore spell to determine the location and history of 
  the globe and dungeon. A sage could also provide a map to the dungeon’s 
  location, referenced in the “The Legend of the Globe of Arden,” below. 
  Originally set on a small, remote island far across the sea, the dungeon can 
  be relocated to meet the Referee’s requirements.
  Referees will notice that the dungeon provides numerous puzzles, a 
  few traps and only two monsters. Those monsters, though few in number, 
  should ably challenge and threaten even the most combat-hardened party 
  — particularly after the party encounters all the vicious creatures that 
  inhabit the Island of the Globe.
  The Legend of the Globe of Arden
  Using legend lore or consulting sages uncovers the following 
  information about the god, Arden, and the Globe of Arden. Referees 
  should read this information to their players.
  In days long past, the peoples of the eastern lands worshipped the sun 
  god, Arden. Legend says that the gods of darkness destroyed Arden during 
  divine combat. Arden’s followers gathered their slain god’s remains, 
  storing them in his temples.
  Legends tell that one such relic, the Globe of Arden, was originally 
  the left eye of the god himself — ripped from its socket by Tsathogga, a 
  vile frog-demon, during Arden’s final, hopeless battle. However, the eye 
  retained the powers of the sun, and the demonic servants of Tsathogga, 
  attempting to steal it, were disintegrated by the power it contained. Priests 
  of Arden eventually recovered the eye, which had solidified into a strange 
  sphere seemingly made of cloudy, white glass, and renamed the divine 
  artifact the Globe of Arden.
  With Arden’s destruction, his following waned. Yet the preserved 
  relics — elements of his divine being — prevented Arden’s foes from 
  overcoming his temples. What the relics could not prevent, however, was 
  the treachery of Asari. Then a high priest of Arden at the temple where the 
  globe was stored, Asari grew jealous and bitter over his loss of personal 
  power, which followed the destruction of his deity. His spell powers 
  failing and followers dwindling, he entertained the overtures of the frog-
  god Tsathogga, who promised to restore Asari’s earthly power. As his final 
  act of betrayal, Asari stole the Globe of Arden from the temple’s inner 
  sanctuary and fled before the priests detected his treachery. He delivered 
  the globe to the demon-priests who took the relic and hid it in a foreign 
  and unpopulated land — a remote island, the legends say — in a complex 
  designed to hide the globe from Arden’s followers. Rumors suggest that 
  the demon-priests of Tsathogga, a god of water and darkness, fashioned 
  the complex’s entrance to mock Arden, a god of air and light. Legends 
  also caution that Asari, the fallen priest, received great rewards from the 
  gods of evil: renewed earthly power and the gift of unlife. The followers 
  of Arden, now greatly reduced in number and power, were unable to 
  recover the globe, and it fell out of all human reckoning.
  After countless years’ passage, the sands of the eastern deserts have 
  long since consumed the “civilization” that once thrived there, while 
  men and elves inhabit what were once the “unpopulated foreign lands” 
  of Arden’s time.
  An ancient map allegedly depicts a possible location of the island on 
  which the globe was hidden. The coastline of those once “foreign lands” 
  seems to correspond to an area of the current civilized world, though no 
  other maps refer to this island, nor have sailors spoken of it. The map also 
  features these cryptic words, written in a long-forgotten language:
  On an island within an island,
  Beyond a door that is not a door —
  Shielded by the grin of the hated sun —
  Lies the Globe of Arden, the eye of a dead god,
  Stolen long ago by the traitor Asari.
  Perhaps this map holds a key to locating the ancient and powerful 
  Globe of Arden …
  In addition, characters might also obtain the following information 
  about Arden. Arden was once worshipped on this plane of existence as a 
  lesser avatar of the sun god, Ra. He was commonly depicted as a hawk-
  headed, muscular man wearing a short skirt of precious metals and jewels. 
  He projects searing beams of sunlight from his eyes. His staff is tipped at 
  one end with a bronze sphere representing the sun and emblazoned with 
  an ankh, and at the other end with a bronze hawk head. Arden also wields 
  a bronze short sword. Evil deities, Tsathogga the frog-demon among their 
  number, long ago destroyed Arden, but his worshippers gathered and 
  treasured his remains as relics. Ages have passed, however, since Arden 
  was worshipped on this plane.
  Arriving at the 
  Island of the Globe
  The party may have acquired the ancient map from a previously looted 
  treasure hoard or from the sage who related the globe’s legend. Obtaining 
  the map might also constitute an adventure in its own right. Such an 
  adventure is encouraged, though not detailed here. The map depicts an 
  island located south of normal trade routes, off the coast of a sparsely 
  populated area north of a southern jungle. In the Lost Lands campaign 
  Setting of Frog God Games, this island lies at the edge of Great Oceanus, 
  the main world-ocean of the planet, just north of where it becomes the 
  Razor Sea in the vicinity of the Razor Coast. For more information on this 
  area, see Razor Coast by Frog God Games. 
  Thick jungle and swampland cover the island. A large mountain, rising 
  from the center of the island, is reflected in the waters of a lake to its south. 
  Within that lake, a stone outcrop rises above the water’s surface. On that 
  inner island lies the entrance to the dungeon.
  This adventure presumes that the characters have gained the map and 
  Ra’s Evil Grin
  By Bill Webb and Clark Peterson
  
  49
  Ra's evil grin
  traveled overland to a coastal city near the island. From the denizens of 
  this city, skirting the northern border of a vast jungle, characters can hire 
  a boat to convey them to the island. Referees should spend multiple game 
  sessions detailing this epic journey, foreshadowing trials yet to come.
  If you wish to avoid the above trek, you may instead simply begin the 
  module with the characters arriving at the island of the globe, passing 
  through the perils of the island and found the inner lake and the rock 
  outcrop on which the dungeon entrance is located. If so, proceed to “The 
  Dungeon Entrance,” below.
  The Dungeon Entrance
  Once the characters reach the lake’s central island on the Island of 
  the Globe, they immediately notice an unnatural depression ringed with 
  10ft-tall, rune-covered stone pillars — the only evidence of a humanoid 
  presence on the island. The pillars, heavily worn, have endured the 
  passage of what must have been centuries. The runes are no longer legible. 
  The pillars surround a deep hole, 30ft in diameter and nearly 20ft deep. 
  Approaching the edge of the depression, more evidence of humanoid 
  craftsmanship can be seen: the depression, lined with reflective tiles, has 
  thousands of crystal beads set into its surface. Characters descending into 
  the depression notice an inscription encircling a tiny ruby set in black 
  stone. The inscription, shimmering in the sunlight, reads:
  “Beware the noontime sun if you know not the puzzle behind 
  RAS EVIL GRIN, which is tossed in the center of stone.”
  Each character perceives the inscription as written in their native 
  language. Strangely, the inscription has not eroded over time.
  The Referee should write out the inscription and demonstrate how it 
  fully encircles the small ruby; carefully capitalize all the letters of “RAS 
  EVIL GRIN” to assist the characters in solving the puzzle. If the party 
  does not solve the puzzle by noon, determine whether anyone remains in 
  the depression when the sun reaches its zenith.
  At noon, the sun’s intense rays strike the central ruby and trigger 
  the trap: The ruby-refracted light bounces around the reflective, bead-
  encrusted depression, heating it to an incredible temperature. Any person 
  in the depression when the trap is triggered takes 3d6 points of fire damage 
  each round he remains in the depression. The intensified sunbeams lance 
  around the depression for 5 rounds, after which the sun’s angle changes 
  and the heat rays subside. The only way to defeat this effect and enter the 
  dungeon is to solve the puzzle of RAS EVIL GRIN. Tsathogga’s priests 
  created this trap to mock Arden, the sun god — harnessing the power 
  of the sun to destroy those followers of Arden attempting to liberate the 
  globe hidden within the dungeon.
  Solving the Puzzle: “RAS EVIL GRIN” is an anagram for “A SILVER 
  RING.” Once the characters figure this out, the rest of the solution should 
  follow easily. The characters need only “toss” a silver ring in the “center 
  of stone” — that is, place a silver ring inside the letter “O” of the word 
  “stone,” since that letter is the center of the word “stone.”
  Helping the Players Along: If the players can’t figure this puzzle out, 
  encourage them to read the inscription closely. Characters might also 
  notice a fine, silvery dust in the letter “O” of the word “stone.” Failing to 
  grasp this obvious a clue, the characters don’t deserve the Globe of Arden 
  (or whatever magical goodie awaited their discovery).
  The Gems and Beads: An unknown type of magical protection 
  prevents the amplified heat from damaging the gems and beads. Nor can 
  the gems be pried out or removed in any way. Any item used in this way 
  has a 20% chance of shattering.
  Opening the Phase Door: Having solved the puzzle, the players must 
  still wait until noon. If the characters have properly placed a silver ring 
  in the “O” of “stone,” when the sun reaches its zenith, a small crystal 
  
  50
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  cylinder rises from the floor of the tiled depression. The noon sun’s light 
  strikes the ruby set in the depression’s center, and a dazzling beam of 
  energy immediately shoots from it, striking the crystal cylinder and 
  refracting into a multicolored shower of light. This rainbow strikes the far 
  wall of the depression and creates a shimmering doorway — a phase door 
  that penetrates 10ft of solid stone and opens into the catacombs below. 
  When the sun passes its zenith, the phase door remains.
  Unlike the phase door spell, an unlimited number of persons and 
  creatures can pass through the door. In addition, the priests of Tsathogga 
  enhanced the rocks that make up the island; characters cannot teleport or 
  use other, similar means to enter or exit the dungeon (though teleporting 
  within the dungeon is allowed). In addition, the priests enhanced the 
  depression’s walls to resist all spells except disintegrate. Thus, the only 
  way into or out of the dungeon is the phase door or use of a disintegrate 
  spell.
  The phase door remains open for 24 hours, until the following noon. 
  At that time, the cylinder drops into its housing, and the depression 
  again heats like an oven, trapping any characters still inside the dungeon 
  complex. By recovering the Globe of Arden, the characters could use its 
  disintegrate power to blast a way out at the location of the phase door, 
  since the stone there is only 10ft thick. If the Globe of Arden is replaced 
  with a different magic item, provide a scroll of disintegrate with the final 
  treasure or create an alternative exit. The priests of Tsathogga intended 
  that nothing ever leave this dungeon.
  The Dungeon of the Globe
  The phase door penetrates 10ft of solid stone, extending from the 
  depression to this location. From this point, the characters can re-enter 
  the phase door and return to the depression. The phase door, however, 
  remains open only for 24 hours — from noon until noon. Remember: The 
  only passages from the dungeon to the outside world are the phase door 
  or a disintegrate spell. Teleporting is impossible.
  When living matter passes through the phase door, an alarm triggers in 
  Areas 3 and 9, alerting Asari and Dendorandra to the presence of intruders.
  Area 1: The Shifting Hallway
  The corridor at this point contains large scrape marks on the floor, as 
  if a huge stone block had been dragged over the hallway’s paving stones. 
  Anyone entering this corridor recognizes that a block within this corridor 
  shifts. The easternmost 10ft stone block in the south wall shifts, apparently 
  sliding north and south. Since this is unusual stonework, remember that a 
  dwarf has a 4-in-6 chance of spotting the stone. 
  The Stone Trigger: Carefully searching the general area reveals a 
  stone trigger or button set in the north wall, about 4ft up the wall, at “A” 
  on the map. The button, a 1-cubic-ft stone block, can be pushed inward. 
  Currently flush with the wall, pushing the button inward sets the blocks in 
  motion. The button resets itself, flush to the wall, in one round. Pushing 
  the button again causes the blocks to move in the opposite direction. If 
  the blocks are moving when the button is pushed, the blocks stop for one 
  round, then begin to move backward to their last position. There is no 
  limit to the number of times the button may be pushed. However, there 
  is a 1% chance (non-cumulative) each time the button is pushed that the 
  button sticks and the mechanism malfunctions.
  The pressure plate at area “D” also triggers the blocks, as described in 
  Area 2, below.
  The Shifting Blocks: Once the trigger at “A” is pushed, two blocks 
  within the corridor shift. The first is block “B” — 60ft of solid stone. It 
  moves from its southern position (marked on the map as the solid block 
  “B”), sliding 10ft per round northward until it comes to rest against the far 
  northern wall. The block’s position when at rest at the north end is marked 
  with dashed lines and the letter “B” on the map.
  The second is block “C” — 30ft of solid stone. Unlike block B which 
  slides north and south, block C moves up and down. Initially in its down 
  position, block C fills the corridor at the area marked “C.” When the 
  button is pushed, the block rises until flush with the ceiling. It takes 5 
  rounds for block C to either rise to the ceiling or return to the floor.
  The blocks always move in tandem. They are always either “closed” 
  (block B in its southern position and block C flush with the floor of the 
  corridor) or “open” (block B in its northern position and block C flush 
  against the ceiling). The two positions are named for their relation to Area 
  2. If the blocks are in the open configuration, the characters can access 
  Area 2; in the closed configuration, the blocks prevent access.
  When initially encountered, the blocks are in the closed position, as 
  described above. Pushing button “A” causes the blocks to shift to the open 
  position — block B moves northward and block C rises to the ceiling. 
  Because block B is still shifting by the time block C has stopped, the 
  characters do not initially notice block C.
  Finding Block C: If the characters venture down the hallway when 
  the blocks are in the open position, the characters may spot block C (1-
  in-6 chance; dwarves, 4-in-6). In addition, characters can also detect the 
  location of block C, even though it is in its housing, flush with the ceiling. 
  Dwarves can further determine that the block moves up and down. 
  Getting Caught Between the Blocks: If someone triggers the pressure 
  plate at Area “D” (see Area 2, below), the blocks return to the closed 
  position. If the blocks are in the closed position when the plate is triggered, 
  there is no effect. It is therefore possible that characters may be caught 
  between the moving blocks if the plate is triggered when they are trying 
  to escape the room.
  After triggering the pressure plate (see below), the characters hear the 
  sound of grinding stone and realize that the stone blocks are moving. If the 
  immediately act, they may have a chance of escaping the blocks.
  The blocks return to their original, closed position. Block B moves 10ft 
  per round until it returns to its original southern position. Block C descends 
  one-fifth of the distance from the ceiling to the floor per round until it is 
  flush with the floor of the corridor, which takes 5 rounds. Characters may 
  be unable to exit the north/south corridor to the west, where the button is, 
  because block B has moved back into place and closed off the passage; 
  the characters may also be unable to pass descending block C, either into 
  or out of Area 2.
  Moving Past Block B: Presuming the blocks are in the open position 
  when the pressure plate is triggered, the characters have 3 rounds to escape 
  through the corridor to the west (presuming they immediately reacted 
  during the first round). During the first and second rounds, because block 
  B is not yet obstructing the exit to the western corridor, anyone may move 
  freely through the passage. However, on round 3, the shifting stone block 
  begins to block the passage; by the end of the round, the passage is fully 
  blocked. Anyone attempting to move through the passage into the western 
  corridor during this round must roll beneath their dexterity on 1d20. Those 
  making the check tumble through the aperture just as the block closes off 
  the corridor. Those failing are caught between the moving block and the 
  opening and suffer massive damage; they must make a saving throw or be 
  cut in half, killed instantly. Those who make the save still take 6d10 points 
  of damage, managing to wiggle through the gap into the western corridor 
  by sheer determination. Such characters, their legs broken and useless, 
  require assistance to move until fully healed.
  Moving Past Block C: Presuming block C is in its raised, open position 
  when the pressure plate is triggered, it takes 5 rounds for the block to 
  descend fully to floor level. For the first two rounds, characters can move 
  under the descending block with no difficulty, requiring only a little 
  crouching. On the third round of block C’s descent, characters passing 
  under must roll below their dexterity on 1d20. Success means they can 
  move their full movement under the block, while failure means they move 
  only half normal. On the fourth round, characters must again roll beneath 
  their dexterity. Success means they can move half their movement under 
  the block, and failure means they are trapped and cannot move. On the 
  fifth round, the block settles flush against the floor. Any characters trapped 
  beneath the block are crushed and killed instantly. 
  “Caught in the Middle”: A character who can’t quite make it out 
  might get caught between block B moving south and block C descending. 
  Obviously, block B comes to rest against block C, crushing any characters 
  caught in the middle. A character in this situation normally has a few 
  rounds of helpless immobility to contemplate his certain doom. Because 
  block B moves only 10ft per round, it takes six rounds for block B, after 
  
  51
  Ra's evil grin
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  52
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  it prevents access to the western corridor, to come to rest against block C. 
  Anyone caught between the blocks is crushed and killed instantly. 
  Stopping the Blocks: Physically preventing the blocks’ movement 
  is impossible. Pushing stone trigger “A” stops the blocks’ movement 
  and resets them to their last position. Thus, if the blocks were open and 
  someone triggered pressure plate D, an alert character could reach the 
  stone trigger at “A” and push it, sending the blocks — which were on their 
  way to the closed position — back to the open position. Remember: After 
  pushing stone trigger “A,” the blocks remain still for one round before 
  reversing direction.
  Area 2: The False Globe 
  and the Block Trap
  Dozens of skeletons are piled in this room. Several wear scraps of rusty 
  armor; all have parts missing. Scratches and scrawling on the walls give 
  evidence that some must have died here. Tooth marks mar some of the 
  bones. These skeletons represent previous quests to recover the globe as 
  well as the servants of the priests of Tsathogga — entombed here once 
  they finished constructing the labyrinth that houses the globe, so that no 
  one would ever learn its hiding place.
  False Globe: At the far, eastern end of the room, an altar atop a dais 
  radiates evil. Symbols of the demon frog-god Tsathogga adorn the walls. 
  A glowing globe sits upon the altar. Cautious characters might feel as 
  though this quest has proved too easy; their suspicion is warranted — this 
  is a trap. The globe radiates magic and good. Anyone touching the false 
  globe triggers the trap, a lightning bolt that bounces from the character 
  to character for 1d8 rounds until it is exhausted. The first character struck 
  takes 8d6 points of damage (save for half), while the second takes 7d6 
  points of damage, and so on.
  Pressure Plate: Located in front of the altar at area “D” on the map is 
  a pressure-plate trap. A weight of 100 or more pounds triggers the blocks 
  at Area 1 to return to their “closed” position. See Area 1 above for details 
  on how the stone blocks move.
  Area 3: The Evil Chapel
  The door opens to reveal an evil chapel with an altar carved in the form 
  of a many-armed snake woman. Thirteen white stone pillars stand in a half 
  circle in front of the blood- and skull-covered altar. A single priest chants 
  arcane words as a silver glow envelops his body. Then all goes black.
  The priest is Asari — the fallen high priest of Arden who long ago stole 
  the Globe of Arden and delivered it to the priests of Tsathogga. Tsathogga 
  rewarded Asari’s treachery with eternal life as a powerful mummy, 
  making him a consort to Dendorandra. The chapel area detects as evil, 
  and because of its utter evil, turning of the undead is impossible within its 
  confines. In addition, all Lawful clerics have a 20% chance of their spells 
  failing. Chaotic clerics have no trouble casting spells here.
  Asari the Mummy: HD 10+1; HP 58; AC 3[16]; Atk fist (1d12 
  plus rot); Move 6; Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 14/2600; Special: +1 
  or better weapon to hit (50% damage), rotting disease (no 
  magical healing, heal at one-tenth normal rate), spells Clr10 
  (3/3/3/3/3).
  Spells: 1st—cause light wounds, darkness, protection 
  from good; 2nd—hold person (x2), silence 15ft radius; 
  3rd—cure disease, prayer, remove curse; 4th—cause 
  serious wounds (x2), protection from good 10ft radius; 
  5th—dispel good, finger of death (x2)
  
  53
  Ra's evil grin
  Equipment: robe of feeblemindedness (worn by Asari, 
  but has no effect on him), lenses of charming, silver 
  unholy symbol (Tsathogga)
  The Altar: If Asari is killed, the face of the many-armed snake woman 
  animates, and a female voice intones:
  “Little men, your powers are nothing to me. I would have 
  destroyed all of you long before this, but I enjoy breaking such 
  miserable creatures as you with my bare hands. Humans beg so 
  wonderfully, shrieking and crying as I slowly pull them apart!” 
  Looking at a cleric in the group, the female voice adds, “Perhaps 
  I shall use you a replacement for my last companion — the one 
  you so thoughtlessly destroyed.”
  The statue then re-solidifies amid distant laughter.
  Area 4: The Maze
  It should be obvious to the characters that they are about to enter a 
  maze. Navigating this maze ultimately leads to Area 8. The maze does 
  not present much difficulty and can be navigated by normal means. Note 
  that, to pass through the doors at Area 7, the secret door at Area 5 must 
  eventually be discovered.
  The maze is divided into three sections:
  Area 4A leads eventually to the doors at Area 7. No monsters roam 
  this section.
  Area 4B leads nowhere; 2 ochre jellies wander around this section (1 
  in 1d6 chance per 5 rounds of encountering one of the jellies).
  Area 4C of the maze leads to the secret door at Area 5 below.
  Ochre Jelly (2): HD 6; HP 45, 41; AC 8[11]; Atk acid-laden 
  strike (3d4); Move 3; Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; Special: 
  lightning divides creature.
  Area 5: Traps and Keys
  A secret stone door, locked and trapped, bars entrance to this small 
  room. Opening the secret door without disabling the trap causes 3 spears 
  to shoot outward (attack as a 6HD creature, 1d8+2 points of damage).
  Behind the secret door, on the far wall of this area, are four hooks, from 
  each of which hangs a large key — one made of silver, one of bronze, one 
  of lead and one of brass. Characters need them to open the iron doors at 
  Area 7.
  Area 6: The Second False Globe
  A secret stone door, locked and trapped, bars entrance to this small 
  room, which holds a second false globe. Opening the secret door without 
  disabling the trap causes 3 spears to shoot outward (attack as a 6HD 
  creature, 1d8+2 points of damage).
  Opening the secret door reveals a small chamber. Its walls are barren 
  and crudely worked, and the chamber’s floor is unworked earth. Rudely 
  placed in a stone basin set in the east wall, shrouded by a black cloth 
  covered with evil runes, sits what appears to be an orb. The vile black 
  cloth cannot mask the light emanating from the orb beneath.
  The writing on the cloth, in abyssal, appears to be some sort of curse 
  of darkness. The globe radiates evil and magic. The cloth is coated with a 
  deadly poison if anyone lifts it (save at –2 or die).
  The orb beneath the cloth glows with a bright holy light, as if radiating a 
  continual light spell. Anyone touching the false second globe triggers the 
  trap, a lightning bolt that bounces from the character to character for 1d8 
  rounds until it is exhausted. The first character struck takes 8d6 points of 
  damage (save for half), while the second takes 7d6 points of damage, and 
  so on. Once the lightning bolt goes off, a finger of death targets a character 
  at random.
  Northern Secret Door: At the north end of the chamber, a second 
  secret door, this one expertly hidden and unlocked, opens into a passage 
  that leads to the iron portals at Area 7.
  Area 7: Riddles at the Gate
  A set of great iron portals bars the characters’ way. The two doors, 
  constructed of the finest material, are engraved with arcane writings. In 
  the center of each door is an elaborate, rune-etched lock with several 
  strange keyholes.
  Each door is built from 4in-thick magical iron with 1in-wide internal 
  channels that run both horizontally and vertically, through which 
  adamantine bars have been inserted. These bars slide away when the locks 
  are disengaged. The lock on the right-hand door causes the vertical bars 
  to retract, and the lock on the left-hand door causes the horizontal bars 
  to retract, thus unlocking the door. Attempting to pick the lock instead of 
  using the four keys from Area 5 triggers the trap. In addition, using the 
  keys improperly subjects the characters to electrical damage.
  Any failed attempt to pick the lock results in the character being stricken 
  by a power word kill spell; failing to use the keys in the proper manner 
  or force the door subjects the character to 2d6 points of electrical damage 
  with no saving throw.
  Each of the two doors has four keyholes and a riddle that explains how 
  to unlock it. Once both halves are opened, the doors can be swung wide 
  into the cave at Area 8.
  The Riddle on the Right-hand Door: Four colored metal plates in 
  symbolic shapes make up the lock in the door’s center. The shaped plates, 
  each with a keyhole at its center, are as follows: a brass table, a lead 
  sword, a bronze coffin, and a silver diamond. Each lock appears designed 
  to accept a normal-sized key. Surrounding the locks is the following 
  inscription written in magical runes (requiring read magic):
  “One man makes me, does not need me.
  One man buys me, does not use me.
  One man uses me, does not see me.”
  Solution: The answer to the riddle is “coffin.” When the bronze key 
  is inserted into the coffin-shaped bronze lock, it slides back to reveal a 
  second, coffin-shaped silver lock. If this is in turn opened with the silver 
  key, it reveals a coffin-shaped lead lock, which when opened in turn 
  reveals a coffin-shaped brass lock. Each lock must be opened with the key 
  of similar metal. Using the keys in any other manner causes 2d6 points of 
  electrical damage. Once all four locks are opened, the characters hear a 
  loud, grinding sound as the vertical interlocking adamantine bars within 
  the doors slide away. Characters cannot yet open the doors until the left-
  hand door is unlocked.
  The Riddle on the Left-hand Door: Four, square faceplates make up 
  the locks in the door’s center — one each of silver, lead, bronze and brass. 
  Surrounding the locks is the following inscription, written in magical 
  runes (requiring read magic):
  “I fall first the heaviest, and then heaviest from a man’s purse.”
  Solution: The answers are “lead” (because it is the heaviest of the four 
  metals) and “silver” (because coins are made of it). Only by inserting and 
  turning the lead key in the lead lock and the silver key in the silver lock 
  does this half of the door unlock. Using the keys in any other manner 
  causes 2d6 points of electrical damage. Once both locks are opened, 
  the characters hear a loud, grinding sound as the horizontal interlocking 
  adamantine bars within the doors slide away. Characters cannot yet open 
  
  54
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  the doors until the right-hand door is unlocked.
  Once both doors are unlocked — both sets of adamantine bars have 
  withdrawn — they swing open freely, all traps disabled.
  Area 8: The Gloomy Cavern
  This cave contains large piles of bones, loose rocks, rusty swords, 
  armor and the rotten remains of packs and other soft goods. An eerie, 
  howling wind blows through this place and an otherworldly light 
  emanates from Area 9. There are no monsters here. The demon in Area 
  9 can create animated servants from these bones.
  Treasure: In one of the piles of bones, detect magic reveals a +2 
  shield beneath a large pile of rusty metal.
  Area 9: The Guardian
  A set of stairs hewn from the red stone of the living rock of the cave 
  itself descends about 30ft to a room of roughly worked stone. Strange 
  crystals are set into its walls. A huge pile of silver and gold glitters and 
  shines in the center of the room.
  The monster in this room attacks once the characters get close, 
  revealing herself. Tsathogga commissioned the marilith Dendorandra, 
  also known as the Dark Daughter, to guard the Globe of Arden. She 
  knows that she will suffer eternal torment should she fail in her task.
  Dendorandra the Dark Daughter, Marilith (Category V): 
  HD 7; HP 56; AC 7[12]; Atk 6 longswords (1d8+1x3, +1 
  longswords; 1d8+3, +3 longsword; 1d6x2, +1 spears), tail 
  (1d8); Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: 
  +1 or better weapon to hit, immune to fire, magic 
  resistance (80%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—charm person, levitate, 
  polymorph self; 1/day—gate 100% (1d4 mariliths).
  Equipment: +3 longsword (Xpatias), +1 longswords 
  (x3), +1 spears (x2).
  Tactics: Dendorandra relishes combat. She fights with 4 longswords 
  and 2 spears in her six arms — one is a +3 longsword named Xpatias 
  (literally “frogsticker” in abyssal; New Magic Item Appendix). The 
  remaining swords and spears are all +1. She automatically summons 
  her sister demons (1d4 mariliths) to occupy the fighters to join her in 
  the frenzied bloodlust. She attacks lightly armored individuals first 
  and concentrates on one victim until that person is dead.
  Demon, Marilith (Category V) (1d4): HD 7; AC 7[12]; Atk 6 
  weapons (1d8), tail (1d8); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 
  13/2300; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, immune to 
  fire, magic resistance (80%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—charm person, levitate, 
  polymorph self; 1/day—gate 50% (roll 1d12; [1–3] 
  I, [4–6] II, [7–8] III, [9–10] IV, [11] VI, [12] demon lord 
  or prince).
  Equipment: combination of 6 swords & battle-
  axes; magic sword (95%; 1d4 for bonus).
  Treasure: Other than the very magic sword, the pile of 
  gold and silver consists of 4000gp and 20,000sp. Under 
  the pile of coins, a secret hatch opens into a passage — a 
  3ft-diameter crawlspace of tiled stone — leading to Area 
  10. There is no magical way to detect the secret door.
  
  55
  Ra's evil grin
  Area 10: The Treasure Room
  A dim glow can be seen at the end of the tiny passage leading to this 
  room. The characters emerge into a 5ft-square room containing a chest 
  and a silver coffer. Both vessels look to be thousands of years old and are 
  covered with ancient and arcane runic and hieroglyphic inscriptions. Fine 
  locks of ancient construction on both items look untouched, as though 
  undisturbed for centuries.
  Treasure: Both vessels are locked and trapped. The chest, made of 
  iron, is worth 1000gp intact. The coffer, made of mithral, is worth 4000gp 
  intact. Their value drops to one-fifth the estimate if they are broken open.
  The Chest: The chest is trapped with poison gas that fills the room if 
  it is opened (save or die). It contains the following 10 gems, sized from 1 
  carat to as large as a fist: a 10,000gp uncut corundum sphere (the largest 
  item); a 8000gp opal; a 6000gp emerald; a 6000gp topaz; a large piece of 
  jade worth 4500gp; a 4000gp aquamarine; a 3000gp sapphire; a 2500gp 
  black opal; a 2000gp garnet; and a 1000gp ruby. 
  The Coffer: The coffer is trapped to shock anyone trying to open it 
  with a burst of lightning (8d6 points of damage to anyone within 5ft; save 
  for half). The coffer cannot be magically opened with a knock spell due 
  to the unknown protective runes of a magic-retarding nature. Inside the 
  coffer is an odd, unidentifiable and glowing gem, about 12in in diameter, 
  made of a milky, glasslike substance. This is (finally) the Globe of Arden 
  (New Magic Item Appendix) — a powerful magical item! 
  
  56
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Introduction
  Designed for a party of at least 14th level, this module details an 
  adventure to recover the Sword of Karith, a holy avenger. Not the 
  straightforward hack-and-slash treasure hunt your players will be 
  expecting, this adventure is instead a trap laid by the forces of evil to 
  corrupt and destroy their greatest enemy: paladins.
  At the direction of Orcus, the demon-god of undead, a nalfeshnee demon 
  named Caanara misappropriated the Sword of Karith and hid it in a desert 
  temple called the Temple of the Justicars. Adding to his villainy, Caanara 
  also replaced the Sword of Karith with an unholy reaver that Orcus heavily 
  enhanced to mimic the Sword of Karith. Knowing paladins simply cannot 
  resist a holy quest to recover a lost, magic sword, the forces of evil have 
  created a win-win situation. Up-and-coming paladins attempting to find 
  the temple and recover the sword are either killed outright during their 
  quest or are utterly corrupted when they inadvertently recover the unholy 
  reaver, believing it to be the Sword of Karith. This adventure, then, has 
  two possible outcomes: either the characters all die or they recover an evil 
  and corrupting unholy reaver. Cruel treatment of the characters, you say? 
  Evil? Wicked? Dastardly? Exactly.
  Referees thus must be at their most deceptive, skirting that thin line 
  between gunning for your players and running a complex deception fairly. 
  Referees must run this adventure with an understanding that it was crafted 
  by extraordinarily intelligent deity-like demons whose goals are deception, 
  corruption and slaughter. For instance, do not refer to this adventure as 
  The Pit of Despair. Instead, call it The Temple of the Justicars or The 
  Quest for the Sword of Karith. Do nothing to tip off the do-gooding 
  heroes to the presence of the trap.
  The party’s initial trip to the Temple of the Justicars most likely results 
  in their defeating the demon guardians and recovering the false holy 
  avenger, thus corrupting the party’s paladin. This unlucky soul will then 
  need to perform an act of atonement to cleanse himself of his unwilling sins 
  and recover his paladinhood once he realizes his corruption. Learning that 
  the destruction of the false holy avenger is the only means of atonement, 
  the characters no doubt attempt a second trip to the temple, where they 
  return with the unholy reaver in an attempt to destroy it along with the 
  demon Caanara, and recover the true Sword of Karith.
  Referees should feel free to replace Orcus, the demon-god of undead, 
  and Thyr and Muir, the god of law and the goddess of virtue and paladins, 
  respectively, with those gods most appropriate to their campaign. 
  The Legend of the 
  Holy Sword of Karith
  For the Players
  Paladins are familiar with the legend of Karith — a heroic paladin 
  of old who roamed the lands as a champion of good while wielding a 
  wondrous sword of great power. Consulting a sage or casting a legend lore 
  spell reveals the true history of Karith and his holy sword.
  Many years ago, Karith, a paladin of great renown, roamed the world, 
  righting wrongs, slaying dragons and protecting the innocent. The deeds 
  of this great man border on the unbelievable. In fact, most common folk 
  consider them great exaggerations, if not outright myth. In truth, Karith 
  was less famous than he should have been, having done deeds far greater 
  than even the most superstitious or pious would believe.
  Karith wielded the mighty sword, Entrancacor, which in the ancient 
  dwarven tongue means “slayer of demons.” The finest dwarven smiths 
  and enchanters forged this sword for the Holy Order of the Justicars — 
  the paladins of the goddess Muir — more than 1000 years ago. Legend 
  holds that no greater weapon was ever forged, before or since. Tales tell of 
  demon armies recoiling from a lone man wielding this sword. The sword 
  was passed from grandmaster to grandmaster within the holy order over 
  many generations, and Karith was the last grandmaster of the Justicars.
  As Karith neared the end of his life, the gods of good bade him wait 
  patiently for his successor to appear. However, no paladin of the order 
  then living was sufficiently worthy of bearing the sword and becoming 
  grandmaster. Some held promise, yet none sufficiently distinguished 
  himself from his peers. The high priests of the temple of Thyr and Muir 
  — the god of law and the goddess of virtue and paladins, respectively — 
  communed with their gods and were instructed to have faith. After several 
  years passed with no worthy successor appearing, a female celestial of 
  Muir visited the priests. In angelic splendor, the celestial instructed the 
  high priests to relinquish the sword into her keeping. She revealed her plan 
  to set the sword in a temple, hidden in a valley deep within a distant desert, 
  where it would await discovery by a paladin worthy to retrieve it and bear 
  it forth again. By its recovery, the celestial told the priests, they would 
  know the new grandmaster of paladins. Legends call the resting place 
  of the sword the “Temple of the Justicars.” Though many brave paladins 
  have attempted the sword’s recovery, to this day, none has succeeded.
  For the Referee
  The avatar mentioned above, who retrieved and hid the sword, was 
  unrelated either to Thyr or Muir, and was instead Caanara, a nalfeshnee 
  demon, sent by Orcus to steal the sword and place it beyond the reach 
  of those serving Thyr and Muir. A master of deception, Orcus also gave 
  his demon a false sword called Entranhumani (“slayer of humans”) with 
  which to dupe and despoil any paladins who successfully locate the hiding 
  place of Entrancacor. Orcus bound his demon to the sword’s resting place 
  and commanded him to guard it. Referees should remember that nowhere 
  in the legends are these demons mentioned; instead, convince any questing 
  paladin that his god’s avatar took the sword. The characters should expect 
  a “quest to find a sword belonging to the good guys” adventure, not an evil 
  trap set by the worst enemies of law and good.
  The methods by which the characters discover the exact location of the 
  Pit of Despair are up to the Referee. The holy avenger’s hiding place is a 
  well-kept secret. Because demons do not want a powerful enemy running 
  around slaughtering their kind with so powerful a weapon, even they go 
  to great pains to keep the location a mystery — however fond they are of 
  using the ruse to destroy up-and-coming paladins. And there are never any 
  survivors of failed quests to question — their deaths mistakenly attributed 
  to the paladin’s excess pride or arrogant belief in his own worthiness to 
  bear the sword. When in reality he was yet another victim of Orcus’ and 
  Caanara’s treachery and deception.
  Consultation with a sage is, perhaps, the best way to set the adventure in 
  motion. The sage could direct the characters to a secluded sect of Muir’s 
  priests. Those priests, should they deem the party’s paladin worthy, 
  The Pit of Despair
  By Bill Webb and Clark Peterson
  
  57
  The Pit of despair
  provide him with a copy of a map to the Valley of the Temple of the 
  Justicars — the rumored hiding place of the Sword of Karith. They also 
  inform the paladin that the legends reveal that “only someone who is 
  prayerful and devout and who sees with the eyes of faith can find the 
  entrance to the Temple.”
  Other methods of discovering the location of the Pit of Despair include 
  a treasure map, a holy text found secreted away in a vast library, a message 
  scratched into an abandoned shield or breastplate, a divinely bestowed 
  vision, or consultation of the oracle at Rappan Athuk.
  Traveling to the 
  Temple of the Justicars
  After learning the location of the Temple of the Justicars, as described 
  above, the characters must travel to the edge of the desert and beyond to 
  the Valley of the Temple. Referees should make this an arduous journey 
  fraught with danger to provide the right “feel” for a holy quest. In the 
  Lost Lands campaign setting by Frog God Games, the lost Temple of 
  the Justicars lies in the mountains ringing the desert plateau known as the 
  Sacred Table. The ruins of the holy city of Tircople still stand upon this 
  plateau across the desert from the Crusader Coast.
  To reach the general location of the Pit of Despair, the party must travel 
  through a desert wilderness stretching beyond the last human settlement 
  of the coast. The first third of the trip involves traveling into desert and 
  should be dangerous, though not overly so. Once the characters reach the 
  edge of the plateau, they must then travel across its desert expanse, past 
  the haunted ruins of Tircople until they reach the Valley of the Temple.
  Referees wishing to avoid a prolonged wilderness trek can proceed 
  directly to the section titled, “The Entrance to the Pit of Despair,” 
  below. However, Referees are encouraged to run wilderness encounters 
  as the characters travel to the Valley of the Temple. This increases the 
  “epic quest” feeling of the adventure, making the characters more likely 
  be duped when they recover the false holy avenger after their major battle 
  in the Pit. Otherwise, the characters might get suspicious if the quest is 
  too easy. 
  The Entrance to 
  the Pit of Despair
  The characters have traveled miles through the desert and have finally 
  reached this forsaken place — the Valley of the Temple. Their map guides 
  them into a cleft in the red-rock wall. They travel the narrow path in the 
  shade of the looming walls for over an hour, and emerge from between the 
  two large walls of rock into a small canyon, open to the sky.
  The canyon ends in a worked wall of red stone, similar to that of the 
  surrounding rock. The floor of the canyon is sand. Worked-stone entrances 
  are set into the wall at various heights. The entrances all have the same 
  general appearance: a 10ft-high archway flanked by bas-relief statues of 
  knights in mail. No detail distinguishes one from the other. They do not 
  detect as evil, good or magic.
  To access the entrances — which do not have ledges in front of them — 
  the characters must find a way to climb the face of the canyon wall, which 
  
  58
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  59
  The Pit of despair
  is nearly vertical. They can do this by climbing or using magic, such as 
  dimension door, fly, levitate or teleport.
  Climatic conditions in the Valley of the Temple run to extremes: 
  unbearably hot during the day  and freezing cold at night. This inhospitable 
  region offers no source of water and no natural source of shade to shield 
  the characters from the sun. In addition, the characters may run short of 
  food or water. 
  Strong winds also plague the valley. Roll 1d20 once every hour on the 
  table below:
  1d20
  Wind strength
  1–10
  no wind
  11–15
  moderate wind
  16–17
  strong wind
  18–19
  severe wind
  20
  windstorm
  The winds in the canyon last only for 3d10 minutes. Any time strong or 
  severe winds arise, there is a 50% chance that a dust storm accompanies 
  them. In addition, any windstorm is always accompanied by a dust storm, 
  with a 75% chance of a greater dust storm. The winds themselves, of 
  extreme temperature, do nothing to reduce the effects of heat or cold. Any 
  characters caught outside without shelter during severe winds take 1d4 
  points of damage per 10 minutes. Anyone caught out during a windstorm 
  takes 1d6 points of damage per round from flying debris.
  Wandering Monsters: Aside from the weather, one other danger 
  threatens the characters. There is a 1 on 1d10 chance per hour during 
  the hours of darkness that 1d6 giant scorpions descend into the canyon 
  to attack the characters. An endless supply of these scorpions infests the 
  surrounding hills.
  Giant Scorpion: HD 6; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 pincers (1d10), sting 
  (1d4 plus poison); Move 12; Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 7/600; 
  Special: lethal poison sting. (Monstrosities 411)
  False Entrances: All of the obvious entrances are false entrances 
  that lead to caves and passages but not to the Temple of the Justicars. 
  Each such cave has a 1–3 on 1d6 chance of being occupied by 1d4 giant 
  scorpions that immediately attack the characters. Each cave also houses a 
  sarcophagus of marble carved to represent a knight in mail on the stone lid. 
  Each such sarcophagus has a 1–4 on 1d6 chance of containing the remains 
  of a knight in full plate mail with a sword (of random type) and shield. If 
  remains are present, there is a 1 on 1d6 chance for each that the mail or 
  the sword is magical. If magical, roll 1d6: 1–4: the item is +1; 5–6: the 
  item is +2. These remains are, in fact, the corpses of paladins killed during 
  their quest to recover the Sword of Karith. The demons “entombed” the 
  remains to look like the final resting place of revered heroes. The demons 
  find this false reverence very entertaining.
  The Real Entrance to the “Temple of the Justicars”: The actual 
  entrance to the Pit of Despair is hidden from mortal eyes. Only a paladin 
  who prays to his god for a full day (putting her in the proper religious 
  frame of mind) even has a chance to see the entrance (a Referee might also 
  allow a bless and prayer to be cast to “put the paladin in the right frame 
  of mind” without the daylong meditation). Such a paladin must still make 
  a saving throw to see the entrance. Powerful magic prevents any other 
  means of detecting the entrance, short of a wish. Even find the path does 
  not reveal the entrance. Once the real entrance is exposed, that paladin can 
  thereafter see the entrance as plainly as the false ones. She can also direct 
  others to pass through the entrance.
  The Referee should make it very difficult — though not impossible 
  — to locate the true entrance. Let the party search for several days and 
  suffer the temperature extremes and begin to despair and contemplate 
  abandoning the quest. After no fewer than 3 days’ searching, the Referee 
  might take pity on the party and give it the following clue: between 
  midnight and 2 a.m., a faint glow can be seen from the portion of the cliff 
  face where the true entrance is located. This clue doesn’t let the characters 
  see the actual entrance; it just gives them a hint that there is something 
  there they haven’t discovered. If the characters still can’t find the entrance, 
  prod them to the proper solution by reminding them of the words of the 
  priests that “only someone prayerful and devout and who sees with the 
  eyes of faith can find the entrance to the Temple.”
  Once located, the entrance threshold may be crossed at will. The 
  entrance has no doors, locks or traps. A winding, 10ft-diameter, roughly 
  worked tunnel leads 120ft to Area 1.
  Note: Because the Pit of Despair is a source of conflict between good 
  and evil deities, any spells such as commune or find the path cast in an 
  attempt to learn the location of the entrance or the consequences of future 
  actions has no result. Referees might imply that Thyr and Muir want the 
  characters to find and recover the sword on their own merits, without 
  guidance. Remind them: This is a test of faith and virtue, which can be 
  surmounted only by noble, unguided, individual action. In reality, Orcus 
  himself is watching the characters and actively disrupting any contact with 
  their good-aligned deities; he cannot, however, interfere with wish spells.
  The Pit of Despair
  Three areas make up the Pit of Despair. The first, a large underground 
  amphitheater resembling a temple to Thyr and Muir, functions as the false 
  “Temple of the Justicars.” The second area, the pit itself, contains a false 
  avatar of Muir (really an altered nalfeshnee) and the unholy reaver. The 
  final area, an evil altar room, contains an unholy shrine to Orcus, with the 
  Sword of Karith encased in blackest stone. The first two areas are enhanced 
  with a strong magic that masks evil and projects good. Additional shields 
  prevent detection of the third area.
  Area 1: 
  The “Temple of the Justicars”
  The entrance room is a large temple designed to resemble an 
  amphitheater. Three tiered series of pews lead down to a flat central area 
  that features an altar. A recessed area at the far side of the room is lined 
  with columns, ending with a statue of Muir. The recess contains a large 
  pit, 30ft across, around which mists swirl, obscuring view within. The 
  only inhabitants of the chamber — 15 robed priests of Muir — chant and 
  dance around the pit. The walls of the amphitheater and the pillars are 
  worked with images of knights in full armor.
  The First Visit 
  At first glance, the room resembles a temple of Muir — austere and 
  dignified with clean, white marble columns, altars and statues. Holy runes 
  and glyphs cover the walls. Careful inspection reveals subtle defacement 
  of the holy images, vaguely suggesting an evil presence. The room detects 
  as good; however, the dancing priests clearly detect as evil — because they 
  are, in fact, 5 vrocks attended by 10 dretches. They attack immediately.
  Demon, Vrock (Category I) (5): HD 8; HP 62, 57, 55x2, 49; 
  AC 0[19]; Atk 2 fore claws (1d8), 2 rear claws (1d8), beak 
  (1d6); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: 
  immune to fire, magic resistance (50%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—darkness 5ft radius; 1/day—
  gate 10% (1 vrock).
  Tactics of the Vrocks: When the characters first enter the amphitheater, 
  the vrocks are dancing around the pit and chanting. They focus their 
  initial attacks on magic-users and clerics, leaving the dretches to delay the 
  fighters. Once the spellcasters are eliminated, the vrocks concentrate on 
  those heroic paladins. 
  Characters killed in the Pit have their souls taken directly to the Abyss 
  where Orcus himself feasts on them. They cannot be retrieved or raised 
  without divine intervention such as by a wish or limited wish.
  
  60
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Demon, Dretch (10): HD 4; HP 30, 27x2, 23; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d4), bite (1d6); Move 9; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: 1/day—darkness 10ft radius, stinking 
  cloud (20ft; save or overcome by nausea for 1d4 
  rounds), teleport, summon 1d4 giant rats.
  Tactics of the Dretches: Dretches are pathetic, expendable pawns. The 
  vrocks use the dretches to surround and occupy Fighters while the vrocks 
  concentrate on spellcasters. Immune to its effects, the dretches use their 
  stinking cloud ability. They distract the fighters so the vrocks can focus on 
  killing the spellcasters.
  The Arrival of the “Celestial”: Caanara, the nalfeshnee demon, bides 
  his time at the bottom of the pit (Area 2 on the map, where Caanara’s 
  statistics are detailed). He monitors the battle between the characters 
  and the demons. If the characters kill three vrocks and it seems likely 
  they will kill the remaining two, Caanara assumes the form of the female 
  celestial of legend and ascends from the pit, bearing the unholy reaver 
  Entranhumani (New Magic Item Appendix). If, however, the characters 
  are losing the battle, Caanara might interfere, emerging from the pit as 
  “divine intervention.” To maintain the charade, give the characters a 
  chance to defeat several demons, if possible.
  Once Caanara ascends from the pit, the room brightens with a blinding, 
  holy light. The demons freeze. Blasting away the mists covering the 
  mouth of the pit, a beautiful, shimmering female figure wearing white 
  robes rises from the pit as if freed from ages of captivity. She levitates 
  above the pit and holds in her hand a brilliant silver sword encrusted with 
  gems and inlaid gold and glowing with a holy light. The vrocks recoil 
  in terror, and the dretches slink away from her holy presence. Though 
  she does not speak, each of the characters hears a voice, so melodic and 
  otherworldly that it is almost painful.
  “May the goddess bless you for freeing me from my captivity,” 
  the celestial says. “Many ages ago I built this temple to house 
  the Sword of the Justicars. When I returned to these halls to 
  await the coming of the next grandmaster, hordes of demons 
  and evil priests overcame me, imprisoning me in that pit. Your 
  presence distracted them, allowing me to break free.” She turns 
  to the paladin in the party. “To you, great champion, I bestow 
  this mighty weapon. Borne last by the great hero, Karith, and 
  by all Justicar grandmasters before him, you are now chosen to 
  succeed them. Hail to you, Grandmaster! May the lady of virtue 
  bless you! Go forth and use this weapon to bring just retribution 
  to creatures of evil and win glory for our lady’s name.”
  Her great task completed, the celestial disappears in a blinding flash.
  The vrocks, party to Caanara’s deception, recoil from “her” in pretend 
  fear. The vrocks work to convince the paladin and his party that they have, 
  in fact, won the Sword of Karith and can return to the world, carrying 
  with them an unholy reaver, thereby despoiling one of the world’s more 
  promising paladins. When Caanara “disappears,” he really just turns 
  invisible and flies to Area 3, where he remains. Remember: Play Caanara 
  as though he really were Muir’s female celestial. The party should have 
  no clue that this is a ruse. 
  Once the paladin grasps the unholy reaver and Caanara vanishes, the 
  vrocks make no attempt to engage him, instead resuming their attacks 
  against his companions. They flee from the paladin, acting as though 
  afraid of him. If the paladin attacks them with the unholy reaver, it seems 
  to cut through the vrocks like butter. They pretend to die. They shriek and 
  fly into the pit after they are struck twice by the sword, then head for Area 
  3. Referees should make fake rolls to convince characters that this effect 
  is some special power of the sword.
  Conversion: At this point, the Referee might choose to have the unholy 
  reaver tempt the paladin, suggesting his conversion to Chaos. The sword 
  tells the character that if he converts right now to Chaotic, accepts Orcus 
  as his deity and joins with the demons in slaying his companions, he can 
  remain a paladin at 2 bonus levels of experience above his current level. In 
  addition, the sword promises the character demon servants of great power, 
  a suit of +3 plate mail and a +3 shield. If accepted, the sword delivers on 
  these promises, teleporting the newly converted villain to a far-off cave 
  where these items are hidden. The character gains 2 hezrou servants, 
  which are bound to serve the wielder of the unholy reaver. Thanks to 
  Orcus’ influence, this conversion turns the paladin into a Chaotic anti-
  paladin with powers up to the discretion of the Referee.
  If the character refuses to convert, the sword erases his thoughts (no 
  save), removing any memory of the solicitation from the wielder’s mind. 
  Of course, attempting this conversion tips off the paladin’s player that 
  the sword is not a holy avenger and something is amiss. Only attempt 
  this conversion with a trusted roleplayer who will not reveal the sword’s 
  secret. Referees should roleplay this scenario away from the main group 
  so that no one else is privy to the discussion. If other players ask questions, 
  suggest that the sword was communicating privately with its new wielder, 
  explaining its powers. Or you could decide to skip this conversion attempt 
  and wait until the paladin leaves with the sword, as detailed below.
  Return Visit
  At some point in the future, when the characters return to the Pit of 
  Despair to destroy the unholy reaver, they find 3 vrocks waiting for them, 
  scattered about the room. The vrocks immediately attack the party — 
  teaming up against one victim to grab him and carry him to the bottom of 
  the pit where all three rip him to pieces. Then they fly out of the pit and 
  do it again.
  Demon, Vrock (3): HD 8; HP 61, 57, 50; AC 0[19]; Atk 2 fore 
  claws (1d8), 2 rear claws (1d8), beak (1d6); Move 12 (fly 18); 
  Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: immune to fire, magic 
  resistance (50%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—darkness 5ft radius; 1/day—
  gate 10% (1 vrock).
  Area 2: The Pit of Despair
  With the demons finally destroyed, the mist shrouding the mouth of the 
  pit dissipates. In the well below lies a massive treasure hoard. The pit, 40ft 
  deep and carved of stone, has no apparent exits.
  The First Visit
  Initially, the pit is shrouded with mists that serve no purpose save to hide 
  Caanara from view. He lurks in the bottom of the pit, monitoring the battle 
  above. If any character is crazy enough to jump into the pit during combat, 
  he encounters Caanara, who, if not expecting this action, is in his original 
  form. (If Caanara suspects a character might enter the pit before defeating 
  the demons, he changes into his celestial guise before his arrival and pleads 
  with the character to slay the demons so that “she” might be free and thus 
  bestow the sword on the paladin.) If seen in his normal form, Caanara (see 
  stats in Area 3) engages the character in melee, using his meager skills. If the 
  melee goes poorly, Caanara turns invisible and flies to Area 3. Otherwise, 
  Caanara acts as outlined above under “The Arrival of the “Celestial.”
  Treasure: 6200gp, 36,000sp, a gold cup set with emeralds worth 
  7000gp, an inlaid harp of silver and elven hair worth 4000gp, a medallion 
  of projecting thoughts, dancing boots and a censer of hostile elementals. 
  Unless a wish is used, the cursed nature of the items cannot be detected 
  while the characters are within the Pit.
  Secret Door: The secret door to Area 3 is very difficult to locate, 
  having been concealed with powerful magic. No magic short of a wish 
  allows its detection. The secret door consists of an entire 40ft section of 
  the wall. When opened, the door swings upward 90 degrees, triggering a 
  trap — a symbol of death inscribed on the reverse side of the door — and 
  sealing the pit’s mouth. If you wish, you could require a paladin be under 
  the effects of prayer and bless spells to have a chance to detect the secret 
  door, thus ensuring that the characters leave the dungeon without finding 
  the secret door on their first visit.
  
  61
  The Pit of despair
  False Ending
  If the characters do not find the secret door, the character should smile, 
  solicit feedback on how challenging the adventure was and congratulate 
  the players on a job well done. Remark how incredible it was that the 
  characters defeated 5 vrocks to recover the Sword of Karith! Then take 
  a break, quit for the night or start the next adventure. The unholy reaver 
  shows its true colors later. Wait until the next playing session before 
  beginning the corruption of the paladin. See “Atonement,” below.
  Return Visit
  Returning to destroy the unholy reaver, the characters find the Pit of 
  Despair empty. Any treasure left by the party during its previous visit has 
  been moved to Area 3.
  Area 3: The Altar of Evil and Good
  If the characters find, open and survive the symbol of death-trapped 
  secret door, they enter a large room. The secret wall, however, swings up 
  and seals the pit’s mouth with a foot-thick lid of stone. The large room 
  houses an evil altar carved from onyx set upon a black dais. Strangely, 
  the onyx, partially transparent, reveals the fabled Sword of Karith, pulsing 
  with a holy white light, sealed within the altar.
  At this point, the demons re-enter the picture, attacking the characters 
  en masse. Their sole purpose: preventing retrieval of the holy avenger. 
  The forces of darkness include Caanara the nalfeshnee, 1 glazrezu, 
  2 hezrou, 5 vrocks and 10 dretches. Unlike before, all demons now 
  concentrate their attacks on whoever wields the unholy reaver. They 
  interpose themselves between the character and the altar, preventing 
  contact at all costs.
  Caanara, Nalfeshnee Demon (Category IV): HD 7d10; HP 
  65; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), bite (2d4); Move 9 (fly 14); 
  Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +2 on attack rolls, +1 
  or better weapon to hit, immune to fire, magic resistance 
  (65%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—dispel magic, fear, 
  polymorph self; 1/day—symbol of discord; 1/day—
  gate 60% (roll 1d6 for category).
  Equipment: ring of invisibility.
  Demon, Glabrezu (Category III): HD 10; HP 60; AC –4[23]; Atk 
  2 pincers (2d6), 2 claws (1d3), bite (1d6); Move 9; Save 5; AL 
  C; CL/XP 15/2900; Special: immune to fire, magic resistance 
  (60%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—darkness 10ft radius, fear, 
  levitate, polymorph self; 1/day—gate 30% (roll 1d4 for 
  category).
  Demon, Hezrou (Category II) (2): HD 9; HP 50, 48 AC –2[21]; 
  Atk 2 claws (1d3), bite (4d4); Move 6 (fly 12); Save 6; AL C; 
  CL/XP 11/1700; Special: immune to fire, magic resistance 
  (50%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—darkness 15ft radius, detect 
  invisibility, fear; 1/day—gate 20% (1 hezrou).
  Demon, Vrock (Category I) (5): HD 8; HP 62, 57, 55x2, 
  49; AC 0[19]; Atk 2 fore claws (1d8), 2 rear claws (1d8), 
  beak (1d6); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: immune to fire, magic resistance (50%), magical 
  abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—darkness 5ft radius; 1/day—
  gate 10% (1 vrock).
  
  62
  Quests of Doom: Demons & Devils
  Demon, Dretch (10): HD 4; HP 30, 27x2, 23; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d4), bite (1d6); Move 9; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: 1/day—darkness 10ft radius, stinking 
  cloud (20ft; save or overcome by nausea for 1d4 
  rounds), teleport, summon 1d4 giant rats.
  During combat (but most likely after combat), the paladin can strike the 
  altar with the unholy reaver, destroying the altar and the unholy reaver, 
  and freeing the holy avenger. The impact shatters both objects instantly! 
  Destruction of the evil altar and unholy reaver nets each character a 5000 
  XP story award in addition to any combat experience.
  Treasure: The holy avenger Entrancacor (New Magic Item Appendix) 
  is inside the stone altar. The sword can be moved from the altar block 
  either by casting a wish on the altar or by striking the altar with the unholy 
  reaver Entranhumani as described above. Doing so shatters the altar and 
  unholy reaver and frees the holy avenger (the party can’t have both!). No 
  other way to remove the sword exists.
  Atonement
  If the characters are successfully duped into believing they have 
  recovered the Sword of Karith, there is a strong chance that the paladin falls 
  under the evil sword’s sway. The characters should have no encounters on 
  their return trip. Returning to an area with a large population of humans 
  (more than 50), the characters might begin to note changes in the sword-
  wielder. The sword waits until a good-sized group of low-level victims 
  are available and, in the presence of a few of the paladin’s comrades, 
  forces the character into a killing spree! Consider the common room of 
  an inn or tavern, late in the evening after most characters have retired and 
  the paladin is telling the story of the sword’s recovery to some locals, an 
  appropriate venue. Or, more despicably, wait until the paladin visits the 
  local church to pray. The character must make a saving throw with a –8 
  penalty or fly into a berserk, xenophobic rage (which he cannot willfully 
  come out of), looking for humans to slay, including other characters who 
  stumble upon the enraged paladin. After the event, the paladin collapses 
  and awakens a few minutes later. In the interim, the sword erases the 
  character’s memories. Should the paladin make the save, the sword 
  immediately causes him to forget (no save) — erasing any memory of the 
  failed attempt to control the character.
  Referees can find this highly entertaining. Imagine a paladin waking 
  amid the gory remains of a dozen townsfolk — his sword bloodied and his 
  paladin abilities no longer working. Any paladin succumbing to the will of 
  the sword and committing the above-described atrocities loses his paladin 
  status and cannot continue as a paladin without atoning. Any character 
  attempting to rid himself of the sword discovers that it continually returns 
  to him.
  The sword, of course, suggests an alternative. After the character’s 
  paladinhood is lost, the sword tempts the paladin into becoming evil, as 
  described under “Conversion,” above. The only catch: He must now slay 
  all of his Lawful companions to “regain” his paladin abilities — in service 
  to Orcus, of course.
  As Referee, decide who might properly suggest how to atone for such 
  vile deeds. For example, require that the character return to the priests 
  of Muir from whom he obtained the map to the Temple of the Justicars. 
  There, he can relate the story of the quest and its consequences. After 
  much prayer and communing, the priests describe what must be done to 
  restore paladinhood: The paladin must destroy the unholy reaver! There 
  is only one way for this to be done: It must be smashed upon the altar on 
  which it was forged. That altar, the characters are informed, is hidden 
  within the Temple of the Justicars, but no one knows exactly where. When 
  this is done — the characters are promised — not only will the unholy 
  reaver be destroyed, but they will also free the true Sword of Karith. This 
  act also restores the fallen paladin’s status.
  Most likely, amid feelings of doubt, hope and regret, the party gears 
  up for a return trip to the Pit of Despair. Plan an appropriate number of 
  wilderness encounters if it travels overland. Perhaps now the characters 
  might teleport to the canyon containing the temple’s entrance. Once the 
  characters arrive at the Pit of Despair for the second time, Referees should 
  refer to the above sections in Areas 1 and 2 titled “Return Visit” for 
  details on how the Pit of Despair is different the second time around. Who 
  knows? Maybe they will even succeed …
  
  63
  Giants
  &
  Dragons
  
  64
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  The Dead from Above is intended for use with four to six characters of 
  levels 6 to 8. It likely takes two game sessions to complete. The adventure 
  is set in (and above) a hilly region at the outskirts of civilization, 
  presumably one near the base of a mountain chain. With a little work, the 
  Referee can place The Dead from Above wherever he or she desires in 
  the campaign world. In the Lost Lands campaign setting, the adventure 
  is set on the eastern border of Cerediun Province in southern Akados. It 
  is situated in the foothills of the Scar-in-the-Sky Peaks in and around the 
  village of Tagril near the headwaters of the River Sess. If you use the first 
  option for introducing the characters to the adventure, then it begins in the 
  provincial capital of Trebes, some 100 miles northwest of Tagril.
  Background
  For centuries, the forbidding Scar-in-the-Sky Peaks were the demesne 
  of the Stormbreaker Clan, a family of evil cloud giants. These giants long 
  ago turned their backs on the path of righteousness and embraced the 
  worship of the evil god Drahltuz, practicing dread arts and conducting 
  foul rites in his honor. Despite their wicked ways, the Stormbreakers 
  seldom troubled those dwelling outside the mountain region. They were 
  content to remain in their high aeries and hold dominion over the lesser 
  races that dwelled among the peaks.
  In recent decades, however, the boundaries of mankind pushed closer 
  to the mountains as civilization continued its march into the frontier. 
  Many small villages arose in the foothills of the mountains, their growth 
  spurred by discoveries of veins of precious ore and other resources. 
  The Stormbreakers see this incursion into their ancient holdings as an 
  infestation of lesser vermin that needs exterminating.
  The cloud giants banded together to work an act of black magic and 
  blasphemous ritual. First, they scoured the jagged mountains for the 
  hidden burial grounds of their giant kin and great wyrms, prying the 
  yellowed bones of dead titans from the earth and carting them back to 
  their high peaks. The Stormbreakers called upon a long-forgotten ritual to 
  tear the top from a mountain, transforming it into a floating island adrift on 
  the winds. The collected bones were then used to build a mighty citadel on 
  the broken peak, formed into a gleaming structure the giant necromancers 
  dubbed “the Ossuary.” This magical holdfast would serve as their engine 
  of vengeance against the encroaching wave of mankind.
  The Stormbreakers stocked the floating keep with the supplies their 
  campaign required: rotting corpses of giants and dragons plundered from the 
  secret cemeteries; reagents and concoctions of darkest magic; and as many 
  of their blasphemous kin as the Ossuary would hold. They then departed the 
  mountains, drifting down over the lands of mankind with hatred in their eyes.
  The first villages had no inkling of the doom that awaited them. As the 
  residents went about their business, the sun was suddenly blocked out by 
  the floating Ossuary. The villagers watched in horror as giant zombies, the 
  animated remains of the bodies unearthed in the graveyards, dropped down 
  upon their settlement, destroying buildings and murdering the inhabitants. 
  The Stormbreakers’ chosen means of conveying their message that 
  humanity was not welcome in the mountains was terrifyingly effective.
  The giant necromancers are continuing their campaign of bombardment 
  and destruction, intent on driving every last human out of the hills. 
  Word of the attacks is spreading out of the hills and measures are being 
  implemented to stop this terror before every town and village in the 
  kingdom suffers from its predation. At this point, the adventurers become 
  embroiled in the scheme to end the Stormbreakers’ war on humankind.
  Starting the Adventure
  The Referee can introduce The Dead from Above in one of two ways. 
  The first is to have the party approached by local authorities to deal with 
  the problem. This gives the characters a chance to prepare and plan their 
  course of action. The second method is to thrust the adventure on them 
  without warning, dropping the adventure — literally — onto the party! 
  This section covers both possibilities.
  Method 1: Hired Troubleshooters
  This method works well if the characters are established adventurers 
  in the region and have a reputation for thwarting evil. If they’ve done 
  contract adventuring for local authority figures in the past, so much the 
  better.
  The party is approached by a representative of the lord-governor of 
  Cerediun Province who informs them that a terrible evil is destroying the 
  province’s holdings in the eastern mountains. The Crown’s provincial 
  administrator is hiring brave adventurers to root out and destroy this evil 
  before the death toll grows larger. In return, the lord-governor is offering 
  a reward of 1000gp in gemstones (or other appropriate payment as the 
  Referee sees fit).
  The agent knows the following information and freely presents it to 
  the party:
  1. A floating keep fashioned from bones and constructed in the shape of 
  a rough humanoid skull appeared over outlying villages in the past week. 
  Wherever it appears, it brings destruction and terror.
  2. The occupants of the bony fortress have never been seen, but their 
  attacks are terrifying and effective. Animated undead in the form of giant 
  zombies and skeletal dragons are launched from the aerial holdfast onto the 
  settlements below. These animated undead cause wholesale destruction, 
  both by landing atop buildings and by tearing apart the villages’ buildings 
  and inhabitants. 
  3. Adding insult to injury, a flight of wyverns appears to be following 
  the floating fortress like scavengers, feasting upon the dead and dying left 
  in the wake of the attacks. It’s not known whether they’re allied with the 
  fortress’s inhabitants or are just taking advantage of an opportunity. 
  4. The fortress has never been seen to touch down on the ground, 
  making it impossible to lay siege to. Daring adventurers are needed to 
  infiltrate the keep, identify who is responsible for the attacks, and end the 
  threat before more lives are lost and more villages are destroyed.
  If the party has its own means of flying (spells, magical items, etc.), 
  the characters should be able to begin the adventure without difficulty, 
  traveling to the western foothills and seeking out the Ossuary. Proceed to 
  The Wyvern Attack below.
  If the characters lack the means to take to the air, the lord-governor can 
  assist them. The Crown’s holdings in Cerediun includes a small stable 
  of griffons, complete with trained handlers. The lord-governor loans the 
  use of his flying mounts, along with their guides, to the party to aid their 
  search and assault on the aerial fortress. He stresses that the mounts and 
  their handlers should only help locate the holdfast and land the party 
  on it, but shall not engage in battle other than in self-defense. Once the 
  characters are in place, the griffons are to retreat to a safe distance until 
  the party calls them back with a prearranged signal. The flying mounts are 
  The Dead from Above
  By Michael Curtis
  
  65
  The dead from above
  too valuable to risk in battle and, should the party fail, they’ll be needed 
  for subsequent attacks on the keep.
  Method 2: The Call to  
  Adventure Comes from Above
  This option plunges the party directly into the events of the adventure 
  without warning, forcing them to think fast and respond to an unexpected 
  threat. It also provides a way to get a party without the means of magical 
  flight up to the Ossuary to complete the adventure. Although this method 
  is the author’s preferred means of starting The Dead from Above, some 
  gaming groups respond poorly to being dragged into an adventure this 
  way. You must determine how your players would react to this sudden 
  immersion in events and whether it’s right for your group.
  The adventure begins while the party is engaged in mundane business 
  in the small village of Tagril in the hilly region along the eastern border of 
  Cerediun Province. The adventurers might be resting overnight as part of 
  a prolonged journey or they have arrived at the village for other reasons 
  (seeking out the services of a local weaponsmith, sage, wizard, etc.), or 
  they might be following up rumors of a lost dungeon in the hills. It’s 
  ideal if you can seed rumors about recent attacks on nearby villages into 
  whatever adventure the characters were on just before this one, but that 
  isn’t strictly necessary to begin the adventure. At some point during the 
  day while the characters are inside a building, the Ossuary drifts over the 
  village, having chosen it as the next target in its campaign of evil. Read 
  the following:
  A tremendous crash echoes from outside, accompanied by an 
  earthshaking tremor and the sound of screams. A moment later, the 
  foul scent of decomposition and death washes over you. Villagers 
  rush past the open doorway, obviously fleeing for their lives. 
  As you emerge outside, you are confronted by a startling 
  vista. A building lies in ruins, a tangle of shattered timbers and 
  scattered thatching. Rising from the ruin is the walking, rotted 
  corpse of a dead giant. The massive zombie has many broken 
  bones, and cracked rafters protrude from its putrefying flesh. The 
  creature must have plummeted from above!
  Looking skyward, you see other horrors overhead. The skeletal 
  form of a dragon swoops about on tattered wings, its eyes burning 
  like corpse candles. A network of glowing strands is interlaced 
  throughout its bony form, twitching and vibrating as it soars 
  above you. Floating directly above the village is what appears 
  to be the top of a mountain, somehow sheared off its base and 
  set adrift. A building fashioned from titanic bones rests atop the 
  stony platform. As you watch, another immense figure steps from 
  the edge of the drifting stone and plummets to earth, smashing a 
  second building to flinders.
  The village of Tagril is in chaos as residents flee in terror. The shock and 
  awe of undead giants dropping atop them breaks their morale, and even 
  the few armed militia panic and run. The heroes find themselves alone, 
  facing three undead threats.
  The first stone giant zombie strides toward the party to attack while the 
  skeletal dragon swoops down on them. The second stone giant zombie 
  smashes into the ground, and it takes two rounds for the corpse to climb to 
  its feet and extract itself from the wreckage of the building.
  Zombie, Stone Giant: HD 10; HP 25, 26; AC 0[19]; Atk club 
  (3d6); Move 6; Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: 
  immune to charm and hold.
  Dragon, Skeletal: HD 10; HP 50; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 claws (1d8), 
  bite (3d10); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: immune to charm and hold.
  The stone giants have only one-half their normal hit points due to the 
  damage suffered in their drop from the floating citadel. All three undead 
  attack until destroyed. As the combat rages, the Ossuary slowly flies off, 
  its objective complete. When the skeletal dragon is reduced to zero hit 
  points, it collapses, its bony body emitting a pulsating, greenish glow for 
  several minutes.
  Reaching the Ossuary
  Once the battle is over, villagers return to Tagril, praising the party 
  for their valor. If the party is unaware of the recent attacks, the villagers 
  inform them that this assault was just the latest in a series of similar abrupt 
  bombardments of settlements in the area and that the local ruler is offering 
  a 1000gp reward to whoever ends the attacks. The locals know all the 
  details of the attacks as documented in Method 1 above. This should 
  inspire the party to investigate the Ossuary and stop its menace. If not, the 
  villagers plead with the characters to take the fight to the strange keep and 
  avenge the deaths of the locals who died in the attack.
  If the adventurers lack a means of flying in pursuit of the Ossuary, one 
  possibility lies nearby. If characters investigate the still-glowing form of 
  the battered but still relatively intact dragon, they discover the web of 
  control veins laced throughout its body. If characters avoid the dragon 
  or simply ignore it, some of the village children climb onto it and their 
  curiosity impels them to start yanking cords, making the dragon’s form 
  respond to their plucking. 
  Aloft on Dead Wings
  An examination of the skeletal dragon reveals a network of long, 
  veinlike cables running throughout the interior of the dragon. This web 
  of cables extends from the skull to the wings, legs, and tail, forming a 
  skein of thick cords. The veins glow softly with a corpselike green color. 
  Pulling on one of the veins causes the great skeletal beast to shudder as it 
  responds to the tugging. One cord causes its wing to unfurl, another tucks 
  in a skeletal leg, etc. If two heroes worked in concert, it’d be possible to 
  make the skeletal dragon take flight once more—perhaps a useful way to 
  pursue a certain drifting Ossuary!
  Flying a Skeletal Dragon
  The dragon can hold six man-sized creatures, with up to three 
  inside the dragon and another three riding atop it. Two halfling-
  sized creatures count as one man-sized passenger. The two “pilots” 
  (the characters tugging the skein to keep the dragon aloft) must be 
  inside the dragon, nestled within its ribcage. 
  The dragon flies at a speed of 80ft per round. It can move 30ft 
  per round on the ground, but it’s ungainly. Making the dragon fly 
  in a relatively straight line is easy with some practice, but if the 
  pilots try to perform more intricate maneuvers (banking to attack 
  the wyverns in the next encounter, for example), a dexterity check 
  (2d6 vs. score) for each is required. If both succeed, the dragon 
  moves as they desire. If one or both fail the check, the dragon 
  continues on its present course.
  The pilots can also cause the skeletal dragon to bite an opponent. 
  The bite inflicts 3d10 points of piercing damage on a successful 
  hit. Note that the dragon cannot maneuver and attack in the same 
  round, because both pilots are required to work in concert to move 
  the dragon in anything other than a straight line.
  Landing the dragon requires a dexterity check (2d6 vs. score) as 
  if the pilots were maneuvering the skeleton. If one or both pilots 
  fail the check, all aboard must make a successful saving throw 
  or take 2d6 points of bludgeoning damage (half damage with a 
  successful save) as the dragon lands hard.
  
  66
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  With about an hour’s worth of trial and error, two or more adventurers 
  can get the dragon aloft, but it quickly becomes apparent that the magic 
  holding the dragon together and empowering the vein network is slowly 
  failing. The dragon has less than a day remaining in its useful life. If the 
  party wishes to pursue the Ossuary, they need to go now. 
  So long as two heroes spend an hour practicing getting the dragon to fly, 
  the skeletal craft takes to the air without problem, and can pursue the Ossuary.
  The Wyvern Attack
  Regardless of which method you use to introduce the adventure, the 
  characters should ultimately close in on the Ossuary’s location. If the 
  heroes were hired by the local authority to seek out the fortress, a day or 
  two of searching the skies above the hills (and surviving whatever random 
  encounters you wish to add) locates the aerial keep flying through the sky 
  in the distance. If the characters pursued the Ossuary after surviving the 
  attack on the village, either via the skeletal dragon or through other flying 
  measures, the party has little difficulty locating the fort, approaching it 
  within an hour after beginning the pursuit. 
  As they approach the Ossuary but while it is still a few miles away, the 
  party encounters a challenge that must be surmounted before they can 
  begin their assault on the flying citadel. A pair of wyverns has taken to 
  following the Ossuary as it travels, trailing it like sharks shadowing a ship 
  seeking scraps. The small wyrms feed on the injured and dead the giants 
  leave in their wake, and they soon spot the flying adventurers. They swoop 
  down from out of the sun, with a 1-3 on a d6 chance of surprise. 
  Wyvern (2): HD 8; HP 40, 42; AC 3[16]; Atk bite (2d8) or 
  sting (1d6 plus poison); Move 6 (fly 24); Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 
  10/1400; Special: lethal poison. 
  Note that casting spells while engaged in aerial combat can be taxing on 
  spellcasters. If the spellcaster is mounted on a diving griffon or a skeletal 
  dragon engaged in combat with one of the wyverns, the Referee may rule 
  that a saving throw is required to maintain concentration on spells. This is 
  especially important if the spell being concentrated on is one holding the 
  character or an ally aloft!
  The Ossuary
  The flying citadel known as the Ossuary is a squat structure fashioned from 
  a humungous mass of bones. These bones range from small human femurs 
  to the massive rib bones plundered from dragons, all assembled into a shape 
  reminiscent of a humanoid skull. A parapet roughly resembling an extended 
  jaw bone encloses a rocky courtyard set in front of the bony building.
  The building rests atop a mass of rock that bears a truncated and upside-
  down teardrop shape. The stone foundation tapers to a point at its bottom 
  and is flat at its top (it’s the sheared-off top of a mountain, rotated upside-
  down), providing a firm and level base for the keep to rest upon. The 
  Ossuary floats a constant 400ft above the ground and moves at a speed of 
  0-80ft per round.
  The only obvious entrances to the Ossuary are via the great double 
  doors visible in the courtyard and through the barred cavern mouth in the 
  back of the fortress’s rocky base. The Ossuary has no apparent windows, 
  but some sections of bone are slightly translucent to allow sunlight to 
  illuminate the interior. 
  The Ossuary’s pilot, Morgosun, the cloud giant seated in the navigator’s 
  chair (see Level Three, Area 3), has a mental view of the area directly in 
  front of the Ossuary and up to 90 degrees to the left and right. The fortress 
  is effectively blind to creatures approaching from the rear, so a sneaky 
  party can easily reach the cavern’s mouth (Level One, Area 1) undetected. 
  Heroes deciding on a direct frontal assault are automatically seen, and the 
  Ossuary’s inhabitants immediately prepare to repel the attackers.
  
  67
  The dead from above
  
  68
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  Ossuary General Features 
  The entire fortress is fabricated from bones that are magically 
  strengthened to the same durability as stone. Floors, walls, and ceilings of 
  the fortress are constructed from hundreds of intertwined bones that form 
  a solid, if somewhat uneven, surface. Ceilings average 25ft in height and 
  most corridors are 20ft wide. The lower level of the Ossuary consists of 
  room and hallways carved out of solid rock intermixed with natural caves 
  and tunnels. The ceilings are slightly lower here, averaging 20ft in height.
  Doors: Doors inside the Ossuary, on the lower and upper levels, are 
  fashioned from wood reinforced with metal and bone. Locks, when 
  present, are integral parts of the door and not separate padlocks. Because 
  of the large size of the locks, picking them is easier for man-sized or 
  smaller size creatures with +15% on Open Locks check. The doors are 
  very sturdy, however, so a locked door will have to be broken down or a 
  knock used. Even when unlocked, pushing open one of the great valves 
  requires an Open Doors check.
  Illumination: During daylight hours, sunlight shines through 
  semitransparent sections of the walls to provide bright illumination on 
  the upper levels. Huge torches set in sconces resembling the skeletal hand 
  and arm of a large humanoid are spaced throughout windowless inner 
  chambers and lower levels of the fortress. Hill giant servants replace the 
  brands as necessary.
  Furnishings: All furnishings in the Ossuary are constructed for giants. 
  The seat of a chair, for example, is 5ft above the ground, and tabletops are 
  located an average 9ft in the air. Beds and similar accouterments are also 
  anywhere from 6 to 10ft high. As such, man-sized and smaller creatures 
  may not be able to see what lies atop certain furnishings and must climb 
  up onto tables, bunks, bookshelves, and similar objects.
  Potions and Other Consumables: Any potion vials encountered inside 
  the Ossuary or in the possession of one of the flying citadel’s inhabitants 
  are sized for giant consumption, making them three times larger than a 
  standard vial. They effectively contain three doses each when used by 
  halfling to man-sized creatures.
  Alarm: The Stormbreakers are intelligent foes who react to invaders 
  using the best tactics available to them. If an alarm is sounded by the 
  guards (in Level Two, Area 2 or Level Three, Area 1) or by an Ossuary 
  crewmember who encounters the party and flees for reinforcements, the 
  Stormbreakers take the following steps:
  • The hill giants from Level One, Area 4 are summoned to reinforce 
  specific areas. If the alarm gong sounds in Level Two, Area 2, 4 giants 
  are sent to the hallway outside the kitchen and dining areas (Level Two, 
  Area 6 and Level Two, Area 9). They engage intruders encountered in 
  the halls of Level Two or lie in wait to ambush invaders coming down the 
  north-south hallway leading past the lounge and the kitchen (Level Two, 
  Area 4 and Level Two, Area 6). 
  • Xurgal (Level Two, Area 14), Jezsyl (Level Two, Area 16), Oblugrim 
  (Level Three, Area 2), and the remaining two hill giants from Level One, 
  Area 4 head directly to the last known location of the intruders.
  • The three young giants in the lounge (Level Two, Area 4) return to 
  their quarters (Level Two, Area 10).
  • Tathhylia and her serpent (Level Three, Area 2) move to reinforce 
  the guards in the Bridge (Level Three, Area 3).
  • Bregucar and Chandylbor continue their work, but they instruct the fire 
  giant zombie in Level One, Area 7 to patrol the main corridor on Level One.
  The Referee’s judgment has final say over how the Stormbreakers react. 
  The above directions should be used as a guideline. Stormbreaker casualties 
  might mean some of the indicated NPCs aren’t available to act as specified, 
  leaving the Referee to determine how the survivors act in the face of invasion.
  
  69
  The dead from above
  Wandering Monsters
  A check should be made every 30 minutes to see whether characters 
  encounter a random occupant of the Ossuary. There is a 10% chance for 
  an encounter on Level One and a 20% chance for a random encounter 
  occurring on Levels Two and Three every half-hour. If one occurs, the 
  creature encountered depends on the adventurers’ current location. A random 
  encounter on Level One is always 1d4 hill giant guards (see Level Two, 
  Area 2 for details). Encounters on Levels Two and Three are determined 
  with a roll on the following table. A named NPC encountered and defeated 
  during a random encounter is not met again at its keyed location or in 
  subsequent random encounters. Defeating unnamed, randomly encountered 
  monsters does not affect the number of giants aboard the Ossuary. 
  Ossuary Levels Two and Three Random Encounters 
  1d10
  Encounter 
  1–5
  1d4 hill giant guards (as Level Two, Area 2)
  6–7
  1d3 cloud giants (see Level One, Area 3)
  8
  Xurgal (see Level Two, Area 14)
  9
  Jezsyl (see Level Two, Area 16)
  10
  Tathhylia and feathered snake (see Level Three, Area 2)
  Level One — Lower Level
  Formed from the stony top of a mountain, the lower level of the 
  Ossuary houses chambers for the creation of the zombie “bombs” the 
  Stormbreakers use against humanity, the holdfast’s weird engine, and 
  living quarters. Prudent intruders begin their infiltration of the Ossuary 
  by sneaking in through the barred cavern in the rocky base of the fortress 
  rather than via a direct assault against the fortress’s front doors.
  Area 1: Bomb Bay
  A large cavern pierces the side of the rocky mass that serves 
  as the base of the floating bone citadel. A massive row of bars 
  with a closed double gate seals the cavern mouth from intruders. 
  Beyond the great steel barricade, you can see burning torches 
  that illuminate an apparently empty area.
  The giants lead their animated dead to this area when approaching a 
  new target, then open the gates and command the giant zombies to step out 
  and plunge to the ground. When not preparing to bomb a target, the gates 
  are closed and locked to keep aerial pests and intruders out.
  The gate is locked by a tremendous padlock, but unfortunately for the 
  giants, the size of the lock makes it easier to pick by man-sized or smaller 
  creatures (a successful Open Locks check with +15% bonus springs the 
  lock). Also, while the bars are spaced far enough apart to keep out human-
  sized or larger intruders, halfling creatures can squeeze through. 
  The bomb bay cavern is empty when not in use. It contains six burning 
  torches that light the large space and the faint smell of rotting flesh. A 
  single door stands in the north wall.
  Area 2: The Undead Ooze
  A heaving mass of partially coagulated flesh writhes in what 
  appears to be a curved tunnel. The gelid heap struggles to rise, 
  assuming a vaguely humanoid appearance. It slouches toward you.
  The creature is the result of an experiment by Bregucar, who 
  wanted to see if the coagulated blood and skeletons of corpses could 
  be necromantically granted life and form, and thus used in the giants’ 
  campaign. The experiment was a success, giving birth to an undead 
  abomination fashioned from blood and bones: the undead ooze. It is 
  currently contained in this circular room to serve as a security measure 
  protecting the Necrolofter (Area 3), but the giant necromancers plan to 
  put it to evil use in the near future. Bregucar has a modicum of control 
  over the undead ooze and it responds to his commands, allowing the 
  giants to access Area 3 when necessary.
  The room surrounds the Necrolofter chamber. This area contains 
  nothing but the undead ooze and a few discarded bones of hill giant 
  servants fed to the creature to keep it appeased.
  Ooze, Undead: HD 6; HP 36; AC 9[10]; Atk strike (2d4 plus 
  1d6 cold) or engulf; Move 9 (climb 9); Save 11; CL/XP 8/800; 
  Special: engulf (victim must save or take automatic strike 
  damage, save on applicable for target not attacking), 
  expel 1d6 skeletons. (The Tome of Horrors Complete 416)
  Skeletons (1d6): HD 1; AC 8[11]; Atk strike (1d6); Move 12; 
  Save 17; CL/XP 1/15; Special: immune to sleep and charm.
  Area 3: The Necrolofter
  The door to this room is locked. Bregucar (see Area 7) has the key.
  This rough-hewn cavern is dominated by a sizable piece of 
  odd statuary. Fashioned from dark marble with striations of red 
  throughout the stone, the statue depicts a figure that appears 
  angelic at first glance. Large, feathered wings stretch from the 
  robed figure’s back. Its face is hidden by a shadowy cowl. The 
  statue emerges from a large piece of rectangular stone, seemingly 
  carved from the block. Haze hangs about the statue, making it 
  difficult to pick out further details. What appear to be bones and 
  clothing lie scattered about the area.
  This statue is in truth a portion of a titan’s gravestone plundered from an 
  ancient cemetery. The headstone was magically altered to serve as a focus 
  for necromantic power to be harnessed to levitate and drive the Ossuary. 
  This mystical engine is known as the Necrolofter.
  The Necrolofter draws its power from living souls fed to the hungry 
  spirits surrounding the device. These indistinct souls are the haze 
  encompassing the device. The Stormbreakers hurl a captured prisoner or 
  poorly-performing servant in here once a week to keep the necromantic 
  artifact energized. The inside of the door leading to this room bears 
  numerous scratches and bloodstains as the “fuel” helplessly beat on it in 
  an attempt to escape.
  Four hungry spirits are tied to the Necrolofter. They drain life from 
  the victims forced into this room and channel the siphoned life into the 
  device. The power of the Necrolofter keeps them contained within the 
  confines of this room, ever-hungry and angry. These hungry spirits are 
  identical to wraiths.
  Wraith (4): HD 4; HP 20, 22, 24, 25; AC 3[16]; Atk touch (1d6 
  plus level drain); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; 
  Special: drain 1 level with hit, silver or +1 or better weapon 
  to hit.
  If the spirits are destroyed, the Necrolofter cannot be refueled without 
  removing the headstone and engaging in a new, prolonged ritual to repair 
  the magical engine. Such a process takes at least two weeks to perform. 
  Without the hungry spirits feeding the engine power, it slowly runs down. 
  After seven days, the Ossuary drifts down from the sky, coming to rest 
  wherever it is currently located. The descent is gradual (a safety measure 
  
  70
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  inherent to the Necrolofter) so no damage is suffered by the Ossuary or 
  its passengers.
  Characters wishing to damage or destroy the device must first 
  overcome the hungry spirits. Once the spirits are gone, the Necrolofter 
  can be attacked directly. While the spirits exist, damage done to the 
  Necrolofter is automatically repaired as the spirts shunt necrotic 
  energy into the device. The engine has an AC of 6 and 400 hit points. It 
  automatically fails saving throws. If reduced to 200 or fewer hit points, 
  safety protocols kick in and the Ossuary begins descending at a rate of 
  40ft per round, reaching the ground after 10 rounds. If the Necrolofter 
  is reduced to zero hit points before the Ossuary reaches the ground, the 
  entire structure crashes to the ground catastrophically. All aboard must 
  make a save or be killed in the crash as bones, rock, and rubble collapse 
  atop them. Those that make the save suffer 10d10 points of bludgeoning 
  damage instead.
  Any direct attack on the Necrolofter (not the hungry spirits) is detected 
  by the pilot, Morgosun, in Level Three, Area 3. He feels the disturbance 
  in the Ossuary’s energy field and alerts his fellow giants. Immediately, 3 
  cloud giants and 6 hill giants (assuming all the giants on the upper level 
  haven’t been slain) are dispatched to investigate, arriving 1d4+4 rounds 
  later. Unsurprisingly, they are displeased with intruders attempting to 
  crash the Ossuary, and they counterattack with brutal force.
  Giant, Cloud (3): HD 12+1d4hp; HP 62, 60, 58; AC 4[15]; Atk 
  great clubs (6d6); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 13/2300; 
  Special: hurl boulders (6d6).
  Giant, Hill (6): HD 8; HP 40, 42, 44, 46, 48; Atk great clubs 
  (2d8); Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: hurl 
  boulders (2d8). 
  Area 4: Hill Giant 
  Servants’ Quarters
  Any hero quietly listening automatically hears the sound of physical 
  scuffling and deep, bass laughter coming from behind this door.
  Large beds and crude furnishing fill this room. Rugs of animal 
  pelts line the floor and great hogshead barrels stand against one 
  wall, a rack of tankards and drinking horns above it. The smell of 
  body odor and stinky feet fills the air with a foul miasma. 
  The Stormbreakers subdued and conscripted a tribe of hill giants to 
  serve as underlings and cannon fodder. The tribe bunks on the lower level 
  of the Ossuary, where they can pursue their rough entertainments without 
  disturbing their masters.
  If the Ossuary isn’t in a state of alarm, 6 hill giants (see Area 3 above 
  for stats) are present in this room, relaxing with dark ale drawn from the 
  hogsheads and physical roughhousing. 
  The giants respond poorly to being interrupted during their rest and 
  relaxation, but quickly decide beating the characters to death with their 
  greatclubs provides ample entertainment. Two of the hill giants, a little 
  deeper in their cups than their friends, grab barrels from the row of six 
  lining the wall and hurl them (as rocks) at the party.
  The room contains a dozen beds, six footlockers, and six open 
  wardrobes. The wardrobes contain spare boots and crude shoes, dirty 
  tunics, and fur vests. The footlockers hold a variety of dirty clothes and 
  other items. Treat each footlocker as a giant’s bag, rolling randomly to 
  determine the unusual contents of the container.
  The six barrels hold a dark, rich ale of vastly superior quality than what 
  the hill giants are used to (thus they don’t mind their servitude so much). 
  Each barrel holds 54 gallons of ale. The brew is worth 4sp per gallon 
  (21.6gp per barrel). Thrown barrels break on impact and their contents 
  are lost.
  Area 5: Stairwell
  An open area beside the corridor forms a broad, rocky alcove 
  here. The alcove holds a large spiral staircase carved from the 
  native stone and winds upward clockwise through a hole in the 
  ceiling. A single torch burns in a sconce at the base of the stairs.
  The stairs measure 15ft wide and rise 40ft to connect with the upper 
  level of the Ossuary at Level Two, Area 8.
  If combat occurs on the staircase, creatures battling from the upper 
  position have tactical advantage on attacks against lower opponents.
  Area 6: Storage
  This chamber is roughly hewn from the surrounding rock and is 
  densely packed with giant spools of rope and forged chain, crates 
  and barrels, and other assorted containers. The smell of grease, 
  oil, and other pungent scents mix to tinge the air with a potpourri 
  of mundane, household odors.
  This chamber is an unassuming storage area holding various everyday 
  supplies used in the operation and maintenance of the Ossuary. Among the 
  goods here are 2000ft of hemp rope, 500ft of chain, 10 barrels of goose 
  grease, assorted mops and brooms, bales of straw for bed ticking, 20 five-
  gallon kegs of lamp oil, sacks of lye, bags of sand, bolts of canvas, and 
  other household goods. The contents of the room are flammable, but a 
  blaze does not spread beyond this room.
  Area 7: Animatorium
  Shelves bearing jars, retorts, beakers, and other oddly-shaped 
  vessels of glass and ceramic line the walls of this room. A titanic 
  stone slab occupies the center of the space, and the ghoulish 
  corpse of an ice-blue giant sprawls on the tabletop. Crouched 
  over him with long needles and thread are a pair of giants dressed 
  in tattered black robes and high, pointed hoods. A second giant 
  corpse, this one with rotting skin colored such a deep red that it’s 
  almost black, stands upright and unmoving in the corner.
  The two robed giants are Bregucar and his apprentice, Chandylbor, cloud 
  giant necromancers and scholars of the funeral arts. It is their duty to produce 
  the giant zombie “bombs.” They are preparing another specimen now.
  The corpse on the slab is not yet animated, but the fire giant zombie in 
  the corner is. The animated fire giant is a new prototype the necromancers 
  designed to increase the destruction of their bombardment campaign. 
  Before animation, the fire giant corpse was cut open and its body stuffed 
  with containers of alchemist’s fire. The intent is to create a zombie that 
  explodes into flames upon impact, spreading fire as it shambles through a 
  settlement. By using a fire giant corpse, the necromancers hope to prolong 
  its “lifespan” and increase the destruction it causes.
  Bregucar, Cloud Giant Necromancer: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 66; 
  AC 4[15]; Atk great club (6d6); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 
  15/2900; Special: hurl boulders (6d6), spells MU9 (4/3/3/2/1). 
  Spells: 1st—detect magic, magic missile (x2), 
  protection from good; 2nd—invisibility, mirror image, 
  web; 3rd—haste, protection from normal missiles, slow; 
  4th—charm monster, ice storm; 5th—animate dead.
  
  71
  The dead from above
  Equipment: great club, dagger, potion of healing, a key 
  ring with keys (gate in Area 1, the doors to Area 3 and 
  Area 10, and the trunk in Area 10), pouch containing 
  76gp, a moonstone (10gp value), a silver ring (25gp).
  Chandylbor, Cloud Giant Apprentice: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 50; 
  AC 4[15]; Atk great club (6d6); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 
  15/2900; Special: hurl boulders (6d6), spells MU5 (4/2/1).
  Spells: 1st— detect magic, magic missile (x2), 
  protection from good; 2nd—darkness 15ft radius, mirror 
  image; 3rd—fireball.
  Equipment: great club, dagger, keys to the trunk and 
  spellbook in Area 9, pouch containing 18sp, 67gp, a 
  well-worn and ancient gold coin (1gp face value, but 
  worth up to 100gp to collectors because of its antiquity).
  Zombie, Fire Giant: HD 12; HP 58; AC 4[15]; Atk great club (5d6); 
  Move 6; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: immune to fire, 
  charm, and hold, filled with alchemist’s fire (see below).
  Filled with Alchemist’s Fire: An attack that causes slashing or piercing 
  damage to the fire giant zombie triggers a burst of flame as one of the 
  alchemist’s fire containers inside the zombie spills its contents from the 
  wound. If the damage came from a melee attack, the attacker must make 
  a successful saving throw or take 1d4 points of fire damage at the start of 
  each of its turns, until extinguishing the flames. If the damage came from 
  a ranged attack, the alchemist’s fire splashes onto one character adjacent 
  to the fire giant zombie and on the same side of it as the ranged attacker; in 
  this case, the saving throw to avoid the splash is at a bonus of +2.
  The containers on the shelves hold various chemicals and reagents used 
  to preserve dead flesh or retard its decay. They have no intrinsic value.
  Area 8: Morgue
  The stink of rotting meat is overpowering in this large space. 
  Piled in haphazard fashion are at least a dozen decaying corpses 
  of giants. The dead creatures range in size, indicating that these 
  corpses are of varying types and ages. Clouds of black flies fill 
  the air, and swarms of maggots writhe on the exposed flesh.
  The stench is so strong that each character who enters the chamber 
  must make a successful saving throw or become nauseated (–2 penalty to 
  hit and damage rolls) for as long as they remain in the room and for 10 
  minutes after leaving.
  A total of 15 giant corpses are here: six hill giants, four stone giants, 
  three fire giants, and two frost giants. All are in a state of great decay and 
  dressed in rotting funeral garments or winding shrouds. One of the fire 
  giants still bears a piece of funereal goods on its body, overlooked in the 
  grave robbers’ haste: a beaten gold bracelet bearing three fire opals (500gp 
  value). Finding this piece of jewelry requires a search of the bodies that 
  stirs up the colony of rot grubs in the dead.
  Rot Grub: HD 1hp; AC 9[10]; Atk burrow; Move 1; Save 18; AL 
  N; CL/XP 1/15; Special: burrow to heart in 1d3+1 turns.  
  Area 9: Chandylbor’s Quarters
  A giant bed dominates this room, turning the otherwise spacious 
  area into cramped living quarters. A writing table and chest clutter 
  one corner of the room, and a high shelf littered with jars, boxes, 
  and other containers hangs high overhead on the north wall.
  These are the quarters of Chandylbor, the apprentice cloud giant 
  necromancer. His room is not nearly as spacious as his master’s but, like 
  Bregucar, he spends much of his time in the animation area preparing new 
  undead.
  The shelf, hanging 15ft above the floor, is affixed directly to the wall by 
  bolts. Characters wishing to inspect its contents must climb the rough wall 
  with a successful Climb Walls check or use magic to ascend. 
  The shelves contain:
  • six jars of ashes, bone fragments, teeth, and fingernail pairings;
  • a glass beaker holding a clear liquid (concentrated acid equal to four 
  vials of the substance);
  • a box containing weathered and sweat-stained giant-sized tarot cards 
  (no special properties, but worth 100gp as a curiosity);
  • an ogre skull turned into a candleholder. Inside the wax-sealed 
  cranium is a scroll of invisibility that Chandylbor keeps as an escape plan 
  should things ever fare poorly for him.
  The writing table holds several jars of ink, a dozen large quills stored in 
  a cup, and a box with a dozen sheets of foolscap. 
  The trunk is locked and trapped. Chandylbor’s key safely unlocks it, 
  but picking the trunk triggers the trap: A spray of acid strikes all targets 
  in a 15ft cone in front of the trunk. Those caught in the cone must make a 
  successful saving throw or suffer 3d6 points of acid damage.
  The trunk holds a spare pair of low, soft boots, three sets of black robes 
  with peaked cowls, a jar of hair pomade, a chased silver flask (50gp value) 
  holding three doses (or one giant-sized dose) of potion of flying, a leather 
  sack with 378sp and 297gp, and a dagger in a brass sheath. Everything is 
  giant-sized. It also holds Chandylbor’s spellbook. A lock keeps the book 
  sealed and requires either a successful Open Lock check to pick or the 
  key from Chandylbor’s pouch (see Area 7). The spellbook contains all of 
  Chandylbor’s prepared spells.
  Area 10: Bregucar’s Quarters
  The door to this room is locked. Bregucar (see Area 7) has the key.
  A simple bedchamber carved from the surrounding rock, this 
  room contains a large bed, a gigantic table, a solid wooden 
  wardrobe, and a massive iron trunk. A carpet of ebon hue 
  decorated with a pattern of white skulls covers the stone floor.
  This room is Bregucar’s chamber, but his duties give him little time to 
  rest. The wardrobe contains half a dozen dark, tattered robes with high, 
  pointed cowls and two pairs of giant-sized, high, soft boots. The table 
  holds an assortment of writing implements, a score of giant sheets of paper 
  measuring 10ft square, a mighty tome, and a trio of long scroll tubes. 
  The tome is Bregucar’s spellbook, and it is sealed with an wizard lock 
  spell. The spellbook contains all of Bregucar’s prepared spells (see Area 
  7 above) The scroll tubes contain a blank scroll waiting to be inscribed, a 
  scroll of protection from undead, and a scroll of animate dead.
  The trunk’s lid is inscribed with runes, but these are difficult to see 
  unless a character climbs atop the large chest. The trunk is enchanted: A 
  detect magic spell reveals an aura of conjuration and necromancy about 
  the box. It is locked and requires Bregucar’s key to open. However, if the 
  lock is picked or even if the key is used and the opener does not press down 
  on a certain rune on the trunk’s lid (noticing the rune can be depressed 
  requires an inspection of the writing), a trap is sprung. Incorrectly opening 
  the trunk causes a ghost to coalesce around the trunk and attack. The ghost 
  prefers to possess a victim and cause it to walk off the ledge in Area 1 (if 
  the gate is unlocked). The ghost relinquishes control as the victim steps off 
  the ledge, laughing hideously as the again-conscious subject plunges to its 
  doom. The ghost then moves on to possess another victim.
  The trunk contains the following treasures:
  • A satin pouch (10gp value) containing three garnets (50gp value 
  each), five sapphires (100gp value each), and a blue diamond (500gp 
  value);
  
  72
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  • A giant-sized ivory comb fashioned from a mammoth tusk (200gp 
  value);
  • A leather sack containing 756gp;
  • A battered book. This text is a manual of golems.
  The carpet is worn and dirty but still worth 50gp if characters can find 
  a way to cart it away.
  Level Two — Main Level
  This “ground level” of the Ossuary contains living quarters, food 
  preparation and dining areas, storage, and an evil chapel, all of which 
  cater to the Stormbreakers’ day-to-day activities. Random encounters are 
  more likely to occur on this level than on the lower one, and result in a 
  more varied array of occupants moving about the fortress (see “Random 
  Encounters,” above).
  Area 1: Courtyard
  A rocky courtyard lies exposed to the sky before the great bone 
  building. The courtyard is encircled by a 40ft high rampart of 
  fused bone on three sides and by the building itself on the fourth. 
  A pair of skeletal dragons patrols the courtyard and scours the 
  sky with glowing eyes. A set of double doors leads out of the 
  courtyard and into the bony structure.
  The doors are locked and of great size. Even unlocked, an Open Doors 
  check is required to push them open.
  Two skeletal dragons defend the courtyard from intruders. These 
  specimens are improved versions of the cannon fodder set loose on the 
  village. Each has been modified by the necromancer giant to possess a 
  breath weapon of razor-sharp bone shards with which to decimate foes. 
  Dragon, Skeletal (2): HD 10; HP 50, 54; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 claws 
  (1d8), bite (3d10); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 
  12/2000; Special: bone shard breath (30ft cone of jagged, 
  splintered bones, 4d6 damage, save half), immune to 
  charm and hold.
  Area 2: Foyer
  Beyond the doors lies an entry hall fashioned from polished and 
  interlaced bones of myriad sizes. Hanging from the east and west 
  walls are unusual decorations. The west wall bears a massive 
  plaque fashioned from bones and shaped into the semblance of a 
  giant skull. A skeletal serpent is intertwined through the skull’s 
  eye sockets and nasal cavity. The east wall holds a gigantic shield 
  decorated with the symbol of a fist grasping a turbulent storm 
  cloud. Three exits leave this room: single doors in the east and 
  west walls, and a pair of double doors in the south wall.
  Stationed here are 3 hill giant guards charged with defending the 
  
  73
  The dead from above
  Ossuary and alerting its inhabitants in case of attack. If the heroes 
  engage in battle with the skeletal dragons in the courtyard, these guards 
  automatically hear the battle and sound an alarm by banging on the great 
  shield hanging on the wall to put the inhabitants on alert (see Alarm under 
  “General Ossuary Features” above). They then prepare to resist invaders. 
  If the party avoids battle with the courtyard dragons or approaches 
  this area from within the Ossuary, the giants may be surprised. If taken 
  unaware, one of their number attempts to sound the alarm on the first 
  round of combat that the guards are able to react. Each of these giants 
  also carries a skull bombard. These weapons are the skulls of large 
  creatures (ogres are preferred) filled with clay containers of alchemist 
  fire and weighted with lead. These hill giants use their skull bombards 
  as ammo in their ranged attacks. On a successful hit, the skull bombard 
  does 2d8 points of bludgeoning damage (a stronger giant could do more). 
  In addition, the skull bursts open when it hits a solid object and splashes 
  alchemist’s fire in a 5ft radius area around the point of impact. Targets 
  caught in the area of effect are set afire and take 1d4 points of fire damage 
  per round until they take the time to put out the flames. 
  The giants have no coinage, but the squad leader wears a gold chain 
  with a polished bone medallion (100gp value) as a mark of his position.
  The skull-headed plaque is the symbol of Drahltuz, the giants’ god of 
  fear and death, and patron of the Stormbreaker Clan. The fist-and-cloud 
  plaque is the clan heraldry of the Stormbreakers. Neither item has any 
  special property or value.
  Giant, Hill (3): HD 8; HP 42, 46, 48; Atk great clubs (2d8); 
  Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: hurl skull 
  bombard (2d8 plus 1d4 fire, 5ft radius). 
  Area 3: Audience Hall
  Beyond the doors is a vast hall. Four skeletal columns support 
  a 40ft high cathedral ceiling. A raised dais stands against the 
  far wall, a pair of bony thrones sized for giants resting atop it. 
  Illumination comes from a half-dozen burning brands set in 
  scones made from skeletal hands. The hall is otherwise empty.
  The pillars are more than what they appear to be. Hidden in the skeletal 
  patterns that decorate the columns are four necromantic constructs. These 
  constructs resemble oversized skeletons with two arms and two skull 
  heads or skeletal ettins. The guardians respond to Oblugrim’s commands, 
  serving to defend him and his consort when court is in session and to 
  protect the hall from intruders when Stormbreakers are not present. The 
  bone guardians step from the columns to attack any unauthorized creature 
  (e.g., the characters) entering this room.
  Ettin, Skeletal (4): HD 10; HP 50, 48, 45, 52; Atk 2 claws (1d6), 
  2 bites (1d8); Move 12; Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: 
  immune to charm and hold, resistant to slashing and 
  piercing weapons (50%). 
  The bone thrones are used when Oblugrim and his consort, Tathhylia, 
  hold court for the clan. Each contains a secret compartment in the left 
  
  74
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  armrest. Each compartment holds two glossy black vials, one with a white 
  stopper and the other with a green stopper. The vials with white stoppers 
  are potions of healing, while those with green stoppers are potions of ESP. 
  Area 4: Lounge
  A plush rug of vibrant sky blue covers the bone floor of this 
  brightly lit room. A large settee and three massive upholstered 
  chairs are arranged around a low, dark-stained wooden table. 
  Grand portraiture depicting picturesque landscapes and mountain-
  scapes adorn the walls. Oversized candles mounted on mirror-
  backed holders hanging from the walls illuminate the room.
  Unless an alarm sounds, the lounge is occupied by the 3 cloud giant 
  youths named Tranimyz, Wylkun, and Sylzak. They enjoy the freedom 
  and space of the lounge compared with their own cramped quarters. 
  Being young, they have stats identical to fire giants but without fire 
  immunity. 
  Tranimyz, Wylkun, and Sylzak, Cloud Giant Youth: HD 
  11+1d4hp; HP 44, 46, 48; AC 4[15]; Atk great club (5d6); 
  Move 12; Save 4; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: hurl boulders 
  (5d6).
  Tranimyz has a gold earring (100gp value), 57gp, and a rough opal 
  (250gp value).
  Wylkun has a gold-and-silver torc (250gp value), 78gp in coins, and a 
  charm bracelet with pieces of polished and shaped petrified wood hanging 
  from it (150gp value).
  Sylzak has a silver circlet (200gp value), matching gold and sapphire 
  earrings (500gp value), and 48gp.
  On the walls between the pictures are 12 candles and candleholders. 
  Six pictures hang here, each done with accomplished skill. They are 
  worth 250gp each, but they measure 10ft long, 5ft high, and weigh 50lbs 
  each.
  Area 5: Decorative Archway
  A decorative archway bisects the corridor at this location. Like 
  the rest of the fortress, the archway is constructed of bones and 
  assembled to depict a humanoid skull with a greatly exaggerated 
  mouth. The skull’s open mouth serves as the archway, requiring 
  walkers to enter through the mouth to continue down the corridor. 
  The long skeleton of a great serpent has been threaded through 
  the skull archway’s eye sockets to hang pendulously down over 
  the corridor.
  Four of these archways are on the upper level of the Ossuary. Two are 
  simply decorative, while the other two are traps intended to slay or impede 
  invaders lacking knowledge of the proper passcode.
  Archway 5A
  Failing to speak the word “gulgrotha” (the Giant word for boneyard) 
  before entering the archway causes a pair of humungous skeletal arms 
  to emerge from the surrounding walls of the corridor and attack the 
  intruder. 
  Skeletal Arm Trap: If triggered, two large skeletal arms emerge from 
  the walls and attack each round. One arm grapples and the other arm 
  pummels; the pummeling arm always targets a creature that is grappled by 
  the other arm, if possible. Both arms are AC 9[10] with 50 hit points each.
  Pummeling Arm: attack at 5HD (reach 20ft. one creature); 2d10 
  bludgeoning damage. A creature grappled by the grappling arm is hit 
  automatically by this attack.
  Grappling Arm: attack at 6HD (reach 20ft; one creature); target is held 
  until successful difficult strength check (4d6 vs. score)
  Archway 5B
  Failing to speak the word “tromuldah” (the Giant word for decay) 
  before entering the archway causes the skeletal snake to animate and 
  strike at intruders.
  Skeletal Snake Trap: If triggered, a skeletal snake animates and 
  attacks. The animated snake is AC 8[11] and has 60 hit points.
  Skeletal Snake Bite: attack at 8HD (reach 20ft.; one creature); 1d10+8 
  points of piercing damage and the target must make a successful saving 
  throw or take 2d6 points of poison damage.
  Area 6: Kitchen
  The fixtures and furnishings of this sizable kitchen were 
  designed for the use of large beings. Bubbling pots of stew 
  rest atop the hot oven. A great tabletop is covered with diced 
  vegetables and sliced meat awaiting their turn on the stove.
  A pair of hill giant servants toils here preparing supper. They are present 
  even if an alert is sounded, as they don’t wish to anger their larger masters 
  by delaying a meal. The stew is rich and tasty, and in sufficient quantity to 
  feed up to eight giant appetites. The other prepared ingredients are normal 
  and without interest or value.
  Giant, Hill (2): HD 8; HP 46, 48; Atk great clubs (2d8); Move 
  12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: thrown pot (2d8).
  Area 7: Pantry
  Foodstuffs, both fresh and preserved, fill this cramped room. 
  Smoked sausages of unusual size hang from hooks in the ceiling. 
  Jars of pickled fruits and vegetables line the shelves. Crates of 
  potatoes, cabbages, and turnips sit beside sacks of flour and 
  meal. Clusters of garlic, onions, and dried peppers add their own 
  aromas to the melody of smells that perfumes the room.
  Most of the ingredients for the meals prepared in Area 6 come from 
  here. Given the palettes of the diners, the array of viands is rather 
  surprising and consists of quality goods. The pantry contains enough food 
  to feed the equivalent of 50 men for one month. 
  Mixed in among the normal foodstuff is a small coffer containing 
  10 vials of spices, including cinnamon, cloves, cardamom, vanilla, and 
  saffron. The coffer’s contents are worth 200gp to gourmands or spice 
  traders. Finding the coffer requires a specific search of the shelves because 
  of its small size.
  Area 8: Stairwell
  The floor of this chamber is rough stone as opposed to the 
  intertwined bone that makes up the walls and ceiling. An open 
  spiral staircase descends through the floor, vanishing as it curves 
  out of sight into the gloom.
  The stairs terminate at Level One, Area 5 on the lower level.
  
  75
  The dead from above
  Area 9: Giant Dining Hall
  Two titanic tables and many chairs occupy this room, providing 
  seating for up to twelve giant humanoids. Each of the tables is covered 
  with a woven tablecloth the size of a tapestry. The tables and chairs 
  are carved with great skill from honey-colored wood. Six marble 
  statues of exquisite fabrication, depicting nude male and female 
  giants, are placed about the room in ascetically pleasing locales. A 
  pair of humongous, open cabinets rest against the southeastern wall, 
  and a door stands in the northeast corner of the room.
  The statues are 15ft tall and weigh 1000lbs each, but they are worth 
  2000gp each for their artistic merit.
  The cabinets hold a collection of giant-sized plates and eating ware, all 
  of excellent fabrication. The eating ware is mostly pewter, but two silver 
  spoons and three silver forks (50gp value each) are mixed in among the 
  utensils. Each utensil weighs 10lbs.
  The tablecloths are linen trimmed with silver and gold thread and weigh 
  100lbs apiece. Their manufacture makes them semi-valuable (25gp each).
  Area 10: Tranimyz,  
  Wylkun, and Sylzak’s Quarters
  A trio of large beds occupies much of the floor space of this chamber. 
  The massive divans are piled high with course woolen blankets of 
  drab color. Two chests, one tremendous and the other merely huge, 
  stand in opposite corners of the room. A table bearing a great silver 
  decanter and washing bowls rests between two of the beds.
  This room is the sleeping chamber of the three youngest members 
  of the Stormbreaker clan. The relatively cramped confines of the room 
  means the three are seldom encountered here. They can usually be found 
  occupying the lounge or dining hall instead. 
  The chests hold clothing for the three. The largest trunk contains 
  masculine garments for the brothers, Tranimyz and Wylkun, while the 
  smaller chest holds feminine clothing for their cousin, Sylzak. In addition 
  to clothing, the large chest has two random giant’s bag items and the small 
  trunk has a single random object from the same table.
  The decanter is worth 100gp and the washing bowl has a 50gp value.
  Area 11: Xurgal’s Quarters
  The walls of this room are lined with finely made weapons suited 
  for giants. Bearded axes, long spears, greatswords, and a flanged 
  mace hang in X-shaped patterns across the bone walls. A simple 
  bed with an iron frame sits beside a closed wardrobe. The wardrobe 
  bears a shield-shaped plaque across its doors. The floor is covered 
  with woolly hides taken from the backs of unknown beasts.
  This is the chamber of Xurgal, the Stormbreakers’ master-at-arms, but 
  he is seldom here. Xurgal instead spends most of his time in the company 
  of Vyjelmot the Grim (see Area 14) discussing matters of death. He is 
  here only if not encountered in the chapel and if there is no alert underway 
  (see Area 14 for stats).
  The weapons are all high-quality arms fashioned by cloud giant smiths 
  of great skill. Two two-handed swords, three two-handed axes, four long 
  spears (treat as halberds), and a large mace are here. 
  The shield-shaped plaque is a metal plate covered in dents and gouges. 
  It hangs positioned over the wardrobe’s handles so that it must be removed 
  to open the door. The underside of the plaque is lined with needle-sharp 
  barbs coated with deadly toxin (save avoids). The barbs are easily noticed 
  if the plaque back is examined before grabbing it. Once the barbs are 
  noticed, they can be avoided easily. Anyone who grabs the plaque without 
  caution is automatically jabbed by the barbs.
  The wardrobe contains tunics, breeches, and boots. In addition, a spare suit of 
  giant-sized chainmail hangs from a T-shaped post, and a gargantuan, fur-lined, 
  silk dressing robe (300gp value) is draped over an iron box. The box is locked 
  but not trapped; it holds two giant-sized potions of healing (three doses each), a 
  suede bag containing 10 amethysts (50gp value) and 2 sapphires (100gp value), 
  and a decorative helmet inlaid with gold wire and pearls (500gp value).
  The floor is covered by three rugs made from wooly mammoth hide 
  worth 250gp each.
  Area 12: Armory
  The door to this room is locked. Xurgal and Oblugrim have keys.
  Racks of weapons and stands bearing suits of armor fill this 
  room. Several large, square crates are piled along the eastern 
  wall. The air smells like leather, steel, and oil.
  This room contains 20 halberds, 15 great clubs, and 10 suits of chainmail 
  sized for giants. There are also 10 crates, each of which contains two skull 
  bombards packed in straw and wool batting. 
  Area 13: Lavatory
  An oversized privy is located beyond the door. Composed of 
  a single-seater with a mahogany seat lid and a marble washing 
  basin, this lavatory appears designed for functionality but with a 
  touch of class. A gleaming silver spigot protrudes from the wall 
  above the marble basin and a large cut-glass decanter rests beside 
  the sink. Plush, sky blue towels hang from a rack on the wall.
  This privy is positioned over an open shaft that exits the bottom of the 
  Ossuary and allows waste to fall freely to the land below. The shaft is 3ft in 
  diameter and has a very nasty iron grate at the bottom to prevent animals (and 
  intruders) from entering the ship via the latrine shaft. The spigot draws water 
  from a rainwater-collecting cistern located at the top of the keep (not detailed).
  Several of the items here have value. The silver spigot is worth 100gp 
  if extracted from the wall (which subsequently causes a torrent of water to 
  pour into the basin). The decanter is worth 200gp, and the four hand towels 
  are worth 15gp each. The mahogany toilet seat could fetch 50gp as a curio.
  Area 14: Chapel
  The bones that form the walls, ceiling, and floor of this room 
  are a glossy ebony color, turning the boundaries of the chamber 
  into a reflective, starless night. At the opposite end of the room is 
  a circular depression filled with roiling mist. Rising from the mist, 
  like an island in a stormy sea, is a column of white bones. These 
  pale bones form a statue depicting a leering skull with a skeletal 
  snake intertwined through its eye sockets and nasal cavity. A bowl 
  of cloudy liquid rests beneath the statue’s eyeless gaze.
  This sanctum is dedicated to the worship of Drahltuz, the giants’ god of 
  fear and death, and the personal deity of the Stormbreaker clan. The statue 
  
  76
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  rises 30ft tall to scrape the ceiling and measures 15ft in diameter.
  The statue is surrounded by a circular moat that is 15ft wide and 5ft 
  deep. Acrid, gray smoke from seven lit braziers placed along the moat’s 
  bottom fills the depression. A minor enchantment keeps the braziers 
  burning and the smoke contained within the moat. 
  The idol is enchanted to produce an unholy aura that defends the 
  worshippers of Drahltuz from specific magic. Any spell that requires 
  an attack roll to affect a target is at tactical disadvantage when targeting 
  Vyjelmot or Xurgal while they are within 30ft of the statue. The cloud 
  giants also have tactical advantage on saving throws against spells or 
  other magical effects while in that radius. Vyjelmot’s summoned spectres 
  do not gain these benefits.
  The dark bones have been treated magically and with natural dyes to 
  produce their coloration and veneer, but they have no special powers or 
  properties. The cloudy water in the bowl is magical and radiates divination 
  and necromancy auras. Pouring 4 oz. of the liquid into the mouth of a 
  creature that’s been dead no more than one week allows the corpse to be 
  questioned as if it was under the effect of a speak with dead spell. The font 
  holds enough liquid to question five corpses.
  The priest, Vyjelmot the Grim, is always present here. There is a 75% 
  chance that Xurgal, the master-of-arms, is also here engaged in discussion 
  with the cleric.
  Vyjelmot the Grim, Cloud Giant Priest: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 72; 
  AC 4[15]; Atk great club (6d6); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 
  17/3500; Special: hurl boulders (6d6), spells Clr9 (3/3/3/2/2).
  Spells: 1st—detect magic, darkness, protection from 
  good; 2nd—bless, hold person (x2), 3rd—cause 
  disease, prayer, speak with dead; 4th—cure serious 
  wounds, poison; 5th—dispel good, finger of death. 
  Equipment: bracers of spectres (New Magic Items 
  Appendix), unholy water sprinkler with 4 vials of unholy 
  water, ivory and pearl unholy symbol (250gp value), 
  polished bone prayer beads (50gp value), keys to the 
  door and the coffer in Area 15.
  Vyjelmot uses his bracers to summon 2 spectres to assist in the defense 
  of the chapel. He casts spells on subsequent rounds. 
  Spectre (2): HD 6; HP 35, 38; AC 2[17]; Atk touch (1d8 plus 
  level drain); Move 15 (fly 30); Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 2 levels with hit.
  Xurgal, Cloud Giant Master-At-Arms: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 100; AC 
  4[15]; Atk +1 maul (6d6); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 15/2900; 
  Special: hurl skull bombard (6d6 plus 1d4 fire, 5ft radius).
  Equipment: +1 maul, two skull bombards, potion of 
  healing, gold bracers with chased platinum storm 
  cloud engravings (300gp value), belt of tanned leather 
  worked with polished bloodstones (200gp value), keys 
  to Area 12 and to the box in Area 11.
  Xurgal, if present, hurls his bombards before closing into melee range 
  with intruders.
  Area 15: Rectory
  The door to this room is locked. Vyjelmot the Grim has the key.
  This secluded room is spartanly furnished and holds little 
  ornamentation. A bed consisting of an iron plate resting atop four 
  large, metal-plated skulls occupies much of the space. A ghastly-
  looking iron maiden, its features stained brown with old blood, 
  rests in the corner. A lectern fashioned from yellowed bones 
  holds crumbling pages of smeared and stained parchment.
  An open spiral staircase ascends to the ceiling, vanishing into a 
  shaft leading upward.
  The iron maiden has been converted to a wardrobe. It holds spare sets 
  of vestments, sandals, and other personal objects. A locked coffer rests 
  atop a high shelf inside the maiden’s head. Fashioned from rusted iron, the 
  coffer contains a mummified finger nearly as large as a human forearm. 
  This is an unholy relic—the ring finger of one Drahltuz’s first apostates. 
  If handled by a unbeliever of the evil god, the person touching it becomes 
  cursed. The curse manifests as rapid bodily decay similar to a supernatural 
  leprosy. The victim suffers 3d6 points of necrotic damage and loses 1 
  point of strength, dexterity, and constitution every 24 hours. If reduced 
  to zero hit points or if an ability score drops to zero, the victim dies. A 
  restoration spell removes the curse. 
  Ten pages comprising a religious treatise penned centuries ago by a 
  high priest of Drahltuz sit on the lectern. Additionally, it contains veiled 
  passages relating to the construction of the Necrolofter (see Level One, 
  Area 3). Although not detailed enough to be used to actually create a 
  device, they do provide hints as to where to begin researching the process, 
  at the Referee’s discretion. The final page of the treatise is actually a scroll 
  of speak with dead.
  The bed is horribly uncomfortable and has no special value or properties.
  Area 16: Jezsyl’s Quarters
  The delicate scent of jasmine incense wafts over you, flowing 
  from the room beyond the door. Woven hangings depicting storm-
  wracked mountaintops and whirlwind-torn forests decorate the 
  walls, and the floor is covered with a light cloth carpet. A small 
  table holds smoking incense sticks and a dark idol. A simple 
  sleeping pallet covered by a thin blanket rests in one corner.
  If not encountered elsewhere, Jezsyl, a cloud giant monk, is found here 
  meditating before the small table shrine. She swiftly responds to intruders, 
  leaping to her bare feet and using her monkish skills to incapacitate as 
  many of the characters as possible while shouting for assistance. There is 
  a 75% chance the occupants of the chapel come to her aid (if they are still 
  able) and a 50% chance that a trio of hill giant guards respond to her cries 
  in 1d4+2 rounds.
  Jezsyl has the stats of a standard cloud giant plus the additional traits 
  listed below. 
  Jezsyl, Cloud Giant Monk: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 82; AC 4[15]; 
  Atk kris fighting knife (6d6+5); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/
  XP 15/2900; Special: alertness, deadly strike, deflect missiles, 
  slow falling.
  Equipment: 2 kris fighting knives, sarong.
  The idol is a representation of Drahltuz, the giants’ god of fear and 
  death. It is depicted as a squat, obese creature with a face resembling 
  a serpent’s skull. It is carved from rare black marble and weighs 100 
  lbs. (50gp value). The incense is pleasant-smelling but has no special 
  properties.
  Beneath the sleeping pallet is a long, low wooden box containing a 
  number of giantess-sized kimonos of simple manufacture and a spare pair 
  of large kris fighting knives. 
  The four woven tapestries measure 15ft long by 8ft wide, and each 
  weighs 150lbs. They are skillfully made and worth 150gp each. 
  Area 17: Stairs to Upper Level
  An open spiral staircase ascends to the ceiling, vanishing into a 
  shaft leading upward.
  
  77
  The dead from above
  These stairs lead 40ft upward to Level Three, Area 1. The occupants 
  of the Ossuary know to announce themselves before ascending. See the 
  description of Level Three, Area 1 for the consequences of failing to do so.
  If combat occurs on the staircase, creatures battling from the upper 
  position have tactical advantage on attack rolls against lower opponents.
  Area 18: Treasury
  The door to this room is locked, trapped, and alarmed. Bypassing the 
  lock requires either the proper key (possessed by Oblugrim Stormbreaker 
  in Level Three, Area 2) or a successful Open Locks check. A spring lever 
  breaks a pair of small vials with one containing a clear liquid and the 
  other containing a green liquid. The trap is triggered by any attempt to 
  open the lock without the proper key. If the trap is sprung and the vials are 
  broken, their contents mix to create a flesh-devouring gas that fills a 20ft 
  square space in front of the door. All creatures in the gas area can attempt 
  a saving throw. Success indicates the character quickly jumps clear of the 
  gas cloud. Those who fail the saving throw get a lungful of gas and take 
  3d8+3 points of acid damage each round until a successful saving throw. 
  A successful save stops further damage, as does any cure spell.
   
  Large iron chests stand along the walls of this room beside 
  statuary, rolled cloth, and raw timber. Despite the contents, the room 
  is largely empty, holding but a small portion of what it could contain.
  The Stormbreakers planned to fill this treasury with loot plundered 
  during their campaign, but so far their targets have been small agricultural 
  villages possessing little that the giants desire. The contents of this 
  chamber were won from early conflicts with the hill giants and other 
  opponents in the mountains during the Ossuary’s shakedown flight.
  Six unlocked iron chests are here. Four are empty; the other two each 
  hold 100lbs of unrefined gold ore (1000gp value).
  The rolled cloth is two woven wool tapestries worth 100gp each. Three 
  carved stone statues depicting large and grotesque humanoid faces weigh 
  500 lbs. each. These idols are ancient and weathered, but they’re worth 
  300gp apiece to collectors, historians, or sages (they might hold clues 
  to lost mysteries at the Referee’s choosing). The piled timber is all rare 
  hardwood. The lumber weighs 1000lbs and is worth 500gp.
  Level Three — 
  Upper Level
  This small level contains two important rooms: the quarters of 
  the Stormbreaker leader and his consort, and the Ossuary’s bridge. 
  Adventurers seeking to end the cloud giant threat to the region likely find 
  this level to be the site of the final battle.
  Area 1: Guard Post
  At the top of the winding stairs is a simple space containing a 
  table, three large chairs, and a hanging shield dangling from a 
  cross brace on a wooden stand. A barrel stands near the staircase, 
  and a large candle burns on the tabletop.
  A pair of hill giant guards is always stationed here, charged with 
  defending this level. Standard protocol is for any occupant of the Ossuary 
  to call out his or her name before climbing the staircase. If the guards 
  detect creatures ascending that do not announce themselves, one of the 
  guards pours the barrel of oil down the stairwell while the second stands 
  by, preparing to hurl a skull bombard filled with alchemist’s fire into the 
  stairwell on the following round. 
  The barrel holds sufficient oil to coat the uppermost 30ft of the stairwell, 
  making the steps slippery and flammable. A creature wishing to climb 
  the slick stairs must make a successful simple dexterity check (2d6 vs. 
  score) to avoid slipping and falling down the stairs (suffering 2d6 points 
  of bludgeoning damage in the fall). Any individual on the oil-coated stairs 
  when they are set alight suffers 10 points of fire damage every time they 
  begin their turn in the burning oil, for up to six rounds.
  After setting the stairs alight, one of the guards pounds the shield alarm 
  gong, alerting the giants in Area 2 and the guards in Area 3 that intruders 
  are on their way.
  Giant, Hill (2): HP 46, 48; Atk great club (2d8); Move 12; Save 
  8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: thrown skull bombard (2d8 
  plus 1d4 fire, 5ft radius).
  Area 2: Oblugrim’s and 
  Tathhylia’s Quarters
  This opulent chamber features a carved bedstead of rare wood 
  situated on a plush carpet. Skillful portraiture and tapestries hang 
  from the walls, and a large fireplace burns brightly in the bone 
  wall. A table covered with jars and boxes stands before a large 
  oval mirror on the north wall. A 15ft tall, serpentine-shaped post 
  with a crossbar stands in the southwest corner of the room. The 
  delicate scent of mountain flowers hangs in the air.
  This chamber is home to the Stormbreaker patriarch, Oblugrim, and 
  his consort Tathhylia, as well as their pet. All three are found here if 
  not encountered randomly elsewhere and no alarm is underway. Their 
  feathered snake pet usually rests on its post, entwined around the crossbar.
  Oblugrim, Cloud Giant Patriarch: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 90; AC 
  2[17]; Atk +1 two-handed sword  (6d6+1); Move 15; Save 3; 
  AL C; CL/XP 15/2900; Special: hurl skull bombard (6d6 plus 
  1d4 fire, 5ft radius).
  Equipment: +1 two-handed sword (use one-handed), 
  +2 shield, 2 skull bombards, 2 potions of healing, keys 
  to armory (Level Two, Area 12) and treasury (Level Two, 
  Area 18)
  Tathhylia, Cloud Giant Consort: HD 12+1d4hp; HP 75; AC 
  3[16]; Atk great club (6d6); Move 15; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 
  15/2900; Special: hurl skull bombard (6d6 plus 1d4 fire, 5ft 
  radius), spells MU9 (4/3/3/2/1).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile (x2), protection 
  from good; 2nd—darkness 15ft radius, invisibility, mirror 
  image; 3rd—haste, hold person, slow; 4th—confusion, 
  polymorph other; 5th—conjuration of elementals.
  Equipment: ring of protection +1, gold circlet with 
  diamond chips (500gp value).
  Snake, Feathered Mountain: HD 6; HP 38; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (1d3 
  plus poison) or spit lightning; Move 10; Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 
  9/1100; Special: lethal poison, spit lightning (3/day, 30ft range, 
  3d6 damage, save half). (“Snake, Giant”, Monstrosities 440)
  The paintings are oil portraits of the Stormbreaker Clan’s former 
  patriarchs. Each of the four paintings is worth 250gp. They are sizable, 
  however, measuring 10ft long by 5ft high and weighing 50lbs each. The 
  tapestries are detailed landscapes of secluded mountain valleys surrounded 
  by clouds and fog. Each of the three wall hangings is worth 150gp.
  The table contains personal grooming items and jars of makeup, 
  perfume, and other hygiene products. One of the bottles is fashioned from 
  
  78
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  cut jasper (50gp value) and contains a delicate perfume that seems to 
  change its scent depending on the person sniffing it. This perfume bears a 
  slight enchantment and, when worn, increases the wearer’s charisma score 
  by 1 for one hour. There is enough perfume for three uses. 
  Beneath the bed is a large iron chest. It has no lock and appears to be 
  opened by simply pulling the knurled steel handle protruding from the lid’s 
  top. The chest is trapped.  A blast of electricity leaps from the chest, catching 
  all creatures in a 10ft radius around the box. Those in the blast take 8d6 points 
  of electrical damage, or half as much with a successful saving throw. Closely 
  inspecting the handle reveals tiny runes etched along the handle’s bottom, and 
  anyone with magical training can identify them as pertaining to electricity or 
  lightning. There is no way to disarm the trap other than dispel magic.
  The chest contains Oblugrim and Tathhylia’s personal wealth. Inside 
  are 1046cp, 768sp, 477gp, a large harp with electrum inlay (350gp value), 
  a robe of winter wolf fur (200gp value), Tathhylia’s spellbook (contains 
  all her prepared spells), and an oversized crown of gold and sapphires 
  (1000gp value).
  Area 3: The Bridge
  This area is a massive, conical-shaped chamber with a 
  cathedral ceiling. Dominating the chamber is a titanic, thronelike 
  chair bearing a giant occupant. The seated individual wears 
  only a white loin cloth, leaving the majority of his sky-blue 
  skin exposed. Many riblike bones and venous tubes protrude 
  from the chair and are embedded in the flesh of the seated giant, 
  effectively binding him to the seat. Four smaller giants dressed in 
  mail armor and bearing large spears stand guard nearby.
  The chair is the Ossuary’s helm, and the figure attached to it is Morgosun 
  Stormbreaker, the pilot of the Ossuary. Morgosun was not the most gifted 
  or liked of the Stormbreaker clan, and when it was decided that someone 
  needed to make the sacrifice to merge with the fortress to serve as its 
  eternal captain, Morgosun was forcibly “volunteered” by Oblugrim. The 
  only thing that has kept him from crashing the Ossuary and dooming his 
  clan to death is Oblugrim’s promise that once the humans are driven out 
  of the mountains, Morgosun will be freed from his duty and restored to 
  a normal life (this is a lie; Oblugrim considers the flying citadel far too 
  valuable to give up). Nevertheless, as a precaution, Oblugrim stationed 
  four hill giant guards here to protect the pilot but also to slay him should 
  he ever try to crash the Ossuary.
  Giant, Hill (4): HD 8; HP 46, 48, 44, 42; Atk great spears (2d8); 
  Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: thrown skull 
  bombard (2d8 plus 1d4 fire, 5ft radius).
  Treasure: silver bracelet (100gp value), gold bracelet (250gp value), 
  silver snake-shaped ring (100gp value), and small sack containing 200sp, 
  178gp, and 54 pp.
  Morgosun Stormbreaker cannot physically attack the party; he is 
  restrained by the Ossuary’s helm. He can, however, defend himself with 
  the necrotic energy field that powers the fortress under his command. He 
  uis only means of attack is the Necrotic Blast.
  Necrotic Blast (3/day): Morgosun calls down a blast of withering 
  energy that strikes a single target inside the bridge. The victim hit by 
  the blast takes 4d8 points of necrotic damage, or half damage with a 
  successful saving throw.
  If Morgosun is slain, the Ossuary immediately ceases moving. It 
  hangs in place 400ft above the ground until it runs out of power or the 
  
  79
  The dead from above
  Necrolofter is destroyed (see Level One, Area 3). If the helm is attacked 
  directly, it has AC 9[10] and 200 hit points. Destroying the chair kills 
  Morgosun instantly in a blast of necrotic energy, and the Ossuary comes 
  to a dead stop.
  This room contains only the helm, which is a huge seat fashioned from 
  bone and rises 20ft above the floor. A dozen bone spurs and veinlike tubes 
  protrude from the chair, each ending in a sharp, hollow barb that can be 
  inserted into skin and muscle. A living creature connected to the chair 
  gains the ability to fly the Ossuary as well as to view its surroundings with 
  limited clairvoyance. For more information on the role of the pilot, see the 
  section The Ossuary in the Party’s Hands.
  Concluding the Adventure
  The characters succeed in stopping the cloud giant’s campaign of evil 
  if they either kill the tremendous occupants of the Ossuary or incapacitate 
  the flying citadel. The Lord-Governor of Cerediun Province accepts either 
  circumstance as a victory and gratefully rewards the party the promised 
  fee of 1000gp. 
  Should the adventure conclude with the Ossuary captured intact and 
  operational, the lord-governor, seeing the military advantage of owning 
  such a useful fort, offers to buy the flying citadel from the party. The exact 
  amount he is willing to part with is left to the Referee’s discretion, but 
  should not exceed 15,000gp. Understandably, the party may wish to hold 
  onto the keep for their own purposes. Refer to the section The Ossuary in 
  the Party’s Hands in this case.
  If the Referee desires, the events of The Dead from Above can lead to 
  additional adventures. The Stormbreaker Clan may not be the only cloud 
  giant clan wishing to see humanity driven out of the mountains. Other 
  giants might be planning their own vendetta against mankind, requiring 
  the heroes to venture into the high peaks to stop these other campaigns 
  before they begin. 
  If the characters successfully identify the important passages in the 
  ancient texts found in Level Two, Area 15, they might be interested in 
  learning more about creating fortresses like the Ossuary. This quest could 
  spur numerous new adventures as the party tracks down lost lore or seeks 
  out reclusive sages and wizards who possess the power and skill needed 
  to tear mountains apart and make them fly. 
  And, of course, if any of the Stormbreakers survive the attack on 
  the Ossuary, the characters should find themselves the target of giant 
  vengeance, a revenge that begins with hurled boulders and powerful spells 
  when they least expect it! 
  The Ossuary  
  in the Party’s Hands
  It is likely that if the characters defeat the Stormbreaker giants, 
  they’ll end the adventure in possession of the Ossuary. Not all 
  Referees may want their players to own such a formidable base 
  of operations, but luckily, being the sole entities standing inside 
  the aerial holdfast does not automatically bestow command of the 
  Ossuary on the party.
  Firstly, the Ossuary requires a living creature in the role of the 
  pilot. This is not so much an honor as a doom, because the pilot 
  becomes permanently bonded with the magical helm in Level 
  Three, Area 3. Not many beings are willing to give up their 
  freedom and embrace such a ghastly existence to simply operate 
  an artifact. NPCs will certainly refuse unless magically compelled. 
  If charm spells are used to encourage an NPC to become the pilot, 
  he seeks revenge once the enchantment wears off, likely crashing 
  the Ossuary into the first convenient mountainside as suitable 
  punishment for those who damned him!
  If one of the characters volunteers to become the pilot, he (or 
  others) need to first determine the proper way to connect a new 
  pilot to the chair. Divination spells can also help determine the 
  proper process. Once the process is deduced, the would-be pilot 
  suffers 8d6 points of piercing damage as the various bone spurs 
  and tubes are inserted into his flesh.. Lastly, the adventurer must 
  make a saving throw to successfully integrate his mind and body 
  with the Ossuary. If the save fails, the pilot dies, slain by necrotic 
  energy feedback that tears his body apart. If the pilot survives 
  the process, he gains full command of the Ossuary — including 
  the ability to mentally see outside the Ossuary’s confines and the 
  power to summon the necrotic blast defense detailed in Level 
  Three, Area 3.
  Even with a living pilot on the bridge, the Ossuary requires 
  constant refueling with souls, and this step should not sit well 
  with characters who are not evil-aligned. As noted in Level One, 
  Area 3, the Necrolofter requires the stolen life of living beings to 
  operate. At least 8 HD of intelligent, living beings must be fed to 
  the hungry spirits connected to the Necrolofter each week or the 
  citadel loses power and settles to the ground until it is refueled. No 
  other power source suffices. 
  While the characters might have moral issues with keeping 
  the Ossuary running and under control, many NPCs suffer no 
  such compulsions. If it becomes common knowledge that the 
  party possesses the Ossuary, they can be certain that they’ll find 
  themselves targeted by all manner of bandit kings, evil wizards, 
  foul priests, and other such ne’er-do-wells intent on claiming 
  the Ossuary for themselves. The Referee should make life very 
  interesting for the characters for as long as they own the holdfast.
  
  80
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  This adventure is a middle- to high-level fantasy adventure with a 
  bias toward spellcasters. In the Lost Lands campaign setting of Frog 
  God Games, the adventure takes place on the island of West Talon at 
  the southern end of the Crescent Sea, just north of the Talanos Peninsula 
  and its dread High Barrens. If you are adapting the adventure to your 
  own campaign, it can be set on any temperate island that is large enough 
  to support not only a decent-sized fishing and farming population but a 
  central desert and mountainous area as well.
  Adventure Background
  The small nation of Borss on the island of West Talon is renowned 
  for the three mountains that rise from its central desert plateau, or more 
  precisely for the massive stone temple shaped like a dragon that clings to 
  the slopes of said mountains. Everyone the plies the waters of the Mouth 
  of Akados knows about the Dragon Temple and its dire reputation of great 
  treasures and even greater dangers.
  Many a story has been told about the deadly temple, but the tale 
  mothers tell their children the most is about a magical staff that is said 
  to lie at the heart of the temple. The legends say the staff can transform 
  its wielder into a great red dragon. The tales evolve, of course, as the 
  children grow older, with larger and more terrible monsters guarding the 
  staff; ever vaster treasures fill every corridor of the Dragon Temple with 
  each retelling. Fearsome dragons of incredible size and magical power are 
  said to prowl the temple halls ready to breathe fire on any being foolish 
  enough to dare to enter their domain. 
  Other stories speak of wizards and heroes braving the challenges 
  of the temple for a chance at the legendary Dragon Staff. All of these 
  tales, however, share the same tragic ending for the impetuous bands of 
  adventurers. One favored legend known to the peoples of the Crescent Sea 
  speaks of the time King Col of the Ironskull Great Mountain Clan came 
  down from his fastness in the Blackrock range with an army of mountain 
  dwarf engineers and took a fleet of ships from Bret Harth to the island. 
  After they landed, Old Col and his dwarves worked for more than a year 
  to build a ramp from the mountains’ base to the mouth of the temple. 
  When they finished, the dwarven army climbed the ramp to invade, Old 
  Col sure that the rumored treasures must overflow the storerooms of the 
  temple. The legend says that before they could reach the temple mouth, a 
  flight of red dragons flew down and incinerated the army, while another 
  flight of dragons — these with scales of brass — destroyed the ramp so 
  that no stone was left atop another. The legendary end of a legendary 
  dwarven king.
  Naysayers call this tale apocryphal at best and utterly preposterous 
  at worst, but its proponents point out that King Col has inarguably been 
  dead these hundreds of years and that there is plainly no ramp climbing to 
  the temple’s mouth and so claim it as proof of the tale’s veracity, though 
  no flight of dragons red, brass, or otherwise has ever been reported in 
  the temple’s vicinity before or since. Truth or no, this cautionary tale 
  has ensured that no force of arms has challenged the temple since, and 
  the nation of Borss’ own small military has been able to ensure its own 
  sovereignty from pirates and avaricious colonial powers at least partially 
  on the reputation of the island’s infamous — if perhaps exaggerated — 
  guardians. 
  Of more recent and verifiable history, during the Year of Twelve Blue 
  Moons, an ancient blue dragon flew down from the High Barrens to alight 
  on the mountains of West Talon. With its lightning breath it is said that the 
  dragon blasted out a lair in the sandstone cliffs of the mountains, creating 
  a series of glass caverns for itself to live in. For a hundred years the blue 
  dragon roared in the West Talon skies, eating its way through the giants and 
  other monstrous denizens populating the central mountains and desert of 
  the island. 
  The people of Borss long ignored the presence of the blue dragon; 
  it tended to remain in the uninhabited central regions of the island and 
  usually slept for decades after the few times it did raid a farm or ship 
  in the nearby sea lanes. However, their complacency came to an abrupt 
  end on the day the ancient beast flew down and destroyed the village of 
  Sherss and all of its fishing vessels, devouring all of the inhabitants. The 
  Draconic writing didn’t have to appear on the wall for the citizens of the 
  two largest cities, Borss and Kamis, and the other dozen-odd towns on the 
  island to realize they needed help. 
  the sages and wizards of the realm researched the Dragon Temple to 
  find out if the Dragon Staff from the children’s stories existed and if its 
  magic might allow heroes to challenge the dread blue dragon in its lair. To 
  their surprise, they discovered that the mythical Staff of the Dragon did 
  indeed exist. The sages know nothing more of the relic but hope that brave 
  adventurers can be found to enter the temple to retrieve the legendary staff 
  — and then find a way to use it to end the island’s new nightmare.
  Challenges  
  Outside the Temple
  The mountains all around the temple are treacherous and near impossible 
  to climb. The mountain rocks are ancient, crumbling sandstone, with 
  reliable ledges and handholds few and far between, and constant winds 
  coming from the sea and mixing with the desert thermals around the 
  mountains make the weather tricky and unpredictable. What rain does 
  fall on the highest peaks makes the rocks slippery, even as the moisture 
  evaporates before it reaches the dry deserts encroaching on the mountains’ 
  rocky bases. 
  Most of the temple itself is high in the mountains and requires a lengthy 
  climb to reach even the sides. In fact, the only part of the temple that is easy 
  to get to is the tip of the tail. From any position along the mountainside 
  near the temple, it is almost certain death to try a climb.
  The temple can be easily observed by anyone on the western 
  side of the mountains. Even from a distance, it is clear the temple 
  itself is shaped like a giant red dragon resting along the flank of 
  the mountains. The structure forming the dragon’s form is many 
  miles long and wide, spanning possibly 15 miles from its snout to 
  the tip of its tail. The four taloned limbs have giant claws of red 
  granite several hundred yards long and high. 
  Climbing to any section of the temple is a deadly act for even the most 
  experienced climbers. However, at the tip of the temple’s tail, a slim path 
  travels along the dragon’s spine and takes a careful character right to the 
  jaws and temple entrance 5 miles away. This path is purposely hard to 
  see from anywhere around that section of the mountain. As the characters 
  Dread Dragon Temple
  By James M. Ward
  
  81
  dread dragon temple
  
  82
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  move along the path, grim portents give the wise traveler advance warning 
  that this is a dangerous place. The blackest thunderclouds move over the 
  mountains, and lightning strikes at random all over the path. Flurries of 
  hailstones fall from the sky, creating a slippery carpet of ice on the trail. 
  The roars of what sound like several different types of dragons echo down 
  from the clouds above, and flashes of dragon fire and spouts of acid break 
  through the clouds and fall near the characters. 
  The temple is carved directly into the rock of the mountain face. 
  Efforts to break through its stone walls or use magic to dimensionally 
  pass through them invariably fail as most of them are hundreds of feet 
  thick at least and the winding interior does not provide obvious points of 
  ingress to pinpoint. Important chambers are shielded with a layer of lead 
  in the walls to prevent scrying, so it is virtually impossible to gain entry 
  by means other than the main gates.
  The tip of the tail offers the only safe spot where characters can climb 
  up and onto a path that travels outside along the spine of the Dragon 
  Temple. The path provides a magical bless, as the spell, to all beings that 
  walk the entire length to the head of the dragon. This blessing lasts as long 
  as the characters are visiting the temple. 
  At the middle of the Dragon Path, a patrol of 6 lizardmen armed with 
  halberds attacks the characters. The battle is to the death, and the fanatical 
  lizardmen will pursue the characters until one group or the other is dead. 
  Lizardman (6): HD 2+1; HP 11, 12x2, 10, 14, 13; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  halberd (1d8+1); Move 6 (swim 12); Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 
  2/30; Special: breathe underwater.
  Area A: 
  Dragon Jaws Carnage
  The huge stone head of the temple is carved in the image of 
  an ancient red dragon. The head is over half-a-mile wide, over 
  1000ft high, and the long snout is a mile-and-a-half long. A flat 
  plateau, canted at less of a grade than the slope, surrounds the 
  head of the dragon. The rest of the carven stonework making 
  up the dragon’s body protrudes directly from the mountains’ 
  dangerous cliff faces. Red sandstone covers the entire area 
  around the head and claws, and dragon scales are carved into the 
  stone surface. 
  Each of the dragon’s carven fangs is hundreds of yards tall. 
  Between the tightly fitted teeth can be seen a cave entrance that 
  leads down the throat of the dragon. This is the obvious entrance 
  to the Dragon Temple, but the edges of the great fangs are too 
  close together to allow a person to squeeze between them. 
  Winds howl around this mountain face, and the smell of fresh 
  blood blasts out of the throat entrance. 
  
  83
  dread dragon temple
  A number of ways exist to get into the stone mouth. If characters 
  shout loudly and ask the mouth to open, the jaws open wide. Magically 
  shrinking or turning to gas allows characters to slip between the stone 
  fangs. “Showing” the great mouth a dragon of any type, living or carved 
  or illustrated, causes the jaws to open.  
  Once past the fangs, characters are inside the mouth of the dragon. 
  Among the stone fangs and the many stalactites and stalagmites are the 
  nests of numerous rattlesnake swarm. These snakes strike at invaders 
  as they defend their nests, which are often amid the high stone pillars. If 
  characters try to avoid the snakes by moving along the inside of the jaws, 
  more snakes strike from surprise. The party must pass through the area of 
  2d4+1 swarms to gain entry. 
  Swarm, Rattlesnake: HD 4; AC 8[11]; Atk bites (1d6 plus 
  poison); Move 9; Save 13; AL N; Special: lethal poison. 
  (“Swarm, Poisonous Frog”, The Tome of Horrors Complete 532) 
  Inside the Temple
  The Dragon Temple is 5 miles long in total. Each limb section that radiates 
  off the main body is over 1-1/2 miles long. All corridors are semicircular 
  in section (a flat floor beneath a smoothly arching, semicircular roof) and 
  210ft wide. The walls and floor are carved to resemble dragon scales. The 
  rough surface deadens sound, preventing noise from traveling far into the 
  temple. The apex of the ceiling is most likely hidden in darkness unless 
  characters fly up to it (about 105ft from the floor). Characters on the prowl 
  for secret doors can check only one wall at a time because of the corridor’s 
  great width. 
  Lizardmen
  Dead bodies can be found in all parts of the inner temple. The lizardmen 
  that live here consider every slain explorer a sacrifice to Tiamat, so they 
  never touch these bodies because doing so would defile the sacrifice. 
  Along the same lines, the lizardmen never talk to characters. In the minds 
  of the lizardmen, all strangers inside the temple are unwelcome intruders 
  who should be killed. Lizardmen guards never carry light sources, 
  meaning they often spot characters’ lanterns and torches well before they 
  are spotted in return. 
  Past the initial throat is a wide corridor of dressed sandstone 
  carved to resemble dragon scales. The corridor is 210ft wide, 
  and the walls arch smoothly upward into darkness. The roof is 
  beyond the limit of your light. The darkness here seems more 
  intense than a simple absence of light. The stone floor and walls 
  down the entire throat corridor are jet black. Dragon scales are 
  carved into the stone, from the mouth down through the throat. 
  Dwarves automatically discern a slight downward slope to the corridor. 
  Normal tests, such as a marble on the floor, don’t work here because of the 
  uneven, scaled texture carved into all surfaces.
  A short distance down the throat, a passage branches off the main 
  corridor to the northeast and ascends noticeably to Area B. The main 
  corridor continues on to the southwest to the first (forelegs) crossroads.
  Area B:  
  Giant Rattler Ordeal
  Moving northeast off the main corridor, the side tunnel goes 
  on for a mile into an open area where a small alcove contains 
  a 10-foot-long carving of a black dragon. The dragon’s back 
  is flat, and on that platform is a mass of green, lightly glowing 
  crystals. 
  Four bodies wearing wizard robes are on the floor in front 
  of the statue. The slimy robes hold the scent of dung, but the 
  faint glow of magic still clings to the clothing. A sense of evil 
  permeates the bodies. 
  Suddenly, a deep rattling sound echoes through the area. 
  Stalactites and stalagmites fill this area located in the head  
  of the Dragon Temple. Characters who search the bodies of the  
  dead wizards before scouting the rest of the chamber are  
  automatically surprised by a giant rattlesnake. The snake also 
  attacks if characters check the chamber for danger before doing 
  anything else, but then the usual procedures for determining surprise 
  apply.
  Rattlesnake, Giant (Viper): HD 4; HP 22; AC 5[14]; Atk bite 
  (1d3 plus poison); Move 12; Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: lethal poison. (Monstrosities 440)
  The snake fights as long as characters stay in the area. Its nest is on a 
  shelf above the entrance to the alcove. The reptile won’t follow characters 
  out of the area. 
  The dead wizards have all manner of equipment useful to 
  experienced adventurers. Inside their expensive boots, each 
  wears a ring of protection +1 on his toe. A total of 57gp and 22sp  
  can be found. Each spellcaster also was equipped with a staff and 
  four quality throwing daggers. Each has a scroll tube. Altogether, 
  the tubes contain scrolls of fireball, ESP, darkness 15ft radius, 
  phantasmal force, detect invisibility, polymorph self, dimension 
  door, and slow. 
  On the back of the dragon statue are 88 glowing crystals. Each is a 
  fairly worthless piece of crystal (1gp each) in the shape of a 7-inch-long 
  dragon scale. A slight bit of magic on the scales causes each one to dimly 
  glow green. All dragons can sense these scales on a character and react 
  violently to the desecration of their temple. 
  Area C: Torture of the 
  Dragon Blades 
  Read the following when the characters reach the “shoulder” intersection 
  that leads to the two forelimbs of the Dragon Temple.
  You’ve come to a four-way intersection in the broad corridor. 
  Straight ahead, the black-walled corridor continues on. Other 
  passages split off to the north and south. 
  Dark green stone lines the northern corridor, and the air is stale 
  and acrid. 
  The southern corridor is lined with dark blue stone, and the air 
  is extremely humid.
  
  84
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  In this mysterious temple, the night is filled with the rage-filled roars 
  of the ghosts of murdered dragons. It is lucky for the characters that 
  these ghostly dragons have their own agendas. If talked to reasonably, 
  the dragons reveal what they need from the party. They don’t attack if 
  the characters agree to help the ghost dragon so it can flee the temple 
  and go on to its afterlife. 
  If the party fights a dragon, they suffer the effects of illusory dragon 
  breath as the ghost furiously attacks. They can save to take no damage 
  from the attack, but the attacks continue all night long unless the 
  characters agree to listen to them. Only one ghost dragon can interact 
  with the party at a time. Helping a dragon allows its ghostly spirit to 
  vanish and leave the temple.
  Read the following if the characters decide to camp within the 
  Dragon Temple:
  You set up camp in the safest area you can find. Early in 
  the night, everyone wakes to the sound of multiple dragons 
  roaring, each clearly coming from a different type of wyrm. 
  Suddenly, a ghostly form appears near the camp. It’s an 
  ancient, ghostly dragon, and the creature doesn’t look happy 
  at your presence. “Why have you come here?” the ghost 
  screams. You can almost feel its spectral breath.
  All of the dragons are initially furious with the party. Each dragon 
  claims it is going to kill the party for the terrible things done to it 
  while it lived. In actuality, each dragon really wants to tell its story 
  (except maybe for the blue dragon). If the party tries to talk to the 
  ghost dragons at all, they can calm them down enough to finally hear 
  their stories. Not all of these dragons died here, but all of their spirits 
  were drawn here by the nature of the Dragon Temple. 
  Roll 1d10 to see which dragon appears to confront the characters each 
  night. If the party has already helped a specific dragon, ignore that result 
  if it is rolled again. Once all the dragons are helped, no new ones appear:
  1. Gold Ghost Dragon’s Story: Greedy dwarves killed the gold 
  dragon. If a dwarf is in the party, the dragon ignores reason and attacks. 
  The dragon didn’t like that the dwarves also stole a unique dragon-
  slaying sword and took it to their hoard in the distant Blackrock 
  Mountains. The dragon wants the characters to retrieve the sword from 
  the dwarves. If they bring it to the temple and give it to any of the 
  lizardman guards, the dragon helps them secure the Staff of the Dragon 
  located in Area E. Naturally, the dwarves don’t want to give up the 
  highly useful sword. However, if the dwarves receive enough gold in 
  payment (at least 100,000gp), they give the weapon to the characters. 
  2. Silver Ghost Dragon’s Story: The silver dragon died at the 
  hands of orcs. If a half-orc or orc is in the party, the dragon ignores 
  reason and attacks. The dragon tells a story of a wave of orcs attacking 
  its lair and slaying all of the dragon’s guardian creatures. The orcs 
  then made the lair their own. The silver dragon wants the party to go 
  to that lair, which is located on the far side of the mountains 3 days’ 
  travel from the temple. The orcs must be removed from the lair. The 
  silver dragon says the party can have any treasure they find except 
  for a sacred 2-foot-long statue made of silver. The dragon statue 
  belongs in the Dragon Temple. If the party does this, they receive help 
  gaining the Staff of the Dragon. Ogres and orcs are in the lair, but the 
  characters shouldn’t have too many problems battling these monsters. 
  3. Bronze Ghost Dragon’s Story: The bronze dragon died in 
  a cave-in when making its lair. The dragon wants its skeletal head 
  brought back to this temple. The cave-in area is 20 miles away in 
  the same mountain range. The ghost dragon actually goes with the 
  party and helps them find its dead body. If the group instantly goes on 
  this quest, the ghost helps them find special plate armor that is totally 
  resistant to lightning bolt attacks. 
  4. Copper Ghost Dragon’s Story: The copper dragon died when a 
  band of stone giants attacked it. It helps the characters claim the Staff of 
  the Dragon if the party frees the two fire elementals in the red corridor 
  (Area F). If the group doesn’t help the dragon, it appears when they 
  try to retrieve the Staff of the Dragon on their own. It breathes its 
  illusory breath on them three times and then vanishes forevermore. 
  5. White Ghost Dragon’s Story: The white dragon fell from the 
  skies, its body pierced by the shafts from elven longbows. If elves are in 
  the party, the temperature of the area drops to dangerous levels and the 
  characters take 3 points of cold damage for as long as the ghost dragon 
  keeps attacking. The dragon wants the party to free the white dragon 
  trapped in the ice cave (Area G). The dragon tells the group that they 
  have to pull the frozen dragon statue out of the cave to animate it. If the 
  party agrees to do this task immediately, the ghost vanishes. 
  6. Black Ghost Dragon’s Story: The black dragon died after 
  lizardmen attacked it in its home. The ghost doesn’t care that lizardmen 
  now guard this Dragon Temple. If the party kills 12 lizard men, 
  however, the ghost promises to give them weapons that are +2/+4 vs. 
  dragons. This evil creature is lying, and the characters never see the 
  ghost dragon again. 
  7. Green Ghost Dragon’s Story: A goblin war band surprised the 
  green dragon in its lair and managed to kill it. This green dragon’s 
  ghost hates goblins and wants revenge. If allowed to it leads the party 
  to the forests on the western edge of the island. In the dragon’s former 
  lair is an ancient elven bow that inflicts an additional 10 points of 
  damage to any dragon struck by an arrow fired from it. A cluster of 11 
  emeralds worth 10,000 gold pieces each is also in the lair. The only 
  hang-up is the 75 goblin warriors that remain in the lair. 
  8. Red Ghost Dragon’s Story: The red dragon died in battle at the 
  claws of a blue dragon centuries ago. The ghost dragon is elated if 
  the characters tell him their reason for being in the temple. The ghost 
  immediately retrieves the Staff of the Dragon and brings it to the party. 
  However, if the party has taken anything from the temple, the ghost 
  tells them they must return the items or it will never give them the 
  staff. The ghost dragon also advises them not to fight the blue dragon 
  in the sky. It tells them to change into red dragons (using the staff) 
  and to go into its lair. It suggests spreading out and blasting the blue 
  dragon with flame for as long as they can. 
  9. Blue Ghost Dragon’s Story: The blue dragon ghost knows the 
  party is trying to get the Staff of the Dragon to fight another blue dragon. 
  It isn’t happy and won’t even consider helping the party. The ghost rages 
  and tells them they should never have dared to enter this temple created 
  for dragons. The dragon uses throws a curse. The characters can resist 
  the curse by making a save. Each cursed character suffers a –2 penalty 
  to attacks until the curse is removed. The dragon turns into a mist and 
  roars that such things happen when blue dragons are attacked. 
  10. Brass Ghost Dragon’s Story: The brass dragon died at the hands 
  of gnomes. If a gnome is with the party, the ghost attacks until the party 
  flees the temple or it is driven off by a cleric. The dragon tells the story 
  of gnomes offering a huge treasure to the brass dragon for helping with 
  three experiments. Two experiments went well and the brass dragon 
  was very happy with the gold and silver it earned. In the last test, the 
  gnomes were working with a massive steam cannon. The dragon was 
  moving the device when it exploded and killed everything in the area. 
  The ghost dragon wants the characters to go to the gnomes and demand 
  the total treasure the dragon earned. The gnomes are a few weeks travel 
  away in central Foere, and the dragon gives them a map if they say 
  yes. If the characters retrieve the treasure, the dragon gives them the 
  Staff of the Dragon and magically places 2 additional charges in it so it 
  can create 7 red dragons. If the party refuses to help, the ghost dragon 
  attacks with its dragon breath. It blasts three times, doing 66 points of 
  damage each time if the characters don’t make their saves.
  Spending the Night in the Temple
  
  85
  dread dragon temple
  If the characters take the northern passage, they wind for several 
  miles before arriving at Area C. The southern passage leads to Area 
  H. Continuing down the “spine” of the dragon (the main corridor) takes 
  characters to Area D.
  The corridor to Area C grows more humid the farther characters travel. 
  Eventually the atmosphere becomes so oppressive that the characters’ 
  clothes are drenched and everyone must make a saving throw to avoid ex–
  haustion (–2 to hit, damage, and saves). This exhaustion can be removed 
  by resting in a dry area (the main corridor suffices) and getting into drier 
  clothing. 
  Read the following when the characters arrive at the end of the 
  passageway:
  The corridor opens into an immense, dead-end chamber. 
  The area is circular and at a guess it’s in one of the taloned 
  claws showing on the outside of the temple structure. The 
  smell of dried blood permeates the area. Chunks of bodies and 
  ripped equipment are all over the chamber. Severed heads and 
  shoulders are spread over one part of the chamber, while hips 
  and legs litter other areas. Splashes of dried blood cover the 
  walls and floor. 
  At the far end is the statue of a green dragon. It is 10ft 
  tall and twice that long. Its back is a flat platform. The only 
  illumination in the area comes from a mass of orange crystals 
  on the carving’s back. 
  Slicing the Dragon
  Grooves cover the walls, floor, and ceiling. If the characters look for a 
  trap, they can quickly figure out the danger those wide grooves mean for 
  them as they move through the chamber. 
  Stepping on any one of dozens of pressure plates scattered around 
  the room triggers the trap. The trap does 30 points of slashing damage 
  with no chance of a saving throw Spinning blades swing down from 
  the ceiling and up from the floor. Rotating blades slice out from  
  the walls at waist height (on a human). The blades affect the northeast 
  quarter of the room on the first round, the southeast quarter on  
  the second, the southwest quarter on the third, and the northwest 
  quarter on the fourth. The blades then retract into the walls, floor, and 
  ceiling. If someone steps on a pressure plate again, the trap activates 
  all over. 
  A dragon-shaped pedestal sits at the end of the cave. On the pedestal 
  are piles of orange crystal dragon scales. Each is 7 inches long, and closer 
  inspection reveals they are nothing but cheap stones with a magical 
  radiance that causes them to glow. However, taking even one orange 
  scale from the pile trips another pressure plate that causes chlorine gas 
  (as a dragon’s breath attack) to fill the chamber. The characters have 
  2 rounds to leave the area before they are forced to make a save. The 
  gas requires a save or the characters take half their hit points in poison 
  damage. The gas floats in the area for 24 hours before it sinks through 
  the floor.
  The dried husks of dead bodies show that killing has been going on for 
  centuries in this chamber. Any surviving equipment is of excellent quality. 
  A careful search of the bodies reveals 4 healing potions in metal flasks. 
  Scroll tubes are in several parts of the chamber, but they’ve been cut in 
  half and most of the scrolls inside are destroyed. One intact tube contains 
  still contains a scroll with 2 polymorph other spells. Searching that same 
  case reveals a hidden compartment in the cap that hides a masterfully cut 
  red ruby worth 3000gp. 
  Area D: Nightmare of the 
  Dragon Throne
  Nothing changes for some distance as you walk down the 
  corridor. Carved dragon scales continue to cover all of the black 
  stone in the area.
  Finally, after you travel at least two miles, the area opens into a 
  massive grotto too vast to decide just how big it could be without 
  carefully pacing it off. In one area is a glowing throne carved into 
  the shape of a blue dragon. The entire thing is made of some type 
  of magnificent gemstone. 
  The shape of the throne suggests a large human could sit upon 
  it. A closer inspection of the area notes dried blood on the arms 
  and seat. The stone of the carving is quite unusual and displays a 
  gemlike quality as it magically glows. Veins of what appear to be 
  gold and silver run through the carving.
  A mass of crushed bodies lies 30ft in front of the throne. 
  Sitting on the Dragon
  A band of 6 lizardmen temple guards protect the throne. These guards 
  immediately attack and follow the characters until one party or the other is dead. 
  Lizardman (6): HD 2+1; HP 11, 12x2, 10, 14, 13; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  halberd (1d8+1); Move 6 (swim 12); Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 
  2/30; Special: breathe underwater.
  The massive dragon throne is made out of blue lapis lazuli. It takes heavy 
  hammers to knock pieces from it. If the characters go wild and try to hack off 
  pieces from the lower chair section, a magical rune activates, causing 5d8 
  points of lightning damage to everyone within 20ft of the throne. Characters 
  who make a successful saving throw take half damage. Each piece knocked 
  off is worth 200gp, and about 90 head-sized pieces of lapis lazuli can be 
  recovered. Under the outer covering of gemstone is a red granite mold of a 
  chair with arcane symbols written all over the granite. 
  The throne is a deadly mechanical trap. If anyone sits on it, the arms 
  and back collapse (100% of the time, no chance of escape), doing 40 
  points of crushing damage (no save) the person in the seat. The trap then 
  ejects the crushed victim onto the floor and resets. 
  A dozen crushed bodies lie 30ft away from the front of the throne. 
  Flesh-eating beetles rush out of the dead bodies if the corpses are moved. 
  All their equipment is mostly crushed and destroyed, but characters can 
  find some useful items if they take the time to search the bodies. These 
  items are a hat of protection +1, a ring of invisibility, a +1 silver dagger, 
  a +1 dwarven throwing axe, 5 gems (500gp each), 29cp, 44sp, and 69gp.   
  As the throne trap resets, an ear-numbing roar issues from the throat of 
  the dragon statue. This warning echoes up and down the miles of corridor. 
  Area E: Dragon Staff Bane
  Read the following when the characters reach the “hip” intersection that 
  leads to the two legs and the tail of the Dragon Temple.
  You stand at another four-way crossroads. The northern corridor 
  shows white scales carved into the stones. The corridor to the south 
  has red stones carved with dragon scales. The blue stones of the 
  western corridor are at least 3ft thick on the walls, floor, and ceiling.
  If the characters proceed along the main corridor (toward Area E) they 
  hear a quickly moving group coming up behind them and making a bit of 
  
  86
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  noise once they are about a half-mile from the Dragon Staff. The strangers 
  hail the group and ask for a parley. These four experienced adventurers 
  carry high-quality equipment. A great deal of that equipment glows from 
  spells cast by the group before they shouted to the player characters. 
  The strange party consists of a magic-user, a cleric, and two fighters. 
  The strangers try hard to persuade the characters that nothing of value 
  is down the corridor and that they should leave before the moon is full in 
  the sky. Legends tell of ghost dragons moving out of the temple and into 
  the sky during the time of the full moon. If the characters don’t buy this 
  story and leave, the strangers fade into the darkness. 
  As the characters get closer to the Dragon Staff (within 300ft of Area E), they 
  soon hear the sound of heavy boots marching toward them from the darkness. 
  The battle cry of a dragon echoes down the corridor from the direction they are 
  moving toward. The corridor feels heavy as the air pressure increases. 
  The dragon’s roar and the increase in air pressure are designed to fill the 
  characters with fear. Both are magical effects that are meant to scare but 
  not harm the characters. 
  The blue stone corridor finally ends in a 150ft diameter 
  chamber. A glowing dais sits in the middle of the chamber at the 
  top of seven steps. Each step is a foot tall and 3ft deep. A glowing 
  staff with a golden dragon head at its top is atop the dais.
  Each of the seven steps is a different color stone: red, green, 
  white, blue, black, purple, and orange. A number of long-dead 
  bodies lie on the steps. The equipment you see would seem to note 
  practitioners of many different professions, from warriors in full-
  plate armor to a cleric in brown robes with a staff in her dead hand. 
  You can’t tell how they died from the condition of their bodies. 
  The dead aren’t burnt from spells or ripped apart by monsters.
  The dried husks of meat-eating beetles cover the first step 
  of the dais. 
  The Dragon’s Goal
  The real prize in the chamber is the Staff of the Dragon. The staff 
  currently has 5 charges and imparts knowledge on its use to whoever picks 
  it up. Each charge changes one character into a young adult red dragon for 
  as long as they want to use that shape. 
  Each of the seven steps of the dais does 10 points of magical 
  damage anytime someone touches a step. If the characters instead 
  step on the many dead bodies on the steps instead of the magical 
  stone of the dais, they can safely reach the staff and take it without 
  taking physical damage. The first step is littered with flesh-eating 
  beetles that surged up the riser to get to the corpses and died from 
  the magical damage.
  The staff is casually sticking in a holder in the center of the dais. The 
  staff could be lassoed from the floor and pulled out of its stand with ease. 
  Flying characters could also reach the staff without touching the dais. Even 
  levitation might do the trick if characters are clever about maneuvering 
  (using ropes or gusts of wind). 
  The dead bodies appear to have died rushing up the steps to gain the 
  staff. If characters examine or search the bodies, rot grubs pour out of the 
  faces and arms. 
  Characters can find many treasures around the bodies: a +1 short 
  sword, a staff of striking, +2 shield, cloak of displacement, potion of 
  dragon breath protection, scroll of protection from lightning, and a 
  +3/+5 versus dragons two-handed sword. Most of the bodies also 
  have backpacks filled with highly useful equipment such as candles, 
  flint & steel, canteens, sleeping bags, extra clothes, needle and thread, 
  sharpening tools, and extra weapons such as throwing daggers, throwing 
  axes, and warhammers.
  Rot Grub: HD 1hp; AC 9[10]; Atk burrow; Move 1; Save 18; AL 
  N; CL/XP 1/15; Special: burrow to heart in 1d3+1 turns.  
  
  87
  dread dragon temple
  Area F: Bloodbath at 
  Talon Rock
  Read the following the characters head south from the hip crossroads 
  toward Area F:
   
  The red stones of the corridor hint at something fiery at its end. 
  The corridor runs for a mile, and in all that time, the temperature 
  grows hotter as you move down the passage. 
  Eventually, you see steam in the distance. The heat is such 
  that metal armor is very uncomfortable to wear. A steamy fog 
  obscures the way ahead. 
  Steamy Fog of Lizardmen
  Hidden in the steam, and quite enjoying the heat, is a squad of 6 
  lizardmen with halberds. The characters travel 300ft in the dense fog 
  before the lizardmen attack from surprise. 
  The creatures never leave the fog and don’t follow the characters. 
  If the player characters run from the battle, they have a 50% chance of 
  running headlong into the lava pool at the end of the corridor. Check to see 
  if the characters left any markers to guide them back the way they came. If 
  they didn’t, roll a die for each member of the group. Make sure to tell them 
  if some of the party members run in a different direction from other party 
  members because they are shouting and trying to help each other as the 
  melee progresses. The lizardmen follow characters back the way they came 
  until the fog ends. The creatures do not follow the characters into the lava 
  pool. With a 70-yard-wide corridor, it’s very possible the characters could 
  even retreat to a side wall and not go down the length of the corridor at all. 
  Lizardman (6): HD 2+1; HP 11, 12x2, 10, 14, 13; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  halberd (1d8+1); Move 6 (swim 12); Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 
  2/30; Special: breathe underwater.
  Moving carefully from the ambush site, you travel several 
  hundred yards in the steamy fog. Finally, the steam clears to 
  reveal a dead-end chamber. The chamber is at least a hundred 
  yards in diameter. A pool of lava covers the entire area of the 
  round chamber. 
  At the center of that pool is a twenty foot long and tall carving 
  of a red dragon done in red crystal and floating on a pedestal. 
  The back of the dragon is flat and holds a pile of the purest white 
  crystals. The heat of the area is nearly unbearable. One hundred 
  twenty feet of lava surrounds the dragon carving. 
  Dragon Fire  
  Those wearing plate mail or chainmail are likely to be in a great deal of 
  pain when they reach the lava chamber. They take 3 points of heat damage 
  every round they are near the lava. Everyone else take 2 hit points of heat 
  damage every round. Touching the lava or trying to walk in the lava causes 
  instant death. Flying over the lava causes a character to take 4 points of heat 
  damage per round. On the back of the dragon are 33 white crystals. Each 
  crystal protects the holder once against one white dragon breath attack.    
  Before the characters can get to the pedestal, however, 2 fire elementals 
  rise from the lava to talk with the characters. The elementals tell a story 
  of forced labor to keep the lava hot in this pool. They want to get out of 
  the lava and back to their home. If the characters take out the ruby eyes 
  of the dragon statue and throw the gems into the fire, the elementals can 
  leave for home. The elementals offer 4 potions of fire resistance if the 
  characters help them. 
  It takes 40 points of melee damage to crush each eye in the statue. 
  All the while, the characters are close to the statue and take severe heat 
  damage. Spells aimed at the head of the dragon do a quarter of the damage 
  the spell normally does when aimed at living beings. 
  The elementals never allow characters to attack them. If the group tries 
  to do battle with the elementals, the creatures sink into the lava and the 
  entire chamber becomes even hotter, inflicting 6 points of heat damage per 
  round for nine hours. The elementals aren’t very determined. They make 
  the same offer to the players every 10 hours, even if the characters tried to 
  fight them previously.      
  Area G: Carnage at the 
  Dead-End
  Read the following if the characters head north toward Area G from 
  the hip crossroads.
  The white stones of the corridor would seem to represent the 
  influence of a white dragon. The temperature in the corridor does 
  indeed steadily drop to freezing and below. All too soon, those of 
  you in plate armor are very uncomfortable in the extreme cold. 
  Your feet and hands are numb as you travel. 
  After walking for a mile, the corridor opens into a large cavern 
  at least a hundred yards in diameter. A statue of a white dragon 
  at least thirty yards tall and long is against the west wall. On 
  its back is a flat platform that contains a mass of gems of many 
  colors. 
  Cold Heart of the Dragon
  While in the chamber, the characters take 4 points of damage from the 
  temperature every five minutes. The extreme cold also slows the characters 
  to half movement while in the chamber and for 10 minutes after leaving 
  the room. The gems on the platform are all useless glass. 
  The real treasure in the chamber is the white dragon statue. It’s a living 
  dragon paralyzed to stay in the chamber. The characters have no way of 
  knowing the true nature of the dragon, but they can figure out that it is a 
  living creature if they rap on it or test it in other ways. If the dragon is 
  taken out of the chamber, it returns to life and is very grateful. It grants 
  each character in the party one boon. 
  The icy floor makes moving the dragon out of the chamber easy as 
  it slides on the ice.  The instant the creature is out of the chamber, it 
  animates and talks with the party, telling them its long life story. The silver 
  dragon likes humanity and for centuries has helped the tribes living up 
  north in the cold regions near the dragon’s former lair. However, when the 
  white dragon helped the tribesmen kill an old black dragon, a curse fell 
  upon it and brought it here to this temple. 
  The dragon is so grateful at being released that it gives each party 
  member a ring made of magical ice. The dragon explains that if the 
  character speaks a request into the ring, the dragon will answer the call and, 
  if it can, fulfill the request. If the dragon succeeds, the ice ring vanishes. If 
  the dragon fails to honor the request, it explains that its powers are not up 
  to the task and grants another boon before it vanishes. 
  Dragon, Silver (Large Ancient): HD 11; HP 88; AC 2[17]; Atk 
  2 claws (1d8), bite (3d10); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 4; AL L; CL/
  XP 24/5600; Special: breaths frost (70ft long, 30ft width, 88 
  damage, save half) or paralytic gas (50ft diameter, 3d6 
  turns, save negates), polymorph.
  
  88
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  Area H: 
  Living with the Dragon
  The characters face several encounters before they reach Area H. Read 
  the following once they enter the southern tunnel in the dragon’s four-way 
  shoulder crossroads that leads to Area H: 
  A wet sheen covers the dark blue stones. Even the floor, with 
  its carved dragon scales, is slippery. There is little doubt that 
  running is dangerous and might result in slipping. Just ten steps 
  into the corridor, wet clothes already drag you down. Those in 
  plate mail have it the worst as their padding becomes more like 
  a sponge full of water. 
  Area H1: Lizardmen Nests  
  The tunnel opens into a vast chamber several hundred yards 
  long at least. Sconces on the walls hold blazing torches that help 
  display the hall’s size. It’s clear the corridor continues southeast 
  through the room. Strange objects like ten-foot-diameter nests 
  fill the chamber in three different rows. At least a hundred or 
  more of these nests are in this area. The smell of the marsh and 
  swamp is strong here.
   
  More than 300ft into the area, the nests are filled with sleeping 
  lizardmen. It is difficult to tell how many contain sleepers, but the party 
  sees at least 10 full nests. 
  These lizardmen stay asleep if characters don’t cause a commotion in 
  the area. Any fighting wakes the 20 lizardmen who throw their javelins 
  at the characters. Each nest contains 4 large javelins. The lizardmen have 
  no problem throwing ranged weapons into melee as other lizardmen fight 
  hand-to-hand. Each of these reptilian warriors also has a large bandoleer 
  with a silver belt, more shield than buckle, at its center. The silver 
  ornament is an image of the Dragon Temple in the mountains. Each is 
  worth 100sp. 
  After the lizards throw their javelins, they swarm the characters and 
  use their talons and jaws in hand-to-talon fighting. These lizardmen won’t 
  retreat. They are serious temple guards filled with the importance of their 
  jobs. If the characters run, the guards follow them until the characters are 
  either out of the temple or killed in battle. 
  Lizardman (20): HD 2+1; HP 11x3, 12x5, 10x4, 14x3, 13x4, 16; 
  AC 5[14]; Atk 2 claws (1d3), bite (1d8) or javelin (1d6); Move 
  6 (swim 12); Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 2/30; Special: breathe 
  underwater.
  Area H2: Lizardmen Pool
  You move several hundred yards down the corridor and again 
  the area to the south opens up to reveal a very large pond. The 
  water is several hundred yards in diameter and very murky. The 
  place once again smells like a swamp. In the shadows are lumps 
  of things, but it’s impossible with the present light to make out 
  what is down there. 
  Brightly glowing forms swim in the pond, making it easy to 
  estimate how long and wide the water is. 
  Suddenly, the excited splashing of many fish churn up the 
  water. Fish leap into the air, and some even land on the stone 
  floor. Several of the larger fish glow brightly and light the area. 
  
  89
  dread dragon temple
  Waiting under the water are 15 lizardmen. The lizardmen organizing 
  under the water scares the fish and causes them to jump. When the 
  characters are 50ft away, the lizardmen rise out of the water and hurl 
  their javelins. Each has 3 javelins. The lizard people do not follow the 
  characters, but they roar out a warning that echoes up and down the 
  corridor. The lizardmen stay half-submerged in the water and continue 
  throwing javelins. If the characters continue the fight after taking three 
  volleys of missiles, the lizardmen come out of the water and fight hand-
  to-talon to the death. Once the fighting begins, these lizardmen follow the 
  characters until the characters are dead or the lizardmen perish. 
  Lizardman (15): HD 2+1; HP 11x2, 12x4, 10x3, 14x2, 13x3, 16; AC 
  5[14]; Atk 2 claws (1d3), bite (1d8) or javelin (1d6); Move 6 (swim 
  12); Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 2/30; Special: breathe underwater.
  Numerous benches at the other end of the pond hold 15 high-quality 
  halberds and 15 magical cloaks that make the wearer invisible when he 
  stands in shadows of any kind. 
  Area H3: Lizardmen Eating Area 
  You travel quite a ways before another large area opens to the 
  south. Magical glowing rods light the area. Two hundred yards to the 
  back of the chamber are ten large crocodiles gutted and hung on meat 
  hooks. Nearby are several square stones covered in dried blood. On 
  the stones are large butcher knives. Thirty large rectangular stones 
  also covered in dried blood are in this open area. The eating tables 
  have 10ft to 20ft of space around each one. It’s clear the lizardmen 
  use this section for eating their meals of crocodile meat. No cook 
  fires are in the chamber, so the lizardmen must eat their food raw. 
  Crocodiles are raised by the lizardmen for food in caverns deeper in 
  the mountains. Off to the far side of this room are 4 lizardmen who are 
  just finishing lunch when the characters arrive. They wear cloaks that hide 
  them in the shadows along the wall. As the party leaves the area, these 
  four lizardmen throw javelins at the backs of the party. They get off two 
  surprise attacks before the party can respond. The lizardmen follow the 
  group and keep attacking if the party doesn’t stay and do battle. The fight 
  continues until one party or the other is dead.
  Lizardman (4): HD 2+1; HP 12, 10, 14, 16; AC 5[14]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d3), bite (1d8) or javelin (1d6); Move 6 (swim 12); 
  Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 2/30; Special: breathe underwater.
  Area H4:  
  Lizardman Leader Chambers 
  You find two large leather doors along the east wall. The leather 
  is cured, boiled, and quite stiff on each door. Each door has a 
  center latch. 
  Read the following if the characters open the left door:
  Opening the door on the left reveals a large chamber where 
  a huge lizard man is chopping a large block with a halberd. 
  The chamber contains a nest, a dragon statue, and ceremonial 
  equipment in front of the statue. The powerfully built lizard man 
  charges to attack!
  The lizardman champion has +3 chain mail, and a +3 halberd. 
  He chases the party if they run and continues attacking as long as 
  even one character remains alive. The lizadman leader even follows 
  the party out of the temple if needed. He can also track with magical 
  precision. If the characters escape the temple using magic, the leader 
  and 6 lizardmen find each party member and attack within a few 
  weeks.
  Lizardman Champion: HD 6; HP 48; AC 2[17]; Atk +3 halberd 
  (1d8+4); Move 6 (swim 12); Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: breathe underwater, magical tracking.
  Equipment: +3 chain mail, +3 halberd.
  On and around the green dragon statue at the back of the chamber are 
  holy relics made of gold and encrusted in jewels. Dragon images cover 
  each relic. These items include a large bowl, a large chalice, a small 
  sphere of silver with several embedded gems, an empty jeweled gold 
  box, and a small gold hammer with a bell. Each item is worth 5,000 
  gold pieces.
  Read the following if the characters open the door on the right:
  Opening the door reveals a large chamber. Skulls from many 
  intelligent races are mounted on the walls. The chamber has a 
  nest at its center, a dragon statue at the back, and a large chest by 
  the statue. Nothing else is in the room. 
  The room belongs to the chieftain of all of the lizardmen. The 
  creature is out and about currently and won’t engage the characters. In 
  his chamber are the normal things for lizardmen except for the large 
  leather-bound chest. 
  The leather-bound chest is trapped. Opening it fills the chamber with 
  deadly chlorine gas. Characters not protected from such things must save 
  or die. At the back of the chest, currently hidden because the chest is 
  pushed against the wall, is a secret drawer at the bottom. Inside the drawer 
  are a cloak of invisibility, a helm of telepathy, a mattock of the titans, and 
  a 3ft tall platinum holy symbol of a celestial dragon with large emeralds 
  for eyes (10,000 gp). 
  Area H5:  
  Lizard Man Hall of Honor 
  Another chamber opens to the south. The hall is 75ft wide, 
  300ft long, and filled with mounted heads and stuffed bodies 
  of dangerous foes the lizardmen have fought in and around the 
  Dragon Temple. More than 100 heads or skulls are on the walls, 
  with a number of intelligent races represented. Against the back 
  wall is a 15ft tall stone statue of a lizardman with a brass club in 
  his hand. 
  The mounted and stuffed beings are not dangerous. If the characters 
  do anything with the heads and bodies, however, the stone golem 
  quickly steps off its pedestal and attacks. The animated statue follows 
  the characters for 1 mile from the hall. If the characters come back, the 
  golem immediately steps off of its pedestal and attacks again. Very little 
  of value is in the hall, but the drow figures wear boots that cancel sound 
  the wearer makes as he moves across the floor. The drow figures also have 
  +2 longswords, but the weapons lose their magical powers if exposed to 
  the sunlight.
  Golem, Stone: HD 12; HP 60; AC 5[14]; Atk fist (3d8); Move 6; 
  Save 3; CL/XP 16/3200; Special: +2 or better weapon to hit, 
  immune to most magic, slowed by magical fire.
  
  90
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  Area H: Dragon Inner Temple
  You’ve traveled more than a mile to the end of this corridor to 
  an area easily two hundred yards in diameter. At the center of 
  the chamber is a massive dragon statue with ten heads, each in a 
  different color: gold, silver, brass, bronze, copper, white, black, 
  green, red, and blue. The statue is 50ft tall and its body is 100ft long. 
  The area is damp and the temperature is warmer as well, 
  especially around the giant dragon statue. 
  There is something holy about the place. It’s a feeling that isn’t 
  just evil, neutral, or good. Then you notice the hundreds of eggs 
  along the walls in all shapes, colors, and sizes. There is no doubt 
  that every type of dragon appears here in this mass of eggs. 
  If the characters break or fool with the eggs, the entire statue moves 
  nearer the eggs. The black dragon head then bends down and splashes all 
  of the characters near the eggs for 66 points of acid damage. If that doesn’t 
  stop the characters from handling the eggs, the black dragon head spits 
  acid again as the blue dragon head animates and spits out a lightning bolt. 
  Both attacks inflict 66 points of damage. The characters take half damage 
  if they make their saving throws. Only clerical attacks and spells have any 
  affect on the huge dragon statue, and melee attacks with magical weapons 
  do nothing to chip or mar its surface. The statue has 100 hit points per 
  head and 500 hit points in the body. It won’t follow characters that retreat 
  from the area. Any damage done to the statue heals after 24 hours. Each 
  dragon head can animate, and their attacks never miss no matter what the 
  characters might do to protect themselves. Each strike does 66 points of 
  damage. 
  The dragon statue won’t give characters any second chance at the eggs. 
  If they retreat and then return, the dragon statue instantly attacks.
  If the characters are wise and do not touch the eggs or the statue, they 
  hear a loud command of “wait” before they leave the chamber. The gold 
  dragon head lowers and opens its maw. On the dragon head’s tongue are 
  fist-sized gems, one for each of the characters. All of the gems are worth 
  25,000 gold pieces apiece. Randomly pick a few from the following list: 
  star-aquamarine, star-chrysoberyl, star-red garnet, star-moonstone, star-
  ruby, star-dark blue-sapphire star-pink spinel, and star-sunstone. The 
  characters can receive these stones only once in their lifetime. 
  Facing the Blue Dragon
  If the characters recover the Staff of the Dragon, they have the relic 
  needed to finally stop the blue dragon from terrorizing the island. The 
  character who carries the staff knows that the relic can change 5 characters 
  into red dragons to fight the creature. How the characters fight the dragon 
  is up to them, although the ghost red dragon may have suggested possible 
  strategies if they met him. 
  You step forward and spread out for the upcoming 
  transformation. The staff waves and the five volunteers transform 
  into powerful young adult red dragons, leaping into the sky.
  The Staff of the Dragon can transform up to 5 characters (7 if the 
  characters helped the brass dragon ghost) turn into red dragons and fly out 
  to challenge the blue dragon. The ancient blue dragon is a tough fight, but 
  multiple red dragons might survive the battle. The transformation allows 
  the characters to adjust easily to their new dragon bodies. Whatever 
  protective magic items they carried still lend their protections to the 
  characters. Items such as wands and magical weapons, however, meld 
  into the body of the transformed dragon and cannot be used. The character 
  regains any lost hit points and is totally healed in his new dragon form. 
  The characters also now attack and make saving throws as adult red 
  dragons. The characters remain in their dragon form as long as they wish, 
  and can transform back any time. 
  The Final Dragon Battle 
  Read the following when the red dragon characters confront the blue 
  dragon. Adjust the text accordingly if they attack the wyrm before it 
  leaves its cave.
  The ancient blue dragon flies into the air and roars out a 
  challenge. The creature is massive for its kind and darkens the 
  sky with titanic wings. 
  Dragon, Blue (Large Ancient): HD 10; HP 80; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d6), bite (3d8); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 
  22/5000; Special: spits lightning (3/day, 5ft wide, 100ft long, 
  80 damage, save half), spells MU (4/3).
  Spells: 1st—magic missile (x3), protection from evil; 
  2nd—darkness 15ft radius, mirror image, phantasmal 
  force.
  Dragon, Red (Medium Adult): HD 10; HP 40; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d8), bite (3d10); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 5; AL varies; 
  CL/XP -/-; Special: breathes fire (3/day, 90ft long, 30ft wide, 
  40 damage, save half).
  The Blue Dragon’s Cave
  The blue dragon has an unusual hobby. The creature likes to use its 
  lightning to melt precious metals and add them to spheres of the various 
  metals. Characters find a 1-foot-diameter sphere of gold worth 21,000gp. 
  A 1ft diameter sphere of silver is worth more than 2600gp, while a 
  2ft-diameter sphere of copper is worth 900gp. Finally, a small sphere 
  of platinum is worth 4000gp. The dragon also has a magical wooden 
  cupboard that looks like it can hold just 10 potion bottles, but is actually 
  capable of holding up to 100 potions. The cabinet currently holds 12 
  random potions. 
  Concluding the Adventure
  The dragon staff cannot be recharged (except by the brass dragon ghost 
  as previously mentioned). The gold and gems on the staff make it worth 
  20,000gp, however. But even though it is worthless as a magical item, 
  more roleplaying opportunities exist with the exhausted staff. It seems 
  that all dragon types take great exception to any non-dragon owning the 
  staff. Every dragon encountered insists that the staff be returned to the 
  dais in the Dragon Temple. The temple is an ancient spiritual center for 
  dragons of all kinds sacred to both Tiamat and Behemoth, the Celestial 
  Dragon.
  
  91
  emeralds of highfang
  Wise thieves join the government, where their larceny has the cover of 
  “legality” and the cash comes in heaps and piles from deceitful receipts 
  and pocketed procurements rather than in small, bloodstained purses from 
  breaking windows, scaling walls, and risking traps and long-fanged guard 
  dogs.
  Wise thieves do not, by choice, go up against towering giants armed 
  with clubs larger than the tallest thief in the guild. Nor do they try to nick 
  treasure from dragons without a group of powerful fellow adventurers 
  behind them, who can hurl mighty spells, hack and hew toe to toe with 
  an angry wyrm, heal the injured, and (when things go as they usually do), 
  resurrect the dead.
  There are wise thieves, and then there are characters. Emeralds of 
  Highfang awaits them with open arms, offering special challenges and 
  rewards to thief characters—but as always, the prospects are much better 
  for a party of adventurers from a variety of classes, with wide skills 
  and experience, and high level. Some might find that a broad base of 
  experience is not only helpful, but essential for survival.
  Foreword
  Emeralds of Highfang leads characters of 12th level or higher into the 
  caldera of an extinct volcano that has become the lair of an ancient red 
  dragon. The dragon, however, isn’t alone; it is allied with a clan of fire 
  giants, who in turn have hill giants and ettins in their service. The volcano, 
  therefore, is every bit as dangerous a place after its death as it was while 
  it was actively spewing lava.
  The potential reward for defeating an ancient red dragon and a clan 
  of giants is immense, but so is the risk. This adventure should prove 
  particularly rewarding for thief player characters, both because the 
  grandest treasure in the dragon’s hoard is especially valuable to a thief, but 
  also because there’s more opportunity—and more need—here for stealth, 
  scouting, and sneakiness than in most adventures. All too often, thieves 
  who’d like to be out front performing reconnaissance are forced to walk 
  in the middle of the marching order while fighters and paladins lead the 
  way. In Emeralds of Highfang, brash warriors who barge into chambers 
  relying on their armor and their hit points won’t survive long. After one or 
  two encounters, they’ll be glad to let the thieves lead from the shadows.
  A party of adventurers can be introduced to this adventure in several 
  ways. The events take place in a remote area of the Forlorn Mountains. The 
  most natural manner to begin the adventure (i.e., the least suspicious) is 
  for characters to innocently draw close to Highfang Peak, a long-dormant 
  volcanic caldera that from below looks like a rounded mountain soaring to 
  a high, narrow spike on one side (somewhat like a splinter jutting upward 
  from one side of an immense, sawn-off tree stump). If viewed from the lip 
  or from the air, Highfang is revealed to have a deep, verdant green crater 
  at its heart, where wild cattle roam and cascading streams are plentiful.
  Characters can be pulled into the area with the usual rumors of 
  unplundered tombs or wealthy bandits, or they can be pushed in by severe 
  weather. In winter, you can rely on a howling blizzard with bad visibility, 
  slick footing under deep, wet snow, and the threat of severe frostbite or 
  hypothermia if they spend the night exposed to the elements. In summer, a 
  blinding, pelting rainstorm with lightning crashing all round, wind tearing 
  trees from the ground, and hailstones the size of cockatrice eggs can do 
  the trick. In either case, a pack of dire wolves or other hungry, desperate 
  creatures shadowing the characters is a nice bit of added motivation for 
  the travelers to seek a safe refuge.
  In short, the characters must find shelter or face dire peril—and they 
  find Area 1: The Cavern of the Club.
  Alternatively, characters who begin the adventure in an urban setting 
  or a rural town find, in some dark alley, shed, or vacant warehouse, one 
  shattered end of a gigantic club—as thick as a tree trunk, battered into 
  roundness, hardened by fire, and studded with iron spikes. It is lying 
  abandoned, apparently discarded and forgotten, and pulsing with a faint, 
  eerie, purple-white magical glow.
  If the club is touched, moved, or even approached too closely, it triggers 
  a teleport effect that relocates all of the characters and the club fragment 
  to Area 1 of the giants’ warren.
  Giants’ Warren
  Area 1: The Cavern of the Club
  Characters espy a dark opening in the mountainside, a tall, narrow 
  crack in Highfang Peak. It leads into a huge, irregularly-shaped cavern 
  that’s lit faintly by patches of phosphorescent fungus on the walls and 
  ceiling—furry, amorphous, jellylike masses that emit a steady, pale, 
  brownish-white glow.
  Strewn around the cavern lie the crushed and rotting bodies of six orcs 
  who were felled by the blows of a huge, spiked weapon—perhaps a giant’s 
  club. Amid them are the two halves of the broken giant’s club that slew 
  them, dropped by the disgusted giant when it broke. (If the characters were 
  brought here magically by a glowing, broken club, it is one of the halves. 
  It flashes brightly upon arrival, then goes dark, its magic exhausted.)
  Emeralds of Highfang
  By Ed Greenwood
  Glowflow
  These mindless, harmless fungi range in size from the span of a 
  human hand to about as large as the top of a dining table; whatever 
  their area, most are about as thick as a human adult’s wrist. They 
  can join and divide at random or in response to attacks. They are 
  ambulatory, creeping very slowly toward sources of warmth and 
  movement. When no such sources are present, they flow slowly 
  over stone, readily sticking to walls and ceilings, to reach the 
  highest points in an area or the apex of a cavern ceiling.
  If characters sleep in a glowflow-infested cavern without a 
  sentinel, or if they try to remove the fungus (it can be scraped from 
  the stone easily with a stick or a shield), they might awaken with 
  the fungus on them. The fungus likes to cover the faces of living 
  creatures because of the warm breath, but it would not suffocate 
  the sleeper. 
  Glowflow tastes rather like beef fat, and it does no harm at all if 
  ingested. It does cause the skin of the ingester to glow softly with 
  the same steady, faint, brownish-white luminosity of the glowflow 
  for 1d6+2 days. Glowflow avoids areas of rushing or open 
  water but can be found just about everywhere else underground, 
  throughout all subterranean areas in Highfang Peak and the 
  surrounding mountain range.
  
  92
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  
  93
  emeralds of highfang
  The dead orcs have a few weapons and some treasure.
  • Orc 1: Lice-ridden, rotting leather armor, leather belt with crude, rusty 
  dagger in sheath, and pouch containing 6cp and an orc tooth (his) wrapped 
  in a scrap of bloody cloth. He has a two-handed axe with broken shaft.
  • Orc 2: Leather armor in good condition, leather belt with good dagger 
  in sheath (salvaged from past human victim), and pouch containing 1sp 
  and 4cp.  He has two-headed axe in good condition.
  • Orc 3: Leather armor in good condition, leather belt with good dagger 
  in sheath (salvaged from past human victim), and a pouch containing 3sp 
  and 1cp. He has an intact javelin.
  • Orc 4: No armor but has a black metal shield, brittle and pounded 
  flat with perforations by a spiked club (the orc’s arm, still strapped to 
  the shield, is shattered) and starting to rust, good leather belt with empty 
  sheath (the dagger is missing and nowhere to be found in cavern), and 
  pouch containing seven 2ft long leather thongs, an ornate leather garment 
  button,  and 2cp. He has a two-handed axe in good condition.
  • Orc 5: Lice-ridden, rotting leather armor that was poorly made to 
  begin with (many gaps spanned by knotted, crisscrossing leather thongs), 
  a rotting leather belt with crude but not rusty dagger in sheath, and a 
  pouch containing 2cp and a fist-sized bundle of soft leather tied up with 
  thongs (inside is a deep red, faceted gemstone about the size of a man’s 
  thumbnail, that looks valuable: it’s a rose-cut ruby worth 3000gp). He has 
  a javelin in good condition.
  • Orc 6: Leather armor in good condition, leather belt with good dagger 
  in sheath (salvaged from past human victim), and pouch containing 6sp 
  and 1cp. He has a two-handed axe in good condition.
  At the back of the cavern is a huge cleft, about 50ft tall and 20ft wide. 
  A boulder that is wedged into the cleft and is a little more than 20ft tall 
  blocks it. The giants to keep out wolves and casual intruders placed the 
  boulder here. The boulder can be climbed over easily, or characters can 
  dislodge it if the combined strength of everyone working on it totals 25 or 
  higher. If the boulder tumbles into the cavern, it makes enough noise that 
  every creature in the next two encounter areas is alerted to the presence 
  of intruders. It also has the potential to crush anyone foolishly standing in 
  front of it when it breaks free. Everyone in its path must make a successful 
  saving throw to avoid 20d6 points of bludgeoning damage. 
  The first character who climbs to the top of the boulder comes face 
  to face with a wolf-spider. It pounces and attacks without hesitation. 
  Beyond the boulder, the cleft becomes a passage with a rocky, uneven 
  floor covered by fallen and wedged boulders. Moving along this floor is 
  more akin to climbing than to walking; the entire stretch is difficult terrain.
  Wolf-Spider: HD 6; HP 30; AC 4[15]; Atk bite (1d8 plus poison); 
  Move 15 (climb 9); Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 8/800; Special: 
  debilitating poison (1d6 strength drain, save avoids), surprise on 
  1-3 on d6 in webs, web. (The Tome of Horrors Complete 609)
  The route is roomy enough for giants to traverse, though it’s difficult 
  terrain for them, too. The rough-walled, irregular passage bends to the 
  right, and then curves left again, for 70ft.
  Area 2: Bats and the Drift
  At this point, the rough, rocky floor becomes strewn with scattered 
  human and demihuman bones, the remains of unfortunate earlier intruders.
  Two giant bats roost here on the passage ceiling, above a ledge 
  high up on the right side (relative to creatures moving inward along 
  the passage, deeper into the mountain). They swoop to attack anything 
  smaller than a giant that enters the passage. The bats are jet black with 
  blazing red eyes, large fangs, long tails, and wide black leathery wings 
  that make them resemble manta rays, though they are simply a rare 
  subspecies of bat. They will shriek as they attack, their wide and many-
  fanged maws gaping wide. These cries are so high-pitched that they are 
  like needles in the ears of those nearby, but are almost inaudible more 
  than 70ft away.
  
  94
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  Bat, Giant (2): HD 4; HP 20, 22; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d10); 
  Move 4 (fly 18); Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: 10% 
  chance of disease.
  The bats are hungry, so they attack intruders to slay and feed, but they 
  flee to high ledges or out into Area 1 to roost high up when down to 3 or 
  fewer hit points or when one of the bats is killed. Surviving bats might 
  attack again if characters pass through this area later on their way out. 
  Area 3: Passage Sentinels
  Some 80ft beyond the Drift, the passage widens briefly, creating an 
  alcove in both walls. A large, round brass gong hangs from the center of 
  the ceiling on a massive chain that vanishes up between ceiling-boulders 
  to an unknown anchor point. Under it sit 2 hill giants. They are mean, 
  nasty, smelly individuals clad in uncured and reeking hides of various 
  mountain beasts, and they’re are armed with spiked clubs like the broken 
  one in Area 1. 
  Giant, Hill (2): HD 8+2; HP 44, 42; AC 4[15];  Atk spiked club 
  (2d8); Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: throw 
  boulders (2d8 damage).
  The hill giants have orders to kill any intruders. For every intelligent 
  creature or large and dangerous monster (not the giant bats nor anything 
  smaller) whose body they display to the fire giants who dwell deeper 
  inside Highfang Peak, those giants reward this pair of brutes by letting 
  them move “closer to Highfang,” which the hill giants have been led to 
  believe is a paradise where they can gorge themselves on all they can eat, 
  in the company of friendly female hill giants. They are under orders never 
  to both sleep at the same time.
  They have been at this wide spot in the passage for almost a year, and 
  it reeks of their dung. (They trudge huge buckets of the stuff out of the 
  caverns to dump, as seldom as possible; three huge buckets occupy one 
  alcove, with massive slabs of stone laid across them to form a bench or 
  table.) The fire giants bring them food (usually roasted bull carcasses), 
  and they drink water from the natural spring that trickles down the wall 
  behind the dung buckets and seeps away through the floor.
  The giants are dim-witted but enthusiastic in a fight—so much so that 
  they might comically injure each other or bump and stumble over each 
  other, trying to move into positions from where they can better smear 
  enemies over the rock walls, floor, and ceiling with their huge clubs. They 
  are also under orders to strike the gong hanging from the ceiling with their 
  clubs whenever they see an intruder. This alerts the fire giants to (very 
  unhurriedly) come and check the situation.
  To keep the hill giants from bashing the gong into smithereens out of 
  anger or boredom, the dragon long ago reached an agreement with some 
  wizards to enchant it, so the gong now emits a weak lightning bolt (line, 
  5ft wide x 50ft long; 3d6 lightning damage; save half) in a line straight 
  toward whoever strikes the gong. The hill giants know this and hate it, so 
  they strike the gong only if they decide they are losing this fight and could 
  use some help. They’re smart enough to stand where the lightning bolt hits 
  a few enemies in addition to the giant who triggers it. 
  Area 4: Fang Cavern
  From the widening occupied by the hill giants, the passage runs another 
  100ft to a similar widening that’s untenanted, then descends gently for 80ft 
  to another widening of the passage, before rising a further 90ft beyond it 
  to open out into this large cave.
  This rough-walled natural cavern has a ceiling 90ft up that’s dominated 
  by many stalactites (none more than 12ft long). Most have been crudely 
  pierced so small oil-lamps can be hung from them. Over 40 such lamps 
  are burning in the chamber, giving off smoke that has coated the stalactites 
  with soot, making the room oppressively hot, and seeming to carpet the 
  ceiling in flames. The cave’s many stalagmites have all been smoothly cut 
  off to form seats or the supports for stone tabletops. The tables formed this 
  way resemble large, flat-topped, stone mushrooms.
  One huge central stalagmite has been left alone. It sweeps up from the 
  floor in a thick, sharp, tapering curve that echoes the shape of the lower 
  fang of a gigantic feline.
  Here sit 6 fire giants. At any time, two are sleeping, two are cooking 
  and cleaning, and two are on guard duty (which usually means they’re 
  sitting with weapons ready and playing stoneguard, a simple dice game; 
  three rolls against three rolls, highest total wins, difference between totals 
  is how many spaces the winner can advance the Dead Giant marker along 
  a straight track of twenty spaces; whenever the marker reaches one end of 
  the track, the giant sitting at that end loses the game). 
  Giant, Fire (6): HD 11+1d4hp; HP 54, 60, 52, 50, 58, 48; AC 
  4[15]; Atk two-handed sword (5d6); Move 12; Save 4; AL C; 
  CL/XP 12/2000; Special: immune to fire, hurl boulders (5d6 
  damage). 
  The two on-duty guards sit on cut-down stalagmites, with a stone 
  table (also formed by a stalagmite) between them. The stoneguard board 
  is carved into the top of the table. They’re playing for gold coins; an 
  open sack containing 448gp sits on the floor beside the table. The two 
  stoneguard players might not notice someone pilfering coins at first, but a 
  second trip to the sack by anyone will be noticed.
  Behind the fang is a stone table (a socketed slab placed atop three 
  lopped-off stalagmites), a bench (massive rectangular stone block 
  laid beside the table), and in a slight depression in the cavern floor, a 
  cooking hearth full of smoldering charcoal surrounded by a ring of ready 
  firewood (short but, to humans, quite large and heavy logs). Above the 
  hearth is a blackened metal frame of heavy roughcast iron on which 
  rest three spits, each transfixing the carcass of a whole bull now partly 
  roasted, sizzling and dripping fat into the fire. Each spit has six metal 
  wedges that can be placed on the frame at either end to hold the spit and 
  its meat in a particular position. To humans, these metal wedges are each 
  about the size of a large chair, and are very heavy (requiring a combined 
  strength of 25 or higher to lift). Near the hearth is a reeking bucket 
  (about the size of a human bathtub) of eel oil, which the giants use as 
  both a firestarter and a baste. Above the hearth, the cavern rises in a 
  natural chimney, a shaft that rises for fully 240ft beyond the 90ft height 
  of the cavern to emerge high atop one of the rising arms of Highfang 
  Peak. The chimney is never less than 20ft wide, and its walls are caked 
  with soot and slippery grease, making it nearly impossible to climb. A 
  successful Climb Walls check is needed at the beginning, middle, and 
  end of the climb to ascend the chimney.
  The Drift
  When characters enter the area of bones, they will disturb an 
  ancient magical effect called “the Drift,” a gentle reverse gravity-
  like field that causes bones to ‘fall’ slowly but steadily upward 
  to the roof of the passage, remain there for four or five minutes, 
  and then gently descend again. Characters who struggle against 
  the effect can remain grounded with a successful saving throw. 
  Characters who relax and let the effect take hold of them can ride 
  it as if they’re affected by a levitate spell. Going aloft makes them 
  easier targets for the bats, which get +2 to hit bonus when attacking 
  “drifting” targets. By using ropes with grapnel hooks, 10ft poles, 
  or just by pulling themselves along the walls and ceiling with their 
  hands, characters can reach various high ledges (varying from 7ft 
  wide to just over 2ft) that run along the passage walls. From these 
  ledges, they can fight giants in the passage and in the Fang Cavern, 
  beyond at giant-head-level.
  The Drift was established by magic long ago. Now it exists only 
  in a 40ft long stretch of the passage, as shown on the map. The 
  boundaries are ‘soft’. Characters who leave the Drift while aloft 
  don’t plummet to the ground but float gently down.
  
  95
  emeralds of highfang
  Three arch-topped, lockless, giant-sized doors of fitted, sculpted stone 
  are set into the back wall of this cavern, spaced well apart. The doors 
  swing into this cavern when opened.
  The door on the left leads to a huge hot cavern where the fire giants live, 
  the one in the center to a privy, and the one on the right opens into a long 
  passage that penetrates deeper into Highfang Peak. The tunnels behind 
  these three doors are all linked, about 70ft in, by a cross-passage.
  The fire giants all have crimson beards and eyebrows and jet-black hair. 
  They wear well-oiled black armor over hide jerkins and breeches, and 
  have armored boots and black metal open-face helms. They are:
  • Horlond (awake, on duty, winning at stoneguard, jovial): Paunchy 
  and the possessor of a wide smile, large and merry eyes, and crooked 
  teeth; over his armor, wears a baldric with three metal knives (to humans, 
  two-handed swords) ranged down it in sheaths with pommel straps (loops 
  of thick leather sewn to the baldric, that the pommels of the knives are 
  confined within, to help keep them falling free of the sheaths), pouch sewn 
  to baldric under chin that contains scrap muslin sacks of 17 gp, 33 sp, and 
  12 cp. Horlond’s principal weapon is his two-handed sword, scabbarded 
  at his hip.
  • Marl (awake, on duty, losing at stoneguard, testy): Broad-shouldered 
  and burly (even for a giant), with an ugly slab of a face and a flattened 
  nose (looking rather like the stone faces of real-world Easter Island); 
  garbed and equipped identically to Horlond, two-handed sword and all, 
  except that Marl’s pouch holds sacks containing 6gp, 14sp, and 27cp (he 
  loses at stoneguard a lot).
  • Haelath (awake, cooking, slow and methodical): Handsome for a fire 
  giant, with weathered features and a perpetually stern expression; garbed 
  and equipped identically to Horlond, but his helm, sword, armor, baldric, 
  and jerkin lie in a neat pile on the bench by the table. Haelath’s pouch 
  contains sacks of 22gp, 4sp, and 11cp.
  • Gararl (awake, cutting up vegetables and fetching spices from a row 
  of jars along two neat ledges carved into the wall): Ugly and with snarled, 
  curly, light-hued hair and a nose that was badly broken in the past; garbed 
  and equipped identically to Haelath, his helm, sword, armor, baldric, and 
  jerkin lie in a neat pile on the bench by the table beside Haelath’s. Gararl’s 
  pouch contains sacks of 8gp, 29sp, and 15cp.
  • Kalikh (asleep on the floor to one side of the cavern, wrapped in a 
  dusty blanket of many sewn-together overlapped hides, initially hidden 
  from characters by stalagmites unless characters are up on a wall ledge): 
  Hook-nosed, scar-faced (cut by at least two swords), and ugly to start 
  with, Kalikh has a sour, sarcastic disposition to match his looks; garbed 
  and equipped identically to Haelath (except that his boots are off, and 
  standing beside his gently snoring head); his helm, sword, armor, baldric, 
  and jerkin, wrapped in a second blanket, serve him as his pillow.
  • Loruth (asleep on the floor to one side of the cavern, wrapped in a 
  blanket, initially hidden from characters by stalagmites unless characters 
  are up on a wall ledge): Youngest of the giants and with a handsome baby 
  face and soft-hued brown hair and eyes; garbed and equipped identically 
  to Kalikh; boots off and helm, sword, armor, baldric, and jerkin, wrapped 
  in a second blanket, serving as his pillow.
  (If the characters never learn the names and traits of these giants, you 
  can use them to flesh out any other fire giants encountered later in their 
  explorations.)
  The giants are likely to catch sight of anyone walking along the wall 
  ledges, which are near their typical eye level. It is also a habit for them 
  to frequently glance down the passage to Area 3 (toward the hill giant 
  sentinels). The slope of that passage, however, could enable a human or 
  halfling-sized creature crawling on the floor to reach the lip without being 
  seen. From there, any intruder will note the stony forest of lopped-off 
  stalagmites that begins, on the intruder’s left, right where the passage 
  enters the large cavern. Quiet, stealthy characters who crawl up the 
  passage and immediately slip into the field of stalagmites have a good 
  chance to avoid being noticed by the fire giants.
  All six fire giants, like most of their kind, are expert rock hurlers. Just 
  because this cavern has been cleared of loose rocks doesn’t mean they 
  don’t have things they can throw: on the floor behind the bench are stacks 
  of stone platters (two piles of eight each) and plates (five stacks of twelve 
  each). These platters and plates are thrown just like stones but cause less 
  damage (4d6).
  Area 5: Hot Cavern
  From the door, a 20ft wide irregular passage (a natural cleft, long ago 
  chiseled wider) runs 60ft into the solid rock of Highfang Peak before it 
  is joined by a side passage to the right. Beyond that junction, the tunnel 
  continues for 80ft more until it opens out into this huge cavern, where the 
  majority of the fire giants of Highfang dwell.
  Mindful of the possible wrath of the dragon, the giants, who are all of 
  the Narlohrind tribe, have brought no children or pregnant tribal members 
  to Highfang. There are elders and wives, not just male fire giants in the 
  prime of life. Counting the 6 guards in the Fang Cavern (Area 4), 38 fire 
  giants reside in Highfang. When not working the quarry or forges, on 
  guard duty, or cooking or dining, they dwell here. 
  At any given time, the typical job roster for the fire giants has 4 giants 
  cooking, 6 working the quarry, 6 on guard duty, 2 at the forge, and 6 in 
  the mill, leaving 14 giants in this room. If weakened characters try to hide 
  or take refuge here, you might decide that 12 of the 14 have gone to dine.
  Aside from 16 young mothers and children dwelling in deep magma-
  warmed caves far from Highfang, these Narlohrind are the last remnants 
  of a once numerous and powerful fire giant tribe that was almost wiped 
  out in a terrible war with frost giants. Facing extermination and desperate, 
  they agreed to serve the red dragon Haeraglondrar in return for the wyrm’s 
  protection. Thus far, they haven’t regretted doing so.
  The ranking tribal elder is Klarrouth, who stands a head taller than the 
  other fire giants, 12 HD with maximum hit points of 96, and wears two 
  two-handed swords, one scabbarded on a baldric down his back and one 
  scabbarded at his hip. He wears the same armor and helm as his fellow 
  Narlohrind. Klarrouth is a veteran tactician who is far less hot-tempered 
  and more prudent and far-sighted than most fire giants, and he has little 
  time for flattery, courtesy or deference.
  This cavern was named for its warmth, which fire giants find comfortably 
  hot (and most other races consider uncomfortably so). The warmth comes 
  from magma flows beneath the floor and behind the western wall of the 
  cavern.
  The northern, western, and southern walls of the room have been dug 
  out to form stone bed-shelves for the giants. Rows of small cubbyholes 
  at floor level are used for storage. In these the giants keep changes of 
  clothing and footwear, dice and cards for idle time, walking sticks, vials 
  of oil and sharpening stones for the maintenance of their weapons, tools, 
  armor, sewing kits, and the rest of their belongings.
  This cavern was once two smaller side-by-side caves, but the wall 
  between them was carved down to form two immobile benches with 
  backs, with a stone table (a continuous pedestal that supports a tabletop, 
  all carved out of solid, unbroken stone) between them. These occupy the 
  center of the cavern.
  A dozen braziers of welded metal fashioned by the fire giants stand 
  around the room. They each have a 5ft square metal base supporting a 
  15ft tall straight metal column about as thick around as an average adult 
  human’s thigh, topped by a stone bowl with a 1ft high lip that holds sarduik 
  (subterranean fish oil) about 8 inches deep, in which floats a flaming wick. 
  These braziers give off more smoke than heat and more heat than light, but 
  their massed effect in this cavern is bright and hot.
  The air stinks of sarduik, a smell like overheated copper, underlaid 
  by fire giant sweat, which smells like overheated, impure iron. It is hot 
  enough to make humans sweat after a few seconds of exposure. After two 
  minutes or so, a typical humanoid is slick with sweat, and starts to feel the 
  effects of heat exhaustion causing a –4 to hit, damage, and saves.
  Area 6: Fire Giant Kitchen
  From Area 5, a 20ft wide passage bends and twists a further 120ft back 
  into the rocky heart of the mountain, then opens out into this combined 
  kitchen and larder.
  The back of this cave is a huge roasting hearth containing three parallel, 
  horizontal metal spits, each held up on its own pair of metal stands. The 
  30ft long spits rest in a “Y” at the top of a 15ft tall vertical column welded 
  
  96
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  
  97
  emeralds of highfang
  to a 10ft square base; each spit has a pointed end and a “T” end with 
  crossbar handles. In a pinch, the spits can be used as improvised spears 
  by the giants.
  Above the hearth is a natural chimney extending up through Highfang 
  Peak to the sky above. It rises 210ft beyond the 60ft height of the cavern, 
  to emerge between two pinnacles of one of the rising arms of Highfang 
  Peak. The chimney is 30ft in diameter and the walls are caked with soot 
  and slippery grease, making it nearly impossible to climb. A successful 
  Climb Walls check is needed at the beginning, middle, and end of the 
  climb to ascend the chimney.
  On the right side of the cavern is a larder consisting of twenty huge 
  sacks of flour (each sack is three times the size of an average adult 
  human and weighs close to a ton); eighteen barrels of sarduik (whole 
  fish, orange and eyeless, naturally blind, and exuding their own oil; each 
  barrel weighs well over a ton, and they have been sealed on the outside by 
  being dipped in mortar that coats them with crumbling concrete that they 
  constantly shed as deposits of grit). Thirty-five iron hooks are hammered 
  into the rocky ceiling, where hang the smoked carcasses of everything 
  from wolves to captured humans to horses to cattle. If any characters are 
  captured, they are likely to be hung up by their ankles from these hooks, 
  alive, until Klarrouth gets around to questioning them. When characters 
  see first see this cavern, only five hooks are empty.
  At the end of the larder, the cavern sidewall vanishes behind a ceiling-
  high stack of split firewood that covers much of the cavern walls.
  The left-hand wall of the cavern is home to a stone shelf or counter 
  where many large, soot-covered skillets sit, alongside blackened iron 
  cooking racks for placing over the spits, above the hearth. The shelf ends 
  before the hearth begins, and in the space between stand a sarduik oil 
  press and two empty sarduik barrels used as trash cans. Characters might 
  not immediately recognize the press for what it is. The device resembles 
  an enormous metal hinge with drainholes in the bottom plate. It’s welded 
  to four legs that straddle a square catch-bucket with a pour spout. Oil is 
  squeezed from fish into the bucket, then poured into the braziers. On close 
  inspection, characters will see the orange fish scales and clotted blood 
  coating the press.
  In the center of the room is a stone dining table with stone benches on 
  both sides. Unlike those in the Hot Cavern (Area 5), these were not carved 
  in place from the solid bedrock. They were instead carved elsewhere and 
  brought into this room.
  Area 7: Giants’ Privy
  The reek from this open latrine isn’t bad, because it drains into a magma 
  flow far beneath that chars everything that goes down it. The privy consists 
  of two adjacent caverns at the end of the passage, one for females and one 
  for males. Flushing is done by buckets of water, a dozen of which line 
  either side of the wall dividing the two caverns. The privy likely is empty 
  when characters investigate it.
  Area 8: Inner Passage
  This natural crevice is chiseled out to form a tunnel 40ft wide and 70ft 
  high. The irregular walls are studded with small storage niches at waist to 
  shoulder height for a giant. The giants keep things such as unlit oil lamps 
  on them. None of the niches joins with the ledges or “go anywhere,” so 
  although a stealthy humanoid could hide here, the niches are of little use 
  for traversing the length of the passage by avoiding the floor. The passage 
  descends slightly as it travels some 400ft from the Fang Cavern (Area 4) 
  to the Emerald Mine (Area 9).
  This passage is trapped starting 10ft beyond the door from the Fang 
  Cavern. Weight of 40lbs or more on the floor causes a block to fall from 
  the ceiling (4d6 bludgeoning damage; save avoids). The giants simply 
  hold the block in place with their hands over their heads as they pass; once 
  they step off the trigger plate, the block is again locked in place.
  The trap can be spotted with a successful Delicate Tasks & Traps check, 
  or automatically if someone sees a giant walking through the passage. 
  The floor plate and the ceiling block are rather obvious, as such things 
  go, but they fill the full width of the passage and extend for 20ft, making 
  them difficult to avoid. When the trap is triggered, the stone block drops 
  from the ceiling on a chain; the chain halts the blocks 6in above the floor. 
  The rattling chain give plenty of warning that a trap has been triggered, 
  and the long drop of the stone accounts for the avoidance saving throw. 
  If, however, characters are burdened in a way that prevents them from 
  quickly exiting the 20ft long danger space —if they’re carrying heavy 
  sacks of dragon loot or the body of a fallen comrade, for example — they 
  have a –4 penalty on this saving throw.
  Area 9: Emerald Mine
  The passage intersects here with a dark gray vein rich in emeralds, 
  which the giants have been digging out for the dragon for a year or so—
  until they encountered a problem they haven’t yet summoned up the 
  courage to tell the dragon about. Klarrouth is pondering starting a side 
  tunnel from the upper reaches of this cavern to dig around the problem, 
  but he fears the dragon will suspect the giants of stealing emeralds if they 
  dig for any length of time without yielding up more gems. If the vein is as 
  narrow as it looks to be, a side tunnel will traverse a long stretch of gem-
  free bedrock. So no giants will be found at work here.
  The inner passage (Area 8) crosses a huge, giant-dug cavern before 
  vanishing into a tunnel mouth on the other side. The crossing is 120ft 
  long, with a ceiling 120ft up, and the passage running on from the cavern 
  is 45ft wide by 70ft tall. To the right of someone entering the mine cavern 
  from the inner passage, the mine has a level floor that and extends only 
  100ft, narrowing toward its end.
  To the left of such a traveler, the mine cavern descends steeply and 
  is almost 100ft wide; it ends 80ft below the floor level of the passage. 
  Torches and lanterns won’t illuminate the far end of the cavern from the 
  passage, and even most creatures with darkvision can’t see that far.
  At the lower left end, the diggings broke through into an ancient 
  cavern that suffered a ceiling collapse long ago, entombing an iron 
  golem on its back under tons of boulders and stone rubble. The giants 
  uncovered its head, chest, and one arm, and in doing so—as it perceives 
  — “attacked” it with their prybars, picks, and hammers. Its ancient 
  instructions, given to it by a long dead and forgotten mage, were to 
  defend the cavern against intruders, and it still considers that its mission. 
  It belched poison gas onto the giants trying to dig it loose and fought 
  them with its free arm.
  Golem, Iron: HD 16 (80hp); AC 3[16]; Atk fist (4d10); Move 6; 
  Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 17/3500; Special: +3 or better weapon 
  required to hit, healed by fire, immune to most magic, 
  poison gas (1/turn, 10ft cloud, save or die), slowed by 
  lightning for 3 rounds.
   
  The giants retreated, leaving the golem lying there, trapped on its 
  back beneath the rubble as it had been for ages. Since then, it is ever-so-
  slowly digging itself free by clawing with its one arm. Its head, chest, left 
  shoulder, and left side down to its waist are now bare; its right shoulder 
  and side, sword arm, and its lower body are still pinned.
  Characters entering the mine won’t at first see the golem, which is 
  lying still, in the dark, with its face turned toward the passage (facing 
  the approaching characters). Its upper arm lies flat and motionless on the 
  rubble, but bent 90 degrees at the elbow so the forearm points straight 
  up, its hand balled into a fist. The iron golem looks like a full-body suit 
  of black plate armor, with a full-face helm pierced only by two thin, dark 
  ““eye”  slits above four vertical “breathing”slits.
  The moment anyone gets within 10ft of it, the golem exhales a cloud 
  of poison gas. If any character gets closer, it lashes out with its arm in a 
  sideways punch.
  No one who gets within 50ft of the golem fails to notice that a dozen 
  raw, uncut emeralds as large as a dwarf’s fist are heaped on its chest. They 
  were gathered there by the golem as it lay in the darkness. ; its orders tell it 
  not to damage emeralds). Uncut, each is worth about 200gp; once expertly 
  cut and polished, each would be worth 4d4x100gp. 
  
  98
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  Area 10: Quarry
  The passage from the Emerald Mine crosses one end of a vast cavern 
  where the fire giants are quarrying out large, rectangular blocks of stone 
  for the Mill (Area 12). The ceiling of this cavern is studded with the 
  broken-off roots of stalactites, and the floor is entirely smooth where 
  block after block has been removed. The fire giants are neat, methodical 
  stonecutters.
  At work in the quarry, as far away from the passage crossing as it is 
  possible to get, are 6 fire giants without helms, armor, or swords, but 
  armed with mattocks, hammers, picks, and huge prybars that they swing 
  like two-handed swords. 
  Giant, Fire (6): HD 11+1d4hp; HP 54, 60, 52, 50, 58, 48; AC 
  4[15]; Atk two-handed sword (5d6); Move 12; Save 4; AL C; 
  CL/XP 12/2000; Special: immune to fire, hurl boulders (5d6 
  damage).
  If the giants notice intruders, they rush to attack. One giant tries to 
  thunder past the characters and on down the passage toward Area 11 
  to warn the dragon. After past incidents, the dragon has issued firm “no 
  exceptions” orders to the giants that it is to be informed of the presence 
  of any sentient intruders or large and dangerous creatures of any kind. 
  Characters pursuing the giant see that it races past Areas 11 and 12 to 
  Area 13, where it first stammers, hems, and haws for several moments 
  before finally blurting out a warning about “humans in our halls.” The 
  dragon is asleep, so the giant’s first attempt at a message awakens it, but it 
  doesn’t hear the message properly. A fast-moving character who uses the 
  side opening to get into the speaking tube can completely block the giant’s 
  second attempt, so all the dragon hears is muffled rumblings. It assumes 
  it is hearing the mumblings of a drunken giant rather than a warning and 
  goes back to sleep, now in a sour mood.
  If characters don’t stop the giant before it reaches Area 13 or block its 
  message, they’ll likely reap the consequences in Area 11.
  Unbeknownst even to the giants, a mimic has crept into this cavern 
  from the wilds of Highfang. It is posing as part of the rough stone around 
  the edges of the cavern, near the passage crossing, where the giants 
  haven’t yet gone in their cutting. It will stalk characters if it gets the 
  chance, drawing closer (as a stone) when it thinks it isn’t being watched. 
  Mimic: HD 7; HP 42; AC 6[13]; Atk smash (2d6 plus glue); 
  Move 2; Save 9; AL N; CL/XP 8/800; Special: glue (victim 
  stuck and immobile), mimicry. (Monstrosities 329)
  If characters defeat or drive off the giants and then decide to sleep or 
  rest here, the mimic becomes immobile and waits until the maximum 
  number of characters are asleep, or when it can catch someone alone, 
  before it attacks. If characters suddenly move to depart, it immediately 
  attacks the rearmost character.
  Area 11: Forge
  A side-passage branches off the inner passage to the left. This tunnel 
  is 45ft wide by 70ft high, and it runs 80ft (descending slightly) before 
  opening into a natural cavern 100ft across and 140ft long. The air in 
  this chamber stinks of hot metal, and is hot enough to make humans 
  sweat after only a few seconds of exposure. After two minutes or so, a 
  typical humanoid is slick with sweat, and starts to feel the effects of heat 
  exhaustion causing a –4 to hit, damage, and saves.
  The heat in this cavern comes from a hole in its western wall, farthest 
  from the passage, which opens into a magma flow. Magma slides slowly 
  and endlessly past this cavern, from right to left as seen by someone 
  standing facing the hole.
  This “hot hole” serves the fire giants as a forge fire. They work here 
  
  99
  emeralds of highfang
  
  100
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  with tongs, hammers, and long iron bars that end in flat paddles, moving 
  continually between the hole and a gigantic, scarred, flat-topped slab of 
  nickel-iron (“starmetal,” a fallen meteor) that serves them as an anvil. The 
  fire giants forge, repair, and temper their weapons and mining tools (picks, 
  hammers, mattocks, and prybars).
  When characters first peer into it, 2 fire giants (see Area 10 for stats), 
  including Toroth, the fire giants’ most talented smith, are working the 
  forge.
  This cavern has a small but almost straight natural chimney to the 
  surface, a 170ft vertical shaft that begins as a 10ft diameter hole in the 
  center of the ceiling in the side passage that links the forge cavern with 
  the inner passage (Area 8).
  If characters were spotted in the quarry (Area 10) and a giant fled 
  from there and alerted the dragon, then while characters are scouting or 
  exploring this chamber, the dragon leaves its bed and is sitting on a lesser 
  pinnacle of Highfang right beside this chimney, listening intently. If it 
  hears talking or whispering that isn’t coming from a giant (the dragon 
  can easily tell the difference, and the chimney acts like a megaphone for 
  sounds from below), it breathes fire down the chimney. The chute confines 
  and focuses the flames so they reach past the bottom of the shaft and 
  flood out into a 30ft stretch of the side-passage centered on the shaft. All 
  creatures in this area take 77 points of fire damage, or half that with a 
  successful save.
  Area 12: Mill
  The Inner Passage branches to the left in another side passage 60ft 
  wide, 70ft high, and 100ft long, with a smooth, downward-sloping ramp 
  for a floor that is worn slippery-smooth by the endlessly repeated passage 
  of something that created two parallel grooves or “slides” (which are 
  sized more like troughs). The cavern descends and widens out into a long 
  chamber. A deep, ceaseless, rumbling, groaning sound comes up from 
  below, overlaid fairly often by high-pitched screechings.
  A character who sets foot in either groove in the floor must make a 
  saving throw; failure indicates the character slips, falls, and slides 
  helplessly down the groove, for the full length of the passage, alerting the 
  giants in the mill space below. 
  A strong, steady breeze blows from the passage down into this cavern; 
  the rumbling and screechings would be much louder throughout other 
  areas inside Highfang if it didn’t.
  This cavern has been denuded of stalactites and stalagmites. It houses 
  the main coin-earning industry the fire giants are running for the dragon. 
  Characters who look down into this cavern from the side passage see an 
  underground spring gushing high out of the cavern wall on their right, 
  at the end of the cavern. It plunges into the buckets of an undershot mill 
  wheel made of welded iron, mounted sideways to the observer on a 
  massive stone axle. The turning wheel is the source of the rumbling sound, 
  as it turns endlessly under the goad of the constant fall of water.
  A metal axle protrudes from the wheel to jut into the room, where it 
  powers a spinning, tapered-point cutting drill. Working in the chamber 
  are 6 fire giants (see Area 10 for stats) who are manipulating one of the 
  blocks from the quarry by brute strength as the cutter slowly grinds away 
  at it.. Five giants are holding and turning the stone, while the sixth is using 
  a huge stone paddle to deflect some of the falling water onto the stone at 
  the spot where the cutter is at work, to cool the stone and wash away what 
  would otherwise be blinding clouds of rock dust.
  The giants are slowly transforming the rectangular blocks they quarried 
  in Area 10 into smooth, cylindrical stone columns. These are sold for cash 
  to merchants, who market them as roof supports for massive palaces and 
  public buildings.
  Finished columns are loaded onto high-sided sledges and dragged up 
  the slope out of this cavern and on to Area 15 by teams of captive ettins. 
  No ettins are in the mill cavern when characters first see it. Ettin teams 
  are brought here only when a sledge is filled with four columns securely 
  lashed into wooden cradles. At the moment, one sledge sits off to the side 
  of the milling area with just one finished column loaded. A glance at the 
  sledge confirms that this is what wore the grooves into the floor.
  Any character who examines the water wheel closely notices that the 
  side of the turning wheel nearest the wall has something welded to it: 
  metal fan blades that turn with the wheel, between it and the stone wall. 
  These blades drag air down into this cavern from the passage above to 
  push air through a tunnel behind the turning water wheel, in the cavern’s 
  end wall. This gently ascending tunnel is oval in cross-section, about 15ft 
  across and 30ft high, and carries fresh air up into the dragon’s lair (Area 
  19). This air channel is the stealthiest way into the lair.
  Area 13: Speaking Tube
  The passage widens here into a natural, rough-walled alcove, roughly 
  50ft long and 20ft wider than the rest of the passage, with the same 70ft 
  ceiling as the adjoining passage. Long ago, emerald delvers of much 
  smaller stature than the giants (probably dwarves) bored a long shaft high 
  up in one wall that ascends steadily into the Dragonslumber Cavern (Area 
  19) of the dragon’s lair. 
  It is currently used as a speaking tube; the pipe amplifies what the giants 
  shout, speak, or whisper into it, so the dragon can hear them clearly in its 
  lair. If a giant flees from the quarry to here, he will use the speaking tube 
  to warn the dragon. The speaking tube’s creators also cut a second hole 
  into the wall below and to the left of the larger one the giants use. This 
  secondary hole connects to the main sound passage after a climb of about 
  15ft. A humanoid can fit through either one.
  The speaking shaft is not just a narrow crawlspace. It is 5ft tall and 3ft 
  wide; an adult human can squeeze through it easily, but can also block 
  it with their body, clothing, and gear sufficiently to muffle any sounds 
  coming through. Blocking the tube this way won’t stop all sounds, but it 
  will utterly garble any speech through the tube that is more complex than 
  single, short, simple words (such as “Help!”) shouted by a giant.
  Area 14: Ettin Pens
  This large, irregular, natural cavern contains a spare, empty sledge (a 
  duplicate of the one in Area 12) and a dozen massive cages made from 
  welded iron bars. Slave teams of captive ettins are kept imprisoned here, 
  three to a cage, permanently wearing welded iron harnesses. The room 
  reeks of ettin dung, which is heaped knee deep (to a human) throughout 
  the cages. Mixed in are the bones of the cattle carcasses thrown to the 
  ettins by their fire giant captors.
  The giants select ettins when needed and drag them out, one by one, 
  clip their harnesses together by means of the rings that are part of each 
  harness, beat any uncooperative ettins into near-senseless submission, 
  then drag the assembled teams to Area 12, hitch them to a loaded sledge, 
  and force them to drag the tons of stone up the steep slope and to Area 15.
  Area 15: Raft Sally Port
  Here the Inner Passage turns left and descends, to end in this large 
  cavern studded with the stumps of broken-off stalactites and stalagmites. 
  From where the passage turns to where it enters the wider cavern is a 
  descent of 20ft. The walls, floors, and ceiling are made of smooth stone 
  blocks with large seams between them. The floor is paved with 10ft long 
  paving stones, and the ceiling and walls are covered with 4ft square blocks.
  Several small springs weep down the walls of this cavern and join 
  together in a pool where a dozen rafts wait. Each raft is fitted with a trio 
  of wooden cradles into which a single stone column can be lashed. The 
  giants push loaded rafts out into the pool and let the current flowing from 
  the pool carry the columns downriver to human merchants in the Domain 
  of Hawkmoon who work for the dragon.
  Spare cradles, rope for lashing (as thick around as small barrels, to a 
  human; a very short length of rope could serve as flotation for one person), 
  a cleaver (treat as two-handed sword) for lopping off lengths of rope, and 
  the chopping block that the cleaver rests in, all wait here for the giants’ use.
  The descending stretch of the Inner Passage into this cavern is fitted with 
  traps and guarded by a portcullis, to keep intruders out and enslaved ettins in.
  
  101
  emeralds of highfang
  
  102
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  
  103
  emeralds of highfang
  The first trap (from the viewpoint of someone entering the chamber, 
  moving east to west) is located just where the Inner Passage completes 
  its turn and starts to descend. An obvious button for deactivating the trap 
  can be seen in the ceiling; it is easily reachable by a fire giant, but anyone 
  else must climb the wall and somehow cross 30ft of ceiling to reach it. If 
  someone moves through this area without pressing the button, a row of 
  iron stakes springs out from the walls and the ceiling 10ft farther on. The 
  stakes imperil a 30ft long stretch of passage and the trigger is in the final 
  10ft, so many characters might be in the area when the trap goes off if 
  they are sticking close together. The spikes spring out from the seams in 
  the walls and ceiling to their full length. The ceiling spikes drop 65ft, so 
  someone less than 5ft tall in the danger area will be safe from them. The 
  wall spikes thrust out far enough so that they leave only a 1ft wide safe 
  lane between their points. Pushing the button sets off audible whirring and 
  ticking sounds (cogs spinning behind the stone). The sound continues for 
  five minutes, during which time the trap is safe; then it resets with a loud 
  click (2d20 piercing damage to everyone in the area; save half).
  The second trap is a 30ft deep pit that fills the corridor from side to 
  side, covered with a hinged lid that blends seamlessly with the real floor. 
  Pushing a specific spot on the wall locks the lid closed for five minutes. 
  The spot is discolored by grease and soot from the fire giants’ hands, so it 
  can be noticed with a successful secret doors check. When a body strikes 
  the floor of the pit, a puff of poison gas is released from the floor (3d6 
  falling damage plus poison; save avoids).
  The third trap is similar to the trap in Area 8. It consists of a pressure 
  plate and ceiling sections concealing spike-studded stone block on a chain. 
  The stone plummets down, imperiling a 20ft stretch of passage across its 
  entire width. This trap is better hidden; it can be spotted with a successful 
  secret doors check. The rattling chain gives plenty of warning that a trap 
  has been triggered, and the long drop of the stone accounts for the relatively 
  easy avoidance saving throw. If, however, characters are burdened in a way 
  that prevents them from quickly exiting the 20ft long danger space—if 
  they’re carrying heavy sacks of dragon loot or the body of a fallen comrade, 
  or if they’re trying to move up the slope rather than down — they have –4 
  penalty on this saving throw (7d6 bludgeoning damage; save avoids).
  Finally, a portcullis can close off the passage at the bottom of the slope 
  where it opens into the cavern. It is made of massive welded iron bars 
  in a lattice with 1ft square openings. Heavy gouge marks can be seen 
  readily on the floor where the portcullis slams when it drops, and the 
  portcullis itself is not camouflaged against the ceiling. On both side walls, 
  just east of where the portcullis drops, there are two identical, unmarked 
  buttons, one above the other (two on the north wall and two on the south 
  wall). The upper button on both walls causes the portcullis to winch itself 
  back up into the ceiling (noisily, by clockwork). The lower button on the 
  south wall causes the portcullis to crash down immediately, whereas the 
  lower button on the north hand wall causes the portcullis to stay up for 15 
  minutes before dropping (a ticking sound can be heard if characters are 
  quiet). It can still be dropped instantly by pushing the button on the south 
  wall. Jamming a normal weapon or tool into the wall below the portcullis 
  won’t accomplish anything other than destroying the tool if the portcullis 
  drops; it is far too heavy to be held up by anything smaller than giant-sized 
  implements, and large ones at that. 
  The Dragon’s Lair
  The red dragon Haeraglondrar (which is an “it” to the giants, not a he or 
  she) is an adult red dragon, a “she” masquerading as a “he” in all dealings 
  with nondragons. Although Haeraglondrar is every bit as arrogant and vain 
  as others of her kind, her world-view is that accepting her superiority as a 
  given means that she shouldn’t waste her time preening and doing nothing, 
  nor in assailing lesser creatures (including other red dragons) to take what 
  they have amassed, when she could be fulfilling her innate superiority by 
  creating wealth for her hoard and at the same time steadily increasing her 
  influence and dominance among nondragons by trading with them.
  So she treats with the most sly, enterprising, and energetic human 
  merchants, to sell emeralds (in tiny amounts, to discerning buyers, firmly 
  controlling supply and therefore maintaining high prices) and stone 
  building columns. She will pounce on, slay, and plunder the wealth of 
  merchants who try to swindle or deceive her, of course.
  Haeraglondrar won’t hesitate to use violence when it seems the best 
  tactic, but prefers to know what talents and expertise she’s destroying, rather 
  than slaying first and discovering what she’s lost and wasted afterward. 
  She has a healthy respect for adventurers, and she will happily avoid 
  direct battle with them when she can use the properties of her lair and 
  the strengths of her underlings to reduce or even shatter such potentially 
  dangerous foes for her.
  At the center of Highfang Peak is the caldera or bowl-shaped heart of 
  the slumbering volcano, where the giants keep a herd of cattle as food for 
  themselves and for the dragon.
  Area 16: Dead Dragon Cave
  This large natural cavern is a forest of stalactites and stalagmites, many 
  of which have joined into stone columns that stretch unbroken from the 
  irregular stone floor to the jagged stone ceiling.
  The mouth of the cave is the lowest end of the cavern. Water that 
  percolates through the stone and drips down the many stone “teeth” here 
  drains out through the cave opening, into the central caldera of Highfang 
  Peak, in a trickle that keeps the rockface perpetually wet and slick. The 
  entrance is a huge, irregular opening large enough for Haeraglondrar to fly 
  through with wings fully spread. Such openness means the front cavern is 
  difficult to defend, so it’s never a preferred spot for Haeraglondrar to rest 
  or bide time, particularly in cold or wet weather.
  Intruders wanting to enter the dragon’s lair from the caldera, or vice 
  versa, need to climb about 80ft of rock face. Despite the trickling water, it’s 
  an easy climb thanks to plentiful ledges, handholds, and crevices—unless, 
  of course, an angry dragon on the wing catches an intruder in mid-ascent.
  The most striking feature in this area fills the smooth floor at the center 
  of the cavern: the charred skeleton of a white dragon. Haeraglondrar 
  defeated and slew this wyrm long ago to claim this lair. She left the 
  carcass here both as a trophy and to lull intruders into wondering whether 
  the dragon that lived here has already perished. The skeleton is burned and 
  strategically crushed to make it almost impossible to confirm what type 
  of dragon it was; a successful difficult intelligence check (4d6 vs. score) 
  is needed to identify the bones as having been a white dragon rather than 
  some other kind. 
  The skeleton lies twisted amid a deep drift of black ash. Visible in the 
  depths of these ashes is a ruby-red glow. Upon closer examination it can 
  be seen to be a faceted, clear gemstone as large as a human’s head, and 
  the glow is coming from within it! This gemstone is an illusion, and it’s 
  part of a magic fire trap that’s triggered by touching, poking, lassoing, 
  or otherwise moving the gem through mundane or magical means (20ft 
  radius; 8d8 fire damage; save half).
  A family of 4 giant bats roost on high ledges near the cavern ceiling. 
  They swoop to attack anything smaller than a giant that examines the 
  dragon skeleton or that passes through the central area of the cavern floor. 
  The bats are jet black with blazing red eyes, large fangs, long tails, and 
  wide black leathery wings that make them resemble manta rays, though 
  they are simply a rare subspecies of bat. They shriek as they attack, their 
  wide and many-fanged maws gaping wide. These cries are so high-
  pitched that they are like needles in the ears of those nearby, but are almost 
  inaudible more than 70ft away. 
  The bats attack characters to slay and feed, but flee to high ledges or out 
  into the caldera if injured to 6 hit points or less. The death or retreat of one 
  bat retreating would not affect the others.
  Bat, Giant (4): HD 4; HP 24, 20, 18, 22; AC 7[12]; Atk bite 
  (1d10); Move 4 (fly 18); Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: 
  10% chance of disease.
  Warm, fouled water with a strong mineral aftertaste collects in several 
  small, shallow pools scattered across the cavern. Intruders who drink this 
  water will vomit it in minutes. The “air duct” tunnel from area 12 opens 
  up in a corner of this cave, bringing a strong rush of air and the rumbling, 
  screeching din of the mill with it. 
  
  104
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  
  105
  emeralds of highfang
  The highest end of this cavern becomes a natural passage leading 
  farther into Highfang. This “Wyrmcrawl” passage is roughly oval, being 
  about 80ft wide and about 100ft high. Although it’s a natural tunnel, it 
  shows obvious claw gouges where the dragon enlarged it and smashed out 
  stalagmites and stalactites over the years.
  Area 17: Wyrmcrawl
  Whenever Haeraglondrar thinks there may be intruders in Highfang 
  (thanks to a warning from the giants or from hearing the sounds of fighting 
  or of intruders whispering through the air vent or speaking tube), the red 
  dragon goes on the defensive at the north end of this tunnel. When intruders 
  enter the passage, she retreats backward along the passage, watching the 
  intruders and casting phantasmal force and slow. She targets spellcasters 
  with both of her magic missile spells. Finally, mirror image and protection 
  from good are cast before the intruders reach Area 18.
  Area 18: The Spending Hoard
  This cavern, minus the dragon skeleton and the resident bats, is similar 
  in appearance and properties to the Dead Dragon Cave (Area 16), right 
  down to the shallow pools of water. Haeraglondrar retreats slowly through 
  this cavern, using the plentiful stone columns and stalagmites for cover, and 
  continue wearing intruders down with lair actions. Advancing characters 
  can’t help but notice a large alcove that opens to the left, where 30 sealed 
  chests are clustered. These are large, hooped, brassbound, locked chests 
  in the classic “pirate” style, all with end-handles and large enough that it 
  would take two strong people to carry them.
  These are one big trap. The chests are all locked and bolted (from 
  the inside) to the floor. The locks are intricate and sturdy; one can be 
  opened with a set of lock picks and a successful Open Locks check or 
  with a successful difficult strength check (4d6 vs. score,  2d6 if characters 
  use a prybar). Only one attempt can be made per chest, but there are 30 
  to work on. A thief who inspects one of the chests needs a successful 
  Delicate Tasks/Traps check at -20% penalty to notice the trap. If another 
  is checked, check with a normal chance.
  Raising the lid of just one chest releases the lids on all of them, allowing 
  the starving stirges inside (eight per chest, or 240 stirges in all!) to fly out. 
  Slamming a lid back down has no effect on any other lids. There is no 
  treasure here. Aside from the stirges, the chests are empty. 
  Stirge (240): HD 1+1; AC 7[12]; Atk proboscis (1d3 plus blood 
  drain); Move 3 (fly 18); Save 17; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: 
  +2 to hit bonus, blood drain (on hit, automatic 1d4 damage 
  per round). 
  At the far end of the cavern from the Wyrmcrawl, this cavern opens 
  directly into another vast cave: the Dragonslumber Cavern. The natural 
  archway between the two caverns has a floor of crushed and strewn stone 
  rubble, and a ceiling of jagged stalactites.
  It, too, is a trap, which Haeraglondrar can trigger at will, causing the 
  stalactites to plunge to the floor. She triggers this trap when the characters 
  she judges most formidable are passing through the archway. If the dragon 
  thinks the intruding characters are powerful and largely unscathed, she 
  uses her fire breath on them at the same time. The trap can be noticed 
  with a successful secret doors check (or Delicate Tasks/Traps if better) 
  under normal circumstances; if the check is made in the midst of a battle 
  against the dragon, thief characters have a chance of noticing it. (10d6 
  bludgeoning damage; save avoids) 
  Area 19: Dragonslumber Cavern
  This large, irregular natural cavern has been cleared of stalagmites and 
  stalactites. Even their broken-off stumps have been worn down and smoothed 
  over the years. The ancient red dragon Haeraglondrar customarily 
  slumbers here on a heap of gold and silver coins (39,667gp in all).
  Haeraglondrar (Large Ancient Red Dragon): HD 11; HP 88; 
  AC 2[17]; Atk 2 claws (1d8), bite (3d10); Move 9 (fly 24); 
  Save 4; AL C; CL/XP 24/5600 ; Special: breathe fire (3/day, 
  90ft long, 30ft wide cone, 88 damage, save half), spells MU 
  (3/2/1).
  Spells: 1st—protection from good, magic missile (x2), 
  2nd—mirror image, phantasmal force; 3rd—slow.
  The cavern floor has been graved with claw marks to divide it into 
  more-or-less regular 10ft squares. Some of these lines bisect the roots of 
  shorn stalagmites. By counting lines, any intruder can see at a glance that 
  this cavern is big — large enough for the dragon to move with ease, slap 
  with its tail, spread its wings, and so on. Another huge, dark opening at 
  the rear of the cavern suggests that there’s another cave beyond this one.
  The dragon naps lightly, awakening in an instant if voices come up the 
  speaking tube from Area 13 that opens in one corner of this cavern.
  Atop her heap of coins, one of the dragon’s hindclaws dangles down an 
  open “well” amid the coins, where it rests on a final trap control. By means 
  of it, Haeraglondrar can open any 10ft square on the surrounding floor in 
  a 20ft wide oval ring all around the heap of coins, plus a 30ft wide swath 
  of floor leading from that ring to the mouth of the passage from Area 18. 
  Every one of these 10ft sections covers a pit trap. The fact that the floor is 
  trapped can be noticed with a careful inspection and a successful Delicate 
  Tasks/Traps check. (4d6 bludgeoning damage; save avoids the fall)
  Haeraglondrar loves her treasure but not to the point that she will die for 
  it. If she judges the characters too formidable after she’s worn them down 
  on the way here, tried to catch them in these pit traps, and breathed fire on 
  them a few times, she’ll shift her effort to flying away. The intruders will 
  need time to pack up all this treasure, after all, and she might be able to 
  get it back soon by arranging a second battle more to her liking. Perched 
  on a promontory on Highfang, she can swoop down on the characters at 
  her leisure while they are climbing down the cliff at the entrance or rafting 
  away on the river. Anyone who plunders her hoard must die, but she is 
  patient. She is vain and greedy, but not stupid or suicidal.
  Area 20: Hoard Cavern
  This small, innermost cavern is veiled by a curtain of darkness: a 
  magical field of chill air that drinks all light, permitting no radiance to 
  pass through and no light to function within it. The curtain also confines 
  2 giant bats inside its area of effect. They are ravenous, and will swoop 
  at and viciously attack any creature other than the dragon that enters the 
  50ft thick curtain. 
  Bat, Giant (2): HD 4; HP 22, 24; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d10); 
  Move 4 (fly 18); Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: 10% 
  chance of disease.
  The veil also magically foils all teleport, dimension door, and similar 
  translocation magic through it and into or out of Area 20.
  Beyond the veil lies the dragon’s real hoard: a huge heap of coins 
  and gems (450 rubies, each worth 2000gp; 144,000gp; 210,000sp; and 
  1,600cp that the dragon didn’t bother to throw away while sorting out 
  more valuable coins. 
  Around the entire heap is an ominous fence: a continuous ring of human 
  bones, all jumbled together and including scraps of rusty armor, weapons, 
  and adventuring gear (but no magic items).
  Two items float above the heap: a ragged, dirty, moth-eaten purple 
  cloak floats upright, obviously empty, and a smooth, ovoid stone nearly as 
  large as a person’s palm that gives off a soft, beige glow. The gem appears 
  to be lighting the entire cavern with dim light: an illumination radius of 
  more than 250ft!
  Neither of these floating items responds to the presence of intruders.
  The stone is simply an ordinary, polished stone on which has been cast a 
  modified continual light spell. With the proper housing, it could be useful 
  as a lantern or a signaling device. Its light can’t be dimmed or quenched 
  
  106
  Quests of Doom: giants & dragons
  by magical means, but it can be shrouded by metal, wood, or heavy cloth. 
  It illuminates a radius of 300ft with dim light, and it can be seen as a soft, 
  beige speck in the darkness for many miles.
  The cloak looks like cloth, but anyone who touches it immediately 
  understands that it is actually a suit of armor. It is leather armor of the 
  shadows, highly useful to thieves or anyone else with stealthy intentions. 
  The armor acts as +2 leather armor, with the added benefit that the wearer 
  can double Hide in Shadows percentile chance.
  This precious hoard is not unguarded. The ring of bones animates if 
  disturbed or crossed over, rising in a whirling cloud of bones that quickly 
  resolves into 18 skeletons wearing the scraps of armor and wielding 
  the rusty weapons intermingled with the bones. These skeletons are not 
  undead, so they cannot be turned or destroyed by clerics. Rather, they are 
  animated objects. Treat them in every way as animated armor, except for 
  how you describe them to players. 
  Skeleton (Animated Armor) (18): HD 3; HP 18 each; AC 3[16]; 
  Atk rusty weapon (1d8); Move 12; Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; 
  Special: none.
  A Last Gasp
  If characters begin shifting or digging into the heap of coins and gems, 
  something large suddenly stirs from beneath the pile, rising ominously 
  and shedding coins and gems in all directions: another dragon!
  Or rather, the skeleton of a dragon. It rears up, opens its jaws, spreads its 
  wings, reaches with its claws for the characters—and then collapses into 
  its component bones, puffing dust from every joint as it tumbles into ruin. 
  This was a half-finished project of Haeraglondrar’s, another animated 
  object intended to someday be a last-ditch guardian of the hoard, not an 
  undead dragon, but she never got around to perfecting it.
  
  107
  Lycanthropes
  & 
  Elementals
  
  108
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  This adventure is for characters of levels 4 to 6. The default setting is the 
  Barony of Loup-Montagne, but any remote, heavily wooded principality 
  with highly superstitious residents will do. 
  Barony of  
  Loup-Montagne
  The Barony of Loup-Montagne is a remote region of densely forested 
  hills cut by steep-banked streams, rocky outcrops, and darkly shadowed 
  dales. In the Lost Lands campaign setting of Frog God Games, the barony 
  lies in the western portion of the Duchy of Mains, a semi-independent 
  vassal of the Crown of Foere. Any similar area in your campaign world 
  can fill in, with or without the French-sounding names used here.
  Roulune
  The center of Loup-Montagne is the town of Roulune. It is home 
  to about 500 residents in roughly 80 households. Roulune is hardly a 
  metropolis, but it is the biggest town for miles around, thanks largely to 
  the remoteness of the region. Only a few roads of any consequence pass 
  through the town. The main route is a trade road through the tangled, 
  wooded hills that dominate this region. Baron Chaput exacts a toll on 
  traders who use the road, in exchange for keeping it safe from bandits 
  and monsters. The toll is not excessive, and most traders pay it willingly 
  because the road is considered safe, by and large. Incidents of robbery and 
  violence along the highway are rare within the barony. 
  What’s Going On
  As is normal in a gothic horror tale, the true situation in Roulune is 
  different from what it seems. Figuring out the real story and the real 
  connections between people is key to the player characters’ success in 
  this adventure. For the Referee’s convenience, this section lays out the 
  straight facts. 
  NPCs in Loup-Montagne
  Grandfather Nicodeme 
  This evil old man is the ultimate source of all the trouble.
  What’s Told: Baron Nicodeme ruled the barony for more than 40 years, 
  and they were good years. The baron had a reputation for being strong-
  willed and pitiless, but not unnecessarily cruel. He was harsh toward those 
  who broke his laws, but his laws were clear and generally considered 
  fair. A year ago, while hunting, wolves attacked Nicodeme. The baron’s 
  lieutenant (Paschal Moreau) fought his way through the wolves. According 
  to Moreau’s account, the baron ordered him to ride out on the only surviving 
  horse and bring help. By the time help arrived, Nicodeme and two other 
  men-at-arms were already dead. With his legs torn apart so he couldn’t 
  walk, the baron had put his back to a tree and fought heroically to the end. 
  Only two bodies were recovered. A blood trail indicated that one of the 
  men-at-arms was dragged away by the wolves. His body was never found.
  What’s True: The baron and his three companions were attacked while 
  hunting. The attackers were wolves led by a werewolf. The hunters fought 
  off the attack, but both men-at-arms were killed and the baron was badly 
  wounded by the werewolf. Knowing what would happen to him, the baron 
  and Moreau switched the baron’s clothing and belongings for those of one 
  of the dead men mangled beyond recognition. As Paschal rode away with 
  news of the baron’s “death,” the bleeding baron dragged himself into the 
  woods. With his wounds healing rapidly, his blood trail soon petered out. 
  He headed for the ruins of St. Ulrich Abbey, where Moreau was to meet 
  him later. Nicodeme has been living in the vicinity of the abbey ever since, 
  growing more evil and bloodthirsty with each passing month. Moreau visits 
  him occasionally when he thinks he can do so without being discovered. 
  Nicodeme raised Ghislain after Renard’s death, but he never liked his 
  grandson. He thinks Ghislain’s rule will bring ruin to the barony and stain 
  the family name. He has decided to murder Ghislain since that will clear 
  the way for Jules Brisbois to claim the mantle. 
  Renard Chaput
  As the only son of Baron Nicodeme, Renard should have succeeded his 
  father to be the baron now — if he’d lived long enough
  What’s Told: Renard was handsome, dashing, and lively. He would 
  have made a good baron, if he’d outlived his father, but he died 12 years 
  ago in a tragic incident. Renard, his wife, Seraphine, and their son, 
  Ghislain, were riding in the forest when wolves attacked them. Only 
  seven-year-old Ghislain survived; he was found unconscious beneath the 
  bloody bodies of his parents. 
  What’s True: The common story is true, but it’s only part of the story. 
  Renard was a philanderer with one illegitimate son (Jules Brisbois) whose 
  existence was publicly acknowledged, and probably others he didn’t 
  acknowledge. The existence of a bastard son is a problem because of the 
  legend concerning the Barony of Loup-Montagne (see “The Legend” 
  below). Renard was popular among the young men of the barony because 
  he enjoyed popping into taverns, buying drinks for everyone, and turning 
  the evening into a raucous party. But he was strongly resented by the many 
  married men he cuckolded. 
  Wolves really killed Renard and Seraphine, but if characters dig into 
  this story, they hear persistent rumors that the wolf attack was a cover-up, 
  and that Renard was assassinated by a conspiracy of jealous husbands fed 
  up with his behavior; it was simply bad luck for Seraphine that she was 
  riding along at the wrong time. 
  Ghislain Chaput
  Ghislain is the current Baron Chaput. 
  What’s Told: Ghislain is liked well enough by the citizenry, but he’s 
  very young (19 years old) and has been baron for only a year. It’s common 
  knowledge that the former baron (Ghislain’s grandfather) didn’t like 
  Ghislain and was trying to arrange for Jules Brisboi to become his heir, but 
  Nicodeme died before such an arrangement could be formalized. Hence, 
  tradition had to be followed and Ghislain was anointed the new baron. 
  Most citizens of Loup-Montagne like Ghislain well enough, but they 
  also know the legend — that tragedy will follow if the barony doesn’t 
  pass to the eldest surviving son. A heated debate erupts anytime this topic 
  comes up in a tavern or public place. One side argues that Ghislain is 
  the legitimate heir, so everything is fine. The other side argues that Jules 
  Bad Moon Rising
  By Steve Winter
  
  109
  bad moon rising
  Brisboi is Renard’s eldest son, legitimate or not, so trouble will follow if 
  he doesn’t carry the title. This camp is already blaming the recent surge in 
  wolf attacks on flouting the legend.
  Ghislain’s right leg was severely mangled in the attack that killed his 
  parents. No magical healers were on hand, and Nicodeme refused to allow 
  doctors to amputate it, but the boy surprised everyone by surviving the 
  wound. He needs a crutch to walk, and walking or riding a horse are 
  extremely painful. He is carried in a chair most of the time, walking or 
  riding only when he goes out in public. 
  What’s True: Ghislain is a decent young man who takes his position 
  seriously. He trusts his half-brother Jules and places no credence in the 
  legend. Even if he did, Ghislain’s attitude is that he is Renard’s eldest 
  legitimate son, so whatever power the legend has (which he believes is 
  none), it should be satisfied. Ghislain is greatly troubled by the wolf attacks, 
  but he believes they are the work of hungry wolves and nothing more. 
  Ghislain vehemently denies the rumor that angry husbands murdered 
  his father if asked about the incident. He was only seven, but he clearly 
  remembers being attacked by wolves, and he angrily strips off his stocking 
  to show his withered, mangled right leg. Any druid or ranger can confirm 
  that they are the bites of large canines. Any cleric is amazed that a child 
  survived such a wound without magical healing. 
  Jules Brisbois
  Baron Ghislain’s half-brother is an important officer in the barony. His 
  position is informal, but he acts as an advisor and confidante to Ghislain 
  and as a lieutenant to Moreau.
  What’s Told: Brisbois is something of an enigma in Roulune. He is 
  boisterous and lusty like his father, and he’s well-liked by the young men 
  of the town for the same reasons Renard was liked. If characters press for 
  more information than that, they are mostly met with stony silence; the 
  people of Roulune are obviously reluctant to talk about Brisbois in too 
  much detail, other than to say things like, “Well, you know how men like 
  him can be.” Residents are more willing to talk about Brisbois’ role in the 
  legend than about any dark aspect of his personality. About a third of the 
  town would prefer Brisbois as baron over Ghislain. If the wolf attacks 
  grow worse, that percentage is bound to grow. 
  What’s True: The “secret” that townsfolk are reluctant to discuss is that 
  Brisbois has a vicious temper, and when it gets out of control, he becomes 
  dangerous. He has come close to killing people with his bare hands while 
  in a fury, including a few of his friends. Because of his position in the 
  barony, people who get hurt in his rampages are paid off in gold and the 
  incidents aren’t spoken of. The innkeeper at the Wolf’s Pelt Tavern is one 
  of the few locals willing to open up to characters about this, but only if he 
  can’t be overhead by other locals. 
  Brisbois’s temper is a red herring, meant to mislead characters into 
  suspecting that he is the werewolf. If characters raise that possibility 
  around any townsfolk, even in jest, at least a few are bound to nod their 
  heads in dark agreement. 
  Brisbois’s real offense against the barony is that he’s fallen in league 
  with a group of poachers and occasional highwaymen. In exchange for a 
  cut of the profit, he provides them with information about where the baron’s 
  foresters plan to patrol for poachers each week and when particularly rich 
  or vulnerable merchants are traveling through the barony. These bandits 
  can be encountered at Travers Castle, and if handled properly, they might 
  implicate Brisbois in their crimes. 
  Paschal Moreau
  Moreau was the former baron’s right-hand man. Ghislain considers him 
  a trusted family deputy and employs Moreau as head of the militia and as 
  an advisor.
  What’s Told: Moreau is “the last of the old breed,” a gentleman warrior 
  who can be relied on to always do the right thing. A few people whisper 
  accusations of cowardice over him leaving Baron Nicodeme when the 
  wolves attacked, but most accept Moreau’s account of what happened at 
  face value. A man like him never would have left the baron willingly under 
  those circumstances unless the baron ordered it directly, and leaving the 
  baron to ride for help must have been the hardest thing Moreau ever did.
  What’s True: Moreau is every bit the rock of determination and 
  strength that people believe him to be, but his account of what happened 
  to the baron is false. He is the only person in Loup-Montagne (who is not 
  also a werewolf) to know that Nicodeme, in werewolf form, is behind 
  the recent killings. Moreau is genuinely conflicted about the secret he’s 
  hiding, but his unswerving loyalty to Nicodeme blinds him to the great 
  evil the old baron is committing.
  Absalon Dufort
  Dufort serves as the barony’s treasurer. He also manages the baron’s 
  household and runs the manor as superintendent and castellan. He is in 
  his 60s, with wild hair, a wispy beard, and a slight but noticeable twist 
  to the left caused by an injury to his spine when he was a young soldier. 
  Everyone simply calls him Dufort. He is the only person besides Moreau 
  to have a key to the treasury, where Moreau stores all the town’s silver 
  collected through taxes. 
  The treasurer has an incredible head for numbers, but his thinking about 
  most other topics is muddled and confusing at best. Dufort has noticed 
  the preponderance of silver in the treasury and has been meaning to ask 
  Moreau about it for months, but he’s a busy man with many things on his 
  mind, and Moreau is never around when Dufort is thinking about it. 
  The Legend
  A legend has circulated through the Barony of Loup-Montagne for 
  hundreds of years concerning the order of inheritance for the title of baron. 
  The legend holds that if the title is passed to someone who is not the eldest 
  heir, the spirits of the forest will lash out against the people of the barony. 
  Citizens of Roulune can cite any number of historical incidents to “prove” 
  this claim. All of them happened before any living person in Roulune was 
  born, and most are highly dubious if not completely spurious. 
  The few citizens who aren’t overwhelmingly superstitious see this 
  legend as nothing more than a story meant to ensure that every baron sets 
  up a clean transfer of power upon his death — an outcome greatly desired 
  in a world where any doubt about the line of accession can lead to bloody 
  murders between brothers, sisters, aunts, uncles, and grandchildren. 
  In this regard, Renard Chaput’s philandering created a problem. Jules 
  Brisboi is older than Ghislain, and Renard acknowledged Jules as his 
  son. The custom of the barony is that a legitimate son has primacy over 
  an illegitimate one, but this is only a custom, not an explicit law, and 
  illegitimate offspring have ruled on other occasions. 
  Because the exact form of retribution the forest spirits will seek isn’t 
  specified, any unfortunate incident that happens in or near the woods 
  can be blamed on the legend. Likewise, people who oppose or dislike a 
  particular baron can point to any unusual death or injury and claim it as 
  proof that a different person should hold the title. If fate doesn’t cooperate 
  by providing mysterious mishaps, it’s easy enough for clever schemers to 
  arrange a few and blame them on the legend.
  Current events have stirred up plenty of talk about the legend and 
  motivated Jules Brisbois’ circle of friends to mumble about replacing 
  Ghislain with Jules. A minority of citizens supports this idea, but most 
  believe that Ghislain is the proper heir. Only a small group blames 
  Brisbois for causing the trouble, and they do so quietly and mostly in 
  private out of fear for his temper.
  Silver
  Paschal Moreau knows that silver is one of the few things that can harm 
  Nicodeme. To protect the werewolf, Moreau makes it his mission to keep 
  silver out of the hands of the people of Loup-Montagne. This is done mostly 
  through taxation. People who pay their taxes in silver rather than copper are 
  given a small discount. Silver items such as jewelry and plate are accepted 
  in lieu of coins at greater than their face value. Moreau doesn’t care about a 
  few silver coins or lockets; he is concerned about larger items such as silver 
  plates, pitchers, picture frames, mugs, and other articles that contain enough 
  silver to turn into knives, spearheads, or swords.
  
  110
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  Roulune is a poor town, and Moreau personally collects taxes door-
  to-door (with a militia backup). The process involves a fair amount of 
  haggling under any circumstance, so the slow disappearance of silver has 
  gone unnoticed by most people. The jeweler (a dwarf named Beaumont) is 
  curious why less silver jewelry is crossing his table for repair than in years 
  past, and innkeepers and shopkeepers who are paid in silver stare at the 
  coins for a few moments before making offhand comments such as “Don’t 
  see many of these anymore” or “You are new around here.” If a character 
  questions the scarcity of silver in a public place, it sets off the usual round 
  of arguing and superstitious theorizing common in Roulune.
  The silver is stored under lock and key in the treasury at Chaput Manor. 
  Only Moreau (as chief tax collector) and Dufort (as treasurer) have keys 
  to that chamber.
  Roulune
  Roulune is a medium-size town filled with typical homes and shops 
  for bakers, cobblers, bowyers, candlemakers, potters, ropemakers, 
  blacksmiths, tailors, and all the other businesses a medieval town requires. 
  Four locations stand out among the rest, being of special interest to 
  traveling adventurers.
  Wolf’s Pelt Tavern
  The Wolf’s Pelt is the only tavern in Roulune with rooms for rent to 
  travelers. It’s also the biggest and most welcoming to outsiders, and it’s 
  where the locals come when they want to hear news from the outside world. 
  The proprietor is a friendly young man named Hugues who does 
  everything he can to make strangers feel welcome. His wife Lilou is 
  almost twice his age and is seldom seen by customers. She is painfully 
  shy, so she spends most of her time in the kitchen. If someone tries to talk 
  to her, she becomes flustered and calls for Hugues. 
  Fewer travelers come through Roulune these days thanks to news of the 
  wolf attacks, so the inn has plenty of room available if characters choose 
  to stay here. 
  The Church of the Forest
  This temple can serve whatever good-aligned deity is most appropriate 
  in your campaign, or several at once. In the Lost Lands, the temple is 
  dedicated to Cerunnos, the Green Father. The cleric of the temple is 
  Frere Emilé. He can cast cure light wounds twice per day, but he expects 
  strangers to make a donation to the church’s coffers in return (at least half 
  the cost of a potion of healing in your campaign). He keeps two scrolls 
  of cure serious wounds and one of cure disease in a secret compartment 
  beneath the altar in case of emergency. Again, he expects the church to be 
  compensated if they must be used to benefit outsiders.
  “Nicodeme’s” body was brought to Frere Emilé after the attack. 
  Everyone accepted it as the baron’s based on the clothes and Moreau’s 
  testimony. But Emilé knew Nicodeme well, and in preparing the corpse 
  for burial, he saw the body of a much younger man. That weighs on his 
  mind, and he talks to the characters about it if they establish a level of 
  trust with him.
  Gervaise the Astrologer
  Gervaise the Astrologer is the most-educated person in Roulune. The 
  more she learns, the more she abandons the town’s traditional superstitions. 
  
  111
  bad moon rising
  It’s getting to the point where she even has doubts about astrology. 
  She doesn’t sell magic items, potions, or magical services. What she 
  has is an amazing store of knowledge on almost any subject the characters 
  have questions about. You can use Gervaise as a reliable source of 
  information, a skill bank, a rumor source, and as the characters’ general 
  sounding board in Roulune.
  Gervaise can give accurate directions to any location in the barony, 
  along with basic background information about it. Most importantly, 
  she can direct the characters accurately to Travers Castle, St. Ulrich’s 
  Abbey, and the Witches’ Den. Directions to the Witches’ Den come with a 
  warning that the site still has magical power. For further details, see The 
  Witches’ Den below. 
  Gervaise puts no stock in the legend about the eldest heir. She doesn’t 
  know what’s behind the recent attacks, but based on the bodies she’s 
  seen and the reports she’s heard, she’s pretty sure a werewolf is involved. 
  She hasn’t shared that opinion with other townsfolk because, given how 
  superstitious they are, talk of a werewolf would be sure to set off ridiculous 
  behavior if not outright panic.
  In light of that, Gervaise advises the characters to arm themselves 
  with wolfsbane before venturing into the deep forest. The only spot she 
  can be certain wolfsbane grows is Duval’s Meadow. The best time to 
  harvest it is under the light of a full moon (which is, of course, tonight 
  and the following two nights). She offers characters two pieces of advice 
  regarding wolfsbane. First, Gervaise cautions them that they should wear 
  gloves when handling it and avoid inhaling the flowers’ scent; too much 
  exposure causes fatigue (characters who ignore this precaution must make 
  a successful saving throw at the end of an hour’s exposure or suffer –1 on 
  attack, damage, and saving throw rolls). Second, wolfsbane is also prized 
  by hags, so characters should be on the lookout for those vile creatures 
  when they visit Duval’s Meadow.
  Wolfsbane: Wolfsbane smeared onto a piercing or slashing weapon 
  gives the weapon a +1 damage bonus against lycanthropes. Even a weapon 
  that lycanthropes are otherwise immune to (nonmagical, nonsilver) causes 
  1 point of damage if coated with wolfsbane. Also, a lycanthrope must make 
  a successful saving throw before attacking someone who prominently 
  displays a bunch of wolfsbane (wearing it as a garland, tucked into a belt, 
  waving it in the hand, etc.). Once the werewolf makes a successful save, it 
  can ignore the wolfsbane for the rest of that encounter.
  Yannick’s Candle Shop
  Yannick is a very rare breed: a mix of halfling and elf. He looks like 
  most other halflings at a glance, but anyone who spends more than a few 
  moments conversing with him notices the delicate features, slender grace, 
  and musical speech of a half-elf. 
  Yannick’s shop is famous for its “infused candles.” These are mildly 
  magical items that produce minor magical effects when lit. A few types 
  that adventurers might find useful are listed below; feel free to expand this 
  list with any other types you like, at comparable prices. 
  Candle Drifting Light
  Length 30 mins
  Price 10gp
  The person holding the candle can cause its light to drift away at a 
  speed of 5 ft/round, to a distance up to 60ft from the candle. The drifting 
  flame casts dim light in a 10ft radius.
  Candle Friends
  Length 30 mins
  Price 20gp
  Everyone within 15ft of the lit candle has generally positive feelings 
  toward the person who lit it.. These candles are very popular among 
  storytellers and romantic young men.
  Candle Light the Path
  Length 30 mins
  Price 5gp
  If the person holding the lit candle thinks about a place he or she has 
  been to, and the flame flickers toward the direction of that place. These 
  are popular among folk who must travel at night and are anxious about 
  losing their way back home. Hugues keeps a box of them at the Wolf’s 
  Pelt tavern for revelers who overindulge.
  Candle Mending
  Length 30 secs
  Price 15gp
  If the wax from this rapid-burning candle is dripped onto a broken 
  mundane object such as a broken chain link, a torn cloak, or a leaking 
  wineskin, the object repairs itself of a single break or tear. One candle can 
  repair one object.
  Candle Message
  Length 1 min
  Price 30gp
  A message is whispered to the candle while it is lit, then the candle 
  is extinguished. The next time the candle is lit, it repeats the message 
  verbatim. The total burning time of the candle is one minute, so a message 
  that’s more than 30 seconds long is truncated on delivery. The candle 
  works only once, regardless of how short the message is.
  Candle Restfulness
  Length 1 hr
  Price 30gp
  If a character lights this candle at the start of a rest and spends an hour 
  basking in its light, he or she can sleep for four hours with the restfulness 
  of eight.. Only the character who lit the candle gets the benefit, and the 
  benefit can be gained only once in a 24-hour period.
  Candle Witching Hour
  Length 8 hrs
  Price 10gp
  The flame of this candle turns blue for one minute precisely at sunset, 
  midnight, and dawn. It is popular among witches, astrologers, and diviners. 
  Yannick usually keeps these under the counter because they upset some of 
  the most superstitious residents of Roulune.
  Candle Wolfsbane
  Length 1 hr
  Price 40gp
  This candle fills a 30ft radius with the scent of wolfsbane. The 
  components harmful to people have been refined out; only those that 
  irritate lycanthropes remain. All lycanthropes must withdraw from the 
  candle’s radius unless they make a successful saving throw. This is an 
  experimental item not yet available for sale. Yannick offers it only if 
  characters mention werewolves, wolfsbane, or that they plan to go hunting 
  wolves. 
  Superstition in Roulune
  The people of Roulune are tremendously superstitious. They interpret 
  every little occurrence as an omen of good or bad tidings based on 
  centuries-old traditions that no outsider has much hope of understanding. 
  Every conversation with villagers should be peppered liberally with 
  superstitious declarations such as those below. If two or more villagers 
  are involved, it’s common for arguments to break out about the meaning 
  and interpretation of omens. 
  • “The last fort-moon was blood red, and I saw the shadow of a rabbit 
  on it clear as a bell. Bad times are coming for sure.”
  • “My Gran’ tripped on the lintel three times last week. Now I’m afraid 
  to keep a fire burning in the hearth for fear that the house will burn down.”
  • “I heard a raven call while I was milking the cow this morning. Had to 
  dump the whole pail of milk. Can’t have it poisoning the baby.”
  • “All the flowers on the ivy were facing north this morning. I’m 
  keeping my doors and windows locked until after the harvest.”
  • “The worst time to be confronted by wolves is at midnight. You can 
  tell when that is because the flame from a candle turns blue at the witching 
  
  112
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  hour.” (This bit of myth is true for the candles from Yannick’s shop, and it 
  may be useful to characters during the adventure.)
  • “A hare chased a cat across my path last week. There’s a witch 
  prowling these woods, that’s now a proven fact.”
  • “I heard hedgehogs whining at dusk. They were telling our secrets to 
  witches. You can’t trust anybody these days.”
  • “When I was hunting, I saw a wolf staring at me from the brush, and 
  it was missing its left ear. There’s always something like that wrong with 
  a werewolf, you know. Always.” 
  • “I stopped my brother-in-law from cutting down a thorn tree last 
  week. He would’ve angered the faerie folk even more and brought bad 
  luck on us all.”
  • “If you’re concerned about ghosts or werewolves, bring a rooster 
  with you, and be ready with a needle to make him crow. Ghosts and 
  werewolves hate the crowing of roosters; it drives them away.” (This 
  belief derives from the fact that ghosts and werewolves tend to cease their 
  activity at dawn, which is coincidentally when roosters start crowing. A 
  rooster crowing in the middle of the night has no supernatural effect.)
  • “Johann ate three eggs for breakfast last week, and his horse died, just 
  like I warned him it would. Eating an odd number of eggs is just inviting 
  death into your home.”
  Locations in the Barony 
  of Loup-Montagne
  The locations below play important roles in the adventure, and 
  characters are likely to visit most of them in the course of resolving events 
  in Loup-Montagne. Everyone knows where the baron’s manor is, of 
  course, at the edge of town. Likewise, everyone knows that Travers Road 
  on the south of town leads to the ruin of Travers Castle, but no one goes 
  there anymore. Residents of Roulune give conflicting accounts about the 
  location of St. Ulrich Abbey — those who hunt or travel are more likely 
  to get it right than those who farm or run shops in town. The Witches’ Den 
  is little more than a legend, and any group of three or more people won’t 
  be able to agree on whether it even exists. 
  Moreau and Gervaise know all three hidden locations, but only Gervaise 
  gives correct directions to all three. Moreau’s directions to the abbey and 
  the Witches’ Den lead characters to a random point along the river since 
  he doesn’t want them to find those spots. Dufort claims to know all three 
  locations if asked, but characters realize that his muddled directions are 
  impossible to follow even as he’s giving them. 
  Baron’s Manor
  The baronial manor is a grand home, but that’s “grand” on a medieval 
  scale. It is not a palace or a mansion. It’s a large, well-appointed, half-
  timber construction. Important rooms (entrance hall, great hall) and family 
  sleeping rooms have wood paneling for warmth and appearance; other 
  rooms have plaster walls and exposed timber beams. The stable and the 
  barracks are similar, but much plainer. The whole compound is enclosed 
  inside an 8ft high stone wall.
  Unless they reach some arrangement with the Baron to inspect his 
  home, characters have no good reason to wander unescorted through the 
  manor. If they do so, or if a guest disappears for an unusual length of time, 
  it rouses suspicion. Guests in an aristocrat’s home are expected to behave 
  appropriately. 
  Area 1: Main Entrance
  The main entrance hall is a grand chamber designed to impress visitors. 
  It’s two stories tall, paneled in oak, and paved with flagstones. Portraits 
  of former barons and their families line the walls, along with close to a 
  hundred weapons: mainly polearms, but with a score of swords, maces, 
  
  113
  bad moon rising
  and morningstars mixed in. The most arresting of the portraits is one that 
  shows a man in his thirties with piercing silver eyes and a halo of unruly, 
  gray-streaked hair: Baron Nicodeme in his prime. 
  Area 2: Great Hall
  Most of the entertaining and business of the barony is conducted in this 
  chamber. Tables are put up when needed using smooth planks laid across 
  trestles, and taken down and stored along the walls with their benches 
  when not needed. The hall is empty most of the time. A low platform (one 
  step up) lines one wall for the table of the baron and honored guests. 
  Area 3: Kitchen and Storage
  During the day, two cooks and a half-dozen teenage helpers work in this 
  chamber. At night, the helpers sleep here. 
  Area 4: Treasury
  Most of the baron’s wealth is stored here: coins, jewelry, and plate are 
  the most common, with silver predominating because of Moreau’s policy 
  of collecting taxes in silver whenever possible. Only Moreau and Dufort 
  have keys to the massive lock that seals the heavy door. If the open locks 
  check fails, a magic mouth appears above the lock and shouts “Thieves 
  at the treasury! Thieves at the treasury! Thieves at the treasury!” for 30 
  seconds, which is sure to bring Moreau, Brisbois, the baron, and an armed 
  escort to investigate. 
  If someone succeeds in breaking into the treasury chamber, it contains 
  a total value of 20,000gp: 1800gp (36 lbs.), 80,000sp (1,600 lbs.), and 
  10,200gp worth of silver plate, silver candlesticks, silver picture frames, 
  silverware, jewelry, and other items with a total weight of 1000lbs. 
  (average of 1lb per 10gp value, but with considerable variance; jewelry 
  has much higher value at low weight, while silver hair brushes and mirrors 
  are heavy for their value). 
  Area 5: Trophy Room
  This resembles a room in a hunting lodge, with dozens of trophy heads 
  of wild boar, elk, bears, and many wolves (including a few wolves and 
  worgs) mounted on the walls. Rugs of bear and wolf pelts are scattered 
  on the floor. 
  Area 6: Baron’s Chambers
  A comfortable sleeping chamber adjoins a writing chamber (the baron’s 
  office). 
  Area 7: Family and Guest Chambers
  Baron Ghislain has no wife or children, so most of these chambers are 
  empty. Only Jules Brisbois has a permanent room here, and he uses it only 
  about half the time. If characters are invited to stay at the manor, they’ll 
  be assigned rooms in this area.
  Area 8: Servant’s Quarters
  Dufort and the household staff (one butler, two maids, and two cooks) 
  reside in these rooms. 
  Area 9: Day Rooms
  These airy rooms are available for whatever purpose the family needs 
  at the time. They’ve served as children’s playrooms, sewing rooms, 
  schoolrooms, workrooms, and many other functions. Since Ghislain is 
  unmarried and has no family as yet, they’re used chiefly as workrooms by 
  the servants on the ground floor and as sitting rooms on the upper floor.
  Area 10: Barracks
  Paschal Moreau and the 20 men and women who make up the full-time 
  core of the Loup-Montagne militia live in this structure. It is divided into 
  several dormitory-like sleeping and living chambers, an armory, and a 
  private room for Moreau. 
  Most areas of the barracks are neat and tidy, but one stands out for its 
  almost animal-like squalor: beds are unmade and covered with reeking 
  animal skins instead of blankets, and belongings and leftover food are 
  strewn around the floor. Three men and one woman of the militia share 
  this chamber. All four are werewolves infected by Nicodeme and under 
  his control. Moreau is aware of their state and tolerates it because of his 
  loyalty to Nicodeme, but other members of the militia resent what they 
  see as a handful of Moreau’s favorites being given special privileges 
  (they don’t know the four are werewolves). They’ll share their complaints 
  with characters if asked in private. They feel the situation is becoming 
  intolerable, and they’re beginning to question Moreau’s leadership because 
  of it. If characters search this room (not just examine it from the doorway) 
  after Enzo’s murder, they find a pair of bloodstained, embroidered gloves 
  of the type Enzo was transporting.
  Area 11: Stables
  Twelve horses are stabled here, along with all their riding tack and a 
  primitive coach that is seldom used. Four stablehands sleep in a cozy 
  corner of the hayloft.
  Area A: Travers Castle
  Many generations ago, the original barons of Loup-Montagne ruled the 
  barony from Travers Castle. The castle was sited to control an important 
  river crossing, and the barons grew rich on the tolls they charged to use the 
  bridge. When the bridge was washed out in a flood, wagon traffic diverted 
  to a ferry crossing upstream. By then, the baronial families had relocated 
  to the more comfortable manor in Roulune anyway, and the decision was 
  made not to rebuild the bridge. 
  The castle has been abandoned for almost a hundred years. No one 
  has much reason to make the trek there, so the castle and the road to it 
  are overgrown by the forest. The walls of the castle still stand, but the 
  thatched roofs of the buildings have collapsed and the gates sag on their 
  hinges. 
  The pile is not entirely forgotten, however; a group of poachers and 
  sometime highwaymen use it as an occasional hideout. The gang consists 
  of bandit captain Thibault Voclain, 15 bandits, and 2 guard dogs. They 
  are present when characters come to investigate. They post guards, but 
  because they aren’t expecting visitors, their sentries aren’t especially alert. 
  Thibault Voclain, Bandit Captain: HD 3; HP 16; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  longsword (1d8) or longbow x2 (1d6); Move 12; Save 14; AL 
  C; CL/XP 3/60; Special: none.
  Equipment: chain mail, longsword, longbow, 20 arrows.
  Bandit (15):  HD 1; HP 5x4, 6x4, 4x3, 8x2, 7x2; AC 7[12]; Atk 
  short sword (1d6) or shortbow x2 (1d6); Move 12; Save 17; AL 
  C; CL/XP 1/15; Special: none.
  Equipment: leather armor, short sword, shortbow, 20 
  arrows. 
  Dog, Guard (2): HD 2; HP 10, 12; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d6); 
  Move 14; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none. 
  (Monstrosities 127)
  Area A1: Overgrown Clearing
  Long ago, this was a cleared space around the castle. Now it’s heavily 
  overgrown with brush and trees, although it’s obviously not old-growth 
  forest like the rest of the surroundings. The poachers take few pains to 
  conceal their presence, so their tracks toward the castle are plain to see. A 
  ranger or druid can discern their numbers to be between 12 and 18.
  There are always 2 bandits on watch, both of them standing above 
  the main gate and looking north. Characters with thieving skills sneaking 
  through cover toward the castle go unnoticed Move Silently checks are 
  successful. 
  
  114
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  1 square = 10 feet
  1 square = 10 feet
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  115
  bad moon rising
  Area A2: Main Gate
  The gate sags on its hinges and doesn’t close all the way anymore. 
  The guards above because of the overhanging wall can’t see people at 
  the gate. A character with thieving skills trying to slip silently through 
  the slightly ajar gate must make a successful Move Silently check. A 
  failed check indicates that the character brushes against the gate and 
  causes it to squeak. The first time this happens, the guards assume it is 
  the wind and don’t bother to investigate. The second time it happens, they 
  become suspicious; from their perch atop the wall, one starts scanning 
  the courtyard carefully and the other scans the area before the wall. If it 
  happens a third time, they raise a cry of alarm. 
  Area A3: Courtyard
  This area is mostly bare ground. Depending on the weather, it might be 
  hard-packed dirt or churned mud. A disintegrating wagon with a broken 
  wheel is tipped against one wall. Two tables and four benches have been 
  thrown together by placing planks across barrels and stumps. A fire pit 
  sits between the tables. During daytime, 2d4 bandits are in the courtyard, 
  butchering a deer that they poached a few days before and are preparing 
  for the evening meal, with the 2 guard dogs lying nearby, waiting for 
  scraps. At night, the courtyard is empty except for the deer carcass 
  hanging from a post.
  Area A4: Great Hall
  The great hall lost its roof decades ago, so it’s now just four walls and 
  a skeletal staircase to a mezzanine that rings the hall 10ft above the floor. 
  Weeds grow profusely between the old flagstones, and a great fire pit 
  dominates the center of the floor. A few poachers sometimes sleep here 
  under the stars in fine weather, but most prefer to sleep in the chapel.
  The stairs up to the mezzanine are rotted from exposure. Anyone 
  climbing them without thieving skills must make a successful simple 
  dexterity check (2d8 vs. score) to reach the top safely. On a failed check, 
  the staircase collapses, dropping the character 10ft to the ground. Everyone 
  in the castle hears the collapse. 
  Area A5: Chapel
  This is the poachers’ chief residence when they stay in the castle. 
  They repaired the roof by covering it with canvas looted from merchants’ 
  wagons. It leaks in heavy rain, but most of the time it stays warm and 
  comfortable enough for their purposes. 
  During the daytime, 2d4 bandits and Thibault Voclain are here, 
  resting and planning their next robbery or poaching expedition. At night, 
  the entire gang, including the mastiffs, is here asleep, except for 2 bandits 
  on the wall and 1 bandit who got up to relieve himself from atop the east 
  wall. If fighting breaks out, he tries to ambush someone from behind if it 
  might make a difference in the outcome; otherwise, he slips away into the 
  forest. If this adventure is taking place during summer in your campaign, 
  1d4 bandits could be sleeping in the great hall instead. 
  Area A6: Stables
  The bandits’ 4 riding horses, 4 draft horses, and 2 mules are stabled 
  here. They pay no attention to anyone who enters. 
  Area B: Duval’s Meadow
  This is a small clearing in the forest, unremarkable in all ways except 
  for the wolfsbane plants that flourish here. Their blooms stay open during 
  the day, but they are at their fullest under the light of a full moon. See 
  the entry Gervaise the Astrologer above for information on wolfsbane’s 
  effect against lycanthropes.
  If characters come here during a night of the full moon, they encounter 
  an annis witch-hag named Savine harvesting wolfsbane. Disguised as a 
  druid, she does her best to appear helpful while stealthily casting charm 
  person.  If the characters fall for this ploy, Savine attacks at the next 
  available opportunity with her pet amphisbaena who awaits hidden in 
  the brush. 
  Savine, Annis Witch-Hag: HD 8; HP 50; AC 1[18]; Atk 2 claws 
  (2d8), bite (1d8); Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: call mists, hug and rend (if both claws hit, held for 
  automatic damage on claws and bite), polymorph into 
  humanoid form, spells MU4 (3/2). (Monstrosities 237)
  Spells: 1st—charm person (x3); 2nd—mirror image, 
  web.
  Snake, Amphisbaena: HD 5; HP 30; AC 5[14]; Atk 2 bites (1d3 
  plus poison); Move 10; Save 12; AL N; CL/XP 7/600; Special: 
  lethal poison. (Monstrosities 440)
   
  Area C: St. Ulrich Abbey
  Nicodeme and his small coterie of werewolves use the abandoned 
  abbey as a gathering place. They don’t spend all their time there, but it’s 
  the one place they return to regularly between hunts.
  A century ago, the area around the abbey might have been a 
  larger clearing, but the encroaching forest has swallowed it 
  and crept nearly to the ancient building’s walls. An overgrown 
  cemetery with headstones tilting at all angles stands outside the 
  crumbling, roofless, fieldstone walls. The structure must have 
  been impressive in its day, but now the leaning, moss- and vine-
  covered walls form a small maze in the forest. 
  All areas of the abbey are essentially the same: open, roofless spaces 
  surrounded by crumbling walls with large, arched doorways. The doors 
  are long since rotted away. Only the old chapel has a flagstone floor; all 
  other areas have packed dirt floors spotted with patches of waist-high 
  grass, weeds, and thin bushes. Only a few saplings have taken root inside 
  the structure.
  The remains of several of the werewolves’ victims are strewn around. 
  They consist mainly of gnawed bones, torn and bloodstained clothing, 
  and a few meager possessions such as copper coins, rusted knives, tacky 
  jewelry, and tarnished belt buckles. Little is left to identify the victims, but 
  if everything is gathered up and brought back to Roulune, Frere Emilé at 
  the Church of the Forest does his best to figure out who the werewolves 
  killed and devoured. If characters search for bodies, each area contains 
  the remains of 1d6–3 victims. If characters search this area after Enzo’s 
  murder, they find a pair of bloodstained, embroidered gloves of the type 
  Enzo was transporting.
  If characters come here at night, the abbey is abandoned (the werewolves 
  are out hunting). During the day, characters encounter two or three ragged-
  looking humans. They are filthy, their clothing is tattered (if they wear 
  anything at all), and their hair is matted with twigs and mud, creating an 
  appearance of desperate poverty, and that’s the story they tell; they are 
  peasants who were kicked off their land, and are now trying to eke out a 
  subsistence living in the forest by scrounging for roots and nuts. If asked 
  about the bones, they claim that wolves sometimes bring their prey here. 
  When that happens, these humans flee into the forest for a day or more 
  before returning. A character who examines them closely recognizes that 
  despite their apparent destitution, beneath the filth and rags, these people 
  appear very healthy, muscular, and well fed. 
  Scratched on one of the interior walls of the abbey is a crude 
  representation of a six-sided stele in a forest clearing with wolflike 
  creatures prancing around it beneath a full moon. The rendering is almost 
  life-size, judging from the figures. If the scene is described to Gervaise, 
  Frere Emilé, or Moreau, they recognize it as the Witches’ Den. Any 
  other resident of the barony has a 50 percent chance to guess that it’s the 
  Witches’ Den based on stories they’ve heard. Otherwise, there’s an even 
  chance that they’ll guess something else or admit that they don’t know. 
  
  116
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  Area D: The Witches’ Den
  The Witches’ Den is the site of an ancient, pagan altar where renegade 
  witches performed sacrifices. The witches who used the altar were killed 
  or driven out of Loup-Montagne long ago, but the altar hangs onto its evil 
  power. Nicodeme uses it for much the same purpose — when he wants 
  to bring someone new into his troop of werewolves, the recruit is brought 
  here to be ritualistically “killed” and reborn as a werewolf. 
  Physically, the Witches’ Den is just a clearing in the woods about 80ft 
  in diameter and with a stone stele or column at its center. The stele is 12ft 
  tall and 3ft across at the base, but it tapers to 2ft across at the top. It has 
  six roughly cut sides. The druids and witches carved mystic runes into the 
  stone, but those are completely hidden now by a few centuries’ growth of 
  moss and lichen. Not even Nicodeme is aware of the runes or their power, 
  or of what’s concealed inside the stele. 
  The clearing sits in a natural bowl surrounded by some of the most 
  tangled forest the characters have ever plowed through. The clearing can 
  be considered open ground, but the paths around it are treated as difficult 
  terrain. The surrounding forest is nearly impassable; creatures of human 
  size can move just 5ft per round off a path, Halfling-sized creatures can 
  move 10ft per turn. 
  Finding the Witches’ Den
  It would take months of searching to find the Witches’ Den without 
  directions. Aside from the werewolves, only Gervaise and Moreau know 
  its location. Moreau, if asked, is likely to give false directions that lead to 
  a random point along the river, then apologize later, saying he must have 
  been mistaken about where it is. He gives accurate directions only if he’s 
  been able to arrange for Nicodeme to ambush the characters when they 
  arrive.
  Gervaise gives accurate directions to the characters if asked, along with 
  a brief history of the place and a warning that although it was abandoned 
  long ago, it still has magical power. If characters ask her to explain what 
  that means, Gervaise asks for 24 hours to conduct some research. At the 
  end of that time, Gervaise can tell the characters about the runes on the 
  stele, what they do, and how to activate them. She suspects there may 
  be more to the story, but that’s all she could uncover from the available 
  resources. She doesn’t know about the Fearsome Mask of Lo-Athard 
  inside the stele or how to release it.
  The paths into the Witches’ Den begin at forest landmarks that are 
  largely forgotten (since no one comes here anymore) but are not difficult 
  to find if the searcher knows what to look for. Gervaise tells characters 
  how to find “the great oak on the bluff,” meaning characters enter the 
  clearing along Path 1 if they get directions from her. If Moreau gives 
  accurate directions, they are from “the boulder that resembles a skull,” 
  meaning Path 2, from which they’ll more easily be spotted. The paths can 
  be found easily from either of those landmarks.
  The Runes On the Stele
  Although they’re completely overgrown by moss and lichens, the runes 
  carved into the stele have lost none of their power. Because of the runes, 
  anyone touching the stone column can cast the spells charm monster, 
  conjuration of demons, conjuration of elementals, and invisible stalker as 
  if he or she were using a scroll. Each spell can be cast once per week. If a 
  casting attempt fails, the spell is still available in the stone and the casting 
  can be attempted again, but the character who failed to cast the spell must 
  make a successful saving throw to avoid being stunned for one round by 
  backlash from the stele.
  As soon as one of the spells is cast, the stele begins vibrating softly but 
  audibly in a toneless drone that sounds almost like many distant voices 
  chanting in an unknown tongue. If two spells are cast in a 24-hour period, 
  the droning grows louder and the words become more distinct (but remain 
  unintelligible). If three or four spells are cast in a 24-hour period, the runes 
  carved into the stone glow with an orange light that can be seen through 
  the covering of moss. The droning and the glow become gradually weaker 
  as the hours go by until both disappear after 24 hours.
  The Treasure in the Stele
  If the patterns of the glowing runes are traced with a finger across the 
  stele while it is glowing and vibrating, the stone splits in half, then shatters 
  into dozens of pieces that tumble to the ground. Hovering in the air where 
  the stele stood is a mask of beaten silver and bronze sculpted to resemble 
  an ugly, scowling human face. This is the Fearsome Mask of Lo-Athard, a 
  long-dead wizard who worshipped in the grove centuries ago and whose 
  followers erected the stele. When a character dons the mask, it becomes 
  almost invisible, but the wearer’s face gains a more threatening aspect 
  than it had before. The wearer’s charisma score increases to 18 while the 
  mask is worn, and the wearer can cast fear and mass charm each once 
  per day.
  Key Events
  Three incidents set off the events of Bad Moon Rising. Once the three 
  lead-in events are over, characters have complete freedom to investigate 
  the strange occurrences around Roulune however they choose. If characters 
  turn down Ghislain’s request for help, they could be approached afterward 
  by Gervaise, by a committee of citizens or merchants concerned about 
  the wolf attacks, by Frere Emilé from the Church of the Forest, or even 
  by Jules Brisbois if they look like the sort of scoundrels who’d be good 
  additions to his band of highwaymen. (Marauding wolves in the forest 
  motivate merchants to rout their wagons around Loup-Montagne, and 
  that’s bad for the highway robbery business, too.)
  Wolf Attack
  The characters get their first taste of wolves while on the road to 
  Roulune. Trigger this event when they are on the road through the forest. 
  Arching branches of ancient trees form a continuous roof over 
  the narrow roadway you’re on, locking it in eternal twilight. The 
  surrounding forest is a tangle of closely spaced tree trunks with 
  low branches, boulders, fallen trees, thorny brush, and twisting 
  vines. The road twists like a serpent; you haven’t seen a straight 
  stretch longer than 50 yards since you entered this forest. The 
  mood isn’t improved by the cold, thin drizzle that’s been misting 
  down through the trees all day. Picking your way along the 
  muddy, rutted surface is an exhausting way to travel.
  Thoughts like those are interrupted by shouts of “Help! Help!” 
  from beyond the next bend in the road, followed by animal snarls 
  — quite a few snarling animals, from the sound of it.
  About 100 yards ahead is a merchant’s wagon with a broken wheel. 
  Characters can’t see it from their current location because of the dense 
  trees and the winding of the road. They need to advance another 80 yards 
  to bring the wagon into view. When they do, read the next description to 
  players.
  A wagon with a broken wheel blocks the road. Two terrified 
  draft horses rear and buck in the traces while an old man and a 
  young boy try to keep their balance atop the barrels and crates 
  stacked in the wagon box. They are using spears to fend off a 
  pack of wolves that’s circling the wagon, but the wolves seem 
  more interested in the horses than in the passengers.
  The wolf pack may contain 1 “worg” and 2 wolves per character, 
  depending on how tough you judge the characters to be. The worgs aren’t 
  actual worgs; they’re just bigger, tougher wolves (with worg stats) that 
  
  117
  bad moon rising
  lead the pack. Surviving wolves flee into the woods when all the “worgs” 
  are slain or when half the entire pack is down. 
  The merchant is Enzo Martel, and the boy is his grandson, Eric. 
  They are on their way to towns farther east with a load of nails, mirrors, 
  embroidered gloves, and fine saddles to sell. They plan to spend the 
  evening in the next town up the road, which is Roulune. Right now, they 
  could use some help replacing their broken wheel with one of the spares. 
  Enzo explains that the horses shied violently when the wolves appeared, 
  twisting the wheel in a rut on the road and snapping it.
  There’s nothing nefarious about these two. They are grateful for 
  whatever help the characters give them. As payment, they offer a ride on 
  their wagon into Roulune, which is still several miles ahead. A ride would 
  be a big improvement over walking in the mud.
  Wolf, Great (“Worg”): HD 4; HP 20; AC 6[13]; Atk bite (1d6+1); 
  Move 18; Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 4/120; Special: none. 
  Wolf: HD 2; HP 10; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d4+1); Move 18; Save 
  16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none.
  Tax Collectors
  Characters arrive in Roulune about 30 minutes before sunset. Read the 
  description to players when they arrive.
  Roulune looks much like other towns you’ve visited in this part 
  of the world. The single road you’ve been traveling on branches 
  out into a small network of roads that wind through a maze of 
  homes and shops. On the outskirts, the houses stand apart and 
  have fenced gardens and animal pens. Farther into town, the 
  buildings lean against one another and overhang the street. But 
  the streets are wide and the forest stops at the town’s edge, so at 
  least you can see the sky again. 
  “Ahead is where we’re bound,” says Enzo, pointing to a 
  pleasant-looking inn with an enormous, shaggy wolf’s pelt 
  draped like a sign above the doorway. “I’ll stand you each an ale 
  if you join us later.”
  He drops his voice before adding, “There’s a piece of 
  misfortune.” With a slight nod of his gray head, he indicates a 
  knot of men-at-arms farther up the street. “I was hoping we might 
  miss the tax collectors, but today has not been a lucky day — 
  other than meeting you, of course.” 
  The tax collectors are Paschal Moreau and 4 men-at-arms of the town 
  militia (guards) on a routine patrol of Roulune. Moreau is fulfilling his 
  role as a combination of tax-man and town sheriff: collecting tolls from 
  merchants on their way through and taking the measure of strangers to 
  decide whether they’re peaceable travelers or troublemakers. 
  
  118
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  Before the characters can hop down and get their gear off Enzo’s 
  wagon, Moreau and his soldiers march up. They aren’t threatening, but 
  they are professionals with plenty of practice at this drill. 
  Moreau looks over Enzo’s wagon and tells him that the toll on the load 
  is 500cp, with a 20 percent discount on any portion he pays in silver. 
  Characters should know that this is a reasonable toll for use of private 
  roads; Enzo isn’t happy to pay it, but he doesn’t complain that it’s unfair. 
  If characters try to make an issue out of this with Moreau, Enzo makes 
  it clear that he’d prefer they not make trouble for him. If, however, they 
  bring up the wolf attack on the road as a reason why the toll should be 
  reduced or waived, Moreau drops the toll to 200cp as recompense for 
  Enzo’s trouble, provided the merchant spends some of the savings getting 
  the broken wheel repaired at the local wainwright’s shop.
  After that business is taken care of, Enzo bids the characters farewell 
  while he tends to his horses and wagon, with a promise to meet them later 
  in the inn. Moreau invites the characters inside the Wolf’s Pelt for food 
  and conversation.
  None of this should seem suspicious, nefarious, or threatening. Moreau 
  comes off as a reasonable man going about his job in a professional way. 
  He admires freelance adventurers. It’s his job to know why they came to 
  his town, but he isn’t looking for trouble; there won’t be a confrontation 
  unless the characters start it. 
  Moreau answers most questions frankly, unless they’re impertinent. 
  Characters can learn quite a bit about the barony, the baron, and the current 
  problem with wolves simply by conversing with Moreau. As long as they 
  aren’t rude or antagonistic, Moreau invites them to come to the baron’s 
  manor for dinner; the baron is always interested in meeting educated 
  travelers with stories to tell. If characters’ behavior toward Moreau is not 
  the sort that leads someone to invite strangers to dinner, then they receive 
  an invitation to dinner directly from the baron the following day, brought 
  by a young page from the manor.
  Paschal Moreau, Sergeant-At-Arms: HD 3; HP 15; AC 5[14]; 
  Atk two-handed sword (1d10); Move 12; Save 14; AL L; CL/
  XP 3/60; Special: none.
  Equipment: chain mail, two-handed sword.
  Men-At-Arms (4): HD 1; HP 5, 4, 6, 7; AC 7[12]; Atk longsword 
  (1d8); Move 12; Save 17; AL L; CL/XP 1/15; Special: none.
  Equipment: leather armor, longsword.
  Dinner with the Baron
  Baron Ghislain hopes to find adventurers from outside his domain whom 
  he can trust. His household militia has proven itself incapable of stopping the 
  wolf attacks that plague the barony, so it’s time to bring in outside experts. 
  The dinner scene can be as extended or as abbreviated as you like, 
  depending on whether your players enjoy roleplaying this type of social 
  interaction. It will be a small gathering, not a large party: just Ghislain, the 
  characters, Jules Brisbois, and a few servers wandering in and out of the 
  Great Hall. Moreau is not present since the baron can’t discuss the wolf 
  problem without talking about Moreau’s failure to solve it, and he sees no 
  reason to embarrass his lieutenant that way. 
  Read the following when characters arrive at the baronial manor.
  The baron’s manor is not palatial, but it’s clearly the home of 
  someone powerful and important. The two-story structure sits 
  inside a walled enclosure — not a castle, but a well-tended, fortified 
  estate. You’re greeted by a servant and shown immediately to the 
  great hall, which is mostly empty. Tables are disassembled and 
  stacked along the walls. Only the head table is prepared, standing 
  across the front of the room on a low platform. The servant asks 
  you to seat yourselves. As he’s filling your goblets with wine, two 
  men of noble bearing — one barely more than a lad and walking 
  with crutches — enter the hall and join you at the table.
  The younger man welcomes the characters to his home, introduces 
  himself as Baron Ghislain and the other man as “his brother, Jules 
  Brisbois,” and joins them at the table without ceremony. During dinner, 
  he reveals all of the following information, however you care to impart 
  it. Jules allows the baron to do most of the talking, but he answers direct 
  questions and adds clarifications to the baron’s statements as you see fit.
  • “My father died when I was young, so I was raised by my grandfather, 
  Baron Nicodeme. He was blessed with a long life, but when he died in a 
  hunting mishap about a year ago, I inherited the barony.”
  • “Jules is older than I — very astute of you to notice — but my 
  father’s wife was not his mother. That leaves me as the most direct line of 
  accession in the Chaput family, hence I hold the title. Jules is my brother 
  and my right hand. I trust him completely.”
  • “Yes, there is a legend about tragedy befalling the barony if the oldest 
  heir doesn’t inherit the title. Like any legend, it’s mostly nonsense — a 
  parable meant to keep the baron honest and ensure a smooth transfer 
  of power. I’m told that a few people have pointed to recent trouble as 
  evidence that Jules should have inherited before me, but our most learned 
  scriveners agree that the legend must refer to the oldest legitimate heir. 
  Otherwise, the laws of accession would be meaningless.”
  • “For the last several months, the barony has been plagued by wolf 
  attacks. There have always been wolves in the forest, and there have 
  always been wolf attacks, but the current situation is worse than ever. 
  These wolves don’t just take sheep and cattle; they attack people, too. 
  They seem almost to prefer people over other prey. They’ve even broken 
  into remote farms and slaughtered entire families. Some people are killed 
  outright, others simply disappear. We can only assume that they, too, are 
  victims of this pack.”
  • “My huntsmen conclude this is the work of a single pack that has 
  become uncharacteristically aggressive.”
  • “My huntsmen and soldiers have conducted massive hunts and set 
  numerous traps, to no avail. The attacks continue unabated. My citizens 
  are becoming greatly upset, and tales leaving the barony are beginning to 
  disrupt trade, on which we rely.”
  • “I’ve concluded that for this job, I need people with … special skills. 
  Adventurers such as yourself. I don’t imagine these creatures are any more 
  supernatural than this table, but they’ve proven exceptionally wily. They 
  don’t follow the predictable patterns wolves follow, and they don’t fall for 
  the tricks wolves fall for. That’s why I believe hunters with experience 
  battling unnatural foes might succeed where normal field craft has failed.”
  • “If you’re up for such a challenge, I offer you 10 pounds of gold 
  apiece (500gp each). You can discuss it among yourselves, or sleep on it 
  if you like and give me an answer in the morning.”
  • The characters are offered comfortable lodging in the baron’s manor 
  for the night. If they accept his offer, they can stay in the manor during 
  their entire sojourn in Loup-Montagne.
  The Situation Worsens
  After their meeting with the baron, characters are free to investigate the 
  wolf attacks however they choose. Brisbois and Moreau are available to 
  answer questions and to provide some material aid, such as guides to the 
  forest and a militia escort if characters want more muscle backing them 
  up. But the deeper characters dig, the more suspicious they should become 
  of those two.
  During their time in Loup-Montagne, any of the following events can 
  occur, spurring on the characters’ investigation.
  Murdered Merchant: As Enzo Martel and his grandson are leaving 
  the barony, they are attacked on the road east of Roulune. Eric straggles 
  back to town with an arrow in his arm. He claims that their wagon was set 
  upon by bandits. His grandfather argued with the bandits, but the robbery 
  was interrupted by the howling of wolves nearby. That frightened some of 
  the bandits terribly, and the boy took advantage of their distraction to run 
  away. One of the bandits loosed an arrow that caught him in the arm, but 
  he kept running, hoping to bring help from town.
  If characters head east along the road, they find the ambush spot about 
  four miles from town. Enzo is dead, along with both horses and one bandit; 
  all apparently killed by wolves. The bandit is one of Thibault Voclain’s 
  
  119
  bad moon rising
  
  120
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  band from Travers Castle, but no one is able to identify him. The killers 
  were Nicodeme and a few of his werewolves. If characters subsequently 
  search St. Ulrich Abbey or the barracks room used by members of the 
  pack, they find a bloody pair of embroidered gloves that they recognize as 
  similar to those Enzo was hauling. Gloves should be found in one location 
  or the other, but not both.
  Leader of the Pack: One of the Baron’s woodsmen brings the 
  corpse of an immense wolf to town and displays it in the square. He 
  claims that it must be the pack leader, and many townsfolk agree with 
  him. It truly is a monstrous wolf, with a body 6ft long. If someone 
  thinks to cut it open and examine its stomach contents, it is found to 
  have eaten only rabbits and deer meat in the last 24 hours. That doesn’t 
  prove it’s not the killer, of course, just that it hasn’t killed anyone in 
  the last day or two.
  Home Besieged: A teenaged boy comes to the baron’s manor asking 
  for help. He is the son of a hunter who lives in the forest four miles west 
  of Roulune. Their home was besieged by wolves, or wolflike creatures, 
  for two nights and a day. When his father tried to slip out to the stream to 
  fetch more water, the creatures attacked him and dragged him away into 
  the forest. 
  The cabin is four miles due west of town. The wolves’ trail away from 
  the farm is easy to follow because they were dragging the bleeding body 
  of the hunter. They dragged him about two miles west, then stopped and 
  ate him. The grisly remains are easily found.
  By examining the area around the cabin and around the hunter’s body, a 
  ranger or druid can determine that three creatures were involved, and they 
  were larger than typical wolves. They split up when they finished with the 
  body: one went south, one went southeast, and one went northeast. This 
  behavior is highly uncharacteristic of wolves. Unfortunately, their trails 
  become impossible to follow after a quarter mile.
  Omens: If characters haven’t uncovered rumors and become curious 
  about St. Ulrich Abbey or the Witches’ Den on their own after a few days, 
  they are called to one of the dayrooms in the baron’s manor. There they 
  find Ghislain, Moreau, and Brisbois awaiting them, along with Gervaise 
  the Astrologer and Frere Emilé. Gervaise and Emilé approached the baron 
  with startling news: Omens in the sky and elsewhere make it clear that a 
  werewolf is plaguing the barony, and the best place to catch it would be 
  at the Witches’ Den during a full moon (which should occur this night or 
  the next). Gervaise provides all the pertinent astrological details, but this 
  is pure smokescreen. Gervaise and Frere Emilé pieced the clues together 
  on their own and decided that this story was the best way to frame their 
  findings to the baron.
  The baron is less superstitious than his subjects, but he understands the 
  power of such beliefs in the barony. He also respects Gervaise and Frere 
  Emilé as the town’s two most-educated citizens; he concludes that they’re 
  trying to tell him something important without revealing everything, and 
  he wisely plays along.
  The problem in the room is Paschal Moreau. The details of any plan 
  that’s discussed in his presence finds its way to Nicodeme (probably 
  through a message passed to one of the werewolves in the militia). Even 
  if he’s excluded from planning, he alerts his master to be on his guard, 
  because hunters are closing in.
  Like the baron, characters should have the opportunity to sense that 
  Gervaise and Frere Emilé aren’t telling the whole truth in this meeting. 
  One of the NPCs might surreptitiously pass a note to a character, or you 
  could slyly convey something through your roleplaying. Alternatively, 
  a magic-user character realizes that Gervaise’s astrological reasoning is 
  subtle nonsense.
  Bad Moon Rising
  Ultimately, through their own investigation or someone’s advice, 
  characters should wind up at the Witches’ Den. What happens there 
  depends on when they come and whether Nicodeme is expecting them:
  If characters are unexpected and arrive during the day: They find 
  2 werewolves plus 2d3 wolves sleeping around the column. Nicodeme is 
  not among them. 
  If characters are expected and arrive during the day: The area is 
  abandoned. 
  If characters are unexpected and arrive at night: They find 
  Nicodeme, 3 werewolves, and 2d3 wolves prancing and howling around 
  the stele in the clearing. 
  If characters are expected and arrive at night: They find 1 werewolf 
  and 1d3 wolves prancing and howling around the stele. Nicodeme, 
  another werewolf, 1d3 wolves, and Paschal Moreau are hidden in the 
  forest, waiting in ambush for characters to arrive.
  Lycanthrope, Werewolf: HD 4+4; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (1d6+1); 
  Move 12; Save 13; AL C: CL/XP 5/240; Special: lycanthropy 
  (damage in excess of 50% hp), silver or +1 or better weapon 
  to hit.
  Wolf: HD 2; HP 10; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d4+1); Move 18; Save 
  16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none.
  Resolution
  If Nicodeme is killed, the barony’s wolf problem ceases, even if 
  other werewolves are still on the loose. Without Nicodeme to hold them 
  together, surviving werewolves fall to bickering and fighting among 
  themselves, and the pack disintegrates. If the pack is wiped out but 
  Nicodeme survives, the problem appears to go away for a few months, but 
  eventually it resurfaces — probably long after the player characters move 
  on. In either case, having one or more of the vengeful werewolves cross 
  the characters’ path months later makes a memorable encounter.
  As long as the problem seems resolved, the baron gladly pays the 
  promised gold. If Moreau’s role in events is uncovered, it leaves a 
  vacancy at the head of the barony’s militia that Ghislain offers to one of 
  the characters. 
  
  121
  death in dyrgalas
  Dyrgalas Raiders
  In ancient times, the area now known as the Dyrgalas Fens was home 
  to a sect group of Hyperborean nature worshippers who adopted the 
  practices of the Ancient Ones before them and wrested a living from the 
  depths of the Harwood Forest, built open-air temples, and generally did 
  well. Over the centuries, a series of natural disasters (some say a series of 
  foolish magical experiments) led to a rising water table and turned their 
  home in the forest into a vast swamp.
  As the waters rose, most of the people left. Today, a few stalwart 
  humans remain in the fens, living off the land through hunting, fishing, 
  trapping, and even some agriculture. In addition to these honest folk, 
  the Dyrgalas has some less savory residents, including black and green 
  dragons, trolls, hags, escaped criminals, and a host of lycanthropes. Most 
  of these creatures prey on travelers foolish or unlucky enough to enter the 
  fen and sometimes raid inside and outside the fens.
  This adventure for four to six characters of 8th to 12th level deals with 
  one group of raiders that makes its lair in the Dyrgalas. A weretiger called 
  Gavriil has formed a group of assorted lycanthropes into a group of cunning 
  brigands. The lycanthropes favorite caper involves infiltrating a merchant 
  caravan, posing as travelers, merchants, or swords for hire, and then leading 
  an attack from within. Gavriil and his servants also take on kidnappings, 
  murder for hire, and any other unsavory tasks that might come their way.
  In the Lost Lands campaign setting, the Dyrgalas Fens lie in the central 
  Harwood south of the Wolf Hills. There is little civilization in the region, 
  the closest true authority being the Duchy of Mains from its duchal seat 
  in distant Arbo. However, there is some trade in the region between the 
  loggers and trappers of the surrounding forest and more civilized lands, 
  so the duke does take an interest in the area, insofar as it lines his coffers.
  Adventure Hooks
  An adventuring party might have any number of reasons for tangling 
  with Gavriil and his minions:
  The party is traveling with a merchant caravan when Gavriil’s 
  lycanthropes attack. A group of lycanthropes posing as merchants attack 
  the caravan from within one night. After dealing with the infiltrators, the 
  group can track them back to the fens.
  A merchant or aristocrat of Arbo hires the group to recover a stolen robe 
  of blending. The medusa Theronia actually stole the robe, but Gavriil’s 
  Death in Dyrgalas
  By Skip Williams
  
  122
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  brigands have captured her in turn.
  The group is hired to recover someone Gavriil’s group has kidnapped. 
  The characters might be charged with delivering a ransom and recovering 
  the victim, or simply to rescue the person. There’s a very good chance 
  that the lycanthropes try to seize the ransom without releasing the captive.
  The Duke of Mains has decided that Gavriil’s activities have become 
  intolerable. He doesn’t wish to expend the resources to send his own soldiers into 
  the wild depths of the Harwood and instead hires the party to smoke him out.
  A sage, antiquarian, or spellcaster wishes to acquire a detailed map 
  of the ruins where Gavriil makes his lair. This person might seek the 
  knowledge for its own sake or might need the information for some ritual 
  or experiment.
  Ruined Pavilion
  The ancients built the pavilion as a place where the faithful could rest 
  and find serenity. It was once a stately edifice of butter-colored limestone 
  filled with tranquil pools and ringed with soaring spires. Much of the 
  complex was open to the sky, but a series of partial roofs provided shade 
  (and modest shelter from the weather) for meditating visitors. In times of 
  peril, clerics used the pavilion as a site for summoning elementals, which 
  they sent forth to meet any approaching threat.
  Today, the low mound where the pavilion stands has become an island 
  in the Dyrgalas, and the once-proud building has degenerated into a 
  crumbled ruin, half flooded, and shrouded in moss, creepers, vines, and 
  even a few trees. A handful of the ruin’s trees are truly immense.
  The weretiger Gavriil finds the tumbledown pavilion a convivial place 
  to live and work. He’s made the place his personal stronghold and he’s 
  gathered a formidable collection of fierce animals, rogue elementals, and 
  fellow lycanthropes to help him defend it.
  Conditions and Features
  Although aboveground, the pavilion’s walls, decaying roofs, leafy trees, 
  and flowing water make the place as dark and damp as any a dungeon.
  Doors: The pavilion’s original wooden doors rotted away long ago. 
  Gavriil, however, has replaced them with new doors made from rough 
  planks. The unfinished wood warps and swells in the humid atmosphere, 
  and it takes an Open Doors check to shove open a door. These doors are 
  hung so that they tend to swing shut on their own. A door opened and not 
  deliberately closed remains ajar for 1d4+1 rounds before slamming shut.
  Foliage: Though vines and creepers cover almost every inch of the 
  pavilion that is not flooded, in some places, the growth is taller and thicker. 
  Creatures or objects in these areas have heavy obscurement.. Movement 
  costs are doubled in foliage and running is impossible.
  Floors: When new, the pavilion’s floors were smooth marble. Today, 
  the marble floor slabs remain mostly undamaged, but the land subsiding 
  under the stonework on the ground floor has played havoc with them. 
  They now tilt crazily in random directions, and creepers sprout from every 
  crack. A run requires a save.  If the save fails, the character can still move, 
  but only at normal speed. Floors in the upper stories remain flat.
  Light and Sight: There’s plenty of shade inside the pavilion thanks 
  to the walls, trees, and partial roofs. Even on a bright day, the interior is 
  dimly lit and lightly obscured unless otherwise noted in an area description 
  (or if someone provides artificial light). When twilight falls outside, the 
  pavilion’s interior is completely dark.
  Pools and Flooded Areas: Springs deep under the pavilion flow 
  sluggishly, keeping the water from becoming completely stagnant, though 
  a thick layer of leaves, twigs, and other floating debris blankets most wet 
  areas. Geothermal activity in the area keeps the water at about 82 degrees 
  Fahrenheit year-round (fairly warm to the touch for most warm-blooded 
  creatures). Characters can easily wade in water that is less than waist deep 
  (no loss of speed). Movement costs are doubled for wading in water more 
  than waist deep, and characters must swim in water that’s at least as deep 
  as they are tall. 
  Rubble: Heaps of loose rubble fill many areas within the pavilion. Movement 
  costs are doubled in rubble and running requires a save. If the save fails, the 
  character moves roughly 5ft, then falls prone, suffering 1d6 points of damage.
  Walls: The pavilion’s stonework is heavily weathered. Here and there, 
  a patch of the original, cheerful yellow remains, but on the whole the 
  walls are darkened to a muddy brown streaked with black and gray. The 
  weathering created plenty of handholds, but the covering moss and vines 
  make climbing tricky. Scaling the walls requires a Climb Walls check. 
  Those pesky vines and moss make the walls uncannily resistant to 
  grappling hooks; they tend to either slide off the moss or get caught in the 
  vines, where they tear loose at the slightest pull.
  Approaching the Pavilion
  A road, of sorts, winds through the fens, crossing many islands, 
  causeways, and decaying bridges. Some of the locals can direct the party 
  to the ruin. They don’t visit the place thanks to the elementals that still 
  prowl the grounds, but they know where it lies. A reconnaissance from the 
  air reveals the pavilion’s towers rising from amid the trees from several 
  miles away.
  Area 1: Main Entrance and Facade
  The following text assumes the party approaches the area from outside 
  the pavilion. Adjust accordingly if the group first sees this area upon 
  leaving the ruin.
  A weedy trail of crushed stone leads to a massive pile of mud-
  colored stone as large as any provincial temple. The facade looks 
  to be at least 30ft high and composed of crumbling, vine-covered 
  blocks. Round towers, each at least twice as tall as the main 
  structure, mark the facade’s ends. Onion domes, well punctured 
  with irregular holes and gaping cracks, cap the towers. Two 
  banks of narrow, glassless windows are visible in each tower. 
  The lower bank is perhaps 25ft aboveground, with the second 
  back an equal distance above that.
  Off to the left stands a massive tree whose wide canopy presses 
  hard against the nearest tower, a span of 20ft or more.
  A low portico of gleaming marble slabs fronts the place. It 
  has its own freestanding roof that looks as tattered as the onion 
  domes above it.
  The portico’s stonework might once have lain as flat and 
  smooth as a dining table. Now they look more like a deck of cards 
  haphazardly spread in a single layer and left to sink randomly 
  into the soggy ground. No two slabs seem to meet on the flat. 
  Tangles of creepers grow in the spaces left between the slabs, 
  and snake their way over the stonework. Just a few paces from 
  where the pavement begins lies a pool of water cloaked in a thick 
  mantle of floating debris.
  The ruin’s stone facade rises behind the pool. Four archways 
  pierce the facade, and an open space seems to lie beyond.
  Area 1A: The Pool
  Very little open water remains visible in the pool. A layer of 
  twigs, leaves, lily pads, and a few waterlogged branches mostly 
  obscures the surface. The whole pool smells of soggy leaves, 
  with a hint of rotting meat. A weak current sets the lighter debris 
  astir, and a thin, winding rivulet exits through a crack near the 
  pool’s near right-hand corner and meanders away toward the 
  surrounding fens.
  
  123
  death in dyrgalas
  
  124
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  The pool is about 5ft deep, with a bottom covered with waterlogged 
  twigs, leaves, and branches (the weak current here isn’t quite strong 
  enough to carry away everything that falls in). At the pool’s east end lies 
  a sinkhole 40ft deep. At the sinkhole’s bottom lies a 10ft passage that 
  connects to the south sinkhole in Area 8.
  Floating mostly submerged among the twigs and leaves covering the pool 
  are 3 giant crocodiles. Gavriil took them from a distant nest and brought 
  them here as part of a group of more than two dozen hatchlings. He released 
  the youngsters into the pool and left them to fend for themselves. These 
  three are the only survivors. They’ve vicious and always hungry. From time 
  to time, Gavriil comes here to talk with them (via spell) and feed them just 
  enough to keep them healthy. The pavilion’s other denizens know enough 
  to toss the crocodiles a few morsels and hurry away if they need to pass.
  Crocodile, Giant (3): HD 6; HP 30, 32, 34; AC 3[16]; Atk bite 
  (3d6), tail (1d6); Move 9 (swim 12); Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 
  6/400; Special: none.
  Tactics: Whether they’re fed or not, the crocodiles lunge out of the pool 
  and attack anyone who remains within their reach for more than a few 
  seconds (except for Gavriil). They attack with surprise if their foes don’t 
  see them coming.
  When attacking, they try to grab the nearest creature and haul their prey 
  to the bottom sinkhole for a death roll.
  If badly wounded (less than half hit points), or if attacked from a 
  distance, they retreat down the sinkhole and through the passage to Area 
  8 and from there to Area 8A.
  Afterward: The wererats in Area 5 and the medusa in Area 7 quickly 
  notice combat here, especially if the crocodiles are splashing in the pool or 
  if their foes use any flashy spells. They make no attempt to intervene (the 
  roof over the pool tends to make ranged combat against anyone fighting 
  the crocodiles difficult), though the wererats might attempt to sneak out 
  a window and into Area 2 to get a better look. See the appropriate area 
  descriptions for other actions these creatures might take.
  Area 2: Sentinel Tree
  The tree standing here looks like a true giant. It has a trunk 
  wider than a hogshead and a crown that tops out at least a 
  bowshot overhead. Many of its branches push hard against the 
  ruined tower several yards away.
  The tree is nothing special, just very large. A character could easily toss 
  a grapple into the tree’s lower branches and find a firm anchor point.
  The lower branches reach all the way to a window in Area 5, and anyone 
  who can climb up there can just walk along a thick limb and step right into 
  the chamber beyond. Gavriil and his allies know about the connection, 
  and have arranged an unpleasant surprise for anyone who tries to enter 
  the pavilion by this route. They’ve stripped, sharpened and bent several 
  branches to act as a battery of maces. (6d6 points of damage, save half).
  Area 3: Entry Hall
  This area resembles Areas 1 and 1A. It sports a freestanding roof, but 
  has no pool. The text below assumes the party enters through one of the 
  arches leading to Area 1.
  Beyond the arch lies another expanse of pale, broken pavement. 
  A decaying roof rests on a double row of slender pillars. Piles 
  of rubble, and thickets of young trees, vines, and brambles are 
  everywhere. Just north of the covered area lies a somewhat 
  turbulent pool covered in a thin mist.
  The rubble and foliage in here has accumulated more or less naturally, 
  though Gavriil and his crew have made a few additions. At each area 
  marked with a “T” they have bent saplings that resemble the trap in Area 
  2, except that a creature struck also must make a save or be knocked 15ft 
  to the north and into the pool at Area 8.
  Afterward: The wererat guard in Area 4 keeps an intermittent watch 
  over this area (Gavriil has ordered the wererats to watch constantly, 
  but their attention wavers if the weretiger isn’t on hand to keep them 
  focused). Still, the guard notices intruders in here unless they’re being 
  stealthy. If anyone triggers one the traps in here, the wererats in Area 
  4 and Area 5 notice automatically, as does the medusa in Area 7. Any 
  other loud or flashy activity in here, such as ranged combat, spellcasting, 
  or an extended conversation among several characters also alerts the 
  neighbors.
  Area 4: West Tower Ground Floor
  The staircase here rises 25ft to Area 5. The text below assumes 
  characters are viewing the chamber from Area 3.
  A narrow arch pierces a curved section of wall here. A circular 
  chamber lies beyond. A staircase spirals around the wall and 
  vanishes into darkness overhead. An untidy mass of twigs, grass, 
  fur, and who knows what else fills the chamber’s whole floor and 
  rises taller than a peasant cottage.
  Above the arch, perhaps 25ft above the floor, is a pair of barred 
  windows, with a second pair about another 25ft above that.
  The “untidy mass” is the resident wererats’ nest. The whole construction 
  is about 15ft wide and 9ft high. At any given time, there are 3 wererats 
  present out of the eight calling this place home. Two of the current 
  occupants rest while the third keeps a lazy eye on Area 3.
  The windows above the chamber entrance lead into Area 5.
  Lycanthrope, Wererat (3): HD 3; HP 15, 13, 12; AC 6[13]; Atk 
  bite (1d3), short sword (1d6) or light crossbow (1d4+1); Save 
  14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: control rats, lycanthropy (if 
  victim brought below 50% of hit point maximum), silver or +1 
  or better weapon to hit, surprise on 1-4 on d6.
  Tactics: When a wererat notices intruders in Area 3, he quickly rouses 
  his companions and resumes his watch on Area 3. Unless the intruders 
  trigger one of the traps in Area 3, one of the wererats quietly slips up the 
  stairs to warn his companions in Area 5. The two remaining wererats 
  hunker down in the nest. The pair waits until foes enter the chamber, then 
  pop out of the nest and attack. If intruders spot them and attack from 
  outside the chamber (with spells or ranged attacks), the wererats fire their 
  crossbows once each, then retreat up the stairs to Area 5.
  If a party manages to catch all 3 wererats here unawares, the trio fights 
  as well as they are able. They’ll maneuver to attack as best they can and 
  try to hold out until help arrives from Area 5.
  Afterward: If the party defeats the wererats, they can tear apart the nest 
  and recover a randomly determined treasure. (Gavriil allows the wererats 
  to accumulate a few trinkets). This treasure can be determined by using 
  the S&W Complete Rulebook starting on page 120.
  Any fighting here alerts the wererats in Area 5 after two rounds (or 
  sooner if a wererat escapes up the stairs). Once alerted, the wererats in 
  Area 5 join the fight here (see the Area 5 description for details).
  If a fight starts in Area 5, the wererats here notice the ruckus after 2–3 
  rounds. Once alerted, all 3 wererats scramble upstairs to join the battle.
  If the party captures and questions a wererat, the prisoner is reluctant to 
  answer any questions, and claims to be a mere slave. If a character can be 
  convincingly persuasive or intimidating the prisoner reveals the following 
  in response to the appropriate questions:
  A weretiger called Gavriil lords it over this place.
  Gavriil lives in the northeast tower with two companions, Inessa and 
  Zhanna (they’re weretigers, too).
  
  125
  death in dyrgalas
  Gavriil can do some magic and spends a great deal of his time talking 
  to animals and other beings. He even talks to the water in the central pool 
  (Area 8). Note: Gavriil talks to the water elemental in Area 8, but the 
  wererats don’t really understand what the weretiger is doing. The wererats 
  know that Gavriil uses magic, but they’re not sure what kind.
  Gavriil keeps his mistress/personal assassin in the west tower (Area 7). 
  If someone offends Gavriil, the poor fool visits the tower and is never seen 
  again. Her name is Theronia, and she’s probably some kind of demon.
  Note: Theronia is a medusa Gavriil has conscripted. Theronia usually 
  keeps herself masked, both to conceal her true nature and to keep from 
  petrifying too many of Gavriil’s servants. See Area 7 for more details.
  Gavriil has collected all manner of creatures to serve as raiders. The 
  weretiger is making a fortune robbing caravans, kidnapping merchants, 
  and all manner of other foul deeds. Of course, everyone here would 
  be happy to be mere hunters, woodsmen, and even farmers. Note: The 
  wererats and other lycanthropes fear Gavriil, but serve him more or less 
  willingly.
  Area 5: West Tower Upper Floor
  The staircase here descends 25ft to Area 4.
  This area once was only one of two upper floors in the tower. Today, 
  most of the tower interior has collapsed, leaving this chamber open all the 
  way to the tower’s decaying onion dome.
  Mounds of rubble choke most of this wide, circular, dusty 
  space, though the center seems clear. A crumbling staircase 
  corkscrews around the outer wall. The steps leading down seem 
  fairly intact, but the set leading up quickly dwindle away to mere 
  shards. At about floor level, two sets of windows look southwest 
  and northeast. The northeast pair is barred, but the southwest pair 
  merely gape open. Two pairs of windows, identical to the pairs at 
  floor level, are about 25ft farther up the walls. Above that soars a 
  great, but ragged dome.
  The chamber’s clear space contains a rough table with a few 
  crudely woven wicker chairs, a few casks and barrels, and a 
  brazier filled with dying coals.
  The bars in the northeast windows are hinged and swing outward like 
  doors. The wererats here keep the bars padlocked shut. A key to the locks 
  hangs from a hook under the table.
  There are always 5 wererats on duty here. Gavriil has tasked them 
  with keeping watch over Area 8. The wererats, however, treat this 
  chamber as their place to indulge in human vices such as gambling and 
  drinking. Usually, a single wererat hides in the rubble next to a window 
  and keeps watch over Area 8 (this guard occasionally waves at one the 
  weretigers watching from Area 17). The other four sit at the table, playing 
  knucklebones and sipping liquor from their supply of casks. They’re 
  careful not to become inebriated — they’d never survive Gavriil’s wrath 
  if caught drunk — but hardly keep a vigilant watch.
  Lycanthrope, Wererat (5): HD 3; HP 18, 20, 16, 14, 13; AC 
  6[13]; Atk bite (1d3), short sword (1d6) or light crossbow 
  (1d4+1); Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: control 
  rats, lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit, surprise on 
  1-4 on d6.
  Tactics: If forewarned, the wererats hide, with one or two ducking 
  under the table, and the rest taking to the rubble.
  If a fight develops, the wererats try to attack their foes from as many 
  different directions as they can manage. They use melee or ranged 
  weapons as necessary.
  If they detect a threat outside their chamber, 2 wererats move to the 
  windows and fire their crossbows. The barred windows overlooking 
  Area 8 provide them three-quarters cover. The unbarred windows facing 
  outside provide half cover. The remaining wererats rush down the stairs 
  to Area 4 and out to meet the threat. If the threat is in Area 4, 2 wererats 
  use the stairs and the others open the windows and use ropes to rappel 
  down to Area 3.
  Afterward: The wererats notice any traps triggered or combat in Areas 
  3, 8, or 9 the round after the action happens. They notice a fight in Area 4 
  after two rounds (or sooner if a wererat from there comes to warn them).
  If a fight starts here, the wererats in Area 4 notice the ruckus after 2–3 
  rounds and scramble up the stairs to join the battle.
  The wererats eventually notice fighting in Area 1A; however, they do 
  little to intervene beyond going to Area 2 so they can get a better look at 
  any intruders.
  If any of these wererats is captured and questioned, they react as noted 
  in the description for Area 4.
  Area 6: East Tower Ground Floor
  The staircase here rises 25ft to Area 7. The text below assumes 
  characters are viewing the chamber from Area 3.
  A narrow arch pierces a curved section of wall here. A circular 
  chamber lies beyond. A staircase spirals around the wall and 
  vanishes overhead. A substantial mound of mossy rocks and 
  dirt fills most of the chamber.  Masses of brambles, vines, and 
  saplings grow from the dirt. Here and there among the stones and 
  leaves, a metallic gleam or crystalline sparkle is visible.
  Above the arch, perhaps 25ft above the floor, is a pair of barred 
  windows, with a second pair about another 25ft above that.
  The foliage growing here gets light from the open archway and also 
  from two gratings in the ceiling 25ft overhead.
  The pile of stone and dirt is home to an earth elemental Gavriil 
  recruited to serve as a combination jailer and guardian for the medusa in 
  Area 7.
  The gleams and sparkles visible here come from several bits of iron 
  pyrite (essentially worthless), plus a scattering of coins (22gp, 38cp) and 
  8 bits of polished quartz (5gp each). Gavriil scattered these odds and end 
  here to please the elemental and to tempt and delay intruders.
  Elemental, Earth: HD 12; HP 64; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (4d8); 
  Move 6; Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, tear down stonework.
  Tactics: The elemental spends its time blended into the mound. It can 
  detect anyone setting foot inside the chamber or on the stairs or trying to 
  climb the walls. It rears up and slams away at any trespassers, gaining 
  surprise. Thanks to its ability to glide through earth, it ignores the effects 
  of the debris in here. It fights to the death.
  Afterward: The elemental won’t notice anyone flying through the 
  chamber, unless the intruder touches something. Neighboring creatures 
  don’t pay much attention to what goes on in here, except for the medusa 
  in Area 7. The medusa notices a battle in here immediately. Once alerted, 
  she quietly observes the action for one round by peering through the 
  gratings or down the staircase. After that, she lets loose a few spells.
  The elemental ignores everything going on outside its chamber, except 
  for Area 7. The elemental notices in 1–2 rounds when the medusa is 
  involved in a fight or even if her usual pattern of movements change. It 
  charges upstairs and attacks as quickly as it can.
  Area 7: East Tower Upper Floor
  The staircase here descends 25ft to Area 4.
  This area is similar to Area 5. It’s open all the way to the ruined dome 60ft 
  
  126
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  overhead. It also has windows overlooking the pavilion’s exterior and interior 
  as noted in the Area 5 description. The medusa Theronia calls the chamber 
  home (at least for the moment), and her living arrangements are considerably 
  different from what the wererats in the neighboring tower have.
  Colorful rugs cover most of the floor in a wide, circular space 
  here. Metal grates lie in the stone floor at two places where 
  there are no rugs. A crumbling staircase corkscrews around the 
  outer wall. The steps leading down seem fairly intact, but the set 
  leading up quickly dwindle away to mere shards. At about floor 
  level, two sets of windows look northwest and southeast. The 
  northwest windows have bars. The southeast pair has no bars, but 
  light curtains cover them. Two pairs of windows, identical to the 
  pairs at floor level, are about 25ft farther up the walls. Above that 
  soars a great, but ragged dome.
  The chamber’s furnishings include a canopied bed, a desk 
  of brightly polished wood, several shelves of books, a pair of 
  divans, a loom draped with many skeins of yarn, and a massive 
  bronze brazier flanked by two big amphorae. The crumbling 
  steps leading up hold an assortment of art objects, including 
  several vases, delicate lamps, and realistic sculptures of birds 
  and small animals.
  The windows here are just like the windows in Area 5, right down to 
  the hinged bars. Theronia keeps the key to the windows in her desk.
  The gratings in the floor pull out easily, allowing movement (for a 
  Medium or smaller creature) or attacks into Area 6. The gratings are made 
  of soft steel and actually somewhat flimsy. If someone weighing more 
  than 50 pounds steps on one, roll 1d6. On a roll of 1, the grating gives way, 
  dumping the character 25ft into Area 6 (damage 2d6). A character can 
  attempt a save to leap clear or grab the opening (50% chance for each) and 
  avoid the fall. If the grating does not give way, it groans and bends. Repeat 
  the die roll each round a character remains atop the grate, increasing the 
  chance it gives way each round, to a maximum of 1–5).
  Theronia spends all her time in here. She studies her books (including 
  her spellbooks), works at her loom, and keeps watch over Areas 3 and 8. 
  When awake, she usually goes masked. She sleeps during the darkest part 
  of each night. She takes off her mask when she goes to bed.
  Theronia, Medusa: HD 8; HP 46; AC 8[11]; Atk dagger (1d4), 
  snake bite (poison); Move 9; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: gaze turns to stone, spells MU6 (4/2/2).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile, protection 
  from good, shield; 2nd—mirror image, web; 3rd—
  fireball, lightning bolt.
  Tactics: When possible, Theronia attacks from a distance, using 
  her magic missile, fireball, or lightning bolt spells as she deems most 
  appropriate. 
  If foes begin to close to melee range, Theronia uses mirror image and 
  web to keep them at a distance. She also doffs her mask, unleashing her 
  gaze attack. If necessary, she fights with her dagger and snakes.
  If reduced to 10 hit points or less, Theronia surrenders, covering her 
  face and begging her attackers to have mercy on a poor slave (see the 
  afterward section for more information).
  Therona mostly ignores disturbance outside her chamber, except in 
  Areas 3 or 8, where she uses her spells to attack anyone fighting the 
  elementals in those areas.
  Afterward: The wererats in Areas 4 and 5 notice when Theronia 
  begins slinging spells, but they don’t intervene. The weretigers in Area 
  17 also notice any disturbances here, but they use the time to prepare their 
  defenses.
  Likewise, Theronia notices any fighting in Areas 4 or 5 (or if someone 
  triggers a trap in Area 3), but does nothing to intervene except to ready 
  her own defense. Theronia also notices any fighting in Area 8 and begins 
  
  127
  death in dyrgalas
  her ranged spell assault against any intruders there as soon as she can. 
  She uses the barred windows in her chamber for three-quarters cover. 
  Likewise, she notices if someone triggers the trap in Area 9 and attacks 
  intruders with her spells as they emerge from the passage there.
  If the party loots the chamber, they find Theronia’s spellbooks (contents 
  per Referee’s discretion) on the bookshelves. The collection of art objects 
  on the ruined staircase includes six rare vases worth 150gp each and one 
  gold lamp set with amber and rubies (750gp). The small sculptures are 
  real birds and little animals that Theronia petrified (she’s fond of doing 
  that). The petrified creatures might have some value as curiosities, at the 
  Referee’s option. Eight of the rugs in here are valuable; they each weigh 
  18 pounds, and each is worth 150gp.
  If the party captures Theronia or induces her to surrender, the medusa 
  claims to be a mere slave. She has much the same information that the 
  wererats in the West Tower do, plus additional tidbits as noted in the list 
  that follows. She’s careful about revealing what she knows, and tries to 
  bargain with the group. Theronia is mostly interested in escaping the 
  confrontation alive, but she’d also like to get the magical robe Gavriil took 
  from her (read on). Theronia might reveal the following to her captors in 
  response to the right questions (if the party catches any of her omissions, 
  Theronia claims to have simply forgotten to mention the missing details):
  Theronia came to serve here after being captured when a horde of 
  lycanthropes attacked the caravan in which she was traveling. The other 
  captives were either ransomed or sold, but the lycanthrope leader decided 
  to keep her here. Note: This is only partially true. In fact, the lycanthropes 
  infiltrated the caravan and cut a deal with the medusa to attack the caravan 
  from within. Theronia was to receive a cut of the spoils. Later, Gavriil 
  double-crossed the medusa by insisting that her property was part of the 
  spoils. Theronia is now working to get her things back, in particular a robe 
  of blending. Theronia was returning to her lair after a quest to recover the 
  robe of blending when Gavriil attacked her caravan.
  The weretiger Gavriil is the mastermind behind all the activity around here. 
  He seems to be some kind of cleric and favors spells involving the elements. 
  He’s friendly with all the elementals lurking around here and talks to animals. 
  Note: Theronia has it right: Gavriil is a druid who can speak to the elementals.
  Gavriil lives in the large tower at the ruin’s northeast corner. He has a 
  pair of weretiger bodyguards. A spiral staircase leads up to the weretigers’ 
  chamber just to the south of their tower. Gavriil likes to watch the pool 
  (Area 8), however, so it would be hard to sneak up on him. Note: This 
  is mostly true. Theronia knows about the guardian tigers in Area 14, but 
  does not mention them to the party.
  Gavriil uses the idol at the north side of the pool (Area 8) to store his 
  ill-gotten gains. Note: This is true as far as Theronia knows. She neglects 
  to mention the fire elemental that erupts from the idol.
  Area 8: Central Pool
  Originally, the pool served as a place where the faithful could wade 
  or simply lounge at the edges. Short roofs projected over the pavements 
  surrounding the pool, with the pool itself open to the sky. The pool’s edges 
  have mostly collapsed, transforming the original rectangular pool into an 
  irregular shape (the dotted line on the map shows the original outline and 
  roof line). During the day, this area is well lit.
  A pool that looks about as long and wide as a village square 
  lies here, its waters lapping against the weathered stonework 
  surrounding it. In several places, the remains of a fairly narrow 
  pavement that must have once formed a veranda of sorts round 
  the pool remain, but the pool’s waters reach all the way to the 
  walls, and a few doors, that once fronted on the missing veranda. 
  The remains of short roofs with gentle slopes surround the pool 
  on all four sides, and here and there the stumps of broken support 
  pillars stick up like rotten teeth.
  Many piles of rubble form tiny islands all over the pool, and 
  one very large pile of debris near the center sprouts a massive 
  tree that rises past the old roofline.
  The original pool was about 3ft deep. Today, the pool’s bottom has 
  broken up and subsided, leaving an uneven bottom of hard and jagged 
  stones. However, a vast accumulation of debris and silt about a foot thick 
  covers it all. The combination gives the pool a varying depth, as shown by 
  the contour lines on the map.
  In addition, two sinkholes are in the southeast and northeast corners. 
  The southeast sinkhole is about 40ft deep, with a 10ft passage at the 
  bottom that leads to the sinkhole in Area 1A. The northeast sinkhole is 
  about 20ft deep.
  Currently living in the pool are 2 water elementals. They spend 
  most of their time resting at the bottom of the northern sinkhole, rising 
  occasionally to speak with Gavriil.
  Elemental, Water (2): HD 12; HP 68, 72; AC 2[17]; Atk strike 
  (3d10); Move 6 (swim 18); Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 13/2300; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, overturn boats.
  Tactics: Though out of sight and underwater, the elementals notice if 
  any activity occurs near the pool (such as fighting in one of the adjacent 
  areas) or when anyone does anything in or with the water in the pool (such 
  as swimming, wading, or tossing anything in). They prefer to attack foes 
  touching the water. If no such target is available, an elemental tries to 
  knock someone into the water. Anyone standing on rubble and adjacent 
  to water is vulnerable. The elemental moves within reach of the rubble 
  and uses a slam attack to jostle the rubble. This attack automatically hits, 
  and the target creature falls into the adjacent water unless it succeeds on 
  a saving throw. If more than one space exists where the target could fall 
  into the water, the elemental decides where the target falls. After a fall, the 
  target is prone in the water and must swim or wade during its next turn.
  The elementals fight to the death.
  Afterward: A randomly determined treasure (no magic items) is hidden 
  in the silt at the bottom of the north sinkhole (mostly items Gavriil tosses 
  in the water for safekeeping).
  All the pavilion residents in Areas 5, 7, and 17 notice any fight with the 
  elementals, and most make ranged attacks against any foes that they can 
  see, as the terrain and the combatants relative positions allow.
  Area 8A: Tree Island
  A tree has taken root in a big pile of debris here and grown to massive 
  size.
  A substantial mound of rock and organic debris rises from the 
  water. 
  A massive tree with a trunk at least as wide as a human is tall 
  grows from the mound. It has a crown wider than a village street 
  and nearly as tall as the domed towers that ring it. A layer of moss 
  makes the trunk look shaggy and green. Some of the tree’s lower 
  branches are thicker than a man’s leg and a few of these droop 
  low, hanging just a few feet above rock or water.
  The mound is the remains of a tower, now collapsed and utterly destroyed. 
  As shown on the map, the mound has a fringe of rubble that forms its 
  shoreline. Near the center, the mound is dirt covered in creepers and ferns.
  Making their home in the tree are 2 flying apes. Gavriil struck an 
  uneasy truce with the pair. He tosses them some food now and then, and 
  generally leaves them alone.
  Ape, Flying (2): HD 5; HP 26, 28; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 hands (1d4), 
  bite (1d6); Move 9 (fly 18); Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: rend or carry airborne (if both hands hit, additional 
  1d6 damage or grab). (Monstrosities 16)
  Tactics: The flying apes wait in the tree’s lower branches and stay 
  hidden (they have heavy obscurement and three-quarters cover in the 
  
  128
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  foliage). They emerge only if someone comes within reach or touches 
  their island or tree. The immediately attack such trespassers, flying down 
  from the tree and flailing away with their claws.
  The flying apes notice most of what goes on near the pool, but do not 
  break their cover or intervene at all.
  Afterward: Wounded crocodiles from Area 1A retreat here (to the 
  mound’s north side) if they escape a fight in their pool. The flying apes 
  don’t like that, but do nothing.
  If the crocodiles are here when characters approach the mound, they 
  attack again. The flying apes watch the fight, waiting for a chance to catch 
  someone unawares when they reach the mound.
  A few trinkets lie beneath the water just off the mound (discarded 
  gear from the flying apes’ victims), forming a randomly determined 
  treasure.
  Area 9: Side Entrance
  Priests and pilgrims once used this doorway to enter the pavilion from 
  their quarters. The priests’ quarters have sunk into the fens, but the ruins of 
  the pilgrims’ hostel still stand. The remains of a path running from here to 
  Area 1 at the hostel are very faintly visible.
  The text below assumes the party is viewing the area after opening the 
  door from the west. 
  A passage, some 10ft wide, with walls of cracked rock, extends 
  east from the door. The corridor has an arched stone ceiling. 
  Enough blocks are missing to show patches of sky.
  Some 20ft in from the door is a thicket of saplings and vines 
  that seems to grow from the very stones of floor.
  The foliage is natural; it grows from dirt-filled cracks in the floor.
  Gavriil had his servants add a deadly trap in the corridor. Anyone 
  passing through the foliage triggers the trap. The narrow rectangle on the 
  map shows the trigger. The trap has two effects. First, the rock falls into 
  the four spaces that border the trigger, dealing 4d6 points of damage to 
  anyone in those spaces. A save reduces the damage by half. Second, the 
  character triggering the traps is trapped in a net unless the character makes 
  a save. A netted character winds up wrapped in the net and suspended 
  from the ceiling.
  Afterward: Triggering the trap alerts the residents in Areas 4, 7, and 
  17. These creatures watch the passage’s east end. If nobody emerges after 
  a round or two, the pair of weretigers from Area 17 go to see if anyone has 
  been caught in the net. If intruders emerge from the passage, the residents 
  attack, as noted in their area descriptions.
  Area 10: Larders
  Through some trick of nature (or perhaps an extraplanar connection), 
  these chambers remain at about 40 degrees Fahrenheit around the clock. 
  The pavilion’s original staff opened the room’s doors from time to time to 
  provide a cool draft for anyone using the central pool’s west side (Area 8). 
  Gavriil merely uses the chambers as larders.
  A wave of shivery cold laced with the stench of blood and 
  sudden death rolls over you as the door opens. A mass of skinned 
  and dressed carcasses hang from the ceiling in the chamber 
  beyond.
  The carcasses are from animals Gavriil’s servants killed in the fens. The 
  smell comes from the carcasses, which are not very well cleaned, though 
  mostly unspoiled.
  Area 11: Storage
  These areas once were very cold, though now their temperature stays 
  near 60 degrees. Gavriil uses them to store beverages and dry goods.
  A cool, somewhat dry, puff of air washes over you as the door 
  opens. The draft carries a faintly pleasant scent. The chamber 
  beyond does not seem to contain anything except a mass of crates 
  and barrels.
  The crates and barrels contain supplies for Gavriil and his servants. 
  There are salt, spices, and beverages plus some preserved food (smoked 
  meat and dry fruit and vegetables) and some butter, lard, and flour. A few 
  crates contain valuable trade goods, including about 100 square yards of 
  very fine cotton cloth (worth 500gp) and 200 square yards of silk (worth 
  2000gp).
  Area 12: Hall
  This chamber once was one of several small chapels provided for the 
  faithful. An altar and idol once stood at the east end, but Gavriil removed 
  them. Today, the residents use the place as a dining hall (when they have a 
  taste for cooked food) and meeting hall. It usually stands empty.
  The odor of stale smoke fills the air. A table of rough planks, 
  lined with wicker chairs, fills much of the space in this narrow 
  chamber. Fairly solid looking chests lie against the north and 
  south walls. At the back of the chamber is an uneven dais covered 
  in ash and bits of half-burned wood. Stacks of firewood lie near 
  the circle of ash.
  The dais is where the altar and idol once stood. The residents use it as 
  a crude fireplace now. The firewood is nothing special and is somewhat 
  green. The chests were taken from a caravan. They’re not locked. Inside 
  are several sets of pewter and silver plates. The whole lot weighs 55 
  pounds and is worth 500gp. There also are a few bottles and casks of wine 
  and liquor, all drinkable, but of no particular value.
  Area 13: Kitchen
  Like the hall (Area 12), this chamber was once a chapel. Now the 
  residents use it as a kitchen.
  A smoky fire atop a raised, open hearth at the eastern end of this 
  small chamber fills the air with haze. A few covered pots and clay 
  vessels lie in the smoldering coals. Closer at hand, a very sturdy 
  looking table looks rather like an overturned cart or wagon. An 
  assortment of bloodstained wooden slabs, crusty knives, and 
  scraps of food sit on the table. A few slabs of meat (cooked and 
  raw) and several bunches of herbs hang from the smoke-stained 
  ceiling. There’s one other exit, a door to the north.
  Three servants always stay in here, cleaning game or preparing food. 
  Two of the servants are human women (normal, HP 2 each), kidnapped 
  from one of the villages in the fens. The third servant is a male wereboar. 
  He’s nominally the head cook, but he’s really here to keep an eye on the 
  women.
  The cooks are busy and tend not to notice any fighting elsewhere unless 
  
  129
  death in dyrgalas
  it occurs right on their doorstep — in Area 14 or right outside the door 
  connecting this room to Area 8.
  The wereboar hustles the women out if he notices any disturbances in the 
  pavilion. He herds them through Area 14 and into Area 16 unless the trouble 
  seems to be in Area 14, in which case he ushers them through Area 3 and 
  outside. If caught unawares, the wereboar pretends to be just another kidnapped 
  servant. Add the following text if the cooks are still here when the party enters.
  Three bedraggled-looking humans stand between the fire and 
  the table, two women and a man. They’re all dressed in soiled 
  smocks, and their faces and arms are smeared with grease. When 
  the door opens, the trio freezes in place and stare at you with 
  wild eyes.
  The kitchen holds nothing of interest or value, except, perhaps, the trio 
  of cooks.
  Lycanthrope, Wereboar: HD 5+2; HP 32; AC 4[15]; Atk 
  bite (2d6); Move 12; Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: 
  lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Tactics: The humans don’t fight, and merely shriek and cower if 
  attacked. The wereboar follows suit, initially. He tries to bluff the party 
  into leaving him behind along with his two charges. If that doesn’t work, 
  he looks for a chance to throw open the door to Area 14. Thereafter, he 
  changes form and attacks the closest foe.
  Afterward: Once the party deals with the wereboar, they can question 
  the women (they won’t talk in the wereboar’s presence). They have the 
  same information as the wererats in Area 4. The women are terrified of 
  the tigers in Area 14.
  Area 14: Guardpost
  Like Areas 12 and 13, this chamber was once a chapel.
  This chamber reeks with an overpowering, musky smell. Soiled 
  rushes cover the floor. There’s a deeper mound of rushes at the 
  chamber’s east end, or perhaps that area is raised a bit. There’s 
  not much time to study the architecture, however, as a veritable 
  pride of striped, shaggy felines each about a big as a pony regard 
  you with hungry eyes.
  Gavriil keeps a group of 4 tigers here to guard Areas 15 and 16.
  Tiger (4): HD 6; HP 30, 36, 34, 32; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws 
  (1d4+1), bite (1d8); Move 15 (swim 6); Save 11; AL N; CL/XP 
  7/600; Special: rear claws (if both front hit, two more claw 
  attacks).
  Tactics: The tigers attack anyone entering here except lycanthropes 
  or visitors accompanied by lycanthropes. The tigers don’t thinking much 
  during combat. One or two tigers attack the nearest foe while the others 
  try to circle around to the flanks.
  Afterward: The tigers don’t pay attention to what’s going on elsewhere 
  in the pavilion. Any disturbance here alerts the wereboar in Area 13 and 
  the weretigers in Area 17.
  Area 15: Spiral Stairs
  These stairs rise 25ft to Area 16, then a few more feet before they 
  crumble away to a broken shaft, with the top open the elements.
  Area 16: 
  Northeast Tower Ground Floor
  This chamber once served as a bath. Today, Gavriil uses it as a prison.
  Faint light filters down into this circular chamber through 
  gratings in ceiling. A round pit, mostly filled with leaves, 
  twigs, and masonry debris, takes up most of the floor. A cage of 
  blackened iron bars hangs from the ceiling over the pit.
  The pit once served as the bath. It’s about four feet deep and filled 
  nearly to the top with leaves and other detritus. The pool is home to 2 
  giant vipers that Gavriil keeps here with regular offerings of live prey.
  Gavriil added the iron cage to hold valuable prisoners (he keeps the 
  key). The combination of locked cage and venomous snakes discourages 
  escape attempts.
  Snake, Giant (Viper): HD 4; HP 20, 24; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (1d3 
  plus poison); Move 12; Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; Special: 
  lethal poison. (Monstrosities 440) 
  Tactics: The vipers have heavy obscurement in the pit. They wait 
  quietly unless someone disturbs their nest or the cage.
  Afterward: The vipers pay no attention to what’s going on outside their 
  chamber. Any fighting in here alerts the weretigers in Area 17.
  The wereboar in Area 13 might come here if flushed out. The wereboar 
  knows about the vipers and gives them the widest possible berth when 
  sheltering here.
  Area 17: 
  Northeast Tower Upper Floor
  This chamber looks much like Areas 5 and 7. It has windows in the 
  same configuration as Area 5 (though the weretigers keep the lower set 
  of bars unlocked) and a floor with gratings similar to Area 7. Gavriil uses 
  the place as a living space for himself and his weretiger bodyguards and 
  as a guardpost.
  A quartet of metal grates lie in this circular chamber’s stone 
  floor. At about floor level, two sets of windows look southeast 
  and northwest. The southeast windows have bars, while the 
  northwest pair are open and bare. Two pairs of windows, 
  identical to the pairs at floor level, are about 25ft farther up the 
  walls. Above that soars a great, but ragged dome.
  The chamber’s furnishings include a very large canopied bed, 
  a jumble of cushions, and at least a half dozen low planters 
  overflowing with flowering vines, and a few brightly colored rugs.
  Gavriil and his 2 weretiger bodyguards, Inessa and Zhanna, spend 
  nearly all their time here. Usually, one keeps an eye on Area 8 (through 
  the barred windows) and the other watches the archway to the staircase 
  outside (Area 15).
  Gavriil, Weretiger Druid: HD 10; HP 64; AC 0[19]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d4), bite (1d10); Move 12; Save 2 (with cloak and 
  ring); AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +2 save bonus vs. 
  fire, lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit, spells Drd9 
  (4/3/3/2).
  
  130
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  Spells: 1st—detect magic, faerie fire (x2), purify water; 
  2nd—heat metal, obscuring mist, produce flame; 3rd—
  call lightning, plant growth, water breathing; 4th—cure 
  serious wounds, insect plague.
  Equipment: mistletoe, cloak of displacement, ring of 
  protection +1, potion of extra-healing, four red gems 
  worth 25gp each, keys to all locks in pavilion and 
  hostel.
  Inessa and Zhanna, Weretiger Bodyguards: HD 6; HP 36, 38; 
  AC 3[16]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), bite (1d10) or longbow x2 (1d6); 
  Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: lycanthropy (if 
  victim brought below 50% of hit point maximum), silver or +1 
  or better weapon to hit.
  Tactics: When possible, Gavriil and his guards attack from a distance. 
  Gavriil uses spells such as produce flame, heat metal, or call lightning, as 
  he deems most appropriate. The bodyguards stand at the windows firing 
  their bows.
  If foes manage to close to melee range, Gavriil uses obscuring mist and 
  insect plague to slow up foes. Inessa and Zhanna do their best to protect 
  Gavriil from melee attacks. If forced to fight, Gavriil uses his natural 
  weaponry.
  Inessa and Zhanna fight to death, at least as long as Gavriil is still alive 
  and kicking. Gavriil fights as long as both bodyguards are still on their 
  feet. If forced to fight alone, Gavriil fights for a round or two, then dives 
  out of window and into the pool in Area 8 (the barred windows in here are 
  kept unlocked). Once in the water, Gavriil stays submerged to escape to 
  Area 18 to summon the fire elemental and then retreat to Pilgrims’ Hostel.
  Afterward: Gavriil and his guards keep little in here except personal 
  gear. The robe of blending Gavriil took from Theronia the medusa (see 
  Area 7) is spread out atop the bed canopy. One of the cushions holds 18 
  red garnets worth 10gp each (Gavriil uses these in the idol at Area 18).
  If captured, Inessa and Zhanna say nothing if they think Gavriil is still 
  alive. If convinced Gavriil is dead, they answer questions. They know the 
  area fairly well, though they don’t know where Gavriil hides all his loot.
  If Gavriil fails to escape, he’ll try to bargain for his life by revealing 
  where he concealed all his treasures. He insists that he cannot call off any 
  of his guards. He offers to help the party with some of the combat, but 
  only as a cover for another escape attempt.
  If the party asks Gavriil about the idol in Area 18 (as they might if 
  they’ve questioned Theronia in Area 7), he says he’s hidden the coins 
  and gems in a hollow space below the idol. In fact, Gavriil drops a gem 
  in there from time to time to keep the gate that the idol marks open (see 
  Area 18). If he thinks he can get away with it, Gavriil offers to “open” 
  the idol for the group. In reality, he plans to summon a fire elemental to 
  attack the party.
  Besides his gear, Gavriil carries keys to all the locks in the pavilion and 
  the hostel.
  Area 18: Idol
  The hollow, bronze shell of some forgotten ancient deity stands here. 
  The people who built the pavilion used it as a focus for summoning 
  elementals.
  Water laps against a low stone apron, still mostly intact, here. 
  A semicircular dais rises above the rippling water. A wide 
  bronze shell, green with verdigris, is atop the dais. The shell’s 
  outside resembles some kind of birdlike (or perhaps amphibious) 
  creature. Apparently, the shell was once a hollow bronze statue.
  When the pavilion was new, the idol served as a summoning device 
  for elementals of all kinds. Today, with the idol broken, the idol can 
  
  131
  death in dyrgalas
  summon only a single fire elemental once a month. To stay active, the 
  idol must receive a live coal each day and a red gem worth at least 10gp 
  each month. If these offerings stop for even a day, the idol becomes 
  inactive for at least a year. If the elemental the idol summons is killed, 
  the idol likewise falls inactive for at least a year. Once inactive, the 
  idol must receive offerings each day (and month) to become active 
  again.
  If red gems worth at least 50gp are placed in the idol, a 16 HD fire 
  elemental erupts from its hollow interior.
  Gavriil keeps the idol active. A look inside reveals a pile of gray ash 
  and half-burned coals.
  Elemental, Fire: HD 16; HP 98; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (3d8); 
  Move 12; Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 17/3400; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, ignite materials.
  Tactics: Gavriil has gotten to know the elemental from the idol and the 
  creature attacks anyone else it meets, even if the character used the idol to 
  summon it. In battle, the elemental tries to set as many foes afire as it can. 
  The elemental fights to the death, or until all its foes retreat into the water. 
  In the latter case, the elemental waits one round, then returns to its home 
  plane if no one exits the water to carry on the fight.
  Pilgrims’ Hostel
  The ancients built the hostel as a companion to the pavilion. Pilgrims 
  who came from afar to visit the place were housed here.
  The hostel lies about a quarter mile west of the pavilion. The faint 
  remains of a path that once connected the two can still be seen. The path 
  connects Area 9 in the pavilion with Area 1 in the hostel.
  Gavriil uses the hostel as a prison for captives and as a hiding place for 
  some of his loot.
  Conditions and Features
  The hostel has architecture similar to the pavilion and is as decayed and 
  overgrown as the pavilion. Conditions inside are identical to those within 
  the pavilion.
  Approaching the Hostel
  The party can reach the hostel by hacking through the undergrowth 
  on the island, or by using the path leading from the pavilion. In either 
  case, the trees on the island tend to screen the group from view if they’re 
  traveling overland. The guard in Area 6, however, might see them as they 
  enter. See Area 6 for more details.
  If the party tries the climb the hostel’s walls or approach from the air, 
  the air elemental in Area 6 notices them and attacks unless the group is 
  invisible. The guard in Area 6 also sees visible aerial visitors.
  Area 1: Entrance
  A weedy trail of crushed stone leads to a tumbledown pile of 
  mud-colored stone as large as an aristocrat’s villa. The place 
  has a walled compound with three towers. Two of those are 
  square and flank a narrow gateway that looks to be the only 
  entrance. It’s hard to tell how tall these entrance towers once 
  were. All but the ground floors have fallen away now. The third 
  tower is round, and it rises from the compound’s southwest 
  corner. It seems to be two floors high, with a tattered roof over 
  the upper floor.
  Area 1A: Entrance Towers
  Priests and guards once used these chambers to keep an eye on the 
  place. Gavriil’s servants use them for much the same thing. Visitors can 
  get a look inside by opening the doors or peering through the windows.
  The space in here is a square chamber with windows facing the 
  complex’s gateway and courtyard. Inside, there’s a crude wooden 
  table with a couple of wicker chairs and a few crates and barrels. 
  There seems to be a spiral stair leading upward, but it’s blocked 
  with rubble. Opposite the stair lies a big mass of leaves, twigs, 
  and old rags.
  The staircases are indeed blocked. They once led to an upper floor, now 
  gone.
  Living in each tower is a total of 4 wererats. The pair in one tower rests 
  while the other pair keeps watch. It’s possible to duck past the guards; 
  however, the guard in Area 6 also might see the intruder.
  The piles of leaves and rags are wererat nests. When resting, the 
  wererats hide themselves in their nests. When “on duty” the wererats sit at 
  the tables, glancing out the windows and occasionally rising to take longer 
  looks out the windows.
   
  Lycanthrope, Wererat (4): HD 3; HP 15, 13, 16, 14; AC 
  6[13]; Atk bite (1d3), short sword (1d6) or light crossbow 
  (1d4+1); Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: control 
  rats, lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit, surprise on 
  1-4 on d6.
  Tactics: The 2 active wererats attack the moment they see intruders. 
  They spread out as much as they can. The pair of resting rats joins the fray 
  one round later.
  Afterward: The guard in Area 6 notices any fighting here after two 
  rounds, and might see intruders even before a fight (see the Approaching 
  the Hostel section). If alerted, the guard does not intervene, but sees to his 
  own defenses.
  If captured and questioned, the wererats can reveal much the same 
  information as the wererats in the pavilion, plus the following:
  They know the hostel’s layout and denizens, but not about Gavriil’s 
  caches of treasure (Area 4). They’ll reveal the location of the prison 
  (Area 5) and the kennels (Area 4), but insist they hold only mangy dogs.
  They know about the air elemental in Area 6, but not about the water 
  elemental in Area 2.
  They tell the party that Areas 3 and 6 house human mercenaries. They 
  know these people are werewolves, but conceal that information if they can.
  Area 2: Courtyard
  Beyond the gates is a smallish courtyard paved with muck-
  covered stones. Here and there, cattails and other water-loving 
  plants grow in the pavement’s gaps. At the courtyard’s center 
  stands a burbling fountain with a basin covered in lily pads.
  The fountain is home to an 8 HD water elemental.
  Elemental, Water: HD 8; HP 45; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (3d10); 
  Move 6 (swim 18); Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: +1 or 
  better weapon to hit, overturn boats.
  Tactics: The elemental is concealed in the basin and attacks anyone 
  except a hostel resident or someone in a resident’s company. When 
  
  132
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  the elemental attacks, the fountain spews water all over the courtyard 
  (that’s why the yard is soggy and covered in muck). While the fountain 
  sprays, everyone in the courtyard is considered touching water for 
  purposes of combat with the elemental. The spray also gives anyone 
  light concealment at a distance of 10 to 20ft and heavy concealment at 
  a distance of 25ft or more. The elemental fights to the death, and the 
  fountain stops spewing one round after the elemental is killed or stops 
  fighting.
  Afterward: Everyone in the hostel notices when the fountain sprays. 
  They avoid the blinding spray, but prepare for ranged combat against the 
  invaders if they defeat the elemental.
  Area 3: Tower Ground Floor 
  This area was once a bath similar to Area 16 in the pavilion. Gavriil’s 
  servants turned it into a barracks of sorts. Gavriil fitted the current door 
  with an arrow slit. The text below assumes the party is peering through the 
  slit or opened the door.
  Faint light filters down into this circular chamber through 
  gratings in the ceiling. A round pit in the floor’s center looks 
  mostly filled with rock. A dying fire smolders atop the rocks. 
  Four crude bunks are arranged around the pit. Each bunk has 
  a crude chest with a flat top at its foot. An open arch to the left 
  reveals a spiral stair going up.
  The stairs rise 25ft to Area 6.
  Living here are 4 werewolves, but one is on guard duty in Area 6 at any 
  given time. Two of the three werewolves snooze in their bunks or pass the 
  time gambling, using a chest as a table.
  Lycanthrope, Werewolf (3): HD 4+4; HP 28, 30, 32; AC 5[14]; 
  bite (1d6+1) or longbow x2 (1d6); Move 12; Save 13; AL C; CL/
  XP 5/240; Special: lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of 
  hit point maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Tactics: If forewarned, one werewolf runs up the stairs to Area 6 to 
  make ranged attacks at any intruders. The remaining two try to hold 
  the door. They keep their door closed, and one uses the arrow slit. If 
  foes manage to breach the door, they switch to melee attacks. After the 
  werewolves fight for a round or two, the worgs from Area 4 break out of 
  their kennels and join the fray. In battle, bloodlust quickly overcomes the 
  werewolves and they fight to the death. If intruders break into Area 4 and 
  attack the worgs there, the werewolves join the fight after a round.
  Afterward: The guard in Area 6 notices a fight here immediately, and 
  makes ranged attacks against any foes he can see.
  If captured and questioned, the werewolves have the same information 
  as the wererats in Area 1. If asked about the pavilion, they reveal much 
  the same information as Theronia the medusa (see Area 7 in the pavilion), 
  though they try to bargain for their lives and freedom before revealing it.
  Area 4: Kennels
  These areas once served as dormitories for visiting pilgrims. Gavriil’s 
  servants converted them into kennels (none too clean) for 3 worgs.
  Tiers of wooden bunks, sans mattresses, line the walls in this 
  dank, stinky chamber. An uneven layer of twigs and soiled rushes 
  covers the floor.
  One worg lies in each kennel, snoozing until a disturbance elsewhere in 
  the hostel awakens it.
  Wolf, Worg (3): HD 4; HP 20, 22, 24; AC 6[13]; Atk bite (1d6+1); 
  Move 18; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: none.
  Tactics: A worg confronted in its kennel attacks the closest foe. Any 
  fighting in a kennel or in Areas 3 or 6 brings out all the worgs (they 
  can easily burst the doors). When fighting in the open, the worgs try to 
  surround a foe so they can fight as much as possible from the rear or 
  flanks.
  Afterward: The worgs and the werewolves is Areas 3 and 6 support 
  each other as noted in the Area 3 description.
  Gavriil buried a 1000XP randomly generated treasure under the floor 
  in each kennel.
  Area 5: Storage
  This area once served as a meeting and dining hall for visiting pilgrims. 
  Now it serves as a storage room similar to Area 11 in the pavilion. It’s 
  not as cold as the pavilion’s storage area, but it has a similar collection of 
  trade goods.
  If the party came to the area to rescue captives, any commoners who 
  are not likely to bring any ransom payments are imprisoned here. Gavriil 
  keeps them manacled and chained to rings set into the floor. He carries the 
  keys with him.
  Area 6: Tower Upper Floor
  The staircase here descends 25ft to Area 3.
  The people who built the hostel used this area as a space for quiet 
  reflection and meditating. Gavriil’s servants use it as a guard post.
  This area is mostly open to the air. A circle of arches supports a 
  badly damaged roof. There’s a stone seat under each arch.
  A werewolf stands guard here all the time. He keeps watch on Area 1 
  and the courtyard. An air elemental also hovers here, near the peak of 
  the roof.
  Lycanthrope, Werewolf: HD 4+4; HP 28; AC 5[14]; bite (1d6+1) 
  or longbow x2 (1d6); Move 12; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 5/240; 
  Special: lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Elemental, Air: HD 12; HP 65; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (2d8); Move 
  0 (fly 36); Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, whirlwind.
  Tactics: The werewolf uses his bow against any foes he sees 
  approaching. The werewolves there rally and attack when the guard does, 
  along with the worgs from Area 4. The elemental has orders to attack 
  anyone approaching the hostel from the air or trying to scale the walls. 
  The elemental stays out of any fight unless someone takes to the air or 
  climbs the walls, or if it is attacked itself. Once in combat, the elemental 
  fights to the death, as does the werewolf.
  Afterward: If the party manages to capture the werewolf, he has the 
  same information as his comrades in Area 3.
  
  133
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  The Darkening of Namjan Forest is an adventure intended for use 
  by four to six 4th-level characters. In the course of the adventure, the 
  party explores the Namjan Forest, a woodland threatened by the creeping 
  advance of the Plane of Shadow made manifest through the presence 
  of a rare shadow elemental. This creature, a pure embodiment of the 
  gloomy substance that underlies the Plane of Shadow, has escaped a long 
  imprisonment within an ancient artifact known as the Darkling Lanthorn. 
  The party must investigate the phenomenon affecting Namjan Forest, 
  trace the Darkening back to its source, and destroy the agent seeking to 
  infect the Material Plane with the touch of shadow.
  The adventure is assumed to occur in a temperate forest region bordered 
  by hills on the edge of a small duchy. The Referee can alter the adventure 
  to better fit his campaign world if necessary. In the Lost Lands campaign 
  setting, the Namjan Forest is a region of the great Haunted Wood on 
  the Frontier of the Grand Duchy of Reme. It lies in the gap between the 
  Ashen Hills and the Gryphon Hills, some 150 miles north of the village 
  of Dreikeng.
  Background
  The Namjan Forest is a modest-size woodlands growing in the fork 
  between two chains of hills forested along the verge of civilization. The 
  Namjan is an old wood, but not a pristine one. The residents of the realm 
  have long felled its trees, hunted its wildlife, and made charcoal within its 
  borders. They’ve even gone so far as to live within it, and a small village 
  stands upon the shores of the Fehlween River, the large waterway that 
  The Darkening of 
  Namjan Forest
  By Michael Curtis
  
  134
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  flows through the Namjan. In short, the Namjan Forest was a place that 
  seemed to harbor few mysteries. This impression, however, was horribly 
  wrong.
  Eons ago, when the hills were higher and the Fehlween wilder, the 
  land now filled by the woodland was held by a sorcerer-warlord named 
  Dyraxl Uhl-Kal-Totten. Uhl-Kal-Totten built his fortress upon an easily 
  defensible rise of land near the center of the hill-bordered lands. From 
  this keep, the sorcerer-warlord ruled over the small farms and villages 
  that lay under his gaze and conducted arcane experiments to increase his 
  magical prowess. Uhl-Kal-Totten, like many a man who carved his way 
  to despotism, desired to expand his holdings, dreaming of an empire that 
  spanned from distant shore to far-flung shore. And, like many a would-be 
  tyrant, Uhl-Kal-Totten’s dreams never came to fruition.
  The circumstances that led to Uhl-Kal-Totten’s fall are long 
  forgotten. The few scraps of lore surviving from that distant time 
  record that the sorcerer-warlord’s enemies laid siege to his fortress, 
  tearing down its walls with magic and hurled boulders. Uhl-Kal-Totten 
  fought to the last, ultimately calling down powerful sorceries onto his 
  own head to decimate himself, his keep, and the multitude of invaders 
  who thirsted for his blood. When the smoke cleared and the dust 
  settled, all that remained of the warlord and his fortress were scorched 
  bones and broken stones. His enemies returned to their homelands and 
  the dreams and accomplishments of Uhl-Kal-Totten were forgotten.
  As the centuries rolled along, the lands that had been tamed under 
  Uhl-Kal-Totten’s rules grew wild once more. Seedlings became mighty 
  trees, the high hills wore down like old teeth, and the Fehlween grew 
  slow and tired. Where once was tilled fields and a towering keep, now 
  only old trees and shallow gullies remained. But this placid landscape 
  hid a dark secret.
  Not all of Uhl-Kal-Totten’s dreams died in the conflagration. When 
  his fortress fell, the rubble buried his deepest cellars and undercrofts 
  under a mountain of blasted debris. Deep underground slumbered 
  magic long forgotten by history, relics the sorcerer-warlord planned 
  on tapping to achieve his dreams of empire. Among those forgotten 
  objects was the Darkling Lanthorn, a lamp that threw not light, but 
  gloom, and contained an obscure and titanic elemental drawn from the 
  Plane of Shadow.
  The Darkling Lanthorn may have laid in quietude for millennia 
  more had it not been for a tree. A mighty oak sprang up in the ruins 
  above the forgotten foundations, its bole growing from the now nearly 
  vanished stones that once formed Uhl-Kal-Totten’s keep. As the tree 
  grew, its roots dug deep, burrowing through the ground to seek out 
  nutrients and support the tremendous trunk and branches that towered 
  over the land. One of these probing roots wound its way through a 
  gap in the masonry walls of Uhl-Kal-Totten’s cellar and — perhaps by 
  chance or perhaps guided by supernatural powers not fully understood 
  — curled about the handle of the Darkling Lanthorn.
  With the long deferred touch of a living creature, the Darkling 
  Lanthorn’s slumbering occupant awoke. The devastation that destroyed 
  the fortress above had long since caused the protective barriers and 
  wards placed around the Lanthorn to weaken and the shadow elemental 
  within the lamp easily shook off the feeble defenses that remained. With 
  nothing left to contain it, the Darkling Lanthorn’s power climbed out of 
  its moldering erstwhile prison and snaked its way into the oak above.
  The once-mighty tree is now ground zero for an infectious gloom 
  spreading throughout the Namjan Forest, a plague known as the 
  Darkening. Tendrils of darkness and wisps of misty gloom flow 
  outward from the tree, staining everything they brush against with 
  the touch of Shadow. The Fehlween’s waters have turned ebony and 
  the animals that once frolicked within the woods have … changed. 
  Hunters and loggers have disappeared in the now-dark forest and those 
  who survived speak of a relentless and every-hungry gloom intent on 
  plunging the entire wood — and perhaps even the lands beyond it — 
  into shadow.
  The power within the Darkling Lanthorn is just beginning to grow 
  and, unless someone can root out the source of this tangible darkness, 
  the fate of those living outside the Namjan soon hangs in the balance. 
  It is up to a band of intrepid adventurers to find the heart of darkness 
  before it is too late.
  Starting the Adventure
  First alerted to the threat by the survivors of the Darkening of Stillwater 
  (see Area 4), the Duke of the Northmarches sent a company of soldiers into 
  the Forest to investigate the matter. When these well-armed veterans, led 
  by the ranger, Egrihl, failed to return, seemingly swallowed up by the ill-
  omened woodland, his grace declared a standing reward of 2500gp and the 
  promise of a noble claim on the Namjan to whoever discerns the origin of 
  the gloomy menace and puts an end to it before it spreads across the duchy. 
  With an offer of that magnitude, it is hoped the party devote themselves to 
  finding and stopping the insidious taint afflicting Namjan Forest.
  If the characters are renowned adventurers, an agent of the duke 
  seeks them out and explains his grace’s offer. The agent can provide the 
  information below and arranges an audience with the duke to further 
  elaborate on the offer. 
  Gathering Information
  A wise party seeks out further information about Namjan Forest and the 
  mysterious events occurring within it before beginning its investigation. 
  The party can obtain information by either questioning occupants of the 
  nearby settlements of Dreikeng or Nerimar or through the duke or his 
  agents. The following information is gleaned:
  1. The shadowy infestation was first noticed about a week ago when the 
  Fehlween turned dark. The river’s discoloration was originally thought 
  to be sedimentation flushed down from the hills, but the water soon had 
  strange effects on the animals and people who drank from it. 
  2. In addition to the darkened waters of the Fehlween, the forest itself 
  has grown dim. Shadows cling to branches like vines and pool in thickets, 
  exuding an aura of menace. The sound of animal noise has diminished and 
  even the air has grown heavy and still as if tainted by an invisible weight.
  3. According to the refugees fleeing the forest, this encroaching 
  darkness spreads like a sickness, infecting those exposed to its touch 
  over several days. The creeping shadow drains away vitality from living 
  creatures. Those touched by the gloom either vanish utterly, fading away 
  as if ghosts, or are transformed by the darkness. Transformed creatures 
  grow a dusky ash in color and manifest unnatural powers. Their minds 
  become evil and they revel in violence.
  4. Several areas of interest are in Namjan Forest, including two 
  permanent settlements called Stillwater and Thistlehill; a low, stone-
  covered hill known as the Tumbles; a natural cave called the Gullet; and 
  the ruins of an old watchtower of amazing age.
  5. Stillwater is a human hamlet located on the western shore of the 
  Fehlween River deep in the forest. According to refugees, the Darkening 
  has overwhelmed it and the fate of its inhabitants is unknown.
  6. Thistlehill is a small dwarvish community situated near the western 
  edge of the forest. The dwarf mine a rich quartz vein and trade the shining 
  stones at Stillwater. No one knows if the Darkening has touched Thistlehill 
  or if the dwarf miners are even aware of the threat.
  7. The Gullet is a small cave located near the middle of the forest and 
  is said to be home to various monsters. Legends conflict, and trolls, orcs, 
  demons, and even a dragon have all been said to live within it.
  8. The riverside hamlet of Stillwater is perhaps the best place for the 
  party to begin its investigation of the Namjan. The village can be reached by 
  either paddling up the Fehlween River or, if the party lacks water transport, 
  by following a horse trail that runs along the east side of the river.
  Random Encounters
  The characters are subject to random encounters while traveling 
  through the Namjan and on the Fehlween River. There is a 20% chance 
  of an encounter occurring at select intervals depending on whether the 
  party is in the woods or on the river. The Referee should check for random 
  encounters twice a day while venturing through the forest, once in the late 
  morning and once in the evening. If the party is traveling on the water, a 
  
  135
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  random encounter check is made every hour while on the river. Use the 
  following tables to determine the random encounter if one occurs.
  Namjan Forest Random Encounters
  1d8
  Encounter
  1
  Encroaching shadow (see below)
  2
  1 shadow-touched moose (see Namjan Forest, Area 9)
  3
  1d3 shadow-touched giant bats (see Namjan Forest, 
  Area 6)
  4
  1 shadow-touched owlbear (see Namjan Forest, 
  Area 10)
  5
  1d6 shadow-touched wolves (see below)
  6
  1 greater shadow  (see Namjan Forest, Area 1)
  7–8
  1d4 shadows (see Namjan Forest, Area 4)
  Fehlween River Random Encounters
  1d6
  Encounter
  1
  Encroaching shadow (see below)
  2
  1 greater shadow (see Namjan Forest, Area 1)
  3
  1d3 shadow-touched alligator gar (see Namjan 
  Forest, Area 3)
  4
  1d3 shadow-touched giant bats (see Namjan Forest, 
  Area 6)
  5–6
  1d4 shadows (see Namjan Forest, Area 4)
   
  Random Encounter Notes
  Encroaching Shadow: A long, thin finger of shadow creeps out to wrap 
  itself around a random character. Any creature with who is specifically keeping 
  an eye out for trouble has a 1-3 on 1d6 of noticing the creeping finger before it 
  strikes. The targeted character must make a saving throw to avoid being touched 
  by the shadow tendril. If the tendril is noticed by the character or an ally who 
  sees the tendril’s approach and warns him, he makes the saving throw as normal. 
  If unseen, the saving throw is at a –4 penalty. On a failed saving throw, the finger 
  latches onto the character, siphoning 1d4 points of strength. 
  The tendril continues to drain the character on subsequent rounds, 
  requiring the character to make a saving throw or lose another 1d4 points 
  of strength. The affected character or his allies can cut the tendril with 
  magical weapons (treat as AC 9[10] and 5hp) or can break free by making 
  a standard strength check (3d6 vs. score). Once broken or cut, the tendril 
  dissipates into sooty mist.
  Wolf, Shadow-Touched: HD 2+2; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d4+1 
  plus strength drain); Move 18; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; 
  Special: drain 1 point of strength with hit. 
  The Darkening 
  Shadow’s taint is slowing expanding across the forest, spreading from 
  its epicenter of the Darkling Oak (see The Namjan Forest, Area 12). The 
  forest map shows what portion of the woodland is already under Shadow’s 
  sway and what has yet to succumb to the creeping gloom. The party can 
  rest in a hex untouched by Shadow, allowing them to recoup and perhaps 
  shake off Shadow’s touch (see The Danger of Shadow Inflection below).
  Once the adventure begins, the Referee rolls 1d4+1 at the start of each 
  day. The result is the number of hexes on the forest map that Shadow 
  spreads to. The Referee then determines which hexes are affected and marks 
  them to chart Shadow’s progress. The Referee can choose the afflicted 
  hexes randomly, using whatever means he desires, or pick areas that are 
  most dramatically appropriate and heighten tension among the characters 
  (the party awakens to discover Shadow surrounded them during the night, 
  forcing them to venture through affected land to escape, for example).
  If Shadow ever claims the entire Namjan Forest, its grip becomes 
  absolute. Even the destruction of the Darkling Lanthorn and its elemental 
  defender is insufficient to break Shadow’s hold on the land and further 
  troubles are bound to affect the region (see Concluding the Adventure 
  for further details and ideas).
  The Danger of Shadow Infection
  The influence of the Darkling Lanthorn pervades Namjan Forest, 
  insinuating itself into every living creature within its borders. The 
  characters are subject to this infection as they explore the tainted 
  woodlands and, should they fail to root out the source of the corruption 
  quickly, may succumb to its effects. 
  Each day (or portion thereof) a character is within the boundaries of 
  the forest, he must make a saving throw or become drained of vitality. 
  This drain manifests in 1d4 points of strength drain. Rest while inside 
  any portion of the Namjan Forest under Shadow’s hold cannot relieve 
  constitution drain through exposure to the Darkening. A character suffering 
  from vitality loss due to the Darkening can be cured only by resting in 
  an unaffected area of forest or outside its boundaries. A restoration spell 
  removes the strength drain.
  Characters directly exposed to the spreading gloom also lose vigor. 
  A character drinking from the tainted waters of the Fehlween River or 
  eating the flesh of a shadow-infected creature must make a saving throw 
  or immediately lose 1d4 points of strength.
  A creature whose strength is reduced to zero from exposure to the 
  Darkening does not die as normal, but is instead completely overcome 
  by the shadow taint. A creature either fades away to the Plane of Shadow 
  (50% chance), becomes shadow-touched (40% chance), or becomes a 
  shadow (10%). With this fate, the character becomes an NPC no longer 
  under the player’s control.
  Namjan Forest
  Namjan Forest is predominately first- and second-growth trees of 
  maple, oak, spruce, and pine. A thick layer of rich, dark loam that supports 
  small plants and shrubs, as well as growths of mushrooms, mosses, and 
  similar low flora cover the forest floor. Deadfalls are common away from 
  the trails that snake through the woods. Close to these paths, fallen limbs 
  and dead trees have been cleared for firewood and charcoal-making.
  General Features
  Atmosphere: The Forest is much quieter than normal. Little animal 
  noise is heard inside the forest, and the few sounds that are present 
  echo from areas not yet overcome by the Darkening. The air is still and 
  unmoving, and travelers experience a sense of being watched from the 
  ever-present shadows.
  Trails: Two types of paths wander through the forest: main trails and 
  secondary footpaths. The trail links the settlements of Thistlehill and 
  Stillwater with the outside world, while the smaller footpaths leave the 
  main trail to reach smaller sites of interest inside the woodlands. The main 
  trail is wide enough to accommodate two horses and riders traveling side-
  by-side, while the footpaths are narrower, forcing riders into a single file. 
  The main trail is largely clear of forest debris, and the occasional sign 
  points in the direction of Thistlehill and Stillwater. Footpaths lack signage 
  and tend to be partially overgrown by brush.
  Illumination: Due to the effects of the Darkening, portions of Namjan 
  Forest are permanently cloaked in dense shadows. These shades are 
  ominous and seem to almost possess a physical heft. Draperies of gloom 
  dangle like hanging moss from tree limbs and darkness collects in drifts 
  like fallen snow beneath the canopy. This cloak of shadows means that 
  even in daylight the forest is lightly obscured to all creatures without 
  
  136
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  1 hex = 1 mile
  
  137
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  darkvision. Additionally, as a result of the overall gloom, targets farther 
  than 60ft away from the party are considered to have half cover.
  The Fehlween River: The river averages between 60 and 100ft in width 
  and is 30ft deep at its center. The waters of the Fehlween are pitch black 
  due to the Darkening as shadow creeps down its length. An individual 
  putting his hand in the water discovers the fluid has an inexplicable heft 
  as if filled with sediment, but there is no gritty feel to the river. In fact, the 
  waters feel almost silky, but it is a silkiness that has no place on this earth. 
  Physical contact with the water is not hazardous, but see The Danger of 
  Shadow Infection for the consequences of drinking from the river.
  Namjan Forest
  Area 1: Shadow Attack
   
  The sound of screams rings from the riverbank. A small boat 
  packed with bags, tools, and similar goods rests on the shore 
  among reeds and mud. A body lies sprawled besides the boat, 
  looking curiously drained and ashen. A human male dressed 
  in homespun clothing stands over the body swinging a wood 
  axe wildly. Looming over the panicked man is a patch of deep 
  darkness that possesses a vaguely humanoid shape.
  The woodsman and his now-dead companion are refugees fleeing the 
  Darkening by traveling down the Fehlween River when they encountered 
  a greater shadow. They took to the shore to escape the creature, but it 
  killed one of them and is set on slaying the other. 
  The greater shadow concentrates its attacks on the woodsman, killing him 
  in 2 rounds unless destroyed or driven off. It attacks the party if they intervene.
  Shadow, Greater: HD 4+4; HP 26; AC 5[14]; Atk touch (1d6 
  plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1d4 points of 
  strength with hit.
  If the woodsman survives the fight, he thanks the party and provides 
  any information listed under “Gathering Information” above, as well as 
  directions to the various places of interest (see Namjan Forest map). He 
  has no desire to join the party and only wishes to escape. He insists on 
  burying his dead companion, unaware that the man will rise as a shadow 
  in 1d4 hours. Unless remove curse is cast upon the corpse, it crawls from 
  its grace as a newborn shadow and the woodsman later becomes its first 
  victim. If the woodsman dies from the shadow king’s attack and remove 
  curse is not cast on the bodies, the two newly spawned shadows track 
  down the party and attack after dark during the party’s first night inside the 
  forest (treat as an automatic nighttime random encounter).
  The boat is packed with clothes, tools, and other household goods the 
  two owned. The only objects of value or interest are a pair of lanterns 
  (full), a shovel, a wood axe, two daggers, a shortbow and 20 arrows, a 
  small barrel half filled with whiskey, a pipe and full tobacco pouch, and a 
  leather sack containing 56cp, 24sp, and 6gp.
  Area 2: Forest Trail
  A dirt path wide enough to accommodate two riders traveling 
  side by side leads into the forest. The branches above form a 
  tunnel of leaves that hang motionless in the still air. The hairs 
  on your neck stand up as you view the forest, for it feels as if 
  something inexplicable is missing from the woods.
  This main trail enters Namjan Forest at this point and winds its way 
  through the woods until it ends at Thistlehill (Area 8). Traveling on the 
  trail is considered normal terrain. Characters walking or riding through 
  the forest proper move as if traversing difficult terrain.
  Area 3: River Bridge
   
  A 100ft long wooden bridge crosses the inky waters 20ft 
  above the river. Fashioned from rough timbers lashed and nailed 
  together, the bridge is wide enough to allow wagons to cross. 
  A pair of thin-looking railings run along the edges of the span, 
  providing some protection against falling into the river below.
  This bridge once allowed traffic to and from Stillwater to cross the 
  river, but the corruption of shadow has undermined its purpose. The touch 
  of shadow has weakened the bridge’s pilings, and the span is now a hazard 
  to travelers. Besides its failing condition, an alligator gar, tainted by 
  shadow, swims around the bridge’s supports and are drawn to individuals 
  in the water.
  The bridge has a cumulative 10% chance per person of collapsing. Thus, 
  the first person to travel across it has a 10% chance of causing a collapse, 
  while the fourth risks a 40% chance. A party of six faces a 60% chance of 
  collapsing the bridge if they all cross it together. A large transport such as 
  a horse or cart automatically causes the bridge supports to fail.
  If a collapse occurs, the person or creature causing the collapse and 
  anyone within 10ft must make a saving throw or fall into the Fehlween 
  River and take 1d6 points of bludgeoning damage from the fall.
  A large alligator gar succumbed to the Darkening hunt in the black water 
  beneath the bridge. The savage fish immediately attacks any creature that 
  falls into the river.
  Shadow-Touched Alligator Gar: HD 8; HP 46; AC 3[16]; Atk 
  bite (5d4 plus strength drain); Move 30; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 
  10/1400; Special: drain 1 point of strength with bite.
  Area 4: Stillwater
   
  A cluster of small cottages stands along the western shore of 
  the dark river. These rude huts appear dim and indistinct, their 
  edges blurred by shadows. The structures almost seem as if they 
  are fashioned from gossamer scraps of gloom rather than wood 
  and plaster. The air surrounding the hamlet is also dim and heavy 
  with darkness as if a cloud of soot and ash clings to the village 
  with an unrelenting grip. You detect no signs of life.
  Stillwater succumbed to the Darkening swiftly as its residents and 
  its existence depended on the Fehlween River. The hamlet is entirely 
  corrupted by shadow and is no longer part of the Material Plane.
  Most of the two-score residents of Stillwater died from shadow’s 
  infection, but a half-dozen emerged from the blight as servants of the 
  Darkening. Lurking along the gloomy edges of town are 6 shadows that 
  ambush anyone who enters the village.
  Shadow (6): HD 2+2; HP 10x2, 12x2, 8x2; AC 7[12]; Atk touch 
  (1d4 plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 
  4/120; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1 point of 
  strength with hit.
  The cottages of Stillwater are insubstantial, being nothing more than 
  dark reflections of the Shadow Plane. Solid objects pass through them 
  and even magical weapons and spells have no more effect than slicing a 
  shadow with a knife. Characters peering inside the buildings observe that 
  
  138
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  the Darkening overcame Stillwater suddenly. Half-eaten, shadowy meals 
  sit atop gossamer tables and chores appear to have stopped mid-task. 
  Observation of the area discerns that the occupants of buildings on the 
  southeast end of the village had some warning before being overcome by 
  the march of shadow, suggesting the encroachment came from the north 
  or west.
  Area 5: The Charcoal-Maker’s Shack
  The smell of burnt wood hangs heavy in the gloomy air. Before 
  you is a small clearing containing a single hut made of cut 
  timbers and sod. A ring of charred wood, dead coals, and ash 
  surrounds the clearing, encompassing the entire area within its 
  blackened embrace.
  Until recently, the hut was home to one of the charcoal-makers who 
  dwelt in the forest. As the Darkening spread through the woods, the 
  charcoal-maker and his family found themselves surrounded by the 
  encroaching shadows. Seeking to save themselves, they heaped wood 
  in a ring around their home and set it alight to drive back the darkness. 
  This worked well until nightfall when the burning barrier threw more 
  shadows than it drove away, and the charcoal-maker, his wife, and their 
  son watched in horror as the Darkening reached for them. Determined not 
  to fall to it embrace, the man killed his wife and child, then took his own 
  life, denying the shadows more victims.
  The ashes surrounding the hut are cool to the touch, having burned 
  out a few days ago. Inside the burned area, tendrils of shadow lurk in 
  depressions in the ground and crouch by the timber and cut-sod hut. 
  Despite their presence, the hut can be entered without danger.
  Inside the small, two-room hut are the three bodies of the charcoal-
  maker and his family. Clouds of blowflies fill the air in the dark hovel, and 
  the smell is ghastly. From their wounds, it is apparent that the wife and son 
  died from slit throats and the husband perished from a single stab to the 
  heart. The knife’s hilt juts from his chest, his stiff hand still on the handle.
  Little can be learned from this place, but characters who don’t mind 
  pilfering the dead find a gold wedding band (50gp value) on the wife’s 
  finger and a carved wooden box containing 67cp and 14sp if they search 
  the hut.
  Area 6: Ancient Watchtower Site
  In a dark clearing stands the broken remains of an old 
  watchtower. The structure is missing its upper floors and is gutted 
  by fire and time, leaving only the shell of a once-formidable 
  redoubt. The ruin seems to stand like a tombstone to some 
  forgotten age.
  A crumbling relic from the days when Dyraxl Uhl-Kal-Totten ruled the 
  land, the watchtower survived the collapse of his rule and served as a safe 
  refuge for travelers for centuries before falling utterly into decay. The ruin 
  later provided shelter for woodsmen and sometime bandits, but is now 
  home to some of shadow’s spawn.
  Lurking inside the watchtower’s shell are 2 shadow-touched giant 
  bats. They hide during the daytime, but attack if the ruin is entered while 
  the sun is high. After nightfall, the two shadow bats emerge to hunt and 
  attack the characters if the party camps nearby.
  Bat, Shadow-Touched Giant (2): HD 4; HP 18, 20; AC 7[12]; 
  Atk bite (1d10 plus strength drain); Move 4 (fly 18); Save 13; 
  AL C; CL/XP 5/240; Special: drain 1 point of strength with hit.
  
  139
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  The watchtower’s interior is 50ft square and filled with mounds of 
  fallen masonry, underbrush, and vines. A small fire pit containing cold 
  ashes and charred wood is dug at the center of the ruin.
  Overlooked by travelers, a forgotten treasure still resides inside the 
  shell. A bandit gang once buried their loot here, but internal squabbling 
  and eventual murder ensured the trove was forgotten, its location lost 
  with the death of the bandits. A successful search discerns a few odd 
  scratches on a large slab of fallen stone. Lifting the stone uncovers a 
  shallow hole containing a large bundle wrapped in oilskin. Inside the 
  parcel is a wrapped stack of 10 beaver pelts (2gp value each), an ermine-
  trimmed coat (25gp value), a pair of silver candelabras (15gp value each), 
  a longsword scabbard wrapped with gold wire wrapped and adorned with 
  semi-precious stones (200gp value), a sack containing 27sp and 15gp, and 
  a glass vial filled with a potion of extra healing.
  Area 7: The Soldiers’ Fate
  The faint glimmer of steel is visible on the narrow trail that 
  winds through the gloom. A closer look reveals it to be several 
  chainmail shirts, metal shields, spears, and swords strewn about 
  the path. Mixed in among the discarded arms and armaments are 
  tunics, breeches, and boots. It is as if the wearers decided they 
  no longer wished to be encumbered by raiment and weapons and 
  hastily shed them.
  The duke’s men succumbed on this spot to the Darkening and either 
  perished or were consumed. Those absorbed by shadow’s grasp left 
  their gear behind. Their equipment and clothing, however, is not all that 
  remains of them. While some of those devoured by shadow sought out the 
  Darkling Lanthorn (see The Cellars, Area 10), a few remained and have 
  gorged themselves on the living energy of creatures in the woods, growing 
  fat and fearsome in their feasting.
  Along the sides of the path are 3 greater shadows. They first devoured 
  some of their fellow soldiers, but now subsist on the occasional animal 
  that survives in the forest. They haunt this stretch of path until destroyed.
  Shadow, Greater (3): HD 4+4; HP 26, 28, 24; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  touch (1d6 plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; 
  CL/XP 6/400; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1d4 
  points of strength with hit.
  The discarded weapons and equipment along the path consist of 
  chainmail shirts, spears, longwords, and shields for a dozen men. There 
  are also four light crossbows and four bolt cases with 10 bolts remaining 
  in each. Besides the arms and armor, the party finds a dozen sets of 
  travelers’ clothes and 12 small sacks holding waterskins and three days 
  of rations. Among the mundane supplies are pouches containing a total of 
  46cp, 77sp, 15gp, two silver rings (10gp value each), a gold hoop earring 
  (5gp value), and a small garnet (50gp value).
  Area 8: Thistlehill
  The ground rises slightly here to form a 10ft high hillock in the 
  midst of a gloomy clearing. In the side of the hill is a wide, low 
  door bracketed by thick timber posts and lintel. A well-worn path 
  leads up to the shut door.
  This is the main entrance to the dwarf burrow of Thistlehill, the other 
  settlement inside Namjan Forest. Like their neighbors in Stillwater, 
  Thistlehill fell to the spread of the Darkening, and most of its residents 
  were carried off or corrupted by the touch of shadow. A bastion of 
  hope remains in Thistlehill, however. The dwarves mined a small vein 
  of gemstones that absorb and release light. This makes the gems potent 
  weapons against shadow. More information on the dwarf burrow is 
  presented in the Thistlehill chapter.
  Area 9: Hunter and Hunted
  The sound of howling and the thump of hooves on the soft forest 
  floor ring out around you. Bursting from out of the trees comes 
  a pack of wolves, their eyes bright with panic. A moment later, 
  another beast rushes from among the boles, branches tearing free 
  from trees in its passing. Pursuing the pack is a large moose, its 
  fur a dusky ash color. Strands of writhing shadows dangle from 
  its horns.
  The moose succumbed to the Darkening, turning it fearsome and 
  hungry for vitality. When the wolf pack encountered the afflicted animal, 
  they found themselves going from predator to prey. Now they flee the 
  moose and their flight brings them into the party’s path.
  Emerging from the woods are 4 wolves and the shadow-touched 
  moose. The wolves are panicked and may attack the party if party fails to 
  get out of their path. The moose, seeing more vitality in the party than the 
  wolves, ceases its pursuit to siphon life from the party.
  Wolf (4): HD 2+2; HP 10, 12, 8, 11; AC 7[12]; Atk bite (1d4+1); 
  Move 18; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none. 
  Moose, Shadow-Touched: HD 5; HP 25; AC 5[14]; Atk butt 
  (1d8 plus strength drain) or 2 hooves (1d6 plus strength 
  drain); Move 12; Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: drain 
  1 point of strength with hit. (The Tome of Horrors Complete 
  640)
  Area 10: The Gullet
  Large rocks protrude from the forest floor in this vicinity, 
  leaning upon one another like staggering drunkards. Two 
  especially large outcroppings form an upside-down V with a dark 
  cave mouth visible in the gap between them. The air here smells 
  foul and rank.
  A careful inspection of the area reveals several large footprints winding 
  among the rocks. Any character easily identifies the tracks as bear tracks 
  but a ranger or druid will correctly identify them as owlbear.
  The cave measures roughly 30ft square and is home to a shadow-
  touched owlbear. It remains inside its cave during daylight hours, 
  emerging to hunt only after dark.
  Owlbear, Shadow-Touched: HD 5+1; HP 33; AC 5[14]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d6 plus strength drain), bite (2d6 plus strength drain); 
  Move 12; Save 12; AL N; CL/XP 7/600; Special: drain 1 point 
  of strength per hit, hug on to hit of 18+ for additional 2d8 
  damage.
  If characters enter the cave during the day, the owlbear is asleep 50% of 
  the time. It automatically awakens if attacked, but is surprised due to its 
  sudden rousing. It mauls any character in melee range. 
  The cave contains bones and owlbear scat. Mixed in among the detritus 
  are a rusty chain shirt, a +1 dagger, a set of ivory gaming dice (15gp 
  value), and a gold belt buckle with amethyst stone (200gp value) attached 
  to a rotting leather belt.
  A crude and extremely old map is scratched on the cave wall. This map 
  dates back to the time of Dyraxl Uhl-Kal-Totten and depicts the region as 
  
  140
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  it was then. The Fehlween River is easily identifiable and, with that as a 
  guide, the party can deduce the approximate locations of the Watchtower 
  (Area 6) and the Darkling Oak (Area 12). Each site is depicted as a crude 
  tower and keep, and may hint at further locations in need of exploration to 
  find the source of the Darkening.
  Area 11: Shadows Merge
  A small tributary flows into the Fehlween River from the west, 
  its waters just as inky dark as the shadow-rich liquid of the 
  main river. Stands of soot-colored reeds cling in clusters to the 
  riverbanks, their tufted stalks unmoving in the still air.
  A search notices a punt pulled up to the northern bank of the tributary and 
  mostly hidden among the reeds. Characters inspecting the long, narrow boat 
  find the bottom of the punt stained with copious amounts of blood. Resting 
  in the midst of the gore is a human leg severed at the shin and a blood-
  stained fishing knife. Writing is carved into the seat of the punt, scratched 
  into the wood by a shaky hand. The writing is in Common and reads:
  “The dark crept in and touched my leg. Cut it off, but too late. I’m 
  going, going dark and light. Came down the thinny way, out of the 
  Tumbles. Can’t st…” 
  The scratched message ends abruptly.
  The message written by the unfortunate former owner of the severed 
  leg who became infected by the Darkening as it crept down this narrow 
  tributary (“the thinny way”) from the tree. The infected boatman severed 
  the appendage but shadow overtook him and his body faded away. He had 
  just enough time to scrawl his warning before his physical body dissipated.
  If the party continues past the meeting of the waters, they soon see that 
  the waters of the Fehlween clear, losing their dark taint. It is obvious that 
  the source of the river’s Darkening is the tributary, which perhaps spurs 
  them deeper into the forest toward the source of the shadows.
  Area 12: The Darkling Oak
  The ground rises slightly here, forming a low island among the 
  gloomy forest floor. This small hillock appears formed by a mass 
  of ancient, fallen stones. Tumbled together and half-buried under 
  centuries of forest loam, the moss-covered stones are weathered 
  by storms and time. Sprouting among the broken masonry is a 
  titanic oak rising 50 ft. into the air. Its trunk is dusky ash in color, 
  its leaves glossy obsidian. Hanging from the branches are thick 
  coils of shadow that drip slowly down toward the ground like 
  black honey.
  This tree is in direct contact with the Darkling Lanthorn and the conduit 
  to shadow. It is responsible for awakening the relic’s power and starting 
  the Darkening. As such, the oak is entirely infected with shadow’s touch 
  and only partially exists on this plane. Any attack or destructive spell 
  targeting the oak temporarily damages it, but the tree heals its massive 
  trunk and limbs moments later as the injury patches over with shadow 
  stuff.
  The dripping coils of shadow are dangerous, and the tree instinctively 
  lashes out with the viscous substance at any creature approaching within 
  20ft. The tree makes up to four attacks each round, striking as a shadow. 
  The earth-covered mound of broken rubble is all that remains of Dyraxl 
  Uhl-Kal-Totten’s stronghold. This rise of land measures 100ft in diameter 
  and 20ft tall at its highest point. The Shadow Oak sprouts from the western 
  end of the hillock. Slightly south of the tree at a distance of 20ft, a narrow, 
  dark tunnel mouth is visible between two massive pieces of masonry. It 
  appears to lead to a cave or similar descent within the mound. This tunnel 
  connects to The Cellars, Area 1.
  Thistlehill Dwarf Burrow
  This small burrow was home to two dozen dwarves miners and 
  woodworkers. They did a brisk trade with their human neighbors of 
  Stillwater, selling their wares to dealers there in return for the necessities 
  and luxuries the dwarves desired. When the Darkening spread through 
  the Namjan, the dwarves barred their doors and hoped to withstand the 
  infection. They failed and were afflicted by shadow’s touch. Only one 
  dwarf remains untouched, surviving thanks to the strange properties of the 
  sunbreath quartz the dwarves mined.
  General Features
  Thistlehill is excavated out of the rocky soil beneath the forest, but 
  it’s no series of earthen caves and tunnels. Stout timber planks, planed 
  smooth and pegged firmly into place, line the floors, walls, and ceilings 
  of Thistlehill. The air is dry and cool, and holds only a trace of rich earthy 
  scents.
  Interior Dimensions: Thistlehill is a dwarvish home and sized 
  accordingly. Ceilings stand 6 ft. high and corridors are 8 ft. wide at 
  the most. Human-sized creatures can move and act without penalty 
  inside Thistlehill, but find the place cramped and uncomfortable after 
  long.
  Illumination: In better days the interior of Thistlehill was lit by thick 
  beeswax candles set in wall holders or hanging chandeliers. These are still 
  present, but the taint of shadow makes the interior a place of full darkness 
  and prevents candles from being lit. If lit, the flame struggles feebly for a 
  moment then fails. Other sources of illumination function normally inside 
  Thistlehill, unlike in the cellar (see below).
  Area 1: Front Door
  The door measures 6ft high and 8ft wide and is made from stout oak 
  bound with iron. A small closed peephole pierces the left-hand door, 
  looking out at dwarf-eye level. The door is barred from within, but the bar 
  holding it closed is small (better to be managed by the dwarves). Opening 
  the door open is possible with the use of a knock spell or physically 
  destroying the door.
  No one is guarding the door, but multiple unsuccessful attempts to force 
  open the portal alerts the shadow-touched dwarves at Area 2 to prepare 
  to attack intruders.
  Area 2: Guard Post
  A cramped square room stands at the end of a sloping, plank-
  lined hallway. The space holds a small table and three chairs, 
  a little sealed barrel, and a pair of doors leading out. One door 
  stands in the north wall, the other in the west wall.
  Former guards are still stationed here, but the 3 shadow-touched 
  dwarves continue their vigil out of hunger not duty. If the party bursts 
  open the front door and immediately proceeds here, the guards are present 
  and preparing to attack. If the characters dallied before entering or needed 
  multiple attempts to breach the front door, the shadow dwarves are merged 
  with the gloom and attack from ambush, likely surprising the party.
  Dwarf, Shadow-Touched (3): HD 2; HP 10, 12, 14; AC 4[15]; 
  Atk warhammer (1d4+1 plus strength drain); Move 12; 
  Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: +4 save bonus vs. 
  magic, drain 1 point of strength on hit, detect attributes of 
  stonework.
  
  141
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  The barrel contains 5 gallons of watered brandy. The doors exiting this 
  room are closed, but not locked.
  Area 3: Observation Post
  A small round room stands at the top of a narrow flight of stairs. 
  Small observation windows are cut in the walls of the room at the 
  eye level of a short observer, granting a 360-degree view of the 
  forest outside. An unlit brazier filled with coal sits in the center 
  of the room.
  This place once allowed the dwarves a hidden vantage point to observe 
  travelers approaching Thistlehill’s front door. It is no longer manned, but 
  may still present a threat to the party.
  The coal in the brazier is thoroughly infected by shadow stuff. If set 
  alight, the coal bursts into brilliant deep blue flames that immediately suck 
  the warmth from this room. All within 15ft of the brazier must make a 
  save or suffer 1d8+2 points of cold damage (half damage on a successful 
  saving throw). The coals continue to burn, inflicting additional damage 
  each round the characters remain within its area of effect. Once lit, the 
  brazier cannot be extinguished by mundane means until it exhausts itself 
  one hour later.
  Area 4: Pit Trap
  A 20ft deep covered pit bars passage here. Failing to detect the pit 
  forces the first rank of the party to make a saving throw or plunge into the 
  trap. A hidden switch is located behind a knothole in the corridor’s plank 
  walls. Throwing the switch seals the pit cover, allowing it to be crossed 
  without danger.
  Area 5: Common Room
  This large room holds carved wooden chairs, tables, and 
  cupboards, each fashioned with exquisite skill. A plush woven 
  carpet of forest green and autumn gold covers the plank floor. 
  A wide, cold hearth stands in the south wall, and a curious low-
  walled box rests beside it.
  The central gathering place for the dwarves, this common room was the 
  hub of life within Thistlehill. It is now home to the worst of the shadow-
  afflicted residents.
  Dwelling here are 4 shadow-touched dwarves and their pet, a shadow-
  touched giant badger. 
  Thistlehill Dwarf Burrow
  
  142
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  Dwarf, Shadow-Touched (4): HD 2; HP 10, 12, 8, 14; AC 
  4[15]; Atk warhammer (1d4+1 plus strength drain); Move 
  12; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: +4 save bonus vs. 
  magic, drain 1 point of strength on hit, detect attributes of 
  stonework. 
  Badger, Shadow-Touched Giant: HD 3; HP 18; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 
  claw (1d3 plus strength drain), bite (1d6 plus strength drain); 
  Move 6; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 5/240; Special: drain 1 point of 
  strength on hit.
  The room contains normal furniture for the warren’s inhabitants. The 
  curious, low-walled box is filled with straw and wood chips, and served as 
  the badger’s bed before the coming of shadow.
  Area 6: Kitchen
  The smell of many old and fine meals seeped into the wooden 
  walls of this well-kept kitchen. Clay ovens stand against the 
  north wall, facing low tables covered with bowls, plates, and 
  kitchen implements. A closed trapdoor lies in the floor next to the 
  preparation tables.
  This ordinary kitchen is free from danger. The table holds several 
  bowls, wooden spoons, a butcher’s knife, cleaver, a pair of paring knives, 
  and a pewter saltcellar. The ovens are cold and empty, but the faint smell 
  of freshly baked bread is detectable when the doors are opened.
  The trapdoor is unlocked and opens to reveal a short ladder leading 
  down to the pantry (Area 7).
  Area 7: Pantry
  Sacks, barrels, and boxes fill this cramped root cellar. The smell 
  of flour, smoked meat, and earth is rich here.
  This room holds enough food to feed two dozen small appetites for 
  two weeks. The pantry holds sausages, wheels of cheese, flour, corn 
  meal, pickled vegetables, dried fruit, and salted fish. Four dusty bottles 
  rest atop a high shelf under the dust and cobwebs. Each bottle holds an 
  old dwarvish fortified wine spiced with restorative herbs and flowers. 
  Drinking the lavender wine of a full bottle acts as a potion of healing.
  Area 8: Lavatory
  This room serves the burrow’s basic sanitary needs. Seven stalls with 
  single-hole latrines line the walls and an enclosed bathing area (A) is used 
  for washing. A natural spring flows into a clay basin in the bathing area, 
  providing water for basic needs. Nothing of interest or value is in this area.
  Area 9: Dormitories
  Numerous small bunks, tables, chairs, and wardrobes fill this 
  room, providing sleeping quarters for the warren’s occupants.
  Each of these rooms holds 12 bunks and wardrobes, along with small 
  tables and chairs for sitting and eating. The wardrobes are filled with 
  small-sized clothing and the personal effects of Thistlehill’s miners, 
  as well as a handful of common tools. The two dormitories are largely 
  identical and their differences in contents are listed below.
  Western Dormitory
  A band of 6 shadow-touched dwarves slinks about in the darkness, 
  waiting to ambush the curious.
  Dwarf, Shadow-Touched (6): HD 2; HP 10x2, 12x2, 8, 14; AC 
  4[15]; Atk warhammer (1d4+1 plus strength drain); Move 
  12; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: +4 save bonus vs. 
  magic, drain 1 point of strength on hit, detect attributes of 
  stonework.
  Among the mundane contents of this room are a small pouch of six 
  moonstones (10gp value each), a pair of small boots with silver heels (1gp 
  value), 75cp, 49sp, and 55gp in mixed coins, and a small barrel of good 
  brandy (10gp value).
  Eastern Dormitory
  This dormitory is free of dangerous inhabitants. A minor treasure 
  consisting of a silver-drinking decanter (25gp), four copper cups (10gp 
  value total), a pouch containing 12 freshwater pearls (10gp value each), 
  and 96cp, 66sp, and 63gp in mixed coins can be found.
  Sunbreath Quartz
  Sunbreath quartz appears identical to clear quartz except 
  when exposed to light over several hours. After such time, 
  sunbreath quartz glows naturally, producing illumination 
  equal to a candle for 12 hours. The emitted light is always a 
  pale yellow glow similar to sunlight regardless of the origin 
  of the absorbed illumination. This property makes it valuable 
  to tailors who adorn clothing with sunbreath quartz, as well 
  as jewelers, who use the glowing stones in their creations. A 
  single sunbreath quartz crystal is worth 25gp.
  Sunbreath quartz can be “charged” with magical light to 
  create an effective weapon against certain creatures. By casting 
  a light on a single sunbreath quartz crystal, the stone absorbs 
  and retains the spell, becoming a miniature “light bomb” that 
  can be employed against creatures affected by bright light. The 
  magical light is retained by the crystal for up to one hour and, 
  due to the strange properties of the stone, continues to maintain 
  its light even if another light is cast by the same spellcaster 
  (this effect supersedes the spell’s description). A spellcaster 
  can cast the light on multiple sunbreath quartz stones and each 
  retains its illumination until an hour passes or the stone is used 
  offensively.
  A charged sunbreath quartz can be thrown as an improvised 
  weapon up to 20ft. If it strikes a target or hard surface, the stone 
  shatters, releasing the light. The explosion of illumination has 
  one of two effects: If the creature possesses eyesight and is not 
  a shadow-based creature, it must make a saving throw or be 
  blinded for one round. Shadow creatures, including shadows, 
  shadow kings, shadowkin, and the shadow-touched, struck by 
  the blast suffer 1d10 radiant damage. Regardless of effect, the 
  explosion shatters the crystal and it cannot be used again.
  A sunbreath quartz crystal can also be used to focus a 
  light and transform it into a ray attack capable of damaging 
  shadow-based creatures. The spellcaster casts the light while 
  holding a sunbreath crystal in his hand, aimed at his target. 
  On a successful ranged attack, the creature suffers 1d8 points 
  of radiant damage. This attack “burns out” the crystal and it 
  cannot be used as a focus or charged again.
  
  143
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  Area 10: Storage
  This room is crammed with crates, barrels, spools of rope, 
  boxes, and tools. The smell of grease and wax fills the air. 
  Cobwebs dangle in the dark corners of the room.
  The chamber contains mundane supplies necessary for the day-to-day 
  operations of the warren and adjacent mine. There are spare lanterns, 500 
  ft. of rope, picks, shovels, buckets, barrels of grease, crates of candles, 
  lumber and timbers for building mine supports, wheelbarrows, and similar 
  items. No danger or treasure is present.
  Area 11: Gemstone Mine
  The plank-lined corridor gives way to an excavated area hewn 
  from the surrounding earth and stone. Timber braces support the 
  earth-and-stone ceiling, creating a low, wide cavern underneath 
  the ground. Buckets, tools, and wheelbarrows lean against the 
  walls of the room. Flickering shadows with malicious smiles 
  crowd around the edge of a glowing circle of light at the cavern’s 
  northeastern end. Huddled within the light is a pale, thin dwarf 
  that watches the shadows in terror. Several pools of melted wax 
  surround the dwarf.
  The dwarves of Thistlehill mine a rare form of crystal known as 
  sunbreath quartz from a vein that runs beneath the forest. Although not 
  as valuable as many precious stones, sunbreath quartz is highly desired 
  by jewelers and tailors for its unique property. Most of the stone has been 
  extracted and only a small bit of the original vein remains.
  This area contains 5 shadows and Mevlyn Butteroak, the sole 
  remaining resident of Thistlehill unaffected by the Darkening. When the 
  Darkening spread through the community, a handful of dwarves fled to 
  the mine where they discovered the absorbed light of the sunbreath quartz 
  could stymie the encroaching shadows. Over the past few days, most of 
  the dwarves made a desperate attempt to gather supplies or escape the 
  burrow, but succumbed to the Plane of Shadow’s minions. Only Mevlyn 
  remains, and he has run out of candles to keep the sunbreath crystal 
  illuminated. Unless rescued, the crystals’ glow soon expires and the 
  shadows claim Mevlyn. The shadows turn to attack the characters, hungry 
  for long-delayed sustenance.
  Shadow (5): HD 2+2; HP 10x2, 12x2, 14; AC 7[12]; Atk touch 
  (1d4 plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 
  4/120; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1 point of 
  strength with hit.
   
  Mevlyn Butteroak, Dwarf: HD 1; HP 5; AC 4[15]; Atk 
  warhammer (1d4+1); Move 12; Save 17; AL L; CL/XP 1/15; 
  Special: +4 bonus vs. magic, detect attributes of stonework.
  Mevlyn is overjoyed if the shadows are vanquished. He has been trapped 
  in the mine for several days and is severely dehydrated and malnourished. 
  Mevlyn, saddened by the loss of his friends and home, wants nothing 
  more than a meal and to get as far away from Shadow’s reach as possible. 
  
  144
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  He explains how he remained untouched by the shadows for so long, 
  telling the party of sunbreath quartz’s power (see Sidebox) and suggests 
  they take as many of the stones as possible if they are brave enough to 
  fight the Darkening’s power. Unfortunately, only 20 quartz crystals large 
  enough to be used offensively remain in the vein.
  Mevlyn tells the party that the Darkening flowed over Thistlehill from 
  the northeast, corrupting everything in its path. If they seek the source of 
  Shadow’s power, he suggests they head deeper into the forest in that direction.
  Mevlyn is traumatized by his experience and has no desire to join the party 
  in their quest. However, if the characters play upon his love of his home and 
  friends, convincing him to avenge their loss causes him to swallow his fear 
  and dedicate himself to stopping the Darkening. He gathers his possessions 
  from Area 9 (assuming the shadow-touched dwarves have been dispatched), 
  which include leather armor, a short sword, a sling with 20 stones, traveler’s 
  clothes, and food and water for three days, and joins the party.
  The Cellar of Dyraxl 
  Uhl-Kal-Totten
  Buried beneath the ancient rubble and thick forest loam are the surviving 
  catacombs of the sorcerer-warlord, Dyraxl Uhl-Kal-Totten. It was in these 
  chambers that he conducted his eldritch research and stored his prized magical 
  artifacts — including the Darkling Lanthorn which is the source of the Darkening 
  of Namjan Forest. It is here that the party must venture to end the shadow infection, 
  but the task is not easy as formidable foes are arrayed against them.
  General Features
  The cellar is hewn from the bedrock that underlies the forest, carved 
  from the stone eons ago by magical incantations and physical labor. Much 
  of the cellar is in ruins or buried under tons of rubble, victim to the original 
  destruction called down by Uhl-Kal-Totten and the march of time.
  Illumination: The cellar is dark — even more so than can be attributed 
  to the lack of illumination. The encroachment of the Plane of Shadow 
  has veiled the entire undercroft in an unnatural gloom. Light sources 
  that normally create bright light struggle against this darkness, casting 
  only dim light in their area of effect. Areas that are normally considered 
  dim light (the edges of a lantern’s illumination range, for example) are 
  treated as darkness in the cellars. These shadows even affect darkvision. 
  All darkvision ranges are reduced by one-third, rounded down, while in 
  the cellar (e.g. a dwarf’s darkvision only has a 40 ft. range in the cellar).
  Wandering Monsters
  Several shadowy occupants of the cellar prowl its corridors, constantly 
  seeking to assuage their hunger and increase the shadow’s hold, and the 
  characters may encounter these wanderers during their exploration. There 
  
  145
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  is a 20% chance of encountering a wandering monster or other random 
  encounter every 30 minutes while inside the cellar. If a wandering monster 
  encounter is indicated, the Referee should roll on the table below to 
  determine the type and number of creatures encountered.
  Cellar Random Encounter Table
  1d6
  Encounter
  1
  1d4 shadow-touched giant spiders (see Area 1)
  2
  1d6 shadows (see Area 7)
  3
  1d4 shadow-touched giant bat (see Area 5)
  4
  1 miasmic death (see Area 4)
  5–6
  1 greater shadow (see Area 12)
  The Cellar of  
  Dyraxl Uhl-Kal-Totten
  The entrance to the cellar is a steep, angled tunnel filled with fallen 
  blocks of masonry and old forest earth. It connects to the surface in the lee 
  of the Darkling Oak that unwittingly serves as guardian to the cellar. Once 
  the Darkling Oak is evaded, the characters can venture down the shaft’s 
  50ft length to arrive in Area 1.
  Area 1: Spider Wine
  The steep shaft terminates in a dark chamber, its contents 
  largely obscured by the almost-physical gloom that fills the space 
  with shadows. A collapsed wooden rack and smashed barrels are 
  vaguely discernable in the dark and the stone floor is littered with 
  shards of broken, dusty glass.
  Once a wine cellar, this chamber is now home to a pair of shadow-
  touched giant spiders (6ft diameter). Ever hungry, they scuttle close to 
  the party, seeking to ambush them from the dark.
  Spider, Shadow-Touched Giant (6ft diameter) (2): HD 4+2; 
  HP 20, 22; AC 6[13]; Atk bite (1d6 plus poison plus strength 
  drain); Move 4; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: lethal 
  poison, strength drain 1 point per hit, webs.
  The contents of this room are in ruins. Barrels and bottles that once held 
  fine vintages from long ago are now broken and empty. The tall wooden 
  racks are either dust or riddled with dry-rot and collapse into punky wood 
  with a touch. A careful search of the chamber uncovers an intact bottle 
  fashioned from cut crystal. The bottle alone is worth 50gp. The vessel 
  contains a potion of invulnerability.
  Area 2: Ruined Menagerie
  Rusty bars form several caged-off areas of varying sizes in this 
  chamber. Yellowed, moldering bones lie in haphazard fashion 
  within the cages. Open doors on rusty hinges moan slightly, 
  pushed by faint subterranean draughts.
  Dyraxl Uhl-Kal-Totten kept his most fearsome and fascinating pets in this 
  chamber, intent on experimenting and crossbreeding them. The mystical creatures 
  died during the siege and their bones remained undisturbed here ever since. 
  There are eight cages, all composed of rusting bars with doors 
  that are ajar. Skeletal remains of great age, some nearly fossilized by 
  mineralization, are scattered across the floor inside the cages. A difficult 
  intelligence check (4d6 vs. score) identifies the remains as belonging to 
  a bulette, a catoblepas, a gorgon, an owlbear, a peryton, and a unicorn.
  The unicorn’s horn is still intact and worth up to 2000gp.
  Area 3: Snatching Darkness
  This location conceals a pool of semi-intelligent darkness that is a 
  conduit between the material realm and the Plane of Shadow. It clings to 
  the ceiling, nearly undetectable until the party passes beneath it. It then 
  strikes, lashing down with its two 20ft long shadow tentacles to grab 
  random passers-by. The pool cannot move from its position.
  The pool attacks twice, making attacks against two targets as 6HD 
  creature. Once it successfully grapples an opponent, it drags the victim 
  upward to the ceiling, pulling him inside its body. The pool’s form exists 
  in the Material Plane and the Plane of Shadow. Victims pulled into its form 
  seem to disappear as if dropped into a dark hole in between the planes. The 
  pool’s mass is large enough to hold two human-sized victims at a time.
  Any creature enveloped by the pool’s body takes a cumulative –1 
  penalty to attack rolls for each round it is immersed in the pool. If the 
  creature’s penalty ever equals –5, the creature perishes, its life force 
  absorbed by the shadows. Rest ends the penalty.
  Grappled creatures can attempt to break free by rolling an attack that 
  exceeds the opposing attack of the tentacle. Allies can attempt to sever 
  the tentacles. Each tentacle is AC 9[10] and has 10 hit points. A missed 
  attack on a tentacle has a 50% chance of potentially hitting the grappled 
  character. On a d% roll of 50 or less, the attacker makes another attack roll 
  with all the normal modifiers against the grappled character’s AC, doing 
  damage to his ally if the attack hits.
  It must be noted that characters dragged into the pool are 15ft above the 
  corridor’s floor, and the distance likely hampers their allies’ attempts to aid them. 
  Weapons or most spells cannot kill the pool, but if subject to a continual 
  light spell, the searing light banishes the pool back to the Plane of Shadow.
  Area 4: Alchemy Lab
  Broken glassware covered by a thick blanket of dust is strewn about 
  this small chamber. The floor is stained by the spills of a hundred 
  strange chemicals and reagents. The air seems to roil and swirl, casting 
  a rainbow of dull hues as if soap bubbles were caught in a draft.
  The countless spilled chemicals combined with the arcane destruction 
  called down by Uhl-Kal-Totten and now infused with shadow has created 
  a unique life form in this room — a miasmic death. The gaseous creature 
  drains nutrients and the breath of those it envelops, seeking to reproduce 
  itself and spread beyond the confines of this small chamber.
  Miasmic Death: HD 5; HP 30; AC 3[16]; Atk touch (3d6); Move 
  0 (fly 18); Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, gaseous form, immune to acid and cold, 
  resist fire, vulnerable to wind. (“Demonic Mist” variant, The 
  Tomb of Horrors 4 54)
  The contents of this room are largely beyond salvage. The various 
  alchemical instruments and materials are rusted and rotted or smashed to 
  flinders. However, mixed among the debris are three iron beakers sealed 
  with ill-smelling wax. The beakers each contain a potion, but the elixirs 
  have undergone “magical spoilage” down the millennia. Now, each potion 
  produces a harmless but interesting side-effect when consumed. The side 
  effect lasts for as long as the potion is functioning. They are:
  • potion of flying; side effect: turns the drinker’s skin a vibrant green 
  color;
  • potion of gaseous form; side effect: the gaseous form throws tiny, 
  harmless blue lightning bolts that cause the drinker to be easily noticed;
  
  146
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  • potion of heroism; side effect: the sound of cattle lowing accompanies 
  the drinker wherever he goes.
  Area 5: Former Sensory 
  Deprivation Chamber
  A large spherical vessel resembling a round amphora 
  occupies this room. The 10ft diameter container has a large 
  hole in its side, allowing a glimpse into its empty interior. The 
  flagstone floor is stained by some ancient spillage and covered 
  by dust. The remains of a corroded iron ladder lie beside the 
  grand vessel. 
  Lurking inside the round vessel are 3 shadow-touched giant bats that 
  are hidden by the gloom and the remaining sides of the container. They 
  flutter out on shadowy, bat wings and attack.
  Bat, Shadow-Touched Giant (3): HD 4; HP 20, 18, 22; AC 
  7[12]; Atk bite (1d10 plus strength drain); Move 4 (fly 18); 
  Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: drain 1 point of strength 
  per bite.
  The spherical vessel was a sensory deprivation tank. Uhl-Kal-Totten 
  drifted inside the tank, floating in warm water and shrouded in darkness, 
  allowing his mind to visit unseen dimensions and contemplate the 
  mysteries of magic. The stain on the floor comes from the heavily salted 
  water that once occupied the tank.
  A search of the north wall discovers a concealed compartment. This 
  tall, narrow cubby once contained dressing robes and towels, as well as 
  certain substances Uhl-Kal-Totten imbibed before entering the tank. On a 
  small shelf is a crystal box (10gp value) containing a gummy black resin. 
  This substance is extract of the night hyacinth flower, a mystical drug that 
  affects magic-users. A single dose of resin is in the box.
  Any magic-user consuming the resin must make a saving throw. If 
  the save fails, the character suffers 3d8 points of poison damage but 
  no further effect. On a successful save, the caster falls unconscious for 
  1d4 hours, during which time nothing can awaken him. The caster has 
  fearsome dreams while unconscious, his mind glimpsing strange vistas 
  at the far ends of the multiverse. When he awakens, he does so with the 
  understanding of how to amplify his magical ability with his own body.
  The magic-user can effectively increase the number of spells cast 
  at specific spell level by one by permanently reducing his constitution 
  by 1 point per spell level. For example, a 3rd-level magic-user could 
  increase from three 1st level spells to four or one 2nd level spell to 
  two by permanently decreasing his constitution score by one and two, 
  respectively. Lost constitution cannot be restored by any magic less than 
  a wish spell.  A caster cannot expend constitution points more than once 
  per day.
  Area 6: Golem Forge
  A massive table fashioned from a single stone slab occupies 
  much of this room’s floor space. Scraps of punky, dry-rotted 
  wood and rusty nails indicate tables or other furnishings that 
  once lined the western wall, but they long ago succumbed to age. 
  A large stone box, its exterior inscribed with strange sigils, rests 
  atop the slab table.
  Golems and constructs were once fashioned in this chamber and Uhl-
  Kal-Totten was preparing to create a new model when his stronghold fell. 
  All that remains is a single component sealed inside a magically warded 
  box.
  A character conversant in Primordial identifies the writing as pertaining 
  to the Plane of Elemental Earth. The box is sealed shut and bears no 
  obvious lock or closure. It weighs 300 lbs. The chest resists attempts 
  to break it open, its rocky surface “healing” damage and shrugging off 
  most magical spells. Its contents can be access only via three ways: 1) A 
  disintegrate spell destroys the box, revealing its contents; 2) a stone to 
  flesh spell allows an opening to made in the box’s side; and 3) an earth 
  elemental can reach inside and extract the box’s contents.
  The box contains an oversized humanoid left hand made from solid 
  stone. Originally intended for a stone golem, the hand is magical and 
  usable by one daring enough to pay the price. If the hand is affixed to the 
  freshly severed (within 12 hours) stump of a left arm, it potentially fuses 
  with the flesh, allowing the creature to use it as his own, natural appendage. 
  The subject must make a saving throw. If the save is successful, the limb 
  attaches itself without any side effects. If the saving throw fails, however, 
  the fist rejects its owner’s natural flesh and replaces it with solid rock, 
  petrifying the subject. If restored to normal, the hand separates from the 
  now un-petrified owner and can never be used by the subject.
  The fist, when successfully fused to flesh, grants the owner 18 strength 
  in his left arm. He can also haste once per day. 
  Area 7: Slippery Stones
  A jagged hole tears the stone floor of this chamber in two. 
  Collapsed ceiling stones are piled in tumbled fashion, forming 
  a crude bridge across the gap. Mounds of dark forest earth have 
  partially buried the chamber, having poured into the room from 
  the holes in the roof. Debris or broken furnishings are dimly 
  visible on the far side of the room, as is a closed door.
  The destruction long ago severely damaged this room, opening an 80ft 
  deep, 30ft wide rift in the floor while dumping tons of earth and rock into 
  the room from the compromised ceiling. By sheer chance, several of the 
  ceiling slabs fell to form a delicately balanced bridge across the gap. They 
  remain there, but are precariously positioned.
  Flittering about in the darkness are 4 shadows, greedy for the party’s 
  lives. They wait until the party begins to cross the haphazard bridge before 
  attacking.
  Shadow (4): HD 2+2; HP 14x2, 15x2; AC 7[12]; Atk touch (1d4 
  plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1 point of strength 
  with hit.
  Combatants battling on the stone slab bridge risk a very real chance 
  of collapsing the precarious span. The Referee rolls 1d6 each round 
  combat occurs on the bridge; if the result is less than or equal to the 
  number of rounds the fighting has lasted, the slabs fall, pitching all 
  on the makeshift bridge into the chasm. Characters falling into the 
  pit suffer 8d6 points of bludgeoning damage. Falling individuals that 
  make a saving throw grab a protrusion and save themselves from the 
  fall, but are left dangling over the pit. The assistance of an ally or 
  a save on a subsequent round allows them to climb back onto solid 
  ground. Characters struck while dangling over the chasm must make a 
  save or fall into the chasm.
  The broken debris on the eastern side of the room are all that remains of 
  display and trophy cases that once housed prizes Uhl-Kal-Totten wrested 
  from his enemies. An inspection of the ruined wood, glass, and rusty iron 
  uncovers shattered bits of bone, corroded bits of armor, and scraps of cloth 
  that crumble to dust with a touch. One object survived the destruction, 
  however: a human tibia inscribed with odd glyphs and wrapped with 
  decaying reptile hide. This is a wand of light (5 charges). A successful 
  search discovers the intact wand among the debris.
  
  147
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  Area 8: Map Room
  Collapsed shelves and crumbling chests of drawers slouch 
  in this small room, covered with eons of dust and smelling of 
  great age and mildew. A faint, old stink of rotting flesh is barely 
  discernable among the other pungent subterranean smells.
  Uhl-Kal-Totten stored his library of maps, charts, and other such 
  documents in this room, but age destroyed them all. The smell of rot 
  comes from the decayed animal hides that once bore ancient maps of a 
  long-vanished land. Most surviving materials in the room fall to pieces 
  if handled. The exception is a bone scroll case sealed with a mithril cap 
  (200gp value). 
  The case contains a rolled piece of thin metal bearing a number of 
  seemingly randomly spaced rectangular holes (similar to an old time 
  computer punch card). The sheet measures 1ft square and is of an 
  unidentifiable metal. This object serves as a key to open the vault door in 
  Area 11 and to bypass the trap protecting it.
  Area 9: Funeral Trophies
  This chamber appears to have been furnished by tomb raiders 
  and grave robbers. More than a dozen sarcophagi in various 
  styles and condition are placed about the room. Some stand 
  upright, while others lie flat on the cracked flagstones. The 
  caskets all bear the covers, obscuring what, if anything, they may 
  contain. One sarcophagus glows an eerie green color, like foxfire 
  in a dismal mire.
  Uhl-Kal-Totten plundered many tombs and cemeteries to acquire 
  lost lore and the ghastly material components he needed for his 
  spells and experiments. He took to collecting the sarcophagi of his 
  lootings as macabre trophies, speculating he might be able to use their 
  funereal power in his experiments. One of the stone caskets was an 
  obvious source of magical power and Uhl-Kal-Totten claimed it to 
  further experiment on, but his research was foiled by the collapse of 
  his demesne. 
  The glowing sarcophagus possesses an unusual and possibly beneficial 
  enchantment, but only to the character who is brave enough to climb in. 
  If the lid is removed, odd hieroglyphics are found to line the interior of 
  the casket. A difficult intelligence check (4d6 vs. score) reveals them to be 
  ancient writing concerned with rebirth, but their exact meaning is vague. 
  If a living creature climbs inside the sarcophagus and closes the lid, the 
  green glow increases in brilliance, becoming nearly blinding to those 
  outside the coffin. The person within the sarcophagus undergoes a vivid 
  hallucination of a hundred faces of strangers racing past his eyes, many of 
  whom are dressed in outlandishly ancient (or perhaps future?) fashions. 
  The enclosed character must then make a saving throw. If he succeeds, 
  nothing happens and the light subsides. Should he fail, however, a strange 
  contingency magic affects him. 
  Should the character die an untimely death, he immediately returns to 
  life as if the subject of a reincarnation restored to existence in the form 
  of one of the countless individuals who once interacted with the magical 
  sarcophagus. 
  While the coffin’s contingency magic is in effect (i.e. before the 
  character’s untimely demise), the character radiates necromancy and 
  transmutation magic if subjected to a detect magic spell. There is no other 
  indication of what the sarcophagus’s effect is. A remove curse followed 
  by a dispel magic negates the contingency magic and the character is not 
  reincarnated in a new form if he dies prematurely.
  The remaining 14 sarcophagi in the room are old, but otherwise 
  unremarkable.
  Area 10: Egrihl’s Lair
  Shallow niches in the walls of this dark chamber still bear 
  rotted picture frames indicating this was once a galley where art 
  was displayed. Thin decorative columns divide the room in two, 
  and the floor is covered in the dusty, decayed remains of a once-
  grand carpet.
  Lurking in the darkness is a victim of the Darkening known as Egrihl, 
  formerly a scout for the duke’s soldiers who succumbed to shadow 
  alongside his hounds. Unlike his fellows, however, Egrihl became shadow-
  touched and his faithful hounds were transformed into 2 shadow mastiffs. 
  The ranger and his beasts were lured by the shadows and now reside close 
  to the source of the Darkening’s power. They defend the approach to the 
  Vault of Shadows (Area 12), attacking from ambush from the shadows.
  Egrihl the Shadowkin: HD 6; HP 38; AC 2[17]; Atk +1 battle ax 
  (1d8+1 plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 
  8/800; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1d4 points 
  of strength per hit.
  Equipment: +1 chain mail, +1 shield, +1 battle axe 
  Shadow Mastiffs (2): HD 3; HP 14, 16; AC 6[13]; Atk bite (1d6+1); 
  Move 18; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: baying causes 
  panic (run for 3d6 turns and drop everything, save avoids), 
  concealment in shadow (40% to disappear after attack).
  Egrihl uses the hunter’s mask ability to cast enhance ability (bear’s 
  strength) on himself at the start of combat to gain temporary hit points. 
  He then wades into the thickest concentration of foes and uses his horde 
  breaker ability to strike as many targets as possible. The shadow mastiffs 
  attack foes Egrihl isn’t engaging.
  If both shadow mastiffs are slain and Egrihl is still alive, he flees to 
  Area 12. He waits with the shadow elemental to defend the Darkling 
  Lanthorn and the conduit to Shadow.
  Area 11: Vault Door
  This chamber is largely bare, holding only a strange contraption 
  near the western end of the room. A stone post rises 4ft from the 
  floor and ends in a U-shaped bracket. A small round protrusion 
  extends from the post on its east side, giving it a lopsided 
  appearance. Set in the western wall is an intimidating-looking 
  stone door. Numerous small tiles cover its face.
  This room protects the Vault of Shadows (Area 12) with its well-
  secured door and a secret trap.
  The door is solid stone and measures 8 ft. square. More than 60 1-inch-
  by-2-inch steel tiles cover its exterior, all of which are rusty but still solid. 
  The door is locked and can only safely be opened by pushing the correct 
  combination of tiles. A pressed tile slides into the door’s face, creating a 
  1-inch-deep divot. Depressing the proper 15 tiles disarms the trap (see 
  below) and unlocks the door. 
  The stone post is situated 6ft away from the door and is the key to 
  determining the proper combination of tiles to be pushed. Each end of 
  the U-shaped bracket has a small slot running down its length as if it is 
  intended to hold something. If the metal sheet from Area 8 is unrolled and 
  slid into the grooves, the characters discover it fits perfectly. The round 
  protrusion extending from the eastern side of the post is a stone ring sized 
  large enough to hold a torch or fat candle.
  Placing a lit torch or candle into the ring causes light to pass through 
  the punched holes in the metal sheet, throwing small rectangles of light on 
  
  148
  Quests of Doom: lycanthropes & elementals
  This magical artifact resembles a black iron lantern with cut crystal 
  panes. When visible, the Lanthorn burns with a black-blue light. The 
  Lanthorn naturally produces a permanent darkness effect in a 15ft 
  radius around it, but this blackness can be temporarily negated with a 
  daylight or similar spell. If countered, the darkness fades for as long as 
  the negating spell is in effect, returning once the spell ends.
  The Darkling Lanthorn has three magical properties. First, a rare 
  shadow elemental is linked to the artifact, residing within its housing. 
  The elemental can emerge from the Lanthorn to protect it and to 
  defend the conduit (see below) the artifact produces. The elemental 
  can return to the Darkling Lanthorn when injured, healing all damage 
  after spending 24 hours within the artifact. 
  Secondly, the Darkling Lanthorn acts as a gate as per the 9th-level 
  spell. The gate leads solely to the Plane of Shadow and is permanent 
  as long as the Darkling Lanthorn exists. Any creature speaking the 
  phrase, “Lethel marr d’clatik” (a phrase in Aklo meaning, “Behold the 
  Dark,” which is inscribed on the base of the Lanthorn), is transported 
  to the Plane of Shadow as per the gate spell. The gate works in both 
  directions.
  Lastly, the Darkling Lanthorn has the power to form a conduit 
  between the Material Plane and the Plane of Shadow. This conduit 
  allows the basic essence of shadow to slowly invade the Material 
  Plane with its pervasive darkness. This “Darkening” begins slowly, 
  assimilating a 2-mile area per day at first, but quickly begins to 
  advance at an almost geometric rate. The effects of this darkening are 
  detailed above.
  The Darkling Lanthorn is subject to physical and magical attacks. 
  Destroying the Lanthorn closes the conduit, the gate, and banishes 
  the shadow elemental back to the Plane of Shadow if it is still alive 
  and outside the confines of the Lanthorn. The Darkling Lanthorn has 
  an AC of 4 [15] and 100 hit points. It is immune to cold, lightning, 
  necrotic, and has damage resistance against non-magical weapons.
  If reduced to 25 hit points or less, the Darkling Lanthorn attempts 
  to summon 1d4 greater shadows to help protect it. There is a 33% 
  chance this summoning is successful. Other than this power and the 
  shadow elemental guardian, the Darkling Lanthorn cannot defend 
  itself.
  Shadow, Greater (1d4): HD 4+4; HP 26, 28, 24, 22; AC 
  5[14]; Atk touch (1d6 plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 
  11; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: +1 or better weapon to 
  hit, drain 1d4 points of strength with hit.
  the door’s face. Each rectangle shines directly on one of the 15 tiles that 
  unlocks the door and deactivates the trap. There is no set order in which 
  the tiles must be pressed; simply depressing all 15 safely opens the vault.
  A party failing to find the key sheet in Area 8 can attempt to deduce 
  what tiles unlock the door. If successful, the party notices certain tiles 
  show slightly more signs of wear. A knock spell also unlocks the door, but 
  does not disarm the trap defending the vault.
  If the trap is triggered, a cloud of once-lethal gas floods the chamber 
  from miniscule vents in the ceiling. Luckily for the party, the toxicity 
  of the gas has diminished over the eons. Each character must make a 
  saving throw or suffer 3d8 points of poison damage. The gas persists for 
  three rounds and characters who failed their initial save must attempt 
  to save again on subsequent rounds or suffer damage. Once a character 
  successfully saves, the gas no longer has an effect.
  Area 12: The Vault of Shadows
  The high, vaulted ceiling of this chamber suggests a large size, 
  but the depths of the room are swathed in stygian blackness. A 
  few thick pillars march away from the door only to vanish into the 
  gloom. Somewhere in the darkness comes a hideous rustling sound 
  as if the very fabric of reality was undulating in unnatural rhythm. 
  Uhl-Kal-Totten kept his most prized treasures in this secure vault, 
  where they remained undisturbed for millennia. But when a single, stray 
  root brushed across the Darkling Lanthorn, that contact with vitality was 
  enough to rouse it from its long slumber. The shadow elemental within 
  escaped its prison and now oversees the conduit between the Plane of 
  Shadow and the material world.
  The far end of the room is covered in the magical darkness created by 
  the Darkling Lanthorn, and neither the artifact nor the shadow elemental 
  who lurks within it is visible. The darkness can be circumvented as normal 
  (a continual light spell, for example), which temporarily banishes the 
  gloom and makes the Lanthorn visible (see Sidebox above).
  The shadow elemental dwells in the vault, restrained in this room by 
  an innate connection to the Lanthorn and its need to protect the conduit 
  to the Plane of Shadow. It waits until one or more characters approach the 
  magical darkness and then rushes from the gloom to attack.
  If Egrihl the Shadowkin fled here after confronting the party in Area 
  10, he, too, waits within the darkness, ready to strike.
  Elemental, Shadow: HD 8; HP 50; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (3d8 
  plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 1d6 points of 
  strength on hit.
  If the darkness is dispelled, the party glimpses an incredibly old lantern 
  forged from black iron and lit with blue-black flame. This is the Darkling 
  Lanthorn. It rests atop a stone table, a large root coiling around its handle 
  Darkling Lanthorn
  
  149
  the darkening of Namjan forest
  and vanishing into a crack in the stone wall. The air around the Lanthorn 
  ripples with shadows, creating the audible rustling noise. The occasional 
  glimpse of a dark, gloomy world is visible in the cut crystal windows of 
  the Lanthorn. The Lanthorn can be targeted by attacks and spells if visible 
  and, if destroyed, seals the conduit and puts an end to the Darkening (see 
  Sidebox for more information).
  Destroying the Darkling Lanthorn before the Darkening fully envelops 
  the forest (see Concluding the Adventure below) causes the conduit to 
  break apart, creating a brief but powerful suction of ethereal wind as the 
  breach tears apart. All creatures within 40ft of the Lanthorn when it is 
  destroyed must make two saving throws. If the individual fails either save, 
  the failing conduit sucks him into it as it collapses, sending the unlucky 
  creature tumbling into the Plane of Shadow. The fall does not injure the 
  individuals, but does leave them stranded on another plane with no easy 
  way to return. They must survive the shadowy threats long enough to 
  discover another means to return home.
  With the Darkling Lanthorn vanquished, the pervasive gloom filling 
  the cellar vanishes and the party discerns several large stone chests lined 
  against the wall in the southwest corner of the room. These chests are 
  locked but not trapped. They contain:
  • Chest #1: 1506cp and 997gp.
  • Chest #2: 57sp and 360gp.
  • Chest #3: a small coffer holding 4 emeralds (100gp value each), 8 
  sapphires (150gp value each), 4 white opals (200gp value each), and 2 
  pink diamonds (300gp value each).
  • Chest #4: A gold trinket box (500gp value), an electrum statuette 
  of an ancient tribal chieftain (200gp value), a breastplate adorned with 
  moonstones (400gp value), a gem-encrusted sundial (700gp value), and a 
  gold and ruby ring (1200gp value).
  • Chest #5: A staff of striking and a ring of wizardry.
  Concluding the Adventure
  The destruction of the Darkling Lanthorn likely closes the conduit (see 
  below) between the Material Plane and the Plane of Shadow, halting the 
  Darkening and preventing Namjan Forest from become a beachhead of 
  darkness. With the Lanthorn gone, the effects of the Darkening slowly 
  subside, vanishing like shadows at noon. Creatures infected by the touch 
  of the Plane of Shadow do not revert to normal, however, and remain 
  affected until their deaths. Whether it’s possible for them to pass on these 
  traits to their offspring remains to be seen (and may play a role in further 
  adventures). The party that ends the Darkening are rewarded as promised 
  by the duke, earning the 2500gp bounty and are named “Wardens of 
  Namjan Forest,” a minor noble title that also allows them the right to 
  build a stronghold within the woodlands and act as local overseers of this 
  frontier domain. 
  It is possible, however, that the spread of shadow grows too large to 
  be easily broken with the Lanthorn’s destruction. If the party tarries too 
  long and the daily growth of the Darkening infiltrates every forest hex on 
  the overland map, the Plane of Shadow succeeds in establishing a claim 
  on the Material Plane. In this event, destroying the Darkling Lanthorn is 
  insufficient to seal the conduit. Like an avalanche racing downhill, the 
  Plane of Shadow gains too much momentum and the artifact is no longer 
  necessary to keep the conduit open.
  In this case, the Darkening continues to spread across the land, moving 
  beyond the boundaries of the forest and infecting whatever it touches. 
  The encroaching shadows grow daily, and the forces of light and hope 
  are pushed back before the advance. Powerful magic, perhaps in spell 
  form or residing in ancient relics, is necessary to seal the conduit and 
  halt the invasion. However, with the conduit now stable, shadow denizens 
  begin pouring through the gate and its now not just shadow-touched 
  creatures the defenders of light must face. Eventually, an entire shadow 
  army marches out of Namjan Forest to lay siege to the world. Only an 
  equally powerful force of Good and Light has a hope of stopping them. 
  The characters likely see conflict on the front lines whether they want to 
  or not, as their previous fight against the touch of shadow makes it likely 
  they’ll be approached to help end its invasion.
  
  150
  Men&
  Monstrosities
  
  151
  deep in the vale
  This adventure is a beginner-level fantasy adventure with a bias toward 
  fighter characters. 
  Referee’s Notes
  In this adventure, your player characters should start at 1st level with 
  zero experience points. As they run through each encounter, give them the 
  experience points they earn instead of waiting until the entire adventure is 
  over. As the Referee, you want your characters to gain a level or two and 
  the hit points those levels add to the character sheet. 
  The characters have lived their whole lives in the Vale. The pleasant valley 
  is a peaceful place with few things bothering the inhabitants. Thirty years 
  ago, orc and goblin wars occurred that the oldsters of the village still talk 
  about. However, life is easy for the people of the Vale — but that is about to 
  change. This adventure is not about acquiring gold and vast treasure. It instead 
  presents many fighting situations with enough choices so that the players 
  know they are roleplaying and that their decisions move the action along.
  The characters are exposed to encounters coming into the Vale looking 
  to do the inhabitants harm. Some roleplaying is involved where the 
  players have to figure out how to best defend themselves from danger. 
  Don’t assume each of these encounters happens day after day in the Vale. 
  Let a few days or even weeks pass between encounters. 
  Give the characters time to think of ideas to prepare for the greater 
  dangers coming into their peaceful valley. The players should roleplay 
  the various jobs they have in the Vale. The blacksmith is going to make 
  shields and war hammers. The hunters are going to look for deer in the 
  woods to the north. Life must continue to flow in the Vale, no matter what 
  problems affect the villagers. 
  At the end of all of these encounters, the ealdorman in the burh of 
  Warsley, a fortified city 20 miles to the south, having heard of the exploits 
  of the characters, could easily order them to come to his hall and deal with 
  a problem in another part of his shire. 
  In the Lost Lands campaign setting, the Vale is nestled among the lower 
  slopes of the Cumbrian Mountains just north of the burgh of Warsley. 
  It lies on the western edge of the Helcynngae Peninsula, though it has 
  largely been isolated from most of the turmoil of the Helcynn over the last 
  few centuries. The residents of the Vale are hard-working Heldring folk, 
  fair of face and long of limb with flaxen or red hair. The men favor beards 
  while the women tend to wear their hair in long braids, with both genders 
  wearing arm-rings and ornamental brooches to display their affluence. The 
  rest of the world may see the Heldring as peerless warriors and pitiless sea 
  raiders, but to the folk of the Vale they are just neighbors and friends who 
  leave the wars and raiding to others of the Helcynn.
  Introduction
  In any beginner game, the Referee needs to help his players learn how 
  to roleplay and react to his descriptions. Many battles are in this adventure, 
  but to get to them, the Referee should encourage the characters to reach 
  the proper conclusions. Encouragement is done through the use of NPC 
  villagers of the Vale. A new Referee must know inside and out the “combat 
  rules” and the “experience rules” for this adventure to work properly. 
  The beginning player characters are all from the Vale. This is a simple place 
  where the equipment needed to live is sparse. No suits of armor or warhorses 
  are available to buy in the local area. If the characters want that material, they 
  must go many miles away to the city. The equipment that can be purchased 
  is found in the farms and homes of simple people. The tinker and his wagon 
  supply things such as daggers, pots, and pans, and some useful chemicals and 
  leather goods. The people of the village are capable of making backpacks, fur 
  cloaks, lanterns and the like. These goods appear at the market in the village 
  square. The blacksmith player character is able to make shields, but swords 
  and more complex weapons are beyond him. The leatherworker can make 
  boiled-leather chest plates, but more complex armor is beyond him. 
  The player characters could expect to have things made by farmers and 
  blacksmiths. Assume in this adventure that each of the player characters 
  has a job in the village. The strongest of the player characters is the 
  blacksmith. Parcel out jobs for the rest of the group. Suggestions include: 
  farmer, orchard grower, herdsman, dairyman, innkeeper, leatherworker, 
  and woodcarver. Have the characters in their late teens. All of the 
  characters work successfully at their own jobs. 
  The central figure, the blacksmith, is the fighter type and has a war club 
  his father carved from a piece of oak that lightning struck. The others in the 
  group have quarterstaffs. If there is a magic-user, he has several throwing 
  daggers. Their parents gave them their backpacks, which include things 
  such as mirrors, flint and steel, waterskins, pots, metal plates and cups, 
  blankets, heavy cloaks, changes of clothes, bandages, and skins of wine. 
  A cleric worships Thor and keeps up the shrine at the entrance to the Vale. 
  As the Referee, your task is to describe people, places and things so well 
  that they come alive in the minds of your players. You want to make the 
  encounters interesting. If your players enjoy themselves, they keep coming 
  back and all of you can enjoy the fun of this experience. One of the most 
  important things you can do as a Referee is to maintain a sense of excitement. 
  You live and work in the Vale. Each of you has your own home 
  and has been on your own for several years, making a good living 
  in the Vale and growing to adulthood. The Vale has been good to 
  you, and you like the land and the people who live in this area. 
  You have a group of friends that you like to tip a few ales with 
  at the local inn. As teenagers, you all have dreamed about being 
  brave heroes just like in the legends the oldsters talk about at the 
  inn. 
  It’s Thor’s Day, and you and your friends are up before the 
  dawn. Thor’s Day happens in the middle of every week. You all 
  stand with weapons in hand at the shrine of Thor, at the top of the 
  hill. You wait for the dawn sun to peek over the hill to the east. 
  To the west is your valley and homes. 
  As the blacksmith, you are the strongest member of your group. 
  As the son of a blacksmith, you have been shaping metal for most 
  of the seventeen years of your life. You smile at the rest of the 
  group. They are farmers, dairymen, and orchard growers. Every 
  week, you all get together for this run. The rest of your friends 
  want to beat you in this race, but none has been able to do so in 
  the last five years. 
  Dawn’s light comes over the hill. “Go,” you shout. Heading 
  north, you all enjoy the feel of your muscles working. The first 
  part of the run is five miles to the ridges on the west side of the 
  valley. You jog around the valley three times, as fast as you can 
  for the exercise running provides for the group. As you run these 
  ridges, you look down at the cabins. The largest of the homes 
  holds Amber. She is eighteen, and constantly on your mind. 
  Deep in the Vale
  By James M. Ward
  
  152
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  1 inch = 50 feet
  
  153
  deep in the vale
  In minutes, you and your friends run past the fields of parsnips, 
  cabbages, and beans along the western side of the valley. Donal 
  rushes past, and you laugh. Your friends know he has rushed 
  ahead way too early. 
  As the group runs near the black tower in the southwest end 
  of the valley, everyone gives that mass of magical stone a wide 
  margin. A wizard lives in that tower. As children, you dared each 
  other to slap the tower door and run away. That stopped when 
  Devon turned to stone for 24 hours. 
  The south end of the valley is filled with the dark forest. Even 
  the hunters avoid that place. The group runs east past the huge 
  apple orchard. The red apples are thick and large on the many 
  trees. Stomachs grumble at the thought of apple pies baking and 
  placed on cabin windowsills for cooling. 
  The reason for your weapons on this run becomes clear as the 
  howls of the wolves and bleats of the sheep hit your ears. The 
  sheep and cow pens are large and right together on the east side 
  of the Vale. Running up, you see the four large wolves feasting 
  on four different sheep. The beasts aren’t paying any attention to 
  your group.
  A Run Around the Valley
  The group is running for exercise. They come across a pack of wolves 
  feasting on sheep in a large grazing pen. The wolves are hungry and just 
  started eating the sheep. They aren’t paying attention to the characters. 
  These wolves won’t run from battle and fight over the bodies of the sheep 
  they are eating. The characters get in the first strike at each wolf and then 
  the battle begins in earnest. 
  The wolf pelts make fine cloaks for the player characters. In two weeks, 
  the leatherworker can make cloaks that add a bonus of 1 to the armor class 
  of the wearer. 
  Wolf  (1 per character): HD 2+2; HP 10 each; AC 7[12]; Atk 
  bite (1d4+1); Move 18; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: 
  none. 
  The Vale
  The Vale is a very prosperous place. Everyone works and enjoys life 
  in the peaceful valley. For more than a hundred years the wizard of the 
  Vale has secretly protected the land around his tower. He’s getting old and 
  isn’t as capable as he was when he was only a hundred years old. The old 
  sorcerer still has plenty of power, but he relies on magic items he creates. 
  If a spellcaster is in the group, the old wizard finds a way to reward the 
  younger mage with a valuable magic item to protect the people of the 
  Vale. 
  The characters all know exactly what is useful in any given cabin and 
  have no problem asking to borrow these items. As the Referee, feel free to 
  suggest they take this equipment to fight the Vale’s battles. 
  Amber’s Cabin 
  Amber is 18 years old and the true beauty of the Vale. She has always 
  liked the blacksmith of the Vale. Everyone figured she would marry him 
  when she turned 18. Her log cabin is the largest of the cabins of the Vale. 
  This vinter’s cabin has six large rooms and a loft above half of it. She 
  and her father live there. Her father grows grapes on the hillsides east 
  
  154
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  of the Vale. His red and white wines age in barrels in the root cellar of 
  the cabin. 
  Amber works with the sheep and spins wool to make very warm clothing 
  and blankets. She is skilled with a sling and iron bullets the blacksmith 
  makes for her. Amber is a useful NPC. She flirts with all the members of 
  the group, and is perfect for giving suggestions that move the adventure 
  along. She is also the focus of a quest during the adventure. 
  Her father was in the Warsley fyrd (the militia army) 20 years ago. He 
  has a poleaxe and a steel breastplate he wears when gearing up for battle. 
  He is an old man, however, and wouldn’t be much use in a real combat 
  situation.
  Farmer’s Cabin 
  The farmer grows parsnips, cabbages, and beans in three large fields. 
  He can be a player character or another NPC run by the Referee. His home 
  is a large four-room log cabin. Out back is a pair of large horses that pull 
  plows over the fields. His root cellar is the largest in the Vale and is stores 
  the produce he doesn’t sell in Warsley. He has a wagon for taking his 
  crop to town. Two short swords hang above the mantel in his cabin. The 
  farmer’s two grandfathers used these weapons in the Mountain War with 
  the goblin tribes 30 years ago. The weapons are a tad rusty, but could be 
  made battle-ready with a little care. 
  Herdsman’s Cabin 
  While Amber turns wool into yarn, the herdsman tends the sheep and 
  moves them about the hillsides to crop the grass. He can be a player 
  character or an NPC. His cabin has two large rooms. An adjoining shed 
  is used to store the wool after shearing. Four adult sheep dogs obey the 
  character’s commands and are extremely useful in battles in the Vale. 
  Currently, 100 sheep are in a very large pen east of the cabin. Every 
  morning, the sheep are taken to a different section of the gentle sloping 
  hills and allowed to crop the grasses in those areas. 
  Dairy Cattleman’s Cabin 
  The dairyman’s cabin is large with two rooms. An adjoining milk barn 
  is where the cows are milked and their milk stored for sale or processing. 
  Other workers help the dairyman milk the cows. He then gets more help 
  making butter and cheese. A total of 20 dairy cows are in a very large pen. 
  A group of 5 teenagers take the cows out each day to let them feed to the 
  north of the Vale. All of these boys carry slings and river stones for sling 
  bullets. They constantly test each other’s skills. In a battle in the Vale, they 
  go to a ridge line and hurl sling stones down at an enemy. 
  Worker’s Family Cabin 
  Each of these cabins has two large rooms and a large loft above the 
  rooms. These workers do whatever jobs are needed in the Vale. Each has 
  two or three children of varying ages. In times of danger, the kids go 
  into the root cellars while the mother and father stay above to protect the 
  entrance. The workers wield quarterstaffs and are unusually adept with the 
  weapons as they practice weekly on Thor’s Day on the common green. 
  These workers all have large beekeeping areas. The Vale’s honey is 
  famous for its reported healing properties. Besides its value as food, the 
  honey cooks into mead that is sold for extra income. When the farmer 
  goes into town on his wagon, he always takes several bottles, jars, and 
  even small casks of honey and mead for sale. 
  Red Apple Inn 
  The Red Apple Inn is a large two-story building. The upper story 
  has six bedrooms and a bath chamber. The lower floor has a common 
  chamber and bar, a kitchen with a pantry, and a bedchamber for the 
  innkeeper and his wife. The inn is famous for apple ale and meat 
  pies. The innkeeper’s five children and his wife help run the inn. 
  A small stable is at the side of the inn and a good-sized paddock 
  sits behind it. At any given time, four sound horses are for sale. 
  Everyone in the Vale eats here at lunchtime, when they get together 
  to talk about the events of the week. It’s a little known fact that the 
  innkeeper and his wife are expert marksmen with a heavy crossbow, 
  and that they’ve taught their sons and daughters this skill. The entire 
  family is capable of sitting on the roof of the inn and firing down on 
  advancing enemies. 
  Village Green 
  The village green is the Vale’s social center. Every week, the adults 
  practice quarterstaffs here while the children train with slings. At the 
  end of the week, if the weather is pleasant, music is played on the green. 
  Sometimes, when danger is in the area, everyone comes to the village 
  green to band together and protect the Vale. 
  Thor’s Shrine 
  The shrine has been at the entrance to the Vale for as long as anyone 
  can remember. Maintaining the shrine has customarily been the job of 
  the Vale’s blacksmith. Once a day, the stones are wiped down with raw 
  wool and mistletoe is spread out evenly on the marble arch. If the hammer 
  bell isn’t ringing because of the wind, the caretaker chimes the bell a few 
  times a day.
  The blacksmith shop with its anvil and furnace are in a large one-
  room cabin behind the shrine. The smith is a player character and is the 
  strongest in the group. This person is the party’s main fighter. If this 
  character doesn’t have a 17 or 18 for strength, tell the player that working 
  with metal all his life gives him great strength to equal 17. The blacksmith 
  is gifted by the Heldring gods with the ability to make battle hammers 
  quickly. He also can make stoutshields. 
  The Shrine’s Warning
  Clerics put the shrine to Thor at the top of the rise hundreds 
  of years ago. The shrine is a white marble arch with mistletoe 
  growing all over the sides and top. A small bell in the shape of 
  a hammer hangs down from the top of the arch. A good-sized 
  white marble bench is below the arch so people can rest their 
  tired bodies and enjoy the view down into the Vale. The creators 
  of the shrine hoped the gods would look favorably on the valley 
  and give the people their blessing. 
  As the blacksmith, you have come to the top of the rise to look 
  for the tinker and his cart. He’s been expected for several days. 
  During the past week, you started making shields and wondered 
  if the tinker could sell them for you. As you neared the shrine, 
  you sent up a prayer to Thor, the deity of combat and strength, 
  and the shrine started to glow. On the bench appeared a war 
  hammer. You couldn’t help but wonder at this message, as you 
  have never seen the shrine glow before. When the hammer is 
  picked up, the glow vanishes.  
  The glow has no explanation. Thor knows the Vale is under attack by 
  several different forces and gives the blacksmith player character a high 
  quality, war hammer to defend the valley. The weapon glows when it is 
  within 90ft of any monster. From now on, the blacksmith can make these 
  weapons although they won’t have Thor’s glow. 
  As the Referee, you need to create a sense of danger that wasn’t present 
  
  155
  deep in the vale
  before in the Vale. As the characters work at their various jobs, they sense 
  that they are being watched. The hackles on the backs of the characters’ 
  necks rise for no reason. 
  The villagers gossip about crops stolen in the night. They discuss how 
  farm animals are being killed and parts of them carried away into the Dark 
  Forest. They also worry that fall has come a bit early, and all the crops are 
  ready for picking. 
  Dark clouds come out of the south, blotting out the sun and making 
  things very dark in the Vale. Thunder and lightning fill the sky day and 
  night as a goblin shaman causes the clouds so the sun doesn’t cause a glare 
  for the goblins and orcs who might attack during the day. If the party has a 
  cleric, that player knows the dark clouds are an evil sending.
  Introduce the charming daughter of the winemaker of the Vale. Amber 
  is interested in the blacksmith. She flirts with other player characters to 
  make the blacksmith jealous. If she hears the blacksmith describe the 
  unusual hammer and the glowing shrine, she insists on being taken there. 
  When she urges the blacksmith to sit with her on the bench, she glows 
  with Thor’s favor. This scares the wits out of her and she rushes home. 
  This foreshadows her abduction in a later encounter. 
  Skeletons Smashing in the Door
  In the middle of the night, a pounding sounds on the door of the 
  blacksmith’s cabin. As the Referee, make sure you know exactly what the 
  character is holding and wearing. Do not allow him to gear up. If he over-
  prepares, make the first encounter an NPC who needs help birthing a cow. 
  The player should feel silly that he had a weapon in hand. 
  Days later, the real encounter occurs as the pounding at the door turns 
  out to be 2 skeletons coming in to attack. The skeletons should be easy 
  to kill. 
  After the battle, find out exactly what the blacksmith character wants 
  to do because more skeletons are attacking other houses this night. The 
  blacksmith hears shrieks in the night. His first thoughts imagine Amber in 
  trouble. He also might want to alert his friends in their houses. 
  Attacking the other cabins are 6 skeletons. Each is an easy battle, 
  especially if other characters join the action. Thor’s hammer glows in the 
  darkness as the wielder comes within 90ft of the monsters, but it displays 
  no other magical properties. 
  The goblin shaman sent the zombies to attack the Vale. Creating the 
  zombies was a lot of effort for the shaman, and he rests afterward for 
  several weeks.
  Skeleton (8): HD 1; HP 5x2, 6x2, 3x2, 4, 7; AC 8[11]; Atk strike 
  (1d6); Move 12; Save 17; AL N; CL/XP 1/15; Special: immune 
  to sleep and charm.
  The Tinker’s Demise
  On another Thor’s Day, the player characters are waiting at the 
  top of the rise. The talk is about the skeletons that invaded two 
  nights ago. There was no trail to show where the skeletons came 
  from. As the sun rises in the dawn sky, in the distance down the 
  Shire Road everyone can see the Tinker’s unmoving wagon. The 
  group runs to the wagon to note the horses killed by orc arrows. 
  The tinker’s head is on a pole by the wagon. The pole is covered 
  in blood and has strange stones and raven claws attached to it. No 
  one knows what it means. The goods in the wagon are thrown all 
  around the area. 
  The orc arrows are all alike, with large shafts more than 3ft 
  long and painted in the colors of a certain orc tribe. Each uses 
  raven feathers and has an obsidian arrowhead. The orcs like the 
  damage the razor-sharp volcanic stone does to the target. Orc 
  raiders haven’t been seen in the area in years. The people of the 
  Vale need to be warned. 
  Many fun role-playing situations can be had with this discovery. 
  The Referee should use the people of the Vale to present options for 
  the player characters to consider as the population of the Vale meets 
  at the inn. 
  Do the player characters pack up everything and take the wagon and the 
  body down into the Vale? Or do they plunder the wagon since the tinker 
  isn’t going to do anything with the materials? Many useful items are in 
  the wagon and include, but are not limited to, throwing daggers, axes, 
  lanterns, oil for the lanterns, holy symbols of many types, trail rations, and 
  kitchen items such as cups, plates, and cutlery. Enough items are available 
  to supply all the player characters with useful equipment. 
  The Vale populace needs to be warned about the orcs. This roleplaying 
  situation has the player characters get all of the people of the Vale together 
  at the inn. Should the wizard of the tower hear news of this danger? Could 
  Amber like the blacksmith more for revealing this new encounter? What 
  are the people of the Vale supposed to do? Is there a need to set up a 
  night watch? Should someone go to The burh of Warsley to raise the fyrd 
  and bring help? What is the significance of that strange pole the orcs left 
  behind? 
  The characters are not good trackers. They couldn’t find the trail the 
  orcs left after they attacked the tinker. But should the party sweep the area 
  looking for signs of the orcs? 
  Danger at the Heart of the Forest
  All the villagers talk about the problems presented by the 
  tinker attack. Everyone thinks scouting the camp of the orcs 
  and reporting back to the Vale is necessary. With heavy hearts, 
  the entire town knew that going into the Dark Forest was a 
  dangerous part of this task. This was the place where monsters 
  collected. 
  As the village folk talk about the tinker’s death, the innkeeper 
  serves up free drinks of apple cider. Suddenly, the door opens 
  and a stranger walks in. The elf fighter is wearing the furs of 
  a wolf.
  Smaragdus, Elf (Ftr3): HP 18; AC 3[16]; Atk longsword (1d8+1) 
  or longbow x2 (1d6+1); Move 12; Save 12; Str 16; Dex 14; Con 
  13; Int 10; Wis 11; Cha 12; Special: +1 to hit and damage 
  strength bonus, +1 on missile weapon attacks, 3 attacks vs. 
  creatures with 1 HD or less, darkvision 60ft, detect secret 
  doors (4 in 6 with search, otherwise 2 in 6), parry (–1 penalty 
  to enemy attacks.
  Equipment: chain mail, shield, longsword, longbow, 20 
  arrows, wolf fur coat.
  Smaragdus the elf is here to stimulate the action in the adventure 
  and help the characters survive. As the Referee, you need to think how 
  to roleplay this character. Think of a movie character you like that is 
  aggressive and interesting and make Smaragdus like that character. 
  You could make him a Robin Hood character or a sarcastic comic book 
  character you like. Accents can be amusing, with the elf saying things like, 
  “Well, I don’t know now,” over and over again. The elf’s agenda is to find 
  a very special wolf he has been seeking for years. When he describes the 
  beast, the elf gets a far-away look on his face. The description makes it 
  sound very dangerous as he describes a huge wolf with white fur on all 
  its legs. Sounding very sad, Smaragdus explains that the wolf killed his 
  younger brother. When the party goes into the forest, they find an unusual 
  number of wolves. Smaragdus doesn’t let the group search the woods after 
  sunset. 
  The elf should also suggest setting traps along the edge of the 
  Dark Forest. This defensive planning takes place with the help of the 
  townspeople. What type of traps would best stop the orcs? The player 
  characters should think of traps and then lead the way in getting those 
  traps made.
  
  156
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Even if the elf is leading, chills go down your spines as you 
  enter the Dark Forest. This is the place of scary legends for you. 
  All your life, your family and friends have filled you with stories 
  of the dangers of the forest. Right away, the elf pushes the group 
  off the animal trail you were following. In seconds, two orcs 
  come into view. Each is armored and ready for war, not 90ft from 
  the edge of the forest. The elf signals the group with a question: 
  Attack them or leave them alone?
  If the characters attack and slay the orcs, read the following textbox. 
  If they decide to let the orcs be, however, modify the text to omit any 
  mention of the orcs. 
  Orc (2): HD 1; HP 6, 7; AC 6[13]; Atk scimitar (1d8); Move 9; 
  Save 17; CL/XP 1/15; Special: none.
  The fight with the orcs is resolved, so the group travels several 
  miles into the Dark Forest using the animal trails. The elf gathers 
  the group together. “There is goblin sign all over this area. I fear 
  there is a large tribe of them somewhere near. We can search 
  them out or go wide of this area. What do you all wish to do?”
  If the group wants to travel to the goblin camp, the elf leads them along 
  the ridges of the Dark Forest. In the late afternoon, the group finds the 
  tribe of goblins at a massive cave opening on the side of the hill. There 
  is no way to tell how many goblins are in that cave. At any one time, the 
  group notes at least 20 goblins maintaining a huge fire as others chop up 
  the forest to fuel the blaze. Several goblin shamans hold the totems that 
  are exact copies of the one found near the tinker’s wagon. Just this little 
  evidence makes it clear that the goblins and orcs are working together.  
  While the party watches the camp, the shamans are working on some 
  sort of altar, speaking their prayers directly to the stone. The large 
  rectangular block glows with a hellish light. Several types of wild animals 
  are dead on the stone. Once they bleed out, the bodies are thrown in the 
  large fire. The goblins are preparing several sacrifices. 
  The elf takes the party back to the village. In the discussion that follows 
  at the inn, the elf is sure the goblins pose a growing danger to the Vale. 
  The elf is sure the creatures are going to make some type of important 
  sacrifice. He says that after such a sacrifice, the goblins transform into 
  more dangerous creatures. 
  If the Characters Don’t Want to Head 
  Toward the Goblins
  If the party doesn’t want to follow the goblins, the elf leads them 
  in another direction and, hours later, discovers an orc tower that is 
  under construction. Watching the tower for an hour reveals at least 20 
  orcs working on the structure. The tower’s half-built walls are already 
  formidable. A large ogre shows itself as the leader. Several goblin 
  shamans are casting spells on the finished walls. 
  The tower is located by a large pool of water and a 100ft tall waterfall. 
  The orcs are quarrying stones from the hillside by the waterfall and have 
  already dug a deep cliff into the hillside. At least a hundred finished square 
  blocks sit by the tower. With the right effort, those stones might be pushed 
  into the tower to ruin the half-built structure. 
  Back at the Vale, the elf talks with the townspeople about the problems 
  with the growing bands of goblins and orcs. The villagers look to the 
  characters as leaders. Talk continues long into the night about how best to 
  defend the Vale if any bands of monsters attack. This is a great roleplaying 
  
  157
  deep in the vale
  opportunity. The NPC villagers ask a number of difficult questions of the 
  player characters, such as: 
  • How many goblins can the village fight and expect to beat? 
  • What can a goblin shaman do when it casts spells? 
  • When will an orc band or a goblin band attack?
  • Should the village send someone to the ealdorman to ask for help?
  • What type of attacks do the goblins and orcs use in battle? 
  If the characters can’t answer the questions, that isn’t a problem. They 
  should do their best and tell the group when they don’t know the answer. 
  Spider in the Apples
  In the morning, the villagers are up and milling about nervously 
  as they stare at a quarter section of the apple orchard that is 
  covered in unusually thick webs. The webs are so dense that 
  looking past them reveals only a deeper web wall of white. A 3ft 
  wide section of webs extends from the orchard to the sheep pens. 
  A quick count of the sheep reveals five adult sheep missing. 
  The villagers are terrified and hysterical. They don’t know what 
  to do about the webs in the orchard but hope the characters can 
  figure something out. 
  The elf suggests the easiest effort is burn the webs and kill 
  whatever comes out to escape the fire. The orchard owner hates 
  that idea as too much of the ripe fruit is covered in the webs. 
  The elf is not happy, but comes up with another idea. If the 
  villagers use sticks to poke at all sides of the webbing, a group 
  of determined fighters can go into the middle of the webs with 
  a chance of surprising the spiders. The elf knows such creatures 
  use the vibration of the webs to track victims. If the webs are 
  moving all over the area, the spiders won’t know which way 
  to turn in their attacks. Villagers with quarterstaffs stand by 
  youngsters who hold sticks to jiggle the webs. If the spiders 
  appear at an edge, the quarterstaffs should keep the spider away 
  until attackers with better weapons can arrive. 
  In the webbing are 3 giant spiders (1ft diameter). The dead bodies of 
  blood-drained sheep reveal the dangerous spiders in the webs. The yelling 
  villagers and poking sticks distracts the arachnids, making it easy to 
  surprise the spiders, which are on the ground in half-dug holes. Hundreds 
  of web strands lead into the holes. 
  Spider, Giant (1ft diameter): HD 1+1; HP 6, 5, 7; AC 8[11]; 
  Atk bite (1 plus poison); Move 9; Save 17; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; 
  Special: lethal poison (+2 on save).
  Talk to the Wizard
  After the spider attack, the villagers think the wizard of the 
  tower should help defend the Vale. The oldest villagers remember 
  the wizard helping the last time the orcs appeared and attacked 
  from the Dark Forest. 
  Naturally, they want the characters to ask the wizard for help. 
  There is some danger in this act; the last time the wizard made 
  his presence known, he turned a child into a stone statue for 24 
  hours. 
  The elf wants nothing to do with wizard ways and refuses to go 
  with the characters to the ancient spellcaster’s tower. He vows to 
  wait at the inn for the group.  
  This wizard and his tower are useful for the Referee. The wizard pays a 
  good price for anything magical that the group acquires. This same wizard 
  is also able to use spells the player characters can’t cast. For a fee, the 
  wizard can neutralize poison with a potion, can turn a statue back into a 
  character with a stone to flesh scroll, or he can sell the characters useful 
  potions for twice the normal cost. 
  Arcanius has noted the wolves and giant spiders coming into the 
  valley. If the characters think of the tinker, they can tell the wizard 
  what happened. The death of the tinker surprises the wizard, and he 
  becomes very concerned about the villagers of the Vale. He feels he is 
  
  158
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  too old to go with the group into the Dark Forest. But Arcanius wants 
  to do his part defending the valley. He offers the group some special 
  potions and says they are free for the taking. They include 2 potions 
  of healing, a potion of invisibility, a potion of heroism, and a potion of 
  neutralize poison. 
  On a final note, the wizard says, “If you get your enemies to follow you 
  to the Vale, I can shoot fireballs at them.” If a spellcaster is in the group, 
  the wizard gives that character a wand of sleep. The wand has 10 sleep 
  spells and is very powerful against goblins and almost as good against 
  orcs. With that, the wizard closes the door.
  Characters can’t go into or use the wizard’s tower. Attempts to sneak 
  into the tower are met with many magical traps and enchanted guardians 
  that include golems to animated statues. 
  Wizard Arcanius
  The wizard is 300 years old but looks older. Standing a little over 6ft 
  tall, he is almost doubled over from stooping due to old age. He uses 
  a staff with an eagle’s head at the top to help him move about. When 
  the wizard gets angry, the eyes of the eagle glow brightly. The wizard 
  dresses in black silk robes and wears two ruby rings on his fingers. 
  He has a faintly glowing medallion of a scarab beetle on his chest. A 
  green glass dagger is worn at his hip. He could be a useful NPC for the 
  Referee. Whenever the party faces a large problem, they can expect 
  something useful from the wizard — assuming they can pay for the 
  help. After the encounter, the wizard expects his pick of the treasure 
  and any magic items found. In this way, the Referee can keep his game 
  balanced.
  When the player characters report back to the inn, the wizard’s 
  attitude amuses the elf. He suggests that if the wizard intends to fight 
  only if monsters come near his tower, then the villagers should erect a 
  large wooden fence to force the monsters in that direction. Everyone 
  thinks this is a great idea. The tinker’s wagon contained a couple of 
  axes and saws to help cut down the trees if the characters decide to put 
  this plan into action. 
  Wolves in the Night
  In the middle of the night, when the moons are at their highest, 
  the wolves strike. The night fills with howls. In a few heartbeats, 
  the dairy cows and sheep cry out in pain and fear as wolves race 
  around the village. 
  A large number of wolves attack the village. Smaragdus leads most 
  of the villagers to fight the wolves attacking the cows and sheep. 
  During the course of the battle, the elf notes burn marks on the backs 
  of the wolves. The elf surmises the wolves were driven into the village 
  with torches from the direction of the Dark Forest. During the battle, 
  the wolves generally ignore the people in favor of quickly killing 
  animals and dragging them off into the darkness. The wolf attack 
  is just a diversion so the lovely Amber can be kidnapped. After the 
  attack, the party finds a totem of a goblin shaman at the door of her 
  home, and her father killed by attackers. Amber is missing, but no one 
  knows where she is or why she was taken. 
  Have the giant wolf that the elf hunts appear out of the darkness 
  and do some damage. The beast then vanishes in the direction of the 
  homes — specifically Amber’s home. The elf ignores the many wolves 
  in the area in favor of looking for the giant wolf. The people of the 
  village beg the characters to help drive off the wolves attacking the 
  animal pens. 
  Amber is Kidnapped
  Using torches, the wolves are driven out of the Vale. The 
  wounded cows and sheep are tended to. The dead animals are 
  skinned and the smoking huts are filled with fresh meat to cure. 
  Suddenly, an anguished cry splits the night. The door of 
  Amber’s home has been smashed in. The kitchen and living room 
  looks like a battle took place there. Even worse, neighbors who 
  entered the house found her father dead inside. A goblin totem 
  like the one left at the tinker’s wagon stands outside the cabin’s 
  front door. Amber is nowhere to be found, and her body was not 
  among the few villagers slain.  
  Everyone in the Vale has searched the land in and around the 
  village, but no sign of the pleasant Amber can be found. 
  The kidnapping is a big deal. During the wolf attack, the goblins 
  invaded the village and took Amber away. They hid their trail well as 
  they fled, using wolves as mounts. A few of the goblins died in traps at 
  the edge of the forest, which is how the people of the Vale know goblins 
  likely kidnapped Amber. During her kidnapping, Amber thought fast 
  and dropped one of her large amber necklace stones at the forest’s edge. 
  She then dropped nine more stones along an animal trail that the goblins 
  followed during their escape. The elf leads the characters into the forest 
  along the trail. When he nears the goblin lair on a hill in the Dark Forest, 
  they come across a strange scene. 
  Goblins of the Dark Forest
  The elf moves quietly through the pitch darkness. By staying 
  close, everyone is able to keep up. Coming to the goblin’s hillside 
  cave, many strange sights can be seen. Above the cave is a high 
  mound of boulders that looks ready to tip and cover the cave 
  entrance. You can’t tell, but the elf says it is possible goblins 
  are guarding the boulders. A constant flow of male and female 
  goblins goes in and out of the cave. Those going out carry food 
  to a banquet area near the cave entrance. 
  Sixty feet away from the cave, on the flat part of the forest, 
  is a huge fire maintained by young goblins. These creatures 
  don’t have armor and weapons like the adults guarding the 
  cave entrance. The forest is cut away here, and a large stack of 
  wood is used for the fire. Patches of trees cover the rest of the 
  area. Stumps rise out of the ground near the cave entrance, but 
  everywhere else, old trees fill the area.
  Amber struggles on a black stone altar. A sickening glow 
  surrounds the altar as 4 goblin shamans chant spells around her. 
  A strangely shaped, gaseous head slowly takes form above the 
  stone. 
  Amber obviously needs to be saved, but how? The elf warns 
  that charging into the mass of goblins would be certain death. 
  The group moves back into the woods to talk about what they 
  saw.
  The group needs a plan to quickly save Amber since they don’t know 
  when the magic of the goblin shaman will finish. If the players don’t come 
  up with any ideas, the elf can suggest some options. They include the 
  following: 
  Rush In and Throw Burning Logs Everywhere
  The group talks about fires all around the cave and what such blazes 
  might do to the goblins and the shaman. The idea involves the elf taking 
  a burning bush around the perimeter of the cave entrance. Once fires 
  start and the goblins move away from the flames, the characters go to 
  
  159
  deep in the vale
  the large fire and throw the burning logs at the cave entrance and the 
  surrounding countryside. The elf uses his bow on the four shamans. One 
  of the characters unties Amber and pulls her away from certain death. 
  The goblins are indeed very disturbed by the flames. The light is also 
  too bright for them, putting them at a disadvantage. Most of the goblins 
  hide in the cave or try to put out the fires. The player characters are 
  barely noticed at all. The elf kills at least two of the shamans before the 
  characters go to the altar to free Amber. The characters face a battle with 
  the remaining shamans.
  Goblin Shaman (2): HD 1; HP 6, 7; AC 6[13]; Atk war club 
  (1d6); Move 9; Save 17; AL C; CL/XP 2/30; Special: –1 to hit in 
  bright light, spells Clr4 (2/1).
  Spells: 1st—darkness, protection from good; 2nd—hold 
  person.
  If the group frees Amber, they race for the Vale and purposely move 
  toward the wizard’s tower. Some of the goblins chasing the party are 
  caught in the deadly traps at the edge of the Dark Forest. Fireballs from 
  the tower finish off the remaining goblins. 
  Moving back to the goblin base days later reveals it destroyed and dead 
  goblins. The rest of the tribe has left the area. If the characters think of it, 
  they could destroy the goblin altar to avoid trouble later. 
  Sneak to the Boulders and  
  Push Stones Down into the Cave
  At the top of the boulders are 2 goblin guards. They have to be dealt 
  with before the rocks can be toppled into the cave. The falling rocks are 
  a great diversion as all of the goblins outside the cave immediately begin 
  moving rocks. Sneaking into the camp is easy for any character who wants 
  to cut Amber free. Once Amber is freed, the entire party runs to the Vale. 
  The elf rings the gong at the village green to warn the villagers of a large 
  pack of goblins coming out of the darkness. This attack happens long 
  before dawn. 
  Goblin (2): HD 1d6; HP 3, 4; AC 6[13]; Atk short sword (1d6) or 
  javelin (1d6); Move 9; Save 18; AL C; CL/XP B/10; Special: –1 
  to hit in bright light.
  The player characters should lead the defensive efforts, moving Vale 
  defenders around the area to protect the village. The idea of sending 
  goblins close to the wizard’s tower is brought up, and the wizard is warned 
  what could happen. He claims he is more than ready to stop large bands 
  of goblins, which is good as 40 goblins and the 4 goblin shamans come 
  out of the Dark Forest to attack. Many fall prey to traps set at the edge of 
  the forest. If the characters think ahead, they might position villagers or 
  obstacles to move the goblins past the wizard’s tower. Several sleep spells 
  and fireballs finish off the goblins. 
  Days later, scouting the goblin cave reveals that all the creatures have 
  left. The stone altar is destroyed, cracked wide open by rolling boulders. 
  Create a Diversion and  
  Lead Goblins to the Wizard’s Tower
  The group thinks a diversion could cause the goblins to chase the 
  characters back to the Vale. The wizard has also claimed he can kill large 
  groups of goblins. The group agrees the elf should go to warn the wizard. 
  He will leave burning torches along the path to the tower for the characters 
  to follow as they lure the goblins away. 
  Almost all the goblins follow the characters, but 1 goblin shaman 
  remains behind to watch Amber. Once the goblins leave their camp, the 
  remaining characters can attack the shaman and try to free Amber. That 
  shaman has a +1 war club studded with razor-sharp obsidian volcanic 
  stone. 
  The diversion works, causing many of the goblins to die in the traps set 
  at the edge of the Dark Forest. The monsters come close enough to the 
  wizard’s tower for him to use sleep and fireball spells to wipe them out. 
  Rush in and  
  Surprise Attack the Goblin Shaman
  This approach won’t work as 40 adult goblins come out of the cave 
  to attack the characters with javelins and short swords. The 4 goblin 
  shamans use their spells against the characters. As the fight progresses 
  and characters are injured, give them an opportunity to escape and 
  vanish into the forest. If they stay and fight, however, they’ll likely be 
  overwhelmed and killed. The Referee should help the players roll up new 
  characters from the Vale. Amber is lost and never seen again. Such is the 
  price of failure. If you are feeling generous, let the new characters try 
  some other way to save Amber. 
  Orcs of the Dark Forest
  A week passes uneventfully. Then one morning, two cattle 
  herders find two dead orcs in a pit trap at the edge of the forest. 
  The orcs’ bodies are pierced by stakes at the bottom of the pit. 
  Both orcs wear a treasure in weapons and armor, and include a 
  shortbow with two quivers of arrows, a long orc blade made of 
  bronze, and a bronze breast plate and a helm. They each had 11 
  silver coins. Gossipers in the village say these were scouts for a 
  bigger attack group. 
  The villagers decide to post guards near the forest each night, 
  and they also discuss building more traps along the edge of the 
  Dark Forest to snare any other orcs. 
  Nine days after the orcs’ bodies were discovered, the night 
  guards again summon the characters. An orc tripped another trap 
  at the edge of the forest. The guards summon aid after finding 3 
  orcs noisily trying to free their trapped brother. 
  The entire village swarms to defend the Vale, with men and 
  women rushing to their assigned spots. The elf readies fire arrows 
  to use against the orcs.
  The people of the Vale attack the surprised orcs under the light of the 
  full moon, which means the darkness doesn’t count against the characters’ 
  combat abilities. After two orcs die, the other two try to run away. Ask 
  your players if they want their characters to follow the orcs into the much 
  darker forest. 
  Once again, the orcs are ready for battle. They are armored in bronze 
  chain and shield and carry a bronze scimitar. These weren’t hunters; they 
  were ready for battle.
  Orc (4): HD 1; HP 6x2, 7x2; AC 6[13]; Atk scimitar (1d8); Move 
  9; Save 17; CL/XP 1/15; Special: none.
  Unexpected Aid
  One morning, an unexpected visitor rides a wagon into the Vale. 
  The ealdorman has heard of the ongoing troubles in the Vale and 
  sends the experienced warrior Rolaesc to assist the villagers. He 
  brings a wagon loaded with weapons and armor, including 15 
  pole-axes and 20 steel breast plates. This equipment is a gift from 
  the ealdorman to the villagers to use in their defense of the Vale. 
  The sergeant’s orders are to stay and train the people in use of the 
  weapons and armor. 
  The old warrior explains that the ealdorman is very sorry that 
  he can’t raise the fyrd and send it to aid the Vale. The ealdorman 
  acknowledges the danger to the Vale, but trouble brewing with 
  giants in the east end of the shire requires the fyrd to defend the 
  lands there.
  
  160
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Rolaesc, Sergeant-At-Arms: HD 3; HP 15; AC 5[14]; Atk two-
  handed sword (1d10); Move 12; Save 14; AL L; CL/XP 3/60; 
  Special: none.
  Equipment: chain mail, two-handed sword.
  The Referee could encourage the player characters to use the equipment 
  provided. Now, the talented elf and the old warleader can help the 
  characters and the villagers survive. When roleplaying the crusty old 
  warrior, the Referee should think of an old fellow he knows and use that 
  person’s mannerisms and accent. The warrior is not a patient man and 
  expects the people of the valley to work hard to get ready for more orc 
  attacks. 
  The People of the Vale  
  Must Make a Decision 
  The people of the Vale have gathered at the inn to discuss what 
  to do about the orcs. Everyone is certain bands of orcs are coming 
  to attack the Vale. The defenses are as strong as the villagers can 
  make them at the edge of the Dark Forest. Rolaesc wants the 
  people to make a decision: Should the villagers attack the orcs 
  at their base in the forest or wait for the largest band of orcs to 
  attack the Vale? 
  By this point in the adventure, numerous deadly traps cover a line 150ft 
  out from the edge of the Dark Forest. A stout fence also flows from one 
  end of the Vale to the other on the southern end of the valley, but stops 
  before it reaches the wizard’s tower. Everyone knows the wizard can take 
  care of monsters coming near his tower. 
  Thirty feet into the southern edge of the Dark Forest is a line of dried 
  leaves and twigs. During an attack, fire arrows can be used to set these 
  piles burning. The fire behind their ranks prevents the orcs from retreating 
  and also blinds them. The orcs’ night vision is ruined, while the villagers 
  can clearly see the monsters as the band of orcs charges out of the forest. 
  Another line of defense is a hedgerow of thorny plants. The villagers 
  searched the countryside for the thorny vines and planted them along the 
  fence line. Again, an open space with no plants exists by the wizard’s tower. 
  The villagers have practiced rapidly banding together when guards ring 
  a gong on the Village Green. All defenders with sling skills go to the ridge 
  on the eastern end of the Dark Forest. Bowmen and spear-carriers take up 
  positions in the middle of the fence line to keep monsters from climbing 
  the fence. The player characters can roam the entire line and back up 
  difficult battles. Everyone in the Vale thinks the next batch of orc attackers 
  will appear as a large group. The biggest debate is whether to attack the 
  orcs’ tower or wait until the invaders come in force and have the people 
  defend the Vale with the hope that the wizard can destroy the orc group.
  Attack the Tower
  It has been decided that you and the elf should look over the 
  orcs’ base. At dawn of the next day, your band moves out. As you 
  travel through the Dark Forest, the elf points out where the orcs 
  have been scouting the Vale. 
  By noon, you arrive at another forest’s edge and can view what 
  the orcs are doing. A partially built tower stands near a pond 
  of water fed by a waterfall. The water rushes over a cliff wall 
  of granite. The orcs are mining stone from the cliff and cutting 
  it into blocks of stone for the tower. A large pile of stones sits 
  beside the partially built tower. Pulleys and cranes on the cliff 
  face and the tower allow the orcs to maneuver the stone blocks 
  from the pile to the rising tower. The ogre leader seen earlier 
  directs the orcs efforts.
  The elf has two ideas and presents them to the group. You 
  could cut down a tree, but leave the limbs on the trunk so it is 
  easier to carry. Most of the orcs are in the tower during the day 
  as orcs don’t like sunshine. A tree battering ram might topple 
  the pile of stones into the half-built tower, leaving the surviving 
  orcs susceptible to attack as they rush out of the ruined tower. 
  Or, the party could wait until dark when most of the orcs are 
  unarmed and cutting stone in the quarry then attack the workers 
  with surprise before attacking the orcs remaining in the tower. 
  You all talk among yourselves, picking one of the ideas. 
  In either choice, the Vale must win to eliminate the danger. When the 
  ogre leader and 10 orcs are killed, the rest retreat in fear. They are never 
  seen again at this base or in the Vale. 
  Orc (10): HD 1; HP 5x4, 6x3, 7x3 AC 6[13]; Atk scimitar (1d8); 
  Move 9; Save 17; CL/XP 1/15; Special: none.
  Ogre: HD 4+1; HP 24; AC 5[14]; Atk spiked club (1d10+1); 
  Move 9; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: none. 
  Wait for the Orcs to Attack the Vale
  The people of the Vale talk most of the day about what is best for 
  the Vale. The consensus is that the Vale’s defenses are such that they 
  should let the orcs attack. The pit traps and fence line are designed to 
  drive the orcs toward the wizard’s tower. Before the people make a 
  final decision, however, you are encouraged to go to the wizard and 
  get a promise of support from the spellcaster. The looks of fear on 
  the villagers’ faces show that no one wants to face the wizard. The 
  party must trek to the wizard’s tower to talk with him.
  Talk with the Wizard
  The old wizard comes to his tower door looking extremely 
  angry. After you present the needs of defending the Vale, he 
  begins shouting at your group. 
  “I see no reason to help this Vale. Foolish orcs can’t get into my 
  tower. Why should I help the people of the valley?”
  You are all surprised by the wizard’s brief speech. If you can’t 
  talk him into helping, the Vale is doomed. 
  The situation with the old wizard is supposed to occur as a fun roleplaying 
  experience. The players must use their best roleplaying skills to think of reasons 
  why the wizard should help. It won’t take much convincing to get the wizard 
  to agree to lend help with his powerful spells. The group can even get him to 
  tell them how far from the tower he can throw his sleep and fireball spells. The 
  party should leave the wizard feeling that they have done a good job. Now, all 
  they have to do is wait for the orcs to invade. That attack comes the next night.
  Attack in the Night
  The growls in the night testify to the orcs moving in. The clang 
  of the warning gong puts everyone on alert. The elf laid alarm 
  traps deeper into the forest that the orcs tripped in their passing. 
  This allows the people of the Vale to move to their defensive 
  positions long before the orcs near the edge of the forest. 
  
  161
  deep in the vale
  The elf fires flaming arrows into the dry leaves and sticks. 
  In a few heartbeats, an ogre and a mass of well-armored orcs 
  are backlit by the firelight. The burning brush startles the orcs, 
  causing them to rush blindly forward into the deadly traps at the 
  edge of the forest. Pits, springing vine traps, and other hidden 
  surprises take out some of the monsters. 
  A hail of iron sling bullets and arrows drive the band of orcs to 
  the west. The battle is on.
  This is supposed to be a learning experience for the player characters. 
  They should face one or two orcs at a time. When the ogre leader shows 
  up to fight, the entire party, the elf and Rolaesc should take the fight to 
  the monsters. When the ogre dies, it knocks the fight out of the remaining 
  orcs. Further decimating their ranks are exploding fireballs and a stone 
  golem sent by the wizard to mow through the orcs. Thirty minutes into 
  the battle for the Vale, only one or two orcs are left to flee into the Dark 
  Forest. 
  A cheer goes up from the people of the Vale. The characters are regarded 
  as heroes and treated to a heroes’ welcome at the inn. The old wizard 
  comes out of his tower and rewards each player character with gold and 
  useful potions and scrolls. Later in the week, the ealdorman summons the 
  characters with a problem in another part of the shire that he could use 
  their help solving. 
  
  162
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Irtep’s Dish is an adventure for characters of levels 6–8. This adventure 
  requires the skills of a thief or some other expert at traps, a cleric, a magic-
  user, and a fighter to take care of “the heavy lifting.”
  Background
  Irtep is an eccentric wizard, recently as well known for his issues 
  with wine, women, and gambling as for his skill at wizardry, which 
  is substantial. Fat Julie has rescinded his marker at the Fortune’s Fool 
  gambling house in Bard’s Gate, and he has even been banned from the 
  tables at Blazing Bones. The bookies are now hot on Irtep’s heels. His 
  tower appears to be guarded by unmanned arcane defenses. There is 
  speculation (and wagering) that Irtep is no longer in the city at all but has 
  pulled a disappearing act to a different city, country, or even dimension. 
  Despite his personal and moral failings, Irtep is an important wizard 
  whose closely guarded research is sought after by high-ranking officials 
  in the Dominion Arcane. It was widely believed (within narrow wizardly 
  circles) that Irtep was on the verge of a huge breakthrough before his 
  collapse into the dens of ill repute. Dominion and independent magic-
  users are desperate to learn the spells Irtep was allegedly working on, and 
  many are willing to pay any price to discover his secrets. 
  Even now, assassins, bounty hunters, thieves, wizards, and creditors of 
  every stripe are hot on Irtep’s trail, though none has managed to infiltrate 
  his tower and recover their money or his secrets. 
  At the start of the adventure and at various points during it, player 
  characters are contacted by any number of sources seeking to hire them 
  to discover Irtep’s whereabouts. Their investigation eventually leads to 
  Irtep’s tower, which they explore in search of the missing wizard or some 
  clue to his whereabouts. 
  In the course of their exploration, the characters are transported to the 
  Minzoa — a tiny world created by Irtep and hidden within “Irtep’s Dish,” 
  where they must battle the elements, strange microscopic creatures, and 
  other assassins and bounty hunters who are also striving to locate Irtep. 
  Through their explorations, characters discover what truly happened to 
  Irtep, for good or ill. 
  Part 1: 
  The Missing Wizard 
  A variety of methods can be used to involve characters in the quest to 
  locate Irtep and his hidden magic. The most straightforward are rumors, 
  or direct contact from Irtep’s friends, colleagues, or debt collectors. Use 
  whatever method is most likely to hook your players’ interest to get the 
  adventure started. 
  Rumors
  Rumors are most useful for motivated parties of experienced players 
  who enjoy pursuing leads on their own. When handing out initial rumors, 
  have each character make a charisma check and consult the table below. 
  Make these die rolls yourself, behind your screen. That way, players won’t 
  know whether they got an especially high or low roll, and they’ll need to 
  use some judgment when deciding what to believe. 
  The hidden roll helps avoid the “I rolled a 20, so we know my rumor 
  is true” effect.
   
  Result
  Rumor
  6 or 
  less
  There’s nothing going on in town. If it were any 
  more boring in Bard’s Gate right now, the place 
  would be abandoned. (FALSE.)
  7
  An old friend of Irtep the Wizard hired killers to 
  assassinate him over an old grievance (Osgood 
  Flumph, Faisal Dhaken, or Michalena Goddeau 
  are named as the hiring NPC). (FALSE. But assassins 
  are actually claiming to have been hired by these 
  people.)
  8
  “When the wind blows, we’re all going to die. I 
  don’t know what it means but I heard some wizard 
  rambling about it.” (NEUTRAL. This rumor is most 
  effective when it’s uttered by a blind hobo who 
  reappears at odd times to repeat the message.) 
  9
  Tuvio at the Blazing Bones hired someone to kill 
  Irtep over bad debts. (FALSE. Tuvio is owed money, 
  but he’s leaning toward giving the thieves’ guild a 
  finder’s fee to recover his money.) 
  10
  The Dominion Arcane is actively hiring 
  mercenaries. Inquire at the Wizard’s Familiar 
  for more information. (FALSE. Asking about this 
  attracts the Dominion’s attention, which is not 
  necessarily a good thing. The Dominion typically 
  summons its aid. The rumor is likely perpetrated by 
  the Society of Arms to annoy the Dominion.)
  11
  Gamblers who show a little skill can get 
  themselves a no-interest line of credit in most of 
  the gaming houses in the city. (NEUTRAL. Credit is 
  usually available, but there is always interest on it.)
  12
  Fat Julie is offering a reward for Irtep the Wizard’s 
  head over excessive gambling debts. (FALSE. Julie 
  is looking for Irtep, but his own gang is doing the 
  legwork. He offers no reward to outsiders.)
  13
  Irtep racked up massive gambling debts. Even his 
  favorite good luck charm, Michalena Goddeau, 
  refuses to speak to him. (TRUE.)
  14
  Several gangs have already tried to break into 
  Irtep’s tower. Nobody has seen them since. (TRUE)
  15
  “Irtep is a minzoologist, whatever that means. I 
  heard him brag about it once.” (TRUE. A successful 
  intelligence check reveals that a minzoologist 
  studies tiny life forms.)
  Irtep’s Dish
  By Casey W. Christofferson 
  additional material by Scott Greene
  
  163
  irtep's Dish
  Result
  Rumor
  16
  Irtep was romantically involved with Michalena 
  Goddeau, but she hasn’t been seen since his 
  disappearance. The lowdown is that when he ran 
  out of money, she ran off with a charming sell-
  sword. She used to frequent the Fortune’s Fool. 
  She spent a lot of time at his tower while they were 
  together, so she might know some of its secrets. 
  (TRUE.) 
  17
  Irtep used to drink with Osgood Flumph at the 
  Wizard’s Familiar and the Blazing Bones till they 
  had some sort of falling out. Some say it was over 
  a woman, others that it was over Irtep’s arcane 
  studies. Either way, Osgood has spent plenty of 
  time inside Irtep’s tower. Since their friendship fell 
  apart, Osgood’s been holed up at the Wizard’s 
  Familiar. (TRUE.)
  18
  Sources within the Dominion and among 
  several of the temples who have been asked to 
  investigate Irtep’s disappearance are reasonably 
  sure that he has not fled the city. Attempts to 
  locate him magically keep pointing toward his 
  tower, though there’s no sign that anyone is there. 
  (TRUE.)
  19
  Irtep made enemies of a wizard named Faisal 
  Dhaken by beating him at a game of cards, 
  stealing his woman, and co-opting his research. 
  (NEUTRAL. Irtep might have beaten Faisal at 
  cards at some point, but the other two items 
  are incorrect. Faisal has a strong dislike for Irtep, 
  however, arising from years of jealousy over Irtep’s 
  successes.)
  20
  All this drinking and gambling is a recent thing for 
  Irtep. He used to be a stable, sober guy. Maybe 
  his research put a curse on him or something. 
  (TRUE. Irtep was cursed by Osgood Flumph, who 
  hoped that Irtep’s downfall would gain him 
  access to Irtep’s secret laboratory.)
  Irtep’s Associates
  It is always possible that no matter how deeply the Game Master 
  attempts to set the hook of adventure in his players, they refuse to take 
  the bait. In this event, introduce the player characters to associates of Irtep 
  as a way of moving the plot along and engaging the characters in the 
  story. Hearing rumors at the onset of the adventure about a bounty on Irtep 
  can lead characters directly to associates of Irtep and a glorious quest for 
  treasure. Players are typically skittish about unverified rumors, however. 
  This can be especially true if they’ve played other Frog God Games 
  adventures! In this case, a more direct approach is sometimes needed to 
  kick the adventure into high gear. If characters don’t follow up on any 
  rumors, have hunters in search of Irtep or associates of Irtep looking for a 
  hand in solving the wizard’s disappearance approach the characters. 
  Michalena Goddeau
  Goddeau is a girl who frequently works the Blazing Bones. Irtep 
  considered her his lucky charm until his luck (and money) ran dry and she 
  moved her affections to a mercenary flush with cash from a campaign in 
  the Stoneheart Mountains. Michalena visited Irtep’s tower on occasion, 
  and it is suspected that she might know the password. Unfortunately, 
  Michalena went missing within hours of Irtep’s disappearance. 
  She might approach the characters through an intermediary. Her desire 
  is to get the assassins and thieves off her back. Without much money of 
  her own, she figures the only way of doing that is to get an item from 
  Irtep’s laboratory to pay off the hunters so that they leave her alone. She 
  is agitated beyond belief, angry with Irtep, and annoyed that his problems 
  are interfering with her life and livelihood. 
  Michalena is currently hiding out with her boyfriend at the Pride of 
  Waymarch. This knowledge can be gained after questioning her associates 
  at the Blazing Bones or Fortune’s Fool and making a successful charisma 
  check and/or some believable roleplaying. 
  If contacted, or if Michalena seeks out the characters, she asks that they 
  bring her an enchanted bowl from Irtep’s laboratory. She tells them they can 
  keep and sell anything else they find; she only wants the bowl. If characters 
  agree, she gives them the password that gets them in the front door. 
  If characters take Michalena up on her offer but don’t deliver the 
  bowl to her, she puts out a “harlots all-points bulletin” on the characters. 
  Bounty hunters and assassins within 200 miles make the characters’ lives 
  miserable until the characters are dead or Michalena receives 5000gp 
  worth of compensation for her trouble. As they say in the business, “that’s 
  a lotta chedda.” Fortunately for the characters, most of the bounty hunters 
  who respond to such a call are wannabes, has-beens, and other low-rent 
  hoods. 
  Osgood Flumph
  Osgood is a doughty, overweight wizard known to have shared similar 
  lusts for wine, ladies, and rich food when Irtep was on his long winning 
  streak, mostly as a hanger-on or toady. Since Irtep’s fall from grace in the 
  gambling community and his subsequent disappearance, Osgood has lost 
  his main source of free food and drinks. 
  He is currently hiding out at the Wizard’s Familiar, where he worries 
  that assassins, kidnappers, or powerful members of the Dominion Arcane 
  may seek him out and work him over for knowledge of Irtep’s research 
  and whereabouts. 
  Osgood could use magic to contact the characters and ask them to meet 
  him at the Wizard’s Familiar. Once there, he makes a case, begging the 
  characters to help him avoid the assassins by retrieving the Minzoa sextant 
  from Irtep’s secret laboratory. Osgood helped Irtep craft the sextant and 
  figures that he could trade it to the Dominion Arcane for their protection, 
  or at least for a promise that they won’t harm him. Osgood is unsure of 
  the actual password to enter Irtep’s tower, but he is familiar with the trap 
  on the first floor. 
  If the characters take Osgood’s deal, he expects to receive the sextant, 
  and he insists on using a scroll inscribed with a special geas spell on it to 
  make sure the characters remain on the up-and-up with him. He offers the 
  characters the following magic items to help them in their task: a potion 
  of fly, a scroll of lightning bolt, 1000gp apiece, a 500gp diamond, a wand 
  of magic missiles (10 charges), a potion of invisibility, and a +1 weapon 
  of the group’s choice. He also suggests that they help themselves to any of 
  the antiquities Irtep collected, which he keeps crated on the sixth floor of 
  his tower (this is a lie; no treasures are there, only a charmed troll).
  Osgood is particularly suspicious of Faisal Dhaken (an old associate of his 
  and of Irtep), and he warns the characters against meeting with the wizard. He 
  complains that Faisal is one of the reasons Osgood is hiding in the Wizard’s 
  Familiar, since the inn offers protection against magical assault. 
  Folk who know Osgood from the bars and gaming halls might suggest 
  that he is hiding at the Wizard’s Familiar. As Osgood is aware bounty 
  hunters, assassins, and guards are seeking him, so he might reach out to 
  the characters on his own, desperate for protection.
  Not What He Seems
  Osgood is not whom he presents himself to be. In fact, Osgood 
  is the one who placed the curse on Irtep by blending a curse into 
  the sextant specifically set to geas poor Irtep into destructive 
  behavior. Faisal suspects Irtep was cursed and he further suspects 
  that Osgood is behind it, but he has no proof with which to trap 
  the treacherous Osgood. If Irtep is brought to Faisal, the foreign 
  wizard can break the curse.
  
  164
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Faisal Dhaken
  Faisal is a foreign wizard with exotic features and a forked beard. He 
  wears a brilliant black turban with a precious ruby affixed in its center 
  and carries a twisted staff inlaid with silver magical symbols. Faisal has a 
  reputation for dark deeds. Whether this reputation is warranted remains to 
  be seen. He is caustic, haughty, and quick to anger. Faisal was an associate 
  of Irtep in gambling and magical research. He assisted Irtep in enchanting 
  the pipes of Minzoa but was horrified by the demonstration of their use. 
  He begged his friend to destroy the pipes. Irtep refused, and the two parted 
  ways. 
  Some weeks passed before Faisal found Irtep gambling at the Fortune’s 
  Fool. He joined the table to play a hand, hoping time and their mutual 
  love of gambling would allow him to broach the subject of the pipes once 
  more. Irtep again refused to destroy them, and the two had a loud and 
  vocal argument that everyone assumed was over gambling. Because of 
  Faisal’s dark reputation, many observers assume Faisal hired assassins 
  to slay his former friend over the incident. Faisal has quietly offered a 
  substantial reward for finding Irtep, but he wants his friend brought back 
  to safety, not murdered. Faisal may approach the characters and offer them 
  1000gp each, a potion of invisibility, a potion of haste, a potion of giant 
  strength, and a potion of levitation, as well as a scroll of lightning bolt and 
  a scroll of slow. He asks that the characters find Irtep and bring him back 
  alive and unmolested. 
  Faisal is not hiding. He can be found at his apartment in Turlin’s Well. 
  Gynnen Valzoe
  Gynnen is a skilled musician and member of the Bard’s College. 
  Gynnen, probably more than any other associate or panderer of Irtep’s 
  favor besides Faisal, is honestly worried about Irtep and his well-being. 
  Gynnen and Irtep became drinking buddies during Irtep’s winning streak, 
  when Gynnen performed regularly at the Fortune’s Fool. Irtep insisted on 
  taking lessons in pipe playing from Gynnen. Eventually, Irtep persuaded 
  Gynnen to craft a set of pipes for Irtep from mithral, silver, ivory, and rare 
  hardwood. Gynnen understood that Irtep meant to enchant the pipes, but 
  he knows nothing about the specific nature of the enchantment. The bard 
  is afraid that the pipes were enchanted with a malevolent purpose. He 
  would like to see them turned over to the authorities or destroyed. 
  Mostly, though, Gynnen just misses his drinking buddy and wants to 
  make sure that Irtep is alive and safe. If the characters can bring Irtep to 
  him alive, he intends to smuggle the wizard out of the city to start over 
  again in another city with a new identity. 
  Location Scouting and 
  First Contacts
  Somehow, characters must be set on the path of locating Irtep. Rumors 
  and NPCs set the stage for locations the characters should visit in the 
  course of the adventure, as well as suggesting locations the player 
  characters might visit on their journey to Irtep’s tower. Listed here are 
  brief descriptions of the likely locations that the characters might visit 
  in their search for Irtep and his associates. Each location also includes a 
  potential first contact with an NPC that can get the characters access to 
  Irtep’s tower.
   
  The Blazing Bones
  This establishment is a generic, rectangular gaming hall. No special 
  map or floor plan is needed. 
  If the characters head off to the Blazing Bones, they arrive at a darkened 
  establishment. The harlots and streetwalkers normally found near its 
  busy front door are absent. A sign on the door reads “Gone fishing, come 
  back tomorrow. The Mgt.” Attempting to peer through the place’s filthy 
  windows reveals that the inside is indeed dark and empty. 
  The door is locked with a stout lock, and careful inspection (or picking 
  the lock) reveal that it’s also barred from the inside. If the characters 
  persist at trying to get through the door, a half-orc opens the door from 
  inside and tells them to beat it. If asked about Irtep or Michalena, the half-
  orc grins and says. “Don’t worry, the boss is out lookin’ for ’em!” He then 
  slams the door in their faces, bars it again, and goes back to whatever he 
  was doing before. 
  Fortune’s Fool
  Fortune’s Fool is a massive casino and entertainment parlor in the 
  Thieves Quarter of Bard’s Gate. It features a renowned indoor theater and 
  outdoor unarmed fighting arena. Further details on the exact floor plan 
  of the Fortune’s Fool can be found in Bard’s Gate from Necromancer 
  Games, but we provide enough information here for you to use the 
  location.
  Gathering Information
  If characters wander through Fortune’s Fool, talking to patrons and 
  eavesdropping on conversations, you can use the rumors table from above 
  to determine what additional tidbits they gather. Their efforts should lead 
  eventually to a suggestion (friendly or otherwise) that Ayelyln the Barkeep 
  is the best source of information in the place. 
  Assuming that the characters ask the barkeep about Irtep, Faisal, 
  Michalena, or other characters they’ve encountered during their 
  investigation, they are directed to a backroom guarded by a pair of 
  menacing half-orcs (Choli Bonesnapper and Colic) dressed in fine 
  doublets and brandishing two-handed axes. If the characters don’t seem 
  interested in checking out the backroom, a squad of four or more half-orcs 
  surrounds them and insistently escorts them to the backroom. 
  Fat Julie
  If the characters meet with Fat Julie, he greets them in a backroom and 
  offers to pay them to track down Irtep and relieve the wizard of at least 
  15,000gp worth of property — that’s what the halfling bookmaker is owed 
  by the deadbeat spellcaster. Fat Julie is polite to characters (unless they 
  started trouble in his place), but he’s absolutely clear that Irtep owes him a 
  debt and no one welches on Fat Julie. That’s just good business.
  Characters can take Julie’s deal or leave it. Taking the deal may give 
  the characters an added ally or contact in the city whom the Referee can 
  use when setting up further adventures. Refusing Julie’s offer won’t 
  necessarily earn the characters an enemy. Either way, Fat Julie sends his 
  agents to tail the characters through the city to see which other contacts 
  they end up making.
  If characters take the deal, they are directed to track down Irtep’s 
  one-time girlfriend at the Pride of Waymarch, or his old buddy Osgood 
  Flumph at the Wizard’s Familiar. Julie’s agents haven’t been able to make 
  much progress at either establishment because of the Pride’s low tolerance 
  of any being with “half” in their name, and the Wizard’s Familiar’s low 
  tolerance of non-magicians. 
  Public Brawling
  Starting a bloody battle in Bard’s Gate’s largest casino is a very 
  rash idea. Fortune’s Fool is a popular place, and its customers 
  don’t want to see it wrecked. Such shenanigans attract the guard, 
  sheriffs, and wandering adventurers of comparable level to the 
  characters, who harry and assault characters foolish enough to start 
  trouble here. Characters won’t be killed, but they’ll be pummeled 
  into unconsciousness and handed over to Fat Julie to deal with. 
  
  165
  irtep's Dish
  
  166
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  If the characters end up meeting more than one additional contact 
  without accepting Fat Julie’s deal, a second meeting with Julie’s gang 
  of half-orcs happens just after the characters leave Irtep’s Tower. See the 
  “Conclusions” section of this adventure for more details. 
  Leaving the Fortune’s Fool
  Upon leaving the Fortune’s Fool, the characters are approached by 
  a dark figure in a turban. He asks the characters to quickly follow him 
  into a nearby alley across from the Fool where he introduces himself as 
  Faisal and tells the characters that they are in great danger. If they follow 
  him into the alleyway, he directs their attention to the front door of the 
  Fortune’s Fool just as a pair of half-orcs leave the place. The characters 
  may recognize them as some of Julie’s thugs that they encountered in the 
  casino. 
  As the characters watch, the half-orcs sniff at the air and turn almost 
  immediately toward the alley where Faisal and the characters are hiding. 
  Faisal quietly casts a spell, and the air around the characters fills with the 
  smell of roses and manure. Immediately the orcs lose the characters’ scent.
  Faisal’s Offer
  Faisal admits that he was an ally of Irtep, and that Irtep is being sought 
  by Julie and also by members of the Dominion Arcane and Red Blades 
  Assassins. He begs the characters to find a way into Irtep’s Tower and to 
  recover the pipes of Minzoa before they fall into someone else’s hands 
  and cause even more trouble. He offers to pay the characters 1000gp 
  apiece, plus a few select magic items from Irtep’s collection (but nothing 
  outrageous). 
  If questioned about the rumor that he is the one who wants Irtep killed, 
  he explains that he is Irtep’s friend and that their falling out was his 
  reaction to the evils that the pipes could have been used to commit.
  If characters take Faisal up on his offer, he suggests that they visit the 
  Pride of Waymarch to track down Michalena Goddeau. Faisal is certain 
  that Irtep gave her a special password that reveals the door of his tower. 
  Faisal is unaware of the ground floor trap in Irtep’s Tower, as the trap 
  was devised by Osgood and Irtep. Osgood does not have the password to 
  enter the tower, because this was given only to Irtep’s concubines. 
  If Fat Julie learns that the characters accepted Faisal’s offer after turning 
  his down, he won’t be interested in pursuing any further deals with them. 
  If the characters say no to Faisal, he is annoyed and refuses to offer them 
  any help. He suggests that if they are unwilling to help, they should steer 
  far clear of him and forget they knew the name of Irtep or Faisal Dhaken. 
  See the section “Conclusions” for further details on Faisal’s actions.
   
  At The Wizard’s Familiar
  A map is provided of the ground floor for the Wizard’s Familiar. 
  Rumors may have set the characters on the course of the Wizard’s 
  Familiar in search of Osgood Flumph. It is also possible that the characters 
  have already encountered Faisal Dhaken, Fat Julie, or Michalena Goddeau, 
  and one of them might have put the characters on the trail of Osgood. 
  The Wizard’s Familiar is a grand inn and landmark in the Turlin’s 
  Well District of Bard’s Gate. The Familiar, as it is called, is an exclusive 
  establishment, open to arcanists or by invitation only. The inn is covered 
  in illusions to make it appear as nothing more or less than high-class 
  apartments common in the area.
  Its front stair is guarded with enchantments that steer riff-raff away 
  from the club. Luckily for the characters, the Wizard’s Familiar is well 
  known to most locals who are in the know. The typical laborer in the street 
  won’t know its location, but anyone who is more highly placed in society 
  or who dabbles in the magical arts can direct them to the correct building, 
  
  167
  irtep's Dish
  even if most people have never seen the inside of the place. 
  The stairs to the doorway are hidden by an illusion that appears to be a 
  permanent wall. Beyond the illusory wall is a small courtyard leading to 
  a set of stairs that end at a pair of massive, oaken double doors decorated 
  with carvings of crows, cats, dogs, bats, fish, birds, small dragons, and 
  other creatures that throughout the ages have served wizards as familiars. 
  The entrance is flanked by a pair of statues of grim-faced wizards 
  whose features are hidden by the brims of their broad hats. The statues 
  are enchanted to trigger a magical fear trap on any being who is not an 
  magic-user. Those who step onto the stairs must make a saving throw or 
  become frightened of the entire building for 24 hours. Those who succeed 
  are allowed entry to the Grand Parlor of the Wizard’s Familiar, though 
  they are not allowed access to any chamber beyond save by permission of 
  the proprietor, Folsum Judduk.
  Gathering Information
  The Grand Parlor of the Wizards Familiar is a combination taproom, 
  meeting lounge, and general common chamber one would find in any 
  upscale inn. Here, however, the patrons are all wizards who are sitting and 
  chatting, puffing their pipes, stroking their beards, scratching behind their 
  familiars’ ears, or generally ruminating on the mysteries of the universe. 
  If the characters engage them in conversation, you can pull additional 
  rumors off the rumors table (above). Questions involving Irtep, Faisal, 
  or Osgood attract the attention of a quartet of young but stern wizards 
  in black silk and velvet attire with the design of the Wizard’s Familiar 
  embroidered on their tunics. The wizards are armed with wands and are 
  quite humorless.
  If characters approach the bar, they are met by Folsum Judduk, who 
  introduces himself as the innkeeper of the Wizard’s Familiar. He is 
  aware of Irtep, and has thrown the wizard out for bringing trouble to his 
  establishment. He hopes that he will not also have to throw the characters 
  out for similar reasons. If the characters are sincere and respectful in their 
  investigation and questioning, Folsum directs them to the Monstrosities 
  room just off the main parlor, indicating they may find answers to their 
  questions there. If characters get pushy or try intimidating the bartender 
  or his patrons — well, they’re trying to start something in a room filled 
  with high-level magic-users. That ploy won’t end well for the characters. 
  Monstrosities Room, 
  Osgood’s Offer
  The private room is adorned with parts and pieces of various creatures 
  such as manticores, perytons, and the stuffed heads of a chimera. It has a 
  view of the street through crystal glass windows and fine velvet curtains. 
  The walls are lined with bookcases on various supernatural beasts. 
  Sitting in one corner smoking a pipe is a portly wizard who introduces 
  himself as Osgood Flumph. He apologizes for all the previous questioning 
  and the subterfuge required to meet him at the Wizard’s Familiar, but 
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  168
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  indicates that his life may be in danger because of his association with 
  Irtep. Osgood claims to be a good friend of the wizard, though they 
  recently had a falling out over Irtep’s drinking and womanizing. 
  Osgood suspects that Faisal Dhaken had something to do with Irtep’s 
  disappearance, but the only evidence he offers is Faisal’s reputation for 
  being devious and a member of an “evil” sect of the Dominion Arcane. 
  He thinks Faisal is trying to steal Irtep’s secrets for himself, and that he 
  needs Osgood to get him past a particularly nasty arcane trap located on 
  the ground floor of Irtep’s tower. Osgood claims he would go to Irtep’s 
  tower, overcome the trap, and gather the sextant himself, but he does not 
  know the password to enter the tower. Each time he entered the tower in 
  the past, Irtep accompanied him.
  Osgood offers to pay the characters with a potion of fly, a scroll 
  of lightning bolt, 1000gp apiece, a 500gp diamond, a wand of magic 
  missiles, a potion of invisibility, and a +1 weapon of the characters’ choice 
  if they recover an item called the sextant of Minzoa that he helped Irtep 
  to enchant. He does not go into detail about the item, other than that it 
  looks like a sailor’s sextant, it is located somewhere in Irtep’s laboratory, 
  and that unless he can get it into the hands of his allies in the Dominion 
  Arcane, he may be trapped in the Wizard’s Familiar, a de facto prisoner of 
  a wizard’s power play for the rest of his days. 
  If the characters take his offer, Osgood suggests that Michalena 
  Goddeau, a lady companion of Irtep, has the password that would gain 
  access to Irtep’s tower. She was frequently seen entering the tower during 
  her and Irtep’s time together. 
  If the characters refuse Osgood’s offer, he tells them that they are making 
  a grave mistake and that he will not be able to protect them from rumors 
  that they are on the trail of Irtep’s treasures. He may allude that the Red 
  Blades would not be as congenial as he, and that Faisal certainly would do 
  “terrible things” should he find the sextant or Irtep’s research notes. From 
  that point on, Osgood is hostile to the characters and interferes with their 
  attempts at gaining access to Irtep’s Tower. See “Conclusions” for further 
  details on Osgood’s actions. 
  Leaving the Wizard’s Familiar
  Regardless of the outcomes or their experiences in the Wizard’s 
  Familiar, a handsome bard who begs their time to play a song for them 
  eventually approaches the characters. The bard is quite persistent to the 
  point of annoyance. If the characters pay him off, he draws forth a set of 
  pipes and begins performing a song for them. 
  Upon completion, he smiles and introduces himself as Gynnen Valzoe 
  and indicates that he is aware that the characters are looking into Irtep’s 
  disappearance. He has heard good things about the characters and wants to 
  offer them some advice. Gynnen suggests that none of the former friends 
  of Irtep are as they seem. He distrusts Osgood Flumph and Faisal Dhaken 
  equally. He claims he was Irtep’s best friend, and that he fashioned a 
  set of fine pipes for the wizard just before Irtep fell head over heels in 
  love with Michalena Goddeau. He begs the characters to do whatever 
  they can to find his friend and to bring him secretly to the docks, where 
  Gynnen intends to spirit the wizard safely out of town, perhaps to Reme 
  or somewhere in the Grand Duchy where he can start over.
  Recently, because of his suspicions, Gynnen followed Faisal and saw 
  him entering and leaving known hangouts of “dark” members of the 
  Dominion Arcane. Around the same time he came across Osgood as he 
  was leaving the residence of a wizard named Manisool — a man of evil 
  reputation — with a clutch of papers and scrolls in his hands. When he 
  approached, Osgood grew agitated and took great pains to prevent Gynnen 
  from seeing what was on any of the items, but the bard is certain that some 
  of them were magical scrolls.
  Gynnen is convinced that one or both of those characters have cursed 
  his friend, and he has spent a goodly amount of the coin Irtep paid him for 
  crafting the pipes to purchase a powerful scroll of his own to break what 
  he assumes is a curse on his friend. This is a specialized scroll of remove 
  curse bought with Irtep’s money and associated to him through personal 
  possession so that it can automatically break the geas on Irtep even if the 
  caster is not normally able to cast that spell. 
  Gynnen can offer little in the way of payment, though he points out that 
  aside from Irtep’s notebook and his life, the wizard is unlikely to take any 
  of his possessions with him when he assumes his new identity. Anything 
  in his tower might as well go to the characters who saved his life as to the 
  scavengers who will inevitably follow.
  Gynnen knows that only Michalena Goddeau has the current password. 
  He is also aware of a particularly nasty arcane trap allegedly built into the 
  first floor of the tower, which Osgood Flumph had some knowledge of. 
  Gynnen suggests that the characters avoid any of Irtep’s other associates 
  and “work it out on their own” as the safest policy. The fewer people who 
  know about their mission, the better. 
  The Pride of Waymarch
  The Pride of Waymarch is a simple, square tavern. No map is provided.
  If rumors or NPC interactions lead the characters to the Pride of 
  Waymarch, they find themselves at a tavern in the Market District of Bard’s 
  Gate catering to military, ex-military, and mercenaries of all stripes. The 
  shield of Waymarch hangs above the lintel and a sign indicates “Private 
  Club — Spellcasters and other undesirables unwelcome.”
  A pair of mercenaries wearing old campaign badges of the armies 
  in which they served sit flanking the doorway with tall tankards of ale. 
  They ask anyone who even resembles a magic-user to move along. Other 
  newcomers are given the choice of dueling either of the two fighters for a 
  chance at a membership. 
  Characters who agree are escorted to a courtyard set along the side of 
  the inn where a series of racks of blunted practice weapons sit. Characters 
  can choose their weapon and proceed to battle. If the character wins the 
  fight, or lasts at least three rounds against the opponent, the character is 
  vouched for and can join the club for 2gp. 
  Veteran (Sergeant-At-Arms): HD 3; HP 18; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  longsword (1d8); Move 12; Save 14; AL L; CL/XP 3/60; 
  Special: none.
  Once inside the Pride of Waymarch, the characters find themselves in 
  the company of hard-bitten fighting men. Some are retired, while others 
  are young sell-swords looking for work. Most are drinking, sharing 
  stories, and lying about their exploits to a coterie of attractive trollops. 
  If the characters start asking questions, use the rumors table (above) 
  to see what the “word on the street” is. Should their line of questioning 
  directly relate to Irtep, Faisal Dhaken, or Osgood Flumph, they are directed 
  to the bar owner, Sergeant Vassale. The sergeant suggests that characters 
  who are seeking wizards should go look in the types of pest-holes where 
  wizards hang out; otherwise, they should shut their traps and enjoy their 
  whiskey and ale. If characters ask for directions, Vassale tells them how 
  to find the Wizard’s Familiar, the Tower of Irtep, and the apartment of 
  Faisal Dhaken. 
  If characters inquire about Michalena Goddeau, a burly young fighter 
  stands up and demands to know who is asking and why. The fighter is 
  Gustas, Michalena’s new sugar daddy. He just returned from an expedition 
  to the Stoneheart Mountain Dungeon with a nice sack of gold. Gustas 
  gets mouthy with the character(s) asking questions about his girl. While 
  Gustas keeps the characters occupied, his girl is slipping out the back 
  exit from the taproom. Characters notice a young brunette woman sidling 
  toward the rear exit. 
  Gustas is hot-blooded and may want to go to blows over people making 
  any disrespectful comments about his girl. This, of course, leads Sergeant 
  Vassale to suggest they “take it outside” to the courtyard to settle their 
  issue. 
  Gustas (Ftr6): HP 32; AC 2[17]; Atk longsword (1d8+2) or 
  longbow x2 (1d6+2); Move 12; Save 9; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: +2 to hit and damage strength bonus.
  Equipment: plate mail, shield, longsword, longbow, 20 
  arrows, 200gp.
  If a character ends up dueling Gustas and appears poised to win 
  
  169
  irtep's Dish
  the fight, Michalena returns immediately and tries to stop the beating. 
  She agrees to talk to the characters if they don’t hurt Gustas anymore. 
  Gustas is humiliated, but he stops fighting for Michalena. He insists 
  on being present for any questioning and continues to hold a chip on 
  his shoulder against the characters. (See the section “Conclusions,” 
  below.)
  Pursuing Michalena
  Michalena is easy to track. She simply found a hiding spot in the 
  alleyway and is waiting for the characters to leave the Pride so that she 
  can return to her boyfriend. If cornered, she threatens to scream for the 
  constables. She can be calmed down with a bribe of at least 50gp. 
  Michalena is a gold-digger who was only interested in Irtep’s money. 
  When she met the younger Gustas and his sack of gold, her heart and her 
  avarice followed. She wants nothing more to do with Irtep or his crazy 
  ways, and she’s willing to sell the password to his tower for 1000gp and a 
  crystal dish that Irtep owns. She figures that he spent more time with “the 
  dish” than he spent with her, so it would be ironic justice if she get the dish 
  and he had nothing but his debts, the bounty hunters, and a broken heart. 
  She finds Osgood “creepy” and feels that Faisal is definitely a villain. Her 
  opinion of Gynnen is that he is “dreamy” but broke, and therefore not 
  worth wasting her time on. 
  If the characters make a deal with her, she gives them the password and 
  reminds them that if she doesn’t get the dish, Gustas’s mercenary friends 
  will come looking for them. It should be noted that taking Michalena’s deal 
  means crossing Fat Julie, which becomes important in the “Conclusions” 
  section of the adventure. 
  The password can also be gotten from Michalena a 5000gp bribe, or 
  through use of a spell such as charm person. 
  Should any character be heartless enough to get into a duel with 
  Michalena, she uses the stats of a normal human with a dagger. 
  Leaving the Pride of Waymarch
  Upon leaving the Pride of Waymarch, the characters are stopped by a 
  trio of half-orc ruffians led by a thin, shifty human male with dark hair and 
  a wicked, fine-handled rapier in his belt. The man asks if he can buy the 
  characters a drink from a local wine cart while they walk and talk. If the 
  characters refuse, his half-orcs crowd around and try to look intimidating, 
  but the man waves them back. 
  He introduces himself as Tuvio, proprietor of the Blazing Bones. He 
  knows that the characters have managed to get an audience with Michalena 
  and would like to know what they learned about Irtep and whether or not 
  Michalena gave up the password. 
  Tuvio explains that Irtep owes him a cool 5000gp, and that if the 
  characters are looking for Irtep, they are in fact looking for his money. 
  Since the characters are hunting for Irtep anyway, there’s no reason why 
  they can’t cooperate for mutual benefit. Tuvio isn’t even angry at Irtep 
  — he likes the wizard and understands that gamblers have up times and 
  down. The 5000gp isn’t even everything Irtep owes him; it’s what Tuvio 
  is willing to settle for. 
  Tuvio’s kind feelings toward Irtep (which are at least partly genuine) 
  don’t extend to Michalena, Osgood, or Fiasal. He considers the first two to 
  be worthless sponges and the last to be a dangerous meddler in dark arts. 
  Like everyone else, Tuvio wants the characters to get inside Irtep’s 
  tower, find out what became of the wizard, help him if they can, and 
  retrieve Tuvio’s debt. For payment, Tuvio extends the characters 1000gp 
  each in credit at the Blazing Bones and offers to introduce them to some 
  of the best and most important folk of local society. He sweetens the deal 
  by offering to fence anything they retrieve from Irtep’s tower at top value, 
  so long as he gets his 5000gp cut from the deal. 
  If the characters refuse Tuvio, he informs them that they are making 
  a mistake and that he has friends that shouldn’t be crossed. See 
  “Conclusions” for possible attention from Tuvio and his associates at the 
  end of this adventure.
  Part 2: 
  On to Irtep’s Tower
  Eventually the characters should have enough material and information 
  to make a go at entering Irtep’s Tower.
  The use of the password is important in entering the tower but is by no 
  means the only means of entry. A few enterprising thieves and members of 
  the Red Blades have already found alternate entrances. What isn’t widely 
  known (because the Red Blades and the thieves’ guild aren’t talking) is 
  that none of these experts has managed to leave the tower once they got in. 
  Tower Features
  Doors: All doors are locked with wizard lock spells unless otherwise.
  Windows: Windows line the sides of the tower on the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 
  5th, and 6th stories. The outdoor windows are locked with arcane locks 
  and require the same rolls as doors to open, unless noted otherwise.
  Electricity Trap: The windows are trapped. Anyone touching a window 
  and everyone else within 15ft takes 3d8 points of lighting damage, or half 
  that much with a successful saving throw.
  Light: Sconces of magical flame placed at 10ft to 20ft intervals unless 
  otherwise noted brightly light the tower.
  Outside the Tower
  The tower sits in a decent area of the Old Temple District not far from 
  the Kings Bridge.
  It is an octagonal tower for the most part, with six stories, standing 
  roughly 80ft high. The roof tapers to a point. The tower is surrounded by 
  a decorative moat with a bridge that leads to the doors of the ground floor. 
  A group of 4 Lyreguards with 4 guard dogs under the command 
  of a no-nonsense veteran named Officer Gralme patrol the moat. The 
  guardsmen steer folk away from the tower and are serious about pursuing 
  any would-be thieves. The tower is currently considered something of a 
  public hazard, and the guardsmen are here to safeguard the citizenry. 
  Because this is a unique situation, a specialist named Finly, a 6th-level 
  magic-user who often works with the Lyreguards on jobs that are likely 
  to meet magical foes or to need magical backup, accompanies this guard 
  detachment. Finly obviously is not a soldier — he isn’t wearing armor or 
  carrying military weapons — but nothing immediately identifies him as a 
  mage. He finds that going incognito often gives him an essential edge when 
  dealing with troublemaking spellcasters. Characters who’ve lived in this 
  town for several months might know who Finly is by reputation if not by 
  sight. Newcomers assume he’s just a citizen chatting with the guardsmen. 
  If characters approach the tower without first attempting to scout it 
  stealthily, Officer Gralme and his special squad stop them. Officer Gralme 
  asks what the characters’ business is near the Tower of Irtep. If he doesn’t 
  care for their answer, he orders them to leave the area immediately, and 
  he’ll send a few soldiers to escort them away. Obviously, if the soldiers 
  don’t come back in a few minutes, Gralme knows that evil is afoot, and 
  he’s not a fool. Where adventurers are concerned, he always calls for 
  backup first and then plans his attack. 
  Lyreguard (4): HD 1; HP 5, 7, 4, 6; AC 7[12]; Atk longsword 
  (1d8); Move 12; Save 17; AL L; CL/XP 1/15; Special: none.
  Dog, Guard (4): HD 2; HP 10, 8, 12, 9; AC 7[12]; Atk bite 
  (1d6); Move 14; Save 16; AL N; CL/XP 2/30; Special: none. 
  (Monstrosities 127)
  Officer Gralme (Sergeant-At-Arms): HD 3; HP 18; AC 5[14]; 
  Atk longsword (1d8); Move 12; Save 14; AL L; CL/XP 3/60; 
  Special: none.
  
  170
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  171
  irtep's Dish
  Finly (MU6): HP 14; AC 9[10]; Atk staff (1d6) or dagger (1d4); 
  Move 12; Save 10; AL L; CL/XP 6/400; Special: +2 save bonus 
  vs. spells and magical devices, spells (4/2/2).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, protection from evil, magic 
  missile (x2); 2nd—web (x2); 3rd—hold person (x2).
  Getting Into the Tower
  Some form of subterfuge or magic is needed to get across the bridge 
  to Irtep’s Tower without being noticed by Gralme, Finly, and the soldiers 
  and dogs. Possibilities include but are not limited to a charm effect, 
  invisibility, stealth, or an especially clever distraction (tossing a rock into 
  the bushes won’t do it). 
  Stealth: Thieving skills coupled with a thorough description of how 
  the characters are going to dodge the patrols to make it to the tower 
  undetected. 
  Charm: A charm person spell might be used to persuade Gralme to let 
  the characters pass, though casting a spell is likely to start a fight with the 
  Lyreguard patrol if it’s noticed. This could land the characters in jail if it 
  doesn’t pan out. 
  Disguise: Characters could use a disguise to dress as a relieving patrol, 
  or to pass off one of their members as a town officer who has official 
  clearance to access Irtep’s property. 
  Organized Distraction: Characters could come up with a plan to stage a 
  distraction that pulls the guard patrol away from the doorway long enough 
  for characters to slip inside. This could involve hiring a troupe of performers 
  or beggars, an illusion of a rampaging monster, a fire that threatens a nearby 
  building, or some other pressing event. Use your best judgment to determine 
  whether Gralme falls for the trick, remembering that he’s a seasoned officer 
  of the law who used to be an adventurer himself. 
  Windows: Someone is bound to have carpet of flying, a ring of 
  invisibility, a scroll of passwall, and the willingness to leave all of his 
  or her friends on the sidelines and go it alone inside the tower. Such 
  characters create a welcome addition to the official Frog God Games’ 
  rolls of the dead. Characters can feasibly fly up to a window, overcome 
  the trap, open the lock, and get inside without being noticed by the guards. 
  Surviving to fly back out the window again is another question entirely. 
  The Bridge: The bridge is a simple stone arch that crosses the decorative 
  moat. It’s not meant for defense. There are no railings or sidings to hide 
  behind. 
  The Moat: The moat surrounding the tower is filled with koi fish 
  and lily pads. The water is 10ft deep and 10ft wide around the entire 
  circumference of the tower. A grate at the bottom of the pond on the north 
  side of the tower could be forced opened. Characters could then swim 
  through 50ft of culvert and find themselves below the drain in the fountain 
  in the center of the first floor of Irtep’s Tower. 
  Drain: The drain is clogged with pieces of at least three bodies and some 
  items of thievery gear. The equipment includes a broken rapier, a +1 short 
  sword, a +1 light crossbow, 10 bolts, and three waterlogged black leather 
  masks of the type commonly worn by members of the Shadowmasks. The 
  bodies have been bitten and clawed savagely and also are singed. 
  A secret button slides the fountain to the side, affording access to 
  the first floor, and activating the first-floor trap. The button requires a 
  successful secret doors check to notice. 
  Area 1: Front Door
  The front door to Irtep’s estate is carved in an image that looks like a 
  willow tree surrounded by leaves. On close examination, the tree appears 
  to be eating the leaves, and the leaves appear to be eating smaller leaves. 
  The door is reinforced with steel and locked with a wizard lock and a very 
  complicated mechanical lock. Picking the lock requires several minutes, 
  and unless the lock picker is invisible, covered by an illusion, or some other 
  distraction is keeping the guardsmen from doing their jobs, the lock picker 
  is easily spotted. A knock spell suppresses the wizard lock normally, but the 
  sound from the spell is certain to attract the guards’ attention. 
  The best and easiest way in is by using the password (“Irtep is a love 
  machine”), known only to Irtep and Michalena. 
  Additionally, a mechanical trap protects the door. If the lock is picked 
  or the door is forced or knocked without first disarming the trap, a large, 
  yellow, 500-pound iron ball attached to a gigantic chain drops from the 
  top story of the tower onto anyone in the doorway. Each creature near 
  the door takes 8d6 points of bludgeoning damage, or no damage with a 
  successful saving throw. The ball also smashes the bridge and gets the 
  attention of everyone within 300ft. Afterward, an automatic winch drags 
  the gore-smeared ball back up the side of the tower. Characters notice a 
  cruel, smiling face painted on the ball.
   
  Area 2:  
  Irtep’s Tower: Ground Floor
  This large chamber is octagonal and 40ft in diameter. A pair of stone 
  statues of coppery koi fish flanks the doors. A circular inscription is inlaid 
  in silver in the polished marble floor. The circle of the inscription connects 
  four pillars that surround a fountain. Each pillar is a different color and has 
  a sconce affixed to it with a different colored candle. As the last character 
  enters the dimly lit chamber, a voice calls down from high above:
  “If intruders to my home are thee, be dissuaded from my property.
   If thou art friend then know the score — match the hue of yon stair-top door. 
  Pillar to candle, candle to wick, hurry now and make it quick, 
  For if water touches flame, your days are ended, down the drain.”
  When the voice ends, the fountain begins bubbling, and a gurgling, 
  flushing sound can be heard as water spills over the fountain’s edge onto 
  the floor. 
  The door at the top of the stairs is brown. To open it, characters must 
  match its shade of brown by swapping candles around the pillars. Placing 
  a candle on a pillar of a different color changes the color of the pillar or the 
  candle. Creating two orange pillars and one green pillar solves the puzzle.
  If characters took the deal from Osgood Flumph, he told them the 
  correct matching of colored candles to colored pillars to produce brown, 
  and they should be able to deactivate the trap easily. If they have not, their 
  options are trial and error, magic, or death!
  Water is filling the room quickly. When it reaches the top of the sconces 
  on the pillars, none of the candles can be lit, and the characters are likely 
  to drown. 
  When characters trigger the trap, the arrangement of candles and pillars 
  is as follows:
  Pillar
  Pillar Color
  Candle Color
  1
  Red
  Red
  2
  Blue
  Blue
  3
  Yellow
  Yellow
  4
  Black
  White
  Moving candles to different pillars has the effect of blending those 
  colors, as listed below.
  Candle
  on Pillar
  Changes
  Red
  Blue
  Pillar turns Purple
  Red
  Yellow
  Pillar turns Orange
  Blue
  Red
  Pillar turns Purple
  Blue
  Yellow
  Pillar turns Green
  Yellow
  Blue
  Pillar turns Green
  Yellow
  Red
  Pillar turns Orange
  White
  Any
  Candle matches Pillar
  Any
  Black
  Candle turns White
  
  172
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  No matter what color a pillar is at the moment, it always reacts to 
  the presence of a new candle as if the pillar was its original color. For 
  example, assume that a red candle was placed on the blue pillar, turning 
  the pillar purple. Characters then experimentally replace the red candle 
  with a yellow candle. The yellow candle turns the pillar green, the same 
  way it would have if it had been placed there while the pillar was blue. 
  To produce brown and unlock the door, characters must make two 
  pillars orange and one pillar green. 
  This puzzle will be much more enjoyable for everyone if you draw 
  the four pillars on a sheet of paper or on your battle mat and label the 
  colors or indicate them with colored markers. Use colored beads or dice to 
  represent the candles, swapping them for different ones when their colors 
  change. Without this visual aid, everyone (including the Referee) is likely 
  to become hopelessly confused.
  The “correct” method is listed below:
  1. Remove the candle from the blue pillar and hold it.
  2. Move the yellow candle to the blue pillar, turning that pillar green.
  3. Replace the white candle on the black pillar with the blue candle, 
  turning the blue candle into a second white candle.
  4. Move the newly made white candle to the yellow pillar, turning that 
  candle yellow.
  5. Replace the red candle on the red pillar with the newly made yellow 
  candle, turning that pillar orange.
  6. Replace the yellow candle on the yellow pillar with the red candle, 
  turning that pillar orange. At that point, there are two orange pillars, one green 
  pillar, and one black pillar, and someone should be holding a yellow candle.
  7. Place the remaining yellow candle on the black pillar.
  Placing the last candle on the black pillar causes the new colors in the 
  chamber to mix in the air and create a dark brown color that matches the 
  door at the top of the stair, at which point the door opens. When the door 
  opens, the fountain slides to the side and the water quickly drains through 
  a grate in the floor. 
  Moving the candles around should take a party of four no more than 
  two rounds to accomplish. Obviously, players who remember what they 
  learned about color in third grade will have an easier time of it than others. 
  The Flow of Water and Other Dangers 
  Water is being sucked out of the moat and into the ground floor quickly. 
  Exactly how quickly is up to you. The decision should be based on how 
  well your players deal with these types of puzzles. Rather than trying to 
  adjudicate the situation with game rounds, we recommend real time. Even 
  a slow, deliberative group should be able to find a solution in five minutes. 
  Two minutes should be enough for most groups, and those that thrive 
  on such puzzles might be done in less than one minute. If you’re unsure 
  how much time to give, you can play it by ear, describing the water rising 
  faster or slower as you get a better grip on how quickly your players will 
  find the solution. The key is to keep the situation exciting and to give the 
  characters a near-death thrill without needlessly killing everyone because 
  you misjudged their color-mixing capability. 
  For descriptive purposes, by the time the water is 1ft deep, the floor is 
  difficult terrain for halfling-sized creatures. When the water is 2ft deep, it 
  is difficult terrain for everyone.
  When the water’s depth reaches 4ft, the 2 copper koi statues animate. 
  They dive into the water, crackling with electricity, and attack the 
  characters from under the water.
  When the water is 6ft deep, everyone must begin swimming. If the 
  characters have not managed to fix the candles by the 8th round, there is 
  no way that they can keep the candles lit as the water puts out the flame. 
  In 18 rounds the water reaches the ceiling. Unless characters can breathe 
  underwater, drowning and suffocating apply. Water stays at the top of the 
  ceiling for five rounds at which point the fountain slides to the side and the 
  water drains back into the moat outside the tower.
  Copper Koi Statue (2): HD 5; HP 25 each; AC 3[16]; Atk bite 
  (1d8 plus 1d4 lightning); Move 0 (swim 9); Save 12; AL N; CL/
  XP 6/400; Special: electrical aura (5ft radius, 1d8 lightning 
  damage/round, save half, metal armored save at –4), 
  immune to cold and lightning.
  Upstairs Door
  The upstairs door is built like the entrance. It is a steel-reinforced door 
  that prevents any of Irtep’s things in his storage area from getting wet. 
  The door can be opened only by arranging candles in the proper sequence 
  as described above, but powerful magic such as passwall can bypass the 
  doorway. 
  Second Story: Storage
  This dark, octagonal chamber is similar in size and shape to the floor 
  below. It is filled from floor to 15ft-ceiling with crates and boxes that must 
  barely fit through the doorways or windows. A staircase opposite the first-
  floor landing leads to a door and the floor above. 
  Several leather-bound and wooden trunks and cases are here, as detailed 
  below. 
  Crate A: The largest crate in the chamber is about 8ft long, 5ft tall, and 
  5ft wide. The lid is partially stove in and a pair of legs is sticking out of 
  the broken section, with dried blood on the floor. 
  Within the case is a mummy, partially unwrapped from a ceramic 
  urn, and the mummy’s victim, an unfortunate member of the Red Blades 
  assassins’ guild who made the mistake of looking for a little loot. He broke 
  the seal of protection keeping the mummy in suspended animation. If 
  characters investigate the crate or the corpse sticking out of it, a mummy 
  bursts free and attacks.
   
  Mummy: HD 5+1; AC 3[16]; Atk fist (1d12 plus rot); Move 6; 
  Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: +1 or better weapon to 
  hit (50% damage), rotting disease (no magical healing, heal 
  one-tenth normal).
  Hidden within the desiccated wrappings of the mummy are various 
  baubles and amulets that were precious to the mummy in life. Among 
  them are 10 golden amulets of various Khemitian gods worth 25gp each, 
  a gold bracelet with inset agates worth 200gp, and a turquoise inlaid 
  pectoral of an ibis that is an amulet against scrying. 
  The corpse belongs to Ralek Marn, a Red Blades assassin, which is 
  obvious from the tattoo that can found on the fellow’s ankle. His neck is 
  broken and his face is purple from the stranglehold the mummy placed 
  upon him. He has a scroll of dispel magic, a scroll of knock, a potion of 
  protection from poison, 2 vials of poison, a poisoned +1 short sword, a 
  potion of invisibility, and a potion of levitate in his pack. 
  Crate B: This crate is marked “Inner Water Sample.”
  Within the crate is a ceramic cask, its lid sealed with thick tar. If the 
  cask is opened, every character within a 10ft radius must make a saving 
  throw against poison as foul liquid and gas splatter from the jar. Those that 
  fail their save are nauseated for 1d2 days. 
  Crate C: This crate is filled with a large amount of earth. It is labeled 
  “Minzoa Experiment 2, Graveyard Dirt — Contagious.” The crate is 
  roughly 5ft by 5ft. Disturbing or digging in the dirt rouses a sporozoan 
  buried in a cyst in the dirt. The cyst breaks open if the dirt is disturbed, and 
  4 tentacles lash out, seeking a target. Roll randomly to determine which 
  nearby party members are attacked. 
  Sporozoan, Giant: HD 6; HP 36; AC 8[11]; Atk 4 tentacles 
  (1d6 plus disease); Move 3 (swim 6); Save 11; CL/XP 8/800; 
  Special: disease (1d4 constitution points/day, save avoids), 
  immune to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage.  
  (New Monster Appendix)
  Characters recognize immediately that this creature is unlike anything 
  they have encountered before. It has the aspects and characteristics of an 
  ooze, but also the characteristics of other creatures with limbs or, at the 
  very least, tentacles. 
  Crate D: This crate is filled with several crystal bottles of water listed 
  from various locations throughout the Lost Lands. One names Blood 
  Creek, others the Stoneheart River, and even the Ice River in the distant 
  Northlands. The water is of no special value, but the names of far-off, 
  
  173
  irtep's Dish
  exotic places might stir the characters’ curiosity. 
  Crate E: This crate is filled with pieces of mechanical equipment, 
  including powders for grinding and polishing glass, plus various glass 
  lenses about the size of a silver coin and metal tubes of varying lengths. 
  The bits and sundries have a total value of 400gp and a street value of 
  250gp if fenced through the proper channels.
  Third Story: Irtep’s Laboratory
  This laboratory holds the bulk of Irtep’s scientific and arcane equipment. 
  The walls are lined with test tubes, beakers, vials, potion bottles (empty), 
  jars of unguents, reagents, other components, and many books on arcane 
  theory.
  A notable breeze blowing in from the open southern window, carries 
  the smell of charred flesh. Lockpicks are scattered on the floor in a cone-
  shaped pattern expanding into the room from the windowsill. A careful 
  search of the area locates the invisible corpse of a halfling woman hanging 
  across the sill, head and shoulders inside the room and legs dangling 
  outside. A ring on the halfling’s left hand is the source of her invisibility. 
  The body is Traedie Jane, who was an up-and-coming halfling burglar 
  until she was electrocuted on her way through Irtep’s window. Traedie 
  inherited the ring and her career from her mother Gwennie Jane, who 
  passed away a year ago. Tradie’s other gear includes a pair of +1 daggers 
  and a hand crossbow with 20 bolts.
  The cupboards and shelves contain various alchemical ingredients. 
  Another cupboard contains 100 pages of vellum and 10 pots of ink, 
  enough to scribe a full spellbook or write 100 scrolls containing spells of 
  level 4 or below. 
  Three devices that look like sextants are lined up on one of the shelves. 
  Several glass dishes sit beneath the sextants. The dishes are filled with 
  a variety of filthy liquids that look and smell like sewer water, or water 
  with something unpleasant growing in it. Peering into the sextant devices 
  reveals nothing unless a light source is placed beneath them, as the 
  objects are in fact microscopes. None of the items tests as magical, but the 
  microscopes are worth 300gp each. Peering into them with a light beneath 
  reveals a world invisible to the naked eye, including protozoan creatures 
  swimming around in the filthy water. Characters who saw the sporozoan 
  on the second floor recognize its similarity to these creatures.
   
  Fourth Floor: Irtep’s Love Den
  This room is plush and contains all of the creature comforts one could 
  imagine: a polished silver mirror ceiling, a tub sunk into the floor filled 
  with warm bubbling water, a private bathroom, and a huge, heart-shaped 
  bed on a slowly revolving turntable in the center of the room. The walls 
  are adorned with naughty paintings of cherubs, nymphs, elven maidens, 
  and the like cavorting with centaurs, minotaurs, and middle-aged wizards. 
  The paintings are incredibly tacky; all five together might fetch 100gp 
  from a collector with no taste and/or a ribald sense of humor. 
  Irtep’s Commode
  The restroom off the bedchamber is a complex affair of carved, polished 
  marble. A foot pedal on the floor pumps water for the bidet, and a second 
  pump flushes into the moat outside the tower.
  A side table next to the commode holds a notebook titled “My 
  Experiences in the Minzoa,” by Irtep. The notebook details the 
  construction of the Minzoa sextant and its use to enter a vaguely defined 
  “inner world” Irtep calls the Minzoa. Irtep’s first explorations led to the 
  death of some hired hands, and Irtep barely escaped the Minzoa with his 
  life. The wizard next commissioned his friend Gynnen to fashion a set of 
  pipes with which to charm the Minzoan creatures and later, to summon 
  them to our world. The summoning terrified his friend Faisal, whom Irtep 
  
  174
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  describes as weak-willed and lacking in understanding of the potential 
  power that the Minzoa could unleash. 
  Most other entries in the notebook are love poems dedicated to various 
  harlots, including lengthy opining for the love and attention of Michalena 
  Goddeau. Other entries detail his collapse into drunkenness and gambling, 
  with lists of his many debts and the threats made against him by Fat Julie 
  and Tuvio. Irtep has spent his entire fortune on Michalena Goddeau, the 
  Minzoa sextant, and the pipes of Minzoa. Like any gambling addict, Irtep’s 
  writing is filled with excuses on how just “one big win” will set him up for 
  life, if only someone will advance him the necessary cash.
  Fifth Floor: Irtep’s Library
  Irtep’s library stands on the penultimate story of the tower. Books line 
  the walls from floor to ceiling. Found here are many spellbooks, each 
  containing 2d6 1st-, or 2nd-level spells. Other books contain 1d8 spells 
  of 3rd and 4th level. A single book contains the remainder of Irtep’s spell 
  collection: 1d4 5th-level spells. 
  Each spellbook is trapped with a curse that blinds and deafens the reader 
  unless the reader is Irtep, or if the reader is studying the books with Irtep’s 
  permission as an apprentice or other student. A saving throw negates the 
  curse, and a remove curse spell cast on the target ends the curse.
  Other books lining the walls of the chamber cover all manner of life, 
  including a detailed, illustrated treatise written by Irtep himself on a 
  hidden realm called the “Minzoa.” Locating this book 30 minutes spent 
  browsing the shelves. Illustrations in the book show nightmarish creatures 
  that resemble oozes with tentacles and hooks, and dripping with slime. 
  Most of the creatures are shown in water or some other liquid. The 
  illustrations portray a broad, shallow sea with bits of land rising from the 
  water. The sky appears very bright and the horizon is very flat. Few land 
  masses larger than low hills can be seen anywhere. The plant life is bizarre 
  and alien, seemingly composed of vines or growths resembling seaweed 
  snaking out of the water. 
  The Study
  A locked chamber within the library faces the south wall. A wizard’s 
  mark written above the door reads, “It ain’t the size of the boat ...”
  The door is trapped to deal 8d6 points of lightning damage to anyone 
  who touches the doorknob. A successful saving throw reduces the damage 
  by half. 
  Beyond the door is a small chamber containing a desk on which sits a 
  “sextant” like those in the lab, but with several notable differences. This 
  sextant is made from silver, platinum, and gold, and is inlaid with arcane 
  inscriptions. An enchanted disk of light glows from the sextant’s base. 
  Sitting in front of the disk is a fine crystal dish filled with fetid water. A 
  chair is knocked onto its side behind the desk. 
  The dish is etched with the family crest of Irtep and is emblazoned with 
  a tree whose roots dig deep into the earth and whose leaves blow freely 
  in the wind. The dish has special sentimental meaning to Irtep: It was his 
  mother’s favorite candy dish. 
  If any character looks through the sextant at the bowl of water, he and 
  anyone within 10ft of him are instantly teleported into the fungus forest of 
  Irtep’s Dish (see Part 3. Irtep’s Dish and the Minzoa). 
  Sixth Floor: Top Floor
  The top floor of the tower is accessed by a trapdoor at the top of the 
  stairs from the fifth floor. Little is here except the chain and winch system 
  attached to the giant yellow iron ball trap. A trapdoor in the ceiling leads 
  to the roof of the tower.
  The iron ball trap is maintained by Beagle, a charmed troll kept by Irtep 
  who dines on rats and thieves. As far as Beagle is concerned, anyone who 
  enters this chamber (other than Irtep) is a thief, which equates to dinner.
  Beagle, Troll: HD 6+3; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), bite (1d8); 
  Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: regenerate 
  3hp/round.
  The remains of a pair of second-story men who thought to come through 
  the roof are strewn about the room. Among their leavings are a set of lock 
  picks, a scroll of dispel magic, and a gold ring set with an imitation (but 
  excellent quality) ruby worth 60gp. 
  Beneath a loose floorboard is a locked treasure chest. The chest is 
  trapped with a poison dart trap. If the trap is triggered, a hail of darts 
  attacks every target within 5 ft. of the chest. (Dart Trap: attack as 10HD, 
  range 5ft; 1d4 piercing damage plus 2d8 poison damage, and struck 
  targets must make a saving throw)
  The chest contains a pile of IOUs and gambling vouchers from the 
  Fortune’s Fool and the Blazing Bones.
  Part 3: Irtep’s Dish  
  and the Minzoa
  In this section, the characters find themselves within the Minzoa held 
  inside Irtep’s mother’s candy dish. The Minzoa is a miniature world where 
  protozoan creatures loom huge in relation to the characters. Within this 
  forbidden world, the characters seek Irtep for good or ill and try to wrest 
  from him the means to return to their own world. 
  Basic Features
  Light: The Minzoa is lit as if by midday sun all the time, but the light 
  provides little heat and seems to originate from every direction.
  Wet: Everything in the Minzoa is moist. A vast lake occupies a broad 
  expanse of the Minzoa, and living bodies of matter float on the lake. 
  Mundane equipment of iron and steel rusts quickly if not oiled regularly. 
  Most metal equipment shows a patina of rust after the first day in the 
  Minzoa. Within two weeks, these items become pocked with rust. Within 
  two months, they become brittle; within a year, they are rusted through. 
  Minzoa Lake: The lake is 50ft deep across its entirety. The bed of the 
  lake is a clear, crystalline substance that is extremely hard and seemingly 
  unbreakable. 
  Walls: Characters traveling to the edge of the Minzoa find themselves 
  facing a crystalline wall 100ft high that is completely smooth. Normal 
  climbing methods are useless against it otherwise it can be flown or 
  levitated over. At the top, a flying, or levitating character must make a 
  saving throw to avoid being teleported back to the Fungal Forest. Those 
  who make a successful saving throw escape from the Minzoa, but they 
  remain at their microscopic Minzoa size! 
  The Sextant of Minzoa
  When aimed at a dish of water, this sextant allows for the 
  microscopic viewing of life forms smaller than the eye can see. 
  Through arcane forces, the sextant can also serve as a conduit 
  from the normal world into the tiny world viewed through 
  the microscope. In effect, it allows travel into the Minzoa, the 
  microscopic world of protozoan life forms. Use of the sextant of 
  Minzoa offers a number of other startling possibilities. It could be 
  used to shrink creatures to such a tiny degree that they could hide 
  in a flask of water or carefully packed box of soil, allowing a thief 
  or assassin (for example) to be smuggled into almost any location, 
  then released with a word by the carrier of the sextant or the bearer 
  of the amulet of Minzoa. The sextant can also be set as a trap to 
  capture unwitting creatures and teleport them into the Minzoa by 
  leaving the lens open and its eye-cap uncovered — as is about to 
  happen here.
  
  175
  irtep's Dish
  
  176
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Minzoa Lake Random Encounters 
  Roll for a random encounter for every 10 miles traveled on the lake.
  1d12
  Encounter
  1
  1 giant hydrozoa
  2
  1d4 giant nematodes
  3
  1d4 giant tardigrades
  4
  1d4 giant protozoan orbs
  5
  1d4 giant sporozoan
  6
  1d2 +1 assassins (Red Blades Assassin Squad, see 
  Area 4) 
  7
  1 giant amoeba
  8–12
  No Encounter
  Hydrozoa: This is an encounter with 1 giant hydrozoa. If the 
  hydrozoa is over the lake, it languidly strikes out with its tentacles as it 
  floats languidly past. 
  Hydrozoa, Giant: HD 12; AC 6[13]; Atk 6 tentacles (1d6 
  plus paralysis and constrict), bite (1d8); Move 3 (swim 6); 
  Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 14/2600; Special: immune to charm 
  and fear, paralysis and constrict (1d6 automatic damage, 
  save avoids), resist bludgeoning damage. (New Monster 
  Appendix)
  Giant Nematode: This encounter is with 1d4 giant nematodes. The 
  creatures assume the player characters are food and attack mindlessly (the 
  only way they can). 
  Nematode, Giant: HD 7; AC 8[11]; Atk bite (2d6 plus 1d6 
  acid); Move 6 (swim 9); Save 9; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: 
  immune to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage, 
  split into two with half hit points with slashing damage, 
  transparent (surprise on 1-4 on d6). (New Monster Appendix)
  Giant Tardigrade: This encounter is with 1d4 giant tardigrades. 
  These great swollen beasts might ignore the characters altogether unless 
  approached too closely or annoyed. If surprised, they attack. 
  Tardigrade, Giant: HD 10; AC 6[13]; Atk 4 claws (1d6), bite 
  (1d8); Move 9 (swim 6); Save 5; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: 
  immune to charm and fear, rend (2+ claws hit, extra 1d8 
  damage), resist cold and fire. (New Monster Appendix)
  Giant Protozoan Orb: 1d4 protozoan orbs smell the characters and 
  attack. 
  Protozoan Orb, Giant: HD 4; AC 8[11]; Atk bite (1d6 plus 1d6 
  acid plus blood drain); Move 0 (swim 9); Save 13; CL/XP: 
  6/400; Special: blood drain (1d6 plus 1d6 acid per round), 
  immune to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage. 
  (New Monster Appendix)
  Giant Sporozoan: If this encounter occurs on water, it is with 1d4 
  
  177
  irtep's Dish
  giant sporozoan swimming by. If this encounter occurs on land, it is with 
  a single sporozoan cyst that bursts open as characters pass. 
  Sporozoan, Giant: HD 6; AC 8[11]; Atk 4 tentacles (1d6 plus 
  disease); Move 3 (swim 6); Save 11; CL/XP 8/800; Special: 
  disease (1d4 constitution points/day, save avoids), immune 
  to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage. (New 
  Monster Appendix)
  Red Blades Assassin Squad: These are 1d2+1 Red Blade assassins 
  who found their way into the tower and through the sextant. They float 
  haplessly on a fungus cap they fashioned into a raft. The assassins lost 
  most of their companions to the creatures of the Minzoa, and are terrified 
  and desperate for a means of escape. They are willing to make a truce with 
  the characters in exchange for the greater protection of a group and help 
  in finding a way home. They honor the truce until they find an exit back to 
  the normal world; what they do after that is up to you.
  Giant Amoeba: The amoeba floats through the Minzoa lake devouring 
  anything in its path. 
  Amoeba, Giant: HD 8; AC 9[10]; Atk slam (2d6 plus 1d6 acid 
  and engulf); Move 6 (swim 6); Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: engulf (automatic 2d6 acid, save avoids), immune 
  to charm, fear, and bludgeoning damage, transparent 
  (surprise on 1-4 on d6). (New Monster Appendix)
  Area 1: Fungal Forest
  This is the initial landing place of characters teleported into the 
  Minzoa. The “forest” is composed of massive fungal structures that 
  resemble giant mushroom trees. Most of the fungi is benign, with some 
  exceptions. 
  The broad caps of the mushroom trees can be eaten raw (bland) or 
  roasted (less bland). Large ones are big enough to hollow out and use as 
  coracles. One large cap can be made into a boat in an hour, and it holds 
  up to four passengers. Other mushroom stalks are easily carved into crude 
  paddles.
  A mushroom coracle can navigate the waters of the Minzoa at a rate of 
  1 to 4 miles per hour; the actual speed equals the number of rowers.
  Fungal Forest Random Encounters 
  Roll for a random encounter once every 10 miles, or every eight hours 
  if characters are stationary. 
  1d12
  Encounter
  1
  1 spore cloud
  2
  1 giant tardigrade
  3
  1 giant sporozoan cyst
  4
  1 giant hydrozoa
  5
  1d4+1 thieves (Shadowmasks Thieves Band, see 
  Area 4)
  6
  1 giant protozoan orb
  7
  1 patch of carnivorous fungi (see Area 2)
  8–12
  No Encounter
  Spore Cloud: Characters disturbed the nearby fungi into releasing 
  a defensive cloud of choking spores. The spore cloud is 50ft in radius. 
  Characters within the spore cloud who fail a saving throw are overcome 
  by choking and wheezing, and unable to breathe. Such characters take 1d6 
  points of poison damage per round and begin suffocating, and continue 
  suffocating until they get out of the spore cloud.
  Shadowmasks Thieves Band: This is a band of 1d4+1 shadowmask 
  thieves who made their way this far in their search for Irtep. The band may 
  attempt to separate and capture individual characters to use as hostages in 
  an attempt to force the entire party into surrendering. Their goal is to find 
  Irtep and get the hell out of the Minzoa, a world they find terrifying in the 
  diversity of its life. Unlike the Red Blades assassins, these NPCs aren’t 
  interested in teaming up with the characters except to use them as porters, 
  bait, or meat shields. 
  Carnivorous Fungi: This is an encounter with a large patch of 
  carnivorous fungi. 
  Area 1A: The Ruined Campsite
  This ruined campsite was set up by a small band of Shadowmasks who 
  gained access to the Minzoa. Unfortunately, a pod of tardigrades tore them 
  to pieces and devoured them. Nothing remains of their bodies except a few 
  blood smears on the ground and on the trunks of mushroom trees. Amid the 
  wreckage of the camp, however, is a bounty poster showing an image of 
  Irtep. The image is an illusory likeness, so it is entirely accurate. The poster 
  reveals a man with a thin moustache and goatee, and hair that might once 
  have been stylish but has gone a little crazy. The image is complete with 
  a black eye and blood dripping from the left nostril from a recent beating. 
  Also scattered on the ground are a +1 short sword, 3 potions of 
  healing, a potion of invisibility, and a torn pouch containing a clay 
  pipe and good tobacco. A short distance from the camp is a site where 
  the thieves worked mushroom caps into boats. Mushroom chips and 
  cuttings are scattered around between the felled trunks of several capless 
  mushroom trees.
  Area 2: Carnivorous Fungi Islands
  Growing along the side of one wall of the dish is a massive colony of 
  carnivorous fungi. These areas occupy the equivalent of 100 square miles each. 
  The islands are full of carnivorous fungi; another group of 1d4 is encountered 
  every 100 yards or so, making them all but impassable. Characters who try to 
  explore these areas are attacked continually until they leave.
  Carnivorous Fungi, Giant: HD 9; AC 8[11]; Atk 4 tentacles 
  (1d6 plus constrict); Move 3 (swim 3); AL N; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: constrict (automatic 1d6 damage, save avoids), 
  immune to charm and fear. (New Monster Appendix)
  Area 3: Algae Islands
  These two islands are composed of dense colonies of protozoan 
  algae cells. In the Minzoa, the cells are the size of a rhinoceros and are 
  slightly sticky, so that everywhere on the algae islands is considered 
  difficult terrain. The islands are home to hydrozoa, giant tardigrades, and 
  sporozoan cysts. The ground is reasonably solid, and the algae itself can 
  be sliced from the “ground” and eaten as a reasonably nutritious food, 
  although the flavor leaves much to be desired.
  Algae Islands Random Encounters
  Roll for random encounters once every hour. 
  1d12
  Encounter
  1
  1 giant tardigrade
  2
  1 giant hydrozoa
  3
  1 sporozoan cyst
  4
  1 Dominion Arcane enforcer
  5
  1 giant amoeba
  6–12
  No Encounter
  
  178
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Dominion Arcane Enforcer: This is an encounter with a 6th-level 
  magic-user sent to find and capture Irtep and return him to the Dominion 
  for questioning. The enforcer is alone, as creatures of the Minzoa killed 
  his allies. He is desperate to complete his mission and has no reservations 
  about joining forces with the characters (unless they give him one). 
  Dominion Arcane Enforcer: AC 9[10]; Atk staff (1d6) or 
  dagger (1d4); Move 12; Save 10; AL L; CL/XP 6/400; Special: 
  +2 save bonus vs. spells and magical devices, spells (4/2/2).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, protection from evil, magic 
  missile (x2); 2nd—web (x2); 3rd—hold person (x2).
  Area 4: The Rock
  This towering, cliff-sided, stony island is no more than a bit of pebble that 
  found its way into Irtep’s Dish. It is contested territory in a three-way feud 
  between Shadowmasks and Red Blades. The assassins and their rivals hide 
  within fissures and cracks in the stone, defending themselves against beasts 
  that crawl up the stone from the lake and from one another. Amoebas and 
  nematodes ate their fungus cap boats long ago, stranding them here. 
  Tully’s Fort
  Tully’s Fort is a fissure in the Rock that Tully and his assassins fortified for 
  keeping watch on the Shadowmasks and for protection against the creatures 
  of the Minzoa while the assassins search for a way to escape the Minzoa.
   
  Tully Smooth, Red Blades Leader (Asn10): HP 48; AC 3[16]; 
  Atk +1 short sword (1d6+1) or +1 light crossbow (1d4+2); 
  Move 12; Save 6; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: –1[+1] AC dexterity 
  bonus, +1 to hit bonus with missile weapons, backstab (x4), 
  disguise, poison use, thieving skills.
  Thieving Skills: Climb 92%, Tasks/Traps 50%, Hear 5 in 6, 
  Hide 55%, Silent 60%, Locks 55%.
  Equipment: +1 leather armor, +1 shield +1 short sword, 
  +1 light crossbow, 20 bolts, boots of speed, potion of 
  invisibility, 3 vials of poison. 
  Red Blade Assassins (Asn5) (4): HP 16, 18, 14, 20; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  short sword (1d6) or +1 light crossbow (1d4+1); Move 12; Save 11; CL/
  XP 7/600; Special: –1[+1] AC dexterity bonus, +1 to hit bonus with 
  missile weapons, backstab (x3), disguise, poison use, thieving skills.
   
  Thieving Skills: Climb 87%, Tasks/Traps 25%, Hear 4 in 6, 
                  Hide 20%, Silent 30%, Locks 20%.
   
  Equipment: leather armor, shield, short sword, light crossbow, 
                  20 bolts, 1 vial of poison.
  Tully is glad to see the characters arrive, because the Shadowmasks 
  have been assassinating his team slowly but surely. Tully is convinced one 
  of the Shadowmasks must be a shapeshifter. He suggests joining sides to 
  clear out the Shadowmasks and then to find a way out of this “tiny world 
  or horrors” that they find themselves trapped in. If the characters side with 
  Tully and his band, they find Tully and his crew intent on killing Irtep and 
  collecting the bounty that they themselves falsely laid.
   
  Delayne’s Fort
  Delayne, an agent of the Dark Brotherhood and master of the 
  Shadowmasks, is stuck in her makeshift fort with her squad. Delayne tried 
  to infiltrate the enemy camp disguised as an assassin; the ruse worked 
  until recently, but now she suspects that the Red Blades have caught on to 
  the trick and gone on high alert. 
  Delayne and her band of 3 Shadowmask henchmen now seek only 
  to escape the Minzoa. They need a boat to get across the lake, and strong 
  swords and powerful magic to survive the trip. Delayne offers to cut the 
  characters in on a percentage of whatever they can steal from Irtep’s tower. 
  Even as she makes this offer, she knows perfectly well (as the characters 
  probably do, too) that, outside of the laboratory, Irtep is broke. 
  At this point, Delayne could not care less about the Red Blades, but her 
  murderous nature still drives her to kill them as a defensive measure. If the 
  characters arrived with at least one mushroom boat, she may try to trick the 
  characters into heading over to the Red Blade camp while she steals their boat. 
  Delayne, Master of the Shadowmasks (Doppleganger): 
  HD 8; HP 42; AC 4[15]; Atk claw (1d12, natural form) or +1 
  longsword (1d8+1) or +1 dagger (1d4+1); Move 12; Save 
  7 (with ring, 2 vs. magic); AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: 
  backstab (x4), immune to sleep and charm, mimics shape, 
  Thf10 skills.
  Thieving Skills: Climb 94%, Tasks/Traps 70%, Hear 5 in 6, 
  Hide 75%, Silent 80%, Locks 75%.
  Equipment: +1 longsword, +1 dagger, ring of 
  protection +1. 
  Shadowmask Henchmen (Thf5)(3): HP 15, 12, 14; AC 7[12]; 
  Atk short sword (1d6) or dagger (1d4); Move 12; Save 11; AL 
  C; CL/XP 5/240; Special: +2 save bonus vs. magical devices, 
  backstab (x3), thieving skills.
  Thieving Skills: Climb 89%, Tasks/Traps 35%, Hear 4 in 6, 
  Hide 30%, Silent 40%, Locks 30%.
  Equipment: leather armor, short sword, dagger.
  Isle of Irtep
  A clump of earth and sand smudged into the northern part of the dish 
  serves as Irtep’s Lair. Irtep formed a defensive cavern where he hides in 
  relative luxury, assuming nobody will ever find him within the confines 
  of his beloved Minzoa. The cavern atop the “island” affords Irtep a 
  grand view of the area. He can see approaching figures from miles away 
  and prepares any defenses he deems necessary to defend himself from 
  approaching enemies or assassins. Characters might need to get clever 
  to approach the Isle of Irtep safely, such as disguising themselves as 
  creatures of the Minzoa, turning invisible, or some other ploy.
   
  Encountering Irtep
  If the characters simply press forward on a fungus raft, Irtep sends 
  a magical message that reaches the approaching characters a mile from 
  shore. He demands that they return at once to the “big world” or face the 
  wrath of his minions of the Minzoa. If the characters exclaim that they do 
  not know how to get free of the Minzoa, Irtep offers to send them, so long 
  as they swear never to return. 
  Irtep is reluctant to negotiate or talk to anyone. If necessary, he uses the 
  pipes of Minzoa (New Magic Items Appendix) to summon creatures of 
  the Minzoa to defend his position.
  Irtep (MU10): HP 26; AC 1[18]; Atk staff of striking (2d6); Move 
  12; Save 5 (with ring); AL N; CL/XP -/-; Special: +2 save bonus 
  vs. spells and magical devices; spells (4/4/3/2/2).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, protection from evil, magic 
  missile (x2); 2nd—invisibility, mirror image, web (x2); 
  3rd—fireball, lightning bolt, protection from normal 
  missiles; 4th—ice storm, polymorph other; 5th—
  conjuration of elementals, feeblemind.
  Equipment: bracers of defense AC 2[17], staff of 
  striking, ring of protection +1, pipes of Minzoa, sextant 
  passkey, wand of lightning bolt (10 charges), 3 scrolls 
  of charm person, ring of swimming, carpet of flying.
  Irtep’s Hill
  Irtep defends himself from a cave and bungalow crafted at the top of an 
  80ft high hill that affords him an excellent vantage point from which to 
  
  179
  irtep's Dish
  
  180
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  
  181
  irtep's Dish
  rain down magic and to summon creatures to fight for him. 
  The hill has a 40-degree slope, meaning it is steep enough that 
  everywhere on the slope is difficult terrain. A successful simple dexterity 
  check (2d6 vs. score) is necessary for characters to move and attack 
  in the same round. Characters must make the roll before attacking if 
  they’ve already moved, and vice versa. Failure on the roll ends their turn 
  immediately. 
  Battle 
  It should be apparent at the onset of any conflict with Irtep that the 
  wizard is not well. He looks gray, shaky, drawn, and emaciated. This is 
  a far different Irtep from his wanted posters or the portraits in his home. 
  The change came about from ignoring the compulsion of Osgood’s geas 
  upon him. 
  If Irtep’s summoned creatures are defeated and the wizard appears to 
  be losing the battle, he surrenders. He swears that he will not return to 
  his creditors in Bard’s Gate because they mean to kill him. He begs the 
  characters to become his agents and to act on his behalf in the outside 
  world, offering them a way out of the Minzoa in exchange. He is oblivious 
  to how ill he is or how terrible he looks, and he speaks frequently of the 
  desire to see his beloved Michalena again. He would like her brought here 
  so they can start a new life in his “mountaintop bungalow.” He admits he 
  has no money, but he could craft scrolls, potions, and magic items for the 
  characters if they bring him the raw materials. 
  Any attempt at negotiating with Irtep fails if any Red Blades assassins 
  are in the mix. They intend to take Irtep’s head and trade it to Big Julie or 
  Tuvio, and to trade any of his magical belongings to the Dominion Arcane 
  for whatever profit they can make. 
  Avoiding Battle
  Because of the geas placed on Irtep by Osgood Flumph, Irtep is unable 
  to refuse an offer to engage in a game of chance. If challenged to a wager, 
  he must accept, but he can and will negotiate the stakes. For example, if a 
  burly fighter challenges Irtep to a stone-throwing contest, he accepts the 
  contest but argues that, because the fighter’s obviously greater strength 
  gives him an advantage, Irtep should win 5gp from the characters for 
  every 1 they would win from him, or something similar. He conjures up 
  a gaming table, a deck of cards, or a bag of dice on command. If the 
  characters schmoozed with Michalena Goodeau or allied themselves with 
  Gynnen Valzoe, they are aware of this quirk of Irtep’s personality and 
  might be prepared to use this to their advantage against Irtep. 
  As soon as Irtep plays a game of chance, he is immediately invigorated 
  to his full health, which makes him more demanding about the characters’ 
  need to depart from his hidden domain. Characters need to talk themselves 
  out of any dangerous situations they get into with Irtep, or figure out some 
  way to break his geas. 
  Persuading Irtep to Leave
  Either through gambling or battle, eventually the characters should 
  bring Irtep to a point where he is willing to talk. Persuading Irtep to leave 
  and return to the outer world is not an easy task. Characters might point 
  out that invaders have already made their way into his home and it is 
  only a matter of time before others such as themselves make contact 
  with him and are less than friendly. Worse, intruders in his tower might 
  
  182
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  inadvertently or intentionally destroy Minzoa in its entirety. It may be 
  time for Irtep to face the consequences of his actions after all and figure 
  out some way to pay back his creditors. 
  Irtep doesn’t want to hear these things. He is quite ill, however, and 
  is beginning to suspect that he needs help. Suggestions that his creditors 
  might be willing to take one last double-or-nothing bet with him 
  have the best shot at winning his confidence. Characters who can talk 
  knowledgeably about Irtep’s debts, the people to whom he owes money, 
  and gambling in general hold his attention. Speaking positively about his 
  friendship with Faisal and Gynnen or about Tuvio’s respect for him (a bit 
  of exaggeration is helpful here) perks him up. Any mention of Michalena, 
  other than a proclamation that she regrets leaving Irtep and longs for him 
  to take her back, casts the wizard into a deep funk. 
  In short, Irtep needs to hear that he has a chance to recover his 
  fortune, to reclaim his good reputation, and to win back his lover 
  Michalena, whether or not such things are true. Intimidation doesn’t get 
  the characters anywhere unless they knock Irtep unconscious and take 
  him away by force. Charming him makes him friendly but won’t make 
  him want to leave Minzoa. Removing the geas opens his eyes to the 
  real situation and lets him remember that it was Osgood Flumph who 
  enchanted him out of jealousy over Irtep’s research and growing power. 
  Irtep is horrified about the betrayal and determined to make amends to 
  those he owes. He immediately begins planning to file a censure with 
  the Dominion Arcane against Osgood for his betrayal, or to take revenge 
  after his own fashion. 
  However they persuade Irtep to leave Minzoa, he asks the characters 
  to gather near as he withdraws the passkey: a pair of green dice that he 
  shakes in his hand while uttering the command phrase, “Get big, baby!” 
  With that, characters find themselves back in Irtep’s private study on the 
  fifth floor of his tower. 
  Killing Irtep
  If the characters kill Irtep, they can leave his body behind in Minzoa 
  or bring it back to the world where they can deliver it to someone for a 
  bounty or even have him raised. If Irtep stays dead, they need merely 
  deliver the items of interest to his creditors and collect their pay. Or so 
  they hope. See “Conclusions” to determine how to play this series of 
  events. Only Irtep knows the passkey and its command phrase to escape 
  from Minzoa. If characters kill the wizard without first discovering that 
  information, and they don’t have the means to extract it from the dead 
  wizard, they could be trapped forever. 
  Part 4: Conclusions
  At some point, characters must leave Irtep’s Tower. How they leave and 
  what conflicts follow are dependent on whom the characters allied with 
  and the care they take in leaving the tower.
   
  Allies
  Regardless of whom the characters allied with before taking the quests 
  of Irtep’s Dish, their previous allies are lying in wait for their exit from 
  the tower. Each of the allies has its own agenda. Amid this conflict are the 
  wildcards presented by the guard and the half-orc trackers employed by 
  Big Julie and Tuvio. 
  When the characters leave the tower, they are immediately confronted 
  by Osgood, Faisal, and Gynnen Valzoe. The wizards each demand the 
  items that the characters gathered from the tower. At first, they attempt to 
  out-bid one another for the items. If that doesn’t work, they try to persuade 
  the characters why they deserve the items. Depending on the characters’ 
  actions or reactions, this can lead to a battle between the wizard they side 
  with and the other parties who are angered at being cut out of the deal.
   
  Leaving the Tower
  If the characters leave the tower by flying, by swimming, invisibly, 
  or by somehow just sneaking out, they notice that the guards that were 
  so abundant and alert before all seem to be asleep at their posts. From 
  then on, the situation develops according to the guidelines below. Use 
  these examples to adjudicate what happens in your specific situation. Feel 
  free to add additional NPCs if appropriate, such as bartenders and wizard 
  guards at the Wizard’s Familiar.
   
  Confrontation: The Trio
  If the characters simply walk out the front door, they find the guards 
  asleep. Once they cross the moat, Osgood, Faisal, and Gynnen confront 
  them. The trio approach at the same time but separately from different 
  directions. Everyone’s hands are on wands or weapons, and it’s clear none 
  of them trusts each other or are happy to see one another. 
  If Irtep is Alive
  If Irtep is alive but his geas has not been broken, he is leery of Osgood 
  and Faisal and appears humiliated in the presence of Gynnen. 
  Osgood demands Irtep relinquish the magic items to him so he can 
  continue their research. He points out that it would be best if Irtep left 
  town and never came back since his gambling problem has cost him so 
  dearly. 
  Faisal demands that Irtep give the items to him so that he can turn them 
  over to the Dominion to be destroyed. 
  Gynnen begs Irtep to leave the wizards to their toys and come with him 
  to get help for his failing health and for his gambling problem. Gynnen 
  accuses Osgood of placing a geas on Irtep and claims that he has evidence 
  the scroll was bought from the wizard Manisool. 
  If the geas has not been broken, Irtep gains a new saving throw against 
  it as he realizes what Osgood did to him. If he breaks the spell, an angry 
  Irtep attacks Osgood, and Faisal joins in. If the saving throw fails and 
  the characters never received the scroll of remove curse from Gynnen, 
  then Gynnen unrolls the scroll to cast the spell now. During this attempt, 
  Osgood attacks him! 
  The wizards avoid using spells that cause mass destruction to the 
  neighborhood and further raise the ire of the city watch, who arrive 10 
  rounds after the first spell is cast. Gynnen pleads with the wizards to cease 
  fighting; he joins in the melee only to defend himself or to protect Irtep. 
  Irtep does everything in his power to defeat Osgood, with the assistance of 
  Faisal, though Faisal does not allow Irtep to kill Osgood; he’d rather see 
  Osgood turned over to the Dominion Arcane for a private trial.
  The characters can take any actions they wish during the wizards’ and 
  bard’s duel, coming in on whichever side they favor or standing aside 
  completely. They’ll be ignored while the combatants have each other to 
  worry about.
  During the fight, 2 half-orcs working for Big Julie and 2 half-orcs 
  working for Tuvio arrive. They use the battle as a distraction while 
  they make a beeline for Irtep. These two teams of leg-breakers are not 
  allied; their separate goals are to capture Irtep and bring him back to their 
  respective masters. They fall to fighting one another as soon as all four 
  Irtep’s Passkey
  Irtep’s passkey for leaving the Minzoa is a set of six-sided dice 
  given to him by his aged master. When Osgood and Irtep crafted 
  the Minzoa sextant, they tied the dice into the effect. The dice need 
  only be rolled in the palm of the hand while the password (“Get 
  big, baby!”) is spoken to reverse the sextant’s effect.
  
  183
  irtep's Dish
  close on the wizard. 
  When the half-orcs make their grab for Irtep, Gynnen steps in to stop 
  them. Characters are free to take any actions they deem appropriate, 
  including aiding or betraying whichever faction they signed on with at the 
  beginning of the adventure, understanding any consequences that occur 
  from their actions. 
  As if all this isn’t bad enough, members of the city guard begin arriving 
  within 10 rounds. The arriving guards awaken the guards that Osgood and 
  Faisal put to sleep, for a total of 14 guards, Officer Gralme, 4 guard 
  dogs, and the magic-user Finly on the scene. Killing Lyreguards is a 
  serious crime, of course. 
  Osgood Flumph (MU9): HP 22; AC 3[16]; Atk +1 dagger 
  (1d4+1); Move 12; Save 7; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: +2 save 
  bonus vs. spells and magical devices, spells (4/3/3/2/1).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile, protection 
  from good, shield; 2nd—darkness 15ft radius, mirror 
  image, web; 3rd—fly, protection from normal missiles, 
  slow; 4th—fear, polymorph other; 5th—teleport. 
  Equipment: bracers of defense AC 4[15], +1 dagger, 
  wand of lightning bolt (7 charges), boots of levitation, 
  ring of protection +1, medallion of ESP, scroll of dispel 
  magic, scroll of geas, 3500gp worth of gems and coins 
  in a bag of holding.
  Faisal Dhaken (MU8): HP 22; AC 6[13]; Atk +1 staff (1d6+1); 
  Move 12; Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: +2 save 
  bonus vs. spells and magical devices, spells (4/3/3/2).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, protection from evil, shield, 
  sleep; 2nd—invisibility, mirror image, web; 3rd—hold 
  person, lightning bolt, slow; 4th—confusion, fear.
  Equipment: bracers of defense AC 6[13], +1 staff, wand 
  of magic missiles (10 charges), 2 potions of healing, 
  1 potion of speed; 3000gp in gems and jewelry in a 
  pouch.
  Gynnen Valzoe (Thf5/MU5, dual-class human): HP 28; 
  AC 1[18]; Atk +1 short sword (1d6+1) or +1 light crossbow 
  (1d4+2); Move 12; Save 5 (with cloak); CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: +2 save bonus vs. spells, magical devices, and 
  traps, backstab (x3), spells (4/2/1), thieving skills.
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile (x2), sleep; 
  2nd—invisibility, mirror image; 3rd—haste.
  Thieving Skills: Climb 89%, Tasks/Traps 35%, Hear 4 in 6, 
  Hide 30%, Silent 40%, Locks 30%.
  Equipment: bracers of defense AC 2[17], cloak of 
  protection +1, +1 short sword, +1 light crossbow +1, 20 
  bolts, scroll of remove curse, 500gp in coins and gems.
  If Irtep is Dead or not with the Party
  If Irtep is dead or absent from the party, his former associates still 
  meet the characters as they exit the tower. In this case, Faisal and Osgood 
  demand the sextant, the passkey, and the pipes of Minzoa. If the characters 
  are under contract with one of the wizards, he reminds them openly of 
  their deal. If the players choose to side with Faisal, Osgood attacks Faisal, 
  intending to kill him before he takes custody of Irtep’s treasures.
  Gynnen is only concerned about the fate of Irtep, not his creations. 
  If the characters tell him that Irtep is dead, the bard is visibly sad and 
  departs. 
  Shortly after Gynnen leaves, the half-orcs arrive and demand Irtep’s 
  treasures as payment to their bosses. It is up to the players and Referee to 
  determine how this plays out. 
  Tying Up Loose Ends
  It is possible at the end of the adventure that the characters are outlaws 
  in Bard’s Gate. They may have made enemies or allies of the Red Blades, 
  Shadowmasks, Dominion Arcane, Big Julie, Tuvio, Faisal, Osgood, or 
  Irtep if he survived. 
  How the characters move forward after this adventure is something 
  to be decided between the Referee and players based on their deeds and 
  choices! 
  If characters rescue Irtep and bring him home to a happy conclusion, 
  he gives them his dish and the pipes of Minzoa, as his magic has grown 
  enough to continue his explorations of other tiny worlds. Irtep goes out of 
  his way to make amends with his debtors, paying them off with a cache of 
  scrolls and other treasures he hid in the Minzoa. 
  In this event, award the characters each an additional 1000 XP for their 
  hard work. Irtep remains an ally to the characters for the duration of their 
  careers, offering what advice and help he can and thanking them always 
  for saving him anytime their paths cross. 
  
  184
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  “Once upon a time, twin sisters went to slay the Winter Prince, who 
  held the freezing winds like tigers leashed in the Ghostwind Pass …”
  Introduction
  Roll 3d6 and add 10. Write that number down. You’ll need it later.
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass is an adventure designed for 4–6 characters 
  of levels 5–7. It is playable at other levels and with different numbers 
  of characters, but the monsters and risks of the adventure may require 
  adjustment by the Referee to offer an appropriate challenge to the 
  players. The adventure has two levels of complexity. On one level there 
  is an interesting background story with a mystery to solve that leads to a 
  powerful artifact. It can be left out if desired, leaving a straightforward 
  location-based adventure with a race against time and an evil mastermind.
  The adventure is designed to fit anywhere in your campaign world, 
  as long as you have some mountains available. If you’re using the Lost 
  Lands campaign setting, Ghostwind Pass cuts through the northern reach 
  of the Cretian Mountains, connecting Yolbiac Vale to the Town of Elet.
  Background
  The Ghostwind is a mountain pass threading a high trail through the 
  taller peaks rising to either side. It is the main pass in the area since it can 
  be traversed (although with difficulty) by wagons. A few smaller trails 
  remain usable later into the winter, but these mule-trails are too rough for 
  wagons, and generally pose other significant dangers such as rockslides 
  or narrow, cliff-side trails. An old stone road winds its way through the 
  pass, a relic of the Hyperborean Empire that has receded from these lands, 
  leaving them unprotected and wild. Although the road is dilapidated and 
  broken, the remains of the work done by its builders still allows the pass 
  to be traversed by wagons, even centuries after the stones were originally 
  set. The road is vital to the merchants and other travelers in the Ghostwind 
  for another reason: As long as it is not covered in snow, it shows travelers 
  the fastest and safest way through a pass that has several dead-end ravines 
  and blind canyons. Without it, a large number of journeyers through the 
  pass would never arrive on the far side of the mountains.
  The ravines and canyons of Ghostwind Pass are rich hunting and 
  trapping grounds during the warm seasons, drawing fortune-seekers to 
  the hunting camp around the Abbey of Saint Kathelynn and to the “South 
  Camp” on the far side of the mountains. There is a third settlement in the 
  highlands of the pass, the Manor of the Mountain Queen, but visitors to 
  the pass avoid this fell place. It is said that the Mountain Queen is not 
  human, although no one really knows what she might be.
  Twice each year, the Ghostwind blows down the high peaks, hurling 
  snow and sleet before it to bury most of the pass. The weather is violent 
  and murderously cold. Anyone caught in the heights when this maelstrom 
  hits is most likely doomed. Entire caravans have been lost, found at the 
  end of the season where they froze to death after only a day or two of 
  desperate travel back toward the lower altitude. The Ghostwind season 
  lasts 2 months, and during this time the pass is effectively closed off to 
  all passage.
  If you intend to run a player character in this adventure, READ NO 
  FURTHER.
  Referee Notes
  The vague rumors about the Mountain Queen’s Manor are entirely 
  correct: The Mountain Queen is not human. She is a lamia with innate 
  power over storms and snow who uses these powers to insulate her 
  stone castle from the Ghostwind. Once the Ghostwind falls, she and her 
  monstrous followers rule the high regions of the pass for the 2 months 
  until the murderously cold storms abate. Chief among her clan are her 
  children: the grey saber-tooths and the white weretigers that hunt in the 
  higher regions of the pass. The lamia is long-lived. She knows a great deal 
  about the series of events that took place in the pass 75 years ago when 
  a powerful fey known as the “Winter Prince” was supposedly defeated 
  by the paladin Kathelynn — because she is Kathelynn, or at least what is 
  left of her original self (see, “What Really Happened,” below). Although 
  the Winter Prince survived, he traded his life for a promise to restrict the 
  supernatural storms in the pass to twice per year. The characters might 
  stumble upon the odd mysteries and contradictions surrounding the defeat 
  of the Winter Prince; it is there to be found, but is not necessary to the 
  adventure.  
  For adventurers, the most important key to survival in the high region 
  of Ghostwind Pass (other than avoiding frontal assaults on the Mountain 
  Queen’s hall) is to understand how the cold weather moves in. During the 
  warm seasons, humans and their kin are able to survive in the pass. Once 
  the Ghostwind season begins, the storms and cold turn the pass into a 
  deathtrap. The only hope for a hunter or a group of adventurers is to fight 
  their way back down to the lower altitudes, out of the deadly weather. No 
  one knows exactly when the Ghostwind will suddenly fill the pass with 
  snow and bitter ice, but the locals are able to make a close estimate. It is 
  up to the characters how long they remain in the pass as the Ghostwind 
  draws closer. If greed delays them too long, there is a good chance they 
  die in the harsh conditions of the Ghostwind, joining the ranks of many 
  other fortune-seekers who thought they could risk “just one more day.”
  Missions
  The adventure assumes that the characters have arrived at the north 
  side of the mountains, beginning the adventure just as they approach 
  the Abbey of St. Kathelynn. The town of Elet lies close behind them to 
  the north, so allow the characters to do any pre-adventure information 
  gathering there, if they choose. They might simply be traveling through 
  the area, soon to learn that the pass offers some interesting possibilities; 
  but less time will be wasted at the game table if the characters start with 
  Perils of  
  Ghostwind Pass
  By Matt Finch
  
  185
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  some kind of objective (which can, of course, change during the course of 
  the adventure). A list of possible missions follows:
  • A local baron’s son on a hunting expedition into the ravines recently 
  disappeared in the pass. Find out what happened to him and his 3 
  companions and return them (or their bodies) to the baron. The reward is 
  appreciably larger if the lost nobles are still alive.
  • A magic-user offers to pay well for the heart of a peryton, and even 
  more for one or more eggs. More than one caravan through the pass has 
  been savaged by perytons, so finding and killing one ought to be easy 
  pickings!
  • The characters are hired to guard a small hunting party of a minor 
  noble and his/her courtiers (1d3+3 or so). They are seeking large game 
  such as boars or deer. Unfortunately, the highborn can be very independent 
  minded when it comes to taking advice from members of the lower social 
  orders …
  • The characters may have decided to go hunting on their own behalf. 
  A lot of undeserving monsters are out there, wearing some very valuable 
  furs.
  • An alchemist hires them to find a particular plant known as the “blood 
  violet.” The more sacks of blood violets they can collect, the better.
  • The characters are hired to guard a mule train through the pass.
  • In the midst of the Ghostwind season, while the storms are blowing, 
  the characters are hired to get an emergency message (or medicine, or a 
  fugitive) through the pass.
  Arrival of the Ghostwind
  The very first thing to do at the beginning of the adventure is to roll 
  three six-sided dice and add 10 (3d6+10). This is the number of days from 
  the characters’ arrival at the Abbey of St. Kathelynn until the Ghostwind 
  blows into the pass. The actual effects of being caught in the Ghostwind 
  are described below in the “Wilderness Map” section.
  The players ought to have some idea of the bell-curve probability 
  involved in their race against time (that all-important 3d6+10 days), so it’s 
  important that even if you like to give descriptions in character, someone 
  in the abbey should tell the characters something like the following:
  After the Ghostwind blows in, you’ll die if you’re in the pass. 
  It’s just too cold. But you’ve got some time until then. My 
  rheumatism says the Ghostwind won’t blow in for another 10 
  days plus another three rolls of the dice or so. You never know 
  exactly when, until a couple of days before. Two days of clouds 
  and then the cold.
  If you and your gaming group have a more “beer and pretzels” approach 
  to the game, feel free to just tell them that you rolled 3d6+10 days to find 
  out when the Ghostwind blows in, and that you’re not telling them the 
  result. They’ll figure out that the probability makes a bell curve.
  Wilderness Map
  The map shows three elevations, each shaded differently. Capital letters 
  offer a rough indication of “risk levels.” The numbered locations on the 
  Wilderness Map are all referred to in the Map Key with the letter W for 
  “Wilderness.” The elevations and other symbols are all described in more 
  detail below.
  Three Elevations
  Low Elevation: This is the floor of the pass itself. It is very rough 
  terrain, but passable by mules and horses. Wagons can negotiate the 
  road, but they move slowly. Although this is the lowest elevation in the 
  mountain pass itself, and is low enough for evergreen trees to survive, it 
  is still high, cold, rocky ground. The trees here are sparse and small; most 
  cannot live through the bitter cold of the Ghostwind season.
  Middle Elevation: These are high, steep areas, but not quite bad enough 
  to require the use of ropes and other equipment. Lots of the movement in 
  these areas is climbing rather than walking, using hands as well as feet. 
  This contour line also represents the tree line. Trees cannot grow in the 
  middle or highest elevations of the pass.
  Highest Elevation: The highest elevation is impassable for the purposes 
  of the adventure. A high-elevation area can be reached with climbing gear 
  (the peryton nest is an example) but it is not possible to move from one 
  high-elevation square to another. Up and down are the only choices here.
  Special Movement
  Mules and other Mounts: Mules do not increase an expedition’s 
  speed; they are no faster than people, but they can carry more. Horses also 
  do not increase speed, and since they are not as surefooted as mules, they 
  double movement cost on the Middle Elevation (see “Movement Cost” 
  below). Only mountain creatures such as giant mountain goats and great 
  cats, or giant mounts such as mammoths and elephants affect movement. 
  Such mounts do not increase the party’s speed, but they reduce the toll of 
  moving at speed through the uneven terrain, adding 1 hour to the length of 
  time the characters can move during the day (increase from 8 to 9).
  Wagons: Wagons move at “slow” speed on the road at the lowest 
  elevation (see “Movement Speed” below). They can move off the road 
  but have a 10% chance per hex traveled of breaking a wheel. They cannot 
  move into the Middle Elevation at all.
  Flying: Flying might appear to be the ideal solution to the perils of 
  the Ghostwind Pass, but it actually affords little benefit. During the 
  Ghostwind, flying and levitation are simply not possible. Even before the 
  Ghostwind arrives, the winds in the pass are quite violent if anyone flies 
  higher than 50ft. Flying provides the following benefits and drawbacks:
  Flying Speed: Flying speed requires 0.2 hours (12 minutes) to cross a 
  mile-wide hex on the map. This might seem slow, but the winds are very 
  difficult to handle when airborne.
  Benefit: The adventurers cannot be surprised at the beginning of an en-
  counter.
  Benefit: If the characters are specifically hunting for animals, roll a 
  second encounter each time you make a normal encounter check. They 
  won’t have two encounters, but if the second roll indicates an encounter 
  when the first roll didn’t, this means the flying character spots the other 
  possibility at a distance of 1d10x0.1 miles (from a tenth of a mile up to 
  a full mile). Note that the other encounter may have spotted the flying 
  character as well, and if it is intelligent it most definitely reacts in some 
  way once it knows it is being observed from afar.
  Higher than 50ft, Immediate Risk: Every time the character tries to fly 
  higher than 50ft, there is an immediate 10% chance that a violent gust 
  yanks the character 1d4x100ft sideways and down in a random direction 
  to smash against the rocky floor of the Pass for 2d6 points of damage.
  Higher than 50ft, Ongoing Risk: Each mile scouted (and if station-
  ary, once per 20 minutes) while a character remains airborne at an 
  altitude above 50ft, the character has a 10% chance to be blown off 
  course 1d3 miles in a random direction. If a character hits one of the 
  highest-altitude squares while being blown off course, it results in a 
  rapid stop and 4d6 points of damage. As soon as a character reaches 
  this elevation, the feel of the winds alone alerts the character to the 
  risk. (It is a good idea, for purposes of the game, to give the player a 
  fairly good description of the risk and the result of having a character 
  flying in this sort of wind).
  Lower than 50ft, flying fast, Ongoing Risk: A character planning to skim 
  along at an altitude below 50ft can travel at a movement cost of 0.1 hours 
  per mile, without the risk of blowing off course. However, the low-flying 
  character runs the risk of downdrafts. Once per mile traveled, a low-flying 
  character has a 10% chance of being caught in one of these and smashed 
  to the ground (1d4x100ft of random sideways movement, and 2d6 points 
  of damage upon landing).
  Lower than 50ft, flying slowly, No Risk: It is safe to remain with the rest 
  of the party at an altitude of less than 50ft, gaining the benefits of aerial 
  scouting. The character is tossed around in the wind, but not thrown side-
  ways, downward, or off into the distance.
  
  186
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Movement Speed
  Overland movement in Ghostwind Pass is considerably slower than the 
  official Handbook speed, reflecting the fact that the characters aren’t really 
  “traveling” here. However, in any combat on the rocky terrain of the mountain 
  pass, just use the movement rate for “Difficult Terrain” (half speed).
  Each hex on the Wilderness Map takes a certain amount of time to 
  cross, depending on its elevation. Crossing the contour lines themselves 
  does not cost extra time; that’s accounted for by the different movement 
  rates at the different elevations. A normal speed and a slow speed are 
  given; certain circumstances can reduce the characters’ movement rate as 
  described later. Moreover, the characters are normally limited to 8 hours 
  of hiking in a day (see below).
  Lowest Elevation: It takes 0.5 hours to cross a hex at normal speed, and 
  1 hour at slow speed. Movement cost during the Ghostwind is 1.5 hour at 
  normal speed and 2 hours for slowed speed.
  Middle Elevation: It takes 1 hour at normal speed to cross a Middle 
  Elevation hex, and 2 hours at slow speed. The characters cannot cross 
  Middle Elevation terrain if they are “force marching” in the 9th or 10th 
  hour of the march. During the Ghostwind, it takes 3 hours at normal speed 
  to cross Middle Elevation terrain, and 4 hours at slowed speed.
  Highest Elevation: The High Elevations can be scaled to reach a 
  particular objective such as the peryton nest at Area W-4. However, they 
  are impassable for purposes of movement; the characters cannot move 
  from one high-elevation hex to another.
  Exhaustion and Encumbrance
  The characters can hike up to 8 hours per day, spending the remaining 
  time making/breaking camp, cooking dinner and breakfast, resting, and 
  sleeping. It is very, very difficult to travel over rough terrain for 8 hours 
  while carrying supplies. Nevertheless, it is possible for the characters to 
  really push themselves and “force march” more than 8 hours a day. Forced 
  marching allows the characters to keep going an additional 2 hours (for a 
  total time of 10 hours).
  Forced marching is dangerous in treacherous terrain like the Ghostwind 
  Pass. Exhaustion can set in, reducing alertness and making people clumsier 
  than normal. It is much easier to miss your footing or trip over a rock that 
  would have been noticed and avoided earlier in the day. At the end of each 
  hour, each character must make a saving throw against exhaustion or must 
  rest for an hour before continuing.
  If the characters are extremely burdened (not likely, but possible), they 
  are moving at “slow” speed — which is not necessarily half speed.
  Risk Zones
  The Wilderness Map is divided into several “risk zones,” denoted by 
  capital letters. Along the same elevation the exact boundaries of the risk 
  zones are unimportant, but the risk zones don’t cross the contour lines. 
  Whenever the characters climb up or down past one of the contour lines, 
  they are automatically crossing into the risk zone in the new elevation. 
  Most of the risk zones specifically indicate how dangerous the higher 
  elevations are.
  There’s another side to risks, of course. As they say, “the greater the 
  risk, the greater the reward.” If the characters are hunting for the valuable 
  pelts, they find them in the more dangerous parts of the pass.
  Hunting
  The valuable hunting — for furs — is handled by the system of 
  encounter checks described below. Whenever the characters enter a new 
  hex, there is a chance for an encounter. If the characters are also hunting 
  for subsistence, use the normal rules for foraging. 
  Encounter Checks
  The short answer: Check for an encounter when characters enter a 
  new hex, and once during the night. If the Ghostwind is blowing, use the 
  special encounter table for the Ghostwind Season. Note: the Ghostwind 
  Effect Check is a different check (made every 2 hours and once at night).
  To check for an encounter when the characters enter a new hex (or 
  for the one “nighttime” check), find which Risk Area the characters are 
  closest to (reminder: don’t cross contour lines), and roll on the encounter 
  table for that Risk Area. It is fine to be approximate in terms of which risk 
  area the characters are in.
  Ghostwind Effect Check
  Once the Ghostwind blows in, it becomes so cold that no matter how 
  long the characters try to rest, they cannot gain the benefits of a long rest, 
  and it takes a full night’s sleep to gain even the benefits of a short rest.
  Each day the characters are in the pass while the Ghostwind is blowing, 
  they may suffer damage and other effects from the supernatural cold 
  and violent storms. For every 2 hours of movement, in addition to the 
  encounter checks, roll for each character on the Ghostwind Effects Table 
  (d%). A successful saving throw gains a +5 on the die roll. 
  If the characters are fighting their way out of the Pass during the 
  Ghostwind, consider them “out of the pass” if they reach the abbey or the 
  south camp.
  Wilderness Travel Tables
  Ghostwind Effects Table
  Die Roll 
  (d%)
  Effect
  01-10
  Make a saving throw to avoid severe frostbite*
  11-15
  6 hit points of damage
  16-20
  4 hit points of damage
  21-25
  2 hit points of damage
  26-00
  No adverse effect
  * Randomly determine on 1d6 whether the frostbite is in 
  (1) fingers of left hand, (2) fingers of right hand, (3) toes 
  of left foot, (4) toes of right foot, (5) nose, (6) ear. Cure 
  serious wounds can reverse the damage if it is cast before 
  the frostbitten piece falls off (1d6 days). Unless more than 
  one finger is lost on the same hand, missing fingers are not 
  enough of a problem to cause modifiers on die rolls.
  Quick Travel-Rules Summary
  1. Determine Movement Rate (normal or slow). If flying, check 
  flying rules.
  2. Move into a hex
  a. Mark off the time required for a hex at that elevation. 
  Ghostwind Rules: When 2 hours elapse, each character 
  makes a check on the Ghostwind Effects Table.
  b. Determine Risk Level for that hex (the nearest capital 
  letter at that elevation)
  c. Roll for Encounter: Use the table for that Risk Level. 
  Ghostwind Rules: use the Ghostwind Encounter Table, not 
  the Risk Level Tables. 
  d. After 8 hours of movement are marked off, the characters 
  must either make camp or force march.
  e. If they force march, add in the saving throw against 
  exhaustion (must rest for 1 hour). Ghostwind Rules: Cannot 
  force march during Ghostwind.
  f. When they make camp, make one more encounter check 
  for that Risk Level, covering the entire night. Check to see 
  if the Ghostwind is going to hit the next day. Ghostwind 
  Rules: Use the Ghostwind Encounter Table, not the Risk 
  Level Tables. Make only one more check on the Ghostwind 
  Effects Table for each character.
  
  187
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
   
  Encounter Table During the Ghostwind  
  (use this table in all Risk Areas)
  Die Roll 
  (d%)
  Encounter/Result
  1–76
  No Encounter
  77–78
  1 white pudding
  79–80
  1 giant snowy owl (wild: not from the Roster)
  81–82
  1d4+1 giant mountain goats
  83–84
  1 giant wolverine
  85–86
  1d4+1 snow-serpents
  87–90
  1d3 giant weasels
  91–92
  1d2 cave bear 
  93–94
  1 giant ermine
  95–96
  1d2 grey saber-tooth (from the Roster)
  97
  1 white weretiger (from the Roster: Claude, 
  Pierre, or Thibault)
  98–99
  1 remorhaz
  00
  Khethro Tulroc the satyr (see Area W-7)
  Encounter Table for Risk Areas A, B, C, D (lower risk)
  Die Roll 
  (d%)
  Risk Area A Low Elevation 
  Low Risk
  Risk Area B Low Elevation 
  Higher Risk
  Risk Area C High Elevation 
  Low Risk
  Risk Area D High Elevation 
  Low Risk
  1–75
  No encounter
  No encounter
  No encounter
  No encounter
  76–78
  1d4+2 mountain goats 
  1d4+2 mountain goats
  1d4+2 mountain goats 
  1d4+2 mountain goats
  79–80
  1d4 wolves
  1d6 wolves
  1d6+2 wolves
  1d6+2 wolves
  81
  1 giant lynx
  1d3 giant lynx
  1d3 giant lynx
  1d3 giant lynx
  82
  1 wild boar
  1d3 wild boars
  1d4 giant mountain goat
  1d4 giant mountain goat
  83
  1 wolverine
  1d2 wolverines
  1d3 wolverines
  1d3 wolverines
  84–85
  1 bear, black
  1 bear, black
  1d2 bears, black
  1d2 bears, black
  86
  1 giant weasel
   1 giant weasel
  1d2 giant weasels
  1d2 giant weasels
  87–88
  ��� iant �rmine
  ��� iant �rmine
  1d2 � iant �rmines
  1d2 � iant �rmines
  89–90
  1d3 humans (trappers, 
  normal humans)
  1d4+1 ogre hunting party
  1d3+1 minotaur hunting 
  party
  1d2 perytons or minotaur 
  hunting party if the 
  perytons are dead
  91
  1 hawk overhead 
  3 vultures circle party for 
  2 hours
  1d2 perytons; 1 hawk 
  overhead if perytons are 
  dead
  1d6 peryton; 1 hawk 
  overhead if perytons are 
  dead
  92
  1d2 Badgers, Giant
  1d2+1 Giant Badgers
  1 giant ermine
  1 giant ermine
  93
  Giant ants (1d4+1 workers, 
  1 warrior)
  Giant ants (1d4+3 workers, 
  1d2 warriors)
  Giant ants (1d8+4 workers, 
  1d4+1 warriors)
  Giant ants (1d8+4 workers, 
  1d4+1 warriors)
  94
  Slip and fall on rock; 1 
  character takes 1d4 
  points of damage.
  Slip and fall on rock; 1 
  character takes 1d4 
  points of damage.
  Trip and slide on rocks; 1 
  character takes 1d4+1 
  points of damage from 
  fall and makes a saving 
  throw against sprained 
  ankle.*
  Trip and slide on rocks; 1 
  character takes 1d4+1 
  points of damage from 
  fall and makes a saving 
  throw against sprained 
  ankle.*
  95
  No encounter
  No encounter
  Rockslide. Each character 
  must make a saving throw 
  or sustain 1d20 points of 
  damage.
  Rockslide. Each character 
  must make a saving throw 
  or sustain 1d20 points of 
  damage.
  96
  1d2 giant beetles
  1d2 giant beetles
  1d3+1 giant beetles
  1d3+1 giant beetles 
  
  188
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Die Roll 
  (d%)
  Risk Area A Low Elevation 
  Low Risk
  Risk Area B Low Elevation 
  Higher Risk
  Risk Area C High Elevation 
  Low Risk
  Risk Area D High Elevation 
  Low Risk
  97–98
  No encounter (squirrels)
  Blood violets (1d3 sacks’ 
  worth)
  Blood violets (1d3+2 
  sacks’ worth)
  Blood violets (1d3+2 
  sacks’ worth)
  99
  No encounter (crickets)
  1 troll
  1d3 troll
  1d3 troll
  00
  1 tiger, grey saber-
  toothed (from the Roster)
  1 tiger, grey saber-
  toothed (from the Roster) 
  * A sprained ankle causes a delay of 0.5 hour while it is wrapped, and the cursing and swearing abates. The sprain reduces character’s speed to half 
  (in combat) and the party’s wilderness speed to “slow,” with the movement penalty lasting 1d100 hours. Cure ��������wounds ��������������������� 
  spra��������������������������� reduces the duration by 10 hours. Ignore this result for the night encounter check and re-roll.
  Encounter Table for Risk Areas E, F, G (higher or specific risk)
  Die Roll 
  (d%)
  Risk Area E Highest Elevation Very 
  High Risk
  Risk Area F Any Elevation Very High 
  Risk
  Risk Area G Any Elevation Highest 
  Risk
  1–70
  No encounter
  No encounter
  No encounter
  71–73
  1d4+2 mountain goats (normal)
  1d4+2 mountain goats (normal)
  1d4+2 mountain goats (normal)
  74–75
  1d6+2 wolves with winter wolf
  1d6+2 wolves with 2 winter wolves
  1d8+3 wolves with 3 winter wolves
  76–77
  1d6 giant mountain goats
  1d6+1 giant mountain goats
  1d6+2 giant mountain goats
  78
  1d3+1 giant wolverines
  1d4+1 giant wolverines
  1d2 cave bears 
  79
  1 cave bear
  1d2 cave bear
  1d2 cave bear 
  80
  1d4 giant weasels
  1d4 giant weasels
  1d4 giant weasels 
  81–85
  1d4 giant ermines
  1d4+1 giant ermines
  1d4+2 giant ermines
  86
  1d3 trolls
  1 white weretiger (from the Roster)
  Khethro Tulroc the satyr (see Area 
  W-7)
  87–88
  Giant ants (1d8+6 workers, 1d6+1 
  warriors)
  Giant ants (1d8+6 workers, 1d6+1 
  warriors)
  1 hill giant and 2 ogres, carrying 
  1d6+3 giant ermine pelts.
  89–90
  Trip and slide on rocks: 1 character 
  takes 1d4+1 points of damage 
  from fall and makes a saving throw 
  against sprained ankle.*
  Trip and slide on rocks: 1 character 
  takes 1d4+1 points of damage 
  from fall and makes a saving throw 
  against sprained ankle.*
  Trip and slide on rocks: 1 character 
  takes 1d4+1 points of damage 
  from fall and makes a saving throw 
  against sprained ankle.*
  91
  Rockslide. Each character must 
  make a saving throw or take 1d20 
  points of damage.
  Rockslide. Each character must 
  make a saving throw or take 1d20 
  points of damage.
  Rockslide. Each character must 
  make a saving throw or take 1d20 
  points of damage.
  92–93
  Blood Violets (1d6+1 sacks’ worth)
  Blood Violets (1d6+2 sacks’ worth)
  Blood Violets (1d6+3 sacks’ worth)
  94–95
  1d3 bear, black
  1d3 bear, black
  1d3 bear, black 
  96–97
  1d4 snow-serpents (fur still spotted 
  green, has not changed to white)
  1d4 snow-serpents (fur still spotted 
  green, has not changed to white)
  1d6 snow-serpents (fur still spotted 
  green, has not changed to white)
  98
  1d2 badger, giant
  1d2+1 badger, giant
  1d2+1 badger, giant
  99–00
  1 tiger, grey saber-toothed (from 
  the Roster)
  1 tiger, grey saber-toothed (from 
  the Roster)
   
   
  Rumors and Whispers
  Before the adventure really begins, the characters have a chance 
  to gather some information in the town to the north. (In the Lost 
  Lands campaign setting, this is the town of Elet.) The characters 
  automatically get the “Basic Information” below. Each character 
  (to a maximum of 7 characters) rolls 1d20. This number determines 
  which category of rumor the character hears through investigation 
  (False, Easy, Pretty Good, and Extraordinarily Good). Once the 
  category is determined, roll in that category to see what sort of tidbits 
  the character learns.
  Automatic
  Basic Information:
  1) The mountain pass is blocked twice per year when blizzards called 
  the Ghostwinds blow in.
  2) The Abbey of St. Kathelynn is a safe place to rest.
  3) There is a druid who lives just by the abbey. Their religious beliefs 
  cause some friction.
  Result of 0–5
  False Rumors (1d6):
  1) The Mountain Queen is a giantess who collects the heads of anyone 
  who casts magic in her mountain pass.
  2) Giant Ice-toads built a massive windmill in the heights of the pass 
  and it pulls in the Ghostwind when their human slaves work the treadmills 
  that turn its diamond-edged blades faster and faster.
  3) A songbird kept for three days in the pass will lay golden eggs for a 
  week thereafter.
  
  189
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  4) Some people say that the Abbot of Saint Kathelynn actually killed 
  the saint.
  5) Ice dwarves have built a giant waterwheel at a high elevation near 
  one of the lakes. It is used to catch salmon, but a giant fish with legs has 
  started attacking their settlement.
  6) A woman who lives near the abbey is actually a necromancer who 
  curses adventurers by using some sort of rune magic.
  Result of 6–12
  Easy Rumors (1d6):
  1) The higher you go up the walls of the pass, the more dangerous it 
  gets, but the better the hunting.
  2) The best hunting in the pass is the giant ermine. Don’t use cutting 
  weapons on them, or you drop the value of the pelt.
  3) Some kind of powerful artifact can be found in the pass.
  4) You better have some magic weapons or silver weapons if you go 
  exploring where you shouldn’t go.
  5) An abbey of a saint is at the base of the pass. She was sainted only 
  75 years ago, and they consecrated an old watch-fort to put her bones in. 
  They haven’t repaired it very well, if you ask me.
  6) Rope yourselves together to cross the river fords, and if you plan on 
  climbing any of the crags, bring spikes, ropes, and grappling hooks. The 
  giant owl eggs are worth a lot, and that’s the only way to get them since 
  they nest in the high places. If you get one of the owl eggs back safely, 
  you can buy me a drink.
  Result of 13-18
  Pretty Good Rumors (1d10):
  1) Strange grey saber-toothed cats live in the pass. Avoid them, they’re 
  pretty cunning.
  2) The abbot of St. Kathelynn’s is so old that he remembers the last days 
  of the saint’s life.
  3) A nest of perytons is on one of the high peaks.
  4) An artifact associated with Saint Kathelynn is supposed to be buried 
  with her bones.
  5) Saint Kathelynn had a sister you almost never hear about in the 
  stories.
  6) Watch out for the Manor of the Mountain Queen. You don’t want to 
  go there.
  7) If you’re going to hunt giant ermines, you should wear the Druid’s 
  Mark.
  8) They say the Mountain Queen hunts people in the wilderness. If she 
  finds you, you become her slave and are never seen again.
  9) The abbey at the base of the pass is kept warm by the Saint. It’s the 
  only place the Ghostwinds can’t freeze when they blow in.
  10) They say the Mountain Queen has a magic pool, and she can see 
  things in it even if they are far away.
  Result of 19+
  Extraordinarily Good Rumors (1d4):
  1) The servant of a fey winter power by the name of Tulroc lives near 
  the eastern wall of the pass.
  2) The Ghostwinds are fey powers called into the pass by a creature 
  named Tulroc.
  3) Saint Kathelynn and her twin sister were both famous, but Kathelynn 
  was definitely the one who shone the brightest.
  4) The Ghostwinds are fey powers controlled by a creature called the 
  Winter Prince.
  What Really Happened
  The characters might realize early on that there is something strange 
  about Kathelynn’s canonization. The fact of the matter is that the proper 
  authorities of the church, rushing to honor the heroine of the Ghostwind 
  Pass, canonized the wrong person. Not only that, Kathelynn is the one who 
  killed Elys, and she is still alive, no longer a champion of the faith. Cursed 
  and transformed by the gods, her mind twisted to murderous hate, she still 
  lives in the Ghostwind Pass under the name of the Mountain Queen.
  Kathelynn and Elys were identical twin sisters and clerics. Kathelynn 
  was the famous warrior-priestess, and the quiet sister Elys was her 
  standard-bearer, carrying Kathelynn’s red rose banner into battle. The 
  twins could be told apart by their shields: Kathelynn wore her red rose, 
  and Elys’ rose was white as snow. The only other difference was a vertical 
  battle scar on Kathelynn’s face.
  At this time 75 years ago, the Ghostwind Pass had been choked off for 
  many years by a fey lord known as the Winter Prince. His Ghostwinds, 
  like chained hounds, kept the area in a perpetual blizzard, completely 
  impassable. The sister paladins swore an oath to banish the immortal 
  Winter Prince and free the mountain pass from his influence. They and 
  their 5 retainers stopped at the fort just north of the pass (now the abbey), 
  and the sisters went out alone into the snow to pray. They returned bearing 
  the Staff of the Remorhaz, a holy artifact dating back to the beginning of 
  history and the wars against forgotten evil gods.
  With Kathelynn at the forefront, and Elys bearing the staff and red rose 
  banner, the twins became separated from their followers in the blizzard, 
  and then lost each other, too, coming separately upon the Winter Prince in 
  the midst of his howling Ghostwinds.
  First to meet him was Kathelynn, and the prince’s sweet words and 
  subtle magic undid Kathelynn’s defenses and corrupted her to the service 
  of evil. Then Elys came upon them, and fought the fey lord in single 
  combat. In the great battle, the power of the Winter Prince snapped the 
  Staff of the Remorhaz, but he was forced to yield by Elys’ prowess in 
  battle. The prince agreed to free the mountain pass from the Ghostwinds 
  except for twice a year. As Elys put her weapon away, though, the Winter 
  Prince gestured to Kathelynn. The prince’s newest servant, standing 
  behind Elys, crushed half of her twin sister’s skull with her mace. Dying, 
  Elys swung with the last strength in her, and killed the body of the Winter 
  Prince. Laughing, the spirit of the Winter Prince rode his Ghostwinds 
  away to find a new body: victorious, although still bound by the oath he 
  had sworn to Elys. The Ghostwinds would return to the pass only twice a 
  year instead of year-round.
  Kathelynn reached out to take the Staff of the Remorhaz, for without 
  her twin holding the cold-warding staff, she was freezing in the bitter chill 
  of the high mountain. But the moment she touched the ancient artifact, it 
  took a terrible vengeance upon her for murdering her twin.
  She was transformed into a horrible beast with the lower body of a 
  white tiger and her own body from the waist up, a dreadful lamia of the 
  cold mountains. Blinded by the pain of the transformation, she grabbed 
  what she thought was her own shield and ran, still clutching the part of the 
  ancient relic she had taken. When the lamia awoke in the wilderness, fully 
  transformed, she saw what she had left the battle with: the eye from the 
  top of the staff and her sister’s white-rose shield.
  With the Ghostwinds gone, the five knights found Elys’ body where it 
  lay next to the body of the slain Winter Prince, together with Kathelynn’s 
  shield and the Staff of the Remorhaz fallen nearby. The knights, of course, 
  assumed it was the famous sister, Kathelynn, apparently the victor over 
  the Winter Prince. They brought the body and the broken staff back to the 
  chapel at the base of the pass, where they buried it in secret, concealing it in 
  a grave labeled with another person’s name (“Gryffin Winemaker”). Their 
  thinking was simply to hide it from anyone who might try to desecrate it 
  before Kathelynn could be sainted. The result was disaster. Kathelynn, 
  now a lamia, insanely believes that if she can repair the artifact, she can 
  reverse her transformation. Not knowing where the other half could be 
  found and correctly assuming that it was buried with Elys, Kathelynn 
  kidnapped each of the retainers in turn, and tortured them to find out the 
  periapt’s location. Each of them died without divulging the secret.
  With the retainers all dead, the situation has become a lost secret. 
  No living person knows where St. Elys’ body can be found, and only 
  Kathelynn the lamia knows that the wrong saint was consecrated.
  Trimming the Background Story
  If you want to remove the artifact-and-buried-saint mystery from the 
  adventure to make it simpler, all you have to do is make one change: Make 
  sure that the rose symbols in the Manor of the Mountain Queen are white 
  rather than red (or that they aren’t roses, but tigers or some other symbol). 
  As long as that’s done, all you have to do is ignore all references to Saint 
  Elys and her burial.
  
  190
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Wilderness Map
  You and your companions have traveled up an increasingly 
  poor trail toward the foot of the mountains. You now stand 
  looking across at what definitely appears to be the last ragged 
  gasp of civilization this side of the mountain peaks. A dilapidated-
  looking drum tower is set on a hill, attached to a sagging wooden 
  stockade that probably encloses a couple of other buildings. A 
  watchtower stands to each side of a wooden gate. A cottage of 
  some kind sits beside the hill, with one or two trees around it.
  Area W-1: Abbey of Saint 
  Kathelynn, Druid’s Cottage
  See the separate map of the abbey grounds.
  Area W-2: River Crossing
  The river is deep and very fast-flowing, although it is obviously not as 
  full as gets during the early days of the spring thaw. There is a ford here, 
  where the river widens and becomes shallower as it runs over a broad rock 
  shelf. Any person going across the ford on foot must make two successive 
  saving throws along the way to avoid tripping, falling, and being carried 
  away by the water into the rapids below.
  Anyone failing a saving throw has one more chance to grab hold and 
  stop before being pulled into the rapids. If this chance fails, the character 
  takes 2d10 points of damage before getting to one side of the river or the 
  other (roll randomly to see which bank).
  The same risks apply to crossing the river anywhere in the pass.
  Area W-3: Tembril Tarn 
  The water of this lake is, of course, icy cold, and it is very deep. At 
  night, an eerie luminescence rises over the lake, and anyone near the 
  banks hears a soft, muttering, whining voice that does not form words but 
  continues for several minutes, then suddenly cuts off with a low scream. 
  This phenomenon repeats itself over and over until dawn. Spellcasters 
  cannot regain any spells if the characters are camped within a mile of the 
  banks of the tarn.
  Area W-4: Peryton Nest
  This is the nest of 6 perytons, some of which may already have been 
  killed by the time the characters scale the cliff to the nest itself.
  Peryton (6): HD 4; HP 20x2, 22x2, 18, 24; AC 6[13]; Atk antler 
  gore (2d8); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit.
  The cliff is very steep, 110ft tall, and the wind whipping around the 
  rock formation makes it impossible to fly to the top. There might be ways 
  around this (players are ingenious). Their solution, if it is to succeed 
  without catastrophe, needs to address all 6 directions in which a flying or 
  levitating character could be violently pitched (forward/back, side/side, 
  up/down). Impacts could range from a bad bump of 1d4 points of damage, 
  up to a massive gust causing 4d6 points of damage if the character hits 
  the stone.
  It has to be climbed, which is not tremendously dangerous if the 
  characters have spikes, ropes, and lots of time. However, unless the 
  characters already killed all the perytons — in which case they probably 
  don’t know how to find the nest in the first place — they have to climb 
  the cliff under attack from at least 1 peryton and possible as many as 6. 
  The perytons do not hunt in groups of more than 2 unless a human kill 
  is available (possibly a decoy miles away, if the party splits up to leave 
  a human effigy somewhere). If the adventurers manage to decoy some 
  of the perytons away from the nest, roll 1d4+1 to see how many leave 
  (subtract previously killed ones, too). Waiting for a couple of perytons to 
  leave, whether decoyed or just hunting, is a good strategy.
  The climb has three stages:
  Stage 1: Starts at the ground, hits a difficult spot at 20ft, and ends at a 
  secure 6-inch-wide ledge at the 50 feet mark.
  Stage 2: Starts at the 6-inch ledge (50ft), hits a difficult spot at 80ft and 
  90ft, ends at 100ft.
  Stage 3: Starts at the 100ft mark, and is a fairly easy scramble to the 
  cliff-top at 110ft.
  All vertical movement is at a speed of 5ft per minute, and movement 
  is not possible in the same round as a character attacks or takes any 
  other action. The areas between the “difficult spots” can be climbed by 
  any unskilled person either using a rope, or driving spikes into the rock 
  along the way; it just takes time and care. Climbing such an area without 
  equipment requires Climb Walls check. A first failed check roll does not 
  indicate that the character falls, it just means that the character is stuck on 
  the rock face and cannot proceed farther without equipment. If a second 
  check fails (while the character retreats down from being stuck) the 
  character actually falls.
  Climbing past the “difficult spots” with equipment requires an 
  independent strength check (3d6 vs. score); if using no equipment, a 
  Climb Walls check.
  If anyone uses a hammer to drive spikes at an altitude higher than Stage 
  1 of the climb, it alerts the perytons. They defend their lair savagely, 
  swooping in to attack climbers.
  Treasure: The perytons actually collect treasure in the nest, although 
  they also threw out one object of considerable information value (the 
  notebook of Jauric Tallbones, see below). In the nest the characters find 
  a scattering of 52gp, 129sp, and 533cp. Two halves of a magic wand are 
  now useless, but a steel scrollcase was shiny enough stay in the nest and 
  tough enough to protect its contents of 2 scrolls. One scroll is clerical, 
  with the spells cure light wounds (x3) and cure serious wounds. The other 
  scroll contains the magic-user spells web, mirror image, and gust of wind. 
  A golden bracelet is worth 100gp, and a piece of jade carved into the shape 
  of an ugly baby is worth 300gp (the value of the jade). A necklace of ivory 
  rabbits is worth 500gp, and a well-chewed quiver contains a +2 arrow, 6 
  broken arrows and 3 arrows.
  Many bones are on the cliff ledges below the peryton nest, and below 
  the aerie falls a curtain of death’s garbage: clothes, empty boots, and 
  bits of hair. One of the more noticeable items is a small leather-bound 
  notebook.
  The notebook is the journal of an adventurer named Jauric Tallbones, 
  son of John Tallbones, one of the names in the abbey graveyard. Jauric 
  came to the abbey to learn more about his father, taking notes and 
  collecting information about the ill-fated expedition to the Hall of the 
  Winter Prince.
  My father, John Tallbones, told me before his martyrdom how 
  they found Saint Kathelynn and the dying Winter Prince. He 
  spoke of a battle standard with the faceted gem on top broken 
  away. This staff was a holy item with great power, and he said 
  that if I should become a knight, I should seek it. My father 
  used to say, “Find Elys, the sister, and you’ll find the eye of the 
  remorhaz. It’s probably treasure in the Manor of the Mountain 
  Queen now, or sitting in some badger’s lair. The other half we 
  buried with Saint Kathelynn of the Red Rose, blessed may be 
  she, but I am sworn never to reveal where the saint’s bones are 
  buried, even under torture. All I can say is to look in the griffin’s 
  lair, son.”
  
  191
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  
  192
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Area W-5: Shrine of St. Kathelynn
  A memorial is here where the battle took place. The ground around the 
  shrine is dug up in several places (by Kathelynn’s bugbears, checking to 
  make sure that Elys’ bones were not buried at this fairly obvious location). 
  Red roses have been left here in memory of “Saint” Kathelynn. Kathelynn 
  the lamia occasionally collects these to decorate her rooms, appreciating 
  the irony. Just as the Druidess Lurilune makes an occasional trip to Cenaur 
  Yltair (Area W-11), Abbot Godefroy makes a pilgrimage to this site, 
  leaving roses and offering prayers. Any ranger or druid notices what looks 
  like big lion or panther tracks around the shrine. 
  Area W-6: Manor of the 
  Mountain Queen
  The Mountain Queen is Kathelynn, whose acts transformed her into a 
  lamia with the body of a white saber-toothed tiger and a woman’s torso. 
  See the separate map of the Manor of the Mountain Queen (and the map 
  entries with an “H” prefix).
  Area W-7: Piper of the Winds. 
  Roll an encounter as normal for this hex, but in addition to whatever 
  else might be here, the area contains a cave, the den of a satyr named 
  Khethro Tulroc. 
  Tulroc has a very unusual appearance for a satyr, being the servant of 
  a different power than most satyrs follow. His skin, horns, and hair are 
  bone-white; his only color is in his ice-blue eyes. The satyr carries a set of 
  bone pan-pipes and wears nothing but a belted sporran and cudgel, even 
  in the most biting cold. His behavior is not much different than normal 
  satyrs, although he is quite old and very canny. 
  Khethro Tulroc, Satyr: HD 5; HP 30; AC 5[14]; Atk short 
  sword (1d6), Move 18; Save 12; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; Special: 
  concealment, pipes (charm person, sleep, or fear), magic 
  resistance (50%)
  Tulroc is a servant of the Winter Prince, and his bone pan-pipes are 
  actually the instrument of luring the Ghostwinds down into the pass. If 
  Tulroc does not play the pipes, the Ghostwinds eventually come looking 
  for him — but with a delay of 1d4+2 days beyond the time they would 
  normally have arrived. However, if the satyr is killed, the Ghostwinds 
  bring some other servants of the Winter Prince to avenge him: a pack of 
  5 white trolls with maximum hit points. The trolls pursue their quest for 
  vengeance beyond the heights of the pass. If they are defeated, no further 
  servants of the Winter Prince follow.
  Troll, White (5): HD 6+3; HP 33, 35, 31, 38, 40; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d4), bite (1d8); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; 
  Special: immune to cold, regenerate 3hp/round.
  Tulroc has 90% concealment among his rocks, and this makes it 
  unlikely that the characters find him if he doesn’t want to be found, even 
  if they have a character scouting from the air. He could be enticed into the 
  open if the characters camp here, if there are any females in the group, if 
  they play any music, or if the characters call his name.
  The pipes do not call the Ghostwinds unless it is Tulroc playing them; 
  they are not magical.
  Area W-8: Snowy Owl Nest
  A nest of 2 giant snowy owls is in this cave high up the cliff face. Unless 
  the Referee chooses to use a different procedure, the cliff must be scaled in 
  the same way as the one where the perytons make their nest (Area W-4). 
  In this case, the owl nest is only 70ft up the cliff and 2 stages to the climb.
  Stage 1: Starts at the ground, hits a difficult spot at 30ft, and ends at a 
  secure 1ft wide ledge at the 40ft mark.
  Stage 2: Starts at the ledge (40ft), hits a difficult spot at 50ft, ends at 
  the cave mouth (70ft).
  At night, 1 of the owls is always out hunting while the other guards the 
  nest. During the day, both owls are here.
  Owl, Giant Snowy (2): HD 4; HP 24, 20; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws 
  (1d8), bite (1d6+1), Move 3 (fly 20), Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 
  5/240; Special: –2 to all die rolls in bright light, flies silently. 
  (Monstrosities 369)
  Treasure: There are 3 giant-owl eggs in the nest.
  Area W-9: Druidic Holy Place 
  (Olir Orphais)
  The holy place known as Olir Orphais is a natural rock arch, flickering 
  all over with a faint greenish fire. The flames cannot be extinguished other 
  than by the power of a demigod, at the least. This arch is one of the sacred 
  places Lurilune (Area A-8) is sworn to protect and maintain.
  Area W-10: Druidic Holy Place 
  (Ambioc Tor)
  Ambioc Tor is a naturally formed tower of rock 60ft tall and 20ft or so in 
  diameter. It is a place where the Material Plane lies very close to the Elemental 
  Plane of Earth. Anyone within a quarter mile of the tor begins to hear a very 
  low-toned, slightly rhythmic music, like several bass drums whose every beat 
  occupies a half minute rather than a half second. This is the living sound of 
  elemental earth, so close that it reverberates into the Material Plane.
  Area W-11: Druidic Holy Place 
  (Cenaur Yltair)
  Cenaur Yltair is found on a mile-wide saddle of high, rocky land. It is 
  a rock formation shaped like a curving ramp, with its apex 50 feet over 
  the height of the surrounding rocks. If a druid is in the party, the character 
  might know that according to local druidic tradition, a person is sacrificed 
  here once every 7 years by throwing them off the top after a procession 
  up the ramplike rock formation. These sacrifices are usually criminals 
  already sentenced to death in the town of Elet to the north. The town tends 
  to keep this connection and tradition fairly quiet.
  In between the major sacrifices, one of Lurilune’s duties is to come to 
  Cenair Yltair once a year to light a bonfire at the top. It is possible that she 
  might recruit the characters, especially if a druid is among them, to come 
  with her as guards and assistants on the bonfire trip to Cenaur Yltair.
  Coming too close to the area around Cenaur Yltair without a druid is 
  dangerous: a will-o’-wisp guards it (for no apparent reason). The will-
  o’-wisp try to lure people up the formation, causing them to fall over the 
  edge. It darts from behind one rock over to the next, showing its eerie 
  lights to one character after another, trying to entice at least one of them 
  into walking up the Yltair . The will-o’-wisp then leads the way toward 
  (and over) the edge, which ends up giving the other characters a short 
  window of time to attack it. With luck, they manage to kill it before any 
  companions walk off the edge to their doom. The will-o’-wisp leaves the 
  characters alone if they are accompanied by a druid.
  Will-o’-wisp: HD 9; HP 50; AC –8[27]; Atk shock (2d6); Move 
  18; Save 6; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: dancing lights.
  
  193
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  Area W-12: South Camp
  The South Camp is a base camp for the hunters and trappers who live 
  to the south of the mountain pass. It is far enough down and sheltered 
  enough from wind, that it is considered “out of the pass” for purposes 
  of escaping the Ghostwind’s terrible cold. If the characters are starting 
  the adventure by approaching the pass from the south, they can gather 
  information from the hunters and trappers who are camping here in 
  between their expeditions into the wilderness.
  Abbey of Saint Kathelynn
  “Saint” Kathelynn was canonized only 75 years ago, but the tower and 
  outbuildings of the fortified monastery are obviously older than that. It was 
  originally an old border fort, which was consecrated to Saint Kathelynn 
  after her “death.” Despite the fact that Kathelynn is neither saintly nor 
  dead, the yet-to-be-recognized Saint Elys protects the abbey as her own.
  The nature of this protection is warmth and protection from the 
  Ghostwind. If you are running the adventure to include the mystery of 
  Elys and the location of the Staff of the Remorhaz, the relative warmth 
  of the abbey is an important clue, so make sure you stress that the entire 
  abbey is far warmer than the biting mountain air outside the walls. 
  Area A-1: Gates
  Two watchtowers stand with a wooden gate between them, a 
  bowman in each tower. The gate is painted with a red rose, and the 
  towers are crude, providing cover for only one person at a time. 
  The 2 archers are the lay brethren Brother Maru and Brother Tenir. If 
  the two brethren decide the characters aren’t a threat to the abbey, Brother 
  Maru climbs down his ladder and unbars the gates.
  The moment the characters step through the gates and into the abbey’s 
  curtilage, they feel the biting cold of the mountain air lessen. Although 
  the temperature does not rise to the point of complete warmth, it is 
  definitely above the freezing point. Everyone ascribes the divine warmth 
  to Saint Kathelynn’s intervention, since it started only after the abbey was 
  consecrated to her.
  Brothers Tenir and Maru (Ftr4): HP 22, 20; AC 5[14]; Atk 
  longsword (1d8+1) or longbow x2 (1d6+1); Move 12; Save 
  11; CL/XP 4/120; Special: +1 to hit and attack strength 
  bonus.
  Equipment: robe over chainmail, longsword, longbow, 
  20 arrows, wooden holy symbol of a rose (unpainted).
  Area A-2: Abbey Hall
  This is a stone building with shuttered arrow slits for windows 
  and a steeply pitched slate roof. A painting of a red rose has been 
  added over the top of the door, but the red paint has faded to a 
  delicate shade of pink.
  This is the abbey’s main hall, containing a storage room, a kitchen, and a 
  dining hall. Stairs lead up to a second floor that has small bedrooms for up 
  to 8 lay brethren. Six of these are occupied by brothers Maru, Tenir, Odoc, 
  Bernart, Ocrip, and Selmus, and the other 2 are empty. The two empty 
  rooms are used as guestrooms if the abbey has visitors. Brother Odoc, 
  the abbey’s cook (and generally responsible for this entire building), is 
  usually to be found here.
  
  194
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Brother Odoc (Ftr4): HP 23; AC 5[14]; Atk longsword (1d8+1) 
  or longbow x2 (1d6+1); Move 12; Save 11; CL/XP 4/120; 
  Special: +1 to hit and attack strength bonus. 
  Equipment: robe over chainmail, longsword, longbow, 
  20 arrows, wooden holy symbol of a rose (unpainted).
  Area A-3: Stable and Barn
  This stone building smells like a stable, and has doors to match. 
  A rudimentary blacksmith’s forge stands outside under a canvas 
  shade, not capable of much beside horseshoes.
  The stable is used as a barn as well and currently houses 6 mules and 10 
  goats. Brother Bernart is currently here tending the animals, but he doubles as 
  the abbey’s blacksmith and goatherd. He is often away from the abbey, guarding 
  the goats as they graze the meager fodder of the foothills north of the pass.
  Brother Bernart (Ftr4): HP 24; AC 5[14]; Atk longsword (1d8+1) 
  or longbow x2 (1d6+1); Move 12; Save 11; CL/XP 4/120; 
  Special: +1 to hit and attack strength bonus. 
  Equipment: robe over chainmail, longsword, longbow, 
  20 arrows, wooden holy symbol of a rose (unpainted).
  Area A-4: Chapel Tower
  The tower is stone, with a conical roof. The roof is shingled 
  with slates, some of which are missing. A red rose is painted on 
  the door, but the paint seems to be developing small white spots 
  where the red pigment is dropping away.
  In the tower:
  The ground floor of the tower obviously serves as the chapel. 
  Along with lots of candles and a small wooden altar, the 
  chapel’s central feature is an empty sarcophagus. The wooden 
  lid is propped up vertically beside the stone coffin and bears the 
  painting of an armored woman with the symbol of a red rose on 
  her shield. She has a vertical scar on the left side of her face. A 
  flight of stone stairs leads to the upper stories.
  A very old man stands by the sarcophagus, looking at the painting.
  This is Abbot Godefroy, the 85-year-old man in charge of the abbey. 
  He receives little from his superiors, and less in tithes, so the abbey has 
  gone from being in merely poor repair to being in very poor repair over its 
  75 years as a religious institution.
  If the characters look closely at the painting they notice that the paint of the 
  red rose is flaking very slightly and the paint of the facial scar also seems to 
  be suffering the same problem (automatic success if a player announces that 
  the character is checking the painting for detail). The rest of the picture’s paint 
  appears to be fine. If asked about the painting, the abbot admits sheepishly that 
  he painted it himself from memory, decades ago. No doubt he mixed the red 
  paint poorly, he admits; such things happen with pigments. Abbot Godefroy 
  can provide a great deal of information if the characters have begun to get 
  curious about the Staff of the Remorhaz (see “Talking to Abbot Godefroy,” 
  below), but if they are just here to hunt monsters or guard caravans, don’t 
  push the area’s background story on them. They either start looking into the 
  mysteries of the pass or they won’t. If they do, they’ll be back at the abbey 
  asking questions soon enough. If not, Ghostwind Pass offers plenty of 
  adventure and treasure for those who aren’t interested in playing detective.
  The second floor contains Abbot Godefroy’s bedroom and study, 
  together with bedroom-cells for 2 monks. These are currently empty, since 
  the only ordained brother here is the abbot. The third floor contains 6 more 
  monkish cells and some arrow slits. The tower’s conical slate roof can be 
  reached by a trapdoor, but the slates of the roof are in poor condition, and 
  climbing around on them is unsafe, to say the least.
  Talking to Abbot Godefroy
  If the characters appear to be worthy individuals, or rich ones, Abbot 
  Godefroy offers to grant them a benediction to help them in their endeavors. 
  A generous contribution to the abbey would certainly be appreciated, of 
  course (see “Abbot’s Benediction”).
  If the characters are specifically asking about Saint Kathelynn, or the 
  abbey’s history, Abbot Godefroy is happy to talk.
  The Story of Saint Kathelynn
  The sarcophagus is empty because the bones of St. Kathelynn were 
  buried in secret by her five retainers; the characters are invited to pay respect 
  to their memorials in the graveyard. The sarcophagus awaits the day when 
  the saint’s bones are finally returned to their proper place. Anyone who does 
  so, the abbot notes, would be greatly blessed. Not only that, more visitors 
  and pilgrims would also make their way to the abbey to see a real relic. 
  Godefroy was a 10-year-old boy when the twin paladins Elys and 
  Kathelynn undertook their fatal mission to the heights of the pass, along 
  with five loyal retainers. He remembers seeing the saint and her twin sister, 
  but of course he was not actually on the expedition. He wrote down the 
  story as it was told to him by the five retainers who were there (almost), 
  and provides the characters with a copy if they wish.
  And so began the Expedition to kill the Winter Prince, led by 
  Kathelynn, who would be the saint, and her twin sister Elys, her 
  standard-bearer. The twins forged ahead, magically protected 
  from the cold by their gem-topped staff, and the five warriors of 
  their retinue became separated from them in the blizzard. 
  Ahead of them the warriors heard an inhuman scream upon 
  the cold, white winds, and when they made their way forward 
  the harm was done. The body of Sainted Kathelynn lay upon the 
  snow, her skull half crushed. Of Elys, there was no sign at all.
  But there also lay dying the body of the Winter Prince, its evil 
  soul already gathering away from the body in a freezing mist. 
  And the Winter Prince laughed from the lips of that dead man, 
  saying, “I am defeated and I keep my bargains. I shall release the 
  Ghostwinds from the mountain pass except twice a year.” And then 
  the body of the Winter Prince fell dead, and its misty soul blew 
  away on the wind to wait for the evils it would do in the next winter. 
  The warriors brought back the body of the Saint, and buried 
  her in secret. Shortly thereafter they all disappeared one by one, 
  leaving no trace. For killing the Winter Prince and thus banishing 
  the Ghostwinds for most of the year, Kathelynn was canonized as 
  a saint. The mystical way in which she called her loyal followers 
  to her, to serve her as knights where they were needed, serves as 
  obvious confirmation of her sainthood.
  Fading Roses
  The whitening of all the red roses in the abbey, and the brothers’ 
  unconscious preference for leaving their wooden holy symbols 
  unpainted, is a symptom of the abbey’s misconsecration to the 
  “red rose” twin, rather than the “white rose” twin. If the characters 
  use any sort of divination spell that requires a vague answer from 
  the higher powers, the answer to the spell might be pointing out 
  the whitening of the abbey’s red roses. 
  
  195
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  And so began the Expedition to kill the Winter Prince, led 
  by Kathelynn, who would be the saint, and her twin sister 
  Elys, her standard-bearer. The twins forged ahead, magically 
  protected from the cold by their  
  gem-topped staff, and the five warriors of their  
  retinue became separated from them in the blizzard. 
  Ahead of them the warriors heard an inhuman scream upon 
  the cold, white winds, and when they made their way forward 
  the harm was done. The body of Sainted Kathelynn lay upon 
  the snow, her skull half crushed. Of Elys, there was no sign 
  at all.
  But there also lay dying the body of the Winter Prince, its 
  evil soul already gathering away from the body in a freezing 
  mist. And the Winter Prince laughed from the lips of that 
  dead man, saying, “I am defeated, yet I keep my bargains. I 
  shall release the Ghostwinds from the mountain pass except 
  twice a year.” And then the body of the Winter Prince fell 
  dead, and its misty soul blew away on the wind to wait for 
  the evils it would do in the next winter. 
  The warriors brought back the body of the Saint, and buried 
  her in secret. Shortly thereafter, they disappeared one by one, 
  leaving no trace. For killing the Winter Prince and thus 
  banishing the Ghostwinds for most of the year, Kathelynn 
  was canonized as a saint. The mystical way in which she 
  called her loyal followers to her, to serve her as knights where 
  they were needed, serves as obvious confirmation of her 
  sainthood.
  
  196
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Abbot’s Benediction
  This is also where the characters can receive the abbot’s blessing if they 
  donate money or other valuables to the upkeep of the abbey. In particular, 
  the abbot wants to repair the tower’s roof to avoid having slates fall off and 
  possibly hit someone — also it is beginning to leak a bit. He also wants to 
  replace the wooden wall with a stone curtain wall, but this requires many 
  thousands of gold pieces.
  If a character donates 500gp or more (each), they can receive the 
  Abbot’s Ordinary Benediction. The benediction is a powerful blessing 
  from the greater powers of Law — although it is delivered in the name of 
  “Saint” Kathelynn. The blessing allows the character to call on the saint 
  before attempting a task, and to gain divine favor for the attempt. This is 
  reflected by +5 bonus on whatever die roll is being attempted. If the task 
  is one that would just be adjudicated with a judgment call rather than a 
  die roll, the task automatically succeeds unless it is simply impossible. 
  The benediction can be used for a to-hit roll, an attribute check, a spell 
  or weapon’s damage, etc. It can only be used for a saving throw if the 
  character would have time to yell out the saint’s name. The Ordinary 
  Benediction may be granted twice in a character’s lifetime.
  If the character donates 1000gp or more, the Abbot grants a Greater 
  Benediction. The Greater Benediction may be used twice rather than 
  once, and allows the character a +10 bonus for success — but this Greater 
  Benediction may only be received by a character once in the character’s 
  lifetime. They must choose the attempts wisely!
  The Abbot and Druidism
  The abbot stresses very strongly that a character cannot carry the 
  Benediction and a Druid’s Mark at the same time. He is obviously 
  disdainful of the druidic faith, and cautions the characters that they should 
  not trust druids in general or Lurilune in particular. Druidism, he believes, 
  is like an extortion scheme, holding Lawful civilization hostage to the 
  amoral forces of Nature, demanding sacrifices in exchange for good 
  weather and fertile lands. If a druid is in the party who takes offense at this 
  attitude, the abbot quickly shifts into the role of an old man who perhaps 
  rambles too much, that he does not mean to offend, and that he perhaps 
  overstated his opinions. He did not overstate his opinion, of course, but he 
  is not a confrontational person. He specifically offers the druid character 
  the Abbot’s Ordinary Benediction with no donation required.
  Abbot Godefroy (Clr9): HP 30; AC 5[14]; Atk mace (1d6); 
  Move 12; Save 7; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: +2 save bonus vs. 
  paralyzation and poison, banish undead, spells (3/3/3/2/2).
  Equipment: robe over chain mail, mace, wooden holy 
  symbol of a rose (unpainted).
  Ocrip and Selmus (Ftr6): HP 32, 30; AC 3[17]; Atk two-handed 
  sword (1d10+2); Move 12; Save 9; CL/XP 6/400; Special: +2 
  to hit and damage strength bonus.
  Equipment: robe over plate mail, two-handed sword, 
  wooden holy symbol of a rose (unpainted).
  Area A-5: Trappers’ Hall. 
  This building is stone, with a high, peaked roof and a sign 
  above the door showing a white animal fur, and underneath, the 
  words, “Trappers’ Hall.” 
  The Trappers’ Hall is a mixture of an inn, tavern, warehouse, and store. 
  There are 10 rooms on the upper floor, 3 of which are occupied by traders 
  (Auloyne of Elet, Tadric Furman, and Paganne of Troye), and 2 of which 
  are occupied by trappers (Lodo and Ghentry) recently returned from 
  expeditions into the pass. The traders have offices with one-room vaults 
  containing their furs and other goods. They buy pelts from the trappers 
  throughout the hunting season, then retreat back to the town of Elet when 
  the Ghostwinds blow into the pass. They are mostly interested in purchasing 
  furs from the hunters and trappers, but they also do a brisk business selling 
  them the various goods needed for long expeditions into the wilderness.
  Prices offered by the traders are as follows:
  Blood violets: 200 gp/sack
  Goat meat: 5 gp/goat (150lb)
  Giant owl egg: 1000 gp
  Giant lynx pelt: No trader purchases these due to the druidic ban on 
  killing or hurting the giant lynxes of the pass.
  Giant weasel pelt: 200 gp
  Polar bear pelt: 800 gp
  Giant ermine pelt: 1000 gp
  Saber-tooth pelt: 800 gp
  Weretiger pelt: 1000 gp
  Wolf pelt: 5 gp
  Winter wolf pelt: 500 gp
  Area A-6: Privies
  This is a rickety wooden building with a half-moon-shaped 
  hole in the door. 
  The facilities boast wooden seats and an unpleasant smell.
  Area A-7: Graves
  This is a very small graveyard with only six headstones. Each 
  headstone bears a name but no inscription, other than a rose 
  carved into the stone below the name.
  The names on the gravestones are: Tallow Smith, John of Elet, John 
  Tallbones, Griffin Winemaker, Claude Yellowhair, and Benedict the Bald. 
  None of the graves except the one for Griffin Winemaker actually contain 
  bodies; these are memorials for the 5 loyal retainers who disappeared 
  shortly after burying St. Kathelynn’s body in a hidden sanctum. Give no 
  hints or helpful die rolls in this area! If the characters are to get hold of a 
  powerful artifact like the staff, or earn the fame that comes from finding 
  a saint’s lost bones, they should be allowed to earn it fairly, without help.
  The grave carved with the name of Griffin Winemaker contains the 
  lead-shielded bronze casket of St. Elys (a body everyone believes to 
  have belonged to Kathelynn). In the casket along with the true saint’s 
  bones is the wooden stave of the Staff of the Remorhaz (New Magic 
  Item Appendix). The staff is bereft of its tip, the multi-faceted eye of the 
  remorhaz. The half-artifact conveys no benefits to a wielder unless it is 
  joined with its other half. It does, however, exert enough magical force 
  that it warms the entire area of the abbey. Despite the vast magical power 
  of the artifact, it is shielded from all detection magic other than the direct 
  intercession of a deity. This is no magical trinket with a distinct aura: It is 
  ancient power that blends into the power of the earth itself, unable to be 
  distinguished unless a detection spell is cast directly upon it.
  Area A-8: Circle of the Druidess
  A cottage made of stone and roofed with slates is surrounded by 
  a circle of widely spaced stones, each of them about five feet tall 
  and carved with runes. Green grass grows within the stone circle, 
  and at the center of the field stands a stone altar. A giant lynx, the 
  size of a wolf, sits in the path at the entrance to the strange garden.
  
  197
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  This is the cottage of Lurilune, the druidic custodian of the Ghostwind 
  Pass. Her task here, as she sees it, is fairly simple: She maintains the various 
  small druidic shrines in the pass; makes sure the visiting hunters do not 
  abuse the bounteous hunting in the area; and looks for ways to destroy 
  the Mountain Queen, whom Lurilune considers to be completely outside 
  the natural order. She knows and constantly reminds herself not to seek a 
  direct confrontation with the monstrosity that Kathelynn has become, but 
  if she makes contact with a strong-enough looking group of adventurers 
  she would definitely seek ways to point them toward the lamia. She will 
  not risk herself, the guardian of the pass, by accompanying them, but she 
  gives each of them a Druidic Mark if they swear to use it in an attack on the 
  Manor of the Mountain Queen. She does not know the lamia’s true identity, 
  simply referring to her as the Mountain Queen, but she does know that the 
  Mountain Queen has the lower body of a white tigress. Having the secretive 
  nature common to many druids, she only shares this information if the 
  characters are definitely on a quest to attack the manor.
  The Druidic Mark is a pattern that Lurilune traces upon a person’s face 
  before they venture into the pass, and most of the hunters would not dream 
  of entering the pass without the mark. To get the druidic mark, one must 
  make some sort of sacrifice on the altar in the center of Lurilune’s green 
  freehold. Only a few types of things are acceptable sacrifices:
   
  Acceptable 
  Not Accepted
  Gems or precious stone 
  (100gp minimum)
  Gold, silver, copper
  Gems or precious stone (500 
  gp minimum)**
  Blood (1 hit point’s worth)*
  Someone else’s blood
  Blood (5 hit points’ worth)**
  Pelt of a wolf, wolverine, or 
  giant weasel
  Herbivore pelts or a lynx pelt
  Heart of a peryton** or pelt 
  of a saber-tooth**
  Iron or steel
  * A blood sacrifice reduces the character’s max hit points 
  by 1 (or 5) points for as long as the character is in the pass. 
  Even a restoration spell will not return the lost hit points 
  until the character enters the abbey, the south camp, or 
  otherwise leaves the pass into the lowlands.
  **These are the “greater sacrifices” described in more 
  detail below. 
  A normal sacrifice “allows” the recipient to hunt the giant ermines that 
  live in the pass. Anyone without the mark who kills more than one of the 
  giant ermines immediately suffers from a curse that causes a weakness of 
  the joints (–1 on all attacks and damage rolls). Leaving the pass abates the 
  weakness, but it returns if the victim enters the pass a second time without 
  having the curse removed by Lurilune or by a spell. Each additional giant 
  ermine killed without the Druid’s Mark worsens the curse, which becomes 
  a penalty of –2, then –3, etc.
  Making one of the greater sacrifices (5 hit points or a peryton heart) confers 
  a temporary druidic power against death itself. If the bearer of the Greater 
  Druidic Mark takes a mortal wound (would be brought to 0 hit points or 
  below), the mark draws upon the natural pattern of sacred sites in the pass to 
  bring the character back to 1 hit point. When this happens, the Greater Druidic 
  Mark also disappears from the character’s face. The mark disappears if the 
  character leaves the pass, but reappears upon return (until its power is used). 
  There are some restrictions on the existence of the mark. It disappears 
  permanently if the character bearing the mark sets foot in the chapel 
  tower of the abbey. Similarly, it is not possible to have both the Abbot’s 
  Blessing and the Druidic Mark. Moreover, the Druidic Mark immediately 
  disappears if the character kills one of the giant lynxes in the pass. These 
  are Lurilune’s eyes and ears, sacred to the druidic powers of the area.
  Lurilune (Drd9): HP 28; AC 7[12]; Atk sickle-shaped sword 
  (1d6); Move 12; Save 7; AL N; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: +2 
  save bonus vs. fire, shape change, immunity to fey charms, 
  spells (4/3/3/2).
  Equipment: leather armor, sickle-shaped sword, 
  mistletoe.
  Treasure: The inside of Lurilune’s cottage is carpeted with woven 
  green rugs, and several books are stacked on a writing desk. A bedroom 
  in a back room contains an unnaturally soft mattress stuffed with fragrant 
  grasses, and a wardrobe contains white druidic robes. The books all contain 
  complex astrological charts, weather predictions, records of prophetic bird 
  migrations, and instructions for all kinds of auguries and divinations. All 
  told they are worth 10,000gp, but if they are sold, eventually the druids 
  find out that one of their own has been robbed, and they begin seeking the 
  thieves (or, perhaps, murderers).
  A small chest (unlocked) contains 40 small emeralds (500gp) in a 
  pouch. If anyone departs the cottage with these emeralds and does not 
  leave one of the stones behind, a 12HD earth elemental is released from 
  imprisonment beneath the stone circle — the precious stones are part of 
  the binding. It attacks ferociously to retrieve the emeralds and thus escape.
  Elemental, Earth: HD 12; HP 60; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (4d8); 
  Move 6; Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, tear down stonework. 
  Manor of 
  the Mountain Queen
  The Mountain Queen’s minions are tracked on a monster roster since 
  the battle for the manor most likely involves monsters moving around 
  rather than staying in one place. 
  Approaching the Manor
  A huge manor house is built into the sloping side of a hill, with three 
  levels. The roof is steeply pitched and made of slate shingles.
  Being Spotted
  A sentry in Area H-28 keeps watch over the front of the building, 
  waiting for the sort of visitors who walk up to front doors.
  The Roof
  It is not hard to get onto the roof of the manor, but getting through the 
  heavy slate shingles is virtually impossible to do quietly at the Referee’s 
  discretion.
  If a character with thieving skills succeeds, then he/she gets inside, 
  possibly in a loft, possibly onto nothing more substantial than one of the 
  roof beams 40ft above the floor (in the low or middle tiers) or 20ft above 
  the floor in the top tier.
  Unless the characters want to fight a pitched battle with all of the 
  Manor’s inhabitants at one time, they will immediately realize that making 
  a hole in the roof is not a way to get in quietly. 
  Arrow Slits
  In the front wall of the manor are 4 arrowslits, two of them high up on 
  the first tier and two of them high up on the second tier. The arrow slits on 
  the second tier have line of sight on anyone on the roof or the bottom tier.
  Wandering Monsters
  Wandering monsters are only an issue in the manor if the characters try 
  to stop in one place for a long time (or set an ambush). If the characters 
  
  198
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  
  199
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  stay in one place for more than an hour, or set up in a corridor, roll on the 
  following table once every 30 minutes.
  Roll 
  1d20
  Encounter
  1–10
  No Encounter
  11–12
  1d2+1 bugbears (Area H-2)
  13
  Gaston the Cook (Area H-7)
  14
  1 weretiger and 1 saber-toothed tiger
  15
  1d2 saber-toothed tigers
  16
  Glaivorn (Area H-13) and 1d3 bugbears
  17
  Henri Tharnac and 1 weretiger (Area H-17)
  18
  Serz and Cloyaun, human servants (Area H-18)
  19
  Martin of Becqueril (Area H-19)
  20
  Kathelynn and 1 weretiger
  All is Not as it Seems
  Even if they are being attacked, the weretigers remain human for 
  one or two rounds, trying to convince intruders that the manor is a 
  normal settlement that just happens to have saber-toothed tigers and 
  bugbears wandering around. The charmed slaves and Henri back this up 
  convincingly. Gaston the Cook tries to lie, but it won’t be very convincing. 
  The weretigers, of course, try to keep the characters away from Gaston, 
  introduce them to an illusion of Kathelynn, and get them to sleep in one of 
  the guestrooms. If the characters are separated, Kathelynn tries to charm 
  and enslave them one at a time.
  The weretigers are usually in human form, even when they are alone. 
  Area H-1: Main Gate
  This solid-looking wooden door has a red rose painted on it. A 
  slot through the door at eye level can be opened from within to 
  look at visitors.
  During the day, the door stands open, allowing the saber-toothed tigers 
  to come and go as they please. At night, the door is barred (and a bugbear 
  stands watch behind it in the murder hall, see below).
  Area H-2: Murder Hall
  This stone room has arrow slits pointing into it from the room beyond 
  (the Covered Court, Area H-3), and a stout door that obviously leads into 
  the main part of the manor.
  If it is nighttime, describe the bugbear (see below)
  As with the main gate, during the day this door is open to the rest of the 
  hall so the cats can go in and out. At night, a bugbear stands guard here 
  with a horn to summon reinforcements if the manor comes under attack. 
  Bugbear: HD 3+1; HP 16; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (2d4) or 
  morningstar (1d8+1); Move 9; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; 
  Special: surprise opponents (1-3 on d6).
  
  200
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Area H-3: The Great Covered Court
  This room comprises almost all of the castle’s lowest tier. The 
  ceiling is steeply pitched overhead, supported with wooden 
  beams and stone buttresses. There appears to be a walled-in loft 
  under the center of the roof, surrounded by a cobweb-like array 
  of heavy beams and struts. This room has a number of strange 
  features: balconies, arched opening placed high up the wall, 
  a ramp and drawbridge leading to the next tier of the fortified 
  manor, stairs that lead up to the loft area, a wall with arrow slits 
  pointing into the hall rather than outward, and some large double 
  doors. It is a lot to take in at first glance.
  A. Balcony (10ft)
  A sturdy balcony made of stone with no railing is mounted 10ft 
  above the floor.
  The tigers can only manage vertical leaps of 10ft, so each of the leaping-
  holes has a balcony 10ft below it that allows the tigers to clear the upward 
  distance in two jumps. They can pounce downward from the leaping-hole 
  all the way to the floor in a single leap, however. One of the saber-tooths 
  watches the balcony through the leaping-hole (see Area H-11, the Tiger 
  Run).
  B. Leaping-Hole.
  This is an arch-shaped opening in the wall, 20ft from the floor. 
  This presumably leads up to the second tier of the building.
  Several leaping-holes are in the manor; they are designed to let the great 
  cats pounce in and out of a room through a door humanoids can’t reach. 
  All of the leaping-holes have an adjacent balcony, as described above, 
  to reduce the required vertical leap. One of the saber-tooths can come 
  blasting down and out of the leaping-holes at full speed for an automatic 
  raking-attack as well as front claws and bite. A quarter ton of fast moving 
  saber-toothed tiger also knocks down anything smaller than a hill giant, 
  and they don’t need a to-hit roll for the impact (they have to roll to hit 
  normally for the claws and bite, of course).
  As described in A above, one of the saber-tooths watches the balcony 
  and can pounce directly to it if it sees prey.
  Tiger, Sabre-Tooth: HD 7; HP 38; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws 
  (1d4+1), bite (2d6); Move 12 (swim 6); Save 10; AL N; CL/XP 
  8/800; Special: rear claws (if both front claws hit, two more 
  attacks from back).
  C. Drawbridge and Ramp
  A wide stone ramp leads up 20ft to a spot roughly 10ft from 
  (and directly across from) one of the high-set archways. A 
  drawbridge spans the gap and can clearly be opened to allow 
  access to the second tier or closed to block the archway.
  The drawbridge is usually down, allowing the bugbears and guests 
  to move freely about the manor. If Kathelynn decides that she faces a 
  measurable threat, she has this drawbridge pulled up to block the way into 
  the higher tier.
  D. Stairs to Loft
  A narrow flight of stone stairs is flush against the south wall.
  These stairs are too narrow for anything other than walking single file 
  (and only just wide enough for one of the sabre-tooths). They lead to Area 
  H-28, a storage loft.
  Area H-4: Tiger-Proof Stable
  The large double doors, which seem extremely powerful for 
  internal doors, even in a castle, lead into a closed-in stable. 
  Two mules watch you placidly from inside their stalls, which is 
  unsurprising. The third animal is most definitely unusual, though: 
  it is a chestnut-brown warhorse, the sort that would ordinarily be 
  found in the possession of a knight or noble. The warhorse is 
  obviously much more nervous than the mules.
  The design requirements of a stable in a castle where weretigers and 
  sabre-toothed tigers roam free are different than the requirements for 
  a normal stable. The mounts only come out when the cats are safely 
  occupied in other rooms, and make a beeline for the outside. 
  The warhorse belongs to Martin of Becqueril, the son of Baron Jauntir 
  of Becqueril, who is willing to pay a considerable ransom (1000gp) for 
  the return of his missing son. Martin has been enthralled by the lamia (see 
  Area H-19).
  Area H-5: Inside Bastion
  This closed-in space can be entered only from one of the high-
  set holes in the wall. It contains two arrow slits that would allow 
  an archer to loose arrows from inside the room.
  If the characters announced their arrival by knocking on the 
  door, or have given the entire manor time to prepare for combat, 
  then Kathelynn the lamia is in this area to watch the characters in 
  the covered courtyard (Area H-3). If endangered at all, she leaps 
  out of the room and into the kitchen above (Area H-7). She won’t 
  necessarily attack; visitors might be bringing messages or interesting 
  news of the outside world.
  From here, she might possibly even speak to the characters since the 
  arrow slit conceals the fact that her lower body is that of a white tiger. If 
  she decides that her best course of action is to impersonate a human, she 
  plays the trick here.
  Area H-6: Great Hall
  The walls of this room are hung with tapestries depicting sabre-
  tooth tigers stalking and killing humans in the snowy crags and 
  rifts of a mountainous region. Two fireplaces blaze with the 
  crackle of pine wood, and three great wooden tables are set out 
  with embroidered cloths and tableware.
  Two confused-looking humans holding mops and buckets seem 
  to have been working in the room.
  If applicable, describe the bugbears to the players (see below)
  
  201
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  This is the great hall where the denizens of the manor eat their meals and 
  socialize, and also where visitors are brought to meet Kathelynn. There are 
  always 2 bugbears in the hall, if enough are left on the roster, and 2 human 
  slaves. The slaves are Caurien (normal human, HP 5) and Jirral (normal 
  human, HP 6), both of them charmed by the lamia’s magic. They won’t help 
  the bugbears or the characters if a fight occurs, but if Kathelynn or one of the 
  weretigers is here and gives an order, they follow it. They won’t follow the 
  characters or act as lookouts; they have been told to mop the floor, and they 
  aren’t going to let themselves be sidetracked from that task.
  If the characters check out the ceiling at all, they see a wooden loft running 
  north/south over the eastern half of the room. It has wooden walls and no 
  entrance to it is visible (the stairs to the loft are in the kitchen, Area H-7).
  Bugbear (2): HD 3+1; HP 16, 18; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (2d4) or 
  morningstar (1d8+1); Move 9; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; 
  Special: surprise opponents (1-3 on d6).
  Treasure: The tapestries are worth a total of 100gp and weigh 500 
  pounds altogether. The embroidered cloths on the tables are worth a total 
  of 200gp. The tableware is of no particular value.
  Area H-7: Kitchen
  This room is obviously the kitchen. A massive fireplace stands 
  almost in the center of the room. Its chimney is a stone column 
  that rises to the roof above. A fat man wearing a chef’s hat is 
  chopping vegetables at a large table in the center of the room, 
  apparently preparing the stuffing for a roast goat, which also lies 
  on the table.
  In addition to these basics, the room has several entrances and 
  exits:
  • A flight of stairs leads to a loft overhead.
  • Doors are in the north and south walls. 
  • An archway in the west wall leads to another room on the 
  same level as the kitchen. 
  • An archway in the south wall drops down to the level below.
  • An archway in the north wall enters the room 20 feet above 
  floor level. A ramp leads up along the east wall, behind the 
  chimney, and ends 10 feet away from, and 10 feet below, the 
  north archway.
  The cook at the table is Gaston Payis, a normal human (HP 4, butcher 
  knife, 5gp). He is a tremendously good cook; the weretigers kidnapped 
  him from the town of Elet and brought him here specifically to become the 
  manor’s cook. Unlike the lamia’s other slaves, Gaston is not charmed; the 
  monsters decided it might somehow inhibit his cooking skills. He is utterly 
  terrified of the other denizens of the manor, but he knows he couldn’t possibly 
  survive in the wilderness of the Ghostwind Pass long enough to get away. He 
  may be hesitant to help the adventurers — since they might fail — unless it 
  is clear that they are going to succeed in killing the lamia and the weretigers. 
  Because if they fail, what then for Gaston Payis, who betrayed the tigers?
  Various kitchen supplies are kept in boxes under the table, including 
  knives, pots, pans, buckets, and the like.
  Area H-8: Storage Room
  This room contains crates and sacks on the floor, and several 
  shelves on the walls contain earthenware pots and wine bottles.
  This is the kitchen’s storage room. It has flour, sugar, herbs, cheese, 
  and various other ingredients found in kitchens. Most of the wine is poor 
  quality (total 300gp) with the exception of 5 bottles of Chateau d’Ambre, 
  which can be sold for as much as 200gp each in a large enough town. 
  One of the crates has a piece of parchment nailed to it, which reads: “For 
  delivery, Henri Tharnac of Elet.” (Henri is a merchant who deals with the 
  manor, see Area H-17).
  Area H-9: Cook’s Quarters
  This modest room contains a bed, table, chair, and an unlocked 
  wooden cabinet.
  This is Gaston the cook’s room (see Area H-7). Nothing is here to 
  interest the adventurers.
  Area H-10: Foyer
  This room’s largest feature is another ramp-and-drawbridge 
  arrangement like the one on the lower tier. It is on the north 
  wall and obviously leads to the manor’s third tier. A balcony is 
  on either side of the drawbridge, 10ft above the floor, and the 
  ramp/archway are 20 feet above the floor. A wooden-walled loft 
  runs north/south over the middle of the room, but has no visible 
  entrances or exits.
  Most of the area is bare stone, but a little island of luxury sits in 
  the eastern part of the room. Three armchairs are grouped around 
  a delicate wooden table on a flower-patterned carpet.
  There is also some sort of decorative pool in the western part 
  of the room.
  A gentleman is sitting in one of the armchairs, unless the alarm has 
  already been sounded. This is Claude, one of Kathelynn’s weretiger 
  
  202
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  sons. He wears a black robe and sandals; he looks a bit like a  
  monk, but wears no holy symbol. The robe is what Claude always 
  wears; it keeps him from tearing his clothes when he transforms into 
  a tiger.
  If the characters are trying to trick their way in, Claude is not easily 
  fooled because he is usually the one of the three brothers whom Kathelynn 
  sends to the town of Elet on errands such as kidnapping people or dealing 
  with merchants.
  Indeed, the flowers on the carpet are red roses, if anyone should 
  ask. Kathelynn is as obsessed with her heraldic symbols as any 
  knight.
  The pool in the western part of the room is not more than 3 inches deep. 
  It has a shallow, concave bottom that appears to be coated in silver making 
  the pool so reflective that it is almost a perfect mirror. This pool is actually 
  a scrying bowl Kathelynn can use to find the location of intruders in her 
  manor, and direct her defenses against them.
  If the manor is widely alerted to the presence of armed strangers, 
  the monsters’ fighting contingent assembles here (see the roster for 
  details).
  Claude, Weretiger: HD 6; HP 36; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), 
  bite (1d10); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: 
  lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Area H-11: Tiger Run
  The south end of this hallway has a jumping-hole leading 
  down to the manor’s lowest tier, and the north end has a 
  jumping-hole 20ft up the wall leading to the top tier, with a 
  balcony below it.
  Unless the sabre-tooths are all killed by the time the characters get here, 
  one of the sabre-tooths is sitting here watching the leaping-hole, like a cat 
  outside a mouse hole.
  The saber-tooth is one of those on the general roster.
  Area H-12: Bugbear Quarters
  Ten very big beds are topped with shaggy sleeping furs in this 
  rather rancid-smelling room. A substantial wooden table is in 
  the middle of the room, looking like it has taken a beating and 
  been repaired several times. A door is in the far wall, with a knife 
  sticking in it.
  This is the room where the manor’s bugbears sleep. If the characters get 
  this far, assume that all of the bugbears on the roster (with the exception 
  of the ones that have set locations on the map key) are here. A burlap 
  sack is underneath each of the beds, but these are used for non-valuables, 
  and the characters find nothing in them but dirty clothes, bones, and the 
  occasional mouse.
  If any combat happens in this room, Glaivorn the Overseer (Area 
  H-13) joins the fight in 1d3 rounds.
  Bugbear: HD 3+1; AC 5[14]; Atk bite (2d4) or morningstar 
  (1d8+1); Move 9; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 4/120; Special: 
  surprise opponents (1-3 on d6).
  Treasure: Other than what they carry in their pouches, all of  
  the bugbears keep their treasure in Glaivorn’s chest in individual 
  bags.
  Area H-13: Bugbear Overseer
  This room is a bedroom with a table, bed, sturdy chair, and 
  a wicker basket filled with clothes. A large, padlocked wooden 
  chest is in the northeast corner of the room, with a smaller iron 
  box beside it.
  This room belongs to Glaivorn, the bugbear who oversees all menial 
  work done in the manor. He wears a black tunic embroidered with 
  Kathelynn’s red rose symbol. The large wooden chest contains 10 leather 
  bags, each containing the treasure of one of the bugbears.
  Bag #1: 15gp, gold earring with pearl (100gp), 2 dwarf-bone dice
  Bag #2: 22gp, 28sp, 119cp, cat skull with “bad kitty” written on it in 
  Goblin, iron ring with quartz stone (1sp).
  Bag #3: 169gp and a hand mirror (10gp)
  Bag #4: 56gp, 260sp, 2cp, and a set of ivory false teeth (25gp)
  Bag #5: 9gp, 28sp, bracelet of wooden thorns (worthless), someone’s 
  finger bone, crushed-velvet hat (1gp) with broken feather, polished 
  obsidian fish (50gp)
  Bag #6: large sewing needle, thread, pincers, thumbscrews, and a large 
  piece of amber containing a preserved lizard (200gp)
  Bag #7: 16gp, 189sp, 295cp, 1 wad of chewing tobacco (1cp)
  Bag #8: 6gp, 505sp, 2 rolled-up ermine furs (normal-size and lower 
  quality, at 100gp each)
  Bag #9: 35gp, 69sp, 12cp
  Bag #10: 8gp, wax candle (1sp)
  Glaivorn’s own treasure is in the smaller iron box. It is locked and has a 
  poison needle trap on the catch (save or die). The box contains 10gp, 16sp, 
  31cp, and a silver brooch inlaid with jade and garnet (300gp).
  Glaivorn, Bugbear Leader: HD 5+1; HP 30; AC 5[14]; Atk bite 
  (2d4) or morningstar (1d8+1); Move 9; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 
  6/400; Special: surprise opponents (1-3 on d6).
  Equipment: morningstar, key to iron box in Area H-13.
  Area H-14: Central Hall
  This broad stone hallway is accessed by one of the odd ramp-and-
  drawbridge arrangements, and has doors on the west and east walls.
  What is not apparent in this room is the concealed trapdoor in the 
  ceiling (treat as a secret door). If Kathelynn is cornered in her rooms and 
  tries to circle around the characters through her escape loft (Area H-30 is 
  above the trapdoor), this is where she jumps down.
  Area H-15: Tiger Den
  This large room contains boulders, apparently brought into the 
  manor from the outside. They range from 4–6 feet in diameter. 
  The remains of a goat, not much more than bones, are widely 
  scattered about, and fresh blood is splashed on one of the larger 
  rocks. A door is in the room’s north wall.
  This is the playroom for Kathelynn’s grey saber-toothed tigers, which, 
  along with the weretigers, she refers to as her “children.” If the characters 
  reach this room, assume that all the sabre-tooth tigers remaining on the 
  roster are in here.
  
  203
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  Tiger, Sabre-Tooth: HD 7; HP 40; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws 
  (1d4+1), bite (2d6); Move 12 (swim 6); Save 10; AL N; CL/XP 
  8/800; Special: rear claws (if both front claws hit, two more 
  attacks from back).
  The door in the north wall is locked.
  Area H-16: Weretiger Room 
  (Thibault)
  This room is luxuriously furnished, with a velvet-draped 
  feather bed, a locked iron chest, several thick rugs covering the 
  floor, and woolen tapestries on the walls.
  Thibault (Ti-bawlt) is Kathelynn’s youngest son, a white weretiger. 
  Unless the characters launched a frontal assault on the manor, they 
  most likely encounter Thibault first in his human form. He is a tall and 
  handsome man with a long ponytail, long mustaches, and bushy eyebrows, 
  all extremely blond. His yellow eyes are a bit disconcerting, but they have 
  normal, round pupils rather than a cat’s.
  Thibault, Weretiger: HD 6; HP 40; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), 
  bite (1d10); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: 
  lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Treasure: The velvet bedclothes are worth 200gp, and the rugs (weighing 
  300 pounds in total) are worth 200gp. The locked iron box contains a leather 
  bag with a drawstring, with 56gp, 229sp, 3 pearls (300gp).
  Area H-17: Guestroom  
  (Henri Tharnac)
  This room contains a featherbed with a quilt. There is a 
  nightstand with a candlestick on it, and a backpack on the floor. 
  A man sits at a small writing desk.
  This man is Henri Tharnac, a merchant from Elet. He visits the manor when 
  it is not snowed in to deliver supplies and to take orders for the next delivery. 
  Henri is quite aware of his customers’ monstrous nature, but he allows himself 
  to assume that they do not actually kill people. After all, he delivers large 
  quantities of salted meat and even drives small herds of goats here.
  Henri Tharnac (Ftr6): HP 36; AC 3[17]; Atk two-handed sword 
  (1d10+2) or longbow x2 (1d6+2); Move 12; Save 9; CL/XP 
  6/400; Special: +2 to hit and damage strength bonus.
  Equipment: plate mail, two-handed sword, longbow, 
  20 arrows
  Area H-18: Slaves’ Quarters
  Two humans are asleep on straw pallets in this room, which 
  contains two empty pallets as well. The people are dressed in 
  clothing that was once of extremely fine quality but is now 
  stained and torn.
  Four of the lamia’s human slaves share this room as their sleeping 
  quarters. Two of them, Caurien and Jirral, are in the Great Hall (Area 
  H-6). The other two, Serz (normal human, HP 4) and Cloyaun (normal 
  human, HP 2), are the ones currently in the room. Serz and Cloyaun 
  were originally courtiers in the service of Martin of Becqueril, but, like 
  Martin, they are now under the lamia’s spell and are her willing servants. 
  They have been put to cleaning and other menial tasks, but they bear no 
  resentment at all. Serz is quite pudgy, but Cloyaun looks like he is half-
  starved. They actually receive different quantities of food; Serz is being 
  fattened up for slaughter.
  Area H-19: Martin’s Guestroom
  This room is furnished with a cot, a wooden chest, and a small 
  writing table. A peg on the wall holds an expensive green cloak 
  of boiled wool, trimmed with what looks like fox fur.
  A dreamy-eyed man sits at the table, clad in the fine clothes of 
  a nobleman.
  This room belongs to the Mountain Queen’s “guest,” Martin of 
  Becqueril (normal human, HP 5). Martin is the heir to a barony and was 
  hunting with three of his courtiers in the pass when Kathelynn came upon 
  them. Returning with the weretigers, she made short work of kidnapping 
  all of them and returning to the manor with the unfortunate captives. One 
  of the courtiers is now dead and eaten; the other three, including Martin, 
  are alive but have been drained of all their wisdom and are Kathelynn’s 
  slaves.
  It is not readily apparent that Martin has been mentally emptied out. 
  He tends to be excitable and babble on about nothing, unless Kathelynn 
  is nearby, in which case he immediately becomes completely alert, 
  hanging on her every word. A substantial reward is offered for his 
  return, which is paid by the Baron of Becqueril, and the next mission 
  offered to the characters might be to help get Martin back to his former 
  mental condition (which was never particularly remarkable, but at least 
  involved free will).
  Area H-20: Empty Guestrooms
  This room contains a comfortable featherbed and a wooden 
  chest. A thick wool carpet covers the floor, and the walls are hung 
  with heavy tapestries for warmth.
  These rooms are given to Kathelynn’s guests. The locks work properly, 
  and the guest is given the key. Even if the door is locked from the outside 
  (using another key), the guest can unlock it again from the inside.
  Area H-21: Treacherous Guestroom
  This room contains a comfortable featherbed and a wooden 
  chest. A thick wool carpet covers the floor, and the walls are hung 
  with heavy tapestries for warmth.
  This room is given to guests that might cause problems in some way, 
  or guests that need to be gotten rid of. As with the other guestrooms, the 
  guest is given a key. However, the lock in this door is unusual; it can be 
  locked from the outside with a different key, and if this is done, the guest 
  key cannot unlock it from the inside. Thus, a guest can be neatly confined 
  in the room while any companions are dealt with.
  
  204
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  Area H-22:  
  The Unpleasant Minstrel
  This room contains a bed, a chest, a small table, and a chair. A 
  lute and a small set of bagpipes hang on wall pegs. 
  A man dressed in a multicolored tunic is reading through 
  several parchment sheets that appear to be musical notations.
  The manor’s minstrel, Cap Jongleur, lives in this room for the time 
  being. He is not charmed by the lamia, nor does he have any particular 
  problem living with a clan of psychotic monsters. He is confident that if 
  he ever needs to escape, it will make a great story to turn into a ballad. 
  It doesn’t occur to him that he might not survive to the end of the ballad.
  Cap Jongleur, Minstrel (Thf6): HP 18; AC 6[13]; Atk short 
  sword (1d6); Move 12; Save 10; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: 
  +2 save bonus vs. magical devices, backstab (x3), read 
  languages (80%), thieving skills.
  Thieving Skills: Climb 90%, Tasks/Traps 40%, Hear 4 in 6, 
  Hide 35%, Silent 45%, Locks 35%.
  Equipment: lute, bagpipes, chest containing 3 sets 
  of clothes, lady’s handkerchief (a favor from his 
  days singing in Elet), another lady’s handkerchief, 
  embroidered with a red rose (a token from Kathelynn), 
  a golden bracelet (50gp), a belt pouch containing 
  25gp, and a backpack containing 5 days’ rations, a 
  winter cloak, fur-lined boots, a half-gallon waterskin 
  (full), and a short sword.
  Area H-23: Empty Guestroom
  This room contains a comfortable featherbed and a wooden 
  chest. A thick wool carpet covers the floor, and the walls are hung 
  with heavy tapestries for warmth.
  This was the guestroom assigned to a huntsman named Ormant 
  Ulute who was recently killed, cooked, and served to the monsters and 
  Kathelynn’s charmed slaves (Martin, etc.). Ormant happened upon Cap 
  Jongleur (Area H-22) playing bagpipes by a nearby mountain stream, and 
  Cap invited him back to the manor for dinner. Kathelynn was so amused 
  by the prank that she gave the minstrel a token of affection, deciding to 
  keep him alive for at least another month. Ormant, on the other hand, was 
  served for dinner after a couple of days as an honored guest.
  Ormant suspected something was not quite right in the manor and wrote 
  a note, which he hid under the mattress along with a dagger (hoping that the 
  next person to sleep in the bed would feel the dagger and find the hidden note).
  The note reads: 
  “I fear I have fallen in among monsters. Do not trust the singer. Run. 
  Have the abbot sing prayers for me, if you find this and live. Signed, 
  Ormant Ulute.”
  Area H-24: Stairs to Dungeon
  A stone staircase leads down.
  This staircase leads to the cellars (Areas H-31 through H-36), first 
  arriving in Area H-31, the dungeon cellar.
  Area H-25: Lamia’s Antechamber
  The walls of this room are bare stone with only two decorations. 
  The first is a suit of armor carrying a shield in one corner. The 
  second is a large basin in the center of the room, mounted on a 
  4ft stone pedestal.
  The suit of armor is plate mail, and the shield, which bears the sigil 
  of a red rose, is +1. The red paint on the rose is still wet, and remains so 
  until it is removed, leaving a white rose beneath. This is the shield of St. 
  Elys, which Kathelynn grabbed by accident when she fled the scene of her 
  sister’s murder.
  The basin contains water, and its bottom is coated with silver, making 
  it highly reflective. This is Kathelynn’s scrying basin. It is not inherently 
  magical, but it provides a place for the lamia to “see” what her magic 
  reveals.
  Area H-26: Lamia’s Bedchamber
  The walls of this room are lurid with blood-red tapestries, and 
  the floor is painted red as well. A four-poster bed is against the 
  southern wall, with closed curtains that look uncomfortably like 
  crimson-dyed human skins stitched together. A high loft is placed 
  above and just to the south of the room, but no ladder or stair leads 
  up to it. The strangest feature of the room, though, is the east wall, 
  which is entirely covered by a blooming rosebush: tangled thorns, 
  red flowers, and green leaves grow more than a foot deep all the 
  way to the ceiling. A door leads through this hedge, but at first 
  glance it looks as if it is covered in thorns as well.
  A window in the north wall looks out over the mountainous 
  scenery behind the manor.
  This is the lamia’s bedchamber. If the manor is taken entirely by 
  surprise, she is found here. It is also the room to which she flees if a battle 
  is going badly, because the loft has a secret exit from the roof (see Area 
  H-30, the Escape Loft).
  Kathelynn has the torso of a human female, but the lower body of a 
  white tiger. Her face looks human, although her canine teeth are quite 
  long and the irises of her eyes are a golden color. She has a vertical scar 
  on the left side of her face. If the characters have seen the painting of St. 
  Kathelynn in the abbey’s chapel, the resemblance is remarkable and they 
  notice it immediately.
  The rosebush over the east wall is real, although it is created by magic. 
  The thorns drip with poison (save or die), and the thick branches regenerate 
  almost instantly. See the preface to Area H-27 for more information about 
  the rosebush.
  There is no window in the north wall, as the characters might know if 
  they scouted the outside of the manor. It is an illusion permanently placed 
  to conceal a niche in the wall that contains a key. Anyone touching the 
  window immediately detects the illusion, although it does not disappear 
  when detected. If the character feels around behind the “window,” the 
  niche is found easily, and the key recovered.
  The lamia does not keep her treasure in this room, but a longbow and 
  an “escape kit” are in a leather bag next to the bed. The backpack contains 
  a longbow and quiver with 20 arrows, a heavy winter coat, a waterskin, 
  rations for 5 days, a pouch with 30gp and 3 emeralds worth 1000gp each 
  Kathelynn the Lamia: HD 9; HP 63; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 claws (1d6 
  plus wisdom drain); Move 24; Save 6; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; 
  Special: touch drains 1 point of wisdom. (slave at 3 or lower). 
  (Monstrosities 284)
  Magical Abilities: 1/day—charm person, charm 
  
  205
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  monster, suggestion. 
  Equipment: chain mail, the Eye of Othroäta (a very 
  large, multi-faceted gem worn around Kathelynn’s 
  neck on a detachable gold chain), longbow and 20 
  arrows, pouch containing 30gp and the key to Area 
  H-25.
  Area H-27: Treasure Room
  This door to the treasure room is powerfully protected with magic 
  wards, the source of the rosebush that covers the entire wall. The door has 
  no latch or knob; its only feature is a bas-relief rose carved in the middle 
  of it. Rose branches, covered in inch-long thorns, radiate outward from the 
  carving and then thicken to cover the wall. It is not visible from here, but 
  the vinelike branches penetrate the walls at the corners and top, forming 
  this wall and a cage around the interior of the room.
  The rose has a round hole in the middle, an inch in diameter, creating 
  a tunnel that goes about 2 inches into the door, and ends in a small round 
  chamber with a hole in the bottom (thus, an item less than an inch across 
  can be pushed into the chamber, and would then drop through the hole). 
  The Eye of Othroäta, currently worn around Kathelynn’s neck on a 
  detachable gold chain, must be pushed in here to drop into the treasure 
  room on the other side. The Eye cannot be dropped in on a string and 
  fished back out; it must be dropped all the way through the door.
  Once the Eye is dropped through the door, five keyholes open in the 
  door around the rose. The key to these locks (all 5 of them) is the one 
  hidden behind the illusory window in Area H-26. When one of the locks 
  is unlocked and the key removed from the keyhole, the key suddenly 
  reshapes itself. The new shape fits one of the remaining keyholes (the 
  order is not important). Once the five locks are turned, the thorns covering 
  the door recede into the rosebushes for 10 minutes. At the end of this time, 
  the door slams shut and the roses instantly grow over it again (if it was 
  spiked open, the door takes 2 minutes before it bends the spike and closes 
  all the way). 
  The walls of this room are entirely covered by thorns, roses, 
  and leaves; entering it is like walking into a cave of flowers. The 
  room contains 2 treasure chests and five large sacks.
  The Eye of Othroäta, dropped through a channel in the door, sits on 
  the threshold just inside the room. As soon as the characters walk into the 
  room (after, say, 30 seconds), they smell the overpoweringly cloying scent 
  of the roses. Anyone breathing the smell must make a saving throw or fall 
  asleep. This magical sleep is profound; it can be removed only by a kiss 
  or by a remove curse spell.
  All of the sacks are full of human skulls, grisly trophies of Kathelynn’s 
  meals. There are 183 skulls, all people she has eaten over the last 75 years.
  Treasure Chest #1: The chest is locked and is covered in thorns (all of 
  which are coated in a lethal poison). Unlocking the chest requires that the 
  thief make a dexterity check (4d6 vs. score) or accidentally get stuck with 
  a thorn while working on the lock (save or die). Smashing the chest causes 
  thorns to fly in all directions, hitting everyone within 20ft and requiring the 
  save vs. death. The chest contains 3205gp, 6730sp, 4053cp, 25 lead tokens 
  (worthless), and 2 polished wooden disks (rare wood worth 10gp each).
  Treasure Chest #2: The chest is trapped and locked in the same way 
  as the first chest. It contains a scroll (protection from normal missiles, 
  hallucinatory terrain, remove curse, and wall of stone), a giant ermine 
  pelt (1000gp), a potion of plant control, a potion of growth, a potion of 
  invisibility, and a potion of gaseous form.
  If the characters are all inside the room when the door closes itself again 
  after 10 minutes, they may be in serious trouble. If a character is within 
  5ft of the door and immediately dives for it, roll 4d6 under the character’s 
  dexterity to see if the door can be stopped from closing. The roses instantly 
  grow to cover the door, preventing it from being opened again. Since the 
  inside of the door has an ordinary doorknob, opening it is a simple matter of 
  making the roses recede from the door, but they regenerate so fast that it is 
  impossible to just cut them back. If the characters look at the door closely, 
  they see that the roses do not grow near any of the metal. A wide space is 
  clear around each of the hinges and around the doorknob. Experimenting 
  further reveals that the branches actually move a bit away from iron; they 
  don’t like it. It is possible to start in the middle of the door with some metal 
  (first sword points, then plates of armor) and slowly create a perimeter of 
  metal to push back the thorns. Alternatively, the characters could cut away 
  branches and then block them with metal from regenerating back over the 
  door. If the roses can be cleared away like this, a group of trapped adventures 
  can clear off the door, turn the knob, open the door, and walk out.
  Area H-28: Storage Loft
  This is an airy wooden loft underneath the sharply pitched roof 
  of slate tiles overhead. The front of the loft is the manor’s front 
  wall, which is pierced with two arrow slits.
  Several barrels are lined up along the side walls, and thirty 
  chicken coops are stacked against the north wall.
  During the daytime, a sentry is in this room (a bugbear from the roster) 
  and may spot the characters’ approach if they head directly for the manor’s 
  front gate.
  The barrels mostly contain salted meat, although 3 of them contain ale 
  (these are worth 100gp each, but they are very heavy). Many of the barrels 
  bear a mark with the merchant’s initials, “H.T.” This is the mark of Henri 
  Tharnac, a merchant who knowingly deals with the monsters of the manor 
  (see Area H-17).
  The chickens are ordinary chickens.
  Area H-29: Storage Loft
  Boxes and crates are stacked in here, along with cords of 
  firewood, rope, and 3 statues.
  The statues are all of a woman wearing armor with a rose on her shield 
  and a vertical scar on the left side of her face. These are shrines of St. 
  Kathelynn that the lamia has ordered stolen over the years.
  The contents of the storage loft are diverse. Virtually anything required 
  to run a wilderness freehold can be found in this loft, at least in small 
  quantities. 
  Area H-30: Escape Loft
  This loft overlooks the bedroom below. It contains a wooden 
  log supported on sturdy trestles, and a large round cushion 5 
  feet in diameter, lying on the floor. The center of it is indented 
  slightly.
  Unless they fly down to reinforce Kathelynn in combat, 2 giant white 
  owls are here on the perch. They are very intelligent and can speak the 
  common tongue. However, they are very loyal to the lamia and attack 
  anyone they consider a threat to her.
  This room has 2 hidden exits, and if Kathelynn needs to escape or 
  double back around the characters, this loft provides the opportunity. A 
  secret exit (leading to a secret door in the roof) is located in the loft’s 
  eastern wall, and a trapdoor is in the floor (under the cushion) that leads 
  to Area H-14.
  
  206
  Quests of Doom: men & monstrosities
  The cushion is a cat bed for the lamia when she chooses not to use the 
  human-type bed in the room below. It also does a good job of concealing 
  the trapdoor beneath.
  Owl, Giant White (2): HD 4; HP 30, 22; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws 
  (1d8), bite (1d6+1); Move 3 (fly 20); Save 13; AL N; CL/XP 
  5/240; Special: –2 to all die rolls in bright light, flies silently.
  Treasure: Nothing valuable is in the room.
  Area H-31: Dungeon Cellar
  This is a low-ceilinged cellar with doors in the north and south 
  walls. It smells bad down here.
  Although it looks innocuous, this room is the entrance to the dungeons 
  beneath the manor. Both of the doors are locked.
  Area H-32: Jailer’s Room 
  This chamber is decorated with at least 50 shields of all shapes 
  and sizes hung on the walls. A comfortable-looking bed stands 
  against the western wall, and a set of keys hangs on a peg next 
  to the bed.
  This bedroom belongs to Pierre the Weretiger, one of Kathelynn’s 
  sons. If the manor has not been completely alerted, Pierre is here. He is 
  the last to hear of any assault, and deep enough underground not to hear 
  the clamor of battle.
  The shield collection is not worth more than any other collection of 
  battered-up shields.
  The keys open the cells (Areas H-33 through H-35) and the door to 
  Area H-36.
  Pierre, Weretiger: HD 6; HP 42; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), 
  bite (1d10); Move 12; Save 11; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: 
  lycanthropy (if victim brought below 50% of hit point 
  maximum), silver or +1 or better weapon to hit.
  Area H-33: Unoccupied Cell
  The door of the cell is wood with iron bindings and a padlocked 
  bolt. A small, barred window in the door is 6 inches by 3 inches
  This stone cell is apparently empty.
  Yes, it is definitely empty.
  Area H-34: Cell
  The door of the cell is wood with iron bindings and a padlocked 
  bolt. A small, barred window in the door is 6 inches by 3 inches.
  A person in rags sits in the back of the cell directly across from 
  the door, head bowed so that long hair covers the face. 
  This prisoner has been tortured and is now blind. He introduces himself 
  as Mad Andre and asks if the characters have any food or water with them. 
  Andre is a mystic who has visions of a “Saint Elys,” and began preaching 
  about her in the town of Elet, north of the Ghostwind Pass, calling her the 
  Snow Maiden. Word of this preacher came to Kathelynn’s ears, and she 
  immediately sent the weretigers Claude and Thibault to kidnap him and 
  bring him to the manor. Mad Andre really is having visions of Elys, but 
  although he knows her name and that she is associated with winds and 
  snow, he doesn’t know much more about her. Her symbol is a rose, white 
  as snow, and she has difficulty talking to him because she is still far away, 
  but she gradually draws nearer as more people hear Andre talk of her. She 
  says that her bones are hidden “beyond the reach of the Ghostwind, but in 
  the Ghostwind’s reach,” but Andre doesn’t know what this means. If the 
  characters ask, he can tell them that what the “tigers” wanted to know was 
  the location of Elys’ bones.
  Area H-35: 
  Communal Dungeon Cell
  The door here is a barred gate like a cage wall, secured with 
  a padlock. The inside is a noisome cell containing four people.
  The four people in the cell are all normal humans, trappers and hunters 
  captured by the lamia or the weretigers. Their names are Yaric, Otho, 
  Kevrix, and Winfril. Winfril is female, the others are all males. Otho has 
  been wounded by one of the weretigers and infected with lycanthropy. 
  However, he does not transform for the first time until he stands under 
  the night sky when the moon is full. Thereafter, he is able to change 
  form at will. No reward is offered for any of these prisoners, but — with 
  the exception of Otho — they eventually get a giant ermine pelt to the 
  characters (they are, after all, hunters).
  Area H-36: Five Skeletons
  Five skeletons hang by rusty manacles on the walls of this 
  room. 
  These are the bodies of the five loyal retainers who buried Elys’ body, 
  thinking it belonged to Kathelynn. This room is where they met their 
  demise one after the other, refusing to the bitter end to disclose the body’s 
  whereabouts. If a Lawfully-aligned cleric enters the room, the ghostly 
  shape of a woman in chainmail, resembling all the images of Kathelynn 
  but without a scar, appears in the middle of the room. She seems to be 
  trying to speak, but the words are faint, inaudible. She gestures to the 
  skeletons, and you can hear the words, “Must bury [something something] 
  at the Abbey [something something] warm [something] protect.” She 
  gestures again at the skeletons, then fades into the air.
  The characters have just had a direct encounter with St. Elys. If the five 
  skeletons are brought to the abbey and buried in their appropriate graves 
  (as best can be determined), every Lawful cleric in the party gains one 
  level of experience, or 1,500 XP, whichever is greater. Each other member 
  of the party gains 1000 XP.
  
  207
  Perils of Ghostwind Pass
  Monster Roster
  State of Alert
  If the manor is alerted, most of the fighting monsters head for Area H-10 
  to assemble under Kathelynn’s leadership and to counterattack. Kathelynn 
  uses the scrying pool in that room to find the characters and direct the 
  counterattack accordingly. Noncombatants (the “Free Individuals” and 
  the “Charmed Slaves” other than Martin) remain where they are. The 
  giant owls and the saber-tooth at Area H-11 remain in place. From that 
  point on, the monsters respond as their leaders indicate. The manor is 
  designed to allow lots of tactical mobility.
  The lamia, Kathelynn the Mountain Queen 
  (Area H-26)
  Bugbears
  Bugbear Leader, Glaivorn (Area H-13)
  Bugbears (10)
  Giant Owls (2) (Area H-30)
  Saber-toothed Tigers (5) 
  Saber-toothed Tiger (1), Area H-11 (Tiger Run, at the mousehole)
  Weretigers (3) 
  Claude (Area H-10)
  Thibault (Area H-16)
  Pierre (Area H-32)
  Charmed Slaves
  Caurien and Jirral (Area H-6)
  Serz and Cloyaun (Area H-18)
  Martin of Becqueril (Area H-19)
  Free Individuals
  Gaston Payis (Area H-7)
  Henri Tharnac (Area H-17)
  Cap Jongleur (Area H-22)
  Concluding the Adventure
  If the only focus of the adventure has been hunting and monster-
  fighting, it either concludes with the characters leaving before the 
  Ghostwind (“Better part of valor”) or getting caught in it (“Just one 
  more”). Thereafter, the main focus is to sell the furs and move on to other 
  adventures.
  If the characters solved the mysteries of the pass and restored St. Elys’ 
  bones to the abbey’s chapel, they are rewarded by possession of the Staff 
  of the Remorhaz. It seems obvious to all that anyone who can find and 
  safely carry the artifact is its chosen holder.
  Since the Ghostwind Pass is a large area, it can easily be used for 
  further adventuring. If the characters joined the two pieces of the Staff of 
  the Remorhaz, and the artifact is in their possession, it provides its wielder 
  with fragmented information about other quests, if the characters are 
  inclined to become roving defenders of justice. 
  
  208
  Vampires
  &
  Liches
  Hearken closer and have fear, for in your hands are four adventures from the pit of your deepest 
  nightmares. These fantasy adventures of the macabre are sure to challenge your adventurers to the fullest 
  extent of their abilities. Each dungeon ultimately hid a covetous prize: the Hollow Blade, the Tome of 
  Mind and Body, and the Elemental Belt. 
  In Vampires and Liches, the party comes face to face with the most powerful of all the undead. 
  Unknown to many, the headquarters of a widespread murder and slave syndicate lies hidden beneath the 
  ruins of an ancient city in the Sewers of the Underguild, where Sangre commands his legions with the 
  power of the Hollow Blade. Deep in a desert waste awaits a lost oasis and The Pyramid of Amra, where 
  the iron-clawed vampire C’nosretep rules in the name of his fell god, Set. Finally, the party travels to the 
  fabled Isle of Eliphaz, where the mighty lich Athransma guards a powerful secret, unable to unlock its 
  true power.
  The adventures in this module range in difficulty to challenge parties of levels 11 to 13 and higher, 
  depending on the numbers and composition of character classes in your adventuring group. While none 
  of the adventures in this module could be considered “easy,” the Sewers of the Underguild may be 
  considered the least strenuous of the three. The Pyramid of Amra escalates the difficulty, culminating in 
  the insidious dangers posed by a pair of deceptive liches and a godlike elemental in the Isle of Eliphaz.
  Although the adventures offer challenges and great prizes for rogue, monk, and druid characters, the 
  knowledge and skills of all members of the party are needed for the group to survive. Be for-warned, the 
  encounters herein do scar, and indeed kill. But as cruel C’nosretep shall learn when the truth is brought 
  to him at last by a party of intrepid adventurers, no one individual may persevere alone. Then again, 
  C’nosretep may very well feast upon the blood of all. It is up to your adventurers to find out!
  The adventures in Vampires and Liches are designed to take place in far-off locales, where the lairs 
  themselves are every bit as difficult to find as the treasures they guard. Finding the hidden entrance to the 
  Sewers of the Underguild should not be a simple matter of leaving the local pub, taking a left at Green 
  Hill Road, and walking till sundown. Suggested locations for each of the nefarious lairs presented here 
  are given at the introduction of each lair as a guide for the Referee.
  
  209
  sewers of the underguild
  Introduction
  Sewers of the Underguild is an adventure designed for characters 
  of at least 11th level. Hidden within its narrow passages and filth-
  filled channels is a guild of vampiric rogues led by their master Sangre 
  and his aide, Ankoz. Deadly traps abound, requiring the services of a 
  thief. Due to the high likelihood of desperate combat with numerous 
  vampiric and monstrous opponents, it is suggested that a cleric and 
  at least two fighters be prepared to beat back the many watchdog 
  monsters the guild employs. You can hide the locales in Sewers of the 
  Underguild in any ruin or location that fits your campaign purposes. 
  The ruins of a once-thriving metropolis would fit the bill nicely. In the 
  Lost Lands campaign setting of Frog God Games, the Underguild 
  is located in the sewers beneath the ruins of Curgantium, the ancient 
  imperial capital of lost Hyperboria. Located at the edge of the modern 
  Kingdom of Foere, the Underguild still finds itself located centrally 
  enough to pull the strings of its weblike network running throughout 
  the former lands of the Hyperborian Empire. 
  Legend of the Underguild
  The site known as the Sewers of the Underguild is the stronghold 
  of the infamous Underguild, an organized crime syndicate ruled by 
  Sangre, the Hand of Death. From within its sewer stronghold, the 
  Underguild has stretched out its clawed fingers into the highest offices 
  of power in the lands. The Underguild traffics not only in stolen 
  merchandise, but also in slaves and information. Their operators, being 
  vampires, have the innate ability to gather documents both arcane and 
  mundane without leaving the slightest trace. Few have attempted to 
  withstand the full might of the Underguild. Their sewer stronghold, 
  hidden in a remote location of the world, is so difficult to find as to 
  create an epic in and of itself.
  Legends tell of the exploits of the Hand of Death, and how he has 
  acquired an ancient weapon of truly wondrous power. This thin, frail-
  looking short sword, known as the Hollow Blade, is forged from equal 
  parts of positive and negative energy, allowing the guildmaster the 
  ability to walk among the living in broad daylight. The Hollow Blade 
  itself is worth a king’s ransom to those of the thieving profession, for 
  though it grants the undead the ability to move about in daylight as the 
  living, it also grants the ability to cleave the undead as if they were 
  living flesh.
  The Hollow Blade is a new magic weapon that gives undead a taste of 
  life, and in the hands of a thief becomes a deadly tool for the destruction 
  of the undead. This fierce short sword is in the possession of Sangre 
  himself. Sangre guards the sword jealously, even from members of his 
  own guild who would seek to wrest it from his hand. Taking this weapon 
  from Sangre is no easy task.
  Locating the Sewers
  The ruined city where the Sewers of the Underguild are located should 
  take the party some time to track down. The Underguild itself is a highly 
  secretive organization with its fangs sunk deep into the pulse of nearly 
  every major city, yet few know of its actual existence. Perhaps rumors and 
  a hidden map found within the crypt of a previously defeated vampire lead 
  to the Sewers. Quite possibly this vampire has ties to a major organized 
  crime syndicate in the characters’ base city, thus setting the wheels of 
  the plot in motion. However you choose to convey the characters to the 
  adventure’s launching point, they are assumed to have uncovered the 
  secret base of the Underguild and need but find the entrance and proceed 
  either to glory or to doom.
  Sewers of the 
  Underguild
  By Casey W. Christofferson and Bill Webb
  Dungeon Features
  Doors: Bronze-bound 2in-thick hardwood doors are found 
  throughout the sewer.
  Secret Doors: All secret doors are delicately carved, requiring 
  a 1-in-6 chance to notice (2-in-6 for elves, dwarves and thieves). 
  They are also locked (–20% Open Locks chance).
  Sewer Pipes: All sewer pipes are slippery and filled with 
  fast-moving water. The pipes are 5ft in diameter and made of 
  glazed ceramic. The sewer pipes rest at an average 34-degree 
  downward slope and are one-half to three-quarters filled with 
  raw sewage. Individuals falling into or purposefully leaping 
  into one of the sewage pipes are whisked toward the central 
  sewer drains at a rate of 18. Swimming within the pipes requires 
  a saving throw to tread water to keep from going farther down 
  the pipe. If the save succeeds by 5 or more, the character can 
  also swim to make positive movement and climb out of the pipe 
  at each 10ft section. 
  Methane Gas Dangers: Spells involving fire such as 
  pyrotechnics, wall of fire, and fireball have a 15% chance of 
  igniting pooled methane gas within the sewers. A roll of 15% 
  or less indicates that the spell sets off the methane gas, which 
  in the event of a fireball means instantaneous eruption at the 
  point of origin of the spell, affording the caster no saving throw 
  against the spell. A successful use of any fire-related spell has 
  a 15% chance of dealing 2d6 points of additional damage as 
  it ignites pooled gasses in that area of the dungeon. When 
  characters carrying a torch or open flame enter a new room or 
  corridor, there is the same chance that a small pocket of gas 
  ignites. This deals 2d6 points of fire damage in a 10ft-radius 
  spread centered on the flame-bearer.
  
  210
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  N
  1 square = 10 feet
  
  211
  sewers of the underguild
  Keyed Locations
  Refer to the Sewers of the Underguild Map.
  Area 1: The Entryway and the 
  Silver Skull Seal of the Underguild 
  Hidden beneath the fountain is a stone staircase that leads down to this 
  chamber, roughly 40ft below the surface. Engraved in the center of the 
  floor is the symbol of a silver inlayed skull, pierced crossways with two 
  knives. The canine teeth of the skull are elongated and blackened.
  Three archways filled with swirling mist of orange, green, and yellow 
  are found in the eastern, western, and southern walls, respectively.
  Living beings that cross over or otherwise touch the silver skull emblem 
  on the floor set off an alarm that immediately alerts all vampires within the 
  sewers unless the characters pour a sacrifice of fresh blood upon the fangs 
  of the skull within two rounds of entering the chamber. The dried blood on 
  the silvered skull looks like tarnish from a distance. If blood is not poured 
  on the skull, a wall of stone seals the staircase leading to the surface while 
  the ceiling closes down upon the characters in 2 rounds, dealing 8d6 
  points of damage to everyone in the room. The ceiling trap cannot be 
  disabled by a thief inside the room, as it is a hydraulic trap disabled only 
  when the hydraulic pumps in Area 12: Eastern Pump Room and Area 
  16: Western Pump Room are turned off.
  Area 1A: Archway of Orange Swirling Mist 
  This archway is filled with a glowing and swirling orange mist. 
  Surrounding its doorframe are several silver skulls embedded in the 
  wall, their eye sockets filled with pure amber. The door acts similarly 
  to a dimension door spell. Individuals entering this swirling portal are 
  teleported bodily and with all of their possessions to Area 2.
  Attempts to dislodge the glowing, petrified amber from the doorframe sets 
  off a lighting bolt trap that results in a shocking blast striking the offender 
  and anyone in a line behind him for 6d6 point of damage (save for half).
  Area 1B: Archway of Yellow Swirling Mist
  This archway of yellow swirling mist looks as unappealing as stepping 
  into a cloud of mustard gas; sickly vapors of brimstone and offal increase 
  as one takes each step closer to the archway. A series of cow skulls, cast in 
  bronze, surrounds the doorframe of this archway, the skulls’ eyes glowing 
  like pure sapphires. Stepping through the portal instantly teleports the 
  individual and all of his belongings to Area 11. Touching the cow skulls 
  triggers a fireball trap centered on the character touching the skull (6d6 
  points of damage to all within 20ft of the target, save for half). 
  Area 1C: Archway of Green Swirling Mist
  Similar to the yellow and orange mists of the first two archways, this 
  archway is filled with foul-looking, pea-green mist. The mist chokes the 
  air around it with a brackish stench of salt and brine. The edges of the 
  archway are carved in the shape of large lizards, with eyes as black as jet 
  yet seeming to have a strange aura about them.
  Attempting to pry the jet eye stones from the lizards triggers a fear 
  trap. Characters crossing into the foul green mist are teleported instantly 
  to the bottom of the saltwater pool in Area 3.
  Area 2: Chamber of Ankoz
  A large inlaid black onyx pentagram dominates the center of this 
  chamber. An altar stands at the far end of the room, upon which is the dark 
  figure of Ankoz the Lich.
  Ankoz the Lich: HD 12; HP 72; AC 0[19]; Atk hand (1d10 plus 
  automatic paralysis); Move 6; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 15/2900; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, appearance causes 
  paralytic fear (4 or fewer HD creatures flee), spells MU12 
  (4/4/4/4/4/1), touch causes automatic paralysis (no save).
  Spells: 1st—charm person, detect magic, magic 
  missile, sleep; 2nd—darkness 15ft radius, invisibility, 
  mirror image, web; 3rd—haste, hold person, lightning 
  bolt, slow; 4th—confusion, dimension door, fear, wall 
  of fire; 5th—cloudkill, feeblemind (x2), teleport; 6th—
  disintegrate. 
  Equipment: wand of cold (20 charges). 
  Tactics: Unless the characters enter the lair of Ankoz through the door 
  from Area 13A, or by some means of teleportation other than coming 
  through the orange swirling mist, he has cast haste and mirror image 
  upon himself by the time the characters enter the chamber. If reduced to 
  a quarter of his hit points, Ankoz teleports to Area 24 where he waits, 
  healing and plotting revenge. Ankoz’s phylactery is a gold tube into 
  which he has placed rolled scrolls containing the texts of the rituals he 
  used to transform himself into a lich. This gold tube is concealed within 
  his desiccated thigh and can be discovered only if his body is thoroughly 
  searched (such as by breaking every bone in Ankoz’s body). The tube is 
  worth 10,000gp to the right collector.
  Ankoz keeps his spellbooks hidden in the chamber beneath the dark 
  altar. A trigger device within the carved hieroglyphics causes the entire altar 
  to split open, revealing a staircase leading down to a burial chamber. The 
  trigger device is well hidden (–30% Open Locks check); failure to disarm 
  the hidden trap fills the room with deadly burnt othur fumes (save or die).
  Area 2A: Burial Chamber
  This chamber hidden below the false altar of Ankoz holds the true dark 
  altar, completely covered in gold leaf and encrusted with gems and jewels. 
  The lid itself weighs nearly 400 lbs., with a market value of nearly 4000gp 
  in semi-precious gemstones and gold. Lining the walls of this chamber are 
  shelves of books and moldering tomes, as well as rows of scroll cases.
  Treasure: Ankoz’s spellbooks*, 5 flasks of acid, 1 potion of 
  slipperiness, 1 potion of fire resistance, magic-user scroll (haste and cone 
  of cold). A workbench holds a set of jewelry-making tools. Another table 
  is covered with expensive beakers and jars, valued at more than 1200gp 
  in alchemical equipment.
  * Ankoz’s spellbooks contain all of his known spells, and a fair selection 
  of additional spells. These additional spells are left to the Referee to decide 
  upon, pursuant to his campaign needs and desire.
  Area 3: Crocodiles in the Pool
  The salty smell of briny yet foul water fills the air of this room. An 
  archway to the south heads down a corridor, as does a second archway 
  to the west. A narrow walkway along the edge of this room surrounds 
  a pool nearly as wide and long as the room itself, murky and at least 
  12ft deep. Lurking in the depths of the pool are 3 “vampire” crocodiles. 
  The vampires of the Underguild groom these sewer crocs to crave the 
  blood of humanoids. The vampires tried — quite unsuccessfully — to turn 
  these crocodiles into true vampires, until they finally discovered a way to 
  restore the creatures to life using special canopic jars found in Area 6. The 
  vampires treat the crocodiles as full vampires, even carving their fangs to 
  do more damage with each bite. The crocodiles could care less.
  Note: One or more of the characters might be teleported into the pool. 
  Submerged characters are allowed a saving throw to determine if they 
  had their breath held before appearing at the bottom of the pool. A ladder 
  stands in the southern end of the pool (1-in-6 chance to notice while in the 
  pool thanks to the slick concentrations of algae and filth) allows those in 
  heavy armor to escape the murky saltwater pool.
  Normal “Vampire” Crocodiles (3): HD 3; HP 22, 21, 20; AC 
  4[15]; Atk bite (1d6 plus 1d4 blood drain); Move 9 (swim 
  12); Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; Special: blood drain (1d4 
  additional points of damage per bite), resurrection (1d4 
  hours after death via canopic jars in Area 6).
  
  212
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  Area 4: Pudding in the Pits! 
  Approximately 20ft down the western and southern corridors from 
  Area 3 are a pair of covered pit traps, each 40ft deep by 10ft across. 
  Each pit contains a black pudding. The black pudding is covered in a 
  phantasmal force that makes each pit appear to contain a pile of gold, 
  coins, and fine-looking weapons among skeletal remains.
  Black Pudding (2): HD 10; HP 73, 69; AC 6[13]; Atk attack 
  (3d8); Move 6; Save 5; AL N; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: acidic 
  surface (dissolve weapons or armor), immune to cold, 
  divides when hit with lightning.
  Area 5: The Dumper
  Beyond the secret door outside the western entrance to Area 3 is a 10ft-
  wide walkway that runs north and south along an opened section of sewer 
  pipe. The opened section runs roughly north and south for about 90ft, with 
  a strong current pouring from some unknown source to the north before 
  emptying into a circular tube to the south.
  Weight of more than 600 lbs. placed on the 30ft section of stone deck 
  just to the south of the secret door to Area 3 triggers a tilting floor trap 
  that dumps all individuals standing on this section of platform into the 
  opened sewer. Individuals failing a saving throw are immediately sucked 
  down one of the many sewer pipes and flung toward Area 22.
  Area 6: Hidden Crypt of the 
  Crocodiles
  Within this chamber are 7 crocodile-sized burial jars. Atop each of the 
  jars is a golden crocodile head encrusted in semi-precious gems. The room 
  is home to a massive crocodile guardian of the vampires. This creature is 
  the great Bloodtooth! The massive beast is accompanied by 2 normal 
  crocodiles. 
  The jars contain the spirits of the crocodiles found here and in Area 3. 
  If the crocodiles are killed, the jars restore them to life within 1d4 hours. 
  If the characters rest for any time after defeating the crocodiles in Area 
  3, they find those beasts waiting for them here as well. Unless the jars are 
  destroyed, they keep restoring the crocodiles — including Bloodtooth — 
  to life.
  Bloodtooth, Giant Crocodile: HD 6; AC 3[16]; Atk bite (3d6 
  plus 1d6 blood drain), 1 tail (1d6); Move 9 (swim 12); Save 
  11; AL N; CL/XP 6/400; Special: blood drain (1d6 additional 
  points of damage per bite), resurrection (1d4 hours after 
  death via canopic jars in Area 6).
  Normal “Vampire” Crocodile (3): HD 3; HP 22, 21, 20; AC 
  4[15]; Atk bite (1d6 plus 1d4 blood drain); Move 9 (swim 
  12); Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; Special: blood drain (1d4 
  additional points of damage per bite), resurrection (1d4 
  hours after death via canopic jars in Area 6).
  Treasure: As the head caps of the crocodile jars are coated in semi-
  precious gems, each jar is worth 1000gp as an ancient antiquity, though 
  they weigh nearly 80 lbs. apiece. The jeweled heads are worth 500gp each 
  and weigh approximately 15 lbs.
  Area 7: Forked Pathway 
  The corridor leading south from the crocodile lair has two branching 
  pathways, each leading south. A decorative mosaic of fine-cut glass and 
  enamel forms diamond patterns along the floor, walls, and ceiling of 
  this corridor. A deadly and extremely well hidden impaling trap awaits 
  those who do not notice the switch to turn it off. The cunningly hidden 
  wooden stakes spring out at a length of 10ft from the floor, ceiling, and the 
  facing southern wall. This trap is set here as a test for new recruits to the 
  Underguild. Characters within 10ft of the person setting off the trap must 
  make a saving throw or be struck by 2d4 stakes and take 1d4+1 points of 
  damage each. 
  Area 8: Fountains of Blood, 
  Passage of Innocence
  A large wolf’s-head fountain dominates the western wall of this dank 
  chamber. Thick red blood pours from its jaws into a man-sized stone bowl 
  at its feet. As the characters enter the chamber of the fountain, 4 vampires 
  leap from hiding, hissing and calling to the characters to join them in un-
  life and bow to the master of the Underguild as they have done.
  Tactics: Each of the Underguild members has its own tactics and own 
  motivations against the characters. Although they fight in concert against 
  the characters, a few may have other plans for the group, as they too seek 
  the Hollow Blade and would claim it if they could defeat the Hand of 
  Death and claim mastership of the Underguild.
  Jandilar, Vampire: HD 8; HP 60; AC 2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 plus 
  level drain); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, charm gaze (–2 to save 
  or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, gaseous form, only 
  killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), shapeshift into giant 
  bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Equipment: boots of elvenkind
  Description and Tactics: Jandilar is sly and sneaky. Before being 
  turned into a vampire, he was an assassin in all but training. He no longer 
  uses weapons, preferring to create spawn or kill his victims outright. As an 
  aside, Jandilar hates the Hand of Death and covets the Hollow Blade for 
  its ability to allow vampires to walk among the living, almost unseen. If 
  the characters seem to take the upper hand and succeed in destroying other 
  guild members, he may attempt to make a deal and clear the way for them 
  in return for the sword. Of course he has no intentions of staying true to 
  the deal, unless of course the characters are about to kill him.
  Memze, Vampire: HD 7; HP 47; AC 2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 plus 
  level drain); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, charm gaze (–2 to save 
  or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, gaseous form, only 
  killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), shapeshift into giant 
  bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Equipment: wand of lightning bolt (7 charges)
  Description and Tactics: Memze was the apprentice to Ankoz in life, 
  and was turned into a vampire before gaining enough power to threaten 
  his master. Memze, known as the Lame because of the limp he bears 
  from a spine twisted from birth, is jaded and decadent to the extreme. His 
  perversity knows no limits, and he personally drains dozens of slaves at a 
  time in orgies of blood and pain. Memze uses his wand of lightning bolt 
  to remain hidden in combat as long as possible before closing in on those 
  left standing.
  F’Huge Kneebreaker, Vampire: HD 9; HP 68; AC 2[17]; Atk 
  bite (1d10 plus level drain); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 7; AL C; 
  CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, charm 
  gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, 
  gaseous form, only killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), 
  shapeshift into giant bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Description and Tactics: This hulking brute, despite being a vampire, 
  
  213
  sewers of the underguild
  still relies on brawn and intimidation to defeat his enemies. He pins and 
  sucks the blood from characters deemed near death . He enjoys physical 
  combat to such a degree that he rarely thinks to charm opponents. F’Huge 
  prefers beating the blood out of his victims over tricking it out of them.
  Hethel, the Acolyte of Thanatos, Vampire: HD 7; HP 49; AC 
  2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 plus level drain); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 
  9; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, 
  charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, 
  gaseous form, only killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), 
  shapeshift into giant bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Description and Tactics: Beautiful and full of hate, Hethel is the 
  servant of Ykthool, high Priest of Thanatos. She is the servant of the 
  Fountains of Blood, guarding the passage from the eastern side of the 
  sewer complex to the western areas by means of this special teleportation 
  device. Hethel fights until turned to gaseous form, and then seeps to Area 
  14 to regenerate and reform a new hunting party. 
  The Fountain of Blood
  This 6ft-wide stone bowl of blood dominating the back wall of the 
  chamber emanates a powerful magical aura. The bowl detects as evil and 
  magical. Ancient script is written on the bowl. 
  “Through the blood of ancients the passage revealed, darkened 
  path of nightmares wield.”
  Entering the fountain instantly teleports individuals via dimension door 
  to Area 15. All individuals passing through the fountain must make a 
  saving throw or be transformed instantly into a vampire. 
  Paladins or clerics of Lawful characters who pass through the pool 
  of blood without first casting bless on the blood fountain or themselves 
  suffer a –2 penalty to all rolls (no save) for the duration of their stay within 
  the Sewers of the Underguild.
  Area 9: False Crypt Room
  This room contains six stone crypts, their lids etched with writing in 
  an ancient tongue. The crypts bear strange descriptions of their supposed 
  inhabitants, all of it bad poetry of the sort to make bards shudder and 
  wince.
  A. Here lies Manco the Moneyed one, man he had a honey tongue, work 
  he never labored long, in living death does he grow strong.
  B. Before you rests Syther Cross, upon a job a hand he lost, but pimp he 
  could with just one hand, now the blood he does drink all warm and neat, 
  of restless harlots on the streets.
  C. Here is the tomb of the malicious F’Huge, he is bold as he is huge, 
  fear his might and beware his girth, this tomb filled with his charnel earth.
  D. Jandilar is a sneaky sort, within his tomb is a fair retort, seek within 
  and you may find, what is hidden a rogue’s delight.
  E. Hethel is an evil bitch, tortured slave a favorite dish, strange is her 
  priestly mood, a vampire who often cooks her food.
  F. Memze is a guild mage, drinks blood cold which is quite strange, 
  buried here or not with wit, surprise! You’re in a room of… (and the last 
  word is obscured by some sort of brown substance …)
  The entire room is one huge and well-concealed flooding room trap. 
  After 2 rounds, the room begins to flood with raw sewage from Area 20 as 
  stone blocks roll into place and seal the room. The room fills completely 
  within 4 rounds. After 8 rounds, everything within the room is flushed 
  down a sewer pipe into Area 20. Opening the crypts reveals that each is 
  empty and has apparently never been used. Tampering with the crypts sets 
  the trap off instantly.
  Area 10: The Board Room
  The characters can reach the boardroom only through secret doors in 
  the eastern and western walls. The secret doors are hidden behind life-
  sized portraits of wealthy, rakish individuals surrounded by women 
  and riches. The locked secret door in the western wall opens into Area 
  10A. Dominating the center of the room is a wide hardwood table with 
  a polished top that appears to be carved from a single slab of marble. 
  Paintings of exquisite quality line the walls, and the room appears to be lit 
  with a continuous yet dim light source.
  Hiding within this room to either side of the opened doorway and under 
  the table, using it as cover, are 4 feral vampire spawn and Manco Money 
  Tongue. Leaning back in a chair and facing the characters, a sneer on his 
  cruel black lips that reveals his gleaming white fangs, is Syther Cross. A 
  rather wicked-looking scythe lies across his lap. He invites the characters 
  into the room with a gracious flourish of his silk-sleeved shirt and his 
  wide-brimmed and feathered hat.
  “Welcome, adventurers, we admit to being amazed that you have 
  made it this far into the Underguild compound. Surely you are a 
  dangerous band, and likely we could use you in our operations. If 
  you would consider joining us in our enterprises, we can assure 
  that your conversion will be as painless as we can make it. I like 
  your style, living ones, and I have a proposition to make …”
  Syther Cross parleys with the characters as long as possible, allowing 
  other spawn and guild members that still survive to move in and surround 
  the party. An additional 2d6 feral vampire spawn and 1d2 vampire guild 
  
  214
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  members arrive upon the scene in 6 rounds to join the vampires in the 
  Board Room. These additional vampires may be selected from survivors 
  within the complex at the Referee’s discretion.
  Syther Cross, Vampire: HD 8; HP 60; AC 2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 
  plus level drain) or +2 scythe (2d4+2); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 
  8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, 
  charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, 
  gaseous form, only killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), 
  shapeshift into giant bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Equipment: +2 scythe (2d4+2), jewelry (2000gp)
  Description and Tactics: Syther offers directions to the lair of the Hand 
  of Death, and suggests that if the characters take down the guildmaster 
  and his lieutenant Ankoz, that he will see the party richly rewarded with 
  50,000gp worth of precious booty taken from the lands listed upon the 
  maps surrounding them in the Board Room. Syther Cross seeks to take the 
  Hollow Blade for himself and establish control of the Underguild, placing 
  it under newer and younger management. Syther has been a vampire only 
  for about 30 years and he grows impatient with what he considers the tired 
  and somewhat overly cautious machinations of the Underguild.
  If the parley disintegrates into combat (i.e., the characters attack 
  Syther), he retreats to safety before attacking spellcasters and priests. He 
  also tries to charm fighter types with his gaze.
  Manco Money Tongue, Halfling Vampire: HD 9; HP 53; AC 
  2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 plus level drain); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 
  7; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, 
  charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, 
  gaseous form, only killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), 
  shapeshift into giant bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Equipment: +2 dagger, 100pp
  Description and Tactics: Manco is devious and diabolical, often 
  pretending to be a human child to pull his scams over unsuspecting marks. 
  He uses his small size to the utmost, pouncing upon his victims when they 
  least expect it. If the fight goes badly for his side, he changes to bat form 
  and moves to Area 19B.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (4): HD 7; HP 35, 40, 37, 41; AC 4[15]; 
  Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; CL/
  XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, regenerate (2/round), 
  drain 1 level with bite, resists cold and electricity, vampire 
  weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  Tactics: Manco and Syther’s hidden spawn move in to assault the party, 
  edging in for surprise. Unless utterly destroyed by a cleric, the vampires 
  assume gaseous form when close to defeat and move to their coffins to 
  reform and fight again, now armed with a better understanding of the 
  characters’ tactics.
  Additional Room Details: Amid the fine paintings are wall maps 
  detailing various cities and empires of the civilized lands, as well as the 
  names of Underguild operators in these territories. You (the Referee) 
  could use such maps to introduce new campaigns. The paintings on the 
  walls are of great value to collectors, three of which are considered lost 
  treasures of the art world. 
  Treasure: Three of the paintings are high art, detailed below.
  • Only by Sunrise by Umberto, a famous painter who weaves illusions 
  into his paintings. The painting shows the majestic sunrise over the 
  jeweled cityscape of Bard’s Gate. The command word “Cyrillia” is hidden 
  in the painting among the crenellations of the Keep. This painting is a 
  particular favorite of Sangre, the Hand of Death, who views the illusion 
  when holding the Hollow Blade, as if he were alive. Value: 10,000gp.
  • Cult of Wights, the artist unknown, but attributed to T. F. Arcevol, 
  a notorious necromancer. This cult piece has great value to a specialized 
  group of collectors who enjoy gruesome art. The painting, horrific in its 
  ultra-realism and delicate brush stroke, features a pack of wights feasting 
  on chained sacrifices as cultists in the black robes of Orcus observe. The 
  painting has been copied many times, though this piece is the original. 
  Value: 1000gp; to the proper collector, the painting could net as much as 
  6000gp.
  • Queen of Parnuble, artist unknown. The painting features Tuiliar the 
  Elven Queen of arboreal Parnuble. The theft of this painting is considered 
  one of Sangre’s first great heists. The painting eventually found its way 
  to the Museo in Reme, where it was stolen while on loan from the royal 
  family of Parnuble. Its theft caused quite a scandal and the elves of 
  Parnuble excised a great tax upon Reme to punish the great port city for 
  not protecting their property. Value: 6000gp.
  Other paintings are of excellent quality, but none are as famous as the 
  first three.
  Value: 1200gp, 900gp, 750gp, 500gp, wall maps with notes are of 
  unlimited value to authorities, vampire hunters, and underworld groups 
  seeking to eliminate spies within their midst.
  Area 10A: Tilting Floor Trap 
  The secret door in the western wall opens into a corridor that runs north 
  and south. The southern section of corridor ends after 10ft in a collapsed 
  wall, crudely beamed and buttressed with planks of wood. Flecks of gold 
  glint among the broken stones. The “gold” is in fact iron pyrite — fool’s 
  gold. The entire 10ft section is a tilting floor trap. Individuals stepping 
  onto this section for as long as 1 round are dropped down a chute and 
  thrown into a sewer pipe draining into Area 20.
  Area 11: Prison Chamber of Go’Loke 
  A circular chamber 50ft in diameter is inscribed with silver runes that 
  glow with an unnatural green light. Sitting in the center of the circle is a 
  large figure with two huge pincers and a pair of clawed hands sprouting 
  from its chest. Sitting cross-legged before him is a muscular figure with a 
  deathly pallor. The many-armed beast emanates an unholy aura as it turns 
  his horned head to the party, shaking a set of dice in one of his clawed hands.
  The demon is Go’Loke, a glabrezu. The guild summoned him here 
  200 years ago as further protection for its lair. At that time, Ankoz etched 
  a protective circle in silver in the floor to lock the demon within the 
  chamber. Once the circle was set in place, treasure-seekers entering the 
  archway of Swirling Yellow Mist in Area 1 would have an interesting 
  welcome to the guild stronghold. Go’Loke has had little to entertain 
  himself with all these years except for a set of dice left behind as some 
  cruel joke by Ankoz. Go’Loke has spent the last 10 years throwing bones 
  with Jo’Mena, his ghoul, whom he treats like a dog most of the time and 
  never lets win at dice.
  Jo’Mena was a spoiled chieftain’s son of the Bu’ulamin tribe. His 
  mother was a half-hag. Jo’Mena had a penchant for taking things that 
  were not his. He thought fit to sneak into the ruin and find the secret 
  entrance to the Underguild’s infamous sewers. That was 10 years ago. 
  Finding the fountain above the sewer entrance, he flipped the switch 
  and descended the staircase, entering the room of swirling archways. 
  Entering the Swirling Yellow Archway, he found himself face to face 
  with Go’Loke, who offered him a game of chance, the pile of treasure he 
  had collected from 180 years of dead adventurers for Jo’Mena’s soul. Of 
  course, Jo’Mena bet his soul and lost, being transformed almost instantly 
  into the pitiful ghoul that he is today.
  Note: Anyone of Lawful alignment may open the northern door to this 
  chamber. Doing so, however, breaks the circle that has kept Go’Loke 
  prisoner all this time. Should this happen, Go’Loke attacks the characters, 
  hoping to kill them and track down Ankoz, seeking to get his revenge. 
  Should a character enter from Area 1C into the chamber, Go’Loke 
  immediately attacks the party.
  Go’Loke, Glabrezu Demon (Category III): HD 10; HP 71; AC 
  –4[23]; Atk 2 pincers (2d6), 2 claws (1d3), bite (1d6); Move 9; 
  Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 15/2900; Special: immune to fire, magic 
  resistance (60%), magical abilities.
  Magical Abilities: at will—darkness 10ft radius, fear, 
  levitate, polymorph self; 1/day—gate 30% (roll 1d4 for 
  category).
  
  215
  sewers of the underguild
  Jo’Mena, Ghoul: HD 2; HP 12; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 claws (1d3), 
  bite (1d4); Move 9; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 3/60; Special: 
  immune to sleep and charm, touch causes paralysis for 3d6 
  turns (save avoids).
  Tactics: Go’Loke rattles the dice in his hand as he points to party 
  members and names them off by number of the individual he is going 
  to kill, calling out such things as “come on baby, come on seven, seven 
  come eleven, daddy needs a new soul!” as Jo’Mena cowers in the corner 
  trying to avoid combat. If approached, Jo’Mena feebly lashes out with 
  his paralyzing attack. If the northern doorway is opened before combat 
  or during by a character of Lawful alignment, Go’Loke fights until he is 
  reduced to one-quarter hit points before trying to escape. He stays away 
  long enough to heal up and come back to gain his revenge upon Ankoz for 
  his centuries of imprisonment.
  Treasure: An inventory of the chamber reveals the following items that 
  Go’Loke has hoarded over the years of his imprisonment: 6526gp, and 15 
  gems worth 600gp (x2), 500gp, 400gp (x2), 200gp (x3), 125gp (x3), and 
  50gp (x4).
  Area 12: Eastern Pump House 
  The secret door in the eastern wall of the Pump House reveals a damp 
  chamber filled with many leaking pipes, as well as highly advanced 
  ancient technological marvels that are part of the nerve center for the 
  sewer and aqueduct system of Curgantium and its massive hydraulics. 
  Four large bronze wheels are mounted in the walls, two in the west, one in 
  the south and one in the eastern wall.
  Hidden among the maze of pipes along the ceiling are 6 feral vampire 
  spawn Sangre assigned to guard this pump room from intruders.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (6): HD 7; HP 45, 39, 37x2, 33, 32, 29; AC 
  4 [15]; Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; 
  CL/XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 1 level per bite, 
  regenerate (2/round), resists cold and electricity, vampire 
  weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  The Bronze Pump Wheels
  The four bronze pump wheels control the flow of water and sewage to 
  the sewers, as well as the hydraulic controls of several of the mechanical 
  traps within the dungeon. If any of the pump wheels are turned 
  clockwise, the sewage levels remain unchanged in Area 20; however, 
  the strength of the current drops by one-eighth relative to the number of 
  pumps turned off.
  Pump Wheel A
  Turning this pump clockwise until it stops shuts off the hydraulic pressure 
  to the covered pit traps in Area 4. Characters hear the sound of decreasing 
  water pressure as the wheel is turned. Turning this pump counterclockwise 
  until it stops increases the sewage depth in Area 20 by 2ft.
  Pump Wheel B
  Turning the pump clockwise until it stops turning shuts off hydraulic 
  pressure to the impaling trap in Area 7, automatically disarming the 
  trap. The sound of decreasing water pressure is heard as the wheel 
  is turned. Turning the pump counterclockwise increases the sewage 
  depth in Area 20 by 4ft, and doubles the strength of the whirlpool in 
  Area 22.
  Pump Wheel C
  Turning this pump wheel clockwise until it stops turning shuts off 
  the hydraulic pressure to the trap in Area 9. As before, characters 
  notice a significant reduction in ambient water pressure noise. Turning 
  the bronze wheel counterclockwise results in an increased volume of 
  sewage pumping into Area 20, raising its original depth by 8ft and 
  filling hallways outside Areas 5, 12, and 13 to a depth of 3ft. If the door 
  to Area 12 was not closed by the party after entering the chamber, the 
  foul waters spill into this room and other opened rooms at this time. 
  The 3ft-deep wave of sewage reduces movement rates by one-quarter, 
  requiring characters to succeed on a saving throw to avoid falling and 
  being dragged by the currents of the waters into the whirlpools in Area 
  22 and Area 23.
  Pump Wheel D
  Turning this pump clockwise turns off the tilting floor traps in Areas 
  5 and 10B; a resounding clank sounds at this time as if something large 
  unlocked off to the north. Turning the wheel counterclockwise fills Area 
  20 almost to the ceiling with sewage, filling the hallways and opened 
  rooms with a 7ft-high surge of raw waste, and quadrupling the strength of 
  the whirlpool in Area 22.
  Filling the sewers in this fashion releases Methaloggot from her 
  imprisonment in Area 21. Characters hear her roar through the murky 
  sewage that now fills the dungeon.
  Area 13A: The Never-Ending Corridor
  The bronze bound door in the northwestern corner of Area 13A is 
  protected by a wizard lock spell. The door opens to reveal a dark corridor 
  of polished black diorite, approximately 80ft deep, with a similar door 
  upon the far end of the corridor. As soon as the characters travel 40ft down 
  the corridor, they can make a saving throw to notice that they are still 80ft 
  from the door. Turning around to look the other way, they find that they 
  are 80ft from the door they exited as well. Continuing to move forward 
  down the hall increases this distance away by a proportionate distance to 
  that which the party moves; in other words, if the party moves 10ft, the 
  door appears 10ft farther away.
  This corridor is shielded against teleportation magic, to a dangerous 
  and possibly deadly effect. Should characters attempt to cast dimension 
  door, phase door, teleport or similar spells to escape the corridor, roll 1d6 
  to let fate determine the result:
  Roll
  Result
  1–2
  Caster is teleported to Area 21 to become a snack 
  for Methaloggot.
  3
  Teleported to Area 11 to become the demon’s 
  new craps partner.
  4
  Teleported into the whirlpool in Area 23.
  5
  Teleported to an empty locked burial vault in Area 
  14.
  6
  Teleported to the Fountain Entrance to the 
  Underguild.
  Area 13B: Hotchka the Medusa 
  This chamber is missing a large chunk of wall in the northwestern 
  corner of the room. It has locked bronze bound doors in the northwest and 
  southeastern corners. A trio of humanoid figures sits near a flaming bronze 
  brazier. As the tallest of the figures turns to face the party, her eyes glow a 
  demonic blue as she reaches for an arrow from her quiver. A pair of statues 
  reflects the dancing fire glow of the brazier as the woman draws her bow, 
  her hair waving like a nest of snakes.
  This chamber is the lair of Hotchka, a medusa whom Sangre 
  transformed to the unliving nearly a hundred years ago. The vampires 
  Cainbry and Phryc the Unloved, a guild enforcer, join Hotchka in her 
  lair.
  Hotchka, Vampire Medusa: HD 7; HP 40; AC 2[17]; Atk 
  bite (1d10 plus level drain), snake-hair bite (poison) or +1 
  longbow x2 (1d6+3, +2 arrows); Move 9 (fly 18); Save 9; 
  AL C; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, 
  charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, 
  gaseous form, gaze turns to stone, lethal poison, only killed 
  in coffin, regenerate (3/round), shapeshift into giant bat, 
  
  216
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  summon rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Equipment: +1 longbow, +2 arrows (x30)
  Cainbry, Vampire: HD 8; HP 42; AC 2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 plus 
  level drain) or sling (1d4+1, +1 sling bullets); Move 12 (fly 18); 
  Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: +1 or better weapon 
  to hit, charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels 
  with bite, gaseous form, only killed in coffin, regenerate (3/
  round), shapeshift into giant bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves. 
  Equipment: sling, +1 sling stones (x30)
  Phryc, Vampire: HD 9; HP 58; AC 2[17]; Atk bite (1d10 plus 
  level drain) or sling (1d4+1, +1 sling bullets); Move 12 (fly 
  18), leap (30ft leap, 10ft high); Save 6; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, charm gaze (–2 to save 
  or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, gaseous form, only 
  killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), shapeshift into giant 
  bat, summon rats or 3d6 wolves. 
  Equipment: boots of leaping
  Tactics: Hotchka immediately attempts to catch the gaze of the 
  characters as they open the door, using her gaze to turn the intruders to 
  stone. Phryc and Cainbry attempt to hide, waiting to sneak attack whoever 
  enters the chamber as Hotchka tries to turn foes to stone while firing her 
  mighty bow at lightly armored targets.
  Area 13C: Sewer Skiff
  The break in the northeastern wall opens into Area 20. The stench rising 
  from this river of fouled water and ancient sewage causes all who smell it 
  to make a saving throw or be sickened for the remainder of their time in 
  the Sewers of the Underguild (–2 penalty to attacks, damage and saves).
  A finely crafted boat of unknown metal lies submerged in the mire of 
  sewage, tied off to a fine copper chain looped through a bronze ring set 
  in the hard ancient stone. A combined strength of 24 can pull the boat to 
  the surface, where it becomes instantly clean and free of any foulness. 
  The boat has a pair of oars made of the same unknown material, and it 
  can be used to navigate the river of raw sewage in Area 20. The boat 
  holds up to 6 passengers and their gear. It is an ancient craftsmanship 
  and building material that allows it to bear weight in excess of 2400 lbs. 
  without sinking. The odd metal of which it is made is enchanted to keep 
  it perpetually clean and shiny. This is not a magical effect, however, and 
  cannot be detected with detect magic.
  Area 14: Crypts of the Underguild 
  A locked secret door leads into this hidden chamber, lined from floor to 
  ceiling on the northern and western walls with bronze plated burial vaults. 
  Several pairs of glowing blood red eyes peer out of the darkness. Suddenly, 
  4 feral vampire spawn slink out of the darkness, their blackened lips 
  parting to reveal gleaming white canine teeth, razor sharp and longing 
  for blood.
  Guarding the crypt room are the vampire spawn along with any full 
  vampires previously encountered who have regenerated sufficiently to 
  fight off intruders. These vampires do not include Ankoz or Ykthool.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (4): HD 7; HP 42, 40, 39, 33; AC 4[15]; 
  Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; CL/
  XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 1 level with bite, 
  regenerate (2/round), resists cold and electricity, vampire 
  weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  Tactics: The vampires use any and every means at their disposal to 
  protect the burial vaults.
  Note: Previously defeated vampires who have not healed within their 
  vault to at least 1 hit point are within their vault, helpless.
  Additional Room Information: The vampires’ vaults are closed and 
  locked with a bronze plate scribed with the name and epitaph of each of 
  the undead. The vaults are 2ft tall and 4ft wide, comprising 6 columns of 
  bronze plated vaults. Each column has 5 vaults, making a total of 30 vaults 
  for vampires and their spawn. Personal possessions and treasure of each 
  vampire are found within the vaults. Each vault has a spring-loaded bed 
  with finely crafted wheels, its “slab” pulling out in a similar fashion to a 
  modern morgue vault.
  Additional Treasure: 2669gp; potion of fire resistance, a bottle of 
  poison (save or die), a potion of heroism, and a cloak of protection +3 
  (functions only at night).
  Area 15: Western Blood Fountain 
  and Vampiric Ooze
  The eastern wall of the room is dominated by a large wolf’s headed 
  fountain that drips thick red blood from its jaws into a 6ft-diameter stone 
  bowl at its feet. Written in glowing runes of Celestial origin but in the 
  Abyssal language are the following words:
  “Wield me on the nightmare’s path through the innocence of 
  blood.”
  As the last party member steps from the fountain, the blood within it 
  begins to gurgle and congeal with a gelatinous thickness, pouring onto the 
  floor with a sickly slurping noise as it lashes out. An amalgam of all the 
  party’s hate, pain, greed, fears and jealousy, the vampiric ooze lashes its 
  pseudopods at the nearest party member to it with a vicious slam attack. 
  As the party turns to face the new horror, they see momentarily within the 
  rippling of its syrupy surface a reflection of their own darkness.
  Vampiric Ooze: HD 8; HP 48; AC 8[11]; Atk strike (2d4 
  plus level drain); Move 6 (climb 6); Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 
  10/1400; Special: create spawn (anyone slain becomes 
  zombie in 1d4 rounds), drain 1 level with strike, split (cold 
  and electricity split ooze into half-sized oozes), sunlight 
  vulnerability (destroyed in 1 round). (The Tome of Horrors 
  Complete 417)
  Tactics: The vampiric ooze attacks the same target until it absorbs 
  the life force of that target before moving on. If the creature splits while 
  attacked, both split halves attack the same target.
  After the vampiric ooze in the fountain is defeated, the blood pouring 
  from the fountain transforms to pure clean water, completely potable and 
  crystal clear. The fountain when re-entered teleports individuals instantly 
  to Area 8 and vice versa with no further difficulties.
  A secret door is behind the blood fountain that leads to Area 16.
  Area 16: Western Pump Room
  The secret door from Area 15 leads to the second pump room of the ancient 
  sewer system. Large pipes of bronze and ceramic run along the ceilings and 
  up the walls, which are fitted with four bronze pump wheels. Unlike the pump 
  wheels in Area 8, these bronze pump wheels, when cranked simultaneously 
  clockwise, remove the stone block in Area 1, as long as the pumps in Area 
  12 have been shut off. This creates an exit to the Sewers of the Underguild. 
  The secondary effect of shutting off the pumps is to turn off the whirlpools in 
  Area 22 and 23 and lower the sewer level to a depth of 4ft. Cranking any of 
  the pump wheels counterclockwise has no other effect.
  Area 17: Ykthool’s Cloister
  Behind the locked door is a richly appointed chamber with polished 
  
  217
  sewers of the underguild
  hardwood paneling and silk wall hangings. A canopied four-poster coffin 
  rests elegantly in the northeastern corner of the chamber. An ornate mirror 
  with a frame of solid gold faces the door. Holy symbols featuring a skull 
  pierced with a bident, also made of solid gold, hang upon the walls, along 
  with unusually realistic paintings of men and women of all races just as 
  death takes them, their pale, drawn faces holding the last vestiges of life.
  Ykthool spends most of his time within the shrine of Thanatos, Area 
  18B. Ykthool has little fear of losing this coffin to any enemies foolish 
  enough to penetrate this far into the Underguild’s lair.
  The mirror facing the door is a foul and deadly trick given as a gift from 
  Thanatos to one who remembers the old ways. 
  The locked and trapped coffin in the northeastern corner of the 
  chamber is the resting place of Ykthool, vampire priest of Thanatos. 
  Touching the coffin in any way creates a blade barrier around it unless 
  a prayer to Thanatos is intoned (7d10 points of damage to anyone within 
  15ft of the coffin). 
  Note: Casting bless upon the coffin or pouring holy water into it after 
  removing the graveyard dirt denies Ykthool his resting place and requires 
  him to return to Area 14: Crypts of the Underguild, or some other 
  location to rest until healed.
  Treasure: The silk-lined coffin is stitched with 50 diamonds, valued at 
  100gp each. A bag of holding contains a scroll of finger of death. Tearing 
  out the silk lining of the coffin reveals 20 lbs. of graveyard dirt, valued as 
  a spell component to magic-users and certain sects of priests. The four silk 
  wall hangings are valued at 200gp each, and the two paintings could gain 
  200gp each from a collector. Last, but not least, is the mirror of abyssal 
  damnation. (New Magic Item Appendix)
  Area 18A: Entrance to Shrine of Thanatos
  The secret door opens onto a corridor with an elaborately carved ebon 
  wood door in the southern wall. A symbol of a silver skull with two 
  daggers driven through it in an “X” pattern is inlaid upon the floor. The 
  floor beyond the locked secret door that leads to the shrine of Thanatos 
  is trapped so that any living beings that cross the threshold must make a 
  saving throw or temporarily lose 1d4 levels (levels return after 12 hours).
  Area 18B: Shrine of Thanatos
  Directly across from the door is a black altar engraved with skulls of 
  silver with a white silk cloth set over it that bears a bowl and candelabra of 
  pure platinum and a skull of deepest black. Behind the altar stands an 11ft-
  tall statue in dark gray marble of a beautiful and cruel woman, perhaps an 
  elf. In the statue’s right hand is a solid iron bident, its two forked prongs 
  a foul black. An obsidian skull resting on the floor reflects a glinting and 
  malevolent light within the dimly lit room. A large silver pentagram with 
  a silver skull decorates the floor in the center of the room, and the low 
  sounds of chanting can be heard from within the chamber.
  Ykthool is prepared for the characters as they enter the chamber, likely 
  having heard them fiddling with the traps outside the door to the shrine. 
  He cloaks himself in protection from good 15ft radius as he prepares his 
  strongest powers.
  As soon as a living being crosses the threshold of the chamber, the 
  statue of Thanatos animates and attacks. The statue is a gift to Ykthool 
  from Orcus in his guise as Thanatos the Fallen, deliverer of the dead. 
  Orcus appreciates a high priest who remembers the old ways.
  Ykthool, Vampire Priest of Thanatos: HD 10; HP 77; AC 2[17]; 
  Atk bite (1d10 plus level drain); Move 12 (fly 18); Save 5; 
  AL C; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, 
  charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), drain 2 levels with bite, 
  gaseous form, only killed in coffin, regenerate (3/round), 
  shapeshift into giant bat, spells Clr10 (3/3/3/3/3), summon 
  rats or 3d6 wolves.
  Spells: 1st—cause light wounds (x2), detect good; 
  2nd—hold person (x2), silence 15ft radius; 3rd—cure 
  disease, prayer, speak with dead; 4th—cause serious 
  wounds, protection from good 10ft radius; 5th—
  commune, finger of death (x2).
  Stone Golem Statue of Thanatos: HD 12 (60hp); AC 5[14]; 
  Atk fist (3d8); Move 6; Save 3; CL/XP 16/3200; Special: +1 or 
  better magic weapon to hit, immune to most magic, slowed 
  by magical fire.
  Tactics: Ykthool remains hidden and waits for the party to become 
  occupied with the stone golem before casting finger of death on the party’s 
  cleric, paladin, or wizard. When reduced to 0 hit points, Ykthool dissolves 
  to gaseous form.
  Hidden carefully in abyssal script within the silver pentagram on the 
  floor are words that characters can find and translate:
  “Through the blood of mortal sacrificed is the invitation made, 
  to the master of Underguild, in Death’s fine name, let the living 
  blood be paid.”
  A Lawful-aligned character filling the platinum bowl atop the altar with 
  blood teleports all living beings within the shrine of Thanatos to Area 24 
  with no saving throw.
  Treasure: Sitting atop the altar is the platinum sacrificial bowl valued at 
  4000gp, 4 platinum candlesticks of 100gp value each, 4 black candles used 
  in dark rituals, and a blackened skull that causes any Lawful characters 
  within 30ft to make attacks and saving throws with a –2 penalty.
  Area 19: Slave Chambers of the 
  Underguild
  Beyond this locked door lies the passage to the poor souls who serve as 
  blood slaves of the Underguild.
  Area 19A: The Trapped Prison Entrance
  An L-shaped corridor lined with lit torches turns southwest to another 
  locked door after a distance of 30ft. The corridor is trapped with a crushing 
  wall trap that triggers as travelers cross the elbow curve. Its disarming 
  device is located in a wall sconce containing a guttering torch. The wall 
  hits all targets in a 20ft-by-10ft space around the person triggering the 
  trap (2-in-6 chance per character). The wall does 8d6 points of damage 
  (save for half).
  Area 19B: The Slave Cages.
  Eight iron-barred cells contain the unfortunate blood slaves of the 
  Underguild, charmed and drawn, their necks and arms and thighs covered 
  in fang marks and bruises from their nightly bleeding and seduction. Each 
  of the 8 prisoners, 2 elves and 6 humans, were selected for their beauty 
  and vitality to serve the Underguild. The slaves are under the effect of a 
  charm monster spell placed upon them by Ankoz, and are thus docile and 
  unwilling to leave their cells. A dispel magic removes the charm. One 
  of the prisoners, Ayissa, an elf magic-user, is willing to join the party if 
  rescued, healed, and outfitted for war against the Underguild. If her offer 
  goes unheeded, she merely teleports to her home. If Manco’s team was 
  defeated in a fight, he comes here and attempts to charm Ayissa into telling 
  the party he is her little brother and must also be “rescued” by the party.
  Ayissa, Elf (MU4*): HP 11; AC 9[10] or 2[17] (missile) and 4[15] 
  (melee) from shield spell; Atk strike (1hp); Move 12; Save 12; 
  AL L; CL/XP 5/240; Special: +2 bonus on saves vs. spells, spells 
  (3/2).
  Spells: 1st—light, magic missile, shield; 2nd—detect 
  evil, invisibility.
  * Ayissa was a 10th-level magic-user before losing 6 levels to the 
  Underguild vampires. 
  
  218
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  The Brotherhood of Skulls, a pirate band led by the notorious Captain 
  Cho Sun, took Ayissa prisoner and sold her into slavery. Her beauty and 
  strength captivated Ankoz and Sangre, causing a minor rift between the 
  two. Ayissa alludes to wild blood orgies that take place within the master’s 
  chamber where the guild members gather for their feast. She tells the party 
  that the slaves are gathered every other night from their prison and led to 
  a Shrine of Thanatos, where one of their numbers’ blood is used to fill a 
  bowl of platinum that teleports them all instantly to the chamber of the 
  one known as the Hand of Death, whom she has overheard Ankoz refer 
  to as Sangre.
  Area 20: The Sewer Cavern
  This vast, twisting cavern is truly a river of raw filth. The cavern 
  has a 40ft-high ceiling, with the river of filth averaging 20ft in depth. 
  Stretching nearly 400ft from Area 21, the cavern averages 30ft in width, 
  until it reaches its widest part surrounding Area 24 where the cavern is 
  approximately 120ft wide by 70ft high.
  River of Filth
  Individuals falling into the river of filth must make a saving throw to 
  keep their head above the putrid water in this dangerous current. Anyone 
  falling into the current near Area 22 moves at a rate of 20, accelerating 
  by 3 per round the closer they get to the whirlpool (maxium rate 32). 
  Furthermore, individuals falling into the river of filth must make another 
  saving throw or suffer a debilitating disease (–2 penalty to attacks, 
  damage and saves until cured). If they fall into the pool below Area 13A, 
  characters must continue to make saving throws each round as they are 
  drawn toward Area 23. 
  Area 21: Altar of Filth
  At the far northern end of the cavern, a cyclopean altar of pure foulness 
  rises 10ft above the putrid waters. The carved visage of a froglike face 
  stares out at all viewers, its wide mouth open with a great fountain of 
  filth pouring from it. The filth bathes a large reptilian figure, bound with 
  a collar and chains of pure adamantine, most of its great bulk hidden 
  beneath the foul waters of the underground river. The serpent’s yellow 
  eyes stare menacingly at all who approach.
  This is the prison of Methaloggot the Fouler, an old black dragon.
  Methaloggot has been chained here for 300 years. Lured to the 
  Sewers of the Underguild with the scent of easy money in her nostrils, 
  Methaloggot had no idea of the surprise the Underguild had in store for 
  her. After falling for a sinister trap of treasure and glittering gemstones 
  atop the ancient stone platform, the dragon realized her folly. Ankoz 
  and Ykthool blasted the young dragon with magic as Sangre slipped the 
  adamantine noose about her horned head unseen. He then sliced her wings 
  from her back with the Hollow Blade. Then, casting a great and powerful 
  ritual, Ankoz consecrated the altar in the name of Tsathogga, and Ykthool 
  blessed it in the name of Thanatos.
  Methaloggot the Fouler, Large Old Black Dragon: HD 8; HP 
  40; AC 2[17]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), bite (3d6); Move 9; Save 8; 
  AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: spells MU (3), spits acid (60ft 
  long, 5ft wide, 40 damage, save half).
  Spells: 1st—detect magic, magic missile, sleep. 
  
  219
  sewers of the underguild
  Altar of Filth
  The Altar of Filth generates an aura of absolute evil. Even touching 
  the altar with one’s flesh requires the individual to make a saving throw 
  or become infected with the disease slimy doom (lose 1d4 points of 
  constitution per day until cured). The altar can be destroyed only by first 
  casting bless and create water over it, followed by simultaneously casting 
  remove curse and dispel magic. Once this is done, the face of Tsathogga 
  shatters and breaks from the altar, and pure water pours from the pipe 
  where his mouth once was. Legend lore can be useful to the characters in 
  discovering this truly arcane secret to destroying the altar.
  Area 22: The Big Flush
  The northern whirlpool pulls all who come within 30ft of it into its 
  crushing grasp. A saving throw with a –3 penalty is required to escape its 
  clutches; those failing are swallowed by the whirlpool on the following 
  round, taking 3d6 points of crushing damage per round as they are sucked 
  under the foul waters to be spewed out 4 rounds later in Area 23. 
  Area 23: The Southern Whirlpool 
  This swirling morass of foul water lies before Area 24. Individuals 
  sucked through Area 22 are vomited forth from the whirlpool here. This 
  whirlpool pushes all things in the vicinity of it toward the walls of the 
  chamber or sends them hurling toward the stone platform where Sangre’s 
  Tomb lies, causing an additional 3d6 points of damage. Characters can 
  make a saving throw (with a –2 penalty) to escape the whirlpool and 
  swim to the relative safety of the exterior of Sangre’s Tomb. Those who 
  make their save remain above the surface of the sewage, while others are 
  sucked into one of the 2 sewer pipes draining from the lower end of the 
  cavern. They are eventually swept from the Sewers of the Underguild and 
  deposited 5 miles from the dungeon along a lost waterway.
  Area 24: Tomb of Sangre
  The exterior of the Tomb of Sangre looks much like a 60ft-by-60ft 
  classical Hyperborian temple with a solid bronze door set in the center of 
  the northern face of the tomb. The tomb is surrounded by columns carved 
  in the shape of robed and hooded figures, each with a short sword held 
  across its chest. The solid bronze door is cast in bas-relief with demonic 
  images that stand astride a treasure hoard.
  The door is sealed with a wizard lock spell, and guarded by a disintegrate 
  trap that triggers on any living being who touches or attempts to knock or 
  dispel the wizard lock.
  The interior of the Tomb of Sangre is richly appointed with large 
  pillows, expensive woven rugs, tapestries, and urns full of jewels. A silver 
  pentagram occupies a 10ft section of the western end of the chamber, and 
  an ornate coffin sits in the eastern side of the chamber. Carved from ivory 
  and gold, the coffin looks valuable beyond reckoning. The room is dimly 
  lit with torches that cast shadows throughout the chamber.
  If Ankoz has survived, he is also here, healed by Ankoz and ready to 
  face the characters again. Ankoz also casts phantasmal force to create 
  an image of himself between the entrance and the coffin while he hides 
  invisibly at the southern end of the room, preparing whatever magic he 
  has remaining before switching to his staff. Sangre bides his time in 
  silence and waits for the characters to explore the chamber. He begins his 
  attacks if they split up.
  Sangre, Master Vampire: HD 13; HP 97; AC 2[17]; Atk The 
  Hollow Blade (1d6+4, +2 short sword, +2 strength) or bite 
  (1d10 plus level drain); Move 12 (fly 18), leap (30ft leap, 
  10ft high); Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 17/3500; Special: +1 or 
  better weapon to hit, charm gaze (–2 to save or charmed), 
  drain 2 levels with bite, gaseous form, only killed in coffin, 
  regenerate (3/round), shapeshift, summon rats or 3d6 
  wolves.
  Equipment: The Hollow Blade (New Magic Item 
  Appendix), boots of leaping, potion of heroism, potion 
  of invisibility.
  Tactics: Sangre, and Ankoz if he still lives, fight with all the skill and 
  experience they possess. Sangre uses his boots of leaping to move swiftly 
  through the room. Sangre, however, has a special problem with the party 
  at this moment. If they have delved this far into his lair, the core of the 
  Underguild has now been vanquished. With this in mind, Sangre uses the 
  Hollow Blade to wreak as much havoc upon his foes as he can. If given the 
  opportunity, Sangre seeks to spawn the entire party into his new servants 
  and members of the Underguild; failing that, he merely destroys them all. 
  When reduced to 0 hit points, Sangre transforms into gaseous form and 
  flees to his coffin.
  The coffin belongs to Sangre. If forced to retreat, Ankoz makes his way 
  to this chamber so he can recuperate. Lying about the room are the riches 
  of the Underguild. Hidden among the items is a scroll that, when read 
  aloud, teleports the party back to Area 1. The wall of stone is still present 
  blocking the escape route, though the trap should hopefully be disarmed 
  at this point.
  Treasure: 26,742gp, 5 diamonds (1000gp each), 7 rubies (750gp 
  each), 12 sapphires (500gp each), 10 emeralds (250gp each), potion of 
  invulnerability, potion of extra healing, medallion of ESP, +1 freezing 
  spear, +1 longbow, divine scroll of cure serious wounds and cause 
  serious wounds, +2 shield, gauntlets of swimming and climbing, a fur 
  cloak worth 350gp, gold death mask (250gp), fire opal pendant 1759gp, 
  gold efreeti comb with emerald eyes 375gp, silver harp inlaid with rubies 
  crafted by Fathilir worth 3450gp, ivory statue valued at 320gp, gold ring 
  worth 220gp, silver-plated steel longsword with jet jewel in hilt worth 
  402gp, and a small jewelry box made of ivory with a platinum frame 
  worth 678gp. 
  
  220
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  The Pyramid of Amra is a challenging adventure designed for 
  characters of 12th level. It is suggested that the characters include at 
  least one monk and one thief. Due to the nature and numbers of undead 
  enemies (vampires) it is recommended that a cleric with the ability to cast 
  raise dead and restoration be on hand to aid the characters. The characters 
  should be rounded out with a magic-user and a pair of frontline fighters. 
  In this adventure, the characters travel to the Pyramid of Amra and the 
  ancient Monastery of Night to face one of the most dangerous opponents 
  they are likely to meet, C’nosretep the Champion of Set.
  Legend of the Pyramid 
  of Amra and the 
  Monastery of Light
  For several millennia, the monks of the Monastery of Light trained in 
  the deepest mysteries of meditation and unarmed combat. Their master, 
  Ozykathalin, was said to have penned the sacred Tome of Mind and Body, a 
  tome containing many of the most cunning and devastating of all martial arts 
  maneuvers. Their reign ended nearly 500 years ago, when C’nosretep, the Iron 
  Fist of Set, deposed Ozykathalin and declared himself the Master of the Lotus.
  Now reigning supreme within the Step Pyramid of Amra, C’nosretep 
  sits in sole possession of the Tome of Mind and Body, much of which he 
  has re-written or embellished. Surrounding himself with fell followers, 
  the Champion of Set now presides over pilgrimages of worshippers and 
  slaves who trek across the desert wastes by the thousands. These foolish 
  pilgrims come to witness the power of the Iron Fist of Set. Many hope to 
  gain immortality, if first they can impress C’nosretep with their skills at 
  unarmed combat.
  Getting to the Step 
  Pyramid of Amra
  The Step Pyramid of Amra should be contained in a deep desert location 
  with an “ancient world” flavor. In the Lost Lands of Frog God Games, 
  the Pyramid of Amra is located at a remote oasis in the desert land of 
  Khemit, although any desert location will do. The journey should be half 
  of the challenge, fraught with dangers both natural and monstrous, with 
  hints as to the actual location of the pyramid and the hidden oasis of Amra 
  sprinkled throughout.
  Characters could possibly have heard tales of the pyramid and the 
  Tome of Mind and Body. The tome itself is treasured by monastic orders 
  throughout the world for its ancient techniques. Through careful study of 
  its venerable pages, students of the tome learn the secrets of a completely 
  unique new martial arts move, usable only by the most experienced of 
  masters.
  Alternately, a Monk’s sect may have sent him questing for the Tome 
  of Mind and Body to return to their cloister for further research by the 
  Grandmasters. For whatever the reason, the characters should be motivated 
  to face any obstacle, although they should not be given the whole story. 
  Best to keep secret some of the lore provided on these pages and let them 
  plan and prepare for the worst on their own.
  The Pyramid of Amra sits on a small island in the middle of a lake 
  within a desert oasis. On the shore of the lake sits the Palace of Celestial 
  Flowers.
  Palace of Celestial Flowers 
  and Monastery of Night
  A large walled structure amid gently swaying palm trees sits exposed 
  to the sands. Almost hidden beyond the tall date palms lies a silvery lake 
  amid the desert. The point of a pyramid rises above the greenery like a 
  yellowed claw, its very top covered in red gold leaf.
  The top of the pyramid is in fact the Pyramid of Amra. However, as 
  The Pyramid of Amra
  By Casey W. Christofferson and Bill Webb
  N
  
  221
  The pyramid of amra
  mentioned above, it sits on an island in the middle of a lake. Before 
  the characters, and on the shore of the lake, is the Palace of Celestial 
  Flowers, which may be explored before the characters access the pyramid 
  and in fact provides the means for the players to get to the island — a 
  secret passage and a boat. Some characters possessing magical means of 
  transport may wish to simply bypass the palace. See below.
  Bypassing the Palace
  Characters could, if they have the means, simply swim, fly, or use a boat 
  to reach the island containing the pyramid or use some other means to 
  bypass the palace. However, once in the pyramid, there are several areas 
  where the amulet of the lotus master — which can be obtained only within 
  the palace — benefits them. It is for your players to decide how they wish 
  to proceed. The adventure can be completed even if the palace is never 
  entered.
  Area 1: Palace of Celestial Flowers
  Gracing the front of this majestic edifice are fine bronze double doors 
  cast with images of a great and mighty god surrounded with rays of 
  sunlight and showering lotus blossoms upon a single child. Beyond the 
  locked bronze double doors is an entrance chamber that must have once 
  been an awesome sight but is now degraded with filth. Torn tapestries 
  flutter in the wind ominously. The characters’ nostrils fill with the smell 
  of old death and an uneasy decay. A second set of locked double doors 
  beyond the first open into Area 2: Great Hall of the Brotherhood of the 
  Fallen Star.
  Area 2: Great Hall of the 
  Brotherhood of the Fallen Star 
  As the characters enter from beyond the locked entrance portals, they 
  see a great amount of dust and darkness beyond. This was once a place 
  of great majesty and serenity. Ornately carved wooden pillars featuring 
  great battles between celestial and infernal forces stare ominously at the 
  characters as the breeze from the outside wafts into the room to create a 
  slight fog of dust. Braziers suddenly light from the corners of the room and 
  the party sees a figure sitting atop a throne, beckoning them to approach.
  The Great Hall has a domed ceiling that rises about 40ft above the floor, 
  and is lined with eight massive carved pillars. Doors in the northeastern 
  and northwestern walls lead to Areas 3, 4, 6 and 7. Flaming braziers in the 
  southeast and southwestern corners of the room cast a strange and eerie 
  light. The Referee should play up this spooky effect before the characters 
  are ambushed.
  If the Characters Enter During the Day
  If the characters enter the throne chamber during daylight hours, they 
  face Relthren Surret, masked in the guise of C’nosretep, and a pack of 
  3 doppelganger monks and 3 asswere monks hiding atop the invisible 
  bridge in Area 14, waiting to pounce upon the characters. If the battle 
  begins to go against the doppelgangers, they all change shape into 
  C’nosretep. Relthren Surret enters the combat if threatened or if things are 
  going badly for his allies. In the confusion, Relthren shape-changes into 
  one of the weakest characters and attacks that individual until Relthren 
  loses 30% of his total hit points, at which point he attempts to flee to 
  safety. The assweres begin the fight in hybrid form.
  Relthren Surret, Doppelganger Monk: HD 10; HP 72; AC 
  1[18]; Atk 2 claws (2d8+12, girdle, monk strikes); Move 21 
  (climb 9, masque); Save 6 (5 vs. magic); CL/XP 11/1700; 
  Special: alertness, deadly strike (per monk ability), deflect 
  missiles, immune to sleep and charm, mimics shape, +5 total 
  damage with weapons, +2 saves vs. paralysis and poison, 
  slow falling (40ft), thief skills, 2 weaponless attacks per round. 
  Thieving Skills: Climb 94%, Tasks/Traps 70%, Hear 5 in 6, 
  Hide 75%, Silent 80%, Locks 75%
  Equipment: girdle of giant strength, masque of the 
  monkey (New Magic Item Appendix), 3 potions of 
  healing, 2 potions of invisibility 
  Doppelganger Monk (3): HD 6; HP 41, 39, 35; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d12); Move 17; Save 10 (5 vs. magic); CL/XP 7/600; 
  Special: alertness, deadly strike (per monk ability), deflect 
  missiles, immune to sleep and charm, mimics shape, +3 total 
  damage with weapons, +2 saves vs. paralysis and poison, 
  slow falling (20ft), 2 weaponless attacks per round. 
  Thieving Skills: Climb 90%, Tasks/Traps 40%, Hear 4 in 6, 
  Hide 35%, Silent 45%, Locks 34%
  Asswere Monk (3): HD 7; HP 50, 45x2; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 hooves 
  (2d8); Move 18; Save 8; CL/XP 7/600; Special: alertness, 
  bray (save or affected by confusion spell for 1d4+3 rounds), 
  deadly strike (per monk ability), deflect missiles, harmed only 
  by silver weapons, immune to sleep and charm, +3 total 
  damage with weapons, +2 saves vs. paralysis and poison, 
  slow falling (20ft), 2 weaponless attacks per round. (The 
  Tome of Horrors Complete 550)
  Thieving Skills: Climb 91%, Tasks/Traps 45%, Hear 5 in 6, 
  Hide 40%, Silent 50%, Locks 40%
  Relthren Surret is C’nosretep’s chief lieutenant, and is in charge of 
  guarding the vampires during the daylight hours. He and his doppelgangers 
  are skilled monks, bound in service to C’nosretep by their god Set.
  If the Characters Enter at Night
  They instead face C’nosretep himself! He does not wish to fight the 
  characters at the moment, but converses with them instead to assess their 
  intelligence and ability to resist his powerful charms. Secretly, he has 6 
  vampire spawn hiding atop the invisible bridge in Area 14 waiting to 
  pounce upon the characters. C’nosretep dominates the strongest fighter 
  or thief and instructs him to slay the weakest characters while he parleys 
  with a monk or paladin. He is arrogant and boastful of his powers and 
  thanks characters for coming to join the eternal army of undead that he 
  is building here at the oasis. As soon as the trap is ready to be sprung, 
  or as soon as anyone casts a spell or attacks C’nosretep in any way, he 
  attacks that individual mercilessly for one round before using his great 
  speed and powers to turn to vapor and retreat to a random room within 
  the palace or pyramid. Most likely, C’nosretep’s subsequent ambushes are 
  sprung within a room or chamber the characters recently passed through 
  and cleared of traps and monsters as they backtrack through the palace. 
  C’nosretep fights only to the death when defending his sarcophagus or the 
  Tome of Mind and Body.
  C’nosretep, Vampire: HD 15; HP 101; AC –2[21]; Atk 3 strikes 
  (4d8+2) or bite (1d10 plus level drain); Move 26 (fly 18); Save 
  5; CL/XP 18/3800; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, +2 
  saves vs. paralysis and poison, alertness, charm gaze (–2 to 
  save or charmed), deadly strike (per monk ability), deflect 
  missiles, drain 2 levels with bite, gaseous form, immune to 
  sleep and charm, only killed in coffin, +5 total damage with 
  weapons, regenerate (3/round), shapeshift into giant bat, 
  summon rats or 3d6 wolves, 3 weaponless attacks per round. 
  (Area U-12)
  Thieving Skills: Climb 99%, Tasks/Traps 100%, Hear 6 in 6, 
  Hide 100%, Silent 100%, Locks 100%
  Feral Vampire Spawn (6): HD 7; HP 42, 37, 36x2, 33, 27; AC 4 
  [15]; Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; 
  CL/XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 1 level with bite, 
  regenerate (2/round), resists cold and electricity, vampire 
  weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  
  222
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  Searching the Throne
  A sliding plate beneath the seat of the dragon-footed Throne of the Lotus 
  Master has an inlay the exact size and shape of the amulet of the lotus master. 
  Placing the completed amulet into the depression opens a secret staircase in 
  the floor below the throne that leads to Area P-1 of the Pyramid of Amra.
  Area 3: Purification of Body
  This chamber was once used to purify the body through massage, steam 
  baths, plunge pools, and the like, though it is now fouled. There is some 
  sign that horrible death once visited this room. The walls are chipped and 
  cracked in places, and broken weapons lie in disarray around the room. 
  The shattered remains of several urns, ewers, and basins crack and break 
  under the characters’ feet. An unlocked door in the northwest corner of the 
  room opens to reveal a staircase leading to Area 9.
  Treasure: The skeleton of a slain monk is lodged into a hole in the 
  floor that once released natural steam. Upon the corpse are 1000gp and 
  a +2 dagger.
  Area 4: Meditation Chamber 
  This is a simple room with pure black walls and no visible markings 
  whatsoever. The door to the room, when closed, perfectly blends with the wall 
  to make it appear as if there is no door at all. A white star-like shape dominates 
  the center of the floor. An unlocked door in the eastern wall leads to Area 5.
  Hiding in this chamber are 4 vampire spawn of C’nosretep, hanging 
  from the ceiling and walls and waiting to drop like spiders on unsuspecting 
  characters.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (4): HD 7; HP 46, 41, 38, 31; AC 4 [15]; 
  Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; CL/
  XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 1 level with bite, 
  regenerate (2/round), resists cold and electricity, vampire 
  weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  Tactics: The spawn first attempt to dominate any fighters or thieves in 
  the group, inducing them to slay any clerics before entering melee. They 
  strike lightly armored individuals such as magic-users first before moving 
  on to the Fighters.
  Note: A Lawful monk spending 3 solid rounds contemplating the white 
  star in the center of the chamber gains a +3 bonus on his next attack.
  Area 5: Barge of the Darkstar 
  This chamber has doors in the centers of the north, east, and west walls. 
  A large funerary barge made of black wood and inlaid with silver celestial 
  symbols and images dominates the room. The barge is 25ft long and about 
  5ft wide, with a paddle and a sarcophagus attached across its center. If 
  the sarcophagus were to be removed, it would make room to seat about 
  7 individuals. Two intact oars in oarlocks are at the front and back of the 
  barge. This barge is water-worthy and narrow enough to fit through the 
  door at the end of the hall. The boat is very heavy and requires a combined 
  30 strength to move it out of the room. The sarcophagus on the barge 
  emanates a powerful fear spell within 10ft.
  Treasure: The funerary barge is very valuable; it would be worth 
  30,000gp to a collector because of the ebony and mahogany hardwoods of 
  its construction. The flat-bottomed barge can sail on sea and river voyages. 
  It can carry 5 tons of cargo or 7 fully equipped soldiers.
  Area 6: Meditation Chamber
  This is a meditation chamber, similar to Area 11, except this one is 
  completely white, and the star symbol on the floor is completely black. 
  Hiding within this chamber, blending completely with the white of the 
  walls (1-in-6 chance to spot), are 4 doppelganger monks.
  Doppelganger Monk (4): HD 6; HP 45, 40, 37, 32; AC 4[15]; 
  Atk 2 claws (1d12); Move 17; Save 10 (5 vs. magic); CL/XP 
  7/600; Special: alertness, deadly strike (per monk ability), 
  deflect missiles, immune to sleep and charm, mimics shape, 
  +3 total damage with weapons, +2 saves vs. paralysis and 
  poison, slow falling (20ft), 2 weaponless attacks per round. 
  (Monstrosities 129)
  Thieving Skills: Climb 90%, Tasks/Traps 40%, Hear 4 in 6, 
  Hide 35%, Silent 45%, Locks 34%
  Tactics: The doppelganger monks wait for a moment while the 
  characters examine the black star in the center of the floor, then they strike 
  out from the walls. All attack a lightly armored target at the same time, 
  and all transform into this target on the following round to add chaos and 
  confusion to their assault. If the doppelgangers begin to take casualties, 
  they attempt to flee and fight again another day.
  Note: A Lawful monk alignment spending 3 rounds contemplating the 
  white star in the center of the chamber gains a +3 bonus on his next attack.
  Area 7: Massage Chamber 
  Several tables line the walls of this room, along with small-wheeled 
  carts containing bottles of various oils, unguents, mud, and herbal wraps. 
  Artwork inlaid in enamel upon the walls depicts monks practicing the art 
  of massage upon one another to work out the soreness of intense physical 
  and mental training. Waiting within the room are 2 invisible clay golems. 
  An unlocked door in the northeastern corner of the chamber opens to a 
  staircase leading upward to Area 13.
  Invisible Clay Golem (2): HD 10; HP 45; AC 7[12]; Atk fist 
  (3d10); Move 8; Save 5; AL N; CL/XP: 14/2600; Special: 
  immune to slashing and piercing weapons, immune to most 
  spells, invisible (do not turn visible after attack).
  Tactics: The golems grab the first person(s) entering the room and 
  slam them onto the table and begin giving them a serious massage. These 
  golems were specially created to be invisible masseurs. In the long years 
  since their creation, however, the elemental spirits that animate them 
  have gone quite mad. They spare no ounce of their strength when giving 
  a massage, which usually reduces to putty the unfortunate person in their 
  care. If attacked, they respond in kind.
  Treasure: Enough herbal wraps and oils are here to make up 3 healer 
  kits.
  Area 8: Rear Gatehouse
  The door from Area 5 enters into a gatehouse with a 10ft-wide iron 
  portcullis at the far end. Doorways to the left and right of the room lead 
  up staircases to each of the guard towers. It is dark and cobwebbed in the 
  gatehouse area and looks as if it has not seen a living soul in centuries. 
  The closed iron portcullis leads to the stone quay where rowboats were 
  once taken by the faithful brothers to work the grounds of the renamed 
  Monastery of Night.
  Area 8A: Left Gatehouse
  A lever on the second floor of the gatehouse must be switched to set 
  the mechanism to lift the portcullis. It is guarded by 4 wraiths — former 
  monks killed by C’nosretep.
  Wraith (4): HD 4; HP 31, 27x2, 24; AC 3[16]; Atk touch (1d6 
  plus level drain); Move 9 (fly 24); Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 
  
  223
  The pyramid of amra
  8/800; Special: drain 1 level with hit, silver or +1 or better 
  weapon to hit.
  These wraiths are vengeful and spiteful, but if confronted by an 
  individual bearing the amulet of the lotus master, they back away and 
  allow the lever to be switched without a fight. They bow before the 
  characters and say:
  “Slay the beast and free us in the name of the true master 
  so that we may become one with enlightenment and fade 
  from view.”
  If attacked, they seek out paladins and clerics first, attempting to 
  eliminate them before moving on to other targets. 
  Area 8B: Right Gatehouse
  This gatehouse is dust-filled and devoid of valuables, as if it has 
  been stripped for other uses.
  Area 9: Training Room
  Padded walls and bamboo mats decorate this darkened room. 
  Within the room are several wooden training dummies that stand in 
  the four corners, motionless and covered with dust.
  By night, 4 vampire spawn take up residence within this chamber; 
  during daylight hours it is occupied by 2 asswere monks who spar 
  with one another to keep boredom at bay. They attack intruders who 
  enter the chamber.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (4): HD 7; HP 50, 45, 43, 39; AC 4 
  [15]; Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; 
  AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 
  1 level with bite, regenerate (2/round), resists cold 
  and electricity, vampire weaknesses. (The Tome 
  of Horrors 4 228)
  Asswere Monk (2): HD 7; HP 47, 44; AC 
  3[16]; Atk 2 hooves (2d8); Move 18; Save 
  8; CL/XP 7/600; Special: alertness, bray 
  (save or affected by confusion spell 
  for 1d4+3 rounds), deadly strike 
  (per monk ability), deflect missiles, 
  harmed only by silver weapons, 
  immune to sleep and charm, +3 
  total damage with weapons, +2 
  saves vs. paralysis and poison, 
  slow falling (20ft), 2 weaponless 
  attacks per round. (The Tome of 
  Horrors Complete 550)
  Thieving Skills: Climb 91%, 
  Tasks/Traps 45%, Hear 5 
  in 6, Hide 40%, Silent 50%, 
  Locks 40%
  Area 10: 
  Bedchamber of 
  the Light Master
  An ornately carved door features 
  the holy symbol of Arden carved into 
  
  224
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  its paneling. The symbol shines brightly, and the characters must take a 
  moment to let their eyes adjust to the light.
  The door is locked (–30% Open Locks). Once unlocked, the door 
  swings open to reveal a small room holding the dusty belongings of the 
  former Master of the Lightstar. His belongings have been left undisturbed 
  for centuries, as the holy symbol carved into his door causes a radiance 
  like the rising sun to shine from the room. C’nosretep and his vampire 
  minions keep away from this area, and C’nosretep sees no reason to send 
  his doppelganger and asswere monks here to see what’s in the room.
  The interior is covered in a thick layer of dust. There is a small mat 
  on the floor with a wooden neck-board, a sconce, brass incense burner 
  on a brass chain, and a small strange-looking box about 6in by 6 in. The 
  sides of the box have numerals in a strange language, with 9 numerals 
  and 10 spaces upon the top of the box arranged in a 3-by-3 square with 
  an additional location connected on one of the sides. Next to the nine 
  numerals and the empty space is some sort of button that does nothing 
  if depressed when the box is first found and the numerals are in their 
  original, scrambled positions. The numerals are in the Celestial tongue. 
  (This knowledge is automatic if a character already knows that language.) 
  The numerals on the top of the box, 1–9, are all scrambled, but the number 
  15 is repeated six times along two sides of the perimeter of the box.
  The box number panels slide if they are oiled and may be reconfigured 
  into any combination of numbers from 1 through 9.
  When all of the numbers are slid so they equal 15 across the bottom, 
  side, and each diagonal of the box and the button is pushed, the box opens 
  to reveal an amulet with a large clear gemstone of unknown origin on a 
  golden chain. If the numbers are arranged in any other combination and 
  the button is depressed, adamantine blades shoot out in all directions 
  (dealing 3d6 points of damage; save for half).
  A possible solution to this puzzle looks like this:
  8
  1
  6
  3
  5
  7
  4
  9
  2
  Treasure: The amulet of the lightstar (New Magic Item Appendix) 
  within the box exudes a sense of power and glows with a bright light when 
  held clasped in the hand. 
  Area 11: Chamber of the Lotus 
  This is a large cross-shaped chamber with a beautifully rendered lotus 
  flower mosaic in the center of the floor. The flower appears to change 
  colors depending on the angle at which it is viewed. This room was once 
  the private meditation chamber of the Master of the Lotus.
  A trapped secret door is in the center of the northern wall. Placing 
  the shimmering lotus flower from the upper balcony into the center of the 
  petals automatically opens the door to Area 16. Attempting to open the 
  door without the lotus flower fills the room with blue lotus blossom gas 
  that causes hallucinations (see Sidebox). 
  Area 12:  
  Bedchamber of the Dark Master
  A stout, locked door bears signs of shadow and darkness. This room has 
  a strange sense of dread within it. Dusty and dark, the room seems to dim 
  all light sources. A low growling can be heard from the corners.
  Guarding this room from intruders are 5 shadows that move to attack 
  from the darkness. They instantly concentrate their attacks first on the 
  party’s cleric, followed by paladins.
  Shadow (5): HD 2+2; HP 15, 13x2, 12, 11; AC 7[12]; Atk touch 
  (1d4 plus strength drain); Move 12; Save 16; AL C; CL/XP 
  4/120; Special: +1 or better weapon required to hit, drain 1 
  point strength with hit. 
  A small chest is trapped with a poison needle (save or die) holds a dark 
  amulet that seems to absorb all light. 
  Treasure: amulet of the darkstar. (New Magic Item Appendix)
  Area 13: Smashed Training Room
  Within this room are the remains of several practice dummies, all 
  shattered and broken beyond repair. A set of stairs in the northwest of the 
  room leads downward to the first floor.
  A trapdoor is in the ceiling to the southwest of the room. The trapdoor 
  may be hooked with a 10ft pole. Pulling down the trapdoor opens a 
  wooden ladder staircase that leads to the floor above and Area 17.
  Area 14:  
  Locked Door and Invisible Bridge 
  The locked door is not trapped but it requires an Open Locks check with 
  a –20% penalty to unlock and open. Behind the door is a walkway through 
  the center of the palace. It leads to the lower balcony. The walkway is 
  permanently invisible. Characters attempting to cross the invisible 
  walkway must make a saving throw to cross the walkway with no chance 
  of falling. Those failing fall 20ft to the Great Hall, taking 2d6 points of 
  damage.
  If the 6 vampire spawn waiting to ambush the characters earlier have 
  not yet done so, they are waiting here to attack. The vampire spawn hang 
  from the walls in shadows or they use their spider climb ability to attack 
  with stealth and surprise.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (6): HD 7; HP 40x2, 39, 38, 35, 30; AC 
  Blue Lotus
  A failed save against the blue lotus blossom gas has one of the 
  following effects. Roll 1d4.
  Roll
  Hallucination
  1
  The hallucination is such that those who fail 
  their save see a party member as a spectre 
  attempting to kill them.
  2
  Hallucination causes individual to see the 
  person next to them as a very comely 
  member of the opposite sex and fills them with 
  a desire to “be with them.” If the target of 
  this desire spurns their sudden advances, the 
  individual hallucinating flies into a rage (+1 to 
  attacks, damages) in their lust.
  3
  Those failing their saving throw are filled with 
  despair and are unable to take action while 
  under the influence of the lotus gas. They 
  curl up in a small ball on the floor, clutch 
  themselves and cry.
  4
  Failed saving throw results in tranquil vision 
  lasting 1d4+1 hours. The individual thus 
  affected sits upon the floor and sees things 
  going on about the monastery as they did 
  before C’nosretep’s conquest. This vision gives 
  a glimpse of the Master of the Lightstar and a 
  hint as to how to reach his chamber.
  
  225
  The pyramid of amra
  4[15]; Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; AL C; 
  CL/XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 1 level with bite, 
  regenerate (2/round), resists cold and electricity, vampire 
  weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  Area 15: Lower Balcony
  A balcony juts out from the lower portion of the dome of the Palace of 
  Celestial Flowers. It was once used by the Master of the Lotus to address 
  the disciples as they went through exercises in the courtyard. Now it 
  serves as a lookout spot during the nighttime hours for vampire spawn 
  that serve C’nosretep.
  Area 16: Sanctuary of  
  the Master of the Lotus
  This chamber served as the private sanctum of the Master of the Lotus. 
  It is a simple room devoid of most comfort items one would associate 
  with a great leader. Instead, it merely contains a dry-rotted sleeping mat, 
  meditation rug, neck board, several scroll cases, manuals of various sorts, 
  dried writing inks, reed brushes and a small locked chest.
  Within the chest is an amulet made in the shape of a lotus blossom with 
  an odd piece of engraving upon the back. A diary is within the chest as 
  well, and diagrams show an individual grasping the amulet of the darkstar 
  in one hand and the amulet of the lightstar in the other, with the medallion 
  of the lotus about their neck, all while under a curtain of stars. A perfect 
  lotus flower is at his feet.
  Treasure: The amulet is the medallion of the lotus, which is currently 
  incomplete. It is missing the rose diamond that is the centerpiece of the 
  item. The medallion does not function to open the secret passage beneath 
  the Lotus Throne without this central diamond. One of the books is the 
  History of the Monastery of Light, by Ozykathalin, worth 5000gp to a 
  collector that understands its value.
  Area 17: Third Floor  
  Dome and Chamber of  
  Celestial Light and Darkness
  Two features stand out as most impressive about this chamber, the first 
  being the intricate mosaic patterns of a comet, moon, and a sun with an 
  all-seeing eye in the center of it. The second impressive feature is the 
  domed ceiling that reflects the light with diamonds. The diamonds are set 
  in the ceiling so as to appear as the sky and constellations of more than 
  4,000 years ago. 
  Ancient writing in a lost language is within the mosaic upon the floor. 
  A read languages spell can read the words. The word hidden within 
  the sun and eye is “Solaris.” Hidden within the moon is the word 
  “Eclipsis.” The word hidden within the comet is “Ozykathalin.” This 
  last word is also the traditional name of each Master of the Lotus that is 
  born into the Order.
  The center of each mosaic acts as a teleportation disk if the following 
  N
  
  226
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  requirements are met: Holding the amulet of the darkstar in one’s hand 
  while standing over the moon and reciting the word “Eclipsis” teleports 
  the user and anyone within 10ft of her to Area 20. Holding the amulet of 
  the lightstar in one’s hand while standing upon the mosaic of the sun and 
  repeating the word “Solaris” instantly teleports the individual and anyone 
  within 10ft of her to Area 19.
  Standing over the comet with the amulet of the darkstar, amulet 
  of the lightstar, medallion of the lotus, and one of the shimmering 
  lotus blossoms causes the room to be bathed in a golden light. 
  Should the characters complete these actions and utter the name of 
  Ozykathalin, the shimmering lotus rises up into the air above their 
  heads and the room is bathed in a golden light. As the characters 
  watch, the shimmering lotus begins to spin and prismatic rays spray 
  about the room. Spinning ever faster, the lotus blossom transforms 
  until a beautiful rose diamond appears where the flower once was. 
  The perfect diamond slowly drops from the ceiling and fuses with the 
  medallion about the neck of the character who completed the ritual in 
  a brilliant flash of white light.
  Treasure: The medallion of the lotus master (New Magic Item 
  Appendix) is the key to triggering the secret trapdoor hidden beneath the 
  seat of the Throne of Lotus Master in Area 2.
  Area 18: Upper Balcony
  This upper balcony has two planters overgrown and filled with weeds. 
  A stone bench overlooks the courtyard and gives a view of the desert 
  beyond the oasis when not blocked by clouds of sand. Growing among 
  the weeds in a pool of disgusting-looking water is a shimmering lotus 
  flower. 
  Treasure: Each planter contains one shimmering lotus flower.  (New 
  Magic Item Appendix)
  Area 19: Dome of the Lightstar
  This chamber has no windows or doors and can be accessed only by 
  using the amulet of the lightstar. The room has a beautiful golden dome 
  lined with diamonds. A floor mosaic features a brilliant shining sun. As the 
  adventurers enter the room, the amulet of the lightstar glows brightly and 
  the shimmering form of Master Seung appears. The apparition smiles to 
  the adventurers and begins to speak.
  “Master Seung, called Solaris I am, and you have called me 
  across the depths of time and space; long has the time been since 
  I have had fortune to send my form into this place. Cursed is the 
  One who betrayed the Order of Stars. Blessed be those that seek 
  enlightenment that would heal his harms. Through the Halls of 
  Night to walk where bloodless fiends do hide and stalk. Seek you 
  there the candles’ flames and light them in Lotus Masters Name. 
  Place them at the points of the celestial eye and closer to the 
  ground will be the sky.”
  After reciting his oracle, the spirit of the Master of the Lightstar 
  dissipates into nothingness and the characters are teleported back to the 
  Chamber of Celestial Light and Darkness (Area 17).
  Area 20: Dome of the Darkstar
  Upon teleporting into this chamber, the characters are filled with a sense 
  of dread. The room is cold as ice and seems to drain the light from all light 
  sources. Mi’Tang the dark custodian dwells here. Mi’Tang arrogantly 
  taunts the characters as they arrive in his prison.
  “At last fools have gathered the darkstar, and I, Mi’Tang shall 
  once again bring death to the land of the living!”
  He then attacks, killing whoever he can.
  Mi’Tang the Dark Custodian: HD 14; HP 91; AC 3 [16]; Atk 
  touch (1d8 plus drain 1 level); Move 0 (fly 27); Save 3; AL C; 
  CL/XP 16/3200; Special: devour (2 levels/round), incorporeal 
  (hit only by silver or magic weapons), sense life (60ft), silence 
  of the grave, sunlight powerlessness, unnatural aura (30ft). 
  (The Tome of Horrors 4 47)
  Mi’Tang, prefect of the House of Dragon, and Master of the 
  Darkstar, was a rival of C’nosretep in life. Equal in nearly every 
  way to C’nosretep, he was master of the darker sects of the monastic 
  order. When C’nosretep brought his armies to the Monastery of Light, 
  Mi’Tang instructed his personal minions to stand down and fight only 
  if attacked. Mi’Tang figured that C’nosretep and his allies would 
  grind themselves down fighting Master Seung and others faithful to 
  Ozykathalin. Mi’Tang would then instruct his disciples to strike down 
  the survivors of the battle and take his place as master of the oasis of 
  Amra.
  Failing in his scheme, Mi’Tang was slain by C’nosretep. Set returned 
  Mi’Tang to this realm as a dark custodian, imprisoned in the Dome of the 
  Darkstar until such time as the amulet of the darkstar is returned to him. 
  As a further insult, Set turned many of Mi’Tang’s most loyal disciples into 
  non-corporeal undead. They lurk now on the fringes of the monastery and 
  pyramid, forever reminded of their failure, and inferiority to his chosen 
  champion.
  Tactics: Mi’Tang taunts and berates the characters, then strikes out 
  at the character grasping the amulet of the darkstar. Mi’Tang typically 
  attempts to slay his foe quickly and snatch up the amulet. Mi’Tang has 
  been trapped within the Dome of the Darkstar for about 500 years and is 
  thrilled that he may have the opportunity to escape this chamber with the 
  stone.
  If defeated, Mi’Tang cries out before fading from existence:
  “I am Mi’Tang the mighty! How dare you slay … me?”
  Treasure: An unlocked chest contains Mi’Tang’s former belongings. 
  Inside the chest are 4000gp and a gem of seeing. A +2 staff is on the floor 
  of the chamber.
  The Isle of the Pyramid
  The Pyramid of Amra rests upon a solitary island in the center of a lake 
  of pure blue water. Strange mists block it from view most of the time. The 
  step pyramid structure sits upon a plateau in the center of the island, the 
  lower half made of cyclopean blocks, the upper half held suspended by 
  four stone statues. The faces appear to have been re-carved and set with 
  different stone to take the likenesses of a snake, an ass, an insect, and a 
  crocodile. Below the plateau, shrouded in the mist of the lower island, 
  stand phalanxes of terracotta monks staring out from the cardinal points 
  of the pyramid.
  The characters may reach this island by the secret passage under 
  the throne at Area 2 in the palace. If so, they begin at Area P-1. If the 
  characters reach the island by using the barge from Area 5 or by other 
  aboveground means, they encounter the island detailed in the map above 
  and may proceed to the aboveground entrance to the pyramid at Area U-1.
  The characters may have tried to bypass the palace, as detailed above, 
  and may simply fly or use other means of transport to the island. They 
  quickly discover, however, that they lack the amulet of the lotus master, 
  and thus need to investigate the palace despite their intent to bypass it.
  
  227
  The pyramid of amra
  Pyramid of Amra:  
  Lower Chambers
  Area P-1: Entrance from the 
  Throne of Lotus Master
  A long subterranean pathway leads from the tunnel beneath the Throne 
  of the Lotus Master onward and up several flights of carved and little-
  used stone stairs until finally reaching the base of what must be the lower 
  pyramid. Ancient hieroglyphics along the walls feature the great heroes of 
  the brotherhood, as they are interred respectfully for all time.
  Area P-2: Trapped Hallway
  This small hallway is covered from floor to ceiling in gold leaf bas-
  relief of the ancients instructing their human subjects in the proper 
  preparation of the dead for transportation into the afterlife. The images 
  show mummification techniques and herbal knowledge.
  A trapped pressure plate closes the secret door to Area P-1 and 
  ceramic nozzles in the ceiling spray the gold-lined hallway with acid. 
  A trigger mechanism located on the bas-relief disarms the trap, draining 
  the acid through hidden holes in the floor to some unknown repository 
  below the hallway. Anyone in the hallway must save or take 2d6 points of 
  damage per round for 4 rounds.
  Area P-3: Tomb of Skulls
  Hundreds upon hundreds of skulls stare out at you from blank black 
  sockets as you open the stone slab that seals this chamber. Behind each 
  skull is a set of canopic jars containing the innards of the monk whose skull 
  is displayed with care within the niche. Dark figures — 12 vargouilles — 
  rise suddenly from the corners into the air as the characters advance.
  Vargouille (12): HD 1; HP 8x2, 7x3, 6x2, 5x2, 4x3; AC 
  8[11]; Atk bite (1d4); Move 0 (fly 12); Save 17; AL C; CL/
  XP 3/60; Special: permanent hit point loss (save avoids). 
  (Monstrosities 500)
  Area P-4.  
  Mausoleum of the Thirsting Ones
  Nine sarcophagi line this roughly rectangular room. If the characters 
  explore this area during daylight hours (if the Referee is feeling 
  particularly kind), the 8 vampire spawn that hide throughout the palace 
  and mausoleum are found resting here. Vampire spawn encountered and 
  destroyed in the palace should be taken from the numbers in this area of 
  the dungeon. Hidden behind the eighth sarcophagus is a secret entrance 
  to Area P-6.
  Feral Vampire Spawn (8): HD 7; HP 48, 45x2, 41x2, 40, 39, 37; 
  AC 4 [15]; Atk bite (2d8 plus level drain); Move 12; Save 9; 
  AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: darkvision 60ft, drain 1 l evel 
  with hit, regenerate (2/round), resists cold and electricity, 
  vampire weaknesses. (The Tome of Horrors 4 228)
  Tactics: If the characters enter this room during the daylight hours, 
  1d4 vampire spawn are already awakened in the chamber, as they need 
  little sleep. The others are resting or regenerating in their sarcophagus. 
  If the encounter occurs at night, subtract the number of vampire spawn 
  already defeated from the number originally found within the room. These 
  remaining vampires hide within the chamber as they hear the characters 
  approach. They target Clerics and Magic-Users first, Thieves second, 
  saving up for the Fighters last. They gang attack, seeking to drain as many 
  levels from these casters as they can. If Nestrij has been encountered 
  and forced to flee, she organizes the spawn within this chamber. Several 
  attempts should be made to dominate characters so that they can be turned 
  against their allies and eventually fed upon.
  Treasure: Hidden in the crypts are 10,174sp, 4948gp, and a wand of 
  phantasmal force (5 charges).
  Area P-5: Chamber of the Hand
  A mosaic of a large hand dominates this chamber within the heart of 
  the Lower Pyramid.
  The depression in the palm of the hand is the exact shape and size of the 
  amulet of lotus master. Placing the sacred amulet into the palm depression 
  causes a great rumbling and grinding sound to begin. The floor begins 
  to rise, moving the hand upward towards the ceiling. Characters have 2 
  rounds to either get out of the room or get onto the palm and ride it up 
  to Area U-4: The Lower Chamber of the Eye. Those remaining within 
  the room but not standing upon the hand must make a saving throw or be 
  crushed against the ceiling for 6d6 points of damage.
  After the players place the disk within the center of the palm, after much 
  complex grinding and turning of gears that have not moved in centuries, 
  the palm they stand upon turns in a spiral ever upward, and it looks as 
  if they are about to be crushed against the ceiling. At the last moment, a 
  circular opening twists above their heads; they are now in a new chamber. 
  The mosaic below the party’s feet is now of a different pattern and the 
  hand has become a great celestial eye with the amulet of lotus master a 
  strange, glowing iris within its center.
  Area P-6: False Crypt of C’nosretep
  This chamber is filled with the dust of a millennium. Its dark diorite walls 
  reflect little light. At one end of the chamber is a 9ft-long sarcophagus, 
  also of dark diorite stone. The top is carved in the likeness of C’nosretep 
  grasping a lotus within his hands and wearing a headband with a serpent 
  upon his brow.
  Touching or searching the diorite sarcophagus sets off a teleport trap 
  (see below).
  Sealed within this sarcophagus is Eshtartha, a lich and former advisor 
  and lover of C’nosretep. He wanted her to join him in eternity as a 
  vampire, but she defied him and instead transformed herself into a lich to 
  increase her powers as a spellcaster. For her audacity, C’nosretep tricked 
  her and caused her to set off the teleport trap, forever imprisoning her.
  The first character teleported into the sarcophagus actually trades places 
  with Eshtartha. The same happens if others touch the sarcophagus; the one 
  touching the stone is teleported in as the previous occupant is teleported 
  out.
  Victims inside the sarcophagus are affected by a time stop spell. Unless 
  somehow released from the sarcophagus, they are trapped inside forever 
  — awake and aware of the passage of time, but unable to take any action 
  other than to lie there and stare at the sealed lid above them.
  Sarcophagus: The only way to free anyone trapped inside without 
  taking their place is to break it open.
  Eshtartha, Lich: HD 13; HP 86; AC 0[19]; Atk hand (1d10 plus 
  automatic paralysis); Move 6; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 16/3200; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, appearance causes 
  paralytic fear, spells MU13 (5/5/5/4/4/2), touch causes 
  automatic paralysis.
  Spells: 1st—charm person (x2), magic missile, read 
  magic, sleep; 2nd—darkness 15ft radius, ESP, invisibility, 
  phantasmal force, web; 3rd—dispel magic, fly, lightning 
  
  228
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  bolt (x2), slow; 4th—confusion, fear, polymorph self, 
  wall of fire; 5th—animate dead, feeblemind, passwall, 
  teleport; 6th—disintegrate, project image.   
  Tactics: The only thought in the mind of Eshtartha is for revenge 
  against C’nosretep. To this end, as she appears before the characters, she 
  raises her hands and begs them not to attack her. If they press the attack, 
  she has no choice but to defend herself, but her only goal in combat is to 
  protect herself and flee. Should the characters listen to her, she tells them 
  the sad tale of a love betrayed and countless years of imprisonment. Then, 
  much to the surprise of the characters, she asks if she might join them as 
  they venture farther into the pyramid so that she may help them defeat 
  C’nosretep. Should they agree, they have gained a somewhat unusual ally, 
  but an ally nonetheless. Although she is truly evil through and through, 
  Eshtartha keeps her promise to help the characters against C’nosretep and 
  the other dangers in the remainder of the pyramid. After the adventure, 
  should Eshtartha survive, she parts company with the characters, but 
  promises to remain their ally should they desire such.
  Treasure: Hidden within the diorite sarcophagus are a 1000gp ruby 
  necklace and a staff of absorption.
  N
  
  229
  The pyramid of amra
  N
  
  230
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  Pyramid of Amra:  
  Upper Chambers
  Area U-1: Portal of the Eye and 
  First Test, Test of Hospitality
  Dominating this room is a 10ft-wide-by-10ft-tall arched doorway inlaid 
  with an eye set into the center of a triangle. Inscribed upon the Portal of 
  the Eye are words in a long forgotten script.
  “When come unbidden to our rest, politic and manners serve you 
  best. In order to proceed thus shall be the first test. Where rings of 
  metal doth fail the fist may do; thus shall this wisdom then guide you.”
  To open the door requires a simple knock loud enough to cause an echo, 
  which is simply done, as the door is hollow. Should there be more than 
  one knock or a knock that is loud, e.g. pounding on the door or trying to 
  break it down, a small symbol of discord placed upon the ceiling activates.
  Successfully disabling or bypassing the trapped door reveals a 
  hieroglyphic-lined chamber depicting various aspects of hospitality and 
  preparation for the afterlife to the recently deceased.
  Area U-2: The Second Test,  
  Test of Friendship 
  Runes upon this door, when deciphered, pose the basic question to 
  those who would pass its lapis portal. 
  “What is the greatest treasure that anyone could have?”
  Answering the word “friendship” automatically disables the trap and 
  the great lapis slab slides open to reveal the third test. Uttering any other 
  word triggers a symbol of insanity.
  Area U-3: The Final Test,  
  Test of Bravery 
  The letters on this door bear a chilling threat. 
  “No more riddles are there here for you and I. Succor your 
  courage and prepare to die.”
  Upon reading these words, a symbol of fear is triggered.
  Characters not driven away need only press their palm against the door 
  and it opens at a touch to reveal Area U-4: The Lower Chamber of the 
  Eye beyond.
  Area U-4: Lower Chamber of the Eye
  As the characters enter this large chamber, it seems to pulsate with some 
  unknown power that bears down upon them like a stack of bricks. The 
  feeling continues as they linger, as if someone were continually adding 
  another brick and yet another brick to the stack. After a few moments, this 
  sensation subsides.
  At the center of the room is a large mosaic image of an eye in the center 
  of a pyramid. The pupils are slits like those of snakes and a golden sconce 
  is imbedded in each of the three corners of the triangle surrounding the eye.
  If the characters entered the chamber through the front portals, 
  something appears to be missing from the center of the eye where the iris 
  would normally be.
  Secret doors are hidden in the centers of the eastern and western walls. 
  They are not trapped and lead into the maze beyond. The sconces at the 
  points of the pyramid are the keys to lowering the upper pyramid and 
  proceeding to the lair of C’nosretep and the Chamber of the Book. Close 
  examination of each sconce at the points of the triangle reveals these 
  barely noticeable runes.
  “Gathered by the candle flame, bring down the sky but not for 
  shame, as beyond the sky lie riches true, the master buried in his 
  tomb, Faithfully guards forever in spirit form, the Tome of Mind 
  and Body borne to us in the worlds fond spring, golden words of 
  Arden ring the truth which all devout should know, For the Wise 
  do see their powers grow. Seek its knowledge you who are Brave, 
  to your weakness be not slaves.”
  Area U-5: Chamber of the Monkey
  Once the burial place of all members of the House of the Monkey, this 
  chamber now houses Cie Tzu, a spectre and former master. Powerful evil 
  forces have influenced this room, and Cie Tzu enjoys the benefits of a 
  permanent protection from good spell.
  Cie Tzu, Spectre: HD 9; AC 2[17]; Atk 1 spectral weapon or 
  touch (1d8 plus level drain); Move 15 (fly 30); Save 6; AL C; 
  CL/XP 12/2000; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, drain 2 
  levels with hit.
  Tactics: As the characters enter, Cie Tzu sinks beneath the floor to rise 
  up behind the characters, striking out against Clerics and Magic-Users.
  Treasure: Cie Tzu’s crypt contains a wand of cold (21 charges).
  Area U-6: Mausoleum of the Wind 
  Stepping beyond the locked stone doorway is a square chamber with a 
  15ft-high ceiling. Suspended in the air in the center of the room is a blue 
  candle with a brilliant glowing flame.
  1st trap: Stepping into the chamber causes the entire floor, a wall of 
  stone, to be dispelled. In its place is a 150ft-deep pit (save or take 15d6 
  points of damage) with a 6in-wide ledge that runs around the edges of the 
  chamber. 
  A brave character can attempt to jump the distance and grab the candle 
  by rolling under their Dexterity 3 successive times (once to leap from 
  the ledge, once to grab the candle, and a final time to land on the ledge). 
  Characters could also use a lasso to rope the candle, although there is a 
  20% chance that such an attempt causes the candle to fall down into the 
  pit. Using spells such as levitate or fly also allows the easiest access to the 
  candle.
  2nd trap: Once the characters have the candle, they have 1 round to 
  leave the chamber before the door suddenly closes. Anyone standing in 
  the doorway might be crushed as the heavy door slams shut and deals 4d6 
  points of damage (save to avoid).
  3rd trap: As the door slams down, the ledge slides into the wall and 
  disappears. Anyone standing on the ledge falls into the pit (15d6 points 
  of damage). Since there is no ledge and nothing to grab onto, characters 
  
  231
  The pyramid of amra
  incapable of avoiding gravity get no save.
  Treasure: candle of the wise
  Area U-7: Chamber of the Dragon
  Beyond the locked secret stone portal is a single white candle floating 
  6ft above a raised dais in the center of the chamber. Coiled around the dais 
  is a death naga, its scales rasping dully against the stone as it turns its 
  slitted eyes to face the characters.
  Death Naga: HD 12; HP 72; AC 2 [17]; Atk bite (1d8), sting 
  (2d4 plus poison), tail slap (2d4 plus grab); Move 15; Save 3; 
  AL C; CL/XP 18/3800; Special: atrophic breath (usable every 
  1d4 rounds; 8d6 points of damage), constrict (2d4 points 
  of damage), immune to cold, charm and sleep, magic 
  resistance (25%), poison, spells (4/3/3/2/1), vulnerable to fire. 
  (The Tome of Horrors 4 153)
  Spells: 1st—charm person (x2), magic missile (x2); 
  2nd—ESP, mirror image (x2); 3rd—hold person (x2), 
  lightning bolt; 4th—charm monster, polymorph other; 
  5th—hold monster.
  Treasure: candle of the faithful
  Area U-8: Library of the Ancients 
  This hidden chamber contains rack upon rack of scrolls and tomes from 
  around the world gathered in times of peace by the Brotherhood of Light. 
  Now the dusty library is administrated by the Brotherhood of Set, who 
  fear that destroying the arcane knowledge held within these tomes may 
  bring other powers into play.
  A strangely beautiful being with the head of an ass turns toward the 
  characters as they enter and begins chanting in an arcane tongue.
  Rhylon, Asswere: HD 10; HP 64; AC 4[15]; Atk bite (1d4) or +2 
  staff (1d6+2); Move 12; Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 14/2600; Special: 
  bray (save or affected by confusion spell for 1d4+3 rounds), 
  harmed only by silver weapons, spells (4/4/3/2/2). (The Tome 
  of Horrors Complete 550)
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile (x2), shield; 
  2nd—ESP, invisibility, phantasmal force, web; 3rd—
  dispel magic, fly, lightning bolt; 4th—confusion, fear; 
  5th—feeblemind, teleport.
  Equipment: +2 staff, scroll of dispel magic, scroll of wall 
  of fire, scroll of pyrotechnics, scroll of fireball.
  Rhylon is the only truly living being allowed in the Pyramid of Amra. 
  He is keeper of the tomes and scrolls within this great repository, and 
  spends many long hours here examining their wealth of knowledge that 
  could increase his arcane power.
  Tactics: Rhylon despises humans and humanoids, and never assumes 
  his humanoid form — he considers it weak and ugly. He undoubtedly has 
  knowledge of the characters thanks to their destruction of doors and setting off 
  traps throughout the pyramid, and the loud grating noise of the hand rising from 
  the bowels of the structure. Rhylon burns through his attack spells as quickly as 
  he can. If hard pressed in combat and he feels that he could die, he attempts to 
  flee using whatever means necessary and available to ensure his survival.
  Treasure: The shelves are lined with various books.
  • 18 of the books contain historical and genealogical data that would be of 
  value to loremasters and sages. These books are valued at 3d6x100gp each.
  • One of the books is a manual of intelligence.
  • One of the books is a manual of beneficial exercise.
  • One of the books is a treatise on demonology and summoning by 
  the noted summoner Yelseila Warcret. It includes the following spells: 
  conjuration of demons, contact other plane and gate. Each of these spells 
  has a +15% chance of arcane spell failure on the first casting, as Yelseila was 
  quite mad and his spidery scrawl is suspect at best. The tome includes the true 
  names of 6 outsiders who may be contacted with the spells in this book. Each 
  hour spent dabbling in the deep mysteries compiled in this tome incurs a 1% 
  per hour cumulative chance of the reader going completely insane, no saving 
  throw. The names of these outsiders are left to the Referee’s discretion. 
  • One is the Book of Noble Accomplishments. (New Magic Item 
  Appendix)
  Area U-9: Chamber of the Hands
  A secret door opens into this chamber. At the far end of the chamber is a 
  10ft-wide dais. Over the dais, 6ft in the air, floats a single glowing candle.
  Twenty feet beyond the entrance to this chamber is a hidden pressure 
  plate that, when triggered, releases a thin layer of fast-drying glue across 
  the 40ft section of floor before the altar. One round later, a ceramic sprayer 
  drops from the ceiling and begins spraying acid throughout the entire 40ft 
  area in front of the dais. Anyone in the area must make a saving throw or 
  become stuck in place as the glue traps their feet to the floor. A character 
  can pull himself free by rolling beneath his strength score (with a +10 
  penalty). The acid deals 2d6 points of damage per round for 5 rounds. 
  Treasure: candle of bravery.
  Area U-10: 
  Upper Chamber of the Eye
  If the characters place the three candles into the sconces at the points of 
  the pyramid symbol in the center of Area 4: Lower Chamber of the Eye, 
  candlelight fills the room as a grating of stone and metal starts its low rumblings 
  within the deep recesses of the pyramid. The very floor the characters stand 
  upon feels as if it is rising to crush them against the dusty limestone ceiling. 
  The ceiling vanishes before their eyes in a flash, however, as the top portion 
  of the Pyramid of Amra descends to meet the lower portion, sealing off this 
  chamber with a new roof of glimmering blue enameled stone. Four stone 
  statues now occupy the corners of the chamber, their megalithic hands against 
  the roof as if their very eminence supports the starred sky above.
  The new chamber is a perfect square that appears to have no entrances 
  and exits. If the characters left the amulet of the lotus master within the 
  depression in the center of the eye, the room is bathed with a shimmering 
  light, an orb forming in the center of the room just above the characters. 
  The image of a gentle-looking man of great grace and indeterminate age 
  gazes at the group with pure benevolence and speaks:
  “Know that I am Ozykathalin, first and last Master of the Lotus 
  within this ancient and holy place. I am he who knew the voice of 
  Arden; I am he who strides in the realms of light, purest of all energy 
  forever alive beyond the Gates of Wisdom. Wise, too, are you who 
  have discovered the secrets of this place, but one secret still you do 
  seek. To gain it, you must defeat he who was the betrayer. Know
  Quest Candles: Candle of the 
  Wise, Candle of the Faithful, 
  and Candle of Bravery 
  These three candles are the three marks of success at the 
  challenges presented. They have no further magical abilities other 
  than as necessary components to access the later stage of this 
  adventure.
  
  232
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  you that C’nosretep’s worst betrayal was not to those who 
  nurtured him, but to his own soul. Lost in his self-hatred, he did 
  not realize the gifts that friendship and brotherhood offer. As 
  allies you have gained much and risked much in your sojourn 
  thus far, and to those who risk all for one another and their faith 
  are granted the greatest of treasures. I grant you one boon before 
  I make the way open to you. Ask of me what you will, and should 
  it be within the powers of light to grant this thing, it is yours. 
  Ozykathalin has spoken.”
  Ozykathalin grants the characters one limited wish before lifting his 
  hands to reveal a shimmering staircase that leads to a hidden chamber 
  (Area U-11A) among the “stars.” The shimmering stairs are made of 
  insubstantial light, but are easily climbed.
  Note: If the characters did not place the amulet of the lotus master 
  within the eye in the center of the triangle before placing the candles at 
  each point of the triangle, the floor still rises, and the ceiling descends as 
  before. However, much to the dismay of the characters, the 4 statues that 
  once supported the upper portion of the pyramid animate and attack.
  Stone Golem (4): HD 12; HP 60x4; AC 5[14]; Atk fist (3d8); 
  Move 6; Save 3; CL/XP 16/3200; Special: +1 or better magic 
  weapon to hit, immune to most magic.
  If the characters search the ceiling after the golems are destroyed, they 
  note a secret panel about 20ft above the floor of the chamber. Beyond the 
  secret panel is Area U-11A: Stairway into Darkness. The distance to the 
  secret panel must somehow be navigated by jumping, climbing, flying, or 
  some other magical means.
  Area U-11: Three Final Tests
  Area U-11A: Stairway into Darkness
  This 10ft-long, 5ft-wide stairway is shrouded in deepest blackness.
  The stairway is bathed in a darkness 15ft radius spell. 
  Area U-11B: First Stone Door 
  A stone door set onto a 5ft-wide stone platform is at the top of the stairs. 
  The door is 6ft tall and is carved with the likeness of a youthful man of great 
  physical build, kneeling before the dark god Set. The dark god towers over the 
  man with his arm outstretched. The man grasps Set’s wrist with his smaller 
  hands, and appears to be drinking blood from the wrist of the god. Anyone 
  touching the door triggers a flesh to stone trap (save or be turned to stone). 
  As if that wasn’t bad enough, the stairs behind the characters suddenly 
  turn into a ramp and the stone door slides forward, pushing the characters 
  onto the slide. Characters take 2d6 points of damage from the tumbling 
  fall. If a character is turned to stone by the door, one random character 
  takes 3d6 points of damage as the stone character lands on him. The 
  petrified character also takes 3d6 points of damage, and may be missing a 
  finger or a hand when restored to flesh. If a petrified character is reduced 
  to 0 hit points from the fall, hopefully the other characters remembered 
  to take hair and skin samples of the victim before the adventure and have 
  available a handy scroll of resurrection!
  Area U-11C: Second Door
  This door features the carved image of Set, with C’nosretep sitting upon 
  his lap, rewriting the Tome of Mind and Body with a raven quill feather 
  in his hand.
  This door is sealed with a wizard lock and trapped with dispel magic. 
  The dispel magic is retributively set to go off the second a knock spell is 
  cast. The intent of this trap is to remove any magical effects the characters 
  cast while preparing themselves for the final showdown with C’nosretep. 
  The knock spell opens the door successfully.
  Area U-12: Tomb of C’nosretep 
  The second door opens into a chamber shrouded in magical darkness 
  and filled with a great aura of evil. A quiet, reserved chuckle reverberates 
  off the low ceiling.
  A darkness permanently wrought within this room by minions of Set 
  negates the power of any light spells, instead rendering a murky dimness 
  within the chamber. The twilight gloom reveals a golden sarcophagus 
  set against the middle of the western wall. The unholy symbol of Set 
  carved into the sarcophagus grants C’nosretep +2 to attacks, saves and 
  damages, and prevents any turning attempts. A narrow stone staircase in 
  the southwestern corner of the chamber leads upward into the darkness 
  beyond.
  As the utter darkness is swept away, C’nosretep, stripped to the waist, 
  stands to greet the characters. His lips are pulled back in a deadly smile to 
  reveal his gleaming white fangs, and his head is shaved but for a long braid 
  down his back. His pale, bluish skin ripples with muscle and a deep inner 
  strength. A cruel voice calls to the characters as they enter the chamber.
  “So champions, you seek to take the book from C’nosretep? 
  Very well, let your screams reverberate from the Pyramid of Amra 
  for all time. Know as your souls howl toward hell that it was the 
  Champion of Set who sent you on your path. Just as I defeated 
  Ozykathalin, so too shall your blood slake my undying thirst!”
  C’nosretep, Vampire: HD 15; HP 101; AC –2[21]; Atk 3 strikes 
  (4d8+2) or bite (1d10 plus level drain); Move 26 (fly 18); Save 
  5; CL/XP 18/3800; Special: alertness, charm gaze (–2 to 
  save or charmed), deadly strike (per monk ability), deflect 
  missiles, drain 2 levels with bite, gaseous form, immune to 
  non-magic weapons, immune to sleep and charm, only 
  killed in coffin, +5 total damage with weapons, +2 saves 
  vs. paralysis and poison, regenerate (3/round), shapeshift, 
  summon rats or 3d6 wolves, 3 weaponless attacks per round. 
  Thieving Skills: Climb 99%, Tasks/Traps 100%, Hear 6 in 6, 
  Hide 100%, Silent 100%, Locks 100%
  Tactics: C’nosretep seeks to charm the strongest fighter or thief in the 
  party before unleashing a series of violent blows against a paladin or other 
  fighter type, attempting to stun and spawn them as quickly as possible for 
  use against the characters later in the fight. If C’nosretep is defeated, he 
  howls in rage and throws his fists in the air. He turns to vapor and flows 
  into his nearby sarcophagus in a vain attempt to heal.
  Sarcophagus of C’nosretep: This stone sarcophagus, covered in 
  semiprecious jewels and gold leaf, has the seal of Set placed upon its 
  jeweled lid. Destroying the seal dispels the darkness in the chamber, and 
  takes away C’nosretep’s bonuses. If this happens, C’nosretep becomes 
  visibly weaker. The seal itself may be dispelled for 1d4 rounds if a dispel 
  magic is cast on it. The pulsing black stone seal is carved in the shape of 
  an asp atop the sarcophagus.
  The sarcophagus itself is very heavy and tough. Within the sarcophagus 
  are the following items and C’nosretep’s body if he was reduced to fewer 
  than 0 hit points in the battle.
  Treasure: Approximately 2000gp worth of precious gems and gold 
  encrusts the lid of the sarcophagus. Within it is a solid gold funeral mask 
  of the first Master of the Lotus, valued at 5000gp, as well as the items 
  found upon C’nosretep’s person.
  Area U-13: Final Test of Wisdom 
  A plain stone door stands at the top of the staircase.
  Nearly invisible hieroglyphics upon the door reveal these hidden  
  words:
  
  233
  The pyramid of amra
  “The Words of Arden lie beyond this door, ancient tome of the 
  wisdom bound in stone, to win it you must thwart this poem. A 
  Monkey has it, and so does a Cat. The Merchant often has his 
  finger on it; Judges and Monks seek to perfect the art of it.”
  The answer to the riddle is “balance.” If answered correctly, the 
  stone slab slides away to reveal a chamber beyond. Answering the riddle 
  incorrectly sets off a crushing ceiling trap, unless already detected and 
  disarmed. The ceiling descends in 1 round, filling the landing and the 
  staircase, and dealing 10d6 points of damage to all targets in a 5ft-by-20ft 
  space.
  Area U-14: Chamber of the Book
  Sitting atop a stone pedestal in the center of this tiny room is the Tome 
  of Mind and Body. (New Magic Item Appendix)
  
  234
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  Introduction
  The Isle of Eliphaz is an adventure for characters of at least 14th level. In 
  the course of the adventure, the characters face the powerful lich Athransma 
  in the hidden Maze of Ancients. Careful searching and sharp wits help the 
  characters avoid being led astray by the devices of Athransma in his goal 
  to awaken the primal Eliphaz. The group should include a thief. The party 
  should also include a druid, a magic-user, and at least two fighters. Under 
  no circumstances should any adventuring group set out without a cleric.
  Island of Eliphaz 
  Keyed Locations
  Area A: A Mysterious Island at Sea
  It is said among sages and treasure-hunters that on the Isle of Eliphaz, 
  located in the Crescent Sea nearly 200 miles off the coast of the Grand 
  Duchy of Reme, the false tomb of an ancient wizard lies buried. Local 
  legend flies as far as Bard’s Gate that a great evil god lies in a slumber on 
  the isle, waiting to be awakened by some poor unfortunate souls. Indeed, 
  it is said by all that this is an island to be feared, and no local sailors ever 
  agree to an attempt to reach its shores.
  The island is small and rocky, with only two places available for egress 
  by ship. The beaches of this island are nondescript, though the rocks in the 
  channels leading to them are treacherous. These passages are so vicious 
  that any ship with a draft of greater than 6ft has an 80% chance of running 
  aground, with half that chance of inflicting so much damage to the ship 
  that it begins to sink. 
  The island itself is a typical one for this region, with coniferous trees, 
  seabirds, and thick undergrowth of brush. This land is curious in that no 
  magic of any sort functions on or around it. In fact, all active magic is 
  nullified for anyone within 50ft of the island — a potentially lethal hazard 
  for anyone attempting to reach the island by air. This effect is the result of 
  a permanent anti-magic shell cast on the island by the evil wizard before 
  his demise.
  Area B: Crater of Eliphaz
  Once on the island, a quick search by the characters discovers a low 
  volcanic cone within the center. If they make their way to the edge of the 
  cone, characters can spy a small tower with a single door and no windows 
  sitting atop the volcano’s cooled cone in the very center of the crater. Any 
  character falling down the slope takes 4d6 points of damage from sharp 
  rocks and the distance of the fall.
  Area C: The Tower of the Guardian
  The tower is made of dark stone, the door of fine wood. Strangely 
  enough, the door is unlocked.
  Area C1: Bottom Floor 
  Once inside the tower, the intruders discover some old furniture: a table, 
  four chairs, and an old wooden staircase leading up. Hidden in the table 
  is a note from the wizard and a deck of many things. The deck is special, 
  and anyone drawing a card has double the normal chance of drawing a 
  negative one. When a character draws a card, if the card is a good result, 
  ignore it and have them draw again. If the second card is a bad result, 
  apply those results. If this second card is a good result, apply the results. 
  The deck does not function until the anti-magic shell is turned off, of 
  course. The note is a challenge from the wizard to:
  “Trust Lady Luck in your quest for my tomb.”
  In the floor of this level is a secret trapdoor that leads to Area C4: 
  Passage to the False Crypts, the dungeon below the tower.
  The Isle of Eliphaz
  By Casey W. Christofferson and Bill Webb
  N
  
  235
  The isle of eliphaz
  Nothing of value is on this level of the tower, but on the fifth round after 
  characters enter, a grey ooze attacks from above. It is nearly impossible 
  to detect due to its color.
  Grey Ooze: HD 3; HP 21; AC 8[11]; Atk 1 strike (2d6); Move 
  1; Save 14; AL N; CL/XP 5/240; Special: Acid (metal must 
  save vs. acid or rot), immune to spells, heat, cold, and blunt 
  weapons. 
  Area C2: Rickety Stairs
  The stairs are old and rickety but can easily support the characters. 
  They lead up to the second level.
  Area C3: Second Floor 
  The second level of the tower is not a very nice place. All that it 
  N
  
  236
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  contains is the old bedroom furniture of the wizard, a couple of useless 
  papers, scrolls, books, a fireplace, and a golden statue of a cat that is about 
  18 inches tall. This is a really mean guardian feline named Natasha. She 
  circles and hisses, and attacks when she gets within 15ft of an opponent. 
  She is particularly nasty since she has damage reduction and all magic 
  weapons temporarily lose their enhancement on the island due to the anti-
  magic shell. 
  Natasha the Guardian Feline: HD 1; HP 8; AC 9[10]; Atk 2 claws
  (1d4), bite (1d3); Move 12; Save 17; AL N; CL/XP 16/3100; 
  Special: magic resistance 25%+, nine lives (HD, AC, Atk, Save, 
  CL/XP increase with each death). (New Monster Appendix)
  Secret Panel and Locked Box: In the fireplace is a secret panelthat contains 
  a locked box (Open Locks –20%). Within the box is a key and two keyholes. 
  The key appears to fit both of the keyholes. The left hole lowers the anti-magic 
  shell surrounding the island. The right triggers a powerful dispel magic that goes 
  off in the tower, probably destroying most of the characters’ magic. All active 
  spells immediately fail, and magical items have a 15% chance of becoming 
  normal. Natasha has a 15% chance of being destroyed as well.
  Athransma found it necessary in his studies of the Ancients to craft this 
  box. He intended for it to dampen all magic upon the island in the event 
  that one of his experiments went awry within the Maze of Ancients. In 
  addition, it was his hope that treasure-hunters and looters would be put off 
  at the immediate loss of their powers upon stepping onto the shore. Much 
  to the chagrin of Athransma, the spells on the box, although powerful, are 
  not strong enough to overcome the bindings that the Ancients placed upon 
  the elemental prince. Athransma had hoped his little box of tricks would 
  work. Athransma added the second keyhole purely out of spite.
  Area C4: Passage to the False Crypts
  The trapdoor in Area C1: Bottom Floor leads down to a T-intersection 
  of 10ft-by-10-ft tunnels. At the end of each tunnel is a door. To the left are a 
  false trapped door and a pressure plate that releases a stone block that falls 
  in the third 10ft section of the hall (6d6 points of damage, save to avoid). The 
  center passage leads to a door with a poison needle trap on the handle (save 
  or die) and a wizard lock. Behind this door is a small pentagram inscribed on 
  the floor. This symbol radiates magic, but has no other function.
  Area C5: The False Tomb
  The right passage leads to the first false tomb. When the door is opened, 
  a magic mouth spell triggers evil laughter and the voice of the wizard 
  screams:
  “Now prepare to die the most painful of all deaths!”
  The room then fills with a fireball that is actually an illusion generated 
  by phantasmal force and does 2d6 points of damage to any who fail a save 
  to disbelieve the illusion.
  The room contains a large golden calf, a tomb, and a bronze chest. 
  Three rounds after the room is entered, the golden calf reveals its true 
  nature, metamorphosing into a gorgon. It immediately attacks, breathing 
  at anyone within range.
  Gorgon: HD 8; HP 54; AC 2[17]; Atk gore (2d6); Move 12; 
  Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; Special: breath turns to stone 
  (4/day, 60ft range, save avoids). 
  Tactics: Moo! Charge, breathe, charge, breathe, charge, etc.
  The chest is unlocked and contains a pile of gold (in reality a patch of 
  yellow mold covered in a phantasmal force), and potion bottle wrapped 
  with a note written on leather. The note is from the wizard.
  Yellow Mold: HD n/a; AC n/a; Atk 1d6 damage plus 
  spore cloud; Move 0; Save n/a; AL N; CL/XP 3/60; Special: 
  poisonous spore cloud, killed by fire. 
  Above the chest is a moldering tapestry depicting an island nearby. 
  The island on the tapestry reveals the true location of the wizard’s tomb, 
  and was left here by mistake. If the ancient writing on the tapestry is 
  deciphered (read languages, for example), the location of the new island 
  can be found by the following means: The new island is known as the 
  Island of the Ancients. If characters compare this map to the zodiacal 
  symbols found on the dolmen of the pierced stone along the northern 
  banks of the Isle of Eliphaz, they find that the hole in the center of the disk 
  there points directly to the island’s location. It lies just off the shore of the 
  Isle of Eliphaz, beneath the waves. See Area D: Dolmen of the Pierced 
  Stone for details on raising the Isle of The Ancients.
  Treasure: The bottle is marked “potion of stone-flesh, 1 dose,” but is in 
  reality a dose of extremely powerful acid. Anyone or anything onto which 
  this is poured takes 10d6 points of acid damage. The note reads:
  “Fools! You have failed in your grave-robbing ways to find my 
  tomb, for it is far away, and this is just a hoax. Now, you idiots 
  must decide which of your stony comrades you will save, for in 
  ten minutes, all of the statues will turn to dust. Go home and 
  become shopkeepers, for you are failures as grave-robbers. Lick 
  your wounds and rejoice that I have allowed you to live, for I 
  could have chosen not to do so.” 
  The note is signed, Athransma the Merciful.
  
  237
  The isle of eliphaz
  The coffin is made of common stone, and contains a skeleton holding a 
  wooden staff and adorned in fake jewelry. The robe is a cloak of poison. 
  The only real piece of treasure is a gem of seeing.
  Area D: Dolmen of the Pierced Stone
  This dolmen on the north shore of the island is composed of several 
  standing stones carved with various arcane or zodiacal symbols, as well 
  as symbols easily recognized runes of earth and water. A stone disk stands 
  balanced upon an altar of large stones. The center of the disk has a hole in 
  it approximately the size of a fist. 
  “Into the eye of the disk do place that which makes secret 
  things revealed, thus does the light then find Isle of The Ancients 
  divined.”
  Placing the gem of seeing into the hole in the center of the disk causes 
  a great beam of light to flare forth from the disk. The disk itself swivels 
  on its altar to point a short distance into the ocean. The water boils as the 
  beam strikes it, and the island of Eliphaz rumbles and shakes beneath the 
  characters’ feet. After a few moments, a second island rises from the waves 
  not far from the shore of the first island. The second island is shrouded in 
  a silvery mist as steam billows from the seawater. The gem of seeing is 
  completely consumed in the process of raising the Isle of the Ancients.
  Isle of the Ancients
  This small island just off the coast of the Isle of Eliphaz is shrouded 
  in steaming mist generated from the Dolmen of the Pierced Stone. 
  Walking upon the island is treacherous as the entire island is concealed 
  by a permanent obscuring mist. Furthermore, the footing is very slippery 
  from a rank-smelling muck of ankle-deep silt, which has coated the island 
  during its years of submersion beneath the waves. Movement is reduced 
  to one-quarter normal. Any character moving at a higher speed or jumping 
  must make a saving throw or fall prone into the mud and seaweed.
  Entrance to the Maze of Ancients
  Two huge pillars carved with images weathered and covered in thick 
  barnacles dominate the entrance, but whatever symbolism the carvers of 
  these pillars left behind has been lost to the ravages of the sea. Between the 
  two pillars sits a low shrine-like structure carved of the same materials as 
  the weathered pillars. A tight-fitting door sits in the center of the southern 
  wall of the shrine.
  When the characters clear away the muck and seaweed, they reveal 
  a finely crafted bronze door. Bright green with the patina of age and 
  saltwater, the door is inscribed with the following passage:
  “So have you found the entrance to my tomb! Know that 
  through the Maze of Ancients you must pass. Be warned: Their 
  evil is greater than my own. Tread here and breathe your last, for 
  Athransma the Merciful am I. Turn back thieves or surely die!”
  The door to the Maze of Ancients is trapped with a fireball spell that 
  triggers the moment the door is touched (7d6 points of damage, save for 
  half). A wizard lock also seals the door. Casting knock on the door may 
  open it; however, it still triggers the trap, which may be disarmed by a 
  dispel magic.
  Once the characters open the door, they see a stone staircase descending 
  hundreds of feet deep into the heart of the island, ending at Area M1.
  Area M1: Portal of the Ancients
  At the end of the hallway is the Portal of the Ancients. The Portal of 
  the Ancients is 30ft tall by 20ft wide and engraved with ancient celestial 
  holy symbols that some unknown hand scarred and desecrated long ago. 
  The engravings once featured Lawful and celestial power being brought 
  to bear against the elemental chaos of a primeval world, forging it and 
  shaping it into a semblance of order. 
  Writing upon the portal is in an ancient tongue, decipherable with read 
  languages:
  “So did they who came instruct in all manner of goodness 
  and power over chaos, thus here did we build for them a 
  remembrance of what was left behind, eternally restful by device. 
  Thus through this door may those with wisdom glean their sage 
  advice. Bringers of chaos and hatred enter not into their sacred 
  womb for thus trapped forever find their doom. Those who bring 
  with them nature’s gift, welcome be and not bereft for close you 
  are to a power true, within Letek’re stones lies the answer sought 
  by you. Only one with true balance may complete the task, setting 
  the bound god upon the path of natural order at last.”
  Area M2:  
  The Trapezoidal Conflagration
  This room has 6 doors, three of which lead into the maze itself, one 
  that leads to the bottomless bowels of the mountain, and two false doors 
  that are actually part of the wall. Searching for which doors lead out into 
  the maze and which doors lead nowhere or do nothing at all should be an 
  Maze of the Ancients
  This area below the Isle of Ancients is the lair of several 
  encephalon gorgers and the tomb of Athransma the Lich. The 
  Maze of Ancients is so named for the bodies of ancient outsiders 
  that are encased in pillars of pure energy.
  Maze Features
  The maze itself is made up of 10ft-wide pathways that twist 
  over a deep chasm that apparently falls off to nothingness. An 
  additional magic field, functioning regardless of the status of 
  the anti-magic shell — one in place due to the presence of the 
  Ancients — renders all magical levitation, flying, dimension door, 
  or teleport ineffective. Boots of flying and spells such as wind walk 
  do not work normally within the maze. The spells work normally 
  on the pathway itself, but they do not work to move across a path 
  from one section of maze to the next. This field is in effect only 
  on the actual path itself, and does not impede magic in any of the 
  various chambers within the maze unless otherwise noted. Should 
  all the Ancients be destroyed or released, should Eliphaz be 
  released from his confinement, or should all three Letek’re stones 
  be brought together, this effect is eliminated. 
  Individuals falling off of the side of the maze must roll below 
  their dexterity score with a +4 penalty to catch the edge of the 
  pathway. If you are a generous Referee, you might allow a second 
  dexterity check (with a +8 penalty, of course) so a falling character 
  has a last chance to grab hold of something to save himself. 
  Should the character fall beyond 100ft without being rescued, he 
  is effectively dead.
  
  238
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  1 square = 10 feet
  N
  
  239
  The isle of eliphaz
  interesting challenge for the players.
  Door A: Door of the Narrow Path
  This door leads into the maze, but opening it activates a spear trap that 
  strikes the person in the doorway (1d8 points of damage, save to avoid).
  Door B: False Door.
  The door is locked, but if opened reveals only a stone wall.
  Door C: Door of the Far Path
  This door allows passage into the maze but is trapped to release a hail 
  of poisoned needles that hit anyone within 10ft of the portal (save avoids; 
  1d4 points of damage plus poison, save or die).
  Door D: False Door
  The door is locked, but when opened reveals only a stone wall.
  Door E: Door of the Dark Path
  When opened, an empty void is revealed and the 10ft floor section 
  immediately in front of the door tilts, casting the opener into the trackless 
  void from which there is no escape (save avoids).
  Door F: Door of the Den
  A wizard lock protects this door. When opened, it releases the grimlek 
  demons from Area M6: Den of the Grimleks.
  Area M3: The Maze of the Ancients
  The stone pathway is 10ft wide. It is all that exists between the 
  characters and oblivion. In the near darkness they can see other parts of 
  the path about 10ft away in several different directions.
  The magical effect of the Ancients prevents magical flying, levitating 
  and wind walking effects to merely cross directly through the maze. 
  Anyone attempting such an action finds that his spell fails. The chasm 
  below the pathway is effectively bottomless. Of course, fast thinking, 
  ropes, bungee jumping off the side and catching a falling comrade are 
  interesting game possibilities.
  Area M4: Pillar of the Ancients
  Here, seemingly suspended in the air within a pillar of pure light energy, 
  is a wizened and hairless figure sitting in the crouched lotus position. His 
  four fingertips are pressed together in a contemplative state, and beautiful 
  wings like mother of pearl are folded behind him. A strong aura of Law 
  and justice emanates from the glowing image though it does not move 
  or even breathe. The ancient winged figure is dressed in a simple robe 
  and his oversized eyes are closed. At the base of the pillar of energy, the 
  characters note strange writing of an unknown language glowing along 
  the side of a metallic disk upon which the Ancient sits.
  The language upon the base of the pillar is druidic; therefore, it is quite 
  possible that it is unknown to many of the characters and requires a read 
  languages spell to uncover its true meaning without a druid present. The 
  words upon the pillar read:
  “Guardians here for eternity our sacrifice keeps primal beast 
  beneath, trapped here with us by our leave. So disks of stone in 
  Nature’s hand thus with a sense of balance stand. Force of will 
  upon a knotted brow rebukes the mountain god for once and all.”
  The two remaining pillars of the Ancients cannot be moved by any 
  force, or entered without a complex ritual that involves dampening 
  the energy field that is generated around them using the pedestals in 
  Area M9.
  A druid channeling elemental energy through the Pillar of Ancients 
  using that pillar’s corresponding Letek’re stone generates the following 
  effect: The pillar fills the Ancient with energy as the pillar itself 
  dissipates, releasing the astral deva from his self-imposed slumber. 
  Dissolving the pillar of light has the secondary effect of breaking one 
  of the two remaining seals that bind Eliphaz beneath the main island’s 
  volcanic cone.
  Ancient (Astral Deva)
  The deva greets the characters, addressing the druid of the group if 
  there is one.
  “Ten thousand of your years have we bound ourselves to this 
  place. In doing, we bound the one called Eliphaz to the island 
  of his name. Great was his power for destruction, and hatred 
  did he have for all manner of green life, and the life which 
  bleeds precious red blood, for his is a heart of burning fire, 
  and a mind of wrath. Sad am I that one of the three has been 
  lost to this place. For now, with only two who remain, sworn 
  to defend your world against the elemental. I fear we are not 
  strong enough to save precious mortal lives from his burning 
  vengeance. Unless …”
  The deva suggests that within the bound crater of Eliphaz the 
  elemental belt lies hidden. If the other Ancient is freed from the Pillar of 
  the Ancient, the deva acts as a diversion, allowing the characters time to 
  slip within the mouth of the volcano and grab the elemental belt, which 
  allows them one chance to send Eliphaz to rest forever. Should the 
  characters agree to this course of action, the deva summons his mace to 
  his hand and vanishes to stand watch over the rim of the crater, waiting 
  for Eliphaz to rise.
  Area M5: Pillar of the Ancient
  As with Area M4, this Ancient is also in a state of meditation 
  within the pillar of light that is so deep no mortal power, not even 
  a wish spell, can remove them from it. An aura of Law exudes from 
  the pillar in a 40ft radius that causes Chaotic individuals to become 
  uncomfortable. Athransma appears immune to this effect. The light 
  from the pillar is as bright as daylight in a 20ft radius from the pillar 
  itself.
  Ancient (Astral Deva)
  The Druidic writing around the base of this disk reads:
  “When angels again absorb their light, the slumbering one 
  shall rise. Turned from nature in his wrath did the fiery god 
  despise every living thing upon which he set his burning eyes: 
  A word of pause to nature’s servants who would bring down the 
  pillars of light, our strength was not enough before to win that 
  brutal fight. Is your faith in earth now great enough to set the 
  balance right?”
  Note: A druid, and only a druid, using the correct Letek’re stone may 
  dissolve the power of the pillar of light. If this deva is the first one freed, 
  use the description in Area M4. If this deva is the second freed, the pillar 
  of light dissipates as before, filling the Ancient with light and recharging 
  his powers. It looks to the characters and says:
  
  240
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  “We must hurry to my ally’s aid. The beast rouses from 
  slumber, and the elemental belt must be gained. We shall hold it 
  away from you as long as we can.”
  It then summons its mace to its hand and teleports to the rim of the 
  volcano as a rumble shakes the Maze of Ancients. See Final Confrontation 
  section for information on how to run the end of this adventure.
  Area M6: Den of the Grimleks
  This chamber was once a place of divine meditation within the 
  presence of the Ancients. Held here in temporal stasis are 10 grimlek 
  demons. When Door F in Area M2: The Trapezoidal Conflagration 
  is opened, they are released from their rest and allowed to hunt freely 
  within the maze. If the door to this chamber is instead opened first, 
  these beasts are also released, confronting the characters with a pack 
  of dangerous, snarling beasts. This chamber once held the desecrated 
  Letek’re stone, and was plundered by Tlip Lopodi and his encephalon 
  gorgers.
  Demon, Grimlek (10): HD 5+3; HP 43, 40x3, 39, 38, 37x3, 34; 
  AC 5[14]; Atk bite (2d6); Move 24; Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 
  7/600; Special: continuous damage (bite, 1d6 automatic 
  damage until detached), disease (save or develop 
  lycanthropy at next full moon). (Monstrosities 95)
  Area M7: Shrine of the Ancients
  This sacred shrine of the Ancients can be reached only by somehow 
  crossing the 10ft-wide abyss from the pathway to the shrine. Players 
  are likely to invent any number of ingenious methods by which their 
  characters can cross the gap. They may simply leap across or attempt 
  some other means of passage. Remember that flying, levitation, and other 
  magical means of defying gravity do not work within the maze.
  The door to the shrine of the Ancients is trapped with a falling floor 
  stones trap that causes the stones to drop out of the floor beneath the 
  characters in a spiral pattern from the center of the 10ft square in front of 
  the door. Characters must make a saving throw or fall into the void and 
  be lost forever.
  The Shrine of the Ancients, as it was once known, lies behind a door of 
  solid stone. Chaotic or Neutral characters must make a saving throw (with 
  a –8 penalty for Neutral beings, –16 for Chaotic) to pass through the door. 
  The door pushes easily aside to anyone of Lawful alignment.
  Within the shrine are carvings of a great battle between angelic beings 
  and a gargantuan elemental of stone and fire. The carvings tell the tale 
  of a titanic struggle. The three angelic beings are depicted hurling the 
  elemental into the midst of a small island, creating a massive crater. There 
  the angelic beings set to binding the creatures’ arms and feet with chains 
  forged from the elements of air and water.
  Floating in the center of the room within a shaft of light is a small disk 
  of purest milky jade, with a hole pierced in its center. Very fine writing in 
  the druidic tongue translates exactly to what is written upon the base of the 
  pillar of light in Area M5.
  Treasure: Letek’re (LA ‘Teck ‘Ray) stone. (New Magic Item 
  Appendix)
  Area M8:  
  Corrupted Pillar of the Ancients
  This light pillar is of a less-peaceful and more-menacing hue than the 
  others, and no Ancient is present within the light. The runes that would be 
  in the stone below have been desecrated.
  Area M9: Laboratory of the Lich
  In the center of the maze is this odd wedge-shaped construction that 
  appears to be crafted completely from an otherworldly greenish metallic 
  substance. The circular doorway is completely crafted from metal and 
  appears to pulse as you approach. Symbols similar to others found 
  throughout the monastery and mausoleum complex adorn the door in a 
  swirling pattern. The door is held with a wizard lock. Within the metallic-
  looking building is a single room that seemed to once have been a place 
  of meditation and enrichment for the Ancients that was stripped and 
  desecrated and is now the laboratory of Athransma. Bubbling cauldrons 
  and beakers line the walls of the chamber. Three curious pedestals, pulsing 
  with an unholy arcane light, stand near the back of the triangular room.
  Two of the three curiously carved pedestals are empty. The third 
  contains a small disk seemingly carved of jade about a hands-breadth 
  across which floats and gives off a malignant aura. This is one of the three 
  Letek’re stones, one that has been cursed and warped by the foul magic of 
  Athransma. In using this stone, Athransma was able to force movement 
  from the god of the island. This resulted in the destruction of the third 
  pillar of light and the death of the Ancient contained therein. With these 
  dark pedestals and the Letek’re stones, Athransma believes he can actually 
  rouse the god of the island from his slumber. If he succeeds, he plans to 
  use the great elemental as a weapon with which to conquer the world. 
  From there, his goals include placing himself in a position to challenge 
  the gods themselves and join the ranks of the deities. His problem thus 
  far has been the presence of the Ancients themselves, and the divine 
  warding over Area M7, which forbids him entrance into the chamber that 
  contains the last two stones. He has found the language of this Letek’re 
  stone indecipherable even with his magic, not knowing that it is in the lost 
  script of the druids. In his arrogance, Athransma never bothered to study 
  this simple language of the humble servants of nature.
  Treasure: Tainted Letek’re stone worth 2000gp due to its impurity, 2 
  potions of gaseous form, 2 potions invisibility, and 2 vials of poison.
  Area M10: 
  Lair of the Encephalon Gorgers
  A curious-looking door made of solid stone of an unknown origin 
  stands at the end of this section of the maze.
  Behind this locked stone portal is an odd-shaped chamber that appears 
  to be only 20ft deep and 30ft wide at its widest segment, but is in actuality 
  double that size due to dimensional warping of space. The room is adorned 
  with strange iconography of an almost alien design as well as four high-
  backed chairs surrounding a swirling pool of brackish liquid.
  Tlip Lopodi and his 3 encephalon gorger kin are servants of 
  Athransma who have joined in the curious research of the Ancients. It is 
  seldom that their kind is allowed such close scrutiny of celestial powers, 
  the encephalon gorgers eagerly absorb any knowledge they can for use 
  against these powers of good.
  Tlip Lopodi, Encephalon Gorger: HD 8; HP 38, 35x2; AC 6[13]; 
  Atk 2 claws (1d6+1); Move 6; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: haste (2/day), mind-feed (hit with both claws, auto 
  1d6 damage/round, save negates), regenerate 3 hp/round, 
  resist cold, spells MU (The Tome of Horrors Complete 234)
  Spells: 1st—charm person, magic missile (x2); 2nd—
  invisibility, mirror image. 
  Encephalon Gorgers (3): HD 8; HP 38, 35x2; AC 6[13]; Atk 2 
  claws (1d6+1); Move 6; Save 8; AL C; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: 
  haste (2/day), mind-feed (hit with both claws, auto 1d6 
  damage/round, save negates), regenerate 3 hp/round, 
  resist cold. (The Tome of Horrors Complete 234)
  Tactics: The encephalon gorgers spy on the characters through their 
  scrying pool. As characters approach the door to their lair, they attack. 
  
  241
  The isle of eliphaz
  Treasure: Among the silks and lacquered boxes of the encephalon 
  gorgers’ chamber are three metal coffers containing the following potions; 
  potion of extra healing and potion of growth. Six lacquered boxes are 
  worth 200gp each. Hanging silks of exquisite craftsmanship are valued 
  at 200gp each.
  Area M11: Tomb of Athransma 
  The characters can open these adamantine doors only with the key 
  found in a magical box from Area C3. Casting detect magic upon the 
  door reveals these words:
  “Fools you are to have come this far. Know thou that you have 
  been warned Athransma’s mercy goes only so far. Enter and be 
  destroyed says the cat to the mouse when he has tired of his toys.”
  Beyond the huge adamantine doors lies a chamber of opulence and 
  rot. The dust of centuries clings to what must have once been finely 
  crafted hangings of crushed velvet. The floor is inlaid with a summoner’s 
  pentagram exquisitely set with silver and platinum. Paintings with images 
  long since worn away lie in piles with urns of gems and precious coins 
  from antiquity, all finely covered in a film of dust. A large stone dais 
  stands in the center of the chamber, dominating the room, its stone slab 
  swirling with arcane markings over every inch. Standing in his glorious 
  rot with a bejeweled crown upon his skull is the face of evil personified: 
  the lich Athransma. A black fire glows from the empty sockets of his eyes 
  as he grasps a staff tightly in his right hand and an open book in his left. 
  Athransma’s grating voice is filled with a millennium of dust from the 
  grave as he hisses his incantations, interwoven with taunts against the 
  characters for disturbing his tomb.
  “Now, grave-robbers, there is this question: Do I slay you now 
  and be forever done with you and your meddling, or do I respect 
  such power for having survived thus far and send you on a task 
  for me, sparing your lives in return? Merciful it is said I be, so a 
  merciful fate I offer. In your quest to plunder my tomb, I offer a 
  chance for you now to choose you own doom!”
  If the characters answer that they wish to be spared, Athransma directs 
  them to Area M7, hoping that the characters find a way where powerful 
  liches and encephalon gorgers have failed, or are destroyed in the effort 
  — which suits Athransma just fine.
  Athransma, Lich (18HD): HD 18; HP 116; AC 0[19]; Atk hand 
  (1d10 plus automatic paralysis); Move 6; Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 
  21/4700; Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, appearance 
  causes paralytic fear (4 or fewer HD creatures flee), spells 
  MU18 (6/6/6/6/6/5/2/2/1), touch causes automatic paralysis 
  (no save). (Monstrosities 294)
  Spells: 1st—charm person (x2), detect magic, magic 
  missile (x2), read languages; 2nd—darkness 15ft 
  radius, detect invisibility, ESP, invisibility, mirror image, 
  phantasmal force; 3rd—darkvision, dispel magic, 
  fireball, fly, haste, lightning bolt; 4th—confusion, 
  dimension door, fear, hallucinatory terrain, polymorph 
  self, wall of ice; 5th—animate dead, feeblemind (x2), 
  passwall, teleport, wall of iron; 6th—anti-magic shell, 
  death spell, disintegrate, move earth, repulsion; 7th—
  power word stun, reverse gravity; 8th—mass charm, 
  power word blind; 9th—power word kill.  
  Equipment: ring of fire resistance, staff of power (120 
  charges), scroll of maze, 2 scrolls of teleport, belt 
  pouch, 3 black pearls (500gp each), 400gp. 
  Athransma has found through his research and the otherworldly 
  knowledge possessed of his ally Tlip Lopodi and his encephalon gorger 
  cohorts that it was the Ancients who bound the mighty Eliphaz within the 
  volcano. It is these same Ancients whose inanimate forms keep Eliphaz 
  deep in his slumber through some unknown combination of arcane and 
  divine power. The great mage Athransma made it his goal during his 
  lifetime to uncover the secrets of the Ancients, knowing that to possess 
  the power to bind a primeval god unmoving for ten thousand years is 
  true power. When age began to wear upon him, Athransma prepared 
  the proper phylacteries and performed the powerful rituals, transforming 
  into a mighty lich. Now, with an unlimited lifespan to work with, he 
  could continue his research of the Ancients and attempt to rouse Eliphaz 
  from his slumber. Failing this, Athransma seeks to twist to his will the 
  Ancients, a pair of astral devas locked for an eternity within the pillars 
  of light.
  Treasure: 15,400gp, 2500gp in gems, three golden ewers (200gp 
  each). Several old spellbooks of Athransma are on a bookshelf along the 
  back wall and contain all of Athransma’s 1st- through 5th-level spells, a 
  Letek’re stone bearing the same script as the base of the pillar in Area 
  M4, and a scroll detailing the ritual for raising Eliphaz, which mentions 
  the elemental belt.
  Athransma keeps his high-level spellbooks hidden in a special chest 
  visible only to ethereal creatures. Finding these books requires the use 
  of legend lore or some other such divination spell to uncover the magic 
  words to return the chest to the room and recover these books. The chest 
  is also trapped with a curse that triggers automatically upon the touch of 
  anyone but Athransma. Anyone who fails a saving throw loses 6 points of 
  charisma as boils spread across his face and body to spell out the words “I 
  am a thief. I stole from the Mighty Athransma!” Every page of his high-
  level spellbooks further requires a read language spell to decipher the 
  baffling script devised to stop those thieves who would delve the depths 
  of his knowledge.
  
  242
  Quests of Doom: vampires & liches
  Final Confrontations
  The following section details the possible ramifications of freeing 
  Eliphaz from his slumber, or dirty dealings with Athransma.
  The Characters Slay Athransma and free Eliphaz
  In this scenario, the characters, having defeated Athransma, use the 
  Letek’re stones and rituals described in Athransma’s personal effects to 
  raise Eliphaz from his prison in the dead volcanic cone. Eliphaz goes 
  into a rage, attacking the characters with every power and weapon at his 
  disposal. It should be noted that using the Letek’re stones in this manner 
  destroys the Ancients forever.
  Characters Free the Ancients
  After the second Ancient is freed from his pillar of light, the maze 
  of Ancients begins to rock and sway with the shocks of an earthquake. 
  Every round the characters remain within the Maze of Ancients, they must 
  succeed on a saving throw (with a –1 penalty per round spent within the 
  maze). If a save fails or a natural 1 is rolled, the individual falls over the 
  side and must then roll beneath his dexterity score. Success on the second 
  roll means he catches hold of the edge of the maze. Failure means he falls 
  down the chasm to his doom. Characters entering any chamber of the 
  maze may use teleport or dimension door to escape the maze.
  Upon escaping the maze, the characters are greeted by the sight of a 
  great rumbling from the volcano upon the Isle of Eliphaz. The Ancients 
  appear within a moment before the characters, warning them that the 
  slumbering one is awakening. The Ancients reiterate their plan if the 
  characters are still reluctant to stop Athransma and Eliphaz. The Ancients 
  intend to do their best to draw off Eliphaz; however, the characters 
  must enter the elemental’s bed of stone as soon as he rises and seize the 
  elemental belt. With the elemental belt, a druid may find it possible to 
  command the elemental to rejoin the earth forever.
  The devas offer to fly the characters over to the island of Eliphaz and 
  set them down near the volcano’s edge. But they can move only two 
  characters at a time. Ten rounds after the characters exit the Maze of 
  Ancients, the top of the volcano collapses. A huge being made of stone 
  rippling with waves of heat rises from the center of the volcanic crater 
  where the tower once stood. More than 70ft tall with massive, glowing 
  hot fists, Eliphaz roars with rage and exultation at being freed after all 
  these thousands of years. Eliphaz waves his hand and summons a fire 
  elemental, a earth elemental, and an efreeti to guard his resting place. 
  With a rumble that seems as if it could rip the world asunder, the mighty 
  god Eliphaz steps from the crater, his lava-like, glowing eyes seeking the 
  devas. He speaks, his voice a roar like a lava flow:
  “Arisen from my prison in the earth Eliphaz shall slake his 
  thirst, destruction to things green with sap and red with blood, 
  for they do not respect the living stone, and seek to shape it as 
  their own. Eliphaz shall teach them of their insolence!”
  Eliphaz moves quickly to do battle with the astral devas, ignoring the 
  characters unless he is attacked and takes damage from one of them, at 
  which time he unleashes his fury upon the pathetic mortal offenders.
  Eliphaz, Cherum: HD 24; HP 165; AC –3[22]; Atk 2 claws (2d8 
  plus 1d6 fire) and bite (4d6 plus 1d6 fire); Move 6; Save 3; 
  AL C; CL/XP 27/6500; Special: fiery aura, immune to fire and 
  poison, magic resistance (30%), regenerate (5hp/round), 
  vulnerable to cold, swallow whole. (The Tome of Horrors 
  Complete 93)
  Within the crater where the tower once stood is an island surrounded by 
  a 20ft-wide ring of lava. Three great ward stones lie broken at the bottom 
  where the elemental’s hands and feet were bound. Upon an outcropping 
  of rock is a wide belt fashioned out of rare stone. The earth elemental, fire 
  elemental and efreeti fight as a team and must be overcome before the 
  elemental belt (New Magic Item Appendix) can be won. 
  Elemental, Fire: HD 12; HP 88; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (3d8); 
  Move 12; Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, ignite materials.
  Elemental, Earth: HD 12; HP 85; AC 2[17]; Atk strike (4d8); 
  Move 6; Save 3; AL N; CL/XP 13/2300; Special: +1 or better 
  weapon to hit, tear down stonework. 
  Efreeti: HD 10; HP 69; AC 2[17]; Atk fist or sword (1d8+5); 
  Move 9 (fly 24); Save 5; AL C; CL/XP 12/2000; Special: wall of 
  fire.
  Written upon the stone where the elemental belt sits are the following 
  words written in the Druidic Tongue:
  “Servant of Nature Blessed Be through earthly magic set we 
  free, in turn to do the celestial task. Let the elemental belt set thee 
  on the path for from the earth’s great fire he comes at last with 
  Primal Fury and Volcanic Blast, perform the task lest ye sojourn 
  and bind forever the Elemental in his otherworldly home. Speak 
  the words written here:
  ‘Eliphaz return to that place of fire from whence you came! 
  Your ties to this world are torn asunder! Let the earth open up 
  and swallow you under!’
  Say three times with a commanding voice; he must obey and 
  has no choice.”
  Only a druid can use the elemental belt to command Eliphaz to return 
  to his home plane, never to bother this world again. The druid must spend 
  one round chanting the above incantation to have a 15% cumulative 
  chance to send Eliphaz home. If the character spends 3 rounds chanting 
  the incantation, for instance, he has a 45% chance of exiling the cherum 
  (15% after 1 round, 30% after 2, and 45% after 3, and so on). If he stops 
  for a single round, however, the chance drops back to 15% if he starts 
  again. Eliphaz, of course, attempts to disrupt the druid from her task if 
  he is able. At this point, if the devas are still alive, they do their best to 
  distract him as he turns to rush against the one calling the words to send 
  him home.
  If a druid shouts the incantation three times (and succeeds on his roll as 
  noted above), the earth beneath Eliphaz opens in a fiery abyss. The great 
  elemental god screams in rage and is swallowed whole in a great flash of 
  light.
  The Characters Return the  
  Letek’re stones to Athransma:
  Should the Characters return to Athransma with the Letek’re stone from 
  Area M7: The Shrine of the Ancients, Athransma cackles with glee, 
  shouting:
  “At last I have them! Now the pillars of the Ancients fall and 
  Eliphaz shall rise again and the world will see Athransma’s true 
  mercy! Thank you, fools. Take whatever you desire from this 
  treasure trove, for the treasure I now possess is greater than any 
  shining gold or twinkling of gems.”
  Athransma quickly attempts to depart the chamber via dimension door, 
  heading to Area M9. As a parting shot, he unleashes a lightning bolt 
  
  243
  The isle of eliphaz
  centered on the toughest-looking character. Once within his laboratory, he 
  begins the ritual to bring down the pillars of light and destroy the Ancients, 
  taking control of Eliphaz as his personal slave. The ritual takes 10 rounds 
  to complete, and he cannot be interrupted in this time or the ritual fails. 
  If the ritual fails, the Ancients are destroyed and Eliphaz is freed, but 
  Athransma has no control over him. Eliphaz now seeks to destroy him. At 
  the end of the 10 rounds, the roof of Area M9 disappears. The entire room 
  experiences a plane shift; it is now hovering over the volcano as Eliphaz 
  rises from his slumber, completely under the command of Athransma.
  Note: When all three Letek’re stones are placed on their special altars 
  within the laboratory of Athransma, the laboratory gains the abilities of 
  a carpet of flying with the following abilities: Size 15ft by 15ft; capacity 
  24,000 lbs.; Move 24. Only Athransma knows the command words to 
  make his laboratory fly successfully.
  All is Not Lost
  Should this unfortunate series of events take place, remember that the 
  characters may still have the box from Area C3. Simply getting back 
  to the larger island and turning the key causes the floating laboratory to 
  crash 50ft to the ground, leaving Athransma with only his undead powers 
  to protect him. Of course, there is still Eliphaz to deal with. However, 
  without the magic of the Letek’re stones to control him, he soon sees 
  Athransma as the villain. Eliphaz waits until the characters destroy the 
  lich. Eliphaz thanks them for his freedom and offers them the elemental 
  belt as a token of his respect, quickly departing the world for his true home 
  on a demiplane of fire and earth. He never returns.
  
  244
  Quests of Doom
  New Magic Items
  Amulet of the Darkstar
  When grasped or worn, the wearer can see perfectly in darkness of any kind, 
  even that created by a darkness spell. Once per day, the amulet can be used 
  to cast darkness 15ft radius when the command word “Necrodarkanum” is 
  spoken. This command word may be learned through use of a legend lore spell.
  Amulet of the Lightstar
  Twice per day the amulet of the lightstar allows the bearer to cast light. 
  Once per day the wearer can cast continual light.
  Book Of Noble Accomplishments
  This valuable tome is a boon to Lawful clerics and ruin to Chaotic clerics that 
  look upon its pages. Studying this volume for at least 40 hours (no more than 8 
  hours per day) imparts effects upon the reader. Lawful clerics gain enough XP to 
  boost the reader to the beginning of the next level of experience as well as a +1 
  boost to wisdom and charisma. Chaotic clerics lose enough XP to demote them 
  to the mid-point of the previous level.. Other classes are unaffected. 
  This tome cannot be distinguished from any other magical libram or 
  book until the writings contained within are studied. Once fully pursued, 
  this remarkable work vanishes into thin air. Those affected by it may never 
  again benefit or be harmed by examining a similar book.
  Bracers of Spectres
  These ornamental brass bracers are covered with a patina of verdigris 
  indicating their great age. Imagery depicting tombs, open graves, and 
  plundered sarcophagi are inscribed on their surfaces. Leather straps hold 
  them in place. Like many magical objects, the bracers of spectres resize 
  to fit their wearer.
  The bracers of spectres have a pair of undead spirits bound to them, 
  forced to unerringly serve the bracers’ owner when commanded. The 
  owner can call upon either spectre to appear once per day, individually or 
  together. When summoned, the spectre(s) appear to leap from the bracers, 
  manifesting before the wearer. The spectre(s) follow any command spoken 
  by the bracers’ owner to the best of their ability for up to one hour. After 
  that time, a spirit returns to the bracer until the following day.
  A spectre that suffers damage while manifested is fully healed by resting 
  in the bracers for 24 hours. If summoned before the period elapses, the spirit 
  manifests in its damaged state and does not regain lost hit points until at 
  least 24 hours have passed without it called forth. If a specter is destroyed 
  while manifested, it is permanently lost and the owner cannot replace the 
  destroyed spirit. Should both specters ever be destroyed while manifested, 
  the bracers lose their enchantment and become ordinary objects.
  Elemental Belt 
  The elemental belt consists of four very thin plates of jade, malachite, 
  bloodstone and obsidian attached to a wide belt made from various animal 
  pelts. These fine stone plates are ornately carved with symbols of the 
  four elements of fire, earth, water, and wind. When worn by a druid, the 
  elemental belt grants the following benefits:
  • A +4 bonus to strength, a +4 bonus to wisdom, and a –3[+3] bonus to AC.
  • +5 to saving throws vs. magical fire, and immune to normal flames.
  • The elemental belt allows the user to command any elemental once 
  per day. The targeted elemental has a 75% chance of falling under the 
  complete control of the druid for up to 24 hours or until dismissed by the 
  druid. This power includes elementals summoned by others, which the 
  druid can turn upon their master.
  While wearing this belt, the druid may use any of their spells while in 
  animal form.
  Entrancacor, Holy Avenger 
  Entrancacor is an intelligent holy avenger, +3 longsword, +5 vs. 
  demons, with the following abilities: at will—see invisible; 3/day—dispel 
  magic; 1/day—cure serious wounds. 
  The sword is usable only by Lawful paladins of Muir. The sword is 
  insubstantial to all others, though it can cut through them if used against 
  them in combat.
  Entranhumani, Unholy Reaver 
  The sword Entranhumani is an intelligent unholy reaver, a +3 
  longsword, +5 vs. humans with the following abilities: always active—
  avoid detect evil (detects as Lawful); 3/day—erase wielder’s memory (no 
  save, removes all memory of last 5 minutes); 7/day—cause berserk rage 
  (+2 to hit and damage); 3/day—finger of death with successful hit vs. 
  human; 2/day—feeblemind; 1/day—teleport to hands of user.
  The sword is usable only by paladins. The sword is insubstantial to all 
  others; they cannot grasp it, though it cuts through them when used against 
  them as a weapon. Note that this sword does no damage to demons! 
  Fearsome Mask of Lo-Athard
  A long-dead wizard worshipped in Witches’ Den centuries ago and 
  his followers erected a stone stele to hide an awesome treasure. When a 
  character dons the mask, it becomes almost invisible, but the wearer’s face 
  gains a more threatening aspect than it had before. The wearer’s charisma 
  score increases to 18 while the mask is worn, and the wearer can cast fear 
  and mass charm each once per day.
  Globe Of Arden 
  The Globe of Arden is a glowing gem about 12in in diameter made of a 
  milky, glasslike substance. It has the following powers:
  The globe can float around the wielder’s head, granting him a +1 bonus 
  on any attacks, damage and saves. It casts continual light at all times, 
  however. The owner cannot cancel this effect, although he can put the 
  globe in a sealed container to block the light. Doing so stifles all of the 
  globe’s other powers, however.
  3/day—The globe can deliver an electrical shock that does 3d6 points 
  of damage.
  1/month—It can cast commune with former allies of the god dead 
  Arden. These connections include Arden’s widow, the goddess Vionir, and 
  Appendix
  
  245
  Appendix
  Arn, the son of Arden and Vionir.
  1/week—The globe can cast a disintegrate beam. 
  Evil creatures that touch the globe suffer 5d6 points of damage (no save).
  Hollow Blade
  The Hollow Blade is an intelligent +2, +3 vs. undead short sword 
  that can communicate with its wielder through telepathy. In the hands of 
  any class other than a Thief, it acts as a +1 short sword. Any non-Thief 
  possessing the Hollow Blade must make a saving throw once per day or 
  act carelessly with it, leaving it lying about, or displaying it in such a way 
  that it may be easily stolen. 
  As it is forged from equal parts of positive and negative energy, 
  the Hollow Blade causes its wielder to feel charged with life energy. 
  Therefore, in the hands of an undead creature, the undead is immune to 
  turning. It also eliminates other undead weaknesses when wielded, such as 
  the vulnerability to cure spells, sunlight powerlessness, and vulnerability 
  to daylight. The last ability allows vampires to walk abroad in daylight for 
  up to 4 hours per day. Undead use the blade as a +2 weapon.
  The bearer of the blade may take a +4 bonus to saving throws vs. death 
  spells once per day because of the negative energies contained in the 
  sword.
  Letek’re Stone
  The Letek’re stones are made from a single piece of a solid jade-like 
  stone that is impossible to break. They were carved in ancient times by the 
  first Great Druid and tell the story of the traditional druidic creation epic. 
  Their value as works of art is well over 5000gp each. The magic within 
  the Letek’re stones is subsumed as soon as either the Ancients are freed, 
  or Eliphaz is deposed.
  Pipes of Minzoa
  These pipes of ivory, platinum, silver, and gold are as finely crafted as 
  one could imagine. Three magical songs can be played on these enchanted 
  pipes.
  Summon Minzoan Creature (3/day): The pipes can be played over a 
  vial of plain water to summon a number of creatures from the Minzoa 
  whose total HD equals 12 or less. These creatures obey the summoner’s 
  commands and remain for one minute or until destroyed, or until dismissed 
  by the summoner.
  Charm Minzoan Creature (1/day): The pipes can be played to charm 
  a Minzoan creature for a number of days equal to the charisma score of 
  the character playing the pipes. A charmed creature remains loyal to the 
  character so long as the character or one of its allies doesn’t attack the 
  charmed creature. The creature affected can make a saving throw with +4 
  bonus to negate the effect. The pipes are effective on Minzoan creatures 
  even though most are immune to charm effects.
  Invisibility to Minzoan Creature (1/day): This song causes all creatures 
  of the Minzoa to ignore the character for up to one hour. This effect is 
  broken if the character or one of its allies attacks an affected creature.
  Masque of the Monkey
  A masque of the monkey is a wooden mask carved in the likeness of 
  a shrieking spider monkey. The individual donning the mask gains the 
  ability to climb walls with a movement rate of 9. 
  Medallion of the Lotus Master
  The medallion of the lotus master is a rose diamond set into a gold 
  medallion. This item improves its wearer’s armor by –3[+3].
  +1 Mace of Rot Grubs
  This magical mace is carved of meteoric iron and contains a large chunk 
  of orange amber at its tip. It functions at all times as a +1 mace. If the 
  command word is spoken, however, it becomes attuned to the individual 
  speaking the word. Should this occur, the wielder can discharge a rot grub 
  from the mace once per day on a successful attack on an opponent.
  Mirror of Abyssal Damnation
  Individuals gazing into a mirror of abyssal damnation must make a 
  saving throw or have their soul sucked into the Abyss, lost and wandering 
  among hordes of demons. These individuals are instantly replaced with 
  Chaotic clones of themselves, bearing arms and equipment that are exact 
  duplicates of that which their other form bore. Individuals who are already 
  Chaotic are immune to the mirror’s effect. Destroying the mirror causes 
  the individual thus trapped in the Abyss to be lost forever. Nothing short 
  of a wish spell is able to bring them back. Killing the clone of the switched 
  character allows the trapped individual a second save to find his way back 
  to the mirror portal and escape.
  Mirror of Life Trapping
  All characters within 30ft who look into a mirror of life trapping must 
  make a saving throw or be trapped in one of its 15 extradimensional 
  compartments. If the number of spaces is exceeded, one victim (randomly 
  determined) is released. If the mirror is broken, all of the trapped victims 
  are released. The mirror’s owner can release specific cells with the proper 
  command word.
  Shimmering Lotus Flower 
  This item is pinned to the collar and worn like a brooch. It grants the 
  wearer the effect of a bless spell as long as it is worn.
  Sphere of Annihilation
  A sphere of annihilation is a globe of absolute nothingness about 2ft 
  in diameter. The object is literally a black hole in the Material Plane that 
  irrevocably destroys any matter it contacts. Unless acted upon, a sphere 
  floats in one spot, unmoving. However, a character can use his mental 
  acumen to control the weightless sphere, making it move and float where 
  he wills. The player trying to control the sphere rolls d% and adds the 
  result to any bonus he receives from his intelligence as noted in the table 
  below. The resulting number is used to determine what the sphere does 
  that round as the character tries to control it.
  Intelligence score
  Penalty/bonus
  6 or below
  –20%
  7–9
  –10%
  10–12
  0%
  13–15
  +10%
  16 or above
  +20%
  Roll
  Result
  01–20
  Sphere floats 10ft toward the character
  21–40
  Sphere floats 10ft away from the character in a 
  random direction.
  
  246
  Quests of Doom
  Roll
  Result
  41–60
  Sphere remains in place, unmoving.
  61–80
  Character causes the sphere to float 10ft in 
  direction he wants.
  81–00
  Character causes the sphere to float up to 20ft in 
  direction he wants.
  If two characters try to control a sphere, the higher number gains control 
  of the sphere for that round. A character can attempt to control a sphere if 
  he is within 40ft of it. A character attempting to control the sphere must 
  make a check each round. If he stops, the sphere hovers motionless.
  Any time it is controlled, there is a 1% chance that a sphere breaks free 
  and floats in a random direction each round until a character can reassert 
  his will over the globe (by a control result above 81%).
  Staff of the Remorhaz
  From the Northlands Saga, NS2: Beyond the Wailing Mountains
  In eons past, many dread gods rose and fell, thrown down by deities of 
  good and their heroic champions. Most of these elder gods were born when 
  the world was young, and were savage and feral, drawing their power from 
  the primordial forces of nature perverted to evil and destruction. Most of 
  these elder gods have long since been destroyed, but a few remain, sleeping 
  away the ages and waiting for the opportunity to rise again.
  One such elder god is Althunak, the Lord of Ice and Cold. His is not the 
  natural changing of the season, of the cycle of autumn, winter, and spring, 
  but instead the continual death of a perpetual winter. His cult once flourished 
  when the races of the world were young, but he was challenged and destroyed 
  by some of the earliest heroes to walk the world, or so it was thought.
  One of the abominations in Althunak’s dread horde was a great 
  remorhaz, Othroäta the Paleworm. When the vanguard of Althunak’s 
  army was broken at the Battle of Heshkar, Othroäta was slain by Ulhred 
  the Horned Paladin, who ripped out the beast’s great, faceted eye. Spiking 
  the eye on his battle-spear, Uhlred raised it aloft as a battle standard to 
  call his warriors forward. Seeing this, the great ice trolls and giants of the 
  horde’s vanguard ceased their advance, the troops behind them halting 
  and milling about in great consternation. Whereupon the warriors in their 
  ranked battalions behind the Horned Paladin gave a great cry of triumph 
  and charged, following Ulhred and his grisly standard to the legendary 
  victory on Heshkar’s blood-glutted fields, where Althunak’s horde was 
  broken and the evil god himself was thought slain.
  This battle standard, the eye of the remorhaz on the spear of the Horned 
  Paladin, is then lost to history for a very long time. It does not reappear until 
  Tourmaj’s account of the Second Battle of Aixe, at the darkest and most 
  desperate moment of the battle, in the small wood where the true King lay 
  wounded, defended by his embattled knights. As the snow began to fall, 
  Leothrand the High Priest raised the staff as a battle-standard to rally the 
  remaining forces of the king. The last charge of Leothrand Cold-wielder 
  shattered the half-demon army of the Alabastrian Heresy and brought 
  peace once again to the lands. When Leothrand’s body was recovered 
  from the piles of dead, the staff was gone. Thereafter, the Chansons of 
  Ghen describe three more instances after the Second Battle of Aixe when 
  the Staff of the Remorhaz was granted to heroes; always clerics, always 
  of Lawful alignment, always by an angelic being, always in blizzardlike 
  snow. The only change in detail is that the eye of the remorhaz seems to 
  have hardened into a multi-faceted gem atop the staff.
  The staff was most recently held by the paladins Elys and Kathelynn, 
  three quarters of a century ago, when it was broken in half in battle with 
  the Winter Prince. The two parts are assumed to be lost in the Ghostwind 
  Pass where the battle took place.
  The staff is a six-foot battle standard, which when unbroken is topped 
  by a multi-faceted gem, the Eye of Othroäta. 
  Any Lawful-aligned cleric who holds the staff is protected absolutely 
  from cold, including magical cold. On the other hand, the holder of the 
  staff is more vulnerable to fire than normal, taking double normal damage 
  from any fire-type attack. The cleric’s hair becomes snow white for as 
  long as the character holds the artifact, and if the staff is used thrice, the 
  change is permanent. 
  The Lawful-aligned cleric holding the staff can use any of its powers 
  listed below. When used, the staff pulls coldness from the air in a 10ft 
  radius around the user in a blast of violent heat; everyone must make a 
  saving throw or sustain 1d3+1 points of fire damage. Anyone in contact 
  with the artifact is unaffected.
  The staff’s powers are:
  read languages when held (at will)
  find traps (3/day)
  wall of ice (2/day),
  polymorph self (1/day)
  visions*
  *This attribute of the staff is not under the wielder’s control. When great 
  evil must be addressed, the wielder may begin having visions about it, 
  usually cryptic. This aspect of the staff is neither predictable nor constant.
  If anyone who is not Lawful-aligned takes hold of the staff, the artifact 
  defends itself ferociously, polymorphing the offender into a white lynx with 
  no more intelligence than a wild animal (a successful saving throw prevents 
  the transformation). The staff’s powers can be used only by a cleric.
  The only way to destroy the staff is to bathe it in the still-hot blood of 
  a remorhaz.
  Tome of Mind and Body
  The Tome of Mind and Body is a powerful magical text usable only 
  by monks. Studying its pages for a month grants the following special 
  benefits to the user.
  • A permanent increase of +2 to strength, dexterity, and wisdom.
  • The student gains knowledge of the secret Touch of Life and Death. 
  This new monk ability grants a monk the ability to gain the damage done 
  as temporary hit points, or she can store any portion of the hit points thus 
  gained and grant them as temporary hit points to a comrade. This attack 
  must be declared before the die is rolled. A miss means that the use of the 
  ability is wasted. This special ability is usable once per day per 3 levels of 
  monk (minimum 1).
  • Due to C’nosretep’s twisting of the words contained in the text, a 
  monk reading the tome must make a saving throw or have his alignment 
  permanently changed to Chaotic, forever losing the ability to continue his 
  studies as a monk. Only a wish or miracle spell cast upon the individual 
  can change his alignment back again.
  The Tome of Mind and Body may be studied only once in a monk’s 
  lifetime, as further study grants no more special powers or ability 
  increases. Once completed, the book loses its powers to grant special 
  benefits to any other monk for one full year, at which time another monk 
  may study its ancient lore.
  Two Edged Sword
  This longsword is non-magical +0 sword made of Osmium, one of the 
  rarest metals in the world. It radiates magic drain in a 60ft radius (similar 
  to anti-magic shell). The magic drain creates a field of anti-magic that 
  prevents all spells and magical effects from functioning within its area of 
  affect, including those generated outside and brought inside. This affects 
  all spells cast by characters regardless of class (no effect on druidic shape 
  change). All in-play spells are automatically dispelled within its range, 
  and even magic items are affected. Magic items brought within the area 
  must make a save 1/day or be permanently destroyed. The saves are as 
  follows:
  Potion—20
  Scroll—19
  Ring—17
  Rod, Wand—14
  Staff—13
  Miscellaneous Magic Item—12
  Armor or shield (add + to save per + of item)—11
  
  247
  Appendix
  Miscellaneous Weapon (add + to save per + of magic item)--10
  Sword (add + to save per + of magic item)—9
  Saves are made upon first entering the aura effect. Artifacts and relics 
  are unaffected by the drain, though must make a save (3) or be suppressed 
  while in the field. The magic drain effect cannot be nullified. The only 
  method of destruction is to melt it in non-magical fire at 3300 degrees K 
  (5480 degrees F). It is a hard, brittle, bluish-white metal in the platinum 
  group that is found as a trace element in alloys, mostly in platinum ores. 
  This is probably the largest piece of pure Osmium in the world. Osmium 
  is the densest naturally occurring element, and the sword is so heavy it 
  requires a minimum 13 Strength to wield properly.
  (Converter Note from the Shadow Frog: For those who find that the 
  destruction of all their magic items to be a tad much, please feel free to 
  remove and make the sword radiate an anti-magic shell with a 60ft radius 
  per S&W Complete Rulebook.  Further, for those that find the temperature 
  of the destructive non-magical fire between the magma at the earth’s 
  core and the surface of the sun to be ridiculous, you have my humble 
  permission to change this as well.)
  Xpatias
  Xpatias is an intelligent +3 longsword. Any Chaotic creature may use Xpatias. 
  Lawful and Neutral creatures touching Xpatias lose 1d4 points of constitution 
  each time they touch the sword (save avoids). It also has the following powers:
  The wielder has see invisibility constantly active, and the wielder can 
  cast shield twice per day.
  The sword detects amphibians within 60ft and drives the wielder to 
  wildly attack those amphibians (save to resist).
  The sword’s special purpose is to slay amphibians, including amphibian-
  like outsiders such as hezrous and greruor demons, and its special power 
  is hold monster on all hits on amphibians and amphibian-like outsiders 
  (save at –2, as per the spell).
  New Monsters
  Guardian Feline
  Hit Dice: 1 (see text)
  Armor Class: 7[12] (see text)
  Attacks: 2 claws (1d4) and bite (1d6) (see text)
  Saving Throw: 17 (see text)
  Special: nine lives
  Move: 12
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1
  Challenge Level: 16/3100
  A guardian feline is a cat, about 18 inches tall that viciously protects 
  any item or area it is placed within. A guardian feline has nine lives. 
  Each time it is slain, the feline is reborn in 1d2 rounds, stronger than 
  its previous incarnation. If slain a ninth time, it remains dead. Hit dice, 
  damage, armor class and saves increase each time it is reborn:
  Guardian Feline: HD 1; AC 7[12]; Atk 2 claws (1d4), bite 
  (1d6); Move 12; Save 17; AL N; CL/XP 16/3100 Special: 
  magic resistance (25%+), nine lives (HD, AC, Atk, save, 
  magic resistance increase with deaths).
  HD
  AC
  Atk
  Save
  MR
  2
  6[13]
  2 claws (1d4+1), bite (1d6+1)
   16
  30%
  3
  5[14]
  2 claws (1d4+2), bite (1d6+2)
   14
  35%
  4
  4[15]
  2 claws (1d4+3), bite (1d6+3)
   13
  40%
  HD
  AC
  Atk
  Save
  MR
  5
  3[16]
  2 claws (1d4+4), bite (1d6+4)
   12
  45%
  6
  2[17]
  2 claws (1d4+5), bite (1d6+5)
   11
  50%
  7
  1[18]
  2 claws (1d4+6), bite (1d6+6)
   9
  55%
  8
  0[19]
  2 claws (1d4+7), bite (1d6+7)
   8
  60%
  9
  –1[20]
  2 claws (1d4+8), bite (1d6+8)
   6
  65%
  Devil, Horned
  Hit Dice: 15
  Armor Class: –1[20]
  Attacks: 2 claws (2d4) or +1 spiked chain (2d6+1 plus stun), 
  bite (2d8), tail (2d6 plus infernal wound)
  Saving Throw: 3
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, immune to fire and 
  poison, infernal wound, magical abilities, magic resistance 
  (55%), regenerate (3hp/round), stun
  Move: 12 (fly 15)
  Alignment: Chaos
  Number Encountered: 1
  Challenge Level: 21/4700
  Among the deadliest of the infernal warriors and able commander of 
  lesser fiends, horned devils spread the rule of Hell wherever they tread. 
  These greater devils are trained and forged to be the most lethal and 
  merciless warriors in all the planes. The strike of their +1 spiked chain can 
  stun an opponent for 1d4 rounds unless a save is made. The tail causes an 
  infernal wound that bleeds continuously (1hp/round) until either properly 
  bound after combat or cured by a cleric. Magical abilities include dispel 
  good, protection from good 10ft radius, and teleport which are all done at 
  will. Also, 3 times per day each, a horned devil can conjure a fireball and 
  lightning bolt with 15d6 points of damage (save half).  Once per day, 3 
  flayer devils can be summoned with 35% chance of success. With a magic 
  resistance and the ability to regenerate, these devils are extremely difficult 
  to take down. A typical horned devil rises to a hulking 9ft tall, bears 14ft 
  wide wings, and weighs 700 pounds.
  Devil, Horned: HD 15; AC –1[20]; Atk 2 claws (2d4) or +1 
  spiked chain (2d6+1), bite (2d8), tail (2d6 plus infernal 
  wound); Move 12 (fly 15); Save 3; AL C; CL/XP 21/4700; 
  Special: +1 or better weapon to hit, immune to fire and 
  poison, infernal wound (1hp/round bleed until bound 
  or cured), magical abilities, magic resistance (55%), 
  regenerate (3hp/round), stun (1d4 rounds, save avoids).
  Magical Abilities: at will—dispel good, protection from 
  good 10ft radius, teleport; 3/day—fireball, lightning 
  bolt), summon devils (1/day, 3 flayer devils, 35%). 
  Equipment: +1 spiked chain.
  Planehopper
  The Planehoppers are an intelligent insect-like species with a bizarre 
  caste system: They are rapacious conquerors relentlessly expanding their 
  strange empires across many dimensions and planes of existence. Their 
  sprawling cities, with high spires, curving ramps, and countless thousands 
  of inhabitants, can cover entire worlds and moons in the realities and 
  dimensions that the Planehoppers have seized.
  The basic form of a Planehopper resembles a locust without wings, 
  but with an upright “torso” section. Thus, they are similar to centaurs in 
  shape: a large, grasshopperlike, horizontal segment with 4 legs supporting 
  an upright “torso” segment with 2 arms, with a head-segment atop the 
  torso. All the castes of a Planehopper hive share this body form.
  Planehopper eggs are either male eggs or queen eggs laid in a ratio of 
  at least 100-to-1. Originally, perhaps, there was no more differentiation 
  
  248
  Quests of Doom
  between the males than this, but a caste called the “vivisecters” 
  developed at some distant point in Planehopper history to adapt young 
  Planehoppers to the hive’s needs. The vivisecters use surgical procedures 
  — a combination of their innate magic, instinct, learning, and tools — 
  to shape young Planehoppers into members of the various male castes. 
  The vivisecters do not hesitate to practice their arts upon other species 
  conquered by the Planehoppers — with varying degrees of success.
  Planehoppers communicate by telepathy among themselves in a 
  symbolic language that can actually be transcribed onto paper and 
  translated by use of a read languages spell. Most overseers can vocalize 
  speech quite easily in more than one language, but most members of other 
  castes do not bother to learn the art. Being able to speak aloud is not 
  considered an honorable achievement, although it is a necessary one if 
  the hive is to communicate with the slaves it employs or to trade with 
  civilizations that are currently too strong to enslave or pillage.
  A single governor usually leads raiding parties. Queens only arrive 
  once the raiding party secures an area.
  Planehoppers are implacable enemies of the antlike formians. Different 
  castes of Planehoppers are described below.
  Planehopper, Channeler
  Hit Dice: 4
  Armor Class: 4[15]
  Attacks: short sword (1d6)
  Saving Throw: 13
  Special: project psychic force, telepathic links
  Move: 12
  Alignment: Chaos
  Number Encountered: 1 per overseer Planehopper
  Challenge Level/XP: 6/400
  Planehopper channelers look like warriors but with much larger heads 
  and longer antennae. They are able to receive mental waves from an 
  overseer and focus it into a much more powerful projection. The number 
  of times a channeler can emit this cone of psychic repulsion depends upon 
  the originating creature, not on the channeler. The channeler itself is not 
  exhausted or depleted by focusing mental powers, but the originating 
  creature has limited stamina. More than one originating creature can focus 
  mental power through a channeler, but the channeler can only emit one 
  power (at normal strength) per round, regardless of how many originating 
  creatures are ready to use it as a focus.
  There are 4 different mental emanations that an overseer or governor 
  Planehopper can project through the mind of a channeler:
  Planar Excavation: This emanation “digs” through the fabric of 
  different planes of existence or dimensions. It creates a tunnel from one 
  reality into the next, and it is through these tunnels that the Planehoppers 
  spread their rapacious empires to conquer and enslave the civilizations 
  they find on the far sides of their constant tunneling. The psychic power of 
  the digging cannot be used as a weapon, although when it breaks through 
  on the far side of a planar tunnel it explodes in a blast of magical and 
  psychic energy that disintegrates any physical material within a 50ft 
  radius of the portal (the hex containing the portal, and all adjacent hexes). 
  A channeler can emit this psychic frequency whenever the originating 
  creature — its overseer or governor — wishes, as long as the originating 
  creature maintains concentration on the task.
  Repulsion: This psychic emanation is a cone of physical pressure 60ft 
  long and 60ft wide at the end that slams all living beings 60ft away from 
  the channeler. This ability can affect anything up to 2000 pounds. This 
  means that a creature 61ft away is unaffected, but a creature 60ft away 
  from the channeler ends up 120ft away (a creature only 10ft away from 
  the channeler ends up 70ft away). Weight and size are not an issue up to 
  the limit of this ability (2000 pounds): All living tissue is moved the same 
  60ft distance. If the creature hits a solid object, the impact causes 1d6 
  points of damage for each 10ft that the target had not already been moved. 
  For example, if the target was pushed back only 10ft and hit a wall, the 
  damage would be 5d6 because 50ft of the 60ft had not been traveled.  
  Song: A channeler’s song is actually a psychic frequency rather than 
  a sound, but unless the targets are also psychic they think they “hear” 
  the actually soundless ripples of the song. The song extends in a cone 
  60ft long to a base of 60ft at its end. Anyone within this area must make 
  a saving throw or suffer 1d6 hit points of damage, drop all items held in 
  hand, and be confused (as per spell) for 1d2 rounds.
  Chirp: This projection is a needle-thin line emanating from the 
  channeler. The projection requires a roll to hit, but the target is considered 
  to be unarmored. Thus, the attack usually requires a roll of 5, adjusted 
  only by dexterity or magical bonuses to armor class. The chirp causes 3d6 
  points of damage (save for half).
  Planehopper, Channeler: HD 4; AC 4[15]; Atk short sword 
  (1d6); Move 12; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: project 
  psychic force, telepathic links.
  Planehopper, Governor
  Hit Dice: 7
  Armor Class: 4[15]
  Attacks: none (mental only)
  Saving Throw: 9
  Special: levitation, telepathic hive-bond
  Move: 0
  Alignment: Chaos
  Number Encountered: Varies, but usually no more than 1
  Challenge Level/XP: 8/800
  Planehopper governors are mostly brain. They look like a giant 5ft-
  diameter locust head floating in the air, with spindly legs and a rudimentary 
  body dangling beneath it. The head’s carapace is too small to contain the 
  massive brain, so the back is split open like flower petals, leaving the 
  pulsing yellow brain open to the air. Six whip-like antennae emerge from 
  the brain and undulate slowly in the air.
  Governor Planehoppers can levitate slightly, rising up to a height 
  
  249
  Appendix
  of 30ft, but they cannot move forward without help. They are usually 
  assisted by 2–4 Planehopper laborers that push the governor where it 
  directs. Governors are the higher officers of a Planehopper horde. They 
  can communicate telepathically with overseers over a distance of 1 mile, 
  and can communicate telepathically with other castes of Planehoppers and 
  other creatures at a range of 60ft. 
  Planehopper governors cannot attack as they have no natural weapons. 
  They can, however, focus a mental blast through a Planehopper channeler 
  (see the description of the channelers for details). The governor can cause 
  a channeler to emit one mental blast every other round, and can cause 4 
  such blasts per day. The governor must be within 500ft of the channeler to 
  use this power, although the link between the governor and the channeler 
  can be blocked by metallic lead.
  Planehopper, Governor: HD 7; AC 4[15]; Atk none; Move 0; 
  Save 9; AL C; CL/XP 8/800; Special: levitation, telepathic 
  hive-bond.
  Planehopper, Laborer
  Hit Dice: 3
  Armor Class: 4[15]
  Attacks: 2 claws (1d3)
  Saving Throw: 14
  Special: telepathic with others of same species
  Move: 18
  Alignment: Chaos
  Number Encountered: 1d6 or as part of larger, mixed force
  Challenge Level/XP: 3/60
  A Planehopper laborer is the basic, fundamental form of male 
  Planehoppers. They resemble a locust without wings, but with an 
  upright “torso” section. They are similar to centaurs in shape: a 
  large, grasshopperlike, horizontal segment with 4 legs supporting an 
  upright “torso” segment with 2 arms, with a head-segment atop the 
  torso. 
  Planehopper laborers are the bottom rung of the hierarchy. They are 
  sentient, but dull-witted, easily fooled if not mentally linked with a 
  member of one of the higher castes. Left to themselves, they happily 
  drink and gamble away their money, psychologically incapable of 
  seeing themselves as oppressed. The uncontrolled celebrations of worker 
  Planehoppers have leveled entire blocks of captured cities. 
  Workers communicate telepathically with other Planehoppers, but 
  not with members of other species. Although they have organs that can 
  vocalize words, most worker Planehoppers never learn a spoken language 
  at all since they have no contacts beyond their own hives. Planehopper 
  workers are not combatants; their most effective attack is to drop any tools 
  and fling themselves at an enemy, scratching with their short claws. In 
  some cases, they might be ordered to do exactly this, simply to delay or 
  block the enemy. Actual fighting, though, is left to the warriors and the 
  channelers.
  Planehopper, Laborer: HD 3; AC 4[15]; Atk 2 claws (1d3); 
  Move 18; Save 14; AL C; CL/XP 3/60; Special: telepathic with 
  others of the same species. 
  
  250
  Quests of Doom
  Planehopper, Overseer
  Hit Dice: 6
  Armor Class: 3[16]
  Attacks: 2 longswords (1d8)
  Saving Throw: 11
  Special: telepathic hive-bond
  Move: 12
  Alignment: Chaos
  Number Encountered: 1d3
  Challenge Level/XP: 7/600
  Overseers are essentially the squad-and-platoon level officers of a 
  Planehopper fighting force. They have a mental link with all the warrior 
  Planehoppers under their command; each warrior can thus see what 
  the overseer sees, and what all the other warriors see. This hive-bond 
  between overseers and their warriors is what makes the Planehoppers 
  such a terrifying threat to civilization whenever they appear through 
  their planar gates. Fortunately, the link is not unlimited: An overseer 
  cannot bond with more than 4 warriors at a time, and warriors cannot 
  switch in and out of different overseers’ control. The link is to the death. 
  New warriors can be added to replace casualties, but none can leave 
  once bonded to a particular overseer. The only way to separate a warrior 
  from its overseer is to kill the overseer.
  In addition to the 4 warriors, an overseer can control a single channeler 
  to receive, focus, and re-broadcast the overseer’s mental attacks. The 
  channeler (whether nearby or distant) thus serves as the overseer’s proxy 
  for mental assaults. The overseer’s mental power alone is not focused 
  enough to attack without the help of a channeler. As long as the overseer is 
  not more than 500ft from the channeler, it can project one of four different 
  mental powers through the channeler (see the channeler for descriptions 
  of these powers) every other round, up to twice per day.
  Planehopper, Overseer: HD 6; AC 3[16]; Atk 2 longswords 
  (1d8); Move 12; Save 12; AL C; CL/XP 7/600; Special: 
  telepathic hive-bond.
  Planehopper, Warrior
  Hit Dice: 5
  Armor Class: 0[19]
  Attacks: 2 longsword (1d8) or lance (2d4+1)
  Saving Throw: 13
  Special: leap to attack, telepathic hive-bond
  Move: 24
  Alignment: Chaos
  Number Encountered: 4d6
  Challenge Level/XP: 6/400
  Planehopper warriors are more intelligent than the workers. Their thought 
  processes are quite alien, however, but they are approximately as intelligent 
  as the average human being. Warriors are telepathically tied to an overseer 
  in the same way that the workers are connected to a governor. Each shares 
  perception through the overseer with all the other warriors he commands. 
  Planehopper warriors wear torso armor and plumed helmets into battle, 
  and they fight with weapons, favoring lances and longswords. A warrior 
  armed with a lance can leap as far as 60ft to attack at the end of the leap. 
  If the leap is 50-60ft long, the warrior gains a +2 to hit and double damage 
  with a successful attack.
  Planehopper, Warrior: HD 5; AC 0[19]; Atk 2 longswords 
  (1d8); Move 24; Save 13; AL C; CL/XP 6/400; Special: leap to 
  attack, telepathic hive-bond.
  — Author: Matt Finch
  
  251
  Appendix
  Protozoans, Giant
  The following are a class of creatures known to inhabit the hidden Minzoa 
  that lies just beyond the sight of men and beasts. Alchemists, scientists, madmen, 
  druids, and dabblers in the arcane arts have long suspected the existence of 
  minute beings, pointing to creatures such as lice and ticks as evidence of a world 
  much smaller than our own. The wizard Irtep found a way to enter this world, 
  where he encountered and categorized the following creatures. 
  Amoeba, Giant
  Hit Dice: 8
  Armor Class: 9[10]
  Attacks: slam (2d6 plus 1d6 acid and engulf)
  Saving Throw: 8
  Special: engulf, immune to charm, fear, and bludgeoning 
  damage, transparent
  Move: 6 (swim 6)
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1
  Challenge Level: 10/1400
  The Minzoan amoeba is a large creature that could easily fill a 10ft cube 
  if contained in that shape. The creature is semi-translucent and therefore 
  difficult to see or distinguish from water save for its slightly sticky wet 
  exterior. Minzoan amoebas live in water and die if they are away from 
  liquid water for more than one hour. 
  Amoebas are voracious eaters and may even try to devour smaller 
  amoebas. They attack by slamming their body onto their prey. The giant 
  amoeba can engulf up to four man-sized or smaller creatures at a time.
  Amoeba, Giant: HD 8; AC 9[10]; Atk slam (2d6 plus 1d6 acid 
  and engulf); Move 6 (swim 6); Save 8; AL N; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: engulf (automatic 2d6 acid, save avoids), immune 
  to charm, fear, and bludgeoning damage, transparent 
  (surprise on 1-4 on d6).
  Carnivorous Fungi, Giant
  Hit Dice: 9 
  Armor Class: 8[11]
  Attacks: 4 tentacles (1d6 plus constrict)
  Saving Throw: 6
  Special: constrict, immune to charm and fear
  Move: 3 (swim 3)
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1
  Challenge Level: 10/1400
  These plantlike beings thrive in the Minzoa, in areas with plenty of 
  moisture and humidity. They resemble copses of clear, reedlike staves 
  rising from a pool of primordial goop 15ft to 30ft in diameter. Carnivorous 
  fungi feed on other living beings of the Minzoa, trapping them in their 
  sticky strands where they are slowly devoured. 
  The giant carnivorous fungus emits pheromones in a 30ft radius centered 
  on itself. A living creature within or entering the area must make a successful 
  saving throw or be forced to move within reach of the fungus’s tentacles 
  (10ft). After a round, it can make a new save to end the effect. 
  Carnivorous fungi lie in wait for the nearly mindless creatures of the 
  Minzoa to swim or crawl through their primordial goop in search of food. 
  There the creatures become trapped in the fungi’s gluey excretions as the 
  reed staves wrap around their prey and squeeze it to death. 
  Carnivorous Fungi, Giant: HD 9; AC 8[11]; Atk 4 tentacles 
  (1d6 plus constrict); Move 3 (swim 3); AL N; CL/XP 10/1400; 
  Special: constrict (automatic 1d6 damage, save avoids), 
  immune to charm and fear.
  Hydrozoa, Giant
  Hit Dice: 12
  Armor Class: 6[13]
  Attacks: 6 tentacles (1d6 plus paralysis and constrict), bite (1d8)
  Saving Throw: 3
  Special: immune to charm and fear, paralysis and constrict, 
  resist bludgeoning damage
  Move: 3 (swim 6)
  Alignment: Neutrality 
  Number Encountered: 1
  Challenge Level/XP: 14/2600
  Giant Hydrozoa are humongous protozoan creatures brought from the 
  world in miniature by mad science and arcane magic. These horrid creatures 
  appear as a slender tube 10ft to 30ft long. The creature fuses one end of 
  the tube immovably to a floor or to the ground with pseudopods, typically 
  in a watery area such as a lake, stream, river, or shallow sea. The creature 
  uses its tentacles to snatch prey, injecting them with paralytic venom before 
  drawing the meal whole into its maw, where powerful acids digest it. 
  Giant hydrozoa move by drifting with the current or by propelling 
  themselves with a looping, somersaulting-type motion. 
  Hydrozoa, Giant: HD 12; AC 6[13]; Atk 6 tentacles (1d6 plus 
  paralysis and constrict), bite (1d8); Move 3 (swim 6); Save 
  3; AL N; CL/XP 14/2600; Special: immune to charm and 
  fear, paralysis and constrict (1d6 automatic damage, save 
  avoids), resist bludgeoning damage.
  Nematode, Giant
  Hit Dice: 7
  Armor Class: 8[11]
  Attacks: bite (2d6 plus 1d6 acid)
  Saving Throw: 9
  Special: immune to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning 
  damage, split with slashing damage, transparent
  Move: 6 (swim 9)
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1d4
  Challenge Level/XP: 9/1100
  Giant nematodes are man-sized flatworms that inhabit the world 
  in miniature, thanks to arcane magic and the experimentations of mad 
  scientists. These creatures are nearly transparent, making it difficult to 
  spot them until it is too late. 
  Giant nematodes are always hungry; they are driven entirely by the 
  desire to eat and reproduce. They attack by spearing their frontal portion 
  into their victims, injecting them with an acidic gastric substance, and 
  sucking the creature’s liquefied nutrients into their body. 
  Nematode, Giant: HD 7; AC 8[11]; Atk bite (2d6 plus 1d6 
  acid); Move 6 (swim 9); Save 9; CL/XP 9/1100; Special: 
  immune to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage, 
  split into two with half hp with slashing damage, transparent 
  (surprise on 1-4 on d6).
  Protozoan Orb, Giant
  Hit Dice: 4
  Armor Class: 8[11]
  Attacks: bite (1d6 plus 1d6 acid plus blood drain)
  Saving Throw: 13
  Special: blood drain, immune to charm and fear, resist 
  bludgeoning damage
  
  252
  Quests of Doom
  Move: 0 (swim 9)
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1d4
  Challenge Level/XP: 6/400
  Protozoan orbs are common in brackish waters of the microverse. They 
  typically resemble ticks with four to six limbs, but they are 3ft to 6ft across. 
  They have hooked jaws just below the beginnings of their insectlike eye. 
  Their carapace is clear, revealing the juices of their primitive cellular 
  structure within. 
  Protozoan orbs feast on carrion and vegetable matter, though they are 
  not above attempting to devour small, live prey that crosses their path. 
  Their primary form of travel is by slurping water in through their mouth 
  and jetting it out through their hind end, which gives them a jerky, flitting 
  movement. They are common prey of hydrozoa and giant nematodes. 
  Protozoan Orb, Giant: HD 4; AC 8[11]; Atk bite (1d6 plus 1d6 
  acid plus blood drain); Move 0 (swim 9); Save 13; CL/XP: 
  6/400; Special: blood drain (1d6 plus 1d6 acid per round), 
  immune to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage. 
  Sporozoan, Giant
  Hit Dice: 6
  Armor Class: 8[11]
  Attacks: 4 tentacles (1d6 plus disease)
  Saving Throw: 11
  Special: disease, immune to charm and fear, resist 
  bludgeoning damage
  Move: 3 (swim 6)
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1d4
  Challenge Level/XP: 8/800
  These foul creatures of the Minzoa appear as man-sized blobs of 
  gelatinous matter surrounded by four tentacles. The tentacles are used for 
  mobility and to attack. A creature hit by a tentacle must make a saving 
  throw or contract a virulent, fast-acting disease that reduces constitution 
  1d4 points each day until cured. The disease can be cured with a cure 
  disease spell. They are typically found near the corpses of creatures that 
  died recently from the sporozoans’ disease or in filthy, dead matter, as 
  such corpses are breeding grounds for sporozoans. The creatures hibernate 
  in a hardened cyst until agitated or roused by proximity to other living 
  organisms. 
  Sporozoan, Giant: HD 6; AC 8[11]; Atk 4 tentacles (1d6 plus 
  disease); Move 3 (swim 6); Save 11; CL/XP 8/800; Special: 
  disease (1d4 constitution points/day, save avoids), immune 
  to charm and fear, resist bludgeoning damage.
  Tardigrade, Giant
  Hit Dice: 10
  Armor Class: 6[13]
  Attacks: 4 claws (1d6), bite (1d8)
  Saving Throw: 5
  Special: immune to charm and fear, rend (2+ claws hit, 
  extra 1d8 damage), resist cold and fire
  Move: 9 (swim 6)
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Number Encountered: 1
  Challenge Level/XP: 11/1700
  Giant tardigrades, also known as water bears, look like a cross between 
  a hairless bear and a caterpillar. The creatures stand 10ft tall and weigh 
  1400 lbs. The body of the giant tardigrade is a grayish-pink, though some 
  run to gray-green. Their body is slightly segmented and has eight legs, 
  four of which may be used to attack their prey. Their skin is thick and 
  loose after the fashion of the rhinoceros, and sloughs off damage easily, 
  affording them an excellent armor class. 
  Commonly they are found in water, though they can be found in almost 
  any extreme climate. Giant tardigrades have been brought to the world 
  through a mixture of alchemy, mad science, magic, and the occasional 
  druid gone wrong. Tardigrades are some of the hardiest creatures on the 
  planet. They seem to hardly notice extreme heat or extreme cold. They can 
  lie dormant for years without food or water. 
  Tardigrades eat almost anything, though they are slow to provoke and 
  hard to anger. When engaged, they attack with their four front claws and 
  their circular maw filled with razor-sharp teeth. 
  Tardigrade, Giant: HD 10; AC 6[13]; Atk 4 claws (1d6), bite 
  (1d8); Move 9 (swim 6); Save 5; CL/XP 11/1700; Special: 
  immune to charm and fear, rend (2+ claws hit, extra 1d8 
  damage), resist cold and fire.
  Snow-Serpent
  Hit Dice: 2
  Armor Class: 6
  Attacks: bite (1d6 plus poison)
  Saving Throw: 16
  Special: freezing poison
  Move: 12
  Alignment: Neutrality
  Challenge Level/XP: 4/120
  Snow-serpents are snakes covered in thick fur, mottled grey and white. 
  Seldom found in climes warmer than tundra, their element is the snow. 
  They slither through the deep drifts of arctic and mountain regions, 
  surfacing to lash out with fangs that drip deadly venom, a poison to freeze 
  the very blood. Anyone bitten by a snow-serpent must make a saving 
  throw. If the saving throw succeeds, the victim takes only 1d3 points of 
  damage from the intense cold of the bite (in addition to the normal damage 
  from the bite itself). If the saving throw fails, however, the victim’s blood 
  begins to freeze. The freezing process takes 1d4+4 rounds to reach the 
  heart, at which time the victim must make a second saving throw each 
  round or die. If the character makes a total of 3 successful saving throws, 
  the character’s blood warms back up and the poison has no further effect. 
  There is no immunity to the bite; a second bite has the same consequences 
  as the first.
  Occasionally, in tundras or areas where a great deal of variation occurs 
  in temperature, the fur of a snow-serpent is mottled green until the snow 
  begins to fall.
  The pelt of a snow-serpent is valuable and can fetch as much as 100gp 
  for a white pelt, or 200gp for a mottled green pelt.
  
  253
  Legal Appendix
  Designation of Product Identity: The following items are hereby designated as 
  Product Identity as provided in section 1(e)
  of the Open Game License: Any and all material or content that could be claimed 
  as Product Identity pursuant to section 1(e), below, is hereby claimed as product 
  identity, including but not limited to: 1. The name “Frog God Games” as well as 
  all logos and identifying
  marks of Frog God Games, LLC, including but not limited to the Frog God logo 
  and the phrase “Adventures worth winning,” as well as the trade dress of Frog God 
  Games products; 2. The product name “Quests of Doom,” as well as any and all 
  Frog God Games product names referenced in the work; 3. All artwork, illustra-
  tion, graphic design, maps, and cartography, including any text contained within 
  such artwork, illustration, maps or cartography; 4. The proper names, personality, 
  descriptions and/or motivations of all artifacts, characters, races, countries, geo-
  graphic locations, plane or planes of existence, gods, deities, events, magic items, 
  organizations and/or groups unique to this book, but not their stat blocks or other 
  game mechanic descriptions (if any), and also excluding any such names when 
  they are included in monster, spell or feat names. 5. Any other content previously 
  designated as Product Identity is hereby designated as Product Identity and is used 
  with permission and/or pursuant to license.
  This printing is done under version 1.0a of the Open Game License, below. 
  Notice of Open Game Content: This product contains Open Game Content, as 
  defined in the Open Game License, below. Open Game Content may only be Used 
  under and in terms of the Open Game License.
  Designation of Open Game Content: All text within this product—excluding any 
  text on the inside or outside of the front or back cover or on the Credits page—is 
  hereby designated as Open Game Content, subject to the Product Identity designa-
  tion included in this Legal Appendix. 
  Use of Content from Tome of Horrors Complete: This product contains or refer-
  ences content from the Tome of Horrors Complete and/or other monster Tomes by 
  Frog God Games. Such content is used by permission and an abbreviated Section 
  15 entry has been approved. Citation to monsters from the Tome of Horrors Com-
  plete or other monster Tomes must be done by citation to that original work.
  OPEN GAME LICENSE Version 1.0a The following text is the property of Wiz-
  ards of the Coast, Inc. and is Copyright 2000 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. (“Wiz-
  ards”). All Rights Reserved. 
  1. Definitions: (a) “Contributors” means the copyright and/or trademark owners 
  who have contributed Open Game Content; (b) “Derivative Material” means copy-
  righted material including derivative works and translations (including into other 
  computer languages), potation, modification, correction, addition, extension, up-
  grade, improvement, compilation, abridgment or other form in which an existing 
  work may be recast, transformed or adapted; (c) “Distribute” means to reproduce, 
  license, rent, lease, sell, broadcast, publicly display, transmit or otherwise distrib-
  ute; (d) “Open Game Content” means the game mechanic and includes the meth-
  ods, procedures, processes and routines to the extent such content does not embody 
  the Product Identity and is an enhancement over the prior art and any additional 
  content clearly identified as Open Game Content by the Contributor, and means any 
  work covered by this License, including translations and derivative works under 
  copyright law, but specifically excludes Product Identity; (e) “Product Identity” 
  means product and product line names, logos and identifying marks including trade 
  dress; artifacts; creatures; characters; stories, storylines, plots, thematic elements, 
  dialogue, incidents, language, artwork, symbols, designs, depictions, likenesses, 
  formats, poses, concepts, themes and graphic, photographic and other visual or 
  audio representations; names and descriptions of characters, spells, enchantments, 
  personalities, teams, personas, likenesses and special abilities; places, locations, 
  environments, creatures, equipment, magical or supernatural abilities or effects, 
  logos, symbols, or graphic designs; and any other trademark or registered trade-
  mark clearly identified as Product identity by the owner of the Product Identity, 
  and which specifically excludes the Open Game Content; (f) “Trademark” means 
  the logos, names, mark, sign, motto, designs that are used by a Contributor to iden-
  tify itself or its products or the associated products contributed to the Open Game 
  License by the Contributor; (g) “Use”, “Used” or “Using” means to use, Distrib-
  ute, copy, edit, format, modify, translate and otherwise create Derivative Material 
  of Open Game Content; (h) “You” or “Your” means the licensee in terms of this 
  agreement.
  2. The License: This License applies to any Open Game Content that contains a 
  notice indicating that the Open Game Content may only be Used under and in terms 
  of this License. You must affix such a notice to any Open Game Content that you 
  Use. No terms may be added to or subtracted from this License except as described 
  by the License itself. No other terms or conditions may be applied to any Open 
  Game Content distributed using this License.
  3. Offer and Acceptance: By Using the Open Game Content You indicate Your 
  acceptance of the terms of this License.
  4. Grant and Consideration: In consideration for agreeing to use this License, the 
  Contributors grant You a perpetual, worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license 
  with the exact terms of this License to Use, the Open Game Content.
  5. Representation of Authority to Contribute: If You are contributing original 
  material as Open Game Content, You represent that Your Contributions are Your 
  original creation and/or You have sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by 
  this License.
  6. Notice of License Copyright: You must update the COPYRIGHT NOTICE por-
  tion of this License to include the exact text of the COPYRIGHT NOTICE of any 
  Open Game Content You are copying, modifying or distributing, and You must add 
  the title, the copyright date, and the copyright holder’s name to the COPYRIGHT 
  NOTICE of any original Open Game Content you Distribute.
  7. Use of Product Identity: You agree not to Use any Product Identity, includ-
  ing as an indication as to compatibility, except as expressly licensed in another, 
  independent Agreement with the owner of each element of that Product Identity. 
  You agree not to indicate compatibility or co-adaptability with any Trademark or 
  Registered Trademark in conjunction with a work containing Open Game Content 
  except as expressly licensed in another, independent Agreement with the owner of 
  such Trademark or Registered Trademark. The use of any Product Identity in Open 
  Game Content does not constitute a challenge to the ownership of that Product 
  Identity. The owner of any Product Identity used in Open Game Content shall retain 
  all rights, title and interest in and to that Product Identity.
  8. Identification: If you distribute Open Game Content You must clearly indicate 
  which portions of the work that you are distributing are Open Game Content.
  9. Updating the License: Wizards or its designated Agents may publish updated 
  versions of this License. You may use any authorized version of this License to 
  copy, modify and distribute any Open Game Content originally distributed under 
  any version of this License.
  10. Copy of this License: You MUST include a copy of this License with every 
  copy of the Open Game Content You Distribute.
  11. Use of Contributor Credits: You may not market or advertise the Open Game 
  Content using the name of any Contributor unless You have written permission 
  from the Contributor to do so.
  12. Inability to Comply: If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms 
  of this License with respect to some or all of the Open Game Content due to statute, 
  judicial order, or governmental regulation then You may not Use any Open Game 
  Material so affected.
  13. Termination: This License will terminate automatically if You fail to comply 
  with all terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware 
  of the breach. All sublicenses shall survive the termination of this License.
  14. Reformation: If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such 
  provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable.
  15. COPYRIGHT NOTICE
  Open Game License v 1.0a Copyright 2000, Wizards of the Coast, Inc.
  System Reference Document Copyright 2003, Wizards of the Coast, Inc.; Authors 
  Jonathan Tweet, Monte Cook, Skip Williams, based on original material by E. Gary 
  Gygax and Dave Arneson.
  Swords & Wizardry Core Rules, Copyright 2008, Matthew J. Finch
  Swords & Wizardry Complete Rules, Copyright 2010, Matthew J. Finch
  Swords & Wizardry Monstrosities, Copyright 2013, Matthew J. Finch
  The Tome of Horrors Complete, Copyright 2011, Necromancer Games, Inc., pub-
  lished and distributed by Frog God Games; Author Scott Green.
  The Tome of Horrors IV, Copyright 2013, Frog God Games, LLC; Authors: 
  Erica Balsley, Casey Christofferson, Jim Collura, Matthew J. Finch, Lance 
  Hawvermale, Patrick Lawinger, Phillip Larwood, and Bill Webb.
  Quests of Doom, Copyright 2015, Frog God Games, LLC; Authors: Casey 
  W. Christopherson, J. Collura, Michael Curtis, Matt Finch, Scott Greene, Ed 
  Greenwood, Clark Peterson, James M. Ward, Bill Webb, Skip Williams, Steven 
  Winter
  
  254
  Notes
  $24.99
  ISBN 978-1-62283-228-6
  
SOURCE: textdata/thevault/Dungeons & Dragons [multi]/3rd Party/Original D&D/Swords & Wizardry/Modules/Quests of Doom.pdf